Docucolor 12/Dccs50 Service Manual

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Service Manual
January 2005
CAUTION Certain components in the DocuColor 12/ DCCS50 are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge. Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
NOTICE
While every care has been taken in the preparation of this manual, no liability will be accepted by Xerox Corporation arising out of any inaccuracies or omissions.
NOTICE
All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for informational purposes only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by certified product trained service personal only. Xerox does not warrant or represent that such documentation is complete, nor does Xerox represent or warrant that it will notify or provide to such customer any future changes to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or modules, components or parts of such equipment may affect the warranty offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You should consult the applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer or third party provided service. If the customer services such equipment, modules, components or parts thereof, the customer releases Xerox from any and all liability for the customer actions, and the customer agrees to indemnify, defend and hold Xerox harmless from any third party claims which arise directly or indirectly from such service.
Prepared by: Xerox Corporation 800 Phillips Road Bldg. 845-17S Webster, New York 14580-9791 USA 2001, 2002, 2004 by Xerox Corporation. Xerox and The Document Company are trademarks of Xerox Corporation. Xerox product names mentioned in this publication are trademarks of the XEROX CORPORATION.
Introduction
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... About This Documentation.............................................................................................. Organization.................................................................................................................... Reference Symbology..................................................................................................... AC and DC Voltage Nomenclature ................................................................................. Translated WARNINGS .................................................................................................. iii iv iv vi ix ix
Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 i
Introduction
Introduction
1/05 ii
Introduction
Safety WARNING
The DocuColor 12/DCCS50 contains an invisible laser. There is no visual indication that the laser beam is present. During servicing, the DocuColor 12/DCCS50 is a Class 3B product because of the invisible laser. the laser beam could cause eye damage if looked at directly. Service procedures must be followed exactly as written without change. The service representative must observe the established local laser safety precautions when servicing the DocuColor 12/DCCS50. Do not place tools with a reflective surface in the area of the Charge Corotron or the ROS opening. Do not look in the area of the Charge Corotron or the ROS window if the power is On and the laser is energized with the Toner Cartridge Unit removed. The following symbol and statement appear on a label in the machine when the Toner Cartridge Cover or the Toner Cartridge Unit are removed. The symbol by itself, or the symbol and the statement may also appear in the service documentation and in the training program. When this symbol appears, the service representative is warned that conditions exist that could result in exposure to the laser beam.
Photoreceptor Drum Light Shock

CAUTION Protect the Photoreceptor Drum from the light by covering it with the bag when the Drum is removed from the machine or exposed to light. The bag is stored in the Tray 1 storage compartment. The Drum can be damaged by light shock.
Electrostatic Discharge Damage

CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when accessing parts of the machine other than those normally accessed by the operator. The Kit and procedures must be used even though PWBs are not touched directly. Components of the machine can be damaged by electrostatic discharge.
Toner, Developer and Drum

CAUTION Do not store the Toner, the Developer, or the Drum in the service vehicle.
Disconnecting and Reconnecting Electrical Connectors.

CAUTION Disconnecting and reconnecting electrical connectors while power is On can cause damage to PWBs and other electrical components. Always switch OFF power before disconnecting or reconnecting electrical connectors.
WARNING
Do not try to bypass any laser interlocks for any reason. Permanent eye damage could result if the laser is accidentally directed into your eye.
Figure 1 Laser Hazard Symbol Laser Hazard Statement DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. CAUTION The use of controls or adjustments other than those specified in the Laser Safety Training Program may result in an exposure to dangerous laser radiation. For additional information, review the Laser Safety Training program.
1/05 iii
Introduction
About This Documentation

This Service Manual is part of the multinational documentation system for the DocuColor 12/ DCCS50 Machine. This manual will help in the isolation and repair of faults that may occur in the machine.
Organization
In printed form, this publication is divided into ten sections, which are described below. The electronic format is also divided into the same ten sections for editing purposes; however, these sections are rarely apparent to the user. For ease of access, the information contained in the principles of operation, installation, and training are electronically integrated.
Section 1. Service Call Procedures

This section contains the following: Call Flow Initial Actions Repair Actions Detailed Maintenance Activities Cleaning Procedures Final Actions Service Log
Call Flow Call Flow is a summary of the sequence of the major activities of the service call procedures. Initial Actions The purpose of the Initial Actions is to gather information about the service call and the condition of the machine and to classify the information. Repair Actions This is the overall procedure to diagnose and repair problems. Detailed Maintenance Activities This section provides the information needed for the High Frequency Service Items (HFSI). Cleaning Procedures This section provides the information needed to clean the DocuColor 12/DCCS50. Final Actions The Final Actions are intended to ensure that the DocuColor 12/DCCS50 is operating correctly and is in good condition when it is returned to the customer. Service Log A master Service Log sheet is provided to be copied and used by the service representative.
Section 2. Status Indicator Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs)

This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair the faults other than the image quality faults. When using a RAP, always exit the procedure when the fault is fixed. Do not perform the remaining steps.
Introduction
1/05 iv
Section 3. Image Quality Repair Analysis Procedures (IQ RAPs)

This section contains the Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) necessary to repair the image quality faults. When using a RAP, always exit the procedure when the fault is fixed. Do not perform the remaining steps.
Section 4. Repairs and Adjustments

This section contains the repair and adjustment procedures for the DocuColor 12/DCCS50.
Section 5. Parts List

This section contains the detailed Parts List for the DocuColor 12/DCCS50.
Section 6. General Procedures

This section contains General Procedures, Diagnostic Procedures, Product Specifications, and Tools and Supplies information.
Section 7. Wiring Data

This section contains the Plug/Jack Listings, Plug/Jack Location Drawings, PWB Location Diagrams, Power Distribution Wirenets, and the Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs). NOTE: Chain 1 of the BSDs shows the generation of power. The Power Distribution Wirenets show how the power is distributed to the machine.
Section 8. Accessories / Options

This section contains a separate service document for each of the accessories. The service representative will be directed to Section 8 from the main service documentation when it is appropriate.
Section 9. Installation and Removal

This section contains instructions for installation of the machine at the customers site. It also contains instructions for repacking and removal when appropriate.
Section 10. Principles of Operations

This section contains information on how the machine operates.
1/05 v
Introduction
Reference Symbology
Figure 1 General Information
Introduction
1/05 vi
1/05 vii
Introduction
Introduction
1/05 viii
AC and DC Voltage Nomenclature

ACH is used in the documentation to designate the hot, or power, side of the AC line. The voltage level on this line depends upon the local AC power supplied to the machine.
Translated WARNINGS
WARNING
For some installations, (typically Xerox Europe), the ACN line may NOT be neutral. It may have power applied. Check local power standards. ACN is used in the documentation to designate the neutral side of the AC line. The voltage level on this line depends upon the local AC power supplied to the machine.
DC Voltage Levels
DC voltages should be measured between the test point and the machine frame, unless instructed otherwise. The table below shows the values of the voltages. Table 1 DC Voltage Levels Nominal Voltage +5 VDC +3.5 VDC +12 VDC -12 VDC +13.3 VDC +24 VDC Logic State H L H L H L H L H L H L Actual Voltage Ranges +4.5 to +5.3 VDC 0.0 to +1.0 VDC +3.0 to +4.2 VDC 0.0 to +1.0 VDC +10.0 to +13.2 VDC 0.0 to +1.5 VDC -10.0 to -13.2 VDC 0.0 to -1.5 VDC +11.0 to +14.2 VDC 0.0 to +1.5 VDC +22.0 to +25.7 VDC 0.0 to +3.0 VDC
1/05 ix
Introduction
Publication Information WARNING

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions documentation, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to subpart J of part 15 of FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to correct the interference. DANGER: Cet quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre des frquences radio, et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis selon les recommandations du manuel d'instructions, peut causer des interfrences aux communications radio. Il a t test et jug conforme aux limites des systmes de catgorie A, conformment la partie 15 de l'alina J des rglements FCC, tablis pour protger contre de telles interfrences pendant le fonctionnement en milieu commercial. Dans une zone rsidentielle, il peut causer des interfrences; dans ce cas, l'utilisateur devra corriger le problme ses propres frais.
WARNING
Do not try to bypass any laser interlocks for any reason. Permanent eye damage could result if the laser is accidentally directed into your eye. DANGER: Ne pas essayer de shunter les contacts de scurit laser, quelle que soit la raison. Si le faisceau laser est dirig accidentellement vers les yeux il peut en rsulter des lsions oculaires permanentes. AC and DC Voltage Nomenclature
WARNING
For some installations (typically Xerox Europe), the ACN line may NOT be neutral. It may have power applied. Check local power standards. DANGER: Lors de certaines installations (particulirement en Europe), le neutre peut avoir une faible tension (10 20 volts). Vrifier l'alimentation client.
3 Image Quality RAPs

Image Quality RAPs IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure
Introduction
Introduction
WARNING WARNING
Electrocution Hazard! Do not disconnect the red lead labeled \nC (Charge Supply Wire). This wire carries over 8000VDC. DANGER: Risque d'lectrocution! Ne pas dconnecter le fil rouge identifi \nC (fil d'alimentation de charge). Une tension de plus de 8000 VCC est prsente. IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP
The DocuColor 12/DCCS50 contains an invisible laser. There is no visual indication that the laser beam is present. During servicing, the DocuColor 12/DCCS50 is a Class 3B product because of the invisible laser. the laser beam could cause eye damage if looked at directly. Service procedures must be followed exactly as written without change. The service representative must observe the established local laser safety precautions when servicing the DocuColor 12/DCCS50. Do not place tools with a reflective surface in the area of the Charge Corotron or the ROS opening. Do not look in the area of the Charge Corotron or the ROS window if the power is On and the laser is energized with the Toner Cartridge Unit removed. DANGER: DocuColor 12/DCCS50 contient un faisceau laser invisible et aucune indication visible signale la prsence du faisceau laser. De ce fait le produit est class 3B pour tout ce qui concerne la maintenance. L'exposition directe des yeux au faisceau laser peut entraner des lsions visuelles. Les procdures de maintenance doivent tre ralises sans aucun changement comme indiqu dans la documentation. Le reprsentant Xerox lors d'interventions sur DocuColor 12/DCCS50 doit respecter les consignes de scurit locales concernant les faisceaux laser. Ne pas placer d'objet rflchissant dans la zone du corotron de charge ou de la fentre du ROS. Ne pas intervenir dans la zone du corotron de charge ou de la fentre du ROS lorsque la machine est sous tension et que le laser est en fonctionnement quand le module cartouche toner est enlev. The following symbol and statement appear on a label in the machine when the Toner Cartridge Cover or the Toner Cartridge Unit are removed. The symbol by itself, or the symbol and the statement may also appear in the service documentation and in the training program. When this symbol appears, the service representative is warned that conditions exist that could result in exposure to the laser beam. DANGER: Ces symboles et instructions sont indiqus sur des tiquettes dans la machine quand la cartouche toner ou le module toner est retir. Dans la documentation technique et dans le manuel de formation ces informations sont indiques. Quand ce symbole s'affiche le reprsentant Xerox est prvenu des risques encourus concernant une exposition au rayon laser. Introduction 1/05 x
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. DANGER: Risque de choc lectrique. Dans la procdure suivante, des circuits de haute tension CC doivent tre tests. Faire trs attention en vrifiant ces circuits. Ne pas toucher le multimtre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits. IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. DANGER: Risque de choc lectrique. Dans la procdure suivante, des circuits de haute tension CC doivent tre tests. Faire trs attention en vrifiant ces circuits. Ne pas toucher le multimtre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits. IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. DANGER: Risque de choc lectrique. Dans la procdure suivante, des circuits de haute Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
tension CC doivent tre tests. Faire trs attention en vrifiant ces circuits. Ne pas toucher le multimtre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits. IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 2. PAPER TRANSPORT REP 2.1.1 Tray 1 Set Sensor
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. DANGER: Risque de choc lectrique. Dans la procdure suivante, des circuits de haute tension CC doivent tre tests. Faire trs attention en vrifiant ces circuits. Ne pas toucher le multimtre ou ses fils pendant les tests des circuits. IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP
WARNING
Turn the power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.1.2 Tray 2/3/4 Size Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.4.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feeder
WARNING
Failure to operate ALL the dC330 output components listed below will result in permanent damage to the photoreceptor. DANGER: dfaut de faire fonctionner TOUS les lments de sortie dC330 numrs cidessous, le photorcepteur sera endommag dfinitivement.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.5.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly
4 Repairs and Adjustments

REPAIRS 1. DRIVE REP 1.3.1 Belt (Developer Drive)
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 1.4.1 Belt (2nd BTR, Auger)
REP 2.6.1 Feed Lift Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.6.2 Retard Roll
WARNING
Turn the power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 1.5.1 Tray 5/Regi. /Tray 1 Take Away Drive
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.7.1 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 1.6.1 Exit Drive
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.7.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed T/A Clutch
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 1.6.2 Fuser Drive
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.7.3 T/A Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 xi
Introduction
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.1 Tray 1 Feed-out Sensor, T/A Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.15.2 Regi. Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed-out Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.15.3 Regi. Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.9.1 Tray 5
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.16.1 Pre Regi. Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.11.1 Tray 5 Nudger Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.16.2 Pre Regi. Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.11.2 Tray 5 Feed Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.17.1 Vacuum Transport
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.12.1 Tray 5 Lift Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.17.2 Vacuum Transport Belt
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.12.2 Tray 5 Retard Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.21.1 Duplex Path Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.14.1 Regi. Unit
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.21.2 Duplex Out Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.15.1 Regi. Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.21.3 Duplex Belt 1/2
Introduction
1/05 xii
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.23.1 Inverter 1
REP 3.3.1 Carriage Cables
WARNING
Turn power off disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 3.3.2 Carriage Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.23.2 Inverter 2
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 3.4.1 Exposure Lamp
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.24.1 Inverter Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 3.4.2 Lamp Wire Harness
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.24.2 Release Solenoid
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 3.5.1 IPS Chassis
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.26.1 Exit Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 4. ROS REP 4.1.1 ROS
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 3. IIT REP 3.1.1 Platen Glass
WARNING
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 3.1.2 IIT Opening/Closing
5. XEROGRAPHICS REP 5.1.1 Erase Lamp
WARNING WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 5.3.1 Drum Unit
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 3.2.1 CCD PWB
WARNING WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 5.3.3 Cleaning Brush Introduction
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 xiii
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 5.3.4 Cleaning Blade
REP 6.1.4 Bias Brush
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.2.1 Toner Cartridge Unit
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 5.4.1 Charge Corotron
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.3.1 Toner Cartridge Housing (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 5.4.2 PCC Wire
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.3.2 Cartridge/Dispense Motor (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 5.5.1 Waste Toner Auger
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.4.1 Dispense PWB
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 5.5.2 Auger Belt
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.6.1 Development Housing
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 6. DEVELOPMENT REP 6.1.1 Rotary PWB
WARNING
WARNING WARNING
Do not put the Developer or Developer Unit into a fire. If the Developer or Developer Unit is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury. DANGER: Ne pas brler du dveloppeur ou le module dveloppeur. Si du dveloppeur ou un module dveloppeur est brl, il y a des risques d'explosion et d'accidents corporels. REP 6.6.2 Developer Replacement
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.1.2 Rotary Home Position Sensor
WARNING
Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.1.3 Rotary Latch Lever
WARNING
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. Introduction 1/05 xiv
WARNING
Do not put the Developer or Developer Unit into a fire. If the Developer or Developer Unit is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury. DANGER: Ne pas brler du dveloppeur ou le module dveloppeur. Si du dveloppeur Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
ou un module dveloppeur est brl, il y a des risques d'explosion et d'accidents corporels. REP 6.7.1 Rotary Auger (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 7.6.4 Contact Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 6.7.2 Trickle Auger
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 7.9.1 2nd BTR
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 7. IBT REP 7.1.1 IBT
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 7.10.1 2nd BTR Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 7.1.2 IBT Cleaner
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 8. FUSER REP 8.1.1 Fuser Unit
WARNING
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.2.1 Donor Roll Assembly
WARNING
Do not put the IBT Cleaner into a fire. If the IBT Cleaner is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury. DANGER: Ne pas brler le systme de nettoyage IBT. Si le systme de nettoyage IBT est brl, il y a des risques d'explosion et d'accidents corporels. REP 7.5.1 IBT Belt
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.3.1 Heat Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 7.6.1 Bias Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.3.2 Heat Roll Heater Rod
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 7.6.2 Drive Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.3.3 Pressure Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 7.6.3 Back-up Roll Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 1/05 xv Introduction
REP 8.3.4 Pressure Roll Heater Rod
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.3.5 Heat Roll Stripper Finger
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 9.2.2 IOT Drive PWB
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 9.2.3 Half-tone PWB
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.4.1 Web Motor/EXT-HR Retract Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 9.3.1 Power Chassis
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.7.1 Oil Pump
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 9.3.2 IOT LVPS
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.7.2 Oil Wick
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 9.3.3 Printer B3H LVPS [AP Only]
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.8.1 External H/R Heater Rod
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 9.5.1 Control Panel
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.8.2 External Heat Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 10. AIR SYSTEM REP 10.2.1 Fuser Fan
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 8.10.1 Pressure Roll Stripper Finger
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 10.2.2 Blower Suction
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 9. ELECTRICAL REP 9.2.1 Opening/Closing the IOT Control PWB Chassis
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 11. COVER 1/05 xvi Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
WARNING
Introduction
REP 11.1.1 Platen Cushion
REP 12.4.3 Feed Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 12. DADF REP 12.1.1 DADF
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.5.1 Document Feed Lower Chute
WARNING WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.5.2 Retard Roll
WARNING
The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF. DANGER: Le Chargeur de Documents est lourd (17kg). Le manipuler avec prcaution afin d'viter tout risque d'accident. REP 12.2.2 Registration Gate Solenoid
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.5.3 Set Gate Solenoid
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.5.4 Registration Sensor
WARNING
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.5.5 Size Sensors 1/2 (Rear/Front)
WARNING
The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF. DANGER: Le Chargeur de Documents est lourd (17kg). Le manipuler avec prcaution afin d'viter tout risque d'accident. REP 12.3.2 DADF Control PWB
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.6.1 DADF Belt Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.4.1 Feed Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.7.1 Duplex Sensor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.4.2 Nudger Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.8.1 Registration Pinch Roll
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 xvii
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. Introduction
REP 12.9.1 Exit Motor
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 12.10.1 Platen Belt
DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 14. OCT REP 14.1.1 Offset Motor
WARNING WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. ADJUSTMENTS 3. IIT ADJ. 3.4.1 FULL RATE/HALF RATE CARRIAGE POSITION
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. 13. MAIL BOX SORTER REP 13.3.1 Decurler
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 13.5.1 Vertical LED/Sensor
WARNING
TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG. DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRT ET DBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. 6. DEVELOPMENT
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 13.5.2 Bin Tray 1
ADJ 6.6.1 ROTARY DEVELOPMENT HOUSING POSITION
WARNING
TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG. DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRT ET DBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. 12. DADF ADJ 12.3.1 LEFT/RIGHT COUNTER BALANCE
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 13.6.1 Bin Trays 2 - 10
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 13.13.1 Decurler Rolls 1/2
WARNING
TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG. DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRT ET DBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. ADJ 12.3.2 DADF PARALLELISM
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 13.13.2 Gear and Cam
WARNING
TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG. DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRT ET DBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 13.14.1 Decurler Stepping Motor
ADJ 12.3.3 DADF HEIGHT
WARNING
TURN POWER OFF AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG. DANGER: METTRE LA MACHINE SUR ARRT ET DBRANCHER LE CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.
WARNING
Introduction 1/05 xviii
8 Accessories/Options
HCF REP 2.7.5 HCF Assembly
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.7.6 HCF Elevator Motor
DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.35 HCF Front/Rear Spring
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.36 HCF Baffle Assembly
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.7.7 HCF Elevator Long/Short Cables
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.37 HCF Feed Belt
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.7.8 HCF Brake
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.38 HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.7.9 HCF Control PWB
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.39 HCF One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.26 HCF Feed Motor
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.40 HCF Friction Clutch
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.27 HCF Feeder Assembly
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et
1/05 xix
Introduction
dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.41 HCF Feed Clutch
WARNING WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.5 Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.42 HCF TAR Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.6 Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.43 HCF Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensors
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.7 Decurler PWB
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter tout risque d'lectrocution, mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. FINISHER REP 15.1.1 Decurler
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.2 Decurler Rolls 1 and 2
DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.8 Cam Drive Shaft
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.9 Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher Cable Connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.3 Reflector and Cam
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.10 Decurler Drive Roll 2
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.4 Decurler Stepper Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du mod-
Introduction
1/05 xx
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.11 Decurler Drive Roll 1
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.18 SCT Static Eliminator
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.12 Decurler Entrance Roll
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.19 SCT Exit Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.13 Decurler Exit Roll
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.20 SCT Pinch Roll
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.14 Entrance Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.21 Finisher Transport Roll 1
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.15 Finisher Transport Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.22 Finisher Transport Roll 2
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.16 Finisher Drive Belt
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.1 Compiler Tray Solenoid
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.1.17 Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
WARNING
1/05 xxi
Introduction
REP 15.2.2 Stacker Tray Assembly
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.4 Stacker Full Sensors
DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.10 Stacker Tray
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.11 Tamper Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.5 Stacker Upper and Lower Limit Sensors
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.12 Tamper Home Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.6 Stacker Tray Paper Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.13 Compiler Paper Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.7 Stacker Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.14 End Wall Open Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.8 Lower Exit Chute Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.15 Tamper Motor Drive Belt
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.16 End Wall Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
Introduction
1/05 xxii
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.17 Eject Clamp Sensor
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.23 Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.24 Upper Exit Chute Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.18 Stacker Offset Home Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.25 Exit Roll
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.19 Eject Bracket Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.26 Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.20 Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.27 Paddle Drive Belt
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.21 Eject Shaft Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.28 Stacker Height Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.22 Compiler Cover Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.29 Unload While Run Switch
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du modReissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
WARNING
Introduction
1/05 xxiii
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.30 Compiler Entrance Sensor
REP 15.3.3 Stapler Cover Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.4 Decurler Door Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.31 Eject Paddle Home Sensor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.5 Mailbox Door Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.32 Eject Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.6 Left Lower Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.2.33 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.7 Rear Upper Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.1 Finisher
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.8 IOT Connector Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.2 Stapler Door Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.9 Finisher PWB Cover
WARNING
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off
Introduction
1/05 xxiv
the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.10 Left Upper Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.17 Stapler Position Sensors
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.11 Top Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.18 Stapler Rail Belt
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.12 Decurler Top Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.19 Stapler Position Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.13 Decurler Rear Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.20 Mailbox Drive Motor
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.14 Decurler Inner Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.21 Mailbox Drive Belt
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.15 Rear Lower Cover
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.23 Docking Interlock Switch
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.16 Stapler Assembly
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du modIntroduction
1/05 xxv
ule de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.25 Decurler Door Interlock Switch
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.28 Finisher PWB
WARNING
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.29 Finisher PWB EPROM
9 Installation
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation
WARNING
The underside of the HCF has very sharp edges! Use caution when adjusting. DANGER: La partie infrieure du magasin grande capacit (HCF) a des bords trs coupants! Faire trs attention lors de rglages dans cette zone. Foreign Interface Install Instructions Foreign Interface Install Instructions
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.30 Vertical LED and Sensor
WARNING
Power-OFF the machine and disconnect the Power Plug. DANGER: Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.31 Bin Tray 1
10 Principles of Operation
12. Finisher Finisher Power Components
WARNING
In the undocked condition, +24VDC to the finisher is NOT interrupted. DANGER: Avec les modules spars, le +24VCC au module de finition N'EST PAS coup.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 15.3.32 Bin Trays 2 - 10
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. DANGER: Afin d'viter des accidents ou une lectrocution, dbrancher la prise du module de finition. Mettre la machine sur Arrt et dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. ADJ 15.3.1 Staple Position Adjustment
WARNING
Introduction Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 xxvi
1 Service Call Procedures

Service Strategy ............................................................................................................. Initial Actions ................................................................................................................... Call Flow ......................................................................................................................... Detailed Maintenance Activities (HFSI)........................................................................... Cleaning Procedures....................................................................................................... Final Actions.................................................................................................................... 1-3 1-3 1-4 1-6 1-8 1-8
1/05 1-1
Service Call Procedures
1/05 1-2
Service Strategy
The service strategy of the DocuColor 12 copier/printer is to perform any High Frequency Service Item (HFSI) actions before attempting to repair any problems. Some problems will be corrected by this strategy without the need to diagnose them. The Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs) will be used for any remaining problems. Problems that occur in the BASIC COPIER mode will be repaired before problems that occur when using the accessories. Image Quality problems will be repaired after all other problems are repaired.
Initial Actions
Purpose
The purpose of the Initial Action section of the Service Call Procedures is to determine the reason for the service call and to identify and organize the actions which must be performed.
Procedure
1. Gather the information about the service call and the condition of the copier/printer. a. Question the operator(s). Ask about the location of most recent paper jams. Ask about the image quality and the copier/printer performance in general, including any unusual sounds or other indications. Check that the power cords are in good condition, correctly plugged in the power source, and free from any defects that would be a safety hazard. Ensure that the connector for the IDFE Wiring Harness is properly connected. Repair or replace the power cords as required. Check that the circuit breakers are not tripped. Inspect any rejected copies. Inquire as to, or otherwise determine, the paper quality and weight. The specified paper for optimum image quality with the DocuColor 12 copier/printer is 24# Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or Colotech + 90 gsm (ESG). Look for any damage to the copies, oil marks, image quality defects, or other indications of a problem. Record the billing meter readings. Enter the Diagnostics Mode. Go to the Dark Screen RAP IN SECTION 2 if the Diagnostic Mode can not be entered. Return here after repairing the Diagnostics entry problem. NOTE: If a Fault Code is displayed while performing a Diagnostics Procedure, go to that Fault Code RAP and repair the fault. Return to Diagnostics and continue with the DC Procedure that you were performing. f. Go to DC135 HFSI Table and determine what HSFI action is required based on the customer output volume. Refer to the Detailed Maintenance Activities section for the detailed HSFI information. Record any items that require action. Select the History File. Display and record the information in the Fail History, Jam History, Fail Counter, and Jam Counter. Classify this information into categories: Information that is related to the problem that caused the service call. Information that is related to secondary problems. Information that does not require action, such as a single occurrence of a problem. h. 2. 3. 4. Check the Service Log for any recent activities that are related to the problem that caused the service call or any secondary problem.

The Service Call Procedures are a guide for performing any service on the DocuColor 12 copier/printer. The procedures are designed to be used with the DocuColor 12 Service Manual. Perform each step in order.
b.
c. The Service Call Procedures contain the following sections: Initial Actions The Initial Actions gather information about the condition of the copier/printer and the problem that caused the service call. Call Flow Call Flow summarizes the sequence of the Service Call Procedures. Detailed Maintenance Activities This section provides the information needed to perform the DC135 High Frequency Service Item (HFSI) actions. Cleaning Procedures This section provides the information needed to clean some components of the copier/printer. g. Final Actions The Final Actions test the copier/printer and return it to the customer. Administrative activities are also performed in the Final Action. d. e.
Perform any required HSFI activities. Refer to the Detailed Maintenance Activities section. Exit diagnostics. Try to duplicate the problem by running the same type jobs, as the customer was running. Check the image quality in the BASIC COPIER MODE. Select the tray that is loaded with 11 X 17 or A3 paper. If unable to complete this step, go to step 5. a. Set the copier/printer controls: Output Color to Auto Original Type to Photo and Text Halftone Reduce/Enlarge Auto
1/05 1-3
Service Strategy , Initial Actions
Lighter/Darker to Auto Contrast Sharpness to Normal Preset Color Balance Normal Color Shift to Normal Color Saturation to Normal Copy Position to No Shift Variable Color Balance Normal b. c. 5. 6. Run four copies of the Color Test Pattern. Check the image quality. If the customer has identified any Image Quality Defects or problems, Go to IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP.
Call Flow
This procedure should be performed at every service call.
Procedure
The machine is a DC12 Printer. Y N Place the Color Test Pattern on the Document Glass. Make a copy from each paper tray. The Copier/Printer can copy from all trays. Y N NOTE: Not all fault codes can be displayed on the UI. Connect the PWS and launch the DC12 diagnostic tool to ensure that any fault code is displayed. Some codes will appear only the Last 40 Faults list. A fault code is displayed. Y N Go to the GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP. NOTE: Most RAPs are in Section 2, but the RAPs for Accessories are located in Section 8. Sorter fault code appear in both sections; the Chain 11 RAPs in Section 8 are for the Sorter bins of the optional Finisher - be sure to select the correct RAP when troubleshooting Chain 11 faults. Go to the RAP for the displayed fault code. Place two originals into the DADF and program a duplex job. The Copier/Printer can copy from the DADF Y N A fault code is displayed. Y N The problem is with jam recovery. Y N Check the DADF Document Sensors for debris or damage. Check the document mechanical drives and Feed Rolls for contamination, wear, damage, or binding. .Go to the OF5-1 DADF Jam Recovery RAP. Go to the RAP for the displayed fault code. Check for installed Accessories (Foreign Interface, Edit Pad, EPC, Finisher, Convenience Stapler, or HCF). Check for correct operation. The Accessories function correctly. Y N A fault code is displayed. Y N For Foreign Interface problems go to the 3-333 Foreign Interface RAP. For Stapler problems go to the ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP. For EPC failures, go to the OF3-1, Fault Entry RAP. For Edit Pad problems, go to the 02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP.
If there is a problem in the BASIC COPIER MODE, go to the Call Flow. For DC12 with a Digital Front End (DFE): if there is a problem associated with the DFE or Print mode, refer to the service documentation for the installed DFE. For DCCS50: if there is a problem associated with the DFE or Print mode, go to the OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP.
7.
If there are no problems in the BASIC COPIER MODE, go to Final Actions.
A Service Call Procedures
C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Initial Actions, Call Flow
1/05 1-4
C Go to the RAP in Section 8 for the displayed fault code.
The Image Quality of the copies produced is acceptable. Y N Go to the IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP. The machine is a DCCS50 or a DC12 C/P with DFE. Y N Go to Final Actions Send a simple print job. The Copier/Printer produces acceptable prints. Y N For DC12 with a Digital Front End (DFE): refer to the service documentation for the installed DFE. For DCCS50: go to the OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP. Go to Final Actions The Printer can print from all trays. Y N Connect the PWS. Print test pattern 99. The test pattern can be printed Y N NOTE: Not all fault codes can be displayed on the UI. Connect the PWS and launch the DC12 diagnostic tool to ensure that any fault code is displayed. Some codes will appear only the Last 40 Faults list. A fault code is displayed. Y N Go to the GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP. NOTE: Most RAPs are in Section 2, but the RAPs for Accessories are located in Section 8. Sorter fault code appear in both sections; the RAPs in Section 8 are for the Sorter bins of the optional finisher - be sure to select the correct RAP when troubleshooting Chain 11 faults. Go to the RAP for the displayed fault code. Refer to the service documentation for the installed DFE. If this does not resolve the problem, check the DDI Cables. and VSEL PWB for loose or damaged connectors. Check for installed Accessories (Finisher, Convenience Stapler, or HCF). Program jobs to check for correct operation. The Accessories function correctly. Y N Go to the RAP in Section 8 for any displayed fault code. For Convenience Stapler problems go to the ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP. The Image Quality of the prints produced is acceptable. Y N Go to the IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP. Go to Final Actions
1/05 1-5
Call Flow
Detailed Maintenance Activities (HFSI)

Procedure
1. 2. 3. Clean the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5) on every call. Check Developer Housings for loose bearings or worn shaft at every service call Enter Diagnostics and select dC 135.
4.
Perform the Service Action in Table 1 for High Frequency Service Item (HFSI) counters that are over threshold or approaching the threshold. Using the customer's output volume numbers (high, medium, or low volume), evaluate which HFSI actions should be accomplished now to avoid an additional service call in the near future. Refer to Cleaning Procedures for detailed cleaning instructions.
5.
Table 1 HFSIs ChainLink Component Feed Count Scan Count Total feeds from HCF Total feeds from Tray 1 Total feeds from Tray 2 Total feeds from Tray 3 Total feeds from Tray 4 Total feeds from Tray 5 Total feeds from Duplex Total IBT Belt revolutions Increment Criteria Threshold -1 -1 100K 300K 300K 300K 300K 80K 9999K 660K No service required - counter only No service required - counter only Replace the HCF Feeder Nudger Assembly (PL 15.14) and Retard Assembly (PL 15.15). Reset the counter. Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.5) and Retard Assembly (PL 2.6). Reset the counter. Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.5) and Retard Assembly (PL 2.6). Reset the counter. Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.5) and Retard Assembly (PL 2.6). Reset the counter. Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.5) and Retard Assembly (PL 2.6). Reset the counter. Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.11) and Retard Assembly (PL 2.12). Reset the counter. Run-to-failure Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Reset this counter and counter 009-806. Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Reset this counter and counter 009-805. Run-to-failure Run-to-failure Replace the 2nd BTR (PL 7.9). Reset the counter. NOTE: Perform GP 20 2nd BTR Service Procedure at 100K intervals 009-812 CC Assy 009-819 Transfer Trim 009-823 Bracket Assembly - Oil 009-835 Belt Cleaner Blade 009-838 Drive Roll Cleaner 009-841 Ozone Filters 009-843 Suction Filter 009-846 CC Dust Filter 009-850 Developer Housing - K 009-851 Developer Housing - Y 009-852 Developer Housing - M 009-853 Developer Housing - C 009-880 Trickle Bottle Discharge time (0.1 hr./count) 9999K 9999K Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Each color pass (4C = 4, B/W = 1) Each color pass (4C = 4, B/W = 1) Each color pass (4C = 4, B/W = 1) Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) Developer Motor ON time (0.1 hr./count) Dispense Motor ON time (0.01 hr./count) 320K 320K 9999K 1000 1000 1000 1000 200 This location does not automatically reset when CRU is replaced -DISREGARD Clean inside of Transfer Module and reset the counter. No longer used - DISREGARD Run-to-failure Run-to-failure Replace both Ozone Filters (PL 10.2) and reset the counter. Replace the Suction Filter (PL 10.2) and reset the counter. This location does not automatically reset when CRU is replaced -DISREGARD Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6). Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6). Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6). Replace Developer Housing (PL 6.6). This location does not automatically reset when CRU is replaced -DISREGARD Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 120K Service Action Required
006-801 Counter only 006-802 Counter only 007-800 HCF Feed Counter 008-801 Tray 1 Feed Roll 008-802 Tray 2 Feed Roll 008-803 Tray 3 Feed Roll 008-804 Tray 4 Feed Roll 008-810 Tray 5 Feed Roll 008-825 Duplex Aligner Roll 009-805 IBT Belt: CV, PV 009-806 IBT Belt: Cycle 009-807 1st BTR 009-808 Back Up Roll 009-809 2nd BTR Unit
Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 120K Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 9999K Total A4/LTR LEF copies (larger paper = 2 counts) 400K
Detailed Maintenance Activities
1/05 1-6
Table 1 HFSIs ChainLink Component Increment Criteria Total sheets through Fuser Total sheets through Fuser Total sheets through Fuser Total sheets through Fuser Total sheets through Fuser Threshold 80K 80K 80K 80K 80K Service Action Required Replace the Heat Roll (PL 8.3) and reset the counter. Replace the Pressure Roll (PL 8.3) and reset the counter. Replace the External Heat Roll (PL 8.8) and reset the counter. Replace the Oil System Kit (PL 8.2). Reset this counter and counter 010-814. Replace the Fuser Wick (PL 8.7) and reset the counter.
010-800 Heat Roll 010-802 Pressure Roll 010-803 External Heat Roll 010-811 Oil System 010-814 Fuser Wick
1/05 1-7
Detailed Maintenance Activities
Cleaning Procedures
Purpose
These cleaning procedures are to be performed at every call.
Final Actions
Purpose
The intent of this procedure is to be used as a guide to follow at the end of every service call.
Procedure
CAUTION Do not use any solvents unless directed to do so by the Service Manual. General cleaning Use a dry lint free cloth or a lint free cloth moistened with water for all cleaning unless directed otherwise by the Service Manual. Wipe with a dry lint free cloth if a moistened cloth is used. Feed Components (Rollers and Pads). Follow the General cleaning procedure above CAUTION Do not use a vacuum on the ESV Sensor. Carefully brush or wipe the ESV Sensor. Toner Dispense Units 1. 2. 3. Vacuum the Toner Dispense Units. Clean the sensors with a dry cotton swab. Switch power off and allow the Exposure Lamp to cool off. Using the optical Cleaning Cloth, clean the front and rear of the Document Glass, Document Cover, White Reference Strip, Reflector, and Mirror. Clean the Exposure Lamp with a clean cloth and film remover. Check the IBT Belt surface and wipe with a dry lint free cloth. If the surface is excessively dirty, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Heat Roll and Pressure Roll; 2. 3. wipe with a lint free cloth moistened with fuser oil. use a lint free cloth and oil. For heavy contamination, use the edge of a rolled up tube of paper to scrape off the chunks of toner. wipe with a lint free cloth moistened with fuser oil. External Heat Roll, Cleaning Roll, and Pickup Roll; ADC and Jam Sensors Optics Cleaning ESV Sensor
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Reset the History File. Ensure that the exterior of the copier/printer, IDFE and the adjacent area are clean. Use a dry cloth or a cloth moistened with water to clean the copier/printer. Do not use solvents. Check the supply of consumables. Ensure that an adequate supply of consumables is available according to local operating procedures. Conduct any operator training that is needed. Ensure that the operator understands that the Tools Mode should be used to adjust the default colors. Ensure that the operator can perform color calibration and print a configuration report. If necessary, obtain permission for access to the customers workstation. Complete the Service Log. Perform the following steps to make a copy of the Demonstration Original for the Customer: a. b. Load Paper Tray 2 with 8 1/2 x 11 inch (A4) or 11 x 17 inch 24# Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG) A4, A3 Colotech + 90 gsm (ESG). Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen, with the short edge of the test pattern registered to the left edge of the platen. Select Tray 2, make the following copier/ printer settings, and make a single copy. Output Color - Auto Original Type - Photo and Text Halftone Reduce/Enlarge - Auto Lighter/Darker - Auto Contrast Sharpness - Normal Preset Color Balance - Normal Color Shift - Normal Color Saturation - Normal Copy Position - No Shift Variable Color Balance - Normal c. d. e. 7. 8. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). Print a Test Page (for the printer only) (GP 13 Printing a Complex Test Page). Present the copies to the customer.
5. 6.
IBT Cleaning
Fuser Components (best cleaned when HOT). 1.
Issue copy credits as needed. Discuss the service call with the customer to ensure that the customer understands what has been done and is satisfied with the results of the service call.
Donor Roll and Metering Blade
Cleaning Procedures, Final Actions
1/05 1-8
2 Status Indicator RAPs

STANDBY POWER
1-300 Front Door Interlock Open RAP ............................................................................ 1-304 L/H Cover Interlock Open RAP ............................................................................. +3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP ............................................................................ +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP .................................................................................... +5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP.......................................................................................... +12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP ................................................................................. -12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP ................................................................................... +13.3 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP .......................................................................... +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP .................................................................................. +24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP ............................................................................. AC Power RAP................................................................................................................ Interlock Relay Failure RAP ............................................................................................ Power Save and LED RAP ............................................................................................. 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-13 2-14 2-14 2-15 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-17 2-17 2-18 2-18 2-19 2-19 2-20 2-20 2-21 2-22 2-22 2-23 2-23 2-24 2-24 2-25 2-25 2-26 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 1/05 2-1 3-535 Whole Image NG RAP .......................................................................................... 3-536 Platen No Original ................................................................................................. 3-537 Repeat NG - Number RAP.................................................................................... 3-538 Repeat NG-MAG RAP .......................................................................................... 3-539 MPE MAG NG RAP .............................................................................................. 3-541 APS NG RAP ........................................................................................................ 3-542 AMS NG RAP........................................................................................................ 3-543 Rotation NG RAP .................................................................................................. 3-550 Original Patch Not Exist RAP................................................................................ 3-560 Copy Limit Exceed RAP........................................................................................ 3-580 IOT System Timing Fail RAP ................................................................................ 3-581 Dead Cycle Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 3-600 Billing Adjust NVM Failure RAP ............................................................................ 3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP............................................................................ 3-602 Billing Adjust Half-Tone Failure RAP .................................................................... 2-28 2-29 2-29 2-30 2-30 2-31 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-33 2-34 2-34 2-35 2-35 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-40 2-41 2-42 2-42 2-43 2-44 2-45 2-45 2-46 2-46 2-47 2-47 2-48 2-49 2-50 2-50 2-51 2-52 2-52 2-53 2-54 2-54 2-55 2-55
USER INTERFACE
2-310 UI Panel Fail RAP ................................................................................................. 2-340 UI RAM Fail RAP .................................................................................................. Dark Screen RAP ............................................................................................................ Two Sided Copy Feature Not Available RAP ..................................................................
DRIVES
OF4-001 Main Motor RAP............................................................................................... OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP..............................................................................................
DADF
5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP .............................................. 5-111 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP ............................................ 5-112 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam (during Original Reverse) RAP ..... 5-113 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam (during Original Reverse) RAP ... 5-115 DADF Exit Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP ........................................................... 5-116 DADF Exit Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP.......................................................... 5-189 No Object Sensor Static Jam RAP........................................................................ 5-195 No Mix - Size Mismatch Jam RAP ........................................................................ 5-196 DADF Document Sensor Static Jam RAP ............................................................ 5-197 DADF Registration Sensor Static Jam RAP.......................................................... 5-198 DADF Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP....................................................................... 5-199 DADF Duplex Sensor Static Jam RAP.................................................................. 5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP .............................................................................. 5-275 DADF RAM Check Fail RAP ................................................................................. 5-301 Top Cover Open RAP ........................................................................................... 5-500 DADF No Originals RAP ....................................................................................... 5-501 DADF Document Size Irregular RAP .................................................................... 5-503 Miss Doc Reset RAP............................................................................................. 5-999 ADF Document Misfeed RAP................................................................................ OF5-1 DADF Jam Recovery RAP ...................................................................................
MACHINE RUN CONTROL

3-311 IOT-SYS Logic Fail RAP ....................................................................................... 3-315 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP ...................................................................... 3-317 UI/IOT Communications Fail RAP ........................................................................ 3-318 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP ...................................................................... 3-319 MailBox Communication Failure RAP ................................................................... 3-327 2nd DDI IOSS I/F Failure RAP.............................................................................. 3-328 DDI IOSS Communication Failure RAP ................................................................ 3-329 DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP.................................................................. 3-330 2nd DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP........................................................... 3-333 Foreign Interface RAP .......................................................................................... 3-340 IOT RAM Fail RAP ................................................................................................ 3-356 IOT NVM Failure RAP........................................................................................... 3-380 TR0 Fail RAP ........................................................................................................ 3-393 Half-Tone EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP ............................................................... 3-394 IOT EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP ......................................................................... 3-395 Half-Tone EEP-ROM R/W Failure RAP ................................................................ 3-396 IOT EEPROM R/W Failure RAP ........................................................................... 3-397 X ID DATA NG Failure RAP.................................................................................. 3-510 APS NG-Image Loss RAP .................................................................................... 3-511 APS NG-Not in Position RAP................................................................................ 3-512 APS NG-No Paper RAP........................................................................................ 3-518 APS Mix NG Image Loss RAP.............................................................................. 3-527 Original Change During Job RAP ......................................................................... 3-528 Platen Document Size Unknown RAP .................................................................. 3-529 AMS Mix NG RAP................................................................................................. 3-530 AMS NG RAP ....................................................................................................... Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
OPTICS
6-275 Angle Sensor Fail RAP ......................................................................................... 6-277 IISS - DADF Communications Fault RAP ............................................................. 6-300 Platen Cover Open RAP ....................................................................................... 6-312 Memory Hotline Fail RAP...................................................................................... 6-340 Pre IPS RAM Test Error RAP ...............................................................................
Status Indicator RAPs
6-345 Pre IPS EEPROM Failure RAP............................................................................. 6-355 IPS Fan Fail RAP .................................................................................................. 6-360 Carriage Position Failure RAP .............................................................................. 6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP............................................................... 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP...................................................................................... 6-389 Carriage Overrun Fail (Scan End) RAP ................................................................ 6-390 Carriage Overrun Fail (Home End) RAP............................................................... 6 391 Scan Initialize Failure RAP.................................................................................... 6-500 Lamp Not Ready RAP........................................................................................... 6-615 b* Failure RAP ...................................................................................................... 6-620 Reflection Rate Failure RAP .................................................................................
2-56 2-56 2-57 2-58 2-59 2-59 2-60 2-60 2-61 2-61 2-62 2-63 2-64 2-66 2-67 2-69 2-71 2-72 2-73 2-75 2-76 2-77 2-78 2-80 2-81 2-82 2-83 2-83 2-84 2-85 2-86 2-87 2-88 2-88 2-89 2-90 2-91 2-92 2-92 2-93 2-94 2-95 2-96 2-97 2-97 2-98 2-98 2-99
PAPER SUPPLY
7-281 Tray 1 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 7-282 Tray 2 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 7-283 Tray 3 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 7-284 Tray 4 Lift Motor Failure RAP ............................................................................... 7-286 Tray 5 Broken (UP) RAP....................................................................................... 7-287 Tray 5 Broken (Down) RAP .................................................................................. 7-340 All Tray Broken RAP ............................................................................................. 7-500 Tray out of position during Job RAP ..................................................................... 7-501 Tray No Paper RAP .............................................................................................. 7-502 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Width) RAP ............................................................ 7-503 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Length) RAP .......................................................... 7-504 Tray Size Change during Job RAP ....................................................................... 7-600 Tray 5 Adjustment Side Guide out of specified Range RAP .................................
8-172 Tray 2 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... 8-173 Tray 3 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... 8-174 Tray 4 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... 8-175 Tray 5 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 8-176 Tray 1 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 8-177 Tray 2 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 8-178 Tray 3 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 8-179 Tray 4 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................. 8-305 Tray 5 Interlock Open RAP ................................................................................... 8-306 Drawer Interlock Open RAP.................................................................................. Main Motor 2 RAP ........................................................................................................... Takeaway Motor RAP ..................................................................................................... Registration Motor RAP...................................................................................................
2-99 2-100 2-100 2-101 2-101 2-102 2-102 2-103 2-103 2-104 2-104 2-105 2-105 2-107 2-107 2-108 2-108 2-109 2-109 2-110 2-111 2-112 2-112 2-114 2-115 2-117 2-118 2-119 2-120 2-120 2-121 2-121 2-122 2-123 2-124 2-124 2-125 2-125 2-126 2-126 2-127 2-127 2-128 2-128 2-129 2-129 2-130 2-130 2-131 2-131
XEROGRAPHICS
9-271 Yellow Toner Empty RAP...................................................................................... 9-272 Magenta Toner Empty RAP .................................................................................. 9-273 Cyan Toner Empty RAP........................................................................................ 9-274 Black Toner Empty RAP ....................................................................................... 9-311 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch RAP .................................................... 9-342/9-432 2nd BTR Contact Fail RAP ......................................................................... 9-343/9-433 2nd BTR Retract Fail RAP .......................................................................... 9-344/9-434 IBT Cleaner Contact Fail RAP .................................................................... 9-345/9-435 IBT Cleaner Retract Fail RAP ..................................................................... 9-354 Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP ................................................................... 9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP................................................................ 9-356 Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP ..................................................................... 9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP ..................................................................... 9-358 Cleaning Auger Full RAP ...................................................................................... 9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP ............................................................................ 9-365/9-450 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Yellow RAP ................................................ 9-366/9-451 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Magenta RAP............................................. 9-367/9-452 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Cyan RAP .................................................. 9-368/9-453 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Black RAP .................................................. 9-369 Rotary Lock Fail RAP............................................................................................ 9-370 Rotary Release Fail RAP ...................................................................................... 9-372 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Not In Position RAP ..................................................... 9-374 Waste Bottle Not In Position RAP ......................................................................... 9-376 Waste Bottle Full RAP........................................................................................... 9-378 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change RAP................................................................ 9-379 Trickle Bottle Full RAP .......................................................................................... 9-400 Black Toner Near Empty RAP............................................................................... 9-402 Yellow Toner Near Empty RAP............................................................................. 9-403 Magenta Toner Near Empty RAP ......................................................................... 9-404 Cyan Toner Near Empty RAP ............................................................................... 9-410 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change Soon RAP ...................................................... 9-420 Waste Bottle Near Full RAP.................................................................................. 9-423 Trickle Bottle Near Full RAP ................................................................................. 9-424 Cleaning Auger Near Full RAP ............................................................................. 9-601 Humidity Out Of Range RAP................................................................................. 9-610 VPatch Out Of Range RAP ................................................................................... 9-612 TRC RADC Out Of Range RAP ............................................................................ 1/05 2-2
PAPER FEED
8-104 Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 8-105 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 8-107 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 8-109 Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 8-110 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 8-112 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 8-114 Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 8-115 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 8-117 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 8-119 Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP .................................................................... 8-120 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 8-122 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 8-135 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................. 8-139 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On RAP ......................................................................... 8-147 Tray 1 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 8-148 Tray 2 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 8-149 Tray 3 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 8-150 Tray 4 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................ 8-152 Takeaway Sensor On RAP ................................................................................... 8-154 Pre Registration Sensor On RAP.......................................................................... 8-157 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP ........................................................................ 8-158 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................................... 8-163 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP ............................................................................... 8-171 Tray 1 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP....................................................... Status Indicator RAPs
9-614 VClean Out Of Range RAP................................................................................... 9-619 VClean TRC Out Of Range RAP .......................................................................... 9-634 ADC Out Of Range RAP ....................................................................................... 9-662 LD Out Of Range RAP.......................................................................................... 9-667 VH/VM Out Of Range RAP ...................................................................................
2-132 2-132 2-133 2-133 2-134 2-135 2-135 2-136 2-137 2-138 2-138 2-140 2-141 2-141 2-142 2-143 2-143 2-145 2-146 2-147 2-148 2-149 2-150 2-151 2-151 2-152 2-152 2-153 2-154 2-154 2-155 2-156 2-157 2-157 2-158 2-158 2-159 2-159 2-160 2-161 2-162 2-162 2-163 2-163 2-164 2-164 2-165 2-166 2-167 2-167 1/05 2-3
FUSING, EXIT TRANSPORTATION

10-102 Pre Fuser Sensor On Jam RAP.......................................................................... 10-103 Pre Fuser Sensor On RAP.................................................................................. 10-105 Fuser Exit Sensor On Jam RAP ......................................................................... 10-106 Fuser Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ......................................................................... 10-107 Fuser Exit Sensor On RAP ................................................................................. 10-110 Machine Exit Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ..................................................................... 10-112 Machine Exit Sensor On RAP ............................................................................. 10-115 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP ........................................................................... 10-117 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP ........................................................................... 10-120 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 10-125 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 10-126 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 10-127 Duplex Registration Sensor On Jam RAP .......................................................... 10-128 Duplex Pre Regi. Sensor On Jam RAP .............................................................. 10-130 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP .......................................................................... 10-132 Duplex Path Sensor On Jam RAP ..................................................................... 10-133 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................................... 10-160 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP .......................................................................... 10-162 Duplex Path 1 Sensor On Jam RAP ................................................................... 10-163 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP........................................................................ 10-280 OCT Offset Sensor Failure RAP ......................................................................... 10-300 Inverter Cover Open RAP ................................................................................... 10-341 Fuser Oil Empty RAP .......................................................................................... 10-342 Fuser Web Change RAP .................................................................................... 10-355 External Heat Roll Contact Failure RAP ............................................................ 10-356 External Heat Roll Retract Failure RAP ............................................................. 10-359 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP .......................................................... 10-360 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP ....................................................... 10-361 Power On Heat Roll Not Ready RAP .................................................................. 10-362 Standby Heat Roll Not Ready RAP..................................................................... 10-363 Job Complete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP............................................................ 10-364 Job Incomplete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP ......................................................... 10-366 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP .......................................... 10-367 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ....................................... 10-368 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP ................................................... 10-369 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP ................................................ 10-370 Power On Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP ........................................................... 10-371 Stand By Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP ............................................................ 10-372 Job Complete Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP..................................................... 10-373 Job Incomplete Pressure Roll Not Ready Failure RAP....................................... 10-375 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ................................... 10-376 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ................................ 10-377 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP ............................................ 10-378 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP......................................... Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
10-379 Power On External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP.................................................... 10-382 Stand By External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP ..................................................... 10-383 Job Complete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP.............................................. 10-384 Job Incomplete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP ........................................... 10-386 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ............................ 10-387 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP ......................... 10-389 Fuser Nip Contact Failure RAP........................................................................... 10-390 Fuser Nip Retract Failure RAP............................................................................ 10-391 Fail Unit Failure RAP........................................................................................... 10-398 Fuser Fan Failure RAP ....................................................................................... 10-399 Fuser Intake Fan Failure RAP............................................................................. 10-421 Fuser Oil Level RAP............................................................................................ 10-422 Web CRU RAP.................................................................................................... 10-500 Fuser Web CRU Not Present RAP ..................................................................... 10-900 Fuser Cycle Down RAP ...................................................................................... OF10-1 OCT Detection Failure RAP ............................................................................... OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP.......................................................................................... OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP................................................................................... OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP ............................................................................ OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP..................................................................... OF 10-6 Fuser Out of Oil Rap .........................................................................................
2-168 2-169 2-169 2-170 2-171 2-172 2-173 2-174 2-175 2-175 2-176 2-176 2-177 2-177 2-178 2-178 2-179 2-179 2-181 2-182 2-183 2-185 2-186 2-187 2-189 2-189 2-190 2-191 2-192 2-193 2-194 2-196 2-198 2-200 2-200 2-201 2-201 2-202 2-203 2-204 2-204 2-205 2-207 2-207 2-208 2-208 2-209 2-209 2-210 2-210
SORTING
11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP .................................................................. 11-108 OCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ........................................................................... 11-109 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP................................................................. 11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP ............................................ 11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP ........................................... 11-115 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................... 11-116 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP ....................................... 11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP.................................................................... 11-143 V-Tra In Sensor Off Jam RAP............................................................................. 11-144 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Short RAP ................................................................... 11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP ............................................................ 11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP............................................................ 11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP............................................................ 11-191 Paper Remains at Mail Box Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP ....................... 11-192 Paper Remains at OCT Exit Sensor RAP ........................................................... 11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP ................................................................. 11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP ............................................................................ 11-301 Front Cover A Interlock Open RAP ..................................................................... 11-302 Front Cover B Interlock Open RAP ..................................................................... 11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP .............................................................................. 11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 11-512 Offset Catch Tray / Simple Catch Tray Full Stack RAP ...................................... 11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-914 Bin 4 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-915 Bin 5 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-916 Bin 6 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-917 Bin 7 Full Stack RAP...........................................................................................
11-918 Bin 8 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-919 Bin 9 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-920 Bin 10 Full Stack RAP......................................................................................... 11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP....................................................................... 11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP......................................................................................
2-211 2-211 2-212 2-212 2-213
ROS
14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP ........................................................................................... 2-215 14-376 Half Tone PWB Fail RAP .................................................................................... 2-215 ........................................................................................................................................ 14-380 SOS Fail 1 RAP .............................................................................................................. 2-216 14-384 SOS Fail 2 RAP .................................................................................................. 2-216 14-388 XPC ASIC Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 2-217
IPS
15-270 Coordinate Bus Fail RAP .................................................................................... 15-281 Pre-IPS X Recognize Fail RAP ........................................................................... 15-284 POST IPS X Recognize Fail RAP ....................................................................... 15-342 IPS NVM Fail RAP .............................................................................................. 15-361 POST IPS PWB Fail (Self Test) RAP ................................................................. 15-362 X Hard Fail RAP.................................................................................................. 15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP........................................................................................... 15-365 X Comm Fail RAP............................................................................................... 15-367 X - Fail 4 RAP ..................................................................................................... 15-370 X - Fail 5 RAP ..................................................................................................... 15-371 X - Fail 6RAP ...................................................................................................... 15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 / 15-384 / 15-385 CCD AGC Fail RAP ....................... 15-386 / 15-387 / 15-388 / 15-389 / 15-390 / 15-391 CCD AOC Fail RAP ..................... 15-560 Expected Time Margin Fault RAP....................................................................... 2-219 2-219 2-220 2-220 2-221 2-221 2-222 2-222 2-223 2-223 2-224 2-224 2-225 2-226 2-227 2-230 2-231 2-231 2-232 2-232 2-233 2-233 2-234 2-235 2-236 2-237 2-237
IDFE
OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP ........................................................................................ 19-001 DC Power Fault RAP .......................................................................................... 19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP................................................................................... 19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP ........................................................................................... 19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP ............................................................ 19-005 Printer DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP ............................................................ 19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP ......................................................... 19-007 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP ......................................................... 19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP .......................................................................... 19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP .......................................................................... 19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP ................................................................. 19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP............................................................. 19-016 Token Ring Troubleshooting RAP ......................................................................
1/05 2-4
1-300 Front Door Interlock Open RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the Front Door Cover is open.
1-304 L/H Cover Interlock Open RAP

This RAP should be used to repair the Left Hand Cover Interlock circuit.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 1.4 in the following procedure Visually inspect the Front Door Interlock Switch (PL 9.1) and the Drawer Accessory (PL 2.18) for damage, misalignment, dirt or any other visible mechanical or electrical cause for malfunction.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 1.4 in the following procedure: Visually inspect the L/H Cover Interlock Switch (PL 2.8) for damage, misalignment, dirt or any other visible mechanical or electrical cause for malfunction. Make sure the Left Lower Cover actuates the switch when it closes.
Procedure
PO/PO the Machine Fault Code 1-300 is still declared. Y N Inspect and reseat connectors P/J712, P/J14, P/J419B, P/J724, and P/J11A. Open the Front Door. +5 VDC is measured at P/J712-3. Y N Perform the following: Observe the operation of the Drawer Interlock Switch while opening and closing the drawer. Check the Drawer Interlock Switch for damage or misalignment. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 7 on BSD 1.4, and check the wires between P/J712-3 and P/ J724-2 for an open circuit. Replace the Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 1-304 is still declared. Y N Reseat connectors P/J800 and P/J805. Perform the following: Close the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 1.4, and check for continuity through the switch while it is closed. Open the L/H Cover Interlock Switch, and go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.4. +24 VDC is measured at P/J805-1. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Close the L/H Cover Interlock Switch, and go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.4. +24 VDC is measured at P/J805-2 on the Tray PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 1.4. Check for an open circuit between P/J805-1 and P/J805-2 on the Tray PWB. Replace the L/H Cover Interlock Switch (PL 2.8).
Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. +5 VDC is measured at P/J712-4 Y N +5VDC is measured at P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 7 on BSD 1.4, and check the wiring between P/J14-1 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.2) for an open or a short. If the problem continues, Replace the Front Door Interlock Switch (PL 9.1). Replace the Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18).
Perform the following: Go to BSD 1.4, and check for an open/short circuit at P/J801B-4. Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Perform the following: Go to the Interlock Relay Failure RAP. Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
1/05 2-5
1-300 Front Door Interlock Open RAP, 1-304 L/H
+3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP

This RAP is used to repair failures in the +3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) circuit when directed by another RAP.
+5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP

This RAP is used to repair failures in the +5 VDC Power circuit when directed by another RAP.
Initial Actions
Use BSD 1.2 in the following procedure: P/O P/O the machine, and look for symptoms of a blank UI and a machine locked into the Power Save Mode.
Initial Actions
Use BSD 1.3 in the following procedure:
Procedure
Disconnect J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between J5-3 and J5-2 on the harness side. ACH is measures between J5-3 and J5-2 on the harness side. Y N Go to the AC Power RAP. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13. Y N Perform the following: Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
The machine exits Energy Saver Mode when the Main Switch is switched ON. Y N Refer to BSD 1.2. Check for +5 VDC between P/J25-1 and P/J25-2 on the IOT LVPS. +5 VDC is measured between P/J25-1 and P/J25-2. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 1.2, and check for an open circuit. Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following: 1. Check the wiring at P/J31 for an open/short circuit to the POST IPS. 2. 3. 4. Replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5). Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Go to the Power Save and LED RAP. Go to the Power Save and LED RAP.
+3.5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP, +5 VDC Power
1/05 2-6
+5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP

This RAP is used to repair failures in the +5 VDC Power circuit (IIT LVPS) when directed by another RAP.

This RAP is used to repair short circuits in the +12 VDC Power circuit when directed by another RAP.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Disconnect J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between J5-3 and J5-2 on the harness side. ACH is measures between J5-3 and J5-2 on the harness side. Y N Go to the AC Power RAP. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13. Y N Perform the following: Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Disconnect P/J22 from the IOT LVPS and check for +12 VDC at P/J22-1 on the IOT LVPS. +12 VDC at P/J22 on the IOT LVPS checked OK. Y N Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Disconnect the following connectors from their respective PWBs: P/J395 from the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). P/J411 from the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Reconnect P/J22 to the IOT LVPS, and check for +12 VDC at P/J22-1. +12 VDC is measured at P/J22-1. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 1.2, and check the wires for a short circuit to ground. Measure for +12 VDC at P/J22-1 after reconnecting P/J395, and P/J411 one by one to their respective PWBs. Note what PWB, if any, loads down the +12 VDC. +12 VDC was OK after reconnecting P/J395 to the Half Tone PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the Half Tone PWB and disconnect all components from the Half Tone PWB which are supplied with +12 VDC. Reconnect the components one-by-one to the Half Tone PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the +12 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component, which loads down the +12 VDC.
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following: 1. Check the wiring at P/J33 for open/short circuits (between the IIT/IPS LVPS and the DADF, and the PRE IPS). 2. Replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5).
Perform the following: Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the IOT Drive PWB and disconnect all components from the IOT Drive PWB which are driven by +12 VDC (and not checked earlier in this RAP). Reconnect the components one-by-one to the IOT Drive PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the +12 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component, which loads down the +12 VDC.
1/05 2-7
+5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP, +12 VDC Power (IOT
-12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP

This RAP is used to repair short circuits in the -12 VDC Power circuit when directed by another RAP.
+13.3 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP

This RAP is used to repair failures in the +13.3 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) circuit when directed by another RAP.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Disconnect P/J22 from the IOT LVPS and check for -12 VDC at P/J22-4. -12 VDC at P/J224 on the IOT LVPS checked OK. Y N Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Disconnect the following connectors from their respective PWBs: P/J395 from the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). P/J411 from the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Reconnect P/J22 to the IOT LVPS, and check for -12 VDC at P/J22-4. -12 VDC is measured at P/J22-1. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.2, and check the wires for a short circuit to ground. Measure for -12 VDC at P/J22-4 after reconnecting P/J395, and P/J411 one by one to their respective PWBs. Note what PWB, if any, loads down the -12 VDC. -12 VDC was OK after reconnecting P/J395 to the Half Tone PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the Half Tone PWB and disconnect all components from the Half Tone PWB which are supplied with -12 VDC. Reconnect the components one-by-one to the Half Tone PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the -12 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component, which loads down the -12 VDC.
Procedure
Disconnect P/ J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2 on the harness side. ACH is measures between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2. Y N Go to the AC Power RAP. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13. Y N Perform the following: Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following: 1. Check the wiring from P/J34 on the IIT/IPS LVPS to the PRE IPS and the CCD for an open/short circuit. 2. 3. 4. Replace the IIT/IPS LVPS (PL 3.5). Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
Perform the following: Go to Wirenet +12/-12V DC involving the IOT Drive PWB and disconnect all components from the IOT Drive PWB which are driven by -12 VDC (and not checked earlier in this RAP). Reconnect the components one-by-one to the IOT Drive PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the -12 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component, which loads down the -12 VDC.
-12 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP, +13.3 VDC Power
1/05 2-8

This RAP is used to repair short circuits in the +24 VDC Power circuit when directed by another RAP.
Reconnect the components one-by-one to the IOT Drive PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the +24 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component which loads down the +24 VDC. P/
Initial Actions
Procedure
Disconnect P/J23 from the IOT LVPS and check for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3 on the IOT LVPS. +24 VDC at P/J23-1, 2, 3 on the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3) checked OK. Y N Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Disconnect the following connectors from their respective PWBs: P/J800 from the Tray PWB (PL 9.3) P/J14 from the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). P/J411 from the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Disconnect P/J24 from the IOT LVPS and check for +24 VDC at P/J24-2,3. +24 VDC at J24-2, 3 on the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3) checked OK Y N Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Perform the following: Disconnect P/J14 from the AC Driver (PL 9.3) Check for +24 VDC at P/J24-2,3 at the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Go to BSD 1.2, Flag 3, and check for open/short circuits. Reconnect P/J23 to the AC Driver (PL 9.3) and check for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3.
Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the AC Driver PWB and disconnect all components from the AC Driver PWB which are driven by +24 VDC (and not checked earlier in this RAP). Reconnect the components one-by-one to the AC Driver PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the +24 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component which loads down the +24 VDC. Go to the Interlock Relay Failure RAP. Check for a short circuit of +24 VDC.
Reconnect P/J23 to the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3) and check for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3. +24 VDC is measured at P/J23-1,2,3. Y N Go to BSD 1.2, Flag 1, Flag 2 and check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. Measure for +24 VDC at P/J23-1,2,3 after reconnecting P/J800, P/J14, and P/J411 one by one to their respective PWBs. Note what PWB, if any, loads down the +24 VDC. +24 VDC was OK after reconnecting P/J800 to the Tray PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the Tray PWB and disconnect all components from the Tray PWB which are driven by +24 VDC. Reconnect the components one-by-one to the Tray PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the +24 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component which loads down the +24 VDC.
+24 VDC was OK after reconnecting P/J14 to the AC Driver PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the AC Driver PWB and disconnect all components from the AC Driver PWB which are driven by +24 VDC. Reconnect the components one-by-one to the AC Driver PWB, while checking which component/circuit loads down the +24 VDC. Check the wiring to the suspected component for an open/short circuit. Replace the component which loads down the +24 VDC.
Perform the following: Go to Wirenet +24 VDC involving the IOT Drive PWB and disconnect all components from the IOT Drive PWB which are driven by +24 VDC. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-9
+24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP

This RAP is used to repair failures in the +24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) circuit when directed by another RAP.
AC Power RAP
This RAP is used to repair failures in the AC Power circuit when directed by another RAP.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Check that the specified level of AC Line voltage is present at the wall receptacle.
Procedure
Disconnect P/ J5. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.3, and check for ACH between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2 on the harness side. ACH is measures between P/ J5-3 and P/ J5-2. Y N Go to the AC Power RAP. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-1. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.3. Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J11A-13. Y N Perform the following: Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
With the machine plugged into the AC source and the Circuit Breaker and Main Switch switched on, check that AC Line voltage is measured between P/J17-1,2,3 (ACH) and P/J174,5,6 (ACN). AC Line voltage checked OK between P/J17-1,2,3 and P/J17-4,5,6. Y N Check for AC Line voltage between P/J16-1 (ACH) and P/J16-4 (ACN) on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). AC Line voltage checked OK between P/J16-1 and P/J16-4. Y N Check for AC Line voltage between P/J15-1and P/J15-3 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). AC Line voltage is present between P/J15-1 and P/J15-3. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open circuit between P/J16 on the AC Driver PWB and the AC Plug on the Line Cord. Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). With the machine plugged into the AC source, and the Circuit Breaker switched on, check for 18 VAC between P/J19-6 and P/J19-12 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). 18 VAC is present between P/J19-6 and P/J19-12. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open circuit. Perform the following: Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, Flag 3, Flag 4, and Flag 5 on BSD 1.1 and check for open circuits. Also check for short circuits to ground at Flag 3, Flag 4, and Flag 5. Replace the Main Switch (PL 9.1). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.3, and perform the following: 1. Check the wiring from P/J35 for an open/short circuit between the DADF Control PWB or Lamp Ballast PWB. 2. Replace the IIT/IPS LVPS (PL 3.5).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J11B-17 and P/J11B-19. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J11AB-15 and DC COM when the Main Switch is switched ON. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.1, and check for an open/short circuit. If the circuit is OK, perform the following: Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and check for an open/short circuit. A Status Indicator RAPs Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
+24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP, AC Power RAP
1/05 2-10
A Replace the Main Power Switch (PL 9.1).
Interlock Relay Failure RAP

This RAP is used to repair +24 VDC Interlock Relay (located on the AC Driver PWB) Failures.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 1.4, Power Interlock Switching, in the following procedure:
Procedure
Perform the following: Go to Figure 7 (BSD 1.4) and check that the fuses F1, F2 and F5 on the AC Driver PWB are OK. Check that +5 VDC is available at P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB. +5 VDC is measured at P/J19-4 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +24 VDC is measured at P/J45-5 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. +24 VDC is measured at P/J14-10 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 1.4, and perform the following: Check for an open circuit between P/J45-5 on the Distribution PWB and P/J14-10 on the AC Driver PWB. Replace the Front Door Interlock Switch (PL 9.1).
Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 on BSD 1.4,and check for an open circuit. Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-11
AC Power RAP, Interlock Relay Failure RAP
Power Save and LED RAP

This RAP is used to repair failures in the Power Save and LED Circuit.
Initial Actions
Use BSD 2.3 in the following procedure: Check if the Power Save Mode activates continuously or will not activate.
A Check for +5VDC at P/J11A-A7 on the AC Driver PWB. +5VDC is measured at P/J11A-A7 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Preform the following: Go to Flag 1 on BSD 2.3 and check for a short circuit Go to +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. The machine remains in the Power Save (Sleep) Mode. Y N The machine wakes up. Check for +5 VDC at P/J11A-A7 on the AC Driver PWB. +5 VDC is measured at P/J11A-A7 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to BSD 2.3, Flag 1 and check for a short circuit. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.3, and check for an open circuit. Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3).
Enter dC330 001-200 Power Save Button, and exercise the Power Save Mode using the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. Press Start. Press and hold the [Power Save Button]. For normal operation the status indicator should indicate Logic (H) and the counter should increment. Release the Power Save Button and the status should change to Logic (L), and the counter should increment again.
The Power Save Mode behaved normally when it was exercised in the preceding steps 1 through 3. Y N Check the voltage at P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). +5 VDC is measured at P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Y N Perform the following: Check the wire between P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB, and P/J4922 on the Control Panel for a short circuit. Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.5). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3).
Perform the following: Check the wire between P/J11A-A12 on the AC Driver PWB, and P/J492-2 on the Control Panel for an open circuit. Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.5).
Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.3, and check for an open circuit. Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.5). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A Status Indicator RAPs
Power Save and LED RAP
1/05 2-12
2-310 UI Panel Fail RAP

This Fault Code indicates that the UI Panel failed.
2-340 UI RAM Fail RAP

This Fault Code is detected at power on and indicates that the UI PWB RAM Test failed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 2.1, Control Panel (UI Panel) Switches and LEDs, in the following procedure: Observe all LEDs on the top of the Control Panel for functional operation. Check all push-buttons on top of the Control Panel for electrical/mechanical function. Check the Touch Panel at the UI for functional operation.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 2.2 UI Display in this procedure:
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 2-340 is still declared. Y N Perform the following: Inspect the connections and connectors to the UI PWB, VR PWB, the Display, and the Power Supply. Reseat connectors P/J484, P/J486, CN5, CN6, and CN1.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 2-310 is still declared. Y N Perform the following: Check the connectors to the Control Panel. Reseat connectors P/J482A, CN2, CN3, and CN1.
All push-buttons are electrically and mechanically operational. Y N Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.5). All LEDs functioned in Initial Action. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 2.1, and check for +5 VDC at P/J482A-9,10 and CN1-9,10. +5VDC is measured at P/J482A and CN1. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 4 on BSD 2.1, and check the harness between P/J482A on the UI PWB and CN1 on the Display Power Supply for a short/open circuit. Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.5). Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.2, and check for +24 VDC UI Power Supply voltage at P/J486-1. +24 VDC is measured at P/J486-1 on the UI PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 1 on BSD 2.2, and check the wires for an open/short circuit. Replace the Power Supply (PL 9.5).
Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 on BSD 2.2, and check between P/J486-2 and INVCN1 for an open/short circuit. Replace the VR PWB (PL 9.5). Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5). Replace the Display (PL 9.5)
Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5). Perform the following: Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 on BSD 2.1, and check the harness for open/short circuits. Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5). Replace the Touch Panel (PL 9.5). Replace the Control Panel (PL 9.5).
1/05 2-13
2-310 UI Panel Fail RAP, 2-340 UI RAM Fail RAP
Dark Screen RAP

This RAP is used to analyze and repair a Dark Screen at the UI. If the UI is still illuminated, but no customer message is displayed go to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP.
Two Sided Copy Feature Not Available RAP

The Duplex option is not shown on the UI.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 2.2 UI Display in this procedure:
Initial Actions
Ensure that the Left Side Option Memory PWB (side 2) is installed and properly seated on the MEM SYS PWB.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. The Dark Screen is still displayed. Y N If the Dark Screen Display is intermittent, perform the following: Go to BSD 2.2, UI Display. Inspect the connections and connectors to the UI PWB, VR PWB, the Display, and the Power Supply in the UI Assembly. Reseat connectors P/J484, P/J486, CN5, CN6, and CN1. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Procedure
Refer to 15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP.
NOTE: If the failure occurred immediately after installing or reconnecting the optional Edit Pad, check that P/J 800 is connected correctly. It is possible to partially connect this plug upside down, which will create a power supply short circuit. Check F3 on the Distribution PWB. This may have also corrupted the UI software, requiring a reload of the software. Check Fuses F1, F2, F3, F4, and F5 on the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Check Fuses F1, F2, F3, and F5 on the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to BSD 2.2, UI Display and perform the following: Inspect the connectors and connections to the UI PWB, VR PWB, the Display, and the Power Supply in the UI Assembly. Reseat connectors P/J484, P/J486, CN5, CN6, and INVCN1. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5). Replace the VR PWB (PL 9.5). Replace the Power Supply (PL 9.5). Replace the Display (PL 9.5).
Dark Screen RAP,
1/05 2-14
3-311 IOT-SYS Logic Fail RAP

The IOT-SYS Software Logic Failure was detected after a certain time period (the NVM value).
3-315 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP

The 3-315 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the Post IPS PWB was detected.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure:
Initial Actions
Ensure that P571 is firmly connected to the Post IPS PWB. Refer to BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) and BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure:
Procedure
Perform the following: PO/PO the machine Reset the connectors on the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
Procedure
There is +3.5 VDC from J 570 pin 1 to pin 6 on the Post IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 3.2. Check for an open or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5). There is +3.5 VDC from J 517 pin 3 to pin 4 on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 3.2. Check for an open or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5). There is +5 VDC from J 517 pin 1 to pin 2 on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 3.2. Check for an open or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5). There is +13.3 VDC from J 517 pin 7 to pin 5 on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 3.2. Check for an open or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the IIT LVPS (PL 3.5). Perform the following: PO/PO the machine Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 3.2. Check the following wires for a short/open circuit: Between Post IPS PWB P571-23 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A13 Between Post IPS PWB P571-24 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A14 Between Post IPS PWB P571-25 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A11 Between Post IPS PWB P571-26 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A12
Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5) Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5)
1/05 2-15
3-311 IOT-SYS Logic Fail RAP, 3-315 IOT/IPS Com-
3-317 UI/IOT Communications Fail RAP

This Fault Code indicates that a communications failure between the UI PWB and the IOT PWB was detected.
3-318 IOT/IPS Communications Fail RAP

This Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the IPS PWB was detected.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.1 PWB Communications (UI) and BSD 3.12 Monitoring, in this procedure:
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) and BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure:
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If Fault Code 3-317 is still declared, perform the following: Go to Flag 3 on BSD 3.1. +24 VDC is measured at J490-7, and +5 VDC is measured at J490-2 on the UI PWB (PL 9.5). Y N Perform the following: Go to the +24 VDC-1 Wirenet and check for an open/short circuit Go to the +24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP Go to the +5 VDC-1 Wirenet and check for an open/short circuit Go to the +5 VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP
Procedure
Perform the following: PO/PO the machine. If Fault Code 3-318 is still declared, perform the following: Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 3.2. Check the following wires for short/open circuit: Between Post IPS PWB P571-13 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A3 Between Post IPS PWB P571-14 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A4 Between Post IPS PWB P571-11 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A1 Between Post IPS PWB P571-12 and IOT CPU PWB P/J404-A2
Perform the following: Go to Flag 1 on Flag 2 on BSD 3.1 and check the following wires for an open/short circuit: Check the wire between IOT CPU PWB P/J404-B14 and UI PWB P/J490-10 Check the wire between IOT CPU PWB P/J404-B13 and UI PWB P/J490-11 Check the wire between IOT CPU PWB P/J404-B16 and UI PWB P/J490-12 Check the wire between IOT CPU PWB P/J404-B15 and UI PWB P/J490-13
Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
3-317 UI/IOT Communications Fail RAP, 3-318 IOT/IPS
1/05 2-16
3-319 MailBox Communication Failure RAP

The 3-319 Fault Code indicates a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the MailBox PWB. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 3-319 Finisher/ Sorter Communication Failure RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
3-327 2nd DDI IOSS I/F Failure RAP

3-327 Fault Code indicates a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the DDI IISS.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1 Printer IDFE.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.4 PWB Communications (MailBox) and to BSD 3.12, Monitoring, in this procedure.
Procedure
Perform the following: PO/PO the machine Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1). Check the communications cables. Ensure that the cables are seated properly and that there is no damage Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB. Reload IDFE System Software Go to GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs and replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1)
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-319 is still declared. Y N If an intermittent is suspected, perform the following: Check the connections to the IOT CPU PWB and the MailBox Control PWB, and the interconnecting harness Reseat P/J405 at the IOT CPU PWB, P/J550 at the MailBox Control PWB, and J880, the Double Plug
Go to Flag 1 BSD 3.4, and check for +5 VDC at P/J569-1. +5 VDC is measured at P/J569-1 on the MailBox Control PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.4, and check for an open/short circuit Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.4, and check for +24 VDC at P/J563-1 on the Mail box Control PWB. +24 VDC is measured at P/J563 -1. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.4, and check for an open/short circuit Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 3.4, and check the following wires for an open/short circuit: Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J550-1 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-1 Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J550-2 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-2 Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J550-3 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-3 Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J550-4 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-4
Replace the MailBox Control PWB (PL 13.10) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
1/05 2-17
3-319 MailBox Communication Failure RAP, 3-327
3-328 DDI IOSS Communication Failure RAP

The 3-328 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the DDI IISS was detected. The 3-328 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the DDI IOSS was detected.
3-329 DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP

3-329 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the DDI IISS was detected. This RAP is incomplete pending full information disclosure.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1, Printer IDFE in this procedure.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1, Printer IDFE in this procedure.
Procedure
Perform the following: PO/PO the machine Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1). Check the communications cables. Ensure that the cables are seated properly and that there is no damage Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB Reload IDFE System Software Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1)
Procedure
Perform the following: PO/PO the machine Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1). Check the communications cables. Ensure that the cables are seated properly and that there is no damage Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB. Reload IDFE System Software Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1)
3-328 DDI IOSS Communication Failure RAP, 3-329
1/05 2-18
3-330 2nd DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP

3-330 Fault Code indicates that a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the DDI IISS was detected.
3-333 Foreign Interface RAP

This Fault Code indicates that a communications failure was detected between the Foreign Interface PWB and the IOT CPU PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1, Printer IDFE, in this procedure.
Initial Actions
Check the connection between the Foreign Interface PWB and the Foreign Accessory (P/ J 940). If you were sent to this RAP from Call Flow for a nonrecognized Foreign Device, go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.6 and check for an open circuit. Use BSD 3.6, Foreign Interface Accessory, and BSD 3.12, Monitoring, for this procedure.
Procedure
Perform the following: PO/PO the machine Go to BSD 16.1 (Figure 1) and check the communications cables. Reset the IOT CPU connectors and reseat the IOT NVM PWB. Reload IDFE System Software Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1)
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-333 is still present. Y N If intermittent performance is suspected, reseat P/J406 at the IOT CPU PWB, P/J45 at the Distribution PWB, and P/J 941at the FI PWB. There is +24 VDC from J 941, pin 5 to pin 7. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 3.6. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, go to the 24 VDC wirenets to troubleshoot. There is +5 VDC from J 941, pin 10 to pin 8. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 3.6. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, go to the +5 VDC wirenets to troubleshoot. Perform the following: Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 3.6, and check for an open/short circuit. Replace the Foreign Interface PWB (PL 9.4). Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-19
3-330 2nd DDI IISS Communication Failure RAP, 3-
3-340 IOT RAM Fail RAP

This Fault Code indicates that it was detected at power on that the IOT PWB RAM Test failed.
3-356 IOT NVM Failure RAP

This Fault Code indicates that the IOT PWB NVM test failed and was detected at Power On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure: Check the NVM settings related to the IOT-SYS logic.
Initial Actions
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-340 is still declared. Y N If intermittent behavior is suspected, perform the following: Inspect the IOT NVM PWB and the IOT CPU PWB connections. Reseat connectors between the IOT NVM PWB and IOT CPU PWB PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-356 is still declared. Y N If intermittent performance is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the IOT NVM PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
3-340 IOT RAM Fail RAP, 3-356 IOT NVM Failure RAP
1/05 2-20
3-380 TR0 Fail RAP

A 3-380 fault indicates that the TR0 signal was not received on time.
N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.2 and check the +5 VDC circuit to the AC Driver PWB.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 7 on BSD 1.4. Check the circuit for Interlocked +5 VDC.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.8 for the following procedure. Ensure that the TR0 Patch (reflector) on the IBT Belt is clean and in good condition. Ensure that the Belt is installed correctly, with the reflector toward the Inboard edge. Ensure that P/J398 on the Half Tone PWB, P/J345 on the LDD PWB, P/J416 on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J140 on the TR0 Sensor, and Double Plug P702A/ J702A are connected before beginning this RAP. Ensure that the Drum CRU is properly installed.
NOTE: The following step requires the use of the Fluke 87 DVM, or other test meter with a voltage type diode test function. Perform the following: 1. 2. 3. Set the meter rotary switch to the diode test position. Disconnect P/J 395 and P/J398 on the Half Tone PWB. Connect the red (+) lead to J395 pin 1 and the black (COM) lead to J398 pin 1
Procedure
If Tag 38 is installed on the machine, it is possible that there is a shorting condition between the EPC Scan Cable and the FPC-ROS Flat Cable connector ( P/J398). Foam on top of the connector is intended to insulate the pins from contact. However, the foam can be compressed by the EPC Scan Cable and the pins may stick through and short against the Scan Cable connector housing. Using a sheet of transparency or shim stock, cut a strip 45mm X 12mm and adhere to the top of the foam on the FPC-ROS Cable connector ( P/J398). This strip will function as an insulator. If this does not resolve the problem, or if Tag P-38 is not installed, continue with this procedure. NOTE: The PWS display may not update the logic level display fast enough to show the state of the TR0 Sensor. Observe the event Counter. If the event counter advances, the display is changing. Go to dC330. Stack the following codes. 004-007 Main Motor, 004-021 Drum Motor, 003-213 TRO Sensor. The display is H and changes to L momentarily. Y N The display is always H. Y N Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J416A-7 and DC Com. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.8. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the TR0 Sensor (PL 7.5). +5 VDC is measured between P/J416A-8 and DC COM Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the TR0 Sensor (PL 7.5). There is +5 VDC from J395 pin 1 to J395 pin 11 on the Half Tone PWB (BSD 6.5). Y N There is +5 VDC from J19 pin 4 on the AC Driver PWB to GND (BSD 1.4). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
The meter reads 0.3 VDC or less Y N If the meter reads OL in both directions, CR13 on the Halftone PWB is open; replace the PWB (PL 9.2). Reverse the leads. The meter reads OL. Y N CR13 on the Halftone PWB is shorted; replace the PWB (PL 9.2). There is +24 VDC from pin 3 to pin 4 of P/J2030 on the Drum Motor. Y N Go to Flag 6 of BSD 4.1. Check for an open circuit. Refer to the 24 VDC wirenets as required. Check the connections to the Drum Motor. If the connections are secure, replace the Drum Motor (PL 1.1). If the problem persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-21
3-380 TR0 Fail RAP
3-393 Half-Tone EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP

This fault code is declared when the limit of the allowable number of times to write on to the EEP-ROM of the Half-Tone PWB is reached.
3-394 IOT EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP

This fault code is declared when the limit of the allowable number of times to write on the EEPROM of the IOT CPU PWB is reached.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.12, Monitoring in this procedure:
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-393 is still declared. Y N If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the Half-Tone PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-394 is still declared. Y N If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the Half-Tone PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
3-393 Half-Tone EEP-ROM Limit Failure RAP, 3-394
1/05 2-22
3-395 Half-Tone EEP-ROM R/W Failure RAP

This fault code is declared when writing to the EEP-ROM of the Half-Tone PWB failed.
3-396 IOT EEPROM R/W Failure RAP

This fault code is declared when writing to the EEPROM of the IOT CPU PWB failed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring in this procedure: Enter Diagnostics Mode and compare the NVM last entry to the Half-Tone PWB with those to the IOT NVM PWB and to the IOT CPU PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.12 Monitoring (2 of 2) in this procedure. Enter Diagnostics Mode and compare the NVM last entry to the Half-Tone PWB with those to the IOT NVM PWB and to the IOT CPU PWB.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-395 is still declared. Y N If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the Half-Tone PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared. Y N If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) and the HalfTone PWB (PL 9.2) for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-23
3-395 Half-Tone EEP-ROM R/W Failure RAP, 3-396
3-397 X ID DATA NG Failure RAP

The machine serial number and billing data are stored in three locations: IOT NVM PWB IOT CPU PWB Half Tone PWB
3-510 APS NG-Image Loss RAP

The 3-510 fault code indicates that a tray containing the size of paper closest to the size of the image was not detected while APS was enabled.
Initial Actions
If the fault occurs while performing Max Setup, ensure that Automatic Tray switching for Trays 1 - 4 is enabled in Customer Tools. Ensure that appropriate paper is loaded when APS is enabled. If the fault code persists with correct paper loaded, continue with the RAP.
This fault is declared when the data stored are mismatched, or when an automatic correction was impossible after a billing mismatch occurred.
Initial Actions
PO/PO the machine. If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB, the IOT NVM PWB, and the Half Tone PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-510 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Selecting Document Size, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Connect the PWS. Select dC132 from the DC Quick pull-down menu. Refer to GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs . Compare the displayed Serial Numbers for the IOT CPU PWB, the IOT NVM PWB, and the Half Tone PWB with serial number printed on the machine label. All three PWB Serial Numbers should agree with the label. CAUTION To maintain intergrity of the serial number and billing data, NEVER replace more that one PWB at the same time. Follow the procedure in GP10. The IOT NVM PWB serial number is correct. Y N Attempt to synchronize the serial numbers (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). If unsuccessful, replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2). After replacing the IOT NVM PWB, set the serial number (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). The IOT CPU PWB serial number is correct. Y N Attempt to synchronize the serial numbers (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). If unsuccessful, replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). After replacing the IOT CPU PWB, set the serial number (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). Attempt to synchronize the serial numbers (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ). If unsuccessful, replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). After replacing the Half Tone PWB, set the serial number (GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ).
3-397 X ID DATA NG Failure RAP, 3-510 APS NG-Im-
1/05 2-24
3-511 APS NG-Not in Position RAP

The 3-511 Fault Code indicates that the Tray selected by the APS was not in position.
3-512 APS NG-No Paper RAP

The 3-512 Fault Code indicates that the Tray selected by the APS had no paper.
Initial Actions
Refer to the User Guide in this procedure.
Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-511 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Selecting a Paper Tray, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-512 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Loading Paper, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-25
3-511 APS NG-Not in Position RAP, 3-512 APS NG-
3-518 APS Mix NG Image Loss RAP

The 3-518 Fault Code indicates that the Tray selected by the APS had no paper.
3-527 Original Change During Job RAP

The 3-527 Fault Code indicates that the original returned according to the original return instruction did not match the size or color of the original recognized by the machine because it was returned by mistake on the part of the user.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-518 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Loading Paper, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-527 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Storing Frequently-used Job Settings (Stored Programming), and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
3-518 APS Mix NG Image Loss RAP, 3-527 Original
1/05 2-26
3-528 Platen Document Size Unknown RAP

The 3-528 Fault Code indicates that the machine does not recognize the document size automatically detected.
3-529 AMS Mix NG RAP

The 3-529 Fault Code indicates that the result of the magnification calculation was outside of the range of 25%~400%.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to the User Guide in this Procedure.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-528 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Loading Documents, Document Size Sensing, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-529 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Reducing/Enlarging Copies, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-27
3-528 Platen Document Size Unknown RAP, 3-529
3-530 AMS NG RAP

The 3-530 Fault Code indicates that the result of the magnification calculation was outside of the range of 25%~400%.
3-535 Whole Image NG RAP

The 3-535 Fault Code indicates that the whole image did not fit to the paper.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
3-530 AMS NG RAP, 3-535 Whole Image NG RAP
1/05 2-28
3-536 Platen No Original

The 3-536 Fault Code indicates that no original is on the platen.
3-537 Repeat NG - Number RAP

The 3-537 Fault Code indicates that the specified number of images did not fit on the paper.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-537 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Copying Several Documents onto One Copy, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-29
3-536 Platen No Original, 3-537 Repeat NG - Num-
3-538 Repeat NG-MAG RAP

The 3-538 Fault Code indicates that no image fit to paper.
3-539 MPE MAG NG RAP

The 3-539 Fault Code indicates that magnification of the output was specified at beyond 400% at continuous enlargement copying mode.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
3-538 Repeat NG-MAG RAP, 3-539 MPE MAG NG RAP
1/05 2-30
3-541 APS NG RAP

The 3-541 Fault Code indicates that the tray corresponding to the standard size of paper slightly larger than the size of the image did not exist while executing the APS.
3-542 AMS NG RAP

The 3-542 Fault Code indicates that the calculated magnification was beyond the range of 400%~25%.
Initial Actions
Refer to the User Guide during this procedure.
Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-541 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Selecting a Paper Tray, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
1/05 2-31
3-541 APS NG RAP, 3-542 AMS NG RAP
3-543 Rotation NG RAP

The 3-543 Fault Code indicates that the rotation could not be done because the magnification exceeded 100%.
3-550 Original Patch Not Exist RAP

The 3-550 Fault Code indicates that there was no position-detection patch on the original while executing an automatic KAICHO revision.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-543 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Document Rotation, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-550 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Loading Documents, and help the customer to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
3-543 Rotation NG RAP, 3-550 Original Patch Not Ex-
1/05 2-32
3-560 Copy Limit Exceed RAP

The 3-560 Fault Code indicates that it reached the pre-set copy limit value (specified for/by the User Password at the Auditron Administrator Mode) during the copying operation.
3-580 IOT System Timing Fail RAP

This Fault Code is declared when the machine was not able to receive the print from/against the Hint within the specified time.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-560 is still declared. Y N Refer to the User Guide, Using the Auditron Administration Mode, and help the Customer/ Auditron Administrator to understand how to avoid recurrence of the problem. Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared. Y N Inspect the IOT CPU PWB, and the IOT NVM PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Perform the following: Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
1/05 2-33
3-560 Copy Limit Exceed RAP, 3-580 IOT System
3-581 Dead Cycle Fail RAP

The Dead Cycle continued for more than two minutes.
3-600 Billing Adjust NVM Failure RAP

This Fault Code is declared when after the job ended, the billing mismatch occurred, and automatic correction implemented.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared. Y N Inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the IOT NVM PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Perform the following: Replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-600 is still declared. Y N If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the IOT NVM PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Enter [DC122, Failure History]. If this failure has occurred many times, replace the IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
3-581 Dead Cycle Fail RAP, 3-600 Billing Adjust NVM
1/05 2-34
3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP

After the job ended, the billing mismatch occurred, and automatic correction implemented.
3-602 Billing Adjust Half-Tone Failure RAP

This Fault Code is declared when after the job ended, the billing mismatch occurred, and automatic correction was implemented.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
PO/PO the machine and make a billable copy. Fault Code 3-601 is still declared. Y N If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the IOT NVM PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Enter [DC122, Failure History]. If this failure has occurred many times, replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine, and make a billable copy. Fault Code 3-602 is still declared. Y N If intermittent operation is suspected, inspect the IOT CPU PWB and the Half Tone PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Enter [DC122, Failure History], If this failure has occurred many times, replace the Half-Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-35
3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP, 3-602 Billing
3-601 Billing Adjust IOSS Failure RAP, 3-602 Billing
1/05 2-36
OF4-001 Main Motor RAP

This RAP is used to repair the Main Motor and Drum Motor circuit failures when directed by another RAP.
P/J417B-5, Logic (L) P/J417B-4, +2.5 VDC P/J417B-3, Logic (L) P/J417B-2, Logic (L)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 4.1, Main and Drum Drive Control, in the following procedure: Check the Drive Mechanism for damage, jams, and obstructions.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit. Replace the Main Motor (PL 1.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Go to Flag 1 BSD 4.1 and check for +5 VDC at P/J42-14 on the Distribution PWB. +5 VDC is measured at P/J42-14 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 1 BSD 4.1 and check for a short/open circuit. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Perform the following: While in [04-007] Component Control and the Main Motor is running, check for the following conditions at P/J417B-5, Logic (L) P/J417B-4, +2.5 VDC P/J417B-3, Logic (L) P/J417B-2, Logic (L)
Perform the following: Enter DC330 004-007 Main Motor, Press Start and Stop. Check for a change of state from (L) to +5 VDC at P/J417B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. The voltage at P/J417B-5 switched between (L) and +5 VDC at P/J417B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 3 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open/short circuit. Replace the Main Motor (PL 1.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit. Replace the Main Motor (PL 1.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 4.1 and check for +24 VDC at P/J42-11 and 12, on the Distribution PWB. +24 VDC is measured at P/J42 -11 and 12, on the Distribution PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 2 on BSD 4.1 check for an open/short circuit. Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Enter DC330 004-007 Main Motor. Press Start. The Main Motor runs. Y N Check for Logic (L) at P/J417B-5. Logic (L) is measured at P/J417B-5. Y N Perform the following: Go to on Flag 4 BSD 4.1 and check for an open/short circuit. Replace the Main Motor (PL 1.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Perform the following: While exercising [04-021] in Component Control, check for a change of state on the Main Motor On line P/J417B-5. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 While in [04-021] Component Control and the Main Motor is running, check for the following conditions at Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-37
OF4-001 Main Motor RAP
OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP

This RAP is used to repair the Main Motor and Drum Motor circuit failures when directed by another RAP.
P/J417B-17, +2.5 VDC P/J417B-16, Logic (L) P/J417B-15, Logic (L) P/J417B-14, Logic (L)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 4.1, Main and Drum Drive Control, in the following procedure: Check the Drive Mechanism for damage, jams, and obstructions.
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit. Replace the Drum Motor (PL 1.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 4.1 and check for +5 VDC at P/J42-4 on the Distribution PWB. +5 VDC is measured at P/J42-4 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 5 on BSD 4.1 and check for a short/open circuit. Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Perform the following: While in [04-021] Component Control and the Drum Motor is running, check for the following conditions at P/J417B-18, Logic (L) P/J417B-17, +2.5 VDC P/J417B-16, Logic (L) P/J417B-15, Logic (L) P/J417B-14, Logic (L)
Perform the following: Enter DC330 004-021 Drum Motor. Press Start and Stop. Check for a change of state from (L) to +5 VDC at P/J417B-18 on the IOT Drive PWB. The voltage at P/J417B-18 switched between (L) and +5 VDC on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 7 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open/short circuit. Replace the Drum Motor (PL 1.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open /short circuit. Replace the Drum Motor (PL 1.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 4.1 and check for +24 VDC at P/J42-2 on the Distribution PWB. +24 VDC is measured at P/J42-2 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 6 on BSD 4.1 and check for a short/open circuit. Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
Enter DC330 004-021 Drum Motor. The Drum Motor runs. Y N Check for Logic (L) at P/J417B-18 Logic (L) is measured at P/J417B-18 Y N Perform the following: Go to Flag 8 on BSD 4.1 and check for an open/short circuit. Replace the Drum Motor (PL 1.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Perform the following: While exercising DC330 004-021 Drum Motor, check for a change of state on the Drum Motor On line P/J417B. While in [04-021] Component Control and the Drum Motor is running, check for the following conditions at P/J417B-18, Logic (L) 1/05 2-38 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
A Status Indicator RAPs
OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP
5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP

The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 650 msec after the DADF Transport Motor was energized.
N Check the belt on the DADF Feed Motor. Repair or replace the Belt (PL 12.4) as required.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Obstructions in the document transportation path. Contamination on the DADF Registration Sensor. Sufficient normal force at the Nudger Rolls Nudger Rolls and Feed Rolls that are glazed or contaminated Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J580 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Registration Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 and 5.6 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-110 Regi Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Registration Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N With paper at the DADF Registration Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/ J599-2 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J599-1 and P/J599-3 on DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 5.3. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 5 on BSD 5.3. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Enter dC330 005-040 Feed Motor. Press Start. DADF Feed Motor cycles. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J598-7 and P/J598-8 on the DADF Control PWB with the motor on. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.2. Check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3) +24 VDC is measured between P/J588-1 and P/J588-2 on the DADF Feed Motor with the motor on. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. Check the in line fuse for an open circuit. If the fuse is good, replace the DADF Feed Motor (PL 12.4) Feed rolls turn.
Observe the Set Gate Fingers. Enter dC330 005-012 Set Gate Solenoid Close. Press Start. Enter dC330 005-011 Set Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Set Gate fingers rise up, then fall back. Y N Enter dC330 005-012 Set Gate Solenoid Close. Press Start. The Set Gate Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J586-1and P/J586-2 on the Set Gate Solenoid. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J598-2 and P/J598-1 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J550-3 and P/J550-1 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to the IIT/IPS +24VDC Wirenet and the DC COM (24V RET) Wirenet. Check the wires between P/J550-2 and-1 on the DADF Control PWB and P/J35-1 and -2 on the IIT/IPS LVPS, and the wires between P/J550-4 and-3 on the DADF Control PWB, and P/J35-5 and -6 on the IIT/IPS LVPS for an open circuit. Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5). Enter dC330 005-011 Set Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Set Gate Solenoid deenergizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J598-2 and P/J598-1 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J586-1 and P/J586-3 on the Set Gate Solenoid. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.2 and check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5). Replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5). Perform the following: A Check the Solenoid for binding. Check the Set Gate Fingers for binding. Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-39
5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam
A Replace the Set Gate Solenoid (PL 12.5).
5-111 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP

The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 640 msec. after the DADF Transport Motor was energized while feeding the original.
Obstructions in the document path. Sufficient normal force at the Nudger Rolls Nudger Rolls and Feed Rolls that are glazed or contaminated
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Obstructions in the document transportation path. Contamination on the DADF Registration Sensor. Contamination on the DADF Belt. Contamination on the Platen Glass. Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J580 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Registration Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.1, 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for the following procedure.
Procedure
The trail edge of the document is past the Registration Sensor. Y N Enter dC330 005-055 Belt Motor CW. DADF Belt Motor energizes. Y N Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Check the Fuse (F1) on the DADF Control PWB. The fuse is good. Y N Install a new fuse. If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL 12.6). If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J595-2, P/J595-3, P/J595-4 P/ J595-5 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J595-1 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J594-1 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J599-3 and GND. Y N Go to the IIT/IPS +24VDC Wirenet and the DC COM (24V RET) Wirenet. Check the wires between P/J550-2 and-1 on the DADF Control PWB and P/J35-1 and -2 on the IIT/IPS LVPS, and the wires between P/J550-4 and-3 on the DADF Control PWB, and P/J35-5 and -6 on the IIT/IPS LVPS for an open circuit. Ensure that Fuse F1 on the DADF Control PWB is good. If the Fuse is good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 5.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Interlock Switch (PL 12.3).
D Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
5-110 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam
1/05 2-40
D Enter dC330 005-055 Belt Motor CW. Approximately +23 VDC is measured between pins 2, 3, 4, and 5 of P/J595 and GND Y N Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL 12.6).
5-112 DADF Registration Sensor ON Dynamic Jam (during Original Reverse) RAP
The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 500 msec. after the DADF Transport Motor was energized during reversal of the original.
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL 12.6). The Platen Belt runs, without generating excessive noise. Y N Check the Platen Belt and the Platen Belt Drive components. Repair or replace as required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. Check the following parts for wear slipping, damage or contamination. Feed Roll Assembly Registration Roll Registration Pinch Roll Document Belt
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Obstructions in the document transportation path. Clean Document Belt Refer to BSD 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-056 Belt Motor CCW. The DADF Document Transport is moving in the reverse direction. Y N Check the Platen Belt and the Platen Belt Drive components. Repair or replace as required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL 12.6). Check the following parts for wear, slipping, or damage. Duplex Drive Roll 1 Duplex Drive Roll 2 Registration Roll Registration Pinch Roll Document Belt
Enter dC330 005-110 Regi Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Registration Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N With paper at the DADF Registration Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/ J599-2 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J599-1 and P/J599-3 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 5.3. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 5 on BSD 5.3. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Check the following parts for wear slipping, damage or contamination. Feed Roll Assembly Registration Roll Registration Pinch Roll Document Belt
If the above items are good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 12.5).
1/05 2-41
5-111 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam
5-113 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam (during Original Reverse) RAP
The DADF Registration Sensor did not actuate within 1,150 msec. after the DADF Transport Motor was energized during reversal of the original.
5-115 DADF Exit Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP

The DADF Exit Sensor did not actuate within 800 msec. after the DADF Transport Motor was energized, while exchanging or discharging the original.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Obstructions in the document transportation path. Contamination on the DADF Exit Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J595, P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.5 for the following procedure.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Obstructions in the document transportation path. Clean Document Belt Refer to BSD 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-056 Belt Motor CCW. The DADF Document Transport is moving in the reverse direction. Y N Check the Platen Belt and the Platen Belt Drive components. Repair or replace as required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Belt Motor (PL 12.6). Check the following parts for wear, slipping, or damage. Duplex Drive Roll 1 Duplex Drive Roll 2 Registration Roll Registration Pinch Roll Document Belt
Procedure
The lead edge of the document is past the Exit Sensor. Y N Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. The DADF Exit Motor energizes. Y N Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Check the Fuse (F2) on the DADF Control PWB. The fuse is good. Y N Install a new fuse. If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9). If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J596-2, P/J596-3, P/J596-4 P/ J596-5 and GND. on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J596-1 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Ensure that Fuse F2 on the DADF Control PWB is good. If the Fuse is good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9). Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. Press Start. Approximately +17 VDC is measured between pins 2, 3, 4, and 5 of P/J596 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9). Replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9). Check the Platen Belt and the Platen Belt Drive components. Repair or replace as required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues check the following parts for wear, slipping excessive contamination or damage. A Exit Roll Drive Belt
5-113 DADF Registration Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam
1/05 2-42
A Exit Roll Exit Pinch Roll Document Belt Platen Glass Enter dC330 005-115 Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Exit Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N With paper at the DADF Exit Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-19 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J589-1 and P/J589-3 on the DADF Exit Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 3 BSD 5.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Check the following parts for wear, slipping excessive contamination or damage. Exit Roll Drive Belt Exit Roll Exit Pinch Roll Document Belt Platen Glass Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between pins 2, 3, 4, 5 of P/J596 and GND. on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J596-1 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Ensure that Fuse F2 on the DADF Control PWB is good. If the Fuse is good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9). Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. The Press Start. Approximately +17 VDC is measured between pins 2, 3, 4, and 5 of P/J596 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9). Replace the DADF Exit Motor (PL 12.9). Check the Platen Belt and the Platen Belt Drive components. Repair or replace as required. If the problem continues perform ADJ 12.3.3. If the problem continues check the following parts for wear, slipping excessive contamination or damage. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-43 Status Indicator RAPs Exit Roll Drive Belt Exit Roll
5-116 DADF Exit Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP

The DADF Exit Sensor did not deactuate within 650 msec after it was actuated.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Obstructions in the document transportation path. Contamination on the DADF Exit Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J595, P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.5 for the following procedure.
Procedure
The trail edge of the document is past the Exit Sensor. Y N Enter dC330 005-081 Exit Motor. The DADF Exit Motor energizes. Y N Remove the DADF Rear Cover. Check the Fuse (F2) on the DADF Control PWB. The fuse is good. Y N Install a new fuse. If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Exit Motor. If the fuse blows again, replace the DADF Control PWB.
If the above items are good and free from excessive contamination, replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9).
5-115 DADF Exit Sensor ON Dynamic Jam RAP, 5-
A Exit Pinch Roll Document Belt
5-189 No Object Sensor Static Jam RAP

The Control Logic has detected the document Handler was raised while running a DADF job.
Enter dC330 005-115 Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Exit Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N With paper at the DADF Exit Sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-19 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J589-1 and P/J589-3 on the DADF Exit Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 3 BSD 5.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Check the following parts for wear slipping or damage. Exit Roll Drive Belt Exit Roll Exit Pinch Roll Document Belt Platen Glass
Initial Actions
Ensure that then document handler is fully closed.
Procedure
If the document Handler was not opened during a DADF job, go to 6-300 Platen Cover Open RAP to troubleshoot the Platen Open Switch.
If the above items are good and free from excessive contamination, replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9).
5-116 DADF Exit Sensor OFF Dynamic Jam RAP, 5-
1/05 2-44
5-195 No Mix - Size Mismatch Jam RAP

The DADF Control PWB detected different sized documents when the mixed sized feature has not been selected.
5-196 DADF Document Sensor Static Jam RAP

The DADF Document Sensor detected paper when power was switched on.
Procedure
This is a message Fault and requires operator actions. If this Fault occurs and the originals are all the same size, check that the Side Guide can be properly adjusted against the stack. If so, go to the 5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Refer to BSD 5.2 for the following procedure. Contamination on the DADF Document Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J581 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Document Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure that the DADF Entrance Tray is free of any paper or debris.
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-102 Document Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J599-5 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.2. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
1/05 2-45
5-195 No Mix - Size Mismatch Jam RAP, 5-196
5-197 DADF Registration Sensor Static Jam RAP

The DADF Registration Sensor has detected the presence of a document after the power was switched on and the DADF Top Cover was closed.
5-198 DADF Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP

The DADF Exit Sensor has detected the presence of a document after the power was switched on and the DADF Top Cover was closed.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Ensure that no documents remain in the DADF. Contamination on the DADF Registration Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J580 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Registration Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.3 for the following procedure.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Ensure that no documents remain in the DADF. Contamination on the DADF Exit Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.5 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-110 Regi Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J599-2 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.3.Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Registration Sensor (PL 12.5). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-115 Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J599-19 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 5.5.Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Exit Sensor (PL 12.9). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
5-197 DADF Registration Sensor Static Jam RAP, 5-
1/05 2-46
5-199 DADF Duplex Sensor Static Jam RAP

The DADF Duplex has detected the presence of a document after the power was switched on and the DADF Top Cover was closed. Refer to BSDs 5.3 for the following procedure.
5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected a DADF Size Sensor 1 or DADF Size Sensor 2 failure or a DADF Ram Test failure after switching the power on or placing the originals in the Entrance Tray.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Ensure that no documents remain in the DADF. Contamination on the DADF Duplex Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J589 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Exit Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.3 for the following procedure.
Initial Actions
Check for the following: Ensure that the Document Handler is free of any paper or debris. Ensure that connectors P/J599, P/J582 and P/J583 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Size Sensors 1 and 2, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.3 for the following procedure.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 005-119 Dup Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J599-14 and GND on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 5.3. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the DADF Duplex Sensor (PL 12.7). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). The problem appears to be intermittent. Replace the DADF Duplex Sensor (PL 12.7). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Enter dC330 005-150 #1 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 1. The display changed from H to L. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-8 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J582-2 on DADF Size Sensor 1. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J582-1 and P/J582-3 on the DADF Size Sensor 1. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Enter dC330 005-151 #2 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 2. The display changed from H to L. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-11 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J583-2 on the DADF Size Sensor 2. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J583-1 and P/J583-3 on the DADF Size Sensor 2. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-47 B C D Status Indicator RAPs
5-199 DADF Duplex Sensor Static Jam RAP, 5-274
D Replace the DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5).
5-275 DADF RAM Check Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected a DADF Size Sensor 1 or DADF Size Sensor 2 failure or a DADF Ram Test failure after switching the power on or placing the originals in the Entrance Tray.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-150 #1 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 1. The display changed from H to L. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-8 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J582-2 on DADF Size Sensor 1. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J582-1 and P/J582-3 on the DADF Size Sensor 1. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Enter dC330 005-151 #2 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 2. The display changed from H to L. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-11 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J583-2 on the DADF Size Sensor 2. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J583-1 and P/J583-3 on the DADF Size Sensor 2. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). A Status Indicator RAPs B C D Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
5-274 Original Size Sensor Fail RAP, 5-275 DADF
1/05 2-48
D Replace the DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5).
5-301 Top Cover Open RAP

The DADF Control PWB detected a signal from the Top Cover Front and/or Rear Interlock Switches indicating that the DADF Top Cover is open at the start of print or during print run.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
Initial Actions
Check for the following: The magnetic latches or actuators for the top cover are not damaged or loose. The magnet plate on the top cover fully contacts the magnetic latches. Refer to BSD 5.1 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Open the Top Cover. Enter dC330 005-301 Top Cover Interlock Switch. Actuate both Top Cover Switches. The display changes. from H to L Y N Go to BSD 5.1. Check both Interlock Switches with a meter. Ensure that there is continuity across the switch contacts when the switches are closed. Replace any defective switches (PL 12.2). If the switches are good, go to Flag 1, Flag 2, Flag 3, and Flag 4 on BSD 5.1, and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Check that the Top Cover Interlock Switches are correctly installed. If the problem continues, replace both interlock switches (PL 12.2).
1/05 2-49
5-275 DADF RAM Check Fail RAP, 5-301 Top Cover
5-500 DADF No Originals RAP

The DADF Control PWB detected that the original was removed from the Entrance Tray after the DADF started operating.
5-501 DADF Document Size Irregular RAP

The Control Logic has detected that a automatically-detected size of the original was irregular.
Initial Actions
Return the removed originals to the Entrance Tray and attempt to run the job again. If no originals were removed, proceed with this RAP. Check for the following: The Side Guide can be properly adjusted against the stack. Contamination on the DADF Document Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J599 and P/J581 are seated correctly on the DADF Control PWB and DADF Document Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Refer to BSD 5.2 for the following procedure.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-150 #1 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 1. The display changed from H to L. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-8 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J582-2 on DADF Size Sensor 1. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J582-1 and P/J582-3 on the DADF Size Sensor 1. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit. Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Enter dC330 005-151 #2 Size Sensor. Press Start. Block DADF Size Sensor 2. The display changed from H to L. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-11 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N With the sensor blocked, less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J583-2 on the DADF Size Sensor 2. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J583-1 and P/J583-3 on the DADF Size Sensor 2. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 5.3 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5). A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Procedure
Enter dC330 005-102 Document Sensor. Press Start. Block the DADF Document Sensor. The display changes from H to L. Y N Less than +1 VDC is measured at P/J599-5 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J581-1 and P/J581-3 on the DADF Document Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 5.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5). Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the DADF Document Sensor (PL 12.5). If the problem continues, replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3).
5-500 DADF No Originals RAP, 5-501 DADF Document
1/05 2-50
C Go to Flag 4 on BSD 5.3 and check the wire for an open circuit.
5-503 Miss Doc Reset RAP

The Missing Document Reset fault code (05-503) is displayed when the Control Logic has detected that after counting and returning the originals, there is a mismatch between the number of pages counted and the actual number of pages.
Replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). Replace the following until the problem is resolved DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). DADF Size Sensor 1 (Rear) (PL 12.5) DADF Size Sensor 2 (Front) (PL 12.5).
Procedure
Ensure that the Document Handler is free of any paper or debris. Remove and reinsert the originals in the DADF Entrance Tray. Run the job again.
1/05 2-51
5-501 DADF Document Size Irregular RAP, 5-503
5-999 ADF Document Misfeed RAP

A document misfeed occurred during or after ADF Jam Recovery.
OF5-1 DADF Jam Recovery RAP

Jam Recovery problems occur when a jam clearance activity results in the complete re-copying of a set of documents, instead of resuming the copy job at the point where the jam occurred.
Procedure
Check the set of originals for torn or damaged documents. Replace or recreate the original as required. Remove and reinsert the originals in the ADF. Run the job again.
Procedure
Check the Tag Matrix for TAG P19. If the Tag is not marked off, install the Tag 19 DADF Software Upgrade to V2.2 Kit, by replacing U2 on the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3) with the EProm contained in the kit.
5-999 ADF Document Misfeed RAP, OF5-1 DADF Jam
1/05 2-52
6-275 Angle Sensor Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected the Platen Angle Sensor is not in the correct state for the Job Programed.
C Go to Flag 2 on 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Check the Document Handler for dirt or debris. Check that the Document Handler Cover opens and closes without binding.
+5VDC is measured between P/J515-4 and GND on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2). Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2)
Procedure
Close the Document Handler Cover. Enter dC330 006-301 Angle Sensor. Press Start. The Display is HIGH. Y N Open the Document Handler Cover. The Display is Low. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J531-1 and P/J531-3 on the Platen Angle Sensor. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J515-6 and P/J515-2 on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB. (PL 3.5). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2). +5VDC is measured between P/J515-4 to GND on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 6.2 and check the wire for an open or short. If the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2). Block and unblock the Platen Angle Sensor. The Display changes. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 6.2 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. Clean and check the Platen Angle Sensor for damage. If the problem continues, replace the Platen Angle Sensor (PL 3.2) Open the Document Handler Cover. The Display is Low. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J531-1 and P/J531-3 on the Platen Angle Sensor. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J515-6 and P/J515-2 on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5). A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-53
6-275 Angle Sensor Fail RAP
6-277 IISS - DADF Communications Fault RAP

The Pre IPS PWB detected a communication fault between the DADF Control PWB and the Pre IPS PWB.
6-300 Platen Cover Open RAP

A fault code for Platen Cover Open appears even when the Platen Cover is physically closed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.3 in the following procedure. Ensure that P/J551 on the DADF Control PWB is firmly seated. Ensure that J543B on the communication line is firmly seated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Check that the Platen Cover closes properly.
Procedure
Close the Platen Cover. Enter dC330 006-300 Platen Interlock Switch (IISS). Press Start. The Display is H. Y N Manually actuate the Platen Open Switch. The display changes. Y N Disconnect P/J530. +5VDC is measured between P/J515-3 and GND on the Pre IPS PWB. Y N Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) Reconnect P/J530. Open the Platen Cover. The voltage at P/J515-3 goes to less than +1 VDC. Y N Go to Flag 4, Flag 5, and Flag 6 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2). Check the Platen Open Switch for intermittent operation. If the switch is good, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). If the problem continues, replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2). Check the Platen Open Switch for alignment and /or damage. If the Fault continues, replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2). Open the Platen Cover The display is L Y N Check the Platen Open Switch for alignment and /or damage. If the Fault continues, replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2). Check the Platen Open Switch for alignment and /or damage. Go to Flag 4, Flag 5, on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Platen Open Switch (PL 3.2).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. The Fault Code is still declared. Y N Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. +5VDC is measured between P/J550-5 and P/J550-6 on the DADF Control PWB. Y N Go to the +5VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 3.3 and check the wiring for an open circuit. If the wiring is OK, then replace the DADF Control PWB (PL 12.3). If the problem continues, replace the following: Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5) Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
6-277 IISS - DADF Communications Fault RAP, 6-300
1/05 2-54
6-312 Memory Hotline Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected a communication error between the POST IPS PWB and the MEM SYS PWB.
6-340 Pre IPS RAM Test Error RAP

The Pre IPS PWB Ram Test detected a failure at power on.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in this procedure: Ensure that the PRE IPS PWB, the MEM SYS PWB and the Post IPS PWB are firmly seated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Check that P/J560 and P/J561 on the MEM SYS PWB are seated. Check that the Option Memory PWBs are fully seated on the MEM SYS PWB.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. The fault code is still declared. Y N Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Perform the following: Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. The fault code is still declared. Y N Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Replace the following: Option Memory PWBs (PL 3.5) on at a time. MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5). POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
1/05 2-55
6-312 Memory Hotline Fail RAP, 6-340 Pre IPS RAM
6-345 Pre IPS EEPROM Failure RAP

A Failure was detected when writing to the NVM and a communication failure with the EEPROM when writing into the Pre IPS PWB NVM.
6-355 IPS Fan Fail RAP

The IIT Driver PWB detected a control error caused by an IPS Fan failure. This error is not detected during document scan.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 3.3 PWB Communications (DADF) in this procedure: Ensure that P/J551 on the DADF Control PWB is firmly seated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.1 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code is still declared. Y N Inspect the PRE IPS PWB the MEM SYS PWB, the POST IPS PWB for loose connections or any obvious electrical/mechanical cause for malfunction. Perform the following: Replace the PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Enter dC330 006-013 Cooling Fan High Speed. Press Start. The IPS Fan rotates. Y N Press Stop. Enter dC330 006-003 Cooling Fan Low Speed. Press Start. The IPS Fan rotates. Y N +3.5VDC is measured between P/J524-4 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on the BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). +24VDC is pulsed between P/J523-2 and P/J523-4 on the IIT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2). Press Stop. Select [06013]. Press Start. +5VDC is measured between P/J524-3 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on the BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). +24VDC is measure between P/J523-1 and P/J523-4 on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IPS Fan (PL 3.2). Press Stop. Select [06-013]. Press Start. +5VDC is measured between P/J524-3 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on the BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the IPS PWB (PL 3.5). +24VDC is measured between P/J523-1 and P/J523-4 on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IPS Fan (PL 3.2). +5VDC is measured between P/J515-16 and GND on the Pre IPS PWB.
6-345 Pre IPS EEPROM Failure RAP, 6-355 IPS Fan
1/05 2-56
N Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
6-360 Carriage Position Failure RAP

The Control Logic detected the Carriage out of position during Carriage Initialization
+ 5VDC is measured at P/J523-3 and GND on the Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short. If the wire is OK, replace the IPS Fan (PL 3.2). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.3 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Check the Carriage assembly for wear, dirt and debris, and misalignment of the components. Verify that the IIT Regi Sensor is correctly aligned and free from contamination. Verify that the Carriage and Carriage Cable are installed correctly and free of damage.
Procedure
Go to the 6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP.
1/05 2-57
6-355 IPS Fan Fail RAP, 6-360 Carriage Position
6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP

The IIT Driver PWB detected an inability to control the Carriage during carriage during initialization.
N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.3 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure Check the Carriage assembly for wear, dirt, debris, and misalignment of the components. Verify that the IIT Registration Sensor is correctly aligned and free from contamination. Verify that the Carriage and Carriage Cable are installed properly and free from damage.
+5VDC is measured between P/J520-1,4,5,6,3 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Carriage Motor (PL 3.3). Continue to run the Carriage through the full range of travel using dC330 006-005 IIT Scan Motor (Scan) and 006-006 IIT Scan Motor (Return). Observe the motion and listen for any abnormal sounds in the Carriage motor and assembly. The Carriage motor and assembly appear to be defect free. Y N Inspect the assembly for damage, misalignment, dirt, or debris. Verify that the Carriage Cables are properly installed and free from damage. Repair or replace as required. Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, Flag 3, and Flag 4 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the following: Carriage Motor (PL 3.3) IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2) Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
Procedure
Enter dC330 006-212 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the Full Rate Carriage from the full left position to the full right position and back full left. The display changes from L to H then back to L. Y N Actuate the IIT Regi Sensor with a piece of paper. The display is L. Y N Disconnect P/J532 on the IIT Registration Sensor. The display is H. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the IIT Registration Sensor (PL 3.2). Deactuate the IIT Registration Sensor. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J532-2 and GND on the IIT Registration Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.3 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) There is +5 VDC between P/J532-1 and P/J532-3 on the IIT Regi Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.3 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Clean and align the IIT Regi Sensor. If the problem continues, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2). Clean the IIT Regi Sensor and check for damaged and proper aligned. If the problem continues, replace the IIT Regi Sensor (PL 3.2). Enter dC330 006-005 IIT Scan Motor (Scan) and 006-006 IIT Scan Motor (Return). Carriage moves Right [06-005] and Left [06-006]. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J524-12 and P/J524-8 on the IIT Driver PWB The
6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP
1/05 2-58
6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP

The IIT Driver PWB detected a control error caused by an Exposure Lamp power failure.
6-389 Carriage Overrun Fail (Scan End) RAP

The IIT Regi (Registration) Sensor detected an overrun during Full Rate Carriage scanning.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 006-002 ITT Exposure Lamp. Press Start. The Exposure Lamp lights. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J524 -1 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 6.1 and check the wire. If the wire is OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). 0 VDC is measured between P/J534-3 and P/J534-2 on the Lamp Ballast. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IIT Driver PWB Set the DMM to max recording mode (+ peak hold). +5VDC is measured between P/ J524-2 and GND on the IIT Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Set the DMM to max recording mode (+ peak hold). +5VDC is measured between P/ J534-6 and P/J534-2 on the Lamp Ballast PWB. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD 6.1 and check the wire for an open or short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2). +24VDC is measured between P/J534-5 and P/J534-2 on the Lamp Ballast PWB. Y N Go to Flag 11 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2). Replace the Flash Lamp Ballast PWB (PL 3.4) if the problem continues, replace the Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4). If the Fault continues, perform the following: Ensure that the connectors are fully seated. Go to Flag 7, Flag 8, Flag 9 and Flag 10 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for damage. Replace the following in order: Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4) Lamp Ballast PWB (PL 3.4) IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2) Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
1/05 2-59
6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP, 6-389 Carriage
6-390 Carriage Overrun Fail (Home End) RAP

The IIT Regi (Registration) Sensor detected an overrun during Full Rate return.
6 391 Scan Initialize Failure RAP

The IIT Regi (Registration) Sensor Changed to high when the Carriage Initialization Started.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.3 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Verify that the IIT Regi Sensor is correctly aligned and free from contamination. Verify that the Full Rate Carriage and Carriage Cables are installed correctly. Check the Full Rate Carriage Assembly for wear, foreign matter, and alignment of the components.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.3 and 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J515 on the Pre IPS PWB is firmly seated. Ensure that P/J532 on the IIT Regi Sensor is firmly seated.
Procedure
Enter dC330 006-212 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Move the Full Rate Carriage from the Home position to the full left position. The display changes from High to Low. Y N Go to the 6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP. Move the Full Rate Carriage to the Home Position. The display changes to High. Y N Go to the 6-361 Scan Initialize Regi Sensor Failure RAP. Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
Procedure
6-390 Carriage Overrun Fail (Home End) RAP, 6 391
1/05 2-60
6-500 Lamp Not Ready RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the Exposure Lamp Light did not reach the specified value at Start.
6-615 b* Failure RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the measured b* is out of the specific range.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.1 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.2 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that the PRE IPS PWB, CCD PWB, MEM SYS PWB and the POST IPS PWB and their connectors are seated properly. Check that the Option Memory PWBs are fully seated on the MEM SYS PWB.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues go to the 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the fault continues, replace the following: CCD PWB (PL 3.2). Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5). POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
1/05 2-61
6-500 Lamp Not Ready RAP, 6-615 b* Failure RAP
6-620 Reflection Rate Failure RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the measured reflective rate for each color is out of the specific range.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.1 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that the Exposure Lamp Light Path is not blocked or dirty.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the Fault continues go to the 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP.
6-620 Reflection Rate Failure RAP
1/05 2-62
7-281 Tray 1 Lift Motor Failure RAP

The Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor was energized.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.5 and BSD 7.10 for the following procedure. Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 1. Ensure connector P/J414A on the IOT Drive PWB is properly seated (PL 9.2). Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Pull out Paper Tray 1. Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). Remove the Screw and open the Tray 1 Feed Assembly (PL 2.2).
Enter dC330 008-008 Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed) Tray1 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J414A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 on the IOT LVPS and GND. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J414A-A15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 on the IOT LVPS and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.2). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.5 and check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If the wires are OK replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). Enter dC330 008-231 Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J414A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.5 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) A B C Status Indicator RAPs
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 1 Feed Assembly without disconnecting P/J791. Enter dC330 008-221 Tray 1 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J414A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J130-1 and P/J130-3 on the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J414A-11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.5 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check that the mechanical flag on the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor is not bent. If the sensor flag is OK, replace the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Push the Tray in. Enter dC330 008-007 Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift) Tray1 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times.
1/05 2-63
C Replace the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5).

The Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after Tray 2 Lift/ Feed Motor was energized.
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 1 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 1 Assembly (PL 2.1) Wiring Harness
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.6 and BSD 7.10 for the following procedure. Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 2. Ensure connector P/J803 on the Tray PWB is properly seated (PL 9.3). Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Pull out Paper Tray 2. Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). Remove the Screw and open the Tray 2 Feed Assembly (PL 2.4).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 2 Feed Assembly without disconnecting P/J792. Enter dC330 008-222 Tray 2 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J130-1 and P/J130-3 on the Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J803-A11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.6 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.6 and check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Push the Tray in. Enter dC330 008-012 Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift), 008-013 Tray 2 Feed/ Lift Motor (Feed) Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times.
1/05 2-64
A CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J803-A14 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 on the IOT LVPS and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). +24 VDC is measured between P/J803-A15 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS and P/J803A15 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Enter dC330 008-232 Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-A16 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
C Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J803-A8 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.6 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.6 and check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 2 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 2 Assembly (PL 2.1) Wiring Harness
1/05 2-65

The Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5) failed to change state within the specified time after Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor was energized.
CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J803B-14 and GND on the Tray PWB. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). +24 VDC is measured between P/J803B-15 and GND on the Tray PWB. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.7 and check the wires and connectors. If the wires and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.7 and check the wires and connectors. If the wires and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). If the problem continue place the Tray PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-233 Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J803B-7 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 3 Feed Assembly without disconnecting P/J793. Enter dC330 008-223 Tray 3 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J130-1 and P/J130-3 on the Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J803B-11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.7 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.7 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-017 Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift), 008-018 Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed)] Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times.
1/05 2-66

The Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor was energized.
+5 VDC is measured between P/J803B-8 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.7 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.7 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 3 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 3 Assembly (PL 2.3) Wiring Harness
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover INTLK Switch. Remove the Tray 4 Feed Assembly without disconnecting P/J794. Enter dC330 008-224 Tray 4 Level Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-9 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J130-2 on the Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J130-1 and P/J130-3 on the Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J804-11 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.8 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.5). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Push in the Tray. Enter dC330 008-022 Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor (Lift), 008-023 Tray 4 Feed/ Lift Motor (Feed) Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor. Press Start and Stop several times.
1/05 2-67
A CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J804-14 and GND on the Tray PWB. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). +24 VDC is measured between P/J804-15 and GND on the Tray PWB. Y N Check the fuse on the Tray PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.2). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.7 and check the wires and connectors. If the wires and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (PL 2.6). If the problem continue place the Tray PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-234 Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J129-1 and P/J129-3 on the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. A B C Status Indicator RAPs
+5 VDC is measured between P/J804-6 on the Tray PWB and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the Tray 1 Stack Height Sensor (PL 2.2). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.8 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor (PL 8.1). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 4 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 4 Assembly (PL 2.3) Wiring Harness
1/05 2-68
7-286 Tray 5 Broken (UP) RAP

The Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor failed to change state within 3 seconds after the Tray 5 Feed/Lift Motor Up was energized.
N +5 VDC is measured at P/J147-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J147-1 and P/J147-3 on the Tray 5 Down Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 and P/J21-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.9 and check wires between P/J147 and P/J416 for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor (PL 2.12). Replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor (PL 2.12).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.9 and BSD 7.10 for the following procedure. Ensure the Tray 5 top cover is closed. Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 5. Ensure connector P/J416A on the IOT Drive PWB is properly seated. Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB.
Procedure
Cheat the Tray 5 Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-226 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level up Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-6 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J145-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J145-1 and P/J145-3 on the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 and P/J21-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.9 and check wires between P/J145 and P/J416 for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor (PL 2.11). Replace the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor (PL 2.11). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.9 and check the wire for a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Tray 5 Switch. Enter dC330 008-227 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level Down Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.9 and check the wire for a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 [008-040 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CCW]. Press Start and Stop several times. CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Start. +24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-20 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-042 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CW. Press Start and Stop several times.
1/05 2-69
CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Start. +24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.9 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-236 Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-8 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J146-2 on the Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J146-1 and P/J146-3 on the Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-16 and P/J21-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.5 and check wires between P/J146 and P/J416 for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 5 Paper Sensor (PL 2.1). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.9 and check the wire for a short circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). B Status Indicator RAPs
B Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 5 Assembly (PL 2.9) Wiring Harness
1/05 2-70
B Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
7-287 Tray 5 Broken (Down) RAP

The Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor failed to change state within 3 seconds after the Tray 5 Feed/ Lift Motor Down was energized.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.9 and BSD 7.10 for the following procedure. Ensure the Tray 5 top cover is closed. Ensure there is paper loaded in the Tray 5. Ensure connector P/J416A on the IOT Drive PWB is properly seated (PL 9.2). Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
+5 VDC is measured between P/J147-1 and P/J147-3 on the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/ J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor (PL 2.12). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.9 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor (PL 2.12). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-042 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CW. Press Start and Stop several times. CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-20 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 [008-040 Tray 5 Lifter Motor CCW]. Press Start and Stop several times. CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven, it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. The Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J416B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. C 1/05 2-71 D Status Indicator RAPs
Procedure
Cheat the Tray 5 Switch. Enter dC330 008-226 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level up Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-6 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J145-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J145-1 and P/J145-3 on the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/ J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor (PL 2.11). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.9 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor (PL 2.11). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Tray 5 Switch. Enter dC330 008-227 Tray 5 (Bypass) Level Down Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J147-2 on the Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor.
A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
D Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP.
7-340 All Tray Broken RAP

The IOT detected that all Paper Trays are not functional.
Go to Flag 5 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 5 Lift Motor (PL 2.12). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-236 Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 5 Paper Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J416B-8 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J146-2 on the Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J146-1 and P/J146-3 on the Tray 5 Paper Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/ J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Replace the Tray 5 Paper Sensor (PL 2.1). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 7.9 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 5 Paper Sensor (PL 2.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 5 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.9) Tray 5 Assembly (PL 2.9) Wiring Harness
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 1.2 for the following procedure. Ensure the L/H Cover is securely closed. Ensure connectors P/J801A, P/J802A and P/J802B on the Tray PWB are properly seated (PL 9.3). Check for crimped or broken wires to connectors on the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check the fuse on the Tray PWB (PL 9.3) to ensure it is good. Check the fuses on the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3) to ensure they are good.
Procedure
+5 VDC is measured between P/J800-3 and P/J800-4 on the Tray PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J44-9 and P/J44-13 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Check the fuse on the Distribution PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.3). +5 VDC is measured between P/J420A-1 and P/J420A-2 on the IOT CPU PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J44-8 and GND on the Distribution PWB. Y N Check the fuse on the Distribution PWB. Fuse is OK. Y N Replace fuse (PL 9.3). +5VDC is measured between P/J21-1, 2, 3, or 4 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.2 and check for an open or short circuit. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 1.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J800-1 and P/J800-2 on the Tray PWB.
1/05 2-72
N +24 VDC is measured between P/J23-3 and GND on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 1.2 and check for an open wiring. If the wiring is OK, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
7-500 Tray out of position during Job RAP

The machine detected that the Tray is out of position during the Job.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.1 through BSD 7.3 for the following procedure. Ensure the Tray attributes selected match the paper loaded in the Tray. Ensure that the End Guides are properly adjusted to the paper in the Tray. Ensure Connector PJ802 on the Tray PWB is seated properly for Trays 2,3,4. Ensure that there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Procedure
Tray 2 was in use when the fault occurred. Y N Tray 3 was in use when the fault occurred. Y N Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-250 Tray 4 size switch 1, 008-251 Tray 4 size switch 2, 008-252 Tray 4 size switch 3, 008-253 Tray 4 size switch 4 for the Tray 4 Size Sensor and press Start. Open Tray 4. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds with Table 3. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-8 on the Tray PWB. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/J415B-14 on the IOT PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.3 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 4 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 4 Assembly (PL 2.4). Tray 4 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-245 Tray 3 size switch 1, 008-246 Tray 3 size switch 2, 008-247 Tray 3 size switch 3, 008-248 Tray 3 size switch 4 for the Tray 3 Size Sensor and press Start. Open Tray 3. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds with Table 2. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-7 on the Tray PWB.
A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-73
B Status Indicator RAPs
B Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.2 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 3 Assembly (PL 2.4). Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Table 2 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 3) XVDC at 008-245 008-246 008-247 008-248 Test SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point L L L L L L L L 4.64 5.0
Tray 3 Open Tray No Unit
Table 3 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 4) XVDC at 008-250 008-251 008-252 008-253 Test Point SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 L L L L L L L L 4.64 5.0
Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-240 Tray 2 size switch 1, 008-241 Tray 2 size switch 2, 008-242 Tray 2 size switch 3, 008-243 Tray 2 size switch 4 for the Tray 2 Size Sensor and press Start. Open Tray 2. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds with Table 1. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-6 on the Tray PWB. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/ J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.1 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 2 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 2 Assembly (PL 2.4). Tray 2 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Table 1 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 2) XVDC at 008-240 008-241 008-242 008-243 Test SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point L L L L L L L L 4.64 5.0
1/05 2-74
C Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
7-501 Tray No Paper RAP

The machine detected no paper in the paper tray selected. NOTE: This RAP should be used when the presence of paper is not detected in any of the Paper Trays or if the paper tray selected ran out of paper and the Auto Tray Selection (ATS) could not find paper of the same orientation from another tray to finish the job.
Replace the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 2 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 2 Assembly (PL 2.1) Wiring Harness
Initial Actions
Check the following items for dirt, binding, freedom of movement or excessive wear: Tray No Paper Sensor, Tray Level Sensor, and Tray Nudger Solenoid. Verify that the Trays are not jammed. Ensure that all paper sizes are correct. Ensure paper is properly loaded in the Trays. Ensure all paper Trays are closed.
Procedure
Select Tray 1 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 1 and the message Ready to Copy appears. Y N Enter dC330 008-231 Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J414A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. Replace the Tray 1 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 1 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 1 Assembly (PL 2.1) Wiring Harness
Select Tray 3 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 3 and the message Ready to Copy appears. Y N Enter dC330 008-233 Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-13 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. Replace the Tray 3 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 3 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 3 Assembly (PL 2.1) Wiring Harness
Select Tray 2 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 2 and the message Ready to Copy appears. Y N Enter dC330 008-232 Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-16 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 2 No Paper Sensor. A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-75
Select Tray 4 on the Control Panel while observing the UI. Paper is detected in Tray 4 and the message ready to copy appears. Y N Enter dC330 008-234 Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. The display changed from L to H. Y N +0 VDC is measured at P/J415A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J129-2 on the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
G Status Indicator RAPs
G Replace the Tray 4 No Paper Sensor (PL 2.5).
7-502 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Width) RAP

The machine detected that the paper size width is not being detected correctly in Tray 5.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Tray 4 Paper Feed Assembly (PL 2.4) Tray 4 Assembly (PL 2.1) Wiring Harness
Initial Actions
Perform ADJ 9.1.17. Refer to BSD 7.4 for the following procedure. Check for obstructions in the paper path. Go to the Control Panel, ensure that Tray 5 Paper Size indicator is set to the correct paper size loaded in Tray 5, and that the width guide is against the paper. Ensure that the NVM location for the Market is the correct country code, 752-001 = 2
Check the wire harnesses and connectors of all the Tray paper feed assemblies for an intermittent problem.
Procedure
The paper size being utilized for this procedure matches the paper size selected on the Touch Screen. Y N Voltage is measured at P/J146-B15 on the IOT PWB and GND on the Tray 5 Size Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J148-3 on the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor and GND. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor (PL 2.13). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor (PL 2.13). If that does not correct the problem, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or missing. Spring (PL 2.13). Link (PL 2.13). Tray 5 Size Sensor (PL 2.13). Tray 5 Assembly (PL 2.9).
1/05 2-76
7-503 Tray 5 Paper Size Mismatch (Length) RAP

The machine detected that the paper size length is not being detected correctly for Tray 5.
A Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, binding, or missing. Tray 5 Feed Clutch (PL 2.9) Tray 5 Retard Roll (PL 2.12) Tray 5 Feed Roll (PL 2.9) Tray 5 Lifter Motor (PL 2.12)
Initial Actions
Perform ADJ 9.1.17. Refer to BSD 7.4 for the following procedure. Check for obstructions in the paper path. Go to the Control Panel, ensure that Tray 5 Paper Size indicator is set to the correct paper size loaded in Tray 5. Ensure that the NVM location for the Market is the correct country code, 752-001 = 2
Procedure
The paper size being utilized for this procedure matches the paper size selected on the Touch Screen. Y N Voltage is measured at P/J146-B15 on the IOT PWB and GND on the Tray 5 Size Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured at P/J148-2 on the Tray 5 Size Sensor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/J148-1 and P/J148-3 on the Tray 5 Size Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J21-1 and P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. +5 VDC is measured between P/J416B-B4 and P/J21-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the Tray 5 Size Sensor (PL 2.13). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 7.4 and check wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor (PL 2.11). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Size Sensor (PL 2.4). If that does not correct the problem, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Registration Sensor. The display changed from H to L. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-77 Status Indicator RAPs
7-504 Tray Size Change during Job RAP

The machine detected that the paper size changed during the Job.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.1 through BSD 7.4 for the following procedure. Ensure the Tray attributes selected match the paper loaded in the Tray. Ensure that the End Guides are properly adjusted to the paper in the Tray. Ensure Connector PJ802 on the Tray PWB is seated properly for Trays 2,3,4. Ensure that there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. If 12x18 paper is being used in Trays 2,3,or 4 go to ADJ 9.1.19.
N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-7 on the Tray PWB. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 2 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.2 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Procedure
Tray 2 was in use when the fault occurred. Y N Tray 3 was in use when the fault occurred. Y N Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-250 Tray 4 size switch 1, 008-251 Tray 4 size switch 2, 008-252 Tray 4 size switch 3, 008-253 Tray 4 size switch 4 for the Tray 4 four Size Sensor and press Start. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds to the paper size loaded in Tray 4. (Refer to Table 3 for the correct Tray Sensor States for the matching paper size). Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-8 on the Tray PWB. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 3 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/J415B-14 on the IOT PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.3 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 4 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the PROBLEM is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 4 Assembly (PL 2.4). Tray 4 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 3 Assembly (PL 2.4). Tray 3 Size Sensor (PL 2.1).
Enter dC330 and Active Stack 008-240 Tray 2 size switch 1, 008-241 Tray 2 size switch 2, 008-242 Tray 2 size switch 3, 008-243 Tray 2 size switch 4 for the Tray 2 Size Sensor and press Start. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds to the paper size loaded in Tray 2. (Refer to Table 3 for the correct Tray Sensor States for the matching paper size). Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at TP-6 on the Tray PWB. Y N Check for +XVDC (Refer to Table 1 for the DC Voltages) +XVDC is measured at P/ J415B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.1 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Tray 2 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the PROBLEM is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 2 Assembly (PL 2.4). Tray 2 Size Sensor (PL 2.1). Table 1 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 2) XVDC at 008-240 008-241 008-242 008-243 Test SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point H H H H L L 2.74 H
Enter [DC330] and Active Stack 008-245 Tray 3 size switch 1, 008-246 Tray 3 size switch 2, 008-247 Tray 3 size switch 3, 008-248 Tray 3 size switch 4 for the Tray 3 Size Sensor and press Start. Check the state of the four Tray Sensors. The four Tray Sensor States displayed corresponds to the paper size loaded in Tray 3. (Refer to Table 2 for the correct Tray Sensor States for the matching paper size).
Paper Size 8.5 x 10 LEF
Paper Size 254 x 203
8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 x 330.2 L
1/05 2-78
Table 1 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 2) XVDC at 008-240 008-241 008-242 008-243 Test SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point L H L L H L L L H L L L H L H L H H H H L H L L L L H H L H H L L L L L 1.51 0.91 0.61 4.64 5.0 4.31 2.14 3.99 3.37 L L H H L H H L L
Table 3 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 4) XVDC at 008-250 008-251 008-252 008-253 Test SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point L L H H L H H L L H L L H L L L H L L L L H L H H H H L H L L L H H L H H L L L L L 1.51 0.91 0.61 4.64 5.0 4.31 2.14 3.37
Paper Size A3 SEF B4 SEF 11 x 17 SEF A4 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8.5 x 11 SEF A4 LEF 8.5 x 11 LEF Open Tray No Unit
Paper Size 297 x 420 257 x 364 210 x 297 257 x 182 257 x 364 8.5 x 11 SEF 279 x 210 949 255
Paper Size A3 SEF B4 SEF 11 x 17 SEF A4 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8.5 x 11 SEF A4 LEF 8.5 x 11 LEF Open Tray No Unit
Paper Size 297 x 420 257 x 364 210 x 297 257 x 182 257 x 364 8.5 x 11 SEF 279 x 210 949 255
8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 x 355.6 L
279.4 x 431.8 L
279.4 x 431.8 L
279.4 x 215.9 H
279.4 x 215.9 H
Table 2 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 3) XVDC at 008-245 008-246 008-247 008-248 Test Point SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 H H L H L L H L L L H L L L H H H L H L H H H H L H L L L L L L H H L H H L L L L L 1.51 0.91 0.61 4.64 5.0 4.31 2.14 3.99 3.37 2.74 H L L H H L H H L L
Paper Size 8.5 x 10 LEF A3 SEF B4 SEF 11 x 17 SEF A4 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8.5 x 11 SEF A4 LEF 8.5 x 11 LEF Open Tray No Unit
Paper Size 254 x 203 297 x 420 257 x 364 210 x 297 257 x 182 257 x 364 8.5 x 11 SEF 279 x 210 949 255
8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 x 330.2 L 8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 x 355.6 L
279.4 x 431.8 L
279.4 x 215.9 H
Table 3 Tray Switch State to Voltage Values (Tray 4) XVDC at 008-250 008-251 008-252 008-253 Test SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW4 Point H H L H H H L L L 3.99 2.74 H
Paper Size 8.5 x 10 LEF
Paper Size 254 x 203
8.5 x 13 SEF 215.9 x 330.2 L 8.5 x 14 SEF 215.9 x 355.6 L
1/05 2-79
7-600 Tray 5 Adjustment Side Guide out of specified Range RAP

The machine detected that Tray 5 Side Guide was outside the specified range.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.4 for the following procedure. Check for obstructions in the paper path. Go to the Control Panel, ensure that Tray 5 Tray Paper Size icon is set to the correct paper size that is loaded in Tray 5. Ensure that the NVM location for the Market is the correct country code, 752-001 = 2
Procedure
The paper size being utilized for this procedure matches the paper size selected on the Touch Screen. Y N Voltage is measured at P/J146-B15 on the IOT PWB and GND on the Tray 5 Size Sensor. Y N +5 VDC between J703B-7 on the Tray 5 Paper Size Sensor and GND. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit or short to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Size Sensor (PL 2.13). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 7.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit or short to GND. If the harness is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/Replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, binding, or missing. Spring (PL 2.5) Link (PL 2.5) Tray 5 Assembly (PL 2.9)
1/05 2-80
8-104 Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP

The Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed started.
B There is +24 VDC at P/J414A-A2 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J414A-A2 goes to less than +2.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).
Initial Actions
Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head. Refer to BSD 8.1, BSD 7.5, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Pull out Paper Tray 1. Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). Open the Tray 1 Feeder (PL 2.4).
Check/replace the Tray 1 Feeder Assembly. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping (PL 2.4).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-104 Tray 1 Pre feed Sensor. Press Start. Block the Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). Connect the meter from P/J414A-A4 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J414A-A4 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the senor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J414A-A5 and P/J414A-A3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Press Stop. Enter dC330 008-008 Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed). Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Go to the 7-281 Tray 1 Lift Motor Failure RAP. Press Stop. Enter dC330 008-006 Tray 1 Nudger Roll Solenoid. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J414A-A1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A B Reissue 1/05 DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2-81
8-105 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP

The Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed started.
N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 8.1 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J414B-B12 goes to less than +2.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5). Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Left Cover (PL 2.8) Tray 1 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4)
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-105 Tray 1 feed out Sensor and press Start. Block the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J420A-B8 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at J420-B8 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-B9 and P/J420A-B7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. The Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Enter dC330 008-009 Tray 1 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start. The Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J414B-B11 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is +24 VDC at P/J414B-B12 on the IOT Drive PWB.
1/05 2-82
8-107 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On RAP

The Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.

Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 8.1 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head. Refer to BSD 8.2, BSD 7.6, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Pull out Paper Tray 2 Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). Open the Tray 2 Feeder (PL 2.4).
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-105 Tray 1 feed out Sensor and press Start. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-109 Tray 2 Pre feed Sensor and press Start. Block the Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). Connect the meter from P/J415A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J415A-14 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0VDC when the senor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J803-5 and P/J803-3 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Enter dC330 008-013 Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed). Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Go to the 7-282 Tray 2 Lift Motor Failure RAP Enter dC330 008-011 Tray 2 Nudger Roll Solenoid. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J803-1 on the Tray PWB. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). A B Status Indicator RAPs 1/05 2-83
8-107 Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor On RAP, 8-109 Tray
B There is +24 VDC at P/J803-2 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5). Press Start. The voltage at P/J803-2 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N Press Start. There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-11 of the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.6 and check the harness for an open or short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).

Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-110 Tray 2 feed out Sensor and press Start. Actuate the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J415A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor. The voltage at P/J415A-7 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J802A-9 and P/J802A-7 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-014 Tray 2 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-14 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-13 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-13 goes to approximately 0 VDC. A
Enter dC330 008-014 Tray 2 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-14 on the Tray PWB. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-13 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-13 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-8 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Check/replace the Tray 2 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4). Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
8-109 Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-110 Tray
1/05 2-84
A Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J801B-8 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press Start. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Left Cover (PL 2.8) Tray 2 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4)

Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 8.2 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Check the actuator for the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor.
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-110 Tray 2 feed out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
1/05 2-85
8-110 Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-112

B There is +24 VDC at P/J803B-2 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 3 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5). Press Start. The voltage at P/J803B-2 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N Press Start. There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-10 of the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.7 and check the harness for an open or short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 3 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).
Initial Actions
Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head. Refer to BSD 7.7, BSD 8.3, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Pull out Paper Tray 3 Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). Open the Tray 3 Feeder (PL 2.4).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-114 Tray 3 Pre feed Sensor and press Start. Block the Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). Connect the meter from P/J415A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J415A-11 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J803B-5 and P/J803B-3 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Enter dC330 008-018 Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed). Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Go to the 7-283 Tray 3 Lift Motor Failure RAP Enter dC330 008-016 Tray 3 Nudger Roll Solenoid. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 3 Nudger Solenoid energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J803B-1 on the Tray PWB. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). A B Status Indicator RAPs 1/05 2-86 8-114 Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP
Enter dC330 008-019 Tray 3 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-12 on the Tray PWB. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-11 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-11 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-7 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB. Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Check/replace the Tray 3 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4). Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.

N There is +5 VDC between P/J801B-7 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.7, BSD 8.3, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8).
Replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press the Start button. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Left Cover (PL 2.8) Tray 3 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4)
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-115 Tray 3 feed out Sensor and press Start. Actuate the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J415A-6 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor. The voltage at P/J415A-6 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J802A-6 and P/J802A-4 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-019 Tray 3 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-12 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-11 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-11 goes to approximately 0 VDC. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-87


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Ensure that the No Paper Sensor is properly installed in the Paper Tray Feed Head. Refer to BSD 7.8, BSD 8.4, and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Pull out Paper Tray 4. Open the Lower Left Door (PL 2.8). Open the Tray 4 Feeder (PL 2.4).
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-115 Tray 3 feed out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, ensure that the sensor actuator moves freely. If the actuator is OK, replace the Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-119 Tray 4 Pre feed Sensor. Press Start. Block the Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). Connect the meter from P/J415A-8 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J415A-8 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J804-5 and P/J804-3 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor (PL 2.5). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Enter dC330 008-023 Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor (Feed). Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Go to the 7-284 Tray 4 Lift Motor Failure RAP Enter dC330 008-021 Tray 4 Nudger Roll Solenoid. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 4 Nudger Solenoid energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J804-1 on the Tray PWB. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). A B Reissue 1/05 2-88 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
8-117 Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor On RAP, 8-119 Tray 4
B There is +24 VDC at P/J804-2 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 4 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5). Press Start. The voltage at P/J804-2 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N Press Start. There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-9 of the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.8 and check the harness for an open or short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 4 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.5).

The Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the prefeed started
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-120 Tray 4 feed out Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J415A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor. The voltage at P/J415A-5 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J802A-3 and P/J802A-1 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-024 Tray 4 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-10 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-9 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-9 goes to approximately 0 VDC. A
Enter dC330 008-024 Tray 4 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press Stop. There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-10 on the Tray PWB. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-9 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Press Start. The voltage at P/J802B-9 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-6 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Check/replace the Tray 4 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4). Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping.
1/05 2-89
8-119 Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-120
A Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J801B-6 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press the Start button. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Left Cover (PL 2.8) Tray 4 Feeder Assembly (PL 2.4)

Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-120 Tray 4 feed out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, ensure that the sensor actuator moves freely. If the actuator is OK, replace the Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3).
8-120 Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-122
1/05 2-90

The Tray 5 Feed Sensor did not detect paper within the specified time after the feed started
C Press the Start button to energize the Tray 5 Feed Clutch. The voltage at J414B-B8 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 5 Feed Clutch (PL 2.9).
P/
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.9, BSD 8.5 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Remove the Tray 5 Upper Cover (PL 2.10). Check for any obstructions in the paper path.
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 5 Feed Roll and related components (PL 2.9) Takeaway Pinch Roll, Pinch Roll, and Springs (PL 2.10) Tray 5 Nudger Roll, Tray 5 Feed Roll, and related components (PL 2.11)
Procedure
Ensure there is paper in Tray 5. Attempt to feed a single sheet of paper from Tray 5. The sheet of paper attempts to feed. Y N Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press the Start button. Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Press the Stop button. Enter dC330 008-039 Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid. Press the Start button. The Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. +24 VDC is measured at P/J416B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured at P/J416B-18 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 7.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.11). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J416B-18 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid (PL 2.11). Enter dC330 008-037 Tray 5 Feed Clutch. Press Start. The Tray 5 Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. +24 VDC is measured at P/J414B-B7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured at P/J414B-B8 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 5 Feed Clutch (PL 2.9). A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Enter dC330 008-135 Tray 5 Feed Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Tray 5 Feed Sensor. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor (PL 2.10). Connect the meter from P/J416B-7 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate the Tray 5 Feed Sensor. The voltage at P/J416B-7 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J416B-5 and P/J416B-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor (PL 2.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Tray 5 Feed Roll and related components (PL 2.9) Takeaway Pinch Roll, Pinch Roll, and Springs (PL 2.10) Tray 5 Nudger Roll, Tray 5 Feed Roll, and related components (PL 2.11)
1/05 2-91

The Tray 5 Feed Sensor detects paper at all times.
8-147 Tray 1 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP

The Takeaway Sensor did not actuate within 0 - 80 msec after the Tray 1 feed started.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 8.5 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure. Open the Tray 5 Assembly. Open the Tray 5 Upper Assembly (REP 2.11.1). Check the Actuator for the Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor.
Initial Actions
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 008-135 Tray 5 Feed Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor (PL 2.10). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.5 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Feed Sensor (PL 2.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J420A-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420A-B5 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-B6 and P/J420A-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Enter dC330 008-009 Tray 1 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press Stop. There is +24 VDC between P/J414B-11 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is +24 VDC between P/J414B-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5). A Status Indicator RAPs B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
8-139 Tray 5 Feed Out Sensor On RAP, 8-147 Tray 1
1/05 2-92
B Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J414B-12 goes to less than +2.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Tray 1 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 1.5).

Initial Actions
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pinch Rolls and Springs (PL 2.8) Check for burrs on the Baffle (PL 2.8).
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J420A-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420A-B5 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-B6 and P/J420A-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press Start. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP. Enter dC330 008-014 Tray 2 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-14 on the Tray PWB. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-13 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). A B Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-93
8-147 Tray 1 Takeaway Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-148
B Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-13 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are good, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC between P/J801B-8 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB Replace the Tray 2 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).

Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J420A-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420A-B5 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-B6 and P/J420A-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press Start. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP. Enter dC330 008-019 Tray 3 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press Stop. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-12 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-11 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pinch Rolls and Springs (PL 2.8) Check for burrs on the Baffle (PL 2.8) Gears in the Takeaway Drive Assembly (PL 2.7A)
1/05 2-94
B Press Start. The voltage at P/J802B-11 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N There is +5 VDC at P/J801B-7 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 3 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).

Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J420A-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420A-B5 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-B6 and P/J420A-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press Start. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Takeaway Motor RAP Enter dC330 008-024 Tray 4 Take Away Feed Clutch. Press Start and Stop several times. The Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Press Stop. There is +24 VDC between P/J802B-10 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC at P/J802B-9 on the Tray PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A). A B Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-95
B Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J802B-9 goes to approximately 0 VDC. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J801B-6 on the Tray PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Tray 4 Takeaway Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A).
8-152 Takeaway Sensor On RAP

The Takeaway Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor. Press the Start button. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-96
8-154 Pre Registration Sensor On RAP

The Pre Registration Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.
8-157 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP

The Registration Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-97
8-154 Pre Registration Sensor On RAP, 8-157 Reg-
8-158 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP

The Pre IBT Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.
8-163 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP

The Pre IBT Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Registration Feed started:
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-163 Pre IBT Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL 7.10). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL 7.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-163 Pre IBT Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J420A-A8 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL 7.10). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre IBT Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-163 Pre IBT Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420A-A9 and P/J420A-A7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre IBT Sensor (PL 7.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Registration Motor RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Gears on the 2nd BTR (PL 7.10) Check for burrs on the Inlet Plate (PL 7.10) 2nd BTR Assembly (PL 7.9)
8-158 Pre IBT Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-163 Pre IBT Sen-
1/05 2-98
8-171 Tray 1 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP

The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate with 80 - 180 msec after the feed started from Tray 1.

Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16) Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16) Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL 2.16). All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16) Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16) Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL 2.16). All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)
1/05 2-99
8-171 Tray 1 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP,


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16) Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16) Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL 2.16) All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 2.16) Rollers and Springs (PL 2.16) Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL 2.16) All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)
8-173 Tray 3 Pre Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-
1/05 2-100
8-175 Tray 5 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP

The Registration Sensor did not actuate with 562 - 1010 msec after the feed started from Tray 5.

Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J421A-11 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J421A-12 and P/J421A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Registration Motor RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15) Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15) Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15).
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J421A-11 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J421A-12 and P/J421A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Registration Motor RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15) Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15) Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 2.15).
1/05 2-101
8-175 Tray 5 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
8-177 Tray 2 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-178
1/05 2-102

8-305 Tray 5 Interlock Open RAP

The Tray 5 Interlock is detected open.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 7.4 and BSD 8.10 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-305 Tray 5 Interlock Switch. Press Start. Actuate, then deactuate, the Tray 5 Interlock Switch. The display changes from L when the switch is actuated to H when the switch is deactuated. Y N Connect the meter from P/J416B-9 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Actuate, then deactuate, the Tray 5 Interlock Switch. The voltage at P/J416B-9 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the switch is actuated, to +5.0 VDC when the switch is deactuated. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Tray 5 Switch (PL 2.12). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 4 on BSD 7.4 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Tray 5 Switch (PL 2.12). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
1/05 2-103
8-179 Tray 4 Registration Sensor On Jam RAP, 8-
8-306 Drawer Interlock Open RAP

The Drawer Interlock is detected open.
Main Motor 2 RAP

Main Motor 2 is inoperative.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 8.9 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-306 Drawer Interlock Switch. Press Start. Open, then close, the Drawer. The display changes from H when the Drawer is open to L when the Drawer is closed. Y N Connect the meter from P/J419B-18 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Open, then close, the Drawer. The voltage at P/J419B-18 goes from +5 VDC when the Drawer is open to less than +1.0 VDC when the Drawer is closed. Y N Connect the meter from P/J11A-3 on the AC Driver PWB to machine frame. Open, then close, the Drawer. The voltage at P/J11A-3 goes from +5 VDC when the Drawer is open to less than +1.0 VDC when the Drawer is closed. Y N Connect the meter from P/J14-8 on the AC Driver PWB to machine frame. Open, then close, the Drawer. The voltage at P/J14-8 goes from less than 1.0 VDC when the Drawer is open to +5.0 VDC when the Drawer is closed. Y N There is + 5 VDC from P/J19-4 on the AC Drive PWB to machine frame. Y N Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 1.4 and check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 6 on BSD 1.4 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, go to Flag 7 on BSD 1.4 and check the wire for an intermittent open or short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Drawer Interlock Switch (PL 2.18). If the problem continues, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem still continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start and Stop several times. Main Motor 2 energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB and machine frame. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and machine frame. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5). Press Start. The voltage at P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +23 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace Main Motor 2 Motor (PL 1.5). If the problem is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5). If the problem continues, replace Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5). If the problem still continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
8-306 Drawer Interlock Open RAP, Main Motor 2 RAP
1/05 2-104
Takeaway Motor RAP

The Takeaway Motor is inoperative.
Registration Motor RAP

The Registration Motor is inoperative.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-025 Take Away Motor. Press Start. The Takeaway Motor energizes. Y N Press the Stop button. Connect the meter from P/J801B-5 on the Tray PWB to machine frame. Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J801B-5 goes from +5 VDC to less than +1.0 VDC when the Start button is pressed. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The voltage at P/J802B-6 on the Tray PWB is less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). Check the following: Check if the drives for Takeaway Motor Assembly are binding (PL 2.7A). Replace any damaged gears. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Motor (PL 2.7A) If the problem continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3)
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Registration Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press the Stop button. +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB and machine frame. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and machine frame. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Registration Motor (PL 2.15). Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +18 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Registration Motor (PL 2.15). If the problem is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Motor (PL 2.15). If the problem still continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
If the problem is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.7 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Motor (PL 2.7A). If the problem continues, replace the Takeaway Motor Assembly (PL 2.7A). If the problem still continues, replace the Tray PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem still continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-105
Takeaway Motor RAP, Registration Motor RAP
Takeaway Motor RAP, Registration Motor RAP
1/05 2-106
9-271 Yellow Toner Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Yellow dispenser is empty.
9-272 Magenta Toner Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Magenta dispenser is empty.
Initial Actions
This is a message fault only. An operator action is required NOTE: If this code doesnt clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-372 Toner Cartridge Y Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-060 and set the value to 0.
Initial Actions
This is a message fault only. An operator action is required NOTE: If this code doesnt clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-373 Toner Cartridge M Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-061 and set the value to 0.
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-354 Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
1/05 2-107
9-271 Yellow Toner Empty RAP, 9-272 Magenta
9-273 Cyan Toner Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Cyan dispenser is empty.
9-274 Black Toner Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Black dispenser is empty.
Initial Actions
This is a message fault only. An operator action is required NOTE: If this code doesnt clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-374 Toner Cartridge C Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-062 and set the value to 0.
Initial Actions
This is a message fault only. An operator action is required NOTE: If this code doesnt clear after the Toner cartridge is replaced, go into NVM 776-371 Toner Cartridge K Empty and set the value to 0. Then, go into NVM 776-063 and set the value to 0.
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-356 Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
9-273 Cyan Toner Empty RAP, 9-274 Black Toner
1/05 2-108
9-311 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch RAP

Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch. The Control Logic detected that the Xerographic CRU (Drum) that is installed in the machine is not the correct type for this product.
9-342/9-432 2nd BTR Contact Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the 2nd BTR failed to contact the IBT.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.1 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J422B on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J713 and P/J704 on the EP ROM PWB are connected before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.10 and 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J421A and P/J414A on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2), P/J255 on the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4), and P/J159 on the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9) are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Check the Type of Xerographic CRU (Drum) that is installed in the machine, NVM 774-056 Drum Unit Type. The Xerographic CRU (Drum) is the approved type. Y N Install an approved Xerographic CRU (Drum). Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.1. Check the harness for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact. Press Start. The Main Motor energizes. Y N Go to the OF4-001 Main Motor RAP. Enter dC330 009-215 2nd BTR H/Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H) Y N Press Stop for the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact. Rotate the Indicator (Item 3 PL 7.9) to block the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor. The display changes to (H) Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J421A-2 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J421A-3 and P/J421A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J421A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J421A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.10 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.10. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9). Check the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact. The 2nd BTR raises to the contact position. Y N Press Stop for the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact. +24 VDC is measured at P/J414B-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured at P/J414B-9 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and check the fuse F1 on the AC Drive PWB. If the fuse is good, check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J414B-9 on the IOT Drive PWB. A B C D Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-109
9-311 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Type Mismatch
D Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.10. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4).
9-343/9-433 2nd BTR Retract Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the 2nd BTR failed to retract.
Enter dC330 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact. There is less than +1 VDC at P/J414B-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch for slipping, binding or intermittent operation. Check for mechanical damage in the 2nd BTR components (PL 7.10), gears and drives. Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch for binding or intermittent operation. If the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch is good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9). If the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4). Check the Main Motor for slow or intermittent operation. Refer to the OF4-001 Main Motor RAP. Check the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9) for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.10 and 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J421A and P/J414A on the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2), P/J255 on the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4), and P/J159 on the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9) are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 009-215 2nd BTR H/Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L). Y N Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-058 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Contact. Press Start. The Main Motor energizes. Y N Go to the OF4-001 Main Motor RAP. Enter dC330 009-215 2nd BTR H/Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L). Y N less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J421A-2 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J421A-3 and P/J421A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J421A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J421A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 9.10 and check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4) for binding, slipping, or intermittent operation. If the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch is good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9). If the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4). Check the Main Motor for slow or intermittent operation. Refer to the OF4-001 Main Motor RAP. Check the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4) for slipping, binding or intermittent operation. Check for mechanical damage in the 2nd BTR components (PL 7.10), gears and drives. If the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch is good, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor (PL 7.9). If the problem continues, replace the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch (PL 1.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
9-342/9-432 2nd BTR Contact Fail RAP, 9-343/9-433
1/05 2-110
9-344/9-434 IBT Cleaner Contact Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the IBT Cleaner failed to contact the IBT.
C Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.11 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.11 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J417A and P/J418B on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J252 on the Cleaner Retract Clutch, and P/J111 on the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Check the Cleaner Retract Clutch for binding or intermittent operation. If the Cleaner Retract Clutch is good, replace the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3). If the problem continues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Stack the codes dC330 004-007 Main Motor and 009-066 IBT Cleaner Contact. Enter dC330 009-216 IBT Cleaner Retract Home Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H) Y N Remove the IBT REP 7.1.1 (Reinstall IBT after test is completed). Manually block the IBT Clean Home Position Sensor. The display changes to (H) Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418B-5 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418B-6 and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21 -1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B8-6 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.11 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 009-059 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Retract. Press Start. Enter dC330 009-067 IBT Cleaner Retract. Press Start. The Cleaner Retract Clutch energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-9 and P/J417A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-9 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +24 VDC-4 Wirenet and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J417A-9 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3).
A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-111
9-344/9-434 IBT Cleaner Contact Fail RAP
9-345/9-435 IBT Cleaner Retract Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the IBT Clean Blade failed to retract from the IBT.
9-354 Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP

This fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the Low Toner Sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the low toner sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dispense motor remains energized.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.11 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J417A and P/J418B on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J252 on the Cleaner Retract Clutch, and P/J111 on the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.4, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J432, P/J433B, and P/J434 on the Dispense PWB, P/J421B on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J214 on the Yellow Cartridge Motor and P/J118 on the Yellow Low Toner Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP. NOTE: If the code doesnt clear and the auger isnt broken, go to NVM 776-060 and set the value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-372 Toner Cartridge Y Empty and set the value to 0.
Procedure
Stack the dC330 codes 4-007 and 9-067. Enter dC330 009-216 IBT Cleaner Retract Home Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L) Y N Remove the IBT REP 7.1.1 (Reinstall IBT after test is completed). Manually unblock the IBT Clean Home Position Sensor. The display changes to (L) Y N +0 VDC is measured between P/J418B-5 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418B6 and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC-3 Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B-6 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (+5 V Ret.)-3 Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.11 and check the wire for an open circuit. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 009-059 2ND Belt Transfer Roll Retract. Press Start. Enter dC330 009-067 IBT Cleaner Retract. Press Start. The Cleaner Retract Clutch de-energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-10 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.11. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3). Replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3). Check the Cleaner Retract Clutch for binding or intermittent operation. If the Cleaner Retract Clutch is good, replace the IBT Clean Blade Home Position Sensor (PL 7.3). If the problem continues, replace the Cleaner Retract Clutch (PL 1.3). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Check the Yellow Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty. Y N NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Cartridge Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Remove the Yellow Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling (PL 6.3). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 009-012 Cartridge Motor Y. Press Start. The Yellow Toner Cartridge Coupling rotates. Y N Press Start. The Yellow Cartridge Motor operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-9 and at P/J433B-7 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23-4 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-4 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 9.4. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC. A B C D Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
9-345/9-435 IBT Cleaner Retract Fail RAP, 9-354 Yel-
1/05 2-112
D Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
E Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (M) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.4. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (Y). (PL 6.3). Check the Coupling and Spring (PL 6.3) for damage or contamination. Clean, repair or replace as required. NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Enter dC330 009-032 Dispense Motor Y. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (Y) operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J434-6 and at P/J434-5 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to the ++24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J234 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-3 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.6. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) Go to Flag 4 on BSD 9.6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor Y (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the Toner Dispense Assembly Y (PL 6.4). Reinstall the Yellow Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-032 Dispense Motor Y] and [009-257 Low Toner Sensor Y]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Y N Connect the DVM from J 432 pin 3 to GND. The meter reads a constant +5 VDC. A E Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Vacuum the Yellow Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Yellow Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330 and stack the codes 009-032 Dispense Motor Y and [009-257 Low Toner Sensor Y]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Y N Connect the DVM from J 432 pin 3 to GND. +5 VDC is measured between P/ J433A-6 and P/J433A-4. Y N Go to+5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J118-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (Y). Go to DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J215 on the IOT LVPS and P/J118-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (Y). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check the wires between P/J118-1and P/J433A-6 and between P/J118-3 and P/ J433A-4 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (Y) Sensor (PL 6.3). This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense area. Check the machine for proper operation. The sensor indicates that toner is present in the Toner Dispense Housing and is being dispensed. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Yellow Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
1/05 2-113
9-354 Yellow Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
D Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP

This fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the Low Toner Sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the Low Toner Sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dispense motor remains energized.
Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (M). (PL 6.3) Check the Coupling and Spring (PL 6.3) for damage or contamination. Clean, repair or replace as required. NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Enter dC330 009-033 Dispense Motor M. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (M) operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J434-4 and at P/J434-3 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J234 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-5 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.6. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor M (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the Toner Dispense Assembly M (PL 6.4). Reinstall the Magenta Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-033 Dispense Motor M] and [009-258 Low Toner Sensor M]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.5, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J432, P/J433B, and P/J434 on the Dispense PWB, P/J421B on the IOT DRIVE PWB, P/J215 on the Magenta Cartridge Motor and P/J119 on the Magenta Low Toner Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP. NOTE: If the code doesnt clear and the auger isnt broken, go to NVM 776-061 and set the value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-373 Toner Cartridge M Empty and set the value to 0.
Procedure
Check the Magenta Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty. Y N NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Cartridge Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Remove the Magenta Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 009-013 Cartridge Motor M. Press Start. The Magenta Toner Cartridge Coupling rotates. Y N Press Start. The Magenta Cartridge Motor operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-6 and at P/J433B-4 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J23-4 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-6 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.5. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC A B C D Status Indicator RAPs A 1/05 2-114
9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
A Y N Connect the meter between P/J432-2 and GND. The meter reads a constant +5 VDC. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (M) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Vacuum the Magenta Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Magenta Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-033 Dispense Motor M] and [009-258 Low Toner Sensor M]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J433A-9 and P/J433A-7. Y N Go to +5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J119-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (M). Go to DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J215 on the IOT LVPS and P/J119-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (M). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check the wires between P/J119-1and P/J433A-9 and between P/J119-3 and P/ J433A-7 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (M) Sensor (PL 6.3). This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense area. Check the machine for proper operation. The sensor indicates that toner is present in the Toner Dispense Housing and is being dispensed. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Magenta Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
9-356 Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP

This fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the low toner sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the low toner sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dispense motor remains energized.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.5, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J432, P/J433B, and P/J434 on the Dispense PWB, P P/J421B on the IOT DRIVE PWB, P/J216 on the Cyan Cartridge Motor and P/J120 on the Cyan Low Toner Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP. NOTE: If the code doesnt clear and the auger isnt broken, go to NVM 776-062 and set the value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-374 Toner Cartridge C Empty and set the value to 0.
Procedure
Check the Cyan Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty. Y N NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Cartridge Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Remove the Cyan Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 [009-014 Cartridge Motor C]. Press Start. The Toner Cartridge Motor C operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-3 and at P/J433B-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J234 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-8 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 9.5. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) A B C Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-115
9-355 Magenta Toner Dispenser Broken RAP, 9-356
C Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.5. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (C). (PL 6.3)
NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Enter dC330 009-034 Dispense Motor C. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (C) operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J434-2 and at P/J434-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J234 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-7 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 9.6. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor C (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the Toner Dispense Assembly C (PL 6.4). Reinstall the Cyan Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-034 Dispense Motor C] and [009-259 Low Toner Sensor C]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Y N Connect the meter between P/J432-1 and GND. The meter reads a constant +5 VDC. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (M) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
E Vacuum the Cyan Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Cyan Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-034 Dispense Motor C] and [009-259 Low Toner Sensor C]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J433A-12 and P/J433A-10. Y N Go to+5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J120-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (C). Go to DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J215 on the IOT LVPS and P/J120-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (C). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.5 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check the wires between P/J120-1and P/J433A-12 and between P/J120-3 and P/ J433A-10 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (C) Sensor (PL 6.3). This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense area. Check the machine for proper operation.
The sensor indicates that toner is present in the Toner Dispense Housing and is being dispensed. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Cyan Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
A D E Status Indicator RAPs
9-356 Cyan Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
1/05 2-116
9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP

Fault code appears when any one of the following conditions occurs: the low toner sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 2 seconds; the low toner sensor detects that there is no toner for a period of 500 seconds (approximately 8 minutes); or when the toner dispense motor remains energized.
C Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.4. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Cartridge Motor (K). (PL 6.3)
NOTE: The Dispense Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Dispense Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Enter dC330 009-031 Dispense Motor K. Press Start. Watch the Dispense and Conveyor Gears to see if they rotate. The Toner Dispense Motor (K) operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J434-8 and at P/J434-7 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J234 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-1 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.6. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.6 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, check the toner dispense gears (PL 6.3) and (PL 6.4) for damage. If the gears are OK, replace the Toner Dispense Motor K (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the Toner Dispense Assembly K (PL 6.4). Reinstall the Black Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-031 Dispense Motor K] and [009-255 Low Toner Sensor K]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Y N Connect the meter between P/J432-4 and GND. The meter reads a constant +5 VDC. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Low Toner (K) Sensor (PL 6.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.4, 9.6 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J432 and P/J433B on the Dispense PWB, P/J421B on the IOT DRIVE PWB, P/ P/J213 on the Black Cartridge Motor, and P/J117 on the Black Low Toner Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP. NOTE: If the code doesnt clear and the auger isnt broken, go to NVM 776-063 and set the value to 0. Then, go to NVM 776-371 Toner Cartridge K Empty and set the value to 0.
Procedure
Check the Black Toner Cartridge. The toner cartridge is empty. Y N NOTE: The Cartridge Motor is only energized for 10 seconds each time Start is pressed. The display will indicate Off when the 10 seconds have expired. Pressing Start will energize the Cartridge Motor for another 10 seconds. Press Start as often as necessary to get an accurate reading. Remove the Black Toner Cartridge to see the Toner Cartridge Coupling. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 009-011 Cartridge Motor K. Press Start. The Toner Cartridge Motor K operates. Y N +12 VDC is measured at P/J433B-12 and at P/J433B-10 on the Dispense PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J431-2 and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. Y N Go to +24VDC Wirenets and check the wires between P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-2 on the Dispense PWB. Go to DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J234 on the IOT LVPS and P/J431-1 on the Dispense PWB. +5VDC is measured between P/J421B-2 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB when the display indicates Off. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 9.4. Check the wire for an open or a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Press Start. The voltage momentarily goes to less than +1 VDC Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the Dispense PWB (PL 6.4) A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 A 1/05 2-117
E Status Indicator RAPs
9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP
E Vacuum the Black Dispense Housing. Reinstall the Black Toner Cartridge. Enter dC330. Stack the codes [009-031 Dispense Motor K] and [009-255 Low Toner Sensor K]. The sensor changes state as toner is dispensed. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J433A-3 and P/J433A-1. Y N Go to +5VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J117-1 on the Low Toner Sensor (K). Go to DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets and check the wires between P/J215 on the IOT LVPS and P/J117-3 on the Low Toner Sensor (K). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.4 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Check the wires between P/J117-1and P/J433A-3 and between P/J117-3 and P/ J433A-1 for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Low Toner (K) Sensor (PL 6.3). This should resolve the problem. Ensure that there is no blockage in the dispense area. Check the machine for proper operation.
9-358 Cleaning Auger Full RAP

The Control Logic has determined that 130 copies have been made since the Cleaning Auger Stopped.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.13 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J418B on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J115 0n the Auger Sensor are connected. Check that the Auger sensor is clean and properly installed.
Procedure
Enter dC330 009-248 Waste Auger Rotate Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H) Y N Check the Auger Sensor for intermittent operation. If there is intermittent operation, replace the Auger Sensor (PL 5.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The Waste Bottle is full Y N The Waste Toner Junction is packed with toner Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418B-2 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J418B-3 and P/J418B-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418B1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.13. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Auger Sensor (PL 5.5). Clean the Waste Toner Junction. If large particle of fused toner are present, replace the Waste Toner Junction (PL 5.5). Replace the Waste Toner Bottle and clean the Waste Toner Junction (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
The sensor indicates that toner is present in the Toner Dispense Housing and is being dispensed. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Black Toner Cartridge (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP, 9-358
1/05 2-118
9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP

Control Logic detected that the Rotary did not reach the Home position
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.2 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure Ensure that P/J420A, P/J418A and P/J412A on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J260, P/J261, and P/J262 on the Rotary PWB, and P/J110 on the Rotary Home Position Sensor are connected. Verify that the Xerographic CRU (Drum) unit is firmly seated and secured. Adjust the Rotary Home Position Sensor (ADJ 6.1.1).
B Enter DC920. Select Home Position and press Start. The Rotary returns to the Home position. Y N Check the Rotary Drive Components (PL 6.1) and (PL 6.6) for contamination and or binding. If the problem continues, replace the Rotary Motor (PL 6.1). Press Start again. Visually inspect the Rotary Assembly. Ensure smooth operation of the Rotary Motor. The Rotary Assembly goes to the Y, M, C, K, positions and then to the Home position without binding. Y N Replace the Rotary PWB (PL 6.1). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, check the Rotary Drive Components (PL 6.1) and (PL 6.5) for contamination and or binding. Check the Rotary Home Position Sensor for contamination. If the problem continues, replace the Rotary Home Position Sensor (PL 6.1). If erratic operation or intermittent faults continue, perform dC301 NVM Initialization.
Procedure
The fault is declared after long runs of black-and-white prints or copies Y N Enter dC330 009-220 Rotary Home Position Sensor. Press Start. Ensure that the Rotary is in the home position The Display indicates (H). Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418A-7 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 9.2. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Rotary Home Position Sensor (PL 6.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter DC920. Select Yellow Position and press Start. The Rotary goes to the Yellow Developer position Y N Check the Fuses on the Rotary PWB. One or both of the fuses are open Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J14-11 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J244 on the IOT LVPS. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J24-2 and P/J24-4 on the IOT LVPS. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Go to the +24 VDC wirenet, and check the fuse F5 on the AC Drive PWB. If the fuse is good, check the wire and circuit between P/J14-11 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J24-2 on the IOT LVPS for an open circuit. Go to Flag 4 on BSD 9.2. Check the wires for an open or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Rotary PWB (PL 6.1). If the problem continues, Replace the Rotary Motor (PL 6.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Fuses. If the fuses become open again, replace the Rotary Motor (PL 6.1).
Remove the Black Development Housing. If binding is present, replace the Black Developer (REP 6.6.2). Perform the following NVM modification to resolve the problem: Enter dC131 from the machine UI. Change the value in location 776-066 to 300. Change the value in location 776-480 to 300. Exit UI diagnostics.
1/05 2-119
9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP
9-365/9-450 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Yellow RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Yellow dispenser is almost empty.
9-366/9-451 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Magenta RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Magenta dispenser is almost empty.
Initial Actions
This is a message fault only. An operator action is required
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
9-365/9-450 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Yellow
1/05 2-120
9-367/9-452 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Cyan RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Cyan dispenser is empty.
9-368/9-453 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Black RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Black dispenser is almost empty.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-357 Black Toner Dispenser Broken RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
1/05 2-121
9-367/9-452 Toner Dispenser Near Broken Cyan
9-369 Rotary Lock Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the Rotary Latch Solenoid failed to lock
A Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.2 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J412A and P/J418A on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J272 on the Rotary Latch Solenoid, and P/J116 on the Rotary Latch Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 009-237 Rotary Lock Mech Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H) Y N Actuate the Rotary Latch Sensor. The display changes to (H) Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418A-4 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418A-5 and P/J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.2 and check the wire for a short circuit to ground. Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J116-1 on the Rotary Latch Sensor and P/J418A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J116-3 on the Rotary Latch Sensor and P/J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. If the wires are good, replace the Rotary Latch Sensor (PL 6.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 009-018 Rotary Lock Mech Latch. Press Start. The Rotary Latch Solenoid Latches Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-3 and P/J412A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1). Check the Rotary Latch Solenoid for binding or intermittent operation. If the Rotary Latch Solenoid is good, replace the Rotary Latch Sensor (PL 6.1). If the problem continues, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid(PL 6.1). A Status Indicator RAPs
9-369 Rotary Lock Fail RAP
1/05 2-122
9-370 Rotary Release Fail RAP

The Control Logic has detected that the Rotary Latch Solenoid failed to unlock
A Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.2 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J412A and P/J418A on the IOT Drive PWB, P/J272 on the Rotary Latch Solenoid, and P/J116 on the Rotary Latch Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 009-237 Rotary Lock Mech Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L) Y N Deactuate the Rotary Latch Sensor. The display changes to (L) Y N +0 VDC is measured between P/J418A-4 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J418A-5 and P/J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-5 on the IOT LVPS and P/J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 9.2 and check the wire for an open. Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J116-1 on the Rotary Latch Sensor and P/J418A-5 on the IOT Drive PWB. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J116-3 on the Rotary Latch Sensor and P/ J418A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. If the wires are good, replace the Rotary Latch Sensor (PL 6.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 009-018 Rotary Lock Mech Latch. Press Start. The Rotary Latch Solenoid releases. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-2 and P/J412A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.2. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid (PL 6.1). Check the Rotary Latch Solenoid for binding or intermittent operation. If the Rotary Latch Solenoid is good, replace the Rotary Latch Sensor (PL 6.1). If the problem continues, replace the Rotary Latch Solenoid(PL 6.1). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-123
9-370 Rotary Release Fail RAP
9-372 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Not In Position RAP

Xerographic CRU (Drum) not in Position. The Control Logic detected that the Xerographic CRU (Drum) is not installed in the machine.
9-374 Waste Bottle Not In Position RAP

This status code is declared when the sensor detects the there is no Waste Bottle, or that the Waste Bottle has been improperly installed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.1 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J713 are connected and that the Xerographic CRU (Drum) is properly installed before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.13 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Check that the Waste Bottle is in place, and that the actuator is not deformed. Check the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor for dirt or foreign matter.
Procedure
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.1. Check the harness for an open or a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). NOTE: Check GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T & M) Account, to ensure that the CRU is compatible with the machine service contract.
Procedure
Enter dC330 009-249 Waste Bottle Position Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (L) Y N Check the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor for intermittent operation. If there is intermittent operation, replace the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor (PL 5.2). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J413-B4 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.13. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor (PL 5.2).
9-372 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Not In Position RAP,
1/05 2-124
9-376 Waste Bottle Full RAP

Waste Bottle Full. This status code is declared when the number of copies reach a specific count after the Waste Toner Full Sensor has detected a full toner bottle. NOTE: The specified count is programmable in NVM location 774-020 Bottle Full The default value of 300 may cause overfilling of the Waste Toner Bottle if many high coverage prints are made after detection. If this occurs, set the value to a lower number.
9-378 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change RAP

Control Logic has detected that the count in the Xerographic CRU (Drum) Eprom has reached 40k.
Initial Actions
This is a message fault only. An operator action is required.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.13and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Check the Waste Toner Full Sensor for dirt or foreign matter
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. The Xerographic CRU (Drum) is specified as a Customer Replaceable Unit.
Check that the / P/J114 on the Waste Toner Full Sensor, and P/J413B on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure
The Waste Toner Bottle is full. Y N Enter dC330 009-250 Waste Bottle Full Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H) Y N Check the Waste Toner Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If there is intermittent operation, replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor (PL 5.2). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413B-7 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413B-8 and P/J413B-6. Y N Go to the +5 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J413B-8 on the Waste Toner Full Sensor. Go to the DC COM (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J21-3 on the IOT LVPS and P/J413B-6 on the Waste Toner Full Sensor. Go to Flag 4 and Flag 6 on BSD 9.13. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor (PL 5.2). . Replace the Waste Toner Bottle (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
1/05 2-125
9-376 Waste Bottle Full RAP, 9-378 Xerographic
9-379 Trickle Bottle Full RAP

Trickle Bottle Full. This status code is declared when the number of copies reach a specific count after the Trickle Toner Full Sensor has detected a full trickle bottle.
9-400 Black Toner Near Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Black dispenser is almost empty.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.3 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Check the Trickle Toner Full Sensor for dirt or foreign matter
Initial Actions
Procedure
Check that the P/J122 on the Trickle Toner Full Sensor, and P/J417A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure
The Trickle Toner Bottle is full. Y N Enter dC330 009-251 Trickle Bottle Sensor. Press Start. The Display is (H) Y N Check the Trickle Toner Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor appears to be good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the Trickle Toner Full Sensor (PL 6.5). +5 VDC is measured between P/J417A-4 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is Measured between P/J417A-1 and P/J417A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +24 VDC (IOT) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J23-1 on the IOT LVPS and P/J417A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB for an open circuit. Go to the DC COM (24 VRET) Wirenet and check the wires between P/J23-4 on the IOT LVPS and P/ J417A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB for an open circuit. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 9.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. Check the wires between P/ J122-1 of the Trickle Toner Full Sensor and P/J417A-1 of the IOT Drive PWB and between P/J122-3 of the Trickle Toner Full Sensor and P/J417A-3 of the IOT Drive PWB for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Trickle Toner Full Sensor (PL 6.5). Replace the Trickle Toner Bottle (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
9-379 Trickle Bottle Full RAP, 9-400 Black Toner Near
1/05 2-126
9-402 Yellow Toner Near Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Yellow dispenser is almost empty.
9-403 Magenta Toner Near Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Magenta dispenser is almost empty.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
1/05 2-127
9-402 Yellow Toner Near Empty RAP, 9-403 Magen-
9-404 Cyan Toner Near Empty RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Cyan dispenser is almost empty.
9-410 Xerographic CRU (Drum) Change Soon RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Xerographic CRU (Drum) is almost at the end of life.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action.
9-404 Cyan Toner Near Empty RAP, 9-410 Xerograph-
1/05 2-128
9-420 Waste Bottle Near Full RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Waste Bottle is almost full.
9-423 Trickle Bottle Near Full RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Trickle Bottle is almost full.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-376 Waste Bottle Full RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-379 Trickle Bottle Full RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
1/05 2-129
9-420 Waste Bottle Near Full RAP, 9-423 Trickle
9-424 Cleaning Auger Near Full RAP

Control Logic has detected that the Cleaning Auger is almost full.
9-601 Humidity Out Of Range RAP

The measured humidity was out of the prescribed range.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.14 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Check the Temp Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1) for dirt or foreign matter
Procedure
This fault should not require any service action. If this fault causes a problem, use the 9-358 Cleaning Auger Full RAP to troubleshoot the problem.
Check that the P/J142 on the Temp Humidity Sensor, and P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure
+5 VDC is measured between P/J422B-2 and P/J422A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 9.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Temp Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
9-424 Cleaning Auger Near Full RAP, 9-601 Humidity
1/05 2-130
9-610 VPatch Out Of Range RAP

The measured toned ADC patch was to light.
9-612 TRC RADC Out Of Range RAP

The measured toned TRC patch density is out of range.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.8 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Clean the ADC Sensor. Clean the IBT Belt. Check that P/J139 on the ADC Sensor PWB, IBT connector J702A, J702B and P/ J416A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.8 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Clean the ADC Sensor. Clean the IBT Belt. Check that the P/J139 on the ADC Sensor PWB, IBT connector J702A, J702B and P/ J416A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed. Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for proper operation. Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP and check the Developer Power Supply for proper operation. Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed. Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for proper operation. Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP and check the Developer Power Supply for proper operation. Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
1/05 2-131
9-610 VPatch Out Of Range RAP, 9-612 TRC RADC
9-614 VClean Out Of Range RAP

The measured untoned ADC patch was out of range.
9-619 VClean TRC Out Of Range RAP

The measured untoned TRC patch density was out of range.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed. Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for proper operation. Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed. Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for proper operation. Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
9-614 VClean Out Of Range RAP, 9-619 VClean TRC
1/05 2-132
9-634 ADC Out Of Range RAP

The selected gain for ADC was out of range.
9-662 LD Out Of Range RAP

The selected LD value was out of range.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.1and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Clean the ESV Sensor. Check that P/J141 on the ESV Sensor, and P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure Procedure
Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 9.8. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the ADC Sensor (PL 7.5). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Perform the following in the order listed. Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for proper operation. Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD 9.1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the ESV Sensor (PL 5.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Xerographic CRU (Drum) (Section 6, Machine Consumables).
1/05 2-133
9-634 ADC Out Of Range RAP, 9-662 LD Out Of
9-667 VH/VM Out Of Range RAP

The selected LD value was out of range.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 9.1 and BSD 9.15 for the following procedure. Clean the ESV Sensor. Check that P/J141 on the ESV Sensor, and P/J422A on the IOT Drive PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure
Perform the following in the order listed. Go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP and check the Charge Corotron HVPS for proper operation. Ensure that the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid are in good condition. Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD 9.1. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the ESV Sensor (PL 5.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault was declared during the VH portion of dC933, replace the Xerographic Module (Drum CRU) (Machine Consumables, Section 6). If the fault was declared during the VM portion of dC933, replace the ROS Assembly (PL 4.1).
9-667 VH/VM Out Of Range RAP
1/05 2-134
10-102 Pre Fuser Sensor On Jam RAP

The Pre Fuser Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Pre IBT Sensor actuated.
10-103 Pre Fuser Sensor On RAP

The Pre Fuser Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Clean the Pre Fuser and Pre IBT Sensor. Skewed sheets with LE corner damage. Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets Contamination on the 2nd BTR Roll and/or Vacuum Transport. Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J157 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Pre Fuser Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check the following: Check for paper on the Pre Fuser Sensor Clean the Pre Fuser Sensor Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J157 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Pre Fuser Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Front Cover is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Procedure Procedure
Enter dC330 010-100 Pre Fuser Sensor. Press Start. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Fuser Sensor with a sheet of paper. Close the Drawer. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL 7.10). Open the Drawer (the paper should still be blocking the sensor). Connect the meter from P/J420-A11 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Close the drawer. The voltage at P/J420A11 goes from +5 VDC when the drawer is open, to less than +1.0 VDC when the drawer is closed. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420-A12 and P/J420-A10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL 7.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping: Drives for the 2nd BTR Roll (PL 7.10) 2nd BTR Roll (PL 7.10) Guide (PL 7.10) Enter dC330 010-100 Pre Fuser Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL 7.10). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Fuser Sensor (PL 7.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-135
10-102 Pre Fuser Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-103 Pre
10-105 Fuser Exit Sensor On Jam RAP

The Fuser Exit Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the IBT Entrance Sensor actuated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.12 and 10.4 for the following procedure. Ensure that 605K91060 Pressure Roll Finger Assembly Kit, Tag 11, is installed.
A Enter dC330 004-009 Fuser Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Fuser Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. + 5 VDC is measured between P/J417B-11 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J42-8 and P/J42-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If the harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6) Press Start. The voltage a P/J417B-11 go to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J42-6 on the Distribution PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If the harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any component that is worn, broken, bent, deformed, binding or slipping: Heat Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.3) and Pressure Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.10) Heat Roll Finger Assembly (PL 8.3) and the Pressure Roll Finger Assembly (PL 8.10) Gears and shafts on the Fuser Exit Drive Assembly (PL 1.6)
NOTE: This problem is common when heavyweight paper is fed from the tray long-edge first. All heavyweight and extra-heavyweight paper should be fed from the tray short-edge first. Check for the following: Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor Cheat the Front Door Interlock and remove the Oil Bottle. Visually observe the paper on the Vacuum Transport to see that it stays down. If not, orient the paper so it feeds from the tray short-edge first. If the problem remains, ensure that the Fuser Nip is cammed in before the sheet arrives. Skewed sheets with LE corner damage. Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets Ensure that the Fuser Inlet Baffle is correctly positioned Contamination on the Vacuum Transport Damage to Vacuum Transport Drive Gears Ensure that connectors P/J413A, P/J417B, P/J418B and P/J168 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Fuser Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). Connect the meter from P/J413A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J413A-4 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 and GND on the on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A Status Indicator RAPs
Ensure that the rubber sleeve on the Exit Roll (shaft) (located under the Fuser Exit Sensor) is not torn, damaged or contaminated with Fuser Oil. Clean the sleeve or repair it by replacing the Exit Roll (shaft) (PL 8.10).
10-105 Fuser Exit Sensor On Jam RAP
1/05 2-136
10-106 Fuser Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP

The Fuser Exit Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the Registration Feed started.
C Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.12 and 10.9 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets Contamination on the Regi Roll, 2 nd BTR or Vacuum Transport. Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J413A, P/J418B and P/J168 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Fuser Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-9 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). Enter dC330 010-006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-7 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-7 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. The Exit Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Fuser Exit Drive gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to leave the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 1.6). Also, cheat the Front Door Interlock and remove the Oil Bottle. Visually observe the paper as it feeds into and through the Fuser. Ensure that the Fuser Nip stays engaged until the trail edge of the sheet exits the Fuser. Ensure that the rubber sleeve on the Exit Roll (shaft) (located under the Fuser Exit Sensor) is not torn, damaged or contaminated with Fuser Oil. Clean the sleeve or repair it by replacing the Exit Roll (shaft) (PL 8.10). Status Indicator RAPs
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). Connect the meter from P/J413A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J413A-4 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 and GND on the on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-9 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-8 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-137
10-106 Fuser Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP
10-107 Fuser Exit Sensor On RAP

The Fuser Exit Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.
10-110 Machine Exit Sensor On Jam RAP

The Machine Exit Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sensor actuated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Check for paper on the Fuser Exit Sensor. Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor Ensure that connectors P/J413A and P/J168 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Fuser Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Front Cover is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets Contamination on the Fuser Exit Roll and/or M/C Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J418B, and P/J149 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Machine Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Open the Inverter Door (PL 2.23) and clean the Machine Exit Sensor. Also, ensure that the sensor actuator is not bent or damaged; that it does not contact the harness or baffles; and that it is seated in the bracket correctly. Clean the Fuser Exit Sensor. Cheat the Front Door Interlock and observe the paper as it feeds out of the Fuser Exit Assembly and into the Inverter Top Chute Assembly. Ensure that the lead edge is not catching on the baffles or cutouts.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an intermittent short circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-110 Machine Exit Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Machine Exit Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). Connect the meter from P/J412B-5 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Machine Exit Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412B-5 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is deactuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J412B-6 and P/J412B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-105 Fuser Exit Sensor. Press Start. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L.
10-107 Fuser Exit Sensor On RAP, 10-110 Machine
1/05 2-138
N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). Connect the meter from P/J413A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Fuser Exit Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J413A-4 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 and GND on the on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Exit Sensor (PL 8.10). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
A Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. The Exit Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Fuser Exit Drive gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 1.6).
Enter dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-9 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-8 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-9 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). Enter dC330 010-006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412B-7 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-7 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-139
10-110 Machine Exit Sensor On Jam RAP
10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP

When using either the inversion path or exit path, the Machine Exit Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after it actuated.
N There is +5 VDC between P/J412B-6 and P/J412B-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Make ONE single-sided set of 10 or more originals. (This causes the copies to go through the inversion path and exit the machine face down.) Repeat this job several times. Next, make TWO single-sided sets of 10 or more originals. (This causes the copies to bypass the inversion path and exit the machine face up.) Repeat this job several times. If a fault occurs ONLY when the copies exit the machine face down, replace the Exit Roll Assembly (PL 2.26) as follows: with Tag 23 install the Tag 23 Exit Roll Assembly, machines with an Offset Catch Tray install the Offset Roller Kit, machines without an Offset Catch Tray install the Corrugation Mark Roller Kit. If the fault occurs when the copies exit the machine face down AND face up, continue with Initial Actions below: Check for the following: Obstructions in the inverter and exit paper path Equal Pinch-roll (PL 2.25) force at the Machine Exit Roll (PL 2.26) nips. Binding of the Machine Exit Roll (PL 2.26) or Pinch Roll Shafts (PL 2.25). Ensure that the Inverter Pinch Rolls (PL 2.26) have proper nip pressure. Remove the Inverter Door Cover (PL 2.25) and tape down the Exit Chute (PL 2.25) to prevent jamming. Look for skew along the lead edge of the paper as it inverts and exits the machine. If skewing occurs, check for movement in the Door Latch area by pressing on the door. If the door moves in, hold it closed at the latch area to see if feeding improves. If feeding improves, check the (door) Lever (assembly) (PL 2.26) for loose or damaged components. To minimize movement in the Inverter 2 Assembly, loosen the two screws holding the white plastic latch and metal latch bracket. Move both parts to the right and then tighten the screws. Clean the Machine Exit and Inverter Rolls (PL 2.26). Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J418B and P/J149 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Machine Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. The Exit Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for binding, obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to leave the Machine Exit Sensor. If OK, replace these components in the following order: Exit Roll (Assembly) (PL 2.26), Inverter 2 Upper Chute (PL 2.25), Inverter 2 Assembly (PL 2.23).
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-110 Machine Exit Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Machine Exit Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). Connect the meter from P/J412B-5 on the IOT PWB to GND. Actuate the Machine Exit Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412B-5 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is deactuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated. A Status Indicator RAPs
10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP
1/05 2-140
10-112 Machine Exit Sensor On RAP

The Machine Exit Sensor detected paper when closing the Front Cover or when power was switched on.
10-115 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP

The Exit Path Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sensor actuated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the paper path. Ensure there is no paper on the Machine Exit Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J412B and P/J149 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Machine Exit Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7, 10.4, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the paper path or damage on lead edge of sheets Contamination on the Fuser Exit Roll. Cheat the Front Door Interlock and observe the paper as it feeds out of the Fuser Exit Assembly and into the Inverter Top Chute Assembly. Ensure that the lead edge is not catching on the Inverter 1 Baffle or Inverter Gate. Also, check the function and position of the Inverter gate and Inverter Gate Solenoid dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit) and 010-006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert). Open the Inverter Door (PL 2.23) and clean the Exit Path Sensor. Also, ensure that the sensor actuator moves freely. Ensure that connectors P/J412B, P/J417A, and P/J164 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Exit Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure that the front Fuser Pin Bracket (PL 8.1) is installed and correctly positioned on the semi-perfs.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-110 Machine Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Machine Exit Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-115 Exit Path Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Exit Path Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Path Sensor (PL 2.25). Connect the meter from P/J412B-2 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Exit Path Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412B-2 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not actuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J412B-3 and P/J412B-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Path Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 004-009 Fuser Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Fuser Motor energizes and deenergizes.
1/05 2-141
10-112 Machine Exit Sensor On RAP, 10-115 Exit
N Press Stop. + 5 VDC is measured between P/J417B-11 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J42-8 and P/J42-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If the harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6) Press Start. The voltage at P/J417B-11 momentarily goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J42-6 on the Distribution PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.4 and check the harnesses for an open circuit. If the harnesses are good, replace the Fuser Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-117 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP

The Exit Path Sensor detected paper when closing the Inverter Cover or when the power was switched on.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.7 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Open the Inverter Door (PL 2.23) and clean the Exit Path Sensor. Also, ensure that the sensor actuator is moving freely. Ensure that connectors P/J412B and P/J164 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Exit Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-115 Exit Path Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Path Sensor (PL 2.25). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Exit Path Sensor (PL 2.25). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Exit Path Sensor.
10-115 Exit Path Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-117 Exit
1/05 2-142
10-120 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP

The Inverter Path Sensor detected paper when closing the Inverter Cover or when the power was switched on.

The Inverter Path Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sensor actuated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.8 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Clean the Inverter Path Sensor. Ensure that connectors P/J412B and P/J151 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Inverter Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the paper path Proper Nip Drive force on the Inverter Rolls Cheat the Front Door Interlock and check the function and the position of the Inverter Gate and Inverter Gate Solenoid dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit) and 010006 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Invert). Clean the Inverter Path Sensor and Inverter Roll 2. Also, ensure that the sensor actuator moves freely. Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A and P/J151 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Inverter Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-125 Inverter Path Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-125 Inverter Path Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Inverter Path Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). Connect the meter from P/J412A-8 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Inverter Path Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412A-8 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not actuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J412A-9 and P/J412A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-13 and GND. A B Status Indicator RAPs 1/05
2-143
10-120 Inverter Path Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-125
B Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
C Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Inverter Path Sensor.
Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 decreases momentarily then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Release Solenoid (Release). Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 decreases momentarily then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +18 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). C Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-144

The Inverter Path Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the Fuser Exit Sensor deactuated.
C Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9, 10.11 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Proper Nip Drive force on the Inverter Roll Obstructions in the paper path Clean the Inverter Path Sensor and ensure that the sensor actuator moves freely. Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A and P/J151 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Inverter Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 decreases momentarily then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Solenoid Release. Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 decreases momentarily then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +18 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Inverter Path Sensor.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-125 Inverter Path Sensor. Press Start. Actuate the Inverter Path Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H. Y N The display is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). Connect the meter from P/J412A-8 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Actuate the Inverter Path Sensor actuator. The voltage at P/J412A-8 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is deactuated, to +5 VDC when the sensor is actuated. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J412A-9 and P/J412A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Path Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-13 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-145
10-127 Duplex Registration Sensor On Jam RAP

The Registration Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Paper Feed in Duplex Mode.
C Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.7 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 8.8 and 8.10 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the paper path. Contamination on the Regi Roll, 2nd BTR or Vacuum Transport. Ensure that connectors P/J421A, P/J419A, P/J412A and P/J162 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Registration Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Clean the Registration Sensor.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412B-9 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Gate Solenoid (PL 2.25). Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start and Stop several times. The Registration Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J419A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Registration Motor (PL 2.15). Press Start. The voltage at P/J419A-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +18 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Regi. Motor (PL 2.15). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Registration Sensor.
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor. Press Start. Block the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). Connect the meter from P/J421A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J421A-11 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J421A-12 and P/J421A-10 on the on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 2.15). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-005 Inverter Gate Solenoid (Exit). Press Start. The Inverter Gate Solenoid energizes. Y N There is +24 VDC between P/J412B-9 and GND. Y N There is +24 VDC between P/J412B-8 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A B C Status Indicator RAPs
10-127 Duplex Registration Sensor On Jam RAP
1/05 2-146
B Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-128 Duplex Pre Regi. Sensor On Jam RAP

The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Paper Feed in Duplex Mode.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace Main Motor 2 (PL 1.5). Press Start. The voltage at P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +23 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace Main Motor 2 Motor (PL 1.5). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Pre Registration Sensor.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 8.8, 8.9, and 8.10 for the following procedure. Check the following: Proper Nip Drive force. Obstructions in the paper path. Contamination on the Pre Regi Roll or 2 nd BTR. Ensure that connectors P/J419A, P/J414B and P/J162 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Pre Registration Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor. Press Start. Open the Drawer. Insert a piece of paper to black the Pre Registration Sensor. Close the Drawer. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). Connect the meter from P/J419A-13 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Block the Pre Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J419A-13 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J419A-14 and P/J419A-12 on the on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start and Stop several times. Main Motor 2 energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-3, 4, 5, 6 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J414B-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-147
10-128 Duplex Pre Regi. Sensor On Jam RAP
10-130 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP

The Duplex In Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Reverse Feed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the paper path. Skewed sheets with LE corner damage. Ensure that the Upper Inverter Roll (PL 2.24) has proper nip pressure. Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A and P/J150 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Duplex In Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Solenoid Release. Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +18.5 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Duplex In Sensor. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Procedure
NOTE: In the following step, to block the Duplex In Sensor, open the Inverter Door. Slide a sheet of paper up, and under, the mylar guides at the bottom of the Inverter 1 Upper Chute. Enter dC330 010-130 Duplex In Sensor. Press Start. Open the Inverter Cover and block the Duplex In Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from L to H. Y N There display is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). Connect the meter from P/J412A-5 on the IOT PWB to GND. Block the Duplex In Sensor. The voltage at P/J412A-5 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is not blocked, to +5 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J412A-6 and P/J412A-4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-13 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A B C Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-148
10-132 Duplex Path Sensor On Jam RAP

The Duplex Path Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Reverse Feed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9, 10.10, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the paper path. Contamination on the Duplex In Roll (PL 2.21). Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A, and P/J420 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Solenoid Release. Press Start. The Release Solenoid deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +18 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Duplex Path Sensor. Status Indicator RAPs
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-132 Duplex Path Sensor. Ensure the Drawer is closed. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Connect the meter from P/J420-A2 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. The meter indicates less than +1.0 VDC. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420-A3 and P/J420-A1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check the actuator for the Duplex Path Sensor. If it is good, go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). NOTE: In the following step, to block the Duplex Path Sensor, open the Drawer then open the baffle (Jam Clearance Lever 3) on the bottom of the Drawer. Place a sheet of paper on the baffle then close the baffle. CLose the Drawer. Block the Duplex Path Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21). Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-13 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-149
10-132 Duplex Path Sensor On Jam RAP
10-133 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP

The Duplex Out Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the start of Reverse Feed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.8, 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Proper Nip Drive force at Drive Rolls (Baffle latches properly). Obstructions in the paper path. Contamination on the Duplex Path Roll (PL 2.21). Ensure that connectors P/J412A, P/J417A, and P/J420 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-14 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-026 Inverter Roll Solenoid Release. Press Start. The Release Solenoid deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-12 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J412A-12 momentarily goes to approximately +12 to +15 VDC then returns to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Release Solenoid (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-020 Inverter Motor Forward. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-15 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 and Flag 5 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness and connectors. If the harness and connectors are OK, replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-13, 14, 17, 18 on the IOT Drive PWB goes to approximately +18 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Inverter Motor (PL 2.24). Enter dC330 010-021 Inverter Motor Reverse. Press Start and Stop several times. The Inverter Motor energizes and deenergizes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the paper to be slow to actuate the Duplex Out Sensor. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-133 Duplex Out Sensor. Ensure the Drawer is closed. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Connect the meter from P/J420-A5 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. The meter indicates less than +1.0 VDC. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420-A6 and P/J420-A4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check the actuator for the Duplex Out Sensor. If it is good, go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). NOTE: To block the Duplex Out Sensor, open the Drawer then open Jam Clearance Lever 3 on the bottom of the Drawer. Place a sheet of paper on the baffle, close the baffle and Drawer. Block the Duplex Out Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.10. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). Enter dC330 010-025 Inverter Roll Solenoid Nip. Press Start. The Release Solenoid energizes. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-14 and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J412A-13 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A B C Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-150

Duplex In Sensor Paper Static Jam.
10-162 Duplex Path 1 Sensor On Jam RAP

Duplex Path Sensor Paper Static Jam.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.10 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Clean the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). Ensure that connectors P/J412A and P/J150 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Duplex In Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Inverter is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.10 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Clean the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21). Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J154 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Duplex Path Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Drawer is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-130 Duplex In Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-132 Duplex Path Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex Path Sensor (PL 2.21). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Duplex In Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-151
10-160 Duplex In Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-162 Du-

Duplex Out Sensor Paper Static Jam.
10-280 OCT Offset Sensor Failure RAP

At initialization, the home position was not detected by the Offset Home Sensor after OCT reversal. During offset, movement of the Stacker to the offset position was not detected by the Offset Home Sensor During offset, movement of the Stacker to the home position was not detected by the Offset Home Sensor
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.10 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Clean the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). Ensure that connectors P/J420 and P/J153 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and the Duplex Out Sensor, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure the Drawer is closed. Switch the power Off then On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.11 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Ensure that connectors P/J422A and P/J422B is seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-133 Duplex Out Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for a open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 10.10 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Duplex Out Sensor (PL 2.21). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Manually move the OCT toward the front of the system (Home Position). Enter dC330 010-086 Offset Motor Forward. Press Start. The OCT moves toward the rear (offset position). Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Motor (PL 14.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Press Stop. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J422B-12 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Press Start. The voltage between P/J422B-12 and GND goes to +24 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-085 Offset Motor Reverse. Press Start. The OCT moves toward the front (Home Position). Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Motor (PL 14.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 010-298 OCT Home Sensor. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-086 Offset Motor disForward. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-085 Offset Motor Reverse. Press Start. The play changes from H to L to H. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1).
B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
10-163 Duplex Out Sensor On Jam RAP, 10-280 OCT
1/05 2-152
B Connect the meter from P/J422A-9 on the IOT PWB to GND. Manually move the Stacker Tray toward the rear until it stops, and then toward the front, until it stops. The voltage at P/J422A-9 goes from than +5.0 VDC when the tray is to the front, to less than +1.0 VDC when the tray is moved off the front position. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-300 Inverter Cover Open RAP

The Inverter Cover is detected open.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.8 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Open and close the Inverter Cover. While physically pushing on the Inverter Cover, switch the power off then on. If the Fault Code does not appear, check Inverter Cover latch and alignment for damaged parts. Ensure that connectors P/J412A and P/J152 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, and the Inverter Cover Switch and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Enter dC330 010-299 OCT Position Sensor. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-086 Offset Motor disForward. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-085 Offset Motor Reverse. Press Start. The play changes from L to H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1). Connect the meter from P/J422A-8 on the IOT PWB to GND. Manually move the Stacker Tray toward the rear until it stops, and then toward the front, until it stops. The voltage at P/J422A-8 goes from less than +1.0 VDC when the tray is to the front, to +5.0 VDC when the tray is moved to the rear position. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.11 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the OCT Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Offset Motor gear assemblies.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-300 Inverter Cover Interlock. Open the Inverter Cover. Manually actuate the Inverter Cover Switch. The display changes from H to L when the switch is actuated. Y N Connect the meter from P/J412A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB to GND. Manually actuate the Inverter Cover Switch. The voltage at P/J412A-11 goes from +5 VDC to less than +1.0 VDC when the switch is manually actuated. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.8. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Inverter Cover Switch (PL 2.24). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is present and can not be cleared, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the fault code is not present and is occurring intermittently, go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.8 and check the harness for an intermittent open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Inverter Cover Switch (PL 2.24). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-153
10-280 OCT Offset Sensor Failure RAP, 10-300 In-
10-341 Fuser Oil Empty RAP

Fuser Oil Empty. This status code is declared when approximately 2000 - 4000 pages (Prints or Copies) have been made since Oil Near Empty Condition. NOTE: The Oil Near Empty Condition occurs when the sensor detects that the oil is low (approximately 40k prints have been printed). The machine issues a warning when it detects Fuser Oil Near Empty. When another 2000 to 4000 prints are printed out without servicing the Fuser Oil, the machine issues a stop message and then stops printing. NOTE: Oil usage varies depending on the types of images and paper being used. 30 - 40k prints per bottle is typical. However, when an oil metering system (Metering Blade, Donor Roll, etc.) is in need of service, it can use oil at two to three times the normal rate.
10-342 Fuser Web Change RAP

The Web Supply Roll is empty. The customer should install a new Web CRU. NOTE: The Web Empty condition occurs when the web supply roll has been emptied. when this occurs, two metal contacts touch the empty Web Supply Roll and complete a circuit. This causes two things to happen: a 10-342 fault code is declared and a Replace Cleaning Web message is displayed. The machine will not operate until a new Web is installed. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-077 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ On. Replacing the empty Web CRU with a new one will automatically reset NVM location 777077 Web Status from 2 to 0 and NVM location 777-078 Web Motor On Time from 17 to 0. The Replace Cleaning Web Soon message will first appear when 777-075 Web Near Empty changes from 0 to 1.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and 10.12 for the following procedure. Perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Drawer. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Verify that there is oil in the bottle. If not, install a new Oil Cartridge Machine Consumables. Close the Drawer. Switch the power Off and then On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 (1 of 2) and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Perform the following: 1. 2. Open the Drawer. Remove and inspect the Web CRU. The web supply roll should be empty and two metal clips should be touching the metal supply roll. If it is, install a new Web CRU (Machine Consumables) the fault code should disappear. If the web supply roll is not empty, install a new Web CRU (Machine Consumables). If the fault codes is still displayed, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
NOTE: This RAP assumes that there is fuser oil in the bottle and therefore is not a cause of the 10-341 Fault Code. Enter dC330 010-222 Oil Empty Sensor. Press Start. The Oil Empty Sensor status is H. Y N Press Stop. There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-341 Fuser Oil Empty RAP, 10-342 Fuser Web
1/05 2-154
10-355 External Heat Roll Contact Failure RAP

The External Heat Roll Retract Sensor did not go L within 5 seconds after the External Heat Roll Retract Motor started rotating.
N +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.6 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the Drawer Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1) Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1) Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2) Close the Drawer. Switch the power off, then on.
Procedure
NOTE: When using component control to energize the External Heat Roll Retract Motor, the following conditions occur: When the code[10-027] (contact) is first entered, the motor will drive until the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor senses that the External Heat Roll is in the contact position. Then the code switches to off. Subsequent attempts to enter [10-027] have no effect. In order to test code [10-027] again, code [10-028] (retract) must be entered first in order to drive the External Heat Roll to the retracted position.
Enter dC330 010-221 External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. Press Start. The cates L. Y N Check the following: The actuator for the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit.
display
indi-
Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open or short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4)
Check the following: Missing and/or broken External Heat Roll Retract Motor gear (PL 8.4) Binding in the linkage of the contact/retract mechanism for the External Heat Roll (PL 8.4) Loose connectors and pins for the External Heat Roll Retract Motor and Sensor
Enter dC330 010-027 External Heat Roll Retract Motor (Contact). Press Start. The External Heat Roll Retract Motor energizes. Y N Press Stop. + 24 VDC is measured at P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J45-11 on the Distribution PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4). NOTE: In the next step, the drop in voltage may be momentary or may be for a longer duration, but a drop in voltage should occur. Press Start. The voltage at P/J413A-1 drops to less than +20.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4). The External Heat Roll Retract Motor stops after several seconds.
1/05 2-155
10-355 External Heat Roll Contact Failure RAP
10-356 External Heat Roll Retract Failure RAP

The External Heat Roll Retract Sensor did not go H within 5 seconds after the External Heat Roll Retract Motor started rotating.
B Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.6 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the Drawer Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1) Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1) Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2) Close the Drawer. Switch the power off, then on.
Enter dC330 010-221 External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates H. Y N Check the following: The actuator (on the Camshaft) for the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. If the actuator binds, ensure that the Bracket (PL 8.4) on which the sensor is mounted is free from damage. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4)
Check the following: Missing and/or broken External Heat Roll Retract Motor gear (PL 8.4) Binding in the linkage of the contact/retract mechanism for the External Heat Roll (PL 8.4) Loose connectors and pins for the External Heat Roll Retract Motor and Sensor
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-027 External Heat Roll Retract Motor (Contact). Press Start. The External Heat Roll Retract Motor energizes. Y N Press Stop. + 24 VDC is measured at P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J45-11 on the Distribution PWB and GND. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4). NOTE: In the next step, the drop in voltage may be momentary or may be for a longer duration, but a drop in voltage should occur. Press Start. The voltage at P/J413A-1 drops to less than +20.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the External Heat Roll Retract Motor (PL 8.4). The External Heat Roll Retract Motor stops after several seconds. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). A B Status Indicator RAPs
10-356 External Heat Roll Retract Failure RAP
1/05 2-156
10-359 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP

The Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for more than 1500 msec (Heat Roll Control Thermistor disconnected).
10-360 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP

The Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for more than 1500 msec (Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor disconnected).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2).
Initial Actions
Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is not bent or misaligned.
Check the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is not bent or misaligned.
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Measure the resistance between P/J171-1 and P/J171-2 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Reconnect P/J171 to the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/ J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-7. The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%). Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J172 on the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Measure the resistance between P/J172-1 and P/J172-2 on the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). Reconnect P/J172 to the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/ J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-8. The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%). Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-157
10-359 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP,
10-361 Power On Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The Heat Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 12 minutes after Power On.
10-362 Standby Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 90 seconds during Standby Mode, but the Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates after self-test completes. Y N Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413 -13 and J413-A7 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance from pin 1 to pin 2 should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates after self-test completes. Y N Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413-13 and J413-A7 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
If the problem continues, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the fault persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-361 Power On Heat Roll Not Ready RAP, 10-362
1/05 2-158
10-363 Job Complete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the current job completed, but the Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
10-364 Job Incomplete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The Heat Roll declared Not Ready during a job and the Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 4 minutes after the machine stopped, but the Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates after self-test completes. Y N Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413 -13 and J413- A7 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates after self-test completes. Y N Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413- A7 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the H/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the H/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
1/05 2-159
10-363 Job Complete Heat Roll Not Ready RAP, 10-
B Y N This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4).
10-366 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP

The Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230 C (446 F) on the Heat Roll. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-160 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 1 to 0.
Replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 9 (Flag 19 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J171-1 and P/ J413A-7 If OK, replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Ensure NVM location 777-160 is reset to 0. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J171 on the Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is in specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4). Reconnect the connector. Close the Drawer. Switch on the power. The 10-366 fault is declared immediately after self-test completes. Y N Switch off the power. Check the voltage at P/J105-4 on the SSR and GND. Switch on the power. There is 0 VDC present when self-test completes. Y N The voltage at P/J105-4 increases to approximately +4.3 VDC within 12 minutes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-4 still reads approximately +4.3 VDC.
A B Status Indicator RAPs
10-366 Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure
1/05 2-160
B Y N This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4).
10-367 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP

Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230 C (446 F) on the Heat Roll. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-160 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 2 to 0.
Replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 9 (Flag 19 w/ Tag P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J172-1 and P/ J413A-8. If OK, replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Check the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Ensure NVM location 777-160 is reset to 0. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J172 on the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is in specification. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.4). Reconnect the connector. Close the Drawer. Switch on the power. The 10-367 fault is declared immediately after self-test completes. Y N Switch off the power. Check the voltage at P/J105-4 on the SSR and GND. Switch on the power. There is 0 VDC present when self-test completes. Y N The voltage at P/J105-4 increases to approximately +4.3 VDC within 12 minutes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-4 still reads approximately +4.3 VDC. A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-161
10-367 Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat
10-368 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP

The Pressure Roll Control Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for over 1500 msec (Pressure Roll Control Thermistor disconnected).
10-369 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP

The Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for over 1500 msec (Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor disconnected).
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Check the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is not bent or misaligned.
Check the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins.
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J174 on the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor. Measure the resistance between P/J174-1 and P/J174-2 on the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification. Y N NOTE: To remove the harness guard (PL 8.6) around the thermistor wires, press the tab on the guard that is located below the front cam (PL 8.6). Replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). Reconnect P/J174 to the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-10. The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%). Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Heat Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. Measure the resistance between P/J173-1 and P/J173-2 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification. Y N NOTE: To remove the harness guard (PL 8.6) around the thermistor wires, press the tab on the guard that is located below the front cam (PL 8.6). Replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Reconnect P/J173 to the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/ J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-9. The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%). Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.2. Check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-368 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP,
1/05 2-162
10-370 Power On Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP

The Pressure Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 8 minutes after Power On.
10-371 Stand By Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP

The Pressure Roll Heater Rod was On continuously for 90 seconds during the Standby Mode, but the Pressure Roll did not reach operating temperature.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Y N Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Y N Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
If the problem continues, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the fault persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-163
10-370 Power On Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP, 10-
10-372 Job Complete Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP

The Pressure Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the current job completed, but the Pressure Roll did not reach operation temperature.
10-373 Job Incomplete Pressure Roll Not Ready Failure RAP

The Pressure Roll declared Not Ready during a job and the Pressure Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the machine stopped, but the Pressure Roll did not reach operation temperature.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions Procedure

Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Y N Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413-A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3). Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Y N Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A9 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Go to Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.2. Check for a loose wire or connector, or an intermittent short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the P/R Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the P/R Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
10-372 Job Complete Pressure Roll Not Ready RAP,
1/05 2-164
10-375 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP

The Pressure Roll Control Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230 C (446 F) on the Pressure Roll. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-160 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 3 to 0.
C The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-3 still reads approximately +4.3 VDC. Y N This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
Go to Flag 7 (Flag 17 w/ Tag P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J173-1 and P/ J413A-9. If OK, replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Check the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Pressure Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Ensure NVM location 777-160 is reset to 0. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J173 on the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is in specification. Y N Replace the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). NOTE: To remove the harness guard (PL 8.6) around the thermistor wires, press the tab on the guard that is located below the front cam (PL 8.6). Reconnect the connector. Close the Drawer. Switch on the power. The 10-375 fault is declared immediately after self-test completes. Y N Switch off the power. Check the voltage at P/J105-3 on the SSR and GND. Switch on the power. There is 0 VDC present when self-test completes. Y N The voltage at P/J105-3 increases to approximately +4.3 VDC within 12 minutes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-165
10-375 Pressure Roll Control Thermistor Overheat
10-376 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP

The Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230 C (446 F) on the Pressure Roll. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-160 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 4 to 0.
C The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-3 still reads approximately +4.3 VDC. Y N This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). Replace the SSR (PL 9.3).
Go to Flag 7 (Flag 17 w/ Tag P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.2 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J174-1 and P/ J413A-10. If OK, replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Check the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Pressure Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). Inspect the surface of the Pressure Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.3).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Ensure NVM location 777-160 is reset to 0. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J174 on the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is in specification. Y N Replace the Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.6). NOTE: To remove the harness guard (PL 8.6) around the thermistor wires, press the tab on the guard that is located below the front cam (PL 8.6). Reconnect the connector. Close the Drawer. Switch on the power. The 10-376 fault is declared immediately after self-test completes. Y N Switch off the power. Check the voltage at P/J105-3 on the SSR and GND. Switch on the power. There is 0 VDC present when self-test completes. Y N The voltage at P/J105-3 increases to approximately +4.3 VDC within 12 minutes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
A B C Status Indicator RAPs
10-376 Pressure Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat
1/05 2-166
10-377 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Failure RAP

The External Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for 1500 msec (External Heat Roll Control Thermistor disconnected).
10-378 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Failure RAP

The External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected an abnormal resistance value continuously for 1500 msec (External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor disconnected).
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the External Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (External Heat Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Measure the resistance between P/J175-1 and P/J175-2 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot, to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Reconnect P/J175 to the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A-11. The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%). Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.3. Check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the External Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8). Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins.
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Switch the power off. Disconnect P/J176 on the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Measure the resistance between P/J176-1 and P/J176-2 on the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). Note the measurement if it is in specification. The resistance of the Thermistor is in specification. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8). Reconnect P/J176 to the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. Close the Drawer. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Measure the resistance from P/J413A-13 to P/J413A12. The resistance measurement is the same as the measurement noted above (+/- 5%). Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.3. Check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-167
10-377 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Fail-
10-379 Power On External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The External Heat Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 5 minutes after Power On.
N Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2, 10.3, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2). Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J193, P/J196, P/J105, and P/J100 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Heat Roll Thermostat, and the External Heat Roll Heater Rod and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the following: Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, go to Flag 14 on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. Disconnect the connectors to the components (External Heat Roll Thermostat, AC Driver PWB, SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins. Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace the Thermistor if worn, or dirty. Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Ensure that NVM location 777-003 External Heat Roll Temperature Control = 178 (NASG), 193 (ESG) and NVM location 777-012 External Heat Roll Ready Temperature = 165 (NASG), 188 (ESG). Replace the SSR (PL 9.3) if no problems is found with the connectors. If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J105-1 on the SSR and GND. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J422B-3 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is +4.5 VDC between P/J105-2 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND Y N Replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Press Start. The voltage at P/J105-2 decreases momentarily to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8). Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms.
10-379 Power On External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP
1/05 2-168
10-382 Stand By External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The External Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 1 minute during the Standby Mode, but the External Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
10-383 Job Complete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The External Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the current job completed, but the External Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/ J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). Y N Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8). Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8). Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413-A13 and J413-A11 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Go to Flag 6 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.3. Check for an intermittent open circuit or short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the External Heat Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/ J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). Y N Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8). Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8). Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A11 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Go to Flag 6 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.3. Check for an intermittent open circuit or short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the External Heat Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
If the problem continues, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the fault persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
If the problem continues, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the fault persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-169
10-382 Stand By External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP,
10-384 Job Incomplete External Heat Roll Not Ready RAP

The External Heat Roll declared Not Ready during a job and the External Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 3 minutes after the machine stopped, but the External Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the Pressure Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Initial Actions
If the problem continues, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the fault persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/ J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). Y N Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8). Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8). Check the resistance of the harness as follows: Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J413A from the IOT Drive PWB. Check the resistance between J413- A13 and J413-A11 of the harness. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Heat Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature).
The resistance is within specification. Y N Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance should be in the range of 0.78K ohms when the Roll is hot, to 150K ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is within specification. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Go to Flag 6 and Flag 4 of BSD 10.3. Check for an open circuit or short circuit to ground. Check the following: Check the External Heat Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage and excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the Heat Roll. Ensure that it is installed correctly.
10-384 Job Incomplete External Heat Roll Not Ready
1/05 2-170
B Y N This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8).
10-386 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP

The External Heat Roll Control Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230 C (446 F) on the External Heat Roll. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-160 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 5 to 0.
Replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.3 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J175-1 and P/ J413A-11. If OK, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor for cleanliness, damage, or excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (External Heat Roll Control Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Ensure NVM location 777-160 is reset to 0. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J175 on the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is in specification. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Reconnect the connector. Close the Drawer. Switch on the power. The 10-386 fault is declared immediately after self-test completes. Y N Switch off the power. Check the voltage at P/J105-2 on the SSR and GND. Switch on the power. There is 0 VDC present when self-test completes. Y N The voltage at P/J105-2 increases to approximately +4.3 VDC within 12 minutes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-2 still reads approximately +4.3 VDC. A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-171
10-386 External Heat Roll Control Thermistor Over-
B Y N This indicates that the problem is intermittent. Replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8).
10-387 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Overheat Failure RAP

The External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor detected a temperature in excess of 230 C (446 F) on the External Heat Roll. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-160 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ Power On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777160 Fuser Over heating Failure from 6 to 0.
Replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.3 and check for a short circuit to ground between P/J176-1 and P/ J413A-12. If OK, replace the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Check the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor for cleanliness, damage, or excessive wear at the point where the Thermistor contacts the External Heat Roll. If the surface of the Thermistor is worn, replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8). Inspect the surface of the Heat Roll for excessive wear due to the Thermistor. Replace the External Heat Roll if necessary (PL 8.8).
Procedure
NOTE: Prior to replacing a component, disconnect the connectors to the component (External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor and IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent and dirty pins. disconnect and reconnect the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Ensure NVM location 777-160 is reset to 0. Switch off the power. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Switch. Disconnect P/J176 on the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor. The resistance of the Thermistor should be in the range of 0.78K Ohms when hot to 150K Ohms when cool (room temperature). The resistance is in specification. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor (PL 8.8). Reconnect the connector. Close the Drawer. Switch on the power. The 10-387 fault is declared immediately after self-test completes. Y N Switch off the power. Check the voltage at P/J105-2 on the SSR and GND. Switch on the power. There is 0 VDC present when self-test completes. Y N The voltage at P/J105-2 increases to approximately +4.3 VDC within 12 minutes. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The Heater Rod remains illuminated while P/J105-2 still reads approximately +4.3 VDC. A B Status Indicator RAPs
10-387 External Heat Roll Overheat Thermistor Over-
1/05 2-172
10-389 Fuser Nip Contact Failure RAP

The Nip Sensor did not go L within 5 seconds after the Fuser Nip Clutch was energized (Pressure Roll started moving against the Heat Roll).
A NOTE: In the following step, if the Pressure Roll latches against the Heat Roll but does not remain latched, answer Yes to the statement. Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. The Pressure Roll latches against the Heat Roll. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-12 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6). The Pressure Roll remains latched against the Heat Roll. Y N Press Stop (the Exit Motor should still be running). Enter dC330 010-220 Nip Sensor. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. As the Pressure Roll latches and unlatches, the status of the Nip Sensor changes from L to H to L. Y N The status is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to and Flag 5 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). Replace the Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.6, BSD 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Ensure that connectors P/J413A and P/J169 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, and the Nip Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Check Fuse F1 on the AC Driver PWB. If the fuse is blown, replace it (PL 9.3). If the fuse blows again, go to the +24 VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and check for a short circuit in the harness. Open the Drawer and extend it to the Service Position. Rotate the Gear on the latching mechanism in the CCW direction (as viewed from the front of the machine) and ensure it rotates freely and the Pressure Roll moves up and down as the Gear is rotated (PL 8.6). Leave the Pressure Roll unlatched.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start. The Exit Motor energizes. Y N Press Stop. There is +24 VDC from P/J411 pin 6 to P/J411 pin 8. Y N Refer to Wirenets +24VDC-1 (Figure 1) and +24VDC-1 (Figure 5). troubleshoot the 24V input power from the IOT LVPS to the Exit Motor. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Check for obvious damage and/or broken Exit Motor and Fuser Nip Clutch gear assemblies that would cause the Pressure Roll latching mechanism to be slow to actuate the Nip Sensor. If the problem continues, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). If the problem continues, replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6). Status Indicator RAPs
A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-173
10-389 Fuser Nip Contact Failure RAP
10-390 Fuser Nip Retract Failure RAP

The Nip Sensor did not go H within 5 seconds after the Fuser Nip Clutch was energized to retract the Pressure Roll.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.6, BSD 10.9, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Ensure that connectors P/J413A and P/J169 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, and the Nip Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Check Fuse F1 on the AC Driver PWB. If the fuse is blown, replace it (PL 9.3). If the fuse blows again, go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and check for a short circuit in the harness. Open the Drawer and extend it to the Service Position. Rotate the Gear on the latching mechanism in the CCW direction (as viewed from the front of the machine) and ensure it rotates freely and the Pressure Roll moves up and down as the Gear is rotated (PL 8.6). Leave the Pressure Roll unlatched.
N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J417A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6). Press Start. The voltage at P/J417A-12 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start. The Exit Motor energizes. Y N Press Stop. There is +24 VDC from P/J411 pin 6 to P/J411 pin 8. Y N Refer to Wirenets +24VDC-1 (Figure 1) and +24VDC-1 (Figure 5). troubleshoot the 24V input power from the IOT LVPS to the Exit Motor. Approximately +7 VDC is measured between P/J418B-17 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). Press Start. The voltage at P/J418B-17 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J418B-19 and GND on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.9 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Exit Motor (PL 1.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). NOTE: In the following step, if the Pressure Roll latches against the Heat Roll but does not remain latched, answer Yes to the statement. Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. The against the Heat Roll. Pressure Roll latches
The Pressure Roll remains latched against the Heat Roll. Y N Press Stop (the Exit Motor should still be running). Enter dC330 010-220 Nip Sensor. Press Start. Enter dC330 010-023 Fuser Nip Clutch (Nip). Press Start. As the Pressure Roll latches and unlatches, the status of the Nip Sensor changes from L to H to L. Y N The status is a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +5 VDC is measured between P/J413A-1 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to and Flag 5 on BSD 10.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). Replace the Nip Clutch (PL 1.6). Check for obvious damage and/or broken Exit Motor and Fuser Nip Clutch gear assemblies that would cause the Pressure Roll latching mechanism to be slow to actuate the Nip Sensor. If the problem continues, replace the Nip Sensor (PL 8.6). If the problem continues, replace the Fuser Nip Clutch (PL 1.6).
10-390 Fuser Nip Retract Failure RAP
1/05 2-174
10-391 Fail Unit Failure RAP

The Failure detection circuit (hardware) indicated an abnormal operation but a failure did not occur for the Heat Roll, Pressure Roll and External Heat Roll.
10-398 Fuser Fan Failure RAP

The Fuser Fan Failed. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 772-017 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 772-017 Fuser Fan from 1 to 0.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2, 10.3, and 10.12 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates after self-test completes. Y N Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Y N Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). Y N Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8). Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8). Check the following: Disconnect the connectors to the components (Heat Roll, Pressure Roll, and External Heat Roll Thermostats; AC Driver PWB; SSR; and the IOT Drive PWB). Check for broken, bent, or dirty pins. Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4), Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6), or External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace the Thermistor if worn, or dirty. If no problem is found with the connectors, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem persists, replace these components in the following order until the problem is resolved: IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2), IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Ensure that connector P/J11B is seated correctly on the AC Driver PWB and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Switch the power Off then On. Enter dC330 010-004 Fuser Fan-Low Speed. Press Start. Press Stop. The Fuser Fan switches from High Speed to Low Speed and back to High Speed. Y N +12 VDC is measured between P/J11B-13 on the AC Driver PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). +12 VDC is measured between P/J11B-13 and P/J11B-14 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Approximately +4 VDC is measured between P/J11B-12 on the AC Driver PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2). Approximately +4 VDC is measured between P/J419B-13 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 11 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2). Less than +1.0 VDC is measured between P/J419B-12 on the IOT Driver and GND. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Fuser Fan (PL 10.2). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-175
10-391 Fail Unit Failure RAP, 10-398 Fuser Fan Fail-
10-399 Fuser Intake Fan Failure RAP

The Fuser Intake Fan Failed. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 772-018 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 772-018 Fuser Intake Fan from 1 to 0.
10-421 Fuser Oil Level RAP

The Oil Empty Sensor detected the Oil Near Empty Condition continuously for 5 seconds. NOTE: The Oil Near Empty Condition occurs when the sensor detects that the oil is low (approximately 40k prints have been printed). The machine issues a warning when it detects Fuser Oil Near Empty. When another 2000 - 4000 prints are printed out without servicing the Fuser Oil, the machine issues a stop message and then stops printing. NOTE: Oil usage varies depending on the types of images and paper being used. 30 - 40k prints per bottle is typical. However, when an oil metering system (Metering Blade, Donor Roll, etc.) is in need of service, it can use oil at two to three times the normal rate.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.1 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Ensure that connectors P/J413B and P/J283 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB and Fuser Intake Fan. and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Perform the following:
Procedure
Open the Front Door. Cheat the Interlock. Enter dC330 010-061 Fuser Intake Fan-High Speed. Press Start. Press Stop. The Fuser Intake Fan switches from Low Speed to High Speed and back to Low Speed. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J413B-13 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). +24 VDC is measured between P/J413B-13 and P/J413B-14 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the Harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Approximately +2 VDC is measured between P/J413B-12 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the Harness is good, replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). Replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). Less than +1.0 VDC is measured between P/J413B-11 on the IOT Driver and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 10.1 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Driver PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Fuser Intake Fan (PL 10.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the Drawer. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Verify that there is oil in the bottle. If not, install a new Oil Cartridge. Close the Drawer. Switch the power Off and then On.
Procedure
NOTE: This RAP assumes that there is fuser oil in the bottle and therefore is not a cause of the 10-421 Fault Code. Enter dC330 010-222 Oil Empty Sensor. Press Start. The Oil Empty Sensor status is H. Y N Press Stop. There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is +5 VDC between P/J413A-14 on the IOT Drive PWB and P/J44-7 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-399 Fuser Intake Fan Failure RAP, 10-421 Fuser Oil
1/05 2-176
10-422 Web CRU RAP

A faulty connection has occurred between the Web CRU and the IOT Drive PWB. NOTE: A legitimate Fuser Web Near Empty Condition occurs when 1458 minutes of Web On Time has been reached. The machine issues a warning when it detects Fuser Web Near Empty. With a legitimate Web Near Empty condition, only a message is displayed, not a fault code. NOTE: This status code is stored in NVM location 777-077 and cannot be reset by Power Off/ On. To reset this code, enter Diagnostics and change the value in NVM location 777-077 Web Status from 1 to 0.
10-500 Fuser Web CRU Not Present RAP

The Web CRU detection circuit detected that the CRU was not present or was not fully seated. NOTE: This condition occurs when the Web CRU is not installed, or is not seated fully. It will also occur if the small 3-pin connector (under the oil bottle) is not connected when the Fuser Assembly is installed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 and 10.12 for the following procedure. NOTE: Before proceeding into this procedure, clean the contacts on the CRU connector. Oxidation on the connector has been known to cause this problem. Also try reseating the CRU several times to see if the problem remains. Ensure that connectors P/J419A and P/J722 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, Web CRU Sensor and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.5 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Perform the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the Drawer. Remove and inspect the Web CRU. If the web supply roll is near empty, then replace it and proceed to the next step. Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Close the Drawer. Switch the power Off, then On.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-223 Web CRU Home. Press Start. The Web CRU status signal is H. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness and connectors for a short circuit to GND. If the harnesses and connectors are OK, replace the Web CRU. Press Stop. Power Off. Remove the Fuser Web CRU. Enter dC330 010-223 Web CRU Home. Press Start. The Web CRU Sensor status is L. Y N Install the Fuser Web CRU. +5 VDC is measured between P/J419A-17 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obstructions or damage that would cause the Web CRU Sensor status to be blocked (H). There are no obstructions and/or damage. Y N Remove the obstructions and/or damage. +2.2 VDC is measured between P/J419A-16 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Fuser Web Drive gear assemblies. Install the Fuser Web CRU.
Procedure
+24 VDC is measured between P/J413A-2 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J440-1 on the Web Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J440-2 on the Web Drive PWB and GND. Y N Check the Web Motor (PL 8.4) for an open circuit. If it is OK, replace the Web Drive PWB (PL 8.4). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. Enter DC330 010-032 Web Motor. Press Start. The voltage at P/J413A-2 decreases from +24 VDC to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Install the Web CRU, Front Cover and Oil Cartridge. Replace the Web Drive PWB (PL 8.4). If that does not correct the problem, replace the Web Motor (PL 8.4).
1/05 2-177
10-422 Web CRU RAP, 10-500 Fuser Web CRU Not
10-900 Fuser Cycle Down RAP

The Fuser temperature fell below the normal value during the job. The machine cycled down and temporarily stopped the copying job; and when it reached the operating temperature, canceled the above condition and started again automatically (the job resumes). NOTE: This condition should be expected to happen occasionally, especially when running a long job. (No recovery steps are necessary.) If this condition occurs frequently, continue with this RAP.
OF10-1 OCT Detection Failure RAP

The system does not detect an OCT when one is installed.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-296 OCT Detect. The display indicates L. Y N Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 10.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2, 10.3 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Ensure that the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor (PL 8.4) is fully seated.
Procedure
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. The Heat Roll Heater Rod illuminates after self-test completes. Y N Go to the OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The Pressure Roll Heater Rod illuminates momentarily. Y N Go to the OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). Y N Go to the OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP. Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Heater Rod ( P/J193-1 to P/J196-1). The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.8). Measure the resistance across the External Heat Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the External Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.8). Check the following: Disconnect the connectors to the Heat Roll, Pressure Roll, and External Heat Roll Thermostats; AC Driver PWB; SSR; and the IOT Drive PWB. Check for broken, bent, or dirty pins. Disconnect/reconnect the connectors several times to remove oxidation. Check the Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.4), Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6), or External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace if worn, or dirty. If no problem is found with the connectors, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
10-900 Fuser Cycle Down RAP, OF10-1 OCT Detec-
1/05 2-178
OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP

The Fuser Oil Pump is not dispensing Fuser Oil.
OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP

Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-033 Oil Pump. Press Start and Stop several times. Approximately 100 VAC is measured between P/J199-1 and P/J199-2 on the Fuser Oil Pump. Y N Approximately 100 VAC is measured between P/J18-3 and P/J18-1 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Press Stop. +5.8 VDC is measured between P/J11A-14 on the AC Driver PWB and GND. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J19-1 and P/J19-7 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Press Start. The voltage at P/J11A-14 goes to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Fuser Oil Pump (PL 8.7). Replace the Fuser Oil Pump (PL 8.7).
Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J419B, P/J194, P/J191, P/J105, P/J100, P/J11A, and P/J18 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Heat Roll Thermostat, and the Heat Roll Heater Rod and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. ACH is measured between P/J100-4 on the SSR and P/J18-2 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N ACH is measured between P/J100-4 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into the AC Driver PWB). Y N ACH is measured between P/J100-3 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N ACH is measured between P/J18-4 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Open the drawer. There is +24 VDC between P/J11A-4 on the AC Driver PWB and GND. Y N Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC between P/J419B-17 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 (Flag 16 w/ Tag P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. Close the drawer. The voltage at P/J419B-17 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Go to Flag 15 (Flag 26 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If TAG P31 is present, replace the Varistor PWB if the problem persists. There is +5 VDC between P/J105-1 on the SSR and GND.
A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-179
B Status Indicator RAPs
OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP, OF10-3 Heat Roll AC
B Y N Go to Flag 8 (Flag 18 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
C Go to Flag 20, Flag 23, and Flag 27 on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Replace the Varistor PWB (PL 9.6) if the problem persists. If the problem continues, replace the SSR (PL 9.3), then the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
There is approximately +4.3 VDC between P/J105-4 on the SSR and GND when the lamp is off. Y N Check for an open wire at pin 4 of P/J105. If OK, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Enter dC330 010-030 Heat Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The voltage at J105-4 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). P/
Go to Flag 9 (Flag 19 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the Heat Roll Heater Rod. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.3). Check the resistance across the Heat Roll Thermostat. The value is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the Heat Roll Thermostat (PL 8.4). Switch off the power. Disconnect the connectors to the Heat Roll Thermostat, AC Driver PWB, SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB. Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins. Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove oxidation. TAG P31 is present. Y N Go to Flag 10 and Flag 13 on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). If the problem persists, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Switch on the power. There is +5 VDC from J73 to J74 on the Surge SSR. Y N There is +5 VDC from J73 on the Surge SSR to frame ground Y N Go to Flag 28. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the Surge SSR (PL 9.6). Go to Flag 30. Check for an open circuit. If the wires and the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3) are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Switch off the power. Disconnect P/J70. The resistance from J70-1 to J70-2 is 55 ohms +/20%. Y N Replace Surge Resistor (PL 9.6).
C Status Indicator RAPs
OF10-3 Heat Roll AC Power RAP
1/05 2-180
OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP

The Pressure Roll did not reach the Ready temperature within 8 minutes after Power On.
D Go to Flag 15 (Flag 26 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2 and 10.12 for the following procedure. Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2). Ensure that NVM location 777-002 Pressure Roll Temperature Control = 130 (NASG/ESG) and NVM location 777-011 Pressure Roll Ready Temperature = 123 (NASG), 125 (ESG). Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J419B, P/J195, P/J192, P/J105, P/J100, P/ J11A, and P/J18 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Pressure Roll Thermostat, and the Pressure Roll Heater Rod and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
There is +5 VDC between P/J105-1 on the SSR and GND. Y N Go to Flag 8 (Flag 18 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is approximately +4.3 VDC between P/J105-3 on the SSR and GND when the lamp is off. Y N Check for an open connection at pin 3 of P/J105. If OK, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. The voltage at P/ J105-3 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 7 (Flag 17 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). Open the drawer. Remove the cheater on the Front Door Interlock. Measure the resistance across the Pressure Roll Heater Rod. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the Pressure Roll Heater Rod (PL 8.3). Measure the resistance across the Pressure Roll Thermostat. The resistance is less than 10 Ohms. Y N Replace the Pressure Roll Thermostat (PL 8.6). Go to Flag 11 and Flag 12 (Flag 21 and Flag 22 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). If Tag P31 is present, replace the Varistor PWB (PL 9.6) if the problem persists Check the following: Disconnect the connectors to the components (Pressure Roll Thermostat, AC Driver PWB, SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins. Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Check the Pressure Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.6). Replace the Thermistor if worn or dirty. Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is not bent or misaligned. If no problem is found with the connectors, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Procedure
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-031 Pressure Roll Heater Rod On. Press Start. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-2 on the SSR and P/J18-1 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-2 on the SSR and P/ J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into the AC Driver PWB). Y N ACH is measured between P/J100-3 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N ACH is measured between P/J18-4 on the AC Driver PWB and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB. Y N Open the drawer. There is +24 VDC between P/J11A-4 on the AC Driver PWB and GND. Y N Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). There is +24 VDC between P/J419B-17 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 (Flag 16 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2 and check for an open circuit. Close the drawer. The voltage at P/J419B-17 decreases to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the AC Driver PWB (PL 9.3). A B C Reissue D 1/05 2-181
DocuColor 12/DCCS50
OF10-4 Pressure Roll AC Power RAP
OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP

The External Heat Roll Lamp was On continuously for 1 minute during the Standby Mode, but the External Heat Roll did not reach operating temperature.
Flag 14 (Flag 24 w/ TAG P31) on BSD 10.2. Disconnect the connectors to the components (External Heat Roll Thermostat, AC Driver PWB, SSR, and the IOT Drive PWB). Check the connectors for broken, bent, or dirty pins. Disconnect, then reconnect, the connectors several times to remove contaminants due to oxidation. Check the External Heat Roll Control Thermistor (PL 8.8). Replace the Thermistor if worn, or dirty. Check the Drawer connector P700B at the rear of the Fuser for damaged pins. Check the mating connector on the IOT, and ensure that the mounting plate for the IOT connector is not bent or misaligned.
If the wires s are OK, check the following:
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 10.2, 10.3, and 10.12 for the following procedure. Check the following: NVM location 777-003 External Heat Roll Temperature Control = 178 (NASG), 193 (ESG) NVM location 777-012 External Heat Roll Ready Temperature = 165 (NASG), 188 (ESG). NVM location 777-008 External Heat Roll Power Save Temperature = 165 (NASG) and 120 (ESG). Open the Drawer and extend it to the service position. Perform the following: Remove the Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the Top Cover (PL 8.2).
If the problem continues, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). If the problem persists, replace the Varistor PWB (PL 9.6). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Ensure that connectors P/J422B, P/J193, P/J196, and P/J100 are seated correctly on the IOT Drive PWB, AC Driver PWB, SSR, Heat Roll Thermostat, and the External Heat Roll Heater Rod; and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Close the Drawer. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Switch on the power. Enter dC330 010-029 External Heat Roll Lamp. Press Start. ACH is measured momentarily between P/J100-1 on the SSR and P/J15-1 on the AC Driver PWB (ACN into AC Driver PWB). Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J105-1 on the SSR and GND. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J422B-3 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is +4.5 VDC between P/J105-2 on the SSR and GND. Y N Replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Press Start. The voltage at P/J105-2 decreases momentarily to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SSR (PL 9.3). Check the following areas of the harness for an open circuit: Flag 2 on BSD 10.3. Flag 3 on BSD 10.3. 1/05 2-182 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
OF10-5 External Heat Roll AC Power RAP
OF 10-6 Fuser Out of Oil Rap

The purpose of this RAP is to resolve problems where the machine runs out of Fuser Oil without declaring a Low Oil or Out of Oil fault. NOTE: to decrease the interval between detection of low oil level and fault declaration change NVM location 777-056 to 500, and location 777-058 to 3.
Procedure
Enter dC330 010-222 Oil Empty Sensor. Press Start. The Oil Empty Sensor status is L. Y N Perform the following steps 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Front Door and pull out the Drawer Assembly. Remove the Fuser Top Cover (PL 8.2) and Front Cover (PL 8.1). Slide the Fuser back in position. Latch the Drawer Assembly Remove the Oil Empty Sensor from the Oil Tank (PL 8.7). Thoroughly clean the sensor, but do not disconnect it or reinstall it. Install a cheater in the Front Door Interlock, and allow the machine to come to Ready.
The UI displays Replace the Fuser Oil Cartridge soon. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J167 pins 1 and 3. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and troubleshoot the +5V circuit. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 (2 of 2) and check the wire between P/J167-2 on the Oil Empty Sensor and P/J413A-3 on the IOT Drive PWB for an open circuit or a short circuit to a voltage source. If the wire is OK, replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Reinstall the Sensor. Make Sure that the green circuit pwb faces AWAY from the Heat Lamps. Close the Front Door. If the Replace the Fuser Oil Cartridge soon message remains, check for a loose connection at P/J167or P/J413A. If the harness is good, replace the Oil Empty Sensor (PL 8.7). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-183
1/05 2-184
11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP

The OCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D,11-107 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Long indicates that the trail edge of the paper has not passed through the Decurler Exit Sensor.
F Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10).
Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll Pinch Rollers Exit Roll Drive Belt
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD 11.4 and BSD 11.8 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mail Box Transport Roll and the Oct Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J566 on the OCT Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. The OCT Gate is in the Up or OCT position Y N Enter dC330 011-081 OCT Gate Solenoid OCT On. Press Start. The OCT Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-1 and GND Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). A 1/05 2-185 G Status Indicator RAPs
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Oct Exit Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mail Box Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) A B C Reissue D E F
DocuColor 12/DCCS50
11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP
Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the Vertical Transport. Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
11-108 OCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP

The OCT Exit Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the OCT Exit Sensor actuated. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-108 SCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Enter dC330 011-107 OCT Exit Sensor. Manually actuate the OCT Exit Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 1on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). +5 VDC is measured between P/J562-4 and P/J562-6 Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/ J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-5 and GND. Y N Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 11.2 and 11.4 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mail Box Transport Roll and the Oct Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J566 on the OCT Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. Ensure that the OCT Full Stack Sensor is operating correctly. Refer to the 11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the Oct Exit Sensor Y N Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
11-107 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP, 11-108
1/05 2-186
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
11-109 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP

The OCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the trail edge of the same paper. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-109 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Short indicates that the trail edge of the paper has passed through the Decurler Exit Sensor.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the OCT Exit Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The actuator is binding. Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the OCT Exit Sensor. Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD 11.4 and BSD 11.8 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mail Box Transport Roll and the Oct Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J566 on the OCT Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Oct Exit Sensor Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mail Box Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 1on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-187 B C D E F Status Indicator RAPs
11-108 OCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP, 11-109 OCT
F Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10).
Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
H Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the Vertical Transport. Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. The OCT Gate is in the Up or OCT position Y N Enter dC330 011-081 OCT Gate Solenoid OCT On. Press Start. The OCT Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-1 and GND Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Enter dC330 011-107 OCT Exit Sensor. Manually actuate the OCT Exit Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 1on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). +5 VDC is measured between P/J562-4 and P/J562-6 Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/ J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-5 and GND. Y N Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
A G H Status Indicator RAPs
11-109 OCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP
1/05 2-188
11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.
11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.3 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J651 and P/ J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.3 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J651 and P/ J654on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.3 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Procedure
1/05 2-189
11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor
B Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
11-115 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam RAP

The Mail Box Vertical Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2, BSD11.5 and BSD11.8 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J818, and P/J819 on the Mail Box Vertical Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Enter dC330 011-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor. Manually block the Mail Box Vertical Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from L to H to L as the paper moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.5. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9). The Vertical LED is on. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J561-3 and P/J561-5 Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD11.5. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Vertical LED (PL 13.5). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9). With paper at the sensor, more than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/ P/J551-4 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mail Box Vertical Sensor Y N Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension.
A B Status Indicator RAPs
11-115 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On
1/05 2-190
11-116 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP
The Mail Box Vertical Sensor did not detect the Trail edge of the paper within the specified time after the Mail Box Vertical Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-116 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J818, and P/J819 on the Mail Box Vertical Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Check the bin entrance area for obstructions. Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Pinch Rolls (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD11.5 for the following procedure.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Check the bin entrance area for obstructions. Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Check the Mail Box Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. Replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9) if the problem is not resolved.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the Mail Box Vertical Sensor Y N Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Vertical Transport Rolls are rotating. Y N The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 2-191 Status Indicator RAPs
11-116 Mail Box Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off
11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP

The V-Tra In Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
E Go to Flag 6 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J567 on the V-Tra In Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to enter the Vertical Transport. Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the V-Tra In Sensor Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N The OCT Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position Y N Enter dC330 011-082 OCT Gate Solenoid Bin Tray On. Press Start. The OCT Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-3 on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/ J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-3 and GND Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Go to Flag 6 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). A B C D E Status Indicator RAPs A 1/05 2-192
Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mail Box Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP
A Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Enter dC330 011-142 Vertical Transport In Sensor. Manually actuate the V-Tra In Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the V-Tra Sensor (PL 13.9). +5 VDC is measured between P/J562-7 and P/J562-9 Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Oct Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/ P/J562-8 and GND. Y N Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
11-143 V-Tra In Sensor Off Jam RAP

The V-Tra In Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the V-Tra In Sensor actuated. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-143 Mailbox Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 11.2 and 11.4 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J567 on the V-Tra In Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the Oct Exit Sensor Y N Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Switch Off the Power. Disconnect P/J572 from the Mail Box Drive Motor. Switch On the Power. +24 VDC is measured between P/ J572-1 and P/J572-2. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10) Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. A B C D Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-193
11-142 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Long RAP, 11-143
D Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
11-144 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Short RAP

The V-Tra In Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the same paper. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.2 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mail Box paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mail Box paper path Ensure that the Mail Box front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J567 on the V-Tra In Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll Pinch Rollers Exit Roll Drive Belt
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the V-Tra In Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The actuator is binding. Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the fed paper to be slow to deactuate the V-Tra In Sensor. Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the V-Tra In Sensor Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N The OCT Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position Y N Enter dC330 011-082 OCT Gate Solenoid Bin Tray On. Press Start. The OCT Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J562-2 and P/J562-3 on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J562-2 Mail Box Control PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J563-1 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/ J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J562-3 and GND Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Go to Flag 6on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). A B C D E Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
11-143 V-Tra In Sensor Off Jam RAP, 11-144 V-Tra In
1/05 2-194
E Go to Flag 6 on BSD 11.4. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
A Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Enter dC330 011-142 Vertical Transport In Sensor. Manually actuate the V-Tra In Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.4. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9). +5 VDC is measured between P/J562-7 and P/J562-9 Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/ J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD11.4. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9). With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J562-8 and GND. Y N Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10)
Ensure that the OCT gate is connected to the OCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9). Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to enter the Vertical Transport. Ensure that the OCT gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the OCT Gate (PL 13.9) and the OCT Gate Solenoid (PL 13.9).
Enter dC330, 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mail Box Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Entrance Roll (PL 13.9) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.9) Exit Roll (PL 13.9) Drive Belt (PL 13.10) Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-195
11-144 V-Tra In Sensor On Jam Short RAP
E Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP

The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the M/C Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A6 and GND Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10). +less than 0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14).
Initial Actions
Refer toBSD11.1, BSD11.2, BSD 11.3 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Decurler paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the MC Exit Roll and the Decurler Entrance Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Decurler Exit Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Decurler. Y N The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs Y N Enter dC330 011-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J570-A1 and GND on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A5 and GND A B C D E Status Indicator RAPs A 1/05 2-196 B C
The Entrance Rolls are rotating. Y N Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping. Entrance Roll Drive Gear (PL 13.14) Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 13.14) Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear (PL 13.14)
Enter dC330 011-011-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Enter dC330 011-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Enter dC330 011-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Stepping Motor rotates. Decurler
C Y N Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.14) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.12) Exit Roll (PL 13.14) Drive gears (PL 13.13) (PL 13.14)
F More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.14) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.12) Exit Roll (PL 13.14) Drive gears (PL 13.13) (PL 13.14)
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll (PL 13.14) Pinch Rollers (PL 13.12) Exit Roll (PL 13.14) Drive gears (PL 13.13) (PL 13.14)
Ensure that the Decurler paper path is free of any paper. Enter dC330 011-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J570-B5 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J654-1 and P/J654-3 on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). F Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-197
E Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10).
11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP

The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the MC Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A6 and GND Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10). +less than 0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14).
Initial Actions
Refer toBSD11.1, BSD11.2 BSD11.3 and BSD11.4 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Decurler paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the MC Exit Roll and the Decurler Entrance Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Decurler Exit Sensor Y N The paper entered the Decurler. Y N The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs Y N Enter dC330 011-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J570 -A1 and GND on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A5 and GND A B C D E Status Indicator RAPs A 1/05 2-198 B C
The Entrance Rolls are rotating. Y N Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping. Entrance Roll Drive Gear Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear
Enter dC330 011-011-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Enter dC330 011-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Enter dC330 011-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Stepping Motor rotates. Decurler
C Y N Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll Pinch Rollers Exit Roll Drive gears
F More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll Pinch Rollers Exit Roll Drive gears
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Entrance Roll Pinch Rollers Exit Roll Drive gears
Ensure that the Decurler paper path is free of any paper. Enter dC330 011-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J570-B5 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J656-1 and P/J661-3 on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 13.12). F Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-199
11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the V-Tra In Sensor at power on. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.
11-191 Paper Remains at Mail Box Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP
The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Mail Box Vertical Sensor at power on. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-191 Paper Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.4 and BSD 11.8 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the V-Tra In sensor and the sensor actuator moves freely. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Ensure that P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J567 on the V-Tra In Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.5 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper or foreign object is blocking the Mail Box Vertical sensor. Ensure that the Mail Box Vertical sensor and the Vertical LED are clean. Ensure that P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J818 and P/J819 on the Mail Box Vertical Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-142 Vertical Transport In Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 11.4 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9).If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J562-8 and GND on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N Replace the V-Tra In Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the V-Tra In Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J551-3 and P/J551-5 on the Mail Box Control PWB Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 on BSD 11.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9). If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J551-4 and GND on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N Replace the Mail Box Vertical Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the Mail Box Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP, 11-
1/05 2-200
11-192 Paper Remains at OCT Exit Sensor RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Oct Exit Sensor at power on. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-192 Paper Remains at SCT Exit Sensor RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.
11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code. NOTE: Ensure that Sorter S-1 Tag is installed.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.4 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the OCT Exit sensor and the sensor actuator moves freely. Check for excessive static on copies. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Ensure that P/J562 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J567 on the V-Tra In Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.3 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J651 and P/ J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-107 OCT Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 11.4 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9).If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J562-5 and GND on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N Replace the OCT Exit Sensor (PL 13.9). Check the OCT Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
1/05 2-201
11-192 Paper Remains at OCT Exit Sensor RAP, 11-
11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP

The Control Logic determined that either the Offset Home Sensor or the Offset Position Sensor did not detect the OCT position within 600msec. for three consecutive attempts.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.7 for the following procedure. Ensure that connectors P/J564 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Shorting Plug P/J801A, Double Plug J880, P/J803 on the Offset Motor, P/J806 on the Offset Position Sensor, and P/J806 on the Offset Home Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Enter dC330 011-274 Offset Position Sensor. Press Start. Block the Offset Home sensor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-6 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Ensure that the sensor actuator is properly installed, and not bent or distorted. If the problem continues, replace the Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1). Manually move the Offset Catch Tray to the front/home position. The display changes to L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-6 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Disconnect P/J564 from the Mail Box Control PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/ J564-4 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 2, Flag 4 on BSD 11.7, and Flag 5 on BSD 11.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Offset Position Sensor (PL 14.1). Enter dC330 011-095 OCT Offset Motor Rear On. Press Start. The Offset Catch moves to the rear/offset position. Y N Press Stop. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J564-1 and P/J564-2 Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Tray
Procedure
Manually move the Offset Catch Tray to the front/home position. Enter dC330 011-273 Offset Home Sensor. The display indicates H. Y N Remove the Offset Catch Tray from the machine. leave the Offset Catch Tray electrically connected. Open the Offset Catch Tray to expose the motor and sensors. Enter dC330 011-273 Offset Home Sensor. Press Start. Block the Offset Home sensor with a sheet of paper. The display indicates H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-7 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Ensure that the sensor actuator is properly installed, and not bent or distorted. If the problem continues, replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1). Manually move the Offset Catch Tray to the rear/offset position. The display changes to L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-7 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Disconnect P/J564 form the Mail Box Control PWB. +5 VDC is measured between P/ J564-4 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 2, Flag 3, and Flag 5 on BSD 11.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 14.1). Enter dC330 011-274 Offset Position Sensor. The display indicates H. Y N Remove the Offset Catch Tray from the machine. leave the Offset Catch Tray electrically connected. Open the Offset Catch Tray to expose the motor and sensors.
Enter dC330 011-095 OCT Offset Motor Rear On. Press Start. +24 VDC is measured between P/J564-1 and P/J564-2 Y N Disconnect P/J564 from the Mail Box Control PWB. Press Stop. Press Start. +24 VDC is measured between P/J564-1 and P/J564-2 Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 11.7. Check the wires for a short circuit to ground. If the wires are good, replace the Offset Motor (PL 14.1). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 11.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Offset Motor (PL 14.1). Enter dC330 011-093 OCT Offset Motor Front On. Press Start. The moves to the front/home position. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). B Offset Catch Tray
11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP
1/05 2-202
B The Offset Catch Tray Offset function appears to be functioning correctly. Check the sensors for intermittent operation. Ensure that the Offset Motor gear and rack are not damaged or binding. If the problem continues, replace the following parts in the order listed. Offset Sensors (PL 14.1) Offset Motor (PL 14.1) Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10)
11-301 Front Cover A Interlock Open RAP

Front Cover A Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Mailbox Front Door Interlock is open. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-301 Mailbox Door Interlock Open RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.1 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J564 on the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch are connected before beginning this RAP. Check the Front Cover for proper alignment. Verify that the Front Cover closes properly.
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-301 Mailbox Front Cover Intlk Sw. The state of the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch is Low and switches to High when the Mail Box Front Cover is opened. Y N With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J551-2 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Go to the Flag 1 on BSD 11.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch (PL 13.4). If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
1/05 2-203
11-273 Mail Box OCT Offset Fail RAP, 11-301 Front
11-302 Front Cover B Interlock Open RAP

Front Cover B Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Mail Box Front Cover is open. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-302 Decurler Door Interlock Open RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP

Docking Interlock Open failure. This status code is declared when the Mail Box is not properly docked. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.1 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J551 on the Mail Box Control PWB, and P/J564 on the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch are connected before beginning this RAP. Check the Front Cover for proper alignment. Verify that the Front Cover closes properly.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.1 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB, P/J665 and P/J664 on the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switches, and P/J652 on the Decurler Control PWB are connected before beginning this RAP. Check the Mail Box for proper alignment.
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-301 Mailbox Front Cover Intlk Sw. The state of the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch is Low and switches to High when the Mail Box Front Cover is opened. Y N With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J551-2 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Go to the Flag 1 on BSD 11.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch (PL 13.4). If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-303 Mailbox Docking INTLK Switches. The status of the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switches is High and changes to Low when the Mail Box is undocked. Y N With the Mail Box docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J570-B7 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Disconnect P/J665 from the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch 2. With the Mail Box docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J570-B7 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Disconnect P/J664 from the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch 1. With the Mail Box docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J570-B7 on the Mail Box Control PWB and GND. Y N Go to the Flag 2 on BSD 11.1. Check the wires for an short circuit to ground. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Mailbox Docking Interlock Switch 1 (PL 13.12). Replace the Mailbox Docking Interlock Switch 2 (PL 13.12). Check the Mail Box Docking Interlock Switches for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switches are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Check the Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. Check that the Mail Box is standing on an even floor. Adjust Castors if necessary. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
11-302 Front Cover B Interlock Open RAP, 11-303
1/05 2-204
11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP

This status code is declared when the Decurler Cam Position Sensor did not energize within the specified time (1400msec) after the Decurler Clutch is energized. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J570 -A1 and GND on the Mail Box Control PWB. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.3 for the following procedure. Ensure that connectors P/J652, and P/J651 on the Decurler Control PWB, Double Plug J571, P/J570 on the Mail Box Control PWB and P/J656 on the Decurler Cam Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A5 and GND Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J570-A6 and GND Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box control PWB (PL 13.10). less than 0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). The Entrance Rolls are rotating. Y N Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping. Entrance Roll Drive Gear (PL 13.14) Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 13.14) Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear (PL 13.14)
Procedure
At Power On, the Mail Box Drive Belt is moving Y N Enter dC330 011-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mail Box Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J572-2 of the Mail Box Drive Motor Y N Switch Off the Power. Disconnect P/ P/J572 from the Mail Box Drive Motor. Switch On the Power. +24 VDC is measured between P/J572-1 and P/J5722. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.2. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10) Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 11.2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J572-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10) Replace the Mail Box Drive Motor (PL 13.10). Ensure that the Mail Box Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft and the drive belt is properly tensioned. Enter dC330 011-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Enter dC330 011-011-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. B Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-205
B Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
C Clean the Decurler Cam Sensor and the Decurler Cam Sensor Reflector. Ensure that there are no obstructions between the Decurler Cam Sensor and the Decurler Cam sensor Reflector. If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Cam Sensor (PL 13.13).
Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Enter dC330 011-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Enter dC330 011-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Replace the Decurler Stepping Motor (PL 13.14). Enter dC330 011-276 Decurler Cam Position Sensor A. Press Start. Manually move the Reflector in and out of the sensor The Decurler Cam Sensor Roll A Position alternates between H and L as the reflector is moved in and out of the sensor. Y N The Display is always L Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J652-2 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Cam Sensor (PL 13.13). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-9 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 11.3. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). +5 VDC is Measured between P/J652-1 and P/J652-3 on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 11.3. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Decurler Cam Sensor (PL 13.13). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Control PWB (PL 13.12).
C Status Indicator RAPs
1/05 2-206
11-512 Offset Catch Tray / Simple Catch Tray Full Stack RAP
The Control Logic detected that the Offset Catch Tray/Simple Catch Tray is full. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-512 Simple Catch Tray (SCT) Full Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP

The Control Logic detected that Bin 1 is full. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.6 for the following procedure. Ensure that Bin 1 is empty
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.7 for the following procedure. Ensure that the Offset Catch Tray/Simple Catch Tray is empty Ensure that connectors P/J564 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Shorting Plug P/J801A, Double Plug J880, and P/J807 on the Full Stack Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-281 Bin 1 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out of the sensor. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Check the Bin 1 Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10).
Procedure
Enter 011-275 Full Stack Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-5 and DC-COM on the Mail Box PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Block the Full Stack Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-4 and P/J564-3 on the Mail Box PWB. Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 11.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1). Check the Full Stack Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1).
1/05 2-207
11-512 Offset Catch Tray / Simple Catch Tray Full


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-283 Bin 3 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out of the sensor. Y N Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Check the Bin 3 Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the problem continues, replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10.
11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack RAP, 11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack
1/05 2-208


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
1/05 2-209


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
1/05 2-210


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
1/05 2-211

11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP

The Control Logic detected that the Offset Catch Tray is full. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD11.7 for the following procedure. Ensure that the Offset Catch Tray is empty Ensure that connectors P/J564 on the Mail Box Control PWB, Shorting Plug P/J801A, Double Plug J880, and P/J807 on the Full Stack Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 011-275 Full Stack Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564-5 and DC-COM on the Mail Box PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD11.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1). Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Block the Full Stack Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J564 -4 and P/J564-3 on the Mail Box PWB. Y N CR1 on the Mail Box Control PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J569-1 and P/J44-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Mail Box Control PWB (PL 13.10). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 11.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1). the Full Stack Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the Full Stack Sensor (PL 14.1).
11-920 Bin 10 Full Stack RAP, 11-921 Offset Catch
1/05 2-212
11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP

The Control Logic has determined that bin 10 is full while operating in the Stack Mode. NOTE: If this machine has a Finisher/Sorter Accessory, go to Section 8D, 11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP to troubleshoot this Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Ensure that there are no obstructions in the Stacker area
Procedure
Go to 11-921 Offset Catch Tray Full Stack RAP to check out the Stacker Full Sensor for any malfunctions.
1/05 2-213
1/05 2-214
14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP

The SOS Sensor did not go Low within a specified time after the Polygon Motor energized.
14-376 Half Tone PWB Fail RAP

The System wrote data in the Asic Register on the Half Tone PWB, but could not read the data.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Verify that the Drum Unit is firmly seated and that the screws that hold the unit in place are installed. Verify that P/J420A on the lOT Drive PWB, and P/J399 AND P/J395 on the Half Tone PWB are firmly connected.
Initial Actions
PO/PO the machine. If the Fault continues, perform the following. Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J398 on the Half Tone PWB is seated properly. Ensure that P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB are seated properly. Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 6.5 and check the wires for damage or an open or short circuit. Check for other Chain 14 faults. Troubleshoot those faults first.
Procedure
Open the Front Door and cheat the Interlock. Enter dC330 014-050 Polygon Motor Low Speed. Press Start. When the Polygon Motor rotates you can feel vibrations by placing your hand on the Drum Module Cover. The Polygon Motor is rotating. Y N Press Stop. There is approximately 3.5 - 5.0 VDC between P/J420A-B16 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.6 and check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the ROS Assembly (PL 4.1). Enter dC330 014-050 Polygon Motor Low Speed. Press Start. +0.0 - +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J420A-B16 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.6 and check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). There is +24 VDC from P/J420A-B14 to P/J420-B15 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenets (Figure 5) and troubleshoot the 24 VDC circuits. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 6.6. Check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires are OK, replace the ROS (PL 4.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Switch on the power. +5 VDC is measured between P/J399-1 and P/J399-3 on the HalfTone PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J395-1 and P/J395-3 on the Half-Tone PWB. Y N Go to the +5 VDC Wirenets (Figure 1) and troubleshoot the 5 VDC circuits. Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2) Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 6.5 and check for an open circuit. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.6 and check for a short to ground. If the wires are OK, replace the following: lOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). ROS Assembly (PL 4.1).
Procedure
Open the Front Door and cheat the Interlock. Enter dC330 014-050 Polygon Motor Low Speed. Press Start. When the Polygon Motor rotates you can feel vibrations by placing your hand on the Drum Module Cover. The Polygon Motor is rotating. Y N Go to the 14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP. +5VDC is measured between P/J342-1 and P/J342-3 on the ROS Assembly. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 6.6. Check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). +5VDC is measured between P/J399-2 and gnd. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 6.6. Check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 6.6. Check the wires for an open or short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the ROS Assembly (PL 4.1). If the problem persists, replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
1/05 2-215
14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP, 14-376 Half Tone PWB
14-380 SOS Fail 1 RAP

The SOS Interval became longer than normal while the Polygon Motor was energized.
14-384 SOS Fail 2 RAP

The SOS Interval became shorter than normal while the Polygon Motor was energized.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Verify that P/J420A on the IOT Drive PWB is firmly seated. Verify that P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB is firmly seated. Verify that P/J347 and P/J342 on the ROS are firmly seated. Verify that P/J399 on the Halftone PWB is firmly seated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.5, BSD 6.6, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Verify that P/J420A on the IOT Drive PWB is firmly seated. Verify that P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB is firmly seated. Verify that P/J347 on the ROS is firmly seated. Verify that P/J342 on the ROS is firmly seated.
Procedure
Replace the following: ROS (PL 4.1) IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
Procedure
Replace the following: ROS (PL 4.1) IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2)
14-380 SOS Fail 1 RAP, 14-384 SOS Fail 2 RAP
1/05 2-216
14-388 XPC ASIC Fail RAP

The Control Logic detected a ROS Pickup ASIC Failure
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 1.1, BSD 6.6 and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J398 on the Halftone PWB and the P/J345 and P/J341 on the LDD PWB are fully seated. Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 6.5 and check the wires for an open or shorted circuit.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, go to 14-376 Half Tone PWB Fail RAP.
1/05 2-217
1/05 2-218
15-270 Coordinate Bus Fail RAP

Communication failure between IPS and UI at power-on when an Edit Pad is installed. NOTE: This fault code is not displayed on the UI; it is logged into the PWS only.
15-281 Pre-IPS X Recognize Fail RAP

The BR PWB Detected paper money during the first scan. NOTE: The fault code is not displayed on the UI, but is recorded in the DC120 Counter (Fail/ Jam) Fail Counter and DC122 History (Fail/Jam) Fail History. The UI will display the customer message Check copy output - see that your original is not a prohibited item for copying.
Initial Actions
Refer to Edit Pad BSD2.5 (Figure 1) and BSD 2.6 (Figure 2), and IOT BSD 3.1 (Figure 1) Check the following Connectors: P800 on the Edit Pad cable P491 on the UI PWB P/J821 and P/J824 on the Edit Pad P571 on the IPS PWB
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Verify that the original is not a prohibited item for copying. Ensure that P/J560 in the BR PWB and the Pre IPS PWB are firmly connected.
Procedure
Reseat the BR PWB. If the problem continues, replace the BR PWB (PL 3.5)
Procedure
There is +3.4 VDC from P/J490 pin 14 on the UI PWB to DC COM. Y N Replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5). Perform ADJ 9.1.18. Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
1/05 2-219
15-270 Coordinate Bus Fail RAP, 15-281 Pre-IPS X
15-284 POST IPS X Recognize Fail RAP

The BR PWB detected currency on the Platen during the 2nd scan. NOTE: The Fault Code is not displayed on the UI, but is recorded in the DC120 Fail Counter and the DC122 Fail History. The UI will display the message Check Copy Output - See that your original is not a prohibited item for copying.
15-342 IPS NVM Fail RAP

The control logic detected a POST IPS NVM Test Failure at power on.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Verify that the original is not a prohibited item for copying.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
Procedure
Reset the BR PWB. If the problem continues, replace the BR PWB (PL 3.5).
15-284 POST IPS X Recognize Fail RAP, 15-342 IPS
1/05 2-220
15-361 POST IPS PWB Fail (Self Test) RAP

The POST IPS PWB I/O Port reported an error at power on.
15-362 X Hard Fail RAP

Communication Failure between the Pre IPS PWB and the BR PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Ensure that P/J560 in the BR PWB and the Pre IPS PWB are firmly connected. Ensure that the connection at the BR PWB has not been tampered with. Ensure that the BR PWB mounting screws are tight.
Procedure
PO/PO the copier/printer. If the error code persists, replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
Procedure
Reseat the BR PWB. If the problem continues, replace the following: BR PWB (PL 3.5) Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
1/05 2-221
15-361 POST IPS PWB Fail (Self Test) RAP, 15-362
15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP

The control logic detected a memory clearance error.
15-365 X Comm Fail RAP

The control logic detected that the POST IPS PWB could not detect a change in the signal from the Pre IPS PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J514 on the Pre IPS PWB and the MEM SYS PWB are fully seated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J514 on the Pre IPS PWB, P/J560, P/J561 between the MEM SYS PWB and the POST IPS PWB are fully seated.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following: MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5) Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following: POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5) Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5)
15-363 IIT Memory Fail RAP, 15-365 X Comm Fail RAP
1/05 2-222
15-367 X - Fail 4 RAP

The control logic on the Pre IPS PWB detected a hardware failure.
15-370 X - Fail 5 RAP

Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J560 on the Pre IPS PWB and the BR PWB is fully seated.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure:
Procedure Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following: BR PWB (PL 3.5) Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following: Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
1/05 2-223
15-367 X - Fail 4 RAP, 15-370 X - Fail 5 RAP
15-371 X - Fail 6RAP

15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 / 15-384 / 15-385 CCD AGC Fail RAP

The Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for a specific channel from the CCD PWB failed. 15-380: CCD Channel 1 RED (odd) AGC Fail 15-381: CCD Channel 2 RED (even) AGC Fail. 15-382: CCD Channel 3 GREEN (odd) AGC Fail. 15-383: CCD Channel 4 GREEN (even) AGC Fail. 15-384: CCD Channel 5 BLUE (odd) AGC Fail. 15-385: CCD Channel 6 BLUE (even) AGC Fail.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J560 on the Pre IPS PWB and the BR PWB is fully seated.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, replace the following: Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) BR PWB (PL 3.5)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.1, BSD 6.2, and BSD 6.7 in the following procedure. Verify that the Platen Glass is installed correctly. Verify that the following NVM values match the Machine Configuration on the Platen or the DADF: NVM715-125: 0=Platen, 1=DADF.
Procedure
Enter dC330 006-002 ITT Exposure Lamp. Press Start. The Exposure Lamp lights. Y N Go to the 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP. The Exposure Lamp lights at the correct intensity without flickering. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.1 and check the wires for an open or short circuit. Verify that P/ J535 on the Lamp Ballast PWB and P/J521 on the IIT Driver PWB are seated. If the wires are connectors are OK, replace the following: Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4) Lamp Ballast PWB (PL 3.4) IIT Driver PWB (PL 3.2)
The White Reference Strip on the bottom of the Platen Glass (Platen top machines PL 3.1) or underneath the Plate (PL 12.11) for DADF machines is clean and undamaged. Y N Clean the White reference Strip or replace the Platen Glass (PL 3.1) or the Plate (PL 12.11) on DADF equipped machines. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the Flat Cable P/J510 on the Pre IPS PWB and P/J500 on the CCD PWB for damage. Reseat the Flat Cable. If the problem continues, replace the following: CCD PWB (PL 3.2) Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
15-371 X - Fail 6RAP, 15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 /
1/05 2-224
PO/PO the machine. If the Fault continues, ensure that the P/J514 on the Pre IPS PWB and MEM SYS PWB, P/J560 on the MEM SYS PWB and POST IPS PWB are fully seated. If the Fault continues, replace the following: MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5) POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5) PRE IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
15-386 / 15-387 / 15-388 / 15-389 / 15-390 / 15-391 CCD AOC Fail RAP
The Automatic Offset Control (AOC) for a specific signal from the CCD PWB could not set the value within range. 15-386: CCD Channel 1 RED (odd) AOC Fail 15-387: CCD Channel 2 RED (even) AOC Fail 15-388: CCD Channel 3 GREEN (odd) AOC Fail 15-389: CCD Channel 4 GREEN (even) AOC Fail 15-390: CCD Channel 5 BLUE (odd) AOC Fail 15-391: CCD Channel 6 BLUE (even) AOC Fail
Initial Actions
Procedure
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 6.2 and check the Flat Cable for damage. Reseat the Flat Cable connector P/J500 and P/J510. If the problem continues, replace the following CCD PWB (PL 3.2) Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
1/05 2-225
15-380/15-381 / 15-382 / 15-383 / 15-384 / 15-385
15-560 Expected Time Margin Fault RAP

The control logic determined that the Image Output was requested during the transaction of the POST IPS PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 6.7 in the following procedure: Ensure that P/J404 on the IOT CPU PWB, J571 on the POST IPS PWB and P/J514 on the Pre IPS PWB are fully seated.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. If the fault continues, go to OF4-002 Drum Motor RAP. If the fault persists, replace the following: POST IPS PWB (PL 3.5 IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2) Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5)
15-560 Expected Time Margin Fault RAP
1/05 2-226
OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: Centerware Network Services is the official name for web client and web UI. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. This RAP is intended to help analyze the fault code(s), indicated by the LED display on the IDFE, or by the Configuration Report and to direct the field service representative to the applicable RAP.
Verify that the DC wire harness connector, P/J 889 is correctly seated into the IDFE. From your machine log, obtain the Configuration Report and verify that the version of firmware and software for the IDFE and the IOT are compatible.
Procedure (Product Code GL2)

NOTE: Before evaluating the fault indicated by the Diagnostic LEDs, allow 70-180 seconds to pass for the Diagnostic LEDs to come to a steady state condition after the IDFE has been switched-on. NOTE: If more than one fault is detected the first error encountered is the one displayed. NOTE: If a hard fault is detected during power up, the software boot sequence test stops. If a soft fault is detected, the Software boot process will continue. Switch on the power. Observe the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs (Figure 1) as the system performs self -test. Compare the observations with the Fault Indication descriptions in Table 1 and Table 2. Refer to Table 3 for a description of the function of each LED.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1.
Table 1 Power-on Self Tests (GL2) Fault Indication Fault Go to RAP: 19-001 DC Power Fault RAP Type of Fault Comments Hard IDFE does not log or display fault. Within 10 seconds of Power-On if any of the LEDs on the DC Power Fault IDFE are de-energized or if the Green Power LED is deenergized. NOTE: After a PO/PO is performed all LEDs should energize for approximately 10 seconds. If this does not occur, perform RAP 19-001. Red Failure LED is energized continuously. Amber Heartbeat LED is energized continuously or deenergized continuously Amber Heartbeat LED is energizes for 0.5 seconds and de-energizes for 0.5 seconds. Red Failure LED energizes for 0.25 seconds and deenergizes for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. Red Failure LED energizes twice in 0.25 second intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is continuously repeated. Red Failure LED energizes three times in 0.25 second intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is continuously repeated. Red Failure LED energizes four times in 0.25 second intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is continuously repeated. Booting or Hardware Failure Software Load Halted Software Running DDI IOT Failed Internal Loop back Test DDI IOT Failure, End to End (Cable, IOT or IDFE Failure) DDI IOT Failed Internal Loop back Test DDI IOT Failure, End to End (Cable, IOT or IDFE Failure) 19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP Hard 19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP 19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP Hard Hard IDFE does not log or display fault. IDFE does not log or display fault. Normal operation when software is running. IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI remains active IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI remains active Printer and web UI remain active
19-005 Printer DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP
Soft
19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP
Hard
Soft
Printer and web UI remain active
1/05 2-227
Table 2 Network/Connectivity Hardware Tests (GL2) Fault Indication Green Link LED is de-energized. Amber Activity LED energized continuously with a solid non-blinking light. Fault Go to RAP: Type of Fault Comments Soft Soft IDFE does not log or display fault. IDFE does not log or display fault. NOTE: On busy networks, the Amber Activity LED may appear to be continuously energized. Ensure that the customer can connect to the network by using CentreWare Internet Services. Soft Soft Declared through web client, XCMI settings; reported on the configuration report. Declared through web client, XCMI settings, reported on the configuration report. Network Connection Fault 19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP Network Connection Fault 19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP
N/A, fault declared through web client, XCMI settings Ethernet Speed Detection 19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP and the configuration report Fault N/A, fault declared through web client, XCMI settings Token Ring Speed Detec- 19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP tion Fault and the configuration report Table 3 (GL2) IDFE Diagnostic LEDs - Normal Operation Green Power LED Red Failure LED Amber Heartbeat LED Green Link LED Energizes when DC Power is supplied to the IDFE (Refer to Table 3) Energizes when the power up sequence fails (Refer to Table 3) Energizes when IDFE software is running (Refer to Table 3) Energizes when the IDFE is connected to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet network NOTE: The Green Link and Amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize when the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Network connection. Amber Activity LED Energizes when network activity is occurring over a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Network (Refer to Table 2) NOTE: The Green Link and Amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize when the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Network connection. Green Link LED Amber Activity LED IDFE
Green Power LED
Red Failure LED
Amber Heartbeat LED
Figure 1 IDFE (GL2) Diagnostic LEDs
1/05 2-228
Procedure (product code MFY)

NOTE: Before evaluating the fault indicated by the Diagnostic LEDs, allow 70-180 seconds to pass for the Diagnostic LEDs to come to a steady state condition after the IDFE has been switched-on. NOTE: If more than one fault is detected the first error encountered is the one displayed. NOTE: If a hard fault is detected during power up, the software boot sequence test stops. If a soft fault is detected, the Software boot process will continue. Switch on the power. Observe the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs (Figure 2) as the system performs self -test. Compare the observations with the Fault Indication descriptions in Table 4 and Table 5. Refer to Table 6 for a description of the function of each LED.
The normal "Boot-Sequence" LED indications (MFY only) are: From power on, to approximately 1 to 1.5 minutes, the ERR, HB, and PWR LEDs are on steady and the ACT LED is flashing. After approximately 1.5 minutes, the ACT LED goes out. Approximately 1 minute and 45 seconds after power on the LINK LED will light. After approximately 2 minutes, the HB LED will flash. Finally, (if enabled) after approximately 4 minutes, a configuration sheet is printed.
Table 4 Power-on Self Tests (MFY) Fault Indication Fault Go to RAP: 19-001 DC Power Fault RAP Type of Fault Comments Hard IDFE does not log or display fault. Within 10 seconds of Power-On if any of the LEDs on the DC Power Fault IDFE are de-energized or if the Green Power LED is deenergized. Red Failure LED is energized continuously. Amber Heartbeat LED is energized continuously or deenergized continuously Amber Heartbeat LED is energizes for 0.5 seconds and de-energizes for 0.5 seconds. Red Failure LED energizes for 0.25 seconds and deenergizes for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. Red Failure LED energizes twice in 0.25 second intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is continuously repeated. Red Failure LED energizes three times in 0.25 second intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is continuously repeated. Red Failure LED energizes four times in 0.25 second intervals, then de-energizes for 2 seconds. This pattern is continuously repeated.
Booting or Hardware Fail- 19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP ure Software Load Halted Software Running DDI IOT Failed Internal Loop back Test DDI IOT Failure, End to End (Cable, IOT or IDFE Failure) DDI IOT Failed Internal Loop back Test DDI IOT Failure, End to End (Cable, IOT or IDFE Failure) 19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP 19-005 Printer DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP 19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP 19-007 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 2 RAP 19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP
Hard Hard
IDFE does not log or display fault. IDFE does not log or display fault. Normal operation when software is running.
Hard
IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI remains active IDFE does not log or display fault, web UI remains active Printer and web UI remain active
Soft
Hard
Soft
Printer and web UI remain active
Table 5 Network/Connectivity Hardware Tests (MFY) Fault Indication Amber 10-100 LED is de-energized. Green Activity LED energized continuously with a solid non-blinking light. Fault Go to RAP: Type of Fault Comments IDFE does not log or display fault. IDFE does not log or display fault. NOTE: On busy networks, the Green Activity LED may appear to be continuously energized. Ensure that the customer can connect to the network by using CentreWare Internet Services. Ethernet Speed Detection 19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault Soft Fault RAP 1/05 2-229 Declared through web client, XCMI settings; reported on the configuration report. Status Indicator RAPs Network Connection Fault 19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP Soft Network Connection Fault 19-013 Network Connection Fault RAP Soft
N/A, fault declared through web client, XCMI settings and the configuration report Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Table 6 IDFE (MFY) Diagnostic LEDs - Normal Operation Green Power LED (PWR) Red Failure LED (ERR) Amber Heartbeat LED (HB) Amber 10/100 LED (100) Energizes when DC Power is supplied to the IDFE Energizes when the power up sequence fails Energizes when IDFE software is running Energizes when the IDFE is connected to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet network Solid-ON indicates 100mbps, LED-OFF indicates 10mbps connection Energizes when network activity is occurring over a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Network (Refer to Table 5) NOTE: The Green Link and Amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize when the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Network connection. Red LED Not Used
19-001 DC Power Fault RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. A 19-001 fault is a DC Power failure to the IDFE. The green Power LED on the IDFE, when deenergized, indicates a 19-001 fault.
Green Activity LED (ACT)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1. NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated. Inspect and re-seat DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). This connector supplies DC power to the IDFE. Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic LEDs and their locations.
Procedure
Red Failure LED (ERR) PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO) ). The green Power LED switches off within 10 sec. of Power-On. Y N If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1. Check for loose connections. Amber Heartbeat LED (HB) Green Power LED (PWR) Amber 100/10 Network LED (100) Green Activity LED (ACT) IDFE (MFY) Open the IDFE (GL2 only) and ensure that the Connector for the LED PWBA is correctly seated. Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Red LED (not used)
Check for +5 VDC at, (Flag 1, Flag 2) 1 through 8. Check for +12 VDC at (Flag 1, Flag 2) 9,11. Go to Flag 1 of BSD 16.1, and check for an open/short circuit. Go to BSD16.1, Flag 2, and check for an open/short circuit. Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Figure 2 IDFE (MFY) Diagnostic LEDs
OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry RAP, 19-001 DC Power Fault
1/05 2-230
19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. A 19-002 fault is a BIOS-level hard fault, that was detected at power up. A continuously energized red Failure LED indicates that a 19-002 fault has occurred.
19-003 Hard Disk Fault RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. A 19-003 fault indicates that the applications software could not be successfully loaded and executed. The amber Heartbeat LED on the IDFE, when continuously energized or de-energized, indicates a 19-003 fault.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1. NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated. Inspect and re-seat DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). This connector supplies DC power to the IDFE. Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic LEDs and their locations.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1. NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated. Inspect and re-seat the IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic LEDs and their locations.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/ PO. The red Failure LED is continuously energized after 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) s after power up. Y N If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections. Check that the Memory DIMMs are correctly installed and are not damaged (REP 19.3). Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: Check the amber Heartbeat LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 90 - 120 seconds (MFY) after PO/PO. The amber Heartbeat LED is energized or de-energized continuously without blinking. Y N If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM)). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections. Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Check that the Memory DIMMs for the IDFE are correctly installed (REP 19.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Perform the following: Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CDROM)). If the Heartbeat LED does not return to its heartbeat blinking pattern, replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
1/05 2-231
19-002 BIOS/Self-Test Fault RAP, 19-003 Hard Disk

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. A 19-004 fault indicates that the internal loop-back test failed for the printer interface. The red Failure LED on the IDFE, when energized for 0.25 seconds and de-energized for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern, indicates a 19-004 fault.

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. A 19-005 fault indicates that a problem occurred in the DDI Power-On Sequence Test. The red Failure LED on the IDFE, energizing twice at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energizing for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern, indicates a 19-005 fault.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1. NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated. Inspect and re-seat IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic LEDs and their locations.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1. NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated. Inspect and re-seat the DDI Cables. Inspect and re-seat the IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic LEDs and their locations.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/ PO for the continually repeated pattern. The red Failure LED is energized for 0.25 seconds and de-energized for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. Y N If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM)). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections. Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/ PO for the continually repeated pattern. The Failure LED on the IDFE energizes twice at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energizes for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. Y N If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1 and check for loose connections. Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM)). Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Perform the following: Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CDROM)). If the Failure LED energizes for 0.25 seconds and de-energizes for 2.0 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern, replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Perform the following: Replace the Flat Cable (PL 9.2). Replace the V-Sel PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
19-004 Printer DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP, 19-
1/05 2-232

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. A 19-006 fault indicates that the UART communication channel for the print path failed the internal loop-back test. The red Failure LED, when energized three times at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energized for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern, indicates a 19-006 fault.

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The IOT does not log or display Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) fault codes. A 19-007 fault indicates a failure in the DDI Power-on Sequence Test by the DDI Client and the Link Layer protocols. The red Failure LED on the IDFE, energizes four times at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energizes for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. This indicates a 19-007 fault.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1. NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated. Inspect and reseat the IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic LEDs and their locations.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 16.1. NOTE: Before replacing any of the parts shown in BSD 16.1, ensure that the connectors for the parts are correctly seated. Inspect and re-seat the DDI Cables. Inspect and re-seat IDFE DC wiring harness connector P/J899 (Flag 1). Refer to OF19-1 IDFE Fault Entry Rap, Figure 1 (GL2) or Figure 2 (MFY), Diagnostic LEDs and their locations.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 60 - 80 seconds (MFY) after PO/ PO for the continually repeated pattern. The red Failure LED on the IDFE energizes three times at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energizes for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. Y N If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections. Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM)). Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: Check the red Failure LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 90 - 120 seconds (MFY) after PO/ PO for the continually repeated pattern. The red Failure LED energizes four times at 0.25 second intervals and then de-energizes for 2 seconds in a continuously repeated pattern. Y N If an intermittent fault is suspected, perform the following: Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 of BSD 16.1, and check for loose connections. Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM)). Replace the Printer SSR (PL 9.3). Replace the Printer LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Perform the following: Replace the Flat Cables (PL 9.2). Replace the V-Sel PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the V-Sel E PWB (PL 9.2) Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
1/05 2-233
19-006 Scanner DDI Communication Fault 1 RAP,
19-012 Network Connection Fault RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The Netware Internet Services is the official name for web client and web UI. NOTE: The green (GL2) or amber (MFY) Link and amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize when the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Network connection. NOTE: If a Token Ring PWBA is installed only the Power and Heartbeat LED swill energize. NOTE: The Live Connection Test continuously monitors the network connections on the IDFE (or optional hardware). If there is a proper hardware link to the network, the test is successful, and the Link will be ON constantly. If there is not a proper hardware link to the network, the Link LED will be OFF, thus indicating a 19-012 Fault. NOTE: This note applies to the GL2 IDFE only. Xerox may elect to use a Print Server box, and/or a BNC Transceiver that does not have a Link LED. In that case, the result of the Live Connection Test cannot be indicated by the Link LED. Continue with this RAP, if a Network Connection Fault is suspected in the absence of a Link LED. A 19-012 fault indicates that the hardware link to the network has failed. When the Link LED is de-energized a 19-012 fault is indicated. NOTE: Hardware link failures to the Network can include IOT failure or IOT software failures.
Call the System Administrator.
Initial Actions
Inspect and reseat the network connector. Run a Configuration Report. With the assistance of the Systems Administrator verify that the connectivity settings for the IDFE and Network are correct. Remove and re-install software for the IOT. Refer to GP 11 Software Upgrade Procedure. Locate another working network drop or another printer to test the network connection or cabling.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). Wait 70 - 180 seconds (GL2) 105 - 120 seconds (MFY). The Link LED remains de-energized. Y N Check for an intermittent open circuit in the connectors and cabling to the network drop. Thoroughly check the network connector and cable electrical continuity and mechanical integrity. If the connector and network cable checks OK, set up a known good printer using the connectors and cabling to the network drop. The Link LED is de-energized. Y N Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1). Perform the following: Repair/replace the connector and cabling to the network drop. Status Indicator RAPs 1/05 2-234 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The green (GL2) or amber (MFY) Link and amber Diagnostic LEDs only energize when the IDFE is connected by a 10 or 100 BaseT Ethernet Network connection. NOTE: If a Token Ring PWBA is installed, only the Power and Heartbeat Diagnostic LEDs will energize. NOTE: (GL2 only) The IDFE (or optional hardware) continuously monitors the network connections and the network traffic activity. As long as the network traffic flow is visible to the IDFE or optional hardware, the Activity LED will switch on and off in a pattern that mimics the network traffic flow. If there is not proper hardware activity to the network, the Activity LED will remain energized, thus declaring a 19-013 Fault. NOTE: A Print Server box, a BNC Transceiver or a Token Ring PWB that does not have an Activity LED may be used. If this occurs, the result of Network Traffic sensing cannot be indicated by an Activity LED. Continue with this RAP, if a Network Connection Failure is suspected in the absence of an Activity LED. A 19-013 fault indicates that the IDFE fails to detect network traffic flow. When the Activity LED is in the energized state, this is an indication of the 19-013 fault.
A Perform the following: Repair/replace the connector and cabling to the network drop. Call the System Administrator.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the customer can connect to the network using CentreWare Internet Services. Inspect and reseat the network connector. Verify that the green (GL2) or amber (MFY) Link LED is energized. Run a Configuration Report. With the assistance of the Systems Administrator verify the the connectivity settings for the IDFE and the Network are correct. Locate another working network drop or printer to test the network connection/cabling.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: Check the Activity LED 70-180 seconds (GL2) or 90 - 120 seconds (MFY) after PO/PO. The Activity LED is continuously energized. Y N Check for an intermittent open circuit in the connectors and cabling to the network drop. Thoroughly check the network connector and cable electrical continuity and mechanical integrity. If the connector and network cable checks OK, set up a known good printer using the connectors and cabling to the network drop. The Activity LED is still energized. Y N Replace the IDFE (PL 19.1). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 2-235
19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. They are identifiable by the Product Code on the ID tag and by the number of Diagnostic LEDs. Early versions have 5 LEDs and are labeled Product Code GL2. Later versions have 6 LEDs and are labeled Product Code MFY. This RAP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is followed by the product code for the specific IDFE. NOTE: The Centerware Internet Services is the official name for web Client or web UI. NOTE: This fault is displayed via the web client, XCMI settings, and the configuration report. NOTE: XCMI (Xerox Common Management Interface) settings is a Xerox Common Network Interface for the (printer) systems management of Xerox products. NOTE: Through its resident Ethernet circuitry the Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) may be connected to either a 10 Mbps line or to a 100 Mbps line. This Ethernet circuitry automatically detects the Ethernet line speed and reports it through the web client, XCMI settings, and the Configuration Report. If the speed of the Ethernet line and that reported by the Configuration Report, Web Browser client, and the XCMI settings do not agree, a 19-014 fault is declared. A 19-014 fault indicates that the IDFE failed to detect the proper speed of the Ethernet network to which it is connected. 6.
NOTE: Follow the procedure closely. Ensure that you disconnect the Network Interface Cables to the IDFE. After software reload, it is necessary to reboot, while connected to the network, or the link will not occur. If necessary, replace the IDFE (PL 19.1).
Initial Actions
Go to GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports and print a Configuration Report. Check the Configuration Report for the speed of the connection. NOTE: For the GL2 configuration, an Ethernet connection is required in order for the RJ45 Ethernet Port to be enabled, otherwise the controller will default to AUI - 10 mbps. If the speed of the Ethernet line is manually set by the System Administrator, ask for what speed the Ethernet line was set. NOTE: If Ethernet connection speed is adjusted through Printer Administrative Services or through CentreWare Internet Services, the IDFE software can fail to load. For example, if the speed is forced to 100 Mbps but the customer has a 10 Mbps network the IDFE will not successfully load software from the installation CD-ROM. The IDFE Software installation will freeze or lockup. Re-loading software is the only way to reset the Ethernet speed to Auto.
Procedure
Perform the following: 1. 2. Review the information collected in Initial Actions. (GL2 only) Verify that the green Link Diagnostic LED is energized. NOTE: This ensures that a Ethernet Network connection is occurring. 3. 4. 5. Verify that the Ethernet line speed agrees with that reported by the Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports) the Web browser client, and the XCMI settings (MFY only) Ensure that the status of the amber 10-100 LED matches the data checked in step 3. Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CDROM)). 1/05 2-236 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
19-014 Ethernet Speed Detection Fault RAP
19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. However, this RAP applies only to the IDFE with the GL2 product code. NOTE: This fault is declared through The Centerware Internet Services (web client or web UI), XCMI settings, and the Configuration Report. NOTE: The Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) may be connected to either a 4 Mbps line or to a 16 Mbps line. If the Token Ring PWB is enabled and the drivers properly loaded, the IDFE automatically detects the Token Ring line speed and reports it through web client, XCMI settings, and the Configuration Report. When the known speed of the Token Ring line and that reported by the Configuration Report, Web Browser client, and the XCMI settings do not agree, a 19-015 fault is declared. A 19-015 fault indicates that the IDFE failed to detect the proper speed of the Token Ring to which it is connected.
19-016 Token Ring Troubleshooting RAP

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. However, this RAP applies only to the IDFE with the GL2 product code. This RAP is used to isolate problems related to the IDFE Token Ring PWB. The following procedure is a checklist of potential items that could be the source of problems with the Token Ring PWB.
Procedure
1. Token Ring troubleshooting tips: Ensure that the Token Ring PWB is correctly plugged into Connectors J3 and J4 of the SCAN IIT PWBA. NOTE: This is the slot nearest the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs. NOTE: Only the Power and Heartbeat LEDs will energize when a Token Ring PWBA is installed. Ensure that the Token Ring PWB is correctly seated. Ensure that the hardware connections are good between the IOT and IDFE. Ensure that the 8 PIN Interface Connector is correctly seated in the Token Ring PWB and is not damaged. Ensure that the twisted pair cable is good (RJ45) Ensure that the port on the MAU or wall drop is good. NOTE: To be enabled, the Token Ring PWBA must be installed and connected to an active Token Ring by use of a MAU. This can be confirmed by reading the Configuration Report to determine if the Token Ring is enabled. Ensure that maintenance release v1.1 or later software is installed. NOTE: Source routed packets with route lengths greater than two bytes could be dropped when packets are transmitted using IP or IPX protocols across a customers combination bridge/router. Installation of maintenance release v1.1 software solves this problem. 2. Token Ring hardware not found or installed is a generic message and can be a result of: a bad connection to the network a defective Token Ring PWB an address conflict with the Token Ring PWB NOTE: For TCP/IP, ensure that there is not a duplicate IP address on the customers network. the Token Ring PWB cannot sense the speed of the Token Ring Network the Novell File Servers are not referenced to on the network
Initial Actions
Go to GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports, and print a Configuration Report. Check the Configuration Report for the speed of the Token Ring connection and verify that the Token Ring Interface is enabled.
Procedure
Perform the following: 1. 2. Review the information collected in Initial Actions. Ensure that the Token Ring PWB is plugged into Connectors J3 and J4 of the SCAN IIT PWBA (PL 19.1). NOTE: This is the slot nearest the IDFE Diagnostic LEDs. NOTE: Only the Power and Heartbeat LEDs will energize when a Token Ring PWBA is installed. 3. Verify that the Token Ring drivers were loaded correctly. NOTE: If the Token Ring PWB is enabled and operating correctly on the network, printed on Configuration Report will be the MAC address for the PWB: Example: MAC Address=80:99:09:E4:A7:55 NOTE: If the Token Ring PWB is enabled, but cannot operate on the network, printed on the configuration report will be a MAC Address: 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Example: MAC Address=00:00:00:00:00:00 Verify that the Token Ring PWB is operating correctly on the network. Verify that the Token Ring line speed agrees with that reported by the Configuration Report, the Web browser client, and the XCMI settings. Reload software using the IDFE CD-ROM Drive (GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CDROM)). If the Token Ring line speed does not agree with the Configuration Report, the Web Browser and the XCMI settings, replace the Token Ring PWB (REP 19.2). If the Token Ring PWB still does not operate correctly, replace the IDFE (PL 19.1). 1/05 2-237
19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP, 19-
19-015 Token Ring Speed Detection Fault RAP, 19-
1/05 2-238
3 Image Quality
Image Quality RAPs
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP.............................................................. IQ Isolation RAP.............................................................................................................. IQ 2 Defect Listing........................................................................................................... Defect Description........................................................................................................... IQ 3 Geometric RAP ....................................................................................................... IQ 4 Developer Checkout Procedure .............................................................................. IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure ........................................................ IQ6 IIT Checkout Procedure ........................................................................................... IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure ...................................................................... IQ 8 Residual Image RAP ............................................................................................... IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP............................................................................................... IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP ....................................................................................... IQ 11 High Image Density RAP....................................................................................... IQ 12 Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP ................................................................ IQ 13 White, Black or Colored Spots RAP ...................................................................... IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP.................................................................... IQ 15 Background RAP................................................................................................... IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP........................................................................ IQ 17 Deletions RAP ....................................................................................................... IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP ....................................................................................... IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP............................................................................................... IQ 20 IOT Graininess RAP .............................................................................................. IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP................................................................................. IQ 22 Mottle RAP ............................................................................................................ IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP ....................................................................................... IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination RAP ................................................ IQ 25 Hollow Character RAP .......................................................................................... IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP .......................................................................... IQ 27 Color-to-Color Misregistration RAP ....................................................................... IQ 28 Moire RAP ............................................................................................................. IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP................................................................................................ IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP ............................................................................................ IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP ............................................................................................ IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP................................................................................................. IQ 33 Solid Area Reproduction RAP ............................................................................... IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP................................................................................ IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP ........................................................................................... IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP ............................................................................................... IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP ................................................................................... IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP ................................................................................ IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP .............................................................................. IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP ............................................................................................. IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP .............................................................................................. IQ 42 DTS HVPS RAP .................................................................................................... IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout Procedure.......................................................................... Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-7 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-23 3-23 3-25 3-26 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33 3-33 3-34 3-34 3-35 3-35 3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-40 IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure.......................................................................... IQ 45 Wrinkle RAP .......................................................................................................... IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP ..................................................................................... IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP................................................................................................... 3-41 3-41 3-42 3-43 3-47 3-49
Image Quality Specifications

Image Quality Specifications ...........................................................................................
Image Quality Defects

Image Quality Defects .....................................................................................................
1/05 3-1
Image Quality
Image Quality
1/05 3-2
Introduction
The Image Quality Raps Section contains all the Raps used in troubleshooting image quality problems. NOTE: When this procedure refers you to an Image Quality Defect Sample, or the Image Quality Specification, go to the appropriate Hard Copy Image Quality Supplement.
IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP

Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP. This RAP is used to determine the proper course of action for troubleshooting an image quality defect.
Initial Actions
Clean the Document Glass. Clean the Lens and Mirrors. Clean/Vacuum all Paper path areas. Check the output copy to ensure that it is on the correct substrate size and orientation as the original. If it is not, go to the Paper Size Sensing RAP in Section 2. If it is OK, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
1. 2. If the problem is Misregistration, Skew or Magnification related, go to the IQ 3 Geometric RAP. Compare the defect on the copy to the defects listed below. These defects are normal for this product and require additional countermeasures. Go to the procedure indicated for remedial activities that minimize the effects of these defects. Table 1 DEFECTS THAT REQUIRE ADDITIONAL COUNTERMEASURES Bead Carryout (BCO) Description - Developer beads that are electrostatically attracted to the copy or print during the transfer process on this product look like Mottle or low density. BCO is most noticeable in high density areas and usually does not affect all four colors at the same time. IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP Description - Process direction streaks that show up first on transparencies or coated paper as low gloss streaks in solid areas. In severe cases, oil streaks can show up on paper as low density streaks in large half tone areas. IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP Description - Patterns on the image areas of the output copy or print that have the appearance of a screen or grid overlaying the image. It may be uniform or nonuniform in area or shape. IQ 28 Moire RAP
Fuser Oil Streaks
Moire
1/05 3-3
Image Quality
Introduction, IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting
Table 1 DEFECTS THAT REQUIRE ADDITIONAL COUNTERMEASURES Text Image Separation/Mosaic Description - (Mosaic): An image defect that can affect fine line ladders or low screen halftones. It causes closely spaced lines, low frequency halftones, and certain texts to have a blotchy appearance. Description - Vacant Characters: An image defect that results when the center of a character is filled-in with a (200R) halftone screen while its outer border is made up of a (600L) text screen. (Note: This level of detail is best observed with an eye loop.) Description - Small Dark Dots on Text: An image defect that causes a localized area of a character in a text to look like it contains small dark dots. (Note: This level of detail is best observed with an eye loop.) IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP Three Color Toner Explosion Description - Cyan toner particles surrounding black text and lines run in three color mode. IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP Description - This defect occurs at the transition point between a high density area and a low density area of the same color. A localized area of the mag brush becomes starved for toner due to development fringe field effects. Starvation tends to worsen at low triboelectric levels (high toner concentration). IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP
IQ Isolation RAP
Procedure
The defect occurs only in the Print Mode. Y N The defect occurs only in the Copy Mode. Y N The defect is present in both modes. Print test patterns 99, 101, and 103 from the PWS. The defect is present Y N Replace the VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2). Go to the IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure. Print test patterns 22, 23, and 30 from the PWS. The defect is present. Y N Print test patterns 20 and 21 from the PWS. The defect is present. Y N Print test patterns 1 through 10, 13, 17, and 53 from the PWS. The defect is present. Y N Clean the optics (refer to Cleaning Procedures in Service Call Procedures). Reprint test patterns 1 through 10, 13, 17, and 53 from the PWS. The defect is present. Y N Go to Final Actions in Service Call Procedures. Replace the CCD PWB (PL 3.2). Replace the Pre-IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the MEM SYS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the Post-IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Go to the IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure. Place the Color Test Pattern on the glass Select Photo Mode. Make a copy. The present. Y N Replace the following as required: VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2). VSEL Extension PWB (PL 9.2). If the machine is a DCCS50, go to the IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure. If the machine is a DC12 with DFE, check the DFE and DFE cables. defect is
Toner Starvation
3. 4.
If you can identify the defect by name, go to the IQ 2 Defect Listing. If you are not sure what the defect is, or if you prefer, use the IQ Isolation RAP to isolate your image quality problem.
Print test patterns 99, 101, and 103 from the PWS. The defect is present. Y N Replace the VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2). Go to the IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure. Image Quality 1/05 3-4 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP, IQ
IQ 2 Defect Listing
Background
Background (Description/Specification) Cyan (or Other Colors) - Defect Samples 26 High Monochrome - Defect Sample 11 High 4-Color - Defect Sample 10
Contamination, Back Side of Copy or Side 2 of Copy

Contamination (Back Side or Side 2 of Copy) (Description/Specification) IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination RAP
Deletions
Deletions (Description/Specification) Debris-Centered - Defect Sample 19 Nonuniform Streak (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 8
IQ 15 Background RAP
Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks

Bands, Lines, Smears or Streaks (Description/Specification) ADC Patch Printout or Band - Defect Sample 27 High Frequency (Black or Colored) - Defect Sample 6 Periodic - Defect Sample 9 Rainbow - Defect Sample 23 Line ,Single White (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 22 Color Streaks (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 21
IQ 17 Deletions RAP
Density
Density (Description/Specification) Mottle-like, Low Density Only in High Density Areas - Defect Sample 28 IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP. IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP. Highlight (Low or High) - Defect Sample 4 IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP Uneven (Process Direction) - Defect Sample 20 IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP Uneven (Perpendicular to Process Direction) - Defect Sample 7 IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP Image (Low) - Defect Sample 3 IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP Image (High) IQ 11 High Image Density RAP
IQ 12 Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP
Bead Carryout
Bead Carryout (BCO) (Description/Specification) Bead Carryout - Defect Sample 10 Mottle-like Bead Carryout - Defect Sample 28
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP.
Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy

Blank Copy (Description/Specification) IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP
Fuser Oil Streaks

Fuser Oil Streaks (Description/Specification) IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP
Solid Black (or Color) Copy

Black (or Color), Solid (Description/Specification) IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP
Graininess
Graininess (Description/Specification) IQ 20 IOT Graininess RAP
Blurred or Fuzzy Image

Blurred or Fuzzy Image (Description/Specification) Blur / Toner Explosion - Defect Sample 18 IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP
Hollow Characters
Hollow Characters (Description/Specification) IQ 25 Hollow Character RAP
Color Balance
Poor Color Balance (Description/Specification) IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP
Low Contrast Reproduction

Low Contrast Reproduction (Description/Specification) IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP
1/05 3-5
Image Quality
IQ 2 Defect Listing
Misregistration (Color-to-Color)
Misregistration (Color-to-Color) (Description/Specification) Process Direction - Defect Sample 1 Perpendicular to Process Direction - Defect Sample 2
IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP
Spots
Spots (Description/Specification) Barcode Marks (or Spots) - Defect Sample 25 Periodic Random White, Black or Colored
IQ 27 Color-to-Color Misregistration RAP
Misregistration (System)
Misregistration (System) (Description/Specification) Side Edge Top Edge Skew
IQ 13 White, Black or Colored Spots RAP
Solid Area Reproduction

Solid Area Reproduction (Description/Specification) IQ 33 Solid Area Reproduction RAP
IQ 3 Geometric RAP
Missing Colors
Missing Color(s) (Description/Specification) IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP
Text / Image Separation Errors

Text / Image Separation Errors (Description/Specification) Mosaic - Defect Sample 14 Vacant Characters - Defect Sample 15 Small Dark Dots on Text - Defect Sample 16
Moire
Moire (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 12 IQ 28 Moire RAP
IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP
Toner Starvation
Toner Starvation (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 13 IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP
Mottle
Mottle (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 5 IQ 22 Mottle RAP
Unfused Copy
Unfused Copy (Description/Specification) IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP
Newton Rings
Newton Rings (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 17 IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP
Wrinkled Copy
Wrinkled Copy (Description/Specification) IQ 45 Wrinkle RAP
Offsetting, Fuser
Offsetting, Fuser (Description/Specification) IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP
Residual Image
Residual Image (Description/Specification) - Defect Sample 24 ADC Patch Printout - Defect Sample 27 IQ 8 Residual Image RAP
ROS Borders
ROS Borders (Description/Specification)
Image Quality
IQ 2 Defect Listing
1/05 3-6
Defect Description
Background
Description - Cyan (or Other Colors): Low or medium density background usually of one color, but possible in more than one color. Description - High Monochrome: High density background of a single color covering the entire copy. Description - High 4-Color: High density background of all four colors covering the entire copy and possibly accompanied by bead carry out. Description - General: Undesirable toner deposits on the copy or print. The toner deposits can be localized or may cover the entire copy or print. Depending on the density of the background, it is referred to as low, medium, high, or very high background. It may occur in all colors, single colors, or any combination of single colors. Specification - No background is allowed.
NOTE: None of the image from the original is visible in the copy or print.
Bead Carryout (BCO)

Description - Developer beads that are electrostatically attracted to the copy or print during the transfer process on this product look like Mottle or low density. Bead Carryout is most noticeable in high density areas and usually does not affect all four color at the same time. NOTE: Only the effect the carrier beads have on the image of the output copy/print are visible. The beads are physically trapped by the fuser web and therefore will not be observed on the copy/print.
Blank Copy
Description - Absolutely no toner developed onto the copy or print. This defect should not be confused with extremely low image density, where some development actually occurs.
Blurred or Fuzzy Image

Description - Images that are not clear, or appear out of focus.
Bands, Lines, Smears or Streaks

Description - ADC Patch Printout or Band: A residual image of one or more of the ADC patches that runs in the process direction. Description - High Frequency Bands: A 1.2 mm interval band that is most noticeable in low density (e.g., 20 -30%) halftone areas of the copy and runs perpendicular to process direction. Description - Periodic Bands: An interval band that ranges between 14 to 264 mm; is most noticeable in low density (e.g., 20 -30%) halftone areas of the copy; and runs perpendicular to process direction. Description - Rainbow Bands: Narrow bands of color most noticeable in low density (e.g., 20 30%) halftone areas of the copy that run in the process direction. Description - Color Smears: The image appears to have been disturbed (spread out, wiped, or rubbed), usually in the process direction before the image was fused. Description - Color Streaks: Usually medium-width streaks of (or shifts in) color most noticeable in low density (e.g., 20 -30%) halftone areas of the copy that run in the process direction. Description - General: The absence or low density of toner in desired image areas, or the presence of toner in undesired areas in the shape of a line, streak or band. Bands are widths greater than 0.5 mm. Lines and bands are generally uniform in shape from one end to the other, and can run in any direction on the copy or print. Lines are defined as measuring less than 0.5 mm in width: Streaks are generally shorter than lines and are of nonuniform width along their length. They may have a more ragged or fuzzy appearance than lines, and can run in any direction on the copy or print.
Color Balance, Poor

Description - Colored areas of the copy that exhibit a change in hue, as opposed to a change in density. This is most often judged in the gray areas of the copy or print. Theoretically, a true gray can be produced with equal amounts of magenta, yellow and cyan toner. Therefore, a common example of poor color balance is a gray image that is reproduced with slightly more of one of those color toners. The result is a gray that appears to have a magenta, yellow or cyan hue, rather than true gray.
Contamination (Back Side or Side 2 of Copy)

Description - Toner deposit on the back side of a copy or on the second side of a two-sided copy.
Deletions
Description - Debris-Centered: Deletions in the areas surrounding Toner agglomerates. Description - Nonuniform Streak: A deletion in the form of a single streak that runs from the lead edge to the trail edge of the copy. Description - General: The undesirable absence of toner from the copy or print. This defect can show as white, light, or untrue colored areas on the copy or print. The most common example is a deletion caused by the tentingof paper from mishandling or moisture, or by dents or defects in the IBT. Specification - The Pattern 82 ROS Half Tone should not show the defect
Density
Description - Mottle-like, Low Density Only in High Density Areas: Developer beads that are electrostatically attracted to the copy or print during the transfer process on this product look like Mottle or low density. This defect is most noticeable in high density areas and usually does not affect all four color at the same time. Description - Highlight (Low or High): Development of a single color is out-of-specification.
Black (or Color), Solid

Description - An image that is reproduced as solid black (or color) from lead edge to trail edge and from front to rear. The ROS Border may or may not be visible.
1/05 3-7
Image Quality
Specification - Highlight: Color Test Pattern; the 10% patches should be visible and the 5% patches should be barely visible or not visible on the test pattern copy (except for the bottom row). Description - Line: The inability to adequately reproduce a text that has low line density. Specification - Line: Using Test Pattern 82E8220, the copier should reproduce all of the text in the block. Description - Low Density: A condition that results when too little toner of a single color or combination of colors is developed on the copy or print. This results in lighter copies or prints for the single-color toner or the color that results from the combination of color toners. Description - High Density: A condition that results when too much toner of a single color or combination of colors is developed on the copy or print. This results in darker copies or prints for the single color toner or the color that results from the combination of colors. Description - Uneven Density: The uneven development of toner on the copy or print from one area to another. Typically, this results in change in density from front to rear and sometimes from lead edge to trail edge. Specification - Uneven Density: The density of both the low density and high density bands (located near the lead edge of the Color Test Pattern) should be uniform from front to rear.
Misregistration (System)
Description - The alignment of the image to the edges of the copy paper. It is defined by lead and side edge registration, and lead and side edge skew. Specification Lead Edge Registration: +1.6 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +2.2 mm (Tray 5) Side Edge Registration: +2.1 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +3.0 mm (Tray 5) Lead Edge Skew: +1.6 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +2.0 mm (Tray 5) Side Edge Skew: +2.4 mm (Trays 1 - 4), +3.0 mm (Tray 5)
Missing Color(s)
Description - The loss of one or more of the color toners from the output copy or print. Depending on the original, this can result in missing areas of the image, or changes in the color balance of the copy or print.
Moire
Description - Patterns on the image areas of the output copy or print that have the appearance of a screen or grid overlaying the image. It may be uniform or nonuniform in area or shape.
Mottle
Description - Solid area, high density image areas that are reproduced with a surface that resembles marble.
Fuser Oil Streaks

Description - Process direction streaks that show up first on transparencies or coated paper as low gloss streaks in solid areas. In severe cases, Oil Streaks can show up on paper as low density streaks in large half tone areas.
Newton Rings
Description - Repetitive, irregular-shaped marks that occur when making copies of glossy photographs. These marks are most noticeable in large low-density or highlight areas.
Graininess
Description - An image defect that causes solid areas to have a sandy appearance. Graininess is most noticeable in middle density solid areas.
Offsetting, Fuser
Description - The removal of toner from the copy by the fuser and the subsequent redeposition of that toner on another area of the same or other another copy. Removing toner from the image leaves the image rough and without gloss. The redeposited toner may appear as a duplicate image, partially shifted image, or lines and streaks.
Hollow Characters
Description - Small circular-shaped deletions within a character that can occur when the image density is low or a transparency is used.
Residual Image
Description - A toner image that remains on the photoreceptor or IBT after cleaning. The next image is place on top of the residual image and both images are transferred to the next copy.
Line, Single White (Process Direction)

Description - A narrow white line that runs from lead edge to trail edge across the entire copy.
Low Contrast Reproduction

Description - The inability to adequately reproduce a low contrast image. Specification - Using Test Pattern 82E8220, the copier should reproduce all of the text in the 0.2 G paragraphs.
ROS Borders
Description - Intentional lead edge, side edges, and trail edge deletions that make a border on the copy paper. Specification Lead Edge: 5 mm +1.0 mm (All Trays) Side Edges: 3 mm +1.0 mm (All Trays) Trail Edge: 3 mm +1.0 mm (All Trays)
Misregistration (Color-to-Color)
Description - Multi-colored images that are not superimposed and should be. This can occur in the process direction or perpendicular to process direction. Image Quality
1/05 3-8
Spots
Description - Barcode Marks (or Spots): An image defect that has the appearance of a small barcode symbol that is read by a barcode scanner. The marks usually appear in a group of four, and each mark is a different primary color arranged in the sequence -- yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Description - All Other Spots: Generally circular in shape, these defects can be caused by an absence of toner in a desired area, or a deposit of toner in an undesired area.
IQ 3 Geometric RAP
This RAP is used when Skew, Registration, or Magnification are out of spec.
Initial Actions
NOTE: (W/Tag P39): Misuse of the Expanded Imageable Area feature will cause registration problems when printing on oversize paper (12 x 18 inch / SR-A3). This feature is available for DC12 machines only, and requires specific IOT and DFE software and hardware levels. Refer to GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup for details. Activating this feature on a machine not listed in GP2 will result in an image shift of 0.5 inch (12 mm) or more toward the lead edge of the print when printing on oversize paper. On 12 x 18 inch paper, part of the interimage patch may be visible in the lower left corner of the print. If this defect is observed, check that NVM locations 720-360 and 720-361 = 0. This feature can be activated by the customer, using the TOOLS mode. If this has occurred, inform the customer of the limitations and requirements of this feature. NOTE: For DCCS50: Check that NVM locations 720-360 and 720-361 = 0. Load some new, dry 24 lb 11X17/A3 Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) into each paper tray (use 8.5X11/A4 in Tray 1). Make 3 full color copies from each paper tray. Mark the appropriate paper tray on these copies.
Solid Area Reproduction

Description - The inability to adequately reproduce a high-density solid area. Specification - Using Test Pattern 82E8220, the copier should reproduce the 1.0K blocks with minimal mottle or graininess.
Text / Image Separation Errors

Description - (Mosaic): An image defect that can affect fine line ladders or low screen halftones. It causes closely spaced lines, low frequency halftones, and certain texts to have a blotchy appearance. Description - Vacant Characters: An image defect that results when the center of a character is filled-in with a (200R) halftone screen while its outer border is made up of a (600L) text screen. (Note: This level of detail is best observed with an eye loop.) Description - Small Dark Dots on Text: An image defect that causes a localized area of a character in a text to look like it contains small dark dots. (Note: This level of detail is best observed with an eye loop.)
Procedure
The problem is still present when using the proper paper. Y N Explain to the customer that new, dry, 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper is the specified paper for use in the DocuColor 12 copier. The Problem occurs only in the Printer Mode Y N The defect occurs when the document is manually registered on the platen glass. Y N Ensure that the Document Transport Belt is clean. Go to the Document Handler Adjustment Procedures ADJ 12.1.1 through ADJ 12.4.1. If the problem continues, check the DADF drive rolls and pinch rolls for wear or glossing. The Problem is Skew Y N The Problem is MIsregistration Y N Perform ADJ 9.1.16 IIT Horizontal Magnification/Vertical Magnification (IIT Machine) Adjustment and ADJ 9.1.10 Side/Lead Edge Registration (dC129: System Registration). Select Pattern IOT #2 Black on the UI or Pattern # 84 Black on the PWS. Misregistration is present on the copy Y N Perform ADJ 9.1.10 Side/Lead Edge Registration (dC129: System Registration) and ADJ 9.1.15 Side Registration. The defect occurred on copies from all five paper trays. A B Image Quality
Toner Starvation
Description - This defect occurs at the transition point between a high density area and a low density area of the same color. A localized area of the mag brush becomes starved for toner due to development fringe field effects. Starvation tends to worsen at low triboelectric levels (high toner concentration).
Unfused Copy
Description - The toner on the copy wipes off easily when moderate pressure is applied.
Wrinkled Copy
Description - Creasing or folds on the copy/print in the lead to trail edge direction or closely spaced waves in the front to rear direction.
1/05 3-9
IQ 3 Geometric RAP
B Y N Go to the Paper Feeder Checkout Procedure
IQ 4 Developer Checkout Procedure

Initial Actions
Ensure that the toner supply system is functioning properly and there is sufficient toner of each color.
The problem is with Lead Edge Registration Y N The problem is with color to color misregistration. Y N Go to ADJ 9.1.10, Lead/Side Edge Adjustment Go to the Color to Color Misregistration Checkout Procedure. Registration varies from copy to copy. Y N Go to ADJ 9.1.10, Lead/Side Edge Adjustment. Go to the Registration Checkout Procedure. The defect occurred on copies from all five paper trays. Y N Go to the IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout Procedure. Go to the IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure. Go to the IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure.
Procedure
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. If the Developer Bias HVPS is good, replace the developer material for the faulty color. If the problem continues, replace the Developer Housing for the faulty color. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure
Image Quality
IQ 3 Geometric RAP, IQ 4 Developer Checkout Proce-
1/05 3-10
IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure

This procedure is used to isolate Image Quality faults in the Xerographic Subsystem.
Initial Actions
If the problem is density or background related, Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If Max Setup does not complete successfully, use the Fault Codes that are declared to troubleshoot the problem.
N The problem is in the IBT, the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Repeat the Xerographic Hard Stop procedure. This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the interlock cheater. The defect is present on the copy that is on the Vacuum Transport. Y N The problem is in the Fuser. Disassemble the fuser and carefully inspect the following parts for damage or toner buildup. Pressure Roll (PL 8.3) Heat Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.3) Heat Rolls (PL 8.3) Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5) Web CRU (Machine Consumables)
Procedure
Perform the following Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure: 1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make sure that the IBT Handle is up. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. Press Start. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1).
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Repeat the Hard Stop procedure. The defect is present on the Photoreceptor Drum. Y N The problem is in the 2nd BTR or the IBT. Complete the steps below until the problem is resolved If the image defect looks like an ADC Patch Printout (see Defect Sample 27), check for the cause(s) of an IBT cleaning problem. Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is OK, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.6).
WARNING
Electrocution Hazard! Do not disconnect the red lead labeled C (Charge Supply Wire). This wire carries over 8000VDC. Check the voltage from P/J82-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS to frame ground during a copy cycle. The voltage is between +650 VDC and +750 VDC. Y N Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or damage. Replace if required (Machine Consumables). If the problem continues, go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP. Check the voltage from P/J422A-7 to frame ground during a copy cycle. The voltage between +3.25 VDC and +3.75 VDC. Y N There is 24 VDC from P/J141-1 to P/J141-4 on the ESV Sensor. Y N There is 24 VDC from P/J422B-5 to P/J422B-13 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N There is 24 VDC from P/J411-6 to P/J411-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 3-11 B C Image Quality is
Registration Drive Gear
Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear 7. 8. 9. When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down.
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Observe the Image on the IBT. The defect is present on the IBT.
IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure
C Go to Flag 7 on BSD 9.1 and check for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground.
IQ6 IIT Checkout Procedure

This procedure is used when directed here by the IQ1 IQ Isolation Procedure
Go to Flag 6 on BSD 9.1 and check for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wire is OK, replace the ESV Sensor (PL 5.1). Check the output of the Developer Bias HVPS, as follows: Switch off the power. Connect the DMM (+) lead to the developer bias terminal the attaches to the front side of the developer housing. Cheat the Front Door Interlock Connect the DMM (-) lead to the machine frame. Set the DMM to the 1000 VDC range. Switch on the power. Enter dC 330 [009-076].Press Start.
Initial Actions
Clean the following parts before proceeding Document Glass Document Transport Belt Mirrors Exposure Lamp White Reference Strip
Procedure
Run IIT Test Print #1 The Defect is present. Y N Enter DC330 [9-002],Exposure Lamp. Press Start. The Exposure Lamp comes on. Y N Go to 6-371 Exposure Lamp Fail RAP. The light from the Lamp is even from end to end, and there are no dark spots. Y N Replace the Exposure Lamp (PL 3.4). Replace the CCD PWB (PL 3.2). Run IIT Test Print #28 The Defect is present. Y N Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5).
There is a steady voltage of approximately -550 VDC present. Y N Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. Set the DMM to measure 1000 VAC. Enter dC 330 [009-077]. Press Start. There is a steady voltage of approximately 415 VAC present. Y N Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. Replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). If the problem remains, replace the ROS Assembly (PL 4.1).
Image Quality
IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure,
1/05 3-12
IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure

IDFE / Network Checkout. This RAP is used when the image quality problem only occurs in the Printer Mode and can help isolate the source of the problem to either the IDFE or the Network.
IQ 8 Residual Image RAP

Residual Image RAP. This RAP is used when the copier exhibits ghost images on the output copy.
Procedure
With the aid of the customer or administrator, access the Document Centre Color Series 50 home page. Select the Maintenance tab on the Home page. Next, select the QuickCal radio button at the top of the Maintenance page. To check the printers current color printing state, select Color Chart from the Chart pull-down menu and print it. The image quality problem is present on the Color Chart. Y N This indicates that the problem is Network-related. Reload the IDFE System Software. If the problem continues, replace the IDFE.
Procedure
Remove the Drum CRU Assembly. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Enter dC330 [9-050] and press the Start button. NOTE: After removing the Drum CRU, cover the CRU with the black bag that is stored in Tray 1. The Erase Lamp lights. Y N Press the Stop button. There is +5 VDC between P/J418A-2 and on the IOT PWB and GND. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J418A-1 and GND. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 on BSD and check the harness for an open circuit. If the circuit is OK, replace the Erase Lamp (PL 5.1). Enter dC330 [9-050] and press the Start button. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J418B-2 and DC Com on the IOT Drive PWB Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the Erase Lamp (PL 5.1). Go to the IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP. The Power Supply is good Y N Replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover Make sure that the IBT Handle is up. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. Press Start. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1). When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down.
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Observe the Image on the IBT. The defect is present on the IBT. Y N The problem is in the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop again. This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the interlock cheater. The defect is present on the copy that is on the Vacuum Transport. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 3-13 Image Quality
IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure, IQ 8 Re-
A Y N The problem is in the Fuser. Disassembly the fuser and carefully inspect the following parts for damage or toner buildup. Pressure Roll (PL 8.3) Heat Rolls (PL 8.3) Web CRU (Machine Consumables)
IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP

Uneven Density RAP. This RAP is used when the IOT output image shows uneven density in the inboard to outboard direction.
Initial Actions
Ensure that all HFSI items that are near or over threshold have been replaced. Ensure that IBT is positioned correctly in relation to the Copy/Print Cartridge (Xero Drum). Check the Plate (PL 7.6) that supports the outboard end of the IBT Backup Roll for damage.
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, inspect/ replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR, or the IBT Belt. Complete the steps below until the problem is resolved Check the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5) Clean/replace the IBT Cleaning Blade (PL 7.8) Replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables)
Procedure
Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen and make a print in Black, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. The defect is present in all four colors. Y N Replace the developer material for the problem color. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-up procedure. If the problem is still present, replace the Developer Housing for the problem color (PL 6.6). Run ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. The Setup runs successfully. Y N Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem. Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover. Make sure that the IBT Handle is up. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. Press Start. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1). When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down.
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Observe the Image on the IBT. The defect is present on the IBT. Y N Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 7.9). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR, or the ROS. Complete the steps below until the problem is resolved Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or damage. If any component is questionable, replace the Drum CRU Machine Consumables. Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 1st BTR (PL 7.6). Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Image Quality
IQ 8 Residual Image RAP, IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP
1/05 3-14
Replace the ROS (PL 4.1).
IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP

Low Image Density RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows image density that is lower than the specification.
Initial Actions
This problem can be caused by the following: Registration Drive Gear Low toner concentration. Out of specification paper, especially low quality, or heavy weight paper. Faulty IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Drum past end of life. Developer past end of life. Check the HFSI counters for the Developers. Refer to Detailed Maintenance Activities in Service Call Procedures. Faulty ADC Sensor. If Tag #14 is marked off, go to IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP.
Replace the paper presently being used with new 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper and run test copies. If the images reproduced are still of low density, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
Clean the ADC Sensor and run ADJ 9.1.1, Max Setup. The Setup runs successfully. Y N Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem. Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear Go to the IQ 5 Xerographic Subsystem Checkout Procedure.
1/05 3-15
Image Quality
IQ 9 Uneven Density RAP, IQ 10 Low Image Density
IQ 11 High Image Density RAP

IOT High Image Density RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows image density the is higher than the specification.

Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows bands, lines, or streaks in the lead edge to trail edge, or the front to rear direction.
Initial Actions
This problem can be caused by the following: High toner concentration. Faulty ADC Sensor. Drum, Developer or Corotrons past end of life. Faulty IOT PWB If the machine has Tag 14, refer to the IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP.
Initial Actions
NOTE: If the image defect looks like an ADC Patch Printout (see Defect Sample 27), go to IQ 8 Residual Image RAP to begin troubleshooting. NOTE: The table for Banding Intervals and Causes is referenced in the paragraph below. The measurements cited in this table are based on copies made at 100% magnification. Using the 150 mm scale, measure the position and interval of the defect. Refer to Banding Intervals and Causes (Table 1), and Checks for Front-to-Rear Banding Causes (Table 2) of this RAP to isolate the cause of the defect. If the cause of the defect is not found in the table, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
Clean the ADC Sensor and run ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. The Setup runs successfully. Y N Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem. The Xerographic Subsystems are in spec. Use Tools to set the desired density level if required. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure
Procedure
Hard Stop Procedure 1. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Make sure that the IBT Handle is up. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. Press Start. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1). When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn the IBT handle down.
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Observe the Image on the IBT. The defect is present on the IBT. Y N The problem is in the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop again. This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the interlock cheater. There are Bands, Lines, Smears, or Streaks on the copies on the Vacuum Transport. Y N The problem is in the Fuser. Disassembly the fuser and carefully inspect the following parts for damage or toner buildup. Fuser Pressure Roll Fuser Heat Roll. Fuser Cleaning Blade
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, check the 2nd BTR contamination or damage. If contaminated, clean with lint free cloth. If damaged, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Remove the IBT Cleaning Assembly. Check for damage on the IBT Cleaner Blade or the Film Seal. The Cleaner Assembly is good.
Image Quality
IQ 11 High Image Density RAP, IQ 12 Bands, Lines,
1/05 3-16
N Replace the Cleaner Assembly (PL 7.1)
Table 2 Checks For Other Banding Causes. Problem to check for White deletion streak from lead edge to trail edge Corrective Action Check for trimmer gap blockage on developer mag rolls.
Check the IBT Belt for scratches lines or band. The IBT Belt is good. Y N Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Choose IOT Test Pattern #11 from the UI, or Test Pattern # 99 from the PWS, and make a black, yellow, magenta, and cyan print of the test pattern. The defect appears in all four colors. Y N Replace the Developer for the problem color (PL 6.6). If the problem continues, replace the Developer Housing (PL 6.6). Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or damage. If any component is questionable, replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables). Check the Erase Lamp for dark spots. If the lamp is questionable, Replace the Erase Lamp (PL 5.1). Clean the ROS of obstructions or contamination. If the problem continues, replace the ROS (PL 4.1). Table 1 Banding Intervals and Causes Banding Interval in mm Component 0.51 1.02 6.6 39.14 40.84 52.78 105.77 ROS ROS Drum Motor (PL 1.1), Main Motor (PL 1.2) Gears associated with Mag Roll Gears associated with Mag Roll Gears associated with IBT Roll IBT Drive Assy which includes double-gear 22/64T (PL 1.1), Drum Idler Gear (PL 1.1), and IBT Drive Roll (PL 7.6)
Poor Developer Bias Contact Clean/Replace the Bias Brush (PL 6.1)
Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear
Table 2 Checks For Other Banding Causes. Problem to check for Dirty Drum Gear Loose Drum Flange Corrective Action Clean the Drum Gear Tighten Drum Flange
Dirty Corotron Wire/Corotron Clean with brush or replace Grid Drum CRU Machine Consumables Streak on IBT Streak on back side of copy. Hard stop to verify. Change IBT Belt if defective Check 2nd BTR Roll for damage or contamination
1/05 3-17
Image Quality

IOT White, Black or Colored Spots RAP. This RAP is used when the IOT output print has white, black, or colored spots.
Initial Actions
NOTE: If the image defect appears as a white spot (or deletion) with a Toner agglomerate near the middle of the spot (see Defect Sample 19), go to IQ 17 Deletions RAP and troubleshoot the defect as a Debris-Centered Deletion. NOTE: If the image defect has the appearance of a small barcode symbol that is read by a barcode scanner (see Defect Sample 25), replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables). NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure This failure can be caused by the following: Developer Problems Toner Dispense Problems Failure in the Drum Cleaning system Flaws on the Drum Flaws on the IBT Film Bead Carryout Failure of the IBT Cleaning Blade Clean the Document Glass. Clean the Lens and Mirrors. Clean/vacuum all Paper path areas. Clean/ vacuum all related xerographic components.
A Inspect the IBT Belt for contamination, dents or flaws that would cause the defect. The Belt has dents or flaws that caused the defect. Y N Perform the following: Gently clean the IBT Belt with a soft lint free cloth Check/clean or replace the IBT Cleaning Blade (PL 7.8) Clean the 1st BTR (PL 7.6). Clean the 2nd BTR (PL 7.9).
IBT
Remove the Drum. Check the Drum for damage or excessive contamination caused by failed cleaning brush or blade, If damage or cleaning failure is present, replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables).
Replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
Perform the following:
Procedure
Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen and make a print in Black, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. The defect is present in all four colors. Y N There is Bead Carry out on the faulty print. Y N Run 5 copies in each color of Test Pattern #11 UI or Test Pattern #99 PWS. Inspect the samples for isolated defects in a specific color. Inspect the Developer Housing of the problem color for leaks, spills, damage or flaws. The Developer Housing has leaks, spills, damage or flaws. Y N Replace the developer material for the faulty color (Machine Consumables). Replace the Developer Housing for the faulty color (PL 6.6). Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. After Max Setup is completed, check the high density areas of the output copies. If the high density areas are not dark enough, perform a manual tone up. Also, inspect the Developer Bias Brush for contamination or wear. Clean or replace the Brush (PL 6.1) (REP 6.1.4) as required. A Image Quality
1/05 3-18
IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP

IOT Solid Black Copy RAP. This RAP is used when the copy is solid black with no original document image seen in the copy.
IQ 15 Background RAP
IOT RAP. This RAP is used when the output image shows background greater than the specification. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure.
Initial Actions
Because the ROS exposes the areas of drum that will receive toner, or writes the four colors, this failure can be caused by the following in order of probability: Failure to charge the drum. Caused by faulty Charge Corotron, IOT PWB, or PTC and CC HVPS. Failure of the Developer Bias power Supply. Overexposure of the Drum. Caused by faulty IOT PWB, or ROS Assembly. Both of these failures will cause the output copy to be completely black, with no image visible from the original document. Mispositioned mirror or lens
Procedure
Run IOT Test Pattern #9 from UI, or Test Pattern #102 from PWS in 4 color mode. Background is present. Y N Perform ADJ 9.1.2. Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. Max setup completed successfully. Y N Go to the RAP for the Fault Code indicated to troubleshoot the problem Background is present. Y N Go to Final Actions. Background is present in all four colors Y N Replace the developer material for the faulty color. If the problem continues, replace the Developer Housing for the faulty color. Perform ADJ 12.3.3 DADF Height. Background is still present. Y N Go to Final Actions. Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. The Developer HVPS is good. Y N Replace the Developer HVPS (PL 9.1). Enter Tools and return all density settings to nominal. If background is still present, replace the Drum CRU, (Machine Consumables).
Procedure
Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. If the Developer Power Supply is good, go to the IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP. If the Charge Corotron Power Supply is good, replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables). If the problem remains, this indicates there is a problem in the ROS circuits. Replace the following components in the order shown. After each replacement, make a copy to check the operation of the copier: IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). ROS Assembly (PL 4.1).
1/05 3-19
Image Quality
IQ 14 IOT Solid Black (or Color) Copy RAP, IQ 15
IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP

This RAP is used when the output copy is completely blank, or has extremely low image density.
A The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR. Complete the steps below until the problem is resolved Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron screen for defects or damage. If any component is questionable, replace the Xerographic Module (PL 5.3). Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 1st BTR (PL 7.6).
Initial Actions
Ensure that J572 is firmly connected to the Post IPS PWB and P396 is firmly connected to the Half Tone PWB. The ROS does not discharge the drum properly. Ensure than drive from the Main Motor (PL 1.2) to the Developer Clutch (PL 1.3) is functioning correctly.
Procedure
There is some image on the copy. Y N Remove the Print/Copy Cartridge (Drum). Wipe a section of one of the mag rolls to remove the toner/developer. Reinstall the Drum, and run 10 copies/prints. Remove the wiped area Drum again, and examine the mag roll on the developer housing. The remains free from toner/developer. Y N Ensure that the IBT Drawer is properly positioned. Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. Check for correct operation of the ROS. Use the procedure in the 14-372 ROS Motor Fail RAP. Registration Drive Gear
Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.3. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wires are OK, replace the Developer Clutch (PL 1.3). If the problem persists replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover Make sure that the IBT Handle is up. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. Press Start. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1). When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down. Figure 1 Registration Drive Gear
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Observe the Image on the IBT. The image density is very low on the IBT. Y N Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 7.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5).
A Image Quality
IQ 16 Blank (or Nearly Blank) Copy RAP
1/05 3-20
IQ 17 Deletions RAP
IOT Deletions RAP. This RAP is used when the output copy is experiencing deletions. 6.
NOTE: When perform the next step, it is very important that you follow the installation sequence for tightening the four screws of the Inner Dispense Cover. Using (REP 6.7.1) as a guide, replace the Inner/Outer Dispense Housings (PL 6.5) for all four colors, including the following parts, except where noted (PL 6.5), 7. 8. Outer Dispense Cover, screw and spring Inner Dispense Cover Four Outer Dispense Housings Four Inner Dispense Housings and their four bearings (clean with a lint-free cloth and reinstall) Block and black spacer Five white spacers (clean with a lint-free cloth and reinstall)
Initial Actions
NOTE: If the deletions look like mottle and are most noticeable in the high density areas of an image, go to IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP. Load some new, dry 24 lb. 11 X17 (A3) Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) into Tray 2 and make 5 single-color 20% halftone copies of IOT Pattern 11 (UI) and 99 (PWS) for each color (Y, M, C, and K). Note: Set aside the best black copy for future use and mark its lead edge. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure.
Reinstall the developer housing(s) (REP 6.6.1). Run 50 11X17/A3 single-color 20% halftone copies of IOT Pattern 11 (UI) and 99 (PWS) for the problem color(s).
Procedure
The defect is still present with the new paper. Y N The paper was the problem. Tell the customer that new, dry, 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper is the specified paper for use in the DocuColor 12 copier. The deletions occur with all four colors Y N Deletions are Debris-Centered (that is, it has a Toner agglomerate near the center). Y N Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If the problem remains, inspect the following parts for damage or contamination: IBT Belt (dents or spots) Photoreceptor Drum Module (dents, scratches, or spots) 2nd BTR Roll Paper Path Rollers or Tray Feeders Fuser Module Rolls
If the problem remains, inspect the Developer Bias Roll Shaft for contamination or wear. Clean or repair it as required (PL 7.6). Also, inspect the Developer Bias Brush for contamination or wear. Clean or replace the Brush (PL 6.1) (REP 6.1.4) as required. Inspect the IBT Belt for any foreign materials or dents. The IBT Belt is OK. Y N Clean IBT Belt with soft lint free cloth, or replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). Load the largest-size, fresh paper available in all the remaining trays, including the Paper Bypass Tray. Place the black copy you set aside earlier on the platen glass with the its lead edge facing away from the registration edge. Make several black copies from each tray with the Lighten / Darken Image Quality selection at its Darkest setting and mark each copy set with the corresponding tray it was fed from. The defect occurred on copies from all four trays and the Paper Tray Bypass. Y N Repair or replace any faulty components of the Feeder Assembly for the problem paper supply. Inspect the Drum for any defects or damage. The Drum is OK. Y N Clean or replace the Drum CRU (Machine Consumables). Inspect the ROS opening in the frame, above the Drum, for blockage and debris. The frame opening is clean and not blocked. Y N Clear or clean the opening. Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover Make sure that the IBT Handle is up. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. Press Start. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1). Image Quality
NOTE: Examine and identify the color of the agglomerate/grit contained in the center of the deletion(s) of a halftone image. The color(s) within the center of the deletion shall be called the problem color or component. 1. 2. Remove the problem developer housing following (REP 6.6.1). Remove the problem developer material (REP 6.6.2). NOTE: Before replacing the developer material, vacuum any residual developer from the housing to ensure complete removal of the problem material. 3. 4. 5. Replace the developer material (REP 6.6.2) but DO NOT replace the developer housing at this time. Remove the Rotary Dispense Assembly (REP 6.7.1). Remove, vacuum and clean the problem rotary auger(s) (REP 6.7.1).
A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 3-21
IQ 17 Deletions RAP
7. 8. 9.
When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down.
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Observe the Image on the IBT. The defect is present on the IBT. Y N The problem is in the IBT, the 2nd BTR, or the Fuser. Perform the Xerographic Hard Stop again. This time, wait until the paper is on the Vacuum Transport before removing the interlock cheater. The defect is present on the copy that is on the Vacuum Transport. Y N The problem is in the Fuser. Disassemble the fuser and carefully inspect the following parts for damage or toner buildup. Pressure Roll (PL 8.3). Heat Roll Stripper Fingers (PL 8.3), Heat Rolls (PL 8.3). Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5). Registration Drive Gear
Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR, or the ROS. Complete the steps below until the problem is resolved If the problem is density or background related, perform a ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If any Fault Codes are generated during the setup, use the RAPs for those Fault Codes to troubleshoot the problem. Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron screen for defects or damage. If any component is questionable, replace the Xerographic Module (PL 5.3). Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 1st BTR (PL 7.6). Replace the ROS (PL 4.1).
Image Quality
IQ 17 Deletions RAP
1/05 3-22
IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP

IOT Missing Colors RAP. This RAP is used when the output copy exhibits a consistent loss of one of the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black toners.
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP

Bead Carryout RAP. This RAP is used when the copy is experiencing bead carryout (BCO). This defect looks like mottle and is most noticeable in the high density areas. BCO is caused by low toner concentration. NOTE: Only the effect the carrier beads have on the image of the output copy/print are visible. The beads are physically trapped by the fuser web and therefore will not be observed on the copy/print.
Initial Actions
Check that connectors P/J140 on the TR0 Sensor and P/J139 on the ADC Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires. IBT Belt is correctly installed and IBT drive appears to be normal.
Initial Actions Procedure

Run the # 9 IOT Test Pattern from the UI, or the 102 Test Pattern from the PWS in 4 color mode. One of the colors is missing. Y N Run IPS Test pattern # 22 from the UI or PWS. One of the colors is missing Y N Run IPS Test Pattern #21 from the UI or PWS. The copy should look similar to Figure 3 in 3.2.4 IOT/IPS Internal Test Patterns of the Image Quality Supplement. The Copy looks similar to Figure 3. Y N Replace the Pre IPS PWB (PL 3.5) Replace the Mem Sys PWB (PL 3.5). Replace the Post IPS PWB (PL 3.5). Enter dC920 and move each of the housings to the development location. The Rotary Developer places each housing in the proper development location. Y N Go to the 9-363 Rotary Home Position Fail RAP. Replace the problem Developer Housing (PL 6.6). If the problem continues, replace the Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure. NOTE: If the BCO problem occurs with the color black and the IOT s/w version is 6.00.2 or higher, go to IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP. If the problem occurs with the color black and the IOT s/w version is lower than 6.00.2, continue with this RAP. NOTE: For a high 4-color background / bead carryout problem (see Defect Sample 10), go to IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP to begin troubleshooting. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure. Ensure that the paper presently being used is fresh 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper or paper which is included in the customers Materials Usage Guide and Recommended Paper List. Run test copies. If the copies reproduced still have Bead Carryout, continue with this RAP. If the machine has Tag 14 ATC Sensor, refer to IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP.
Procedure
NOTE: This procedure must be performed using UI diagnostics because some of the required NVM locations cannot be accessed from the PWS. NOTE: While referring to Table 1, make a drawing of this table on a sheet of 8 1/2 x 11 / A4 LEF paper. Then make a copy of your drawing. These two tables will be used to collect and analyze data when performing this procedure. NOTE: Ensure that 8 1/2 X 11 / A4 LEF paper is installed in Tray 2 before continuing. Enter the diagnostic mode from the UI and select MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Control (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the highdensity patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) in any color. Y N Go to IQ 2 Defect Listing and choose one or more of the following defects to continue troubleshooting: mottle, high image density, deletions, or spots. Select Close three times to take you back to the main menu. Select NVM Read/Write. NVM locations 773-021 through 773-028 are set to 1. Y N Select MAX Setup. Select and run ADC AGC Setup (dC934) and VH/VM Setup (dC933) in Max Setup (dc929) and investigate any system failure that is declared. NVM 773-004 is set to 1;
1/05 3-23
Image Quality
IQ 18 IOT Missing Colors RAP, IQ 19 Bead Carryout
N Set NVM to 1.
The value in NVM location 773-121 is between 5 and 95 (this number represents the percentage of room humidity). Y N Replace the Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1). Record the ADC Target values from NVM locations 773-266 through 773-269 in Column 1 of the table you prepared. If the Y, M, C, and K values are EQUAL to or LESS than 230, 230, 250, and 160 respectively, answer Yes. If the value(s) are HIGHER than 230, 230, 250 and 160 respectively, answer No. Y N Set NVM locations 773-266, 267, 268, and 269 to 230, 230, 250, and 160 respectively. Then make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11/A4 paper to stabilize the IOT. Record the Humidity Adjusted ADC Target value(s) for the problem color(s) from NVM locations 773-281 through 773-284 in Column 2 and the ADC Patch Readings from NVM locations 773-606 through 773-609 in Column 3. The value(s) in Column 3 is within +/- 30 bits from the values in Column 2 for the problem color(s). Y N Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11 / A4 LEF paper. Repeat as necessary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within +/- 30 bits of the Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets. If the value(s) is not within this range after making 250 copies, go to IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP. Reselect MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Control (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-density patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) for the problem color(s). Y N The BCO problem is resolved. NOTE: DO NOT set the new value(s) for the ADC Targets below the following lower limits: 773266 = 150, 773-267 = 150, 773-268 = 170, and 773-269 = 100. For example, if reducing the value of NVM location 773-266 by 50 bits would result in a value less than 150, you must not exceed the 150 limit for that location. Enter a new value(s) for the problem color(s) in the appropriate NVM location(s) that is 50 bits less than the current value(s) of the ADC Targets. Then record the new value(s) in Column 1 on one of the remaining tables you prepared. Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of color test patter 82E10810 to stabilize the IOT. Next, record the Humidity Adjusted ADC Target value(s) for the problem color(s) from NVM locations 773-281 through 773-284 in Column 2 and the ADC Patch Readings from NVM locations 773-606 through 773-609 in Column 3. The value(s) in Column 3 is within +/- 30 bits from the values in Column 2 for the problem color(s). Y N Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11 / A4 LEF paper. Repeat as necessary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within +/- 30 bits of the Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets. If the value(s) is not within this range after making 250 copies, go to IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP. A Image Quality
A Reselect MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Control (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-density patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) for the problem color(s). Y N The BCO problem is resolved. NOTE: If the lower limit(s) for the problem color(s) location(s) has already been reached, go directly to the end of this RAP and perform the corrective action steps. NOTE: DO NOT set the new value(s) for the ADC Targets below the following lower limits: 773266 = 150, 773-267 = 150, 773-268 = 170, and 773-269 = 100. Enter a new value(s) for the problem color(s) in the appropriate NVM location(s) that is 30 bits less (C,M,Y) or 10 bits less (K) than the current value(s) of the ADC Targets. Then record the new value(s) in Column 1 on one of the remaining tables you prepared. Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of color test patter 82E10810 to stabilize the IOT. Next, record the Humidity Adjusted ADC Target value(s) for the problem color(s) from NVM locations 773-281 through 773-284 in Column 2 and the ADC Patch Readings from NVM locations 773-606 through 773609 in Column 3. The value(s) in Column 3 is within +/- 30 bits from the values in Column 2 for the problem color(s). Y N Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11 / A4 LEF paper. Repeat as necessary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within +/- 30 bits of the Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets. If the value(s) is not within this range after making 250 copies, go to IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP. Reselect MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Control (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the high-density patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) for the problem color(s). Y N The BCO problem is resolved. NOTE: Before performing the corrective action steps below, re-enter the original value(s) of the ADC Targets for the problem color(s) in the appropriate NVM location(s). Make 50 full-color copies of the top half of the Color Test Pattern on 8 1/2 X 11 / A4 LEF paper. Repeat as necessary until the ADC Patch value(s) for the problem color(s) is within +/- 30 bits of the original Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets. Perform the following corrective action steps in order until the problem is resolved. Check the Toner dispense system for any blockage or obstruction that could limit the amount of Toner reaching the Developer Housing. Replace the developer material for the problem color (Machine Consumables)
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP
1/05 3-24
Replace the problem Developer Housing (PL 6.6) Table 1 Data Collection ADC Targets Humidity Adjusted ADC Targets 773-281 773-282 773-283 773-284 ADC Patch Readings 773-606 773-607 773-608 773-609
IQ 20 IOT Graininess RAP

IOT Graininess RAP. This RAP is used when the output copy shows graininess, or a sandy, textured appearance. Column 3
Column 1
Column 2
Procedure
Paper outside the specified weight and quality range can increase graininess. Heavy weight papers are particularly susceptible. Replace the paper currently in use with new, 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper. If the paper change does not fix the problem, go to Detailed Maintenance Activities in Section 1. Check the expected life of the Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black Developer. If the developer material is past expected life, replace it. Replace the Developer Bias Brush, if damaged (REP 6.1.4) Replace the Developer Housing, if damaged (PL 6.6). Go to IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-up procedure.
Y M C K
773-266 773-267 773-268 773-269
1/05 3-25
Image Quality
IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP, IQ 20 IOT Graininess
IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP

Images that are not clear, or appear out of focus.
IQ 22 Mottle RAP
This RAP is to be used when the output image shows Mottle.
Initial Actions
Clean the top and bottom of the Document Glass, Lens and Mirrors with a lint free cloth and lens and mirror cleaner. If the defect occurs only in the 3-Color Mode and appears to match the Toner Explosion defect sample, recommend that the job be run in 4-Color Mode. Otherwise, continue with the Procedure below.
Initial Actions
This problem can occur when using lower quality paper, paper which is not in specification for this machine (refer to the customers Materials Usage Guide and Recommended Paper List), or in paper that has a high moisture content. Replace the paper presently being used with new 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper and run test copies. If the copies reproduced still have Mottle, continue with this RAP. Ensure that IBT is positioned correctly in relation to the Copy/Print Cartridge (Xero Drum). Check the Plate (PL 7.6) that supports the outboard end of the IBT Backup Roll for damage.
Procedure
If the defect occurs when running internal test pattern #84 on 11x17, single color from the PWS perform the following until the problem is resolved: Perform ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment. Clean the Ros Lenses. Replace the Ros Assembly (PL 4.1). Inspect the Drum surface for damage or contamination. Inspect the Charge Corotron Wire and Grid for damage or contamination.
Procedure
Perform ADJ 9.1.1, Max Setup. Mottle is still present Y N Go to Final Actions. The Defect is present only in the high density areas of the copy. Y N Go to the IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP The Developer HVPS is good Y N Replace the Developer HVPS (PL 9.1). If problem continues, replace developer material, (Machine Consumables). Xerographic Hard Stop Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the Paper Handling Module Cover Make sure that the IBT Handle is up. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Use the Test Pattern that displays the fault. Press Start. Watch the Registration Drive Gear (Figure 1). When the gear starts to rotate, remove the interlock cheater. Extend the Paper Handling Drawer. Remove the two screws that secure the IBT Front Frame and turn IBT handle down.
If the defect occurs when running the Color Test Pattern from the platen perform the following until the problem is resolved: Clean both sides of the Platen Glass and ensure that the Platen Glass is seated firmly. Perform ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position Adjustment. Clean the Ros Lenses. Replace the Ros Assembly (PL 4.1).
If the defect continues go to IQ 7 IDFE / Network Checkout Procedure. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure.
10. Extend the IBT Drawer to the service position. Observe the Image on the IBT. The defect is present on the IBT. Y N Go to the IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP. If the 2nd BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 2nd BTR (PL 9.2). If the problem continues, replace the IBT Belt (PL 7.5). The problem is in the Xerographic Module, the 1st BTR. Complete the steps below until the problem is resolved Check the photoreceptor, the corotron wire, and the corotron grid for defects or damage. If any component is questionable, replace the Xerographic Module (PL 5.3).
A Image Quality
IQ 21 Blurred or Fuzzy Image RAP, IQ 22 Mottle RAP
1/05 3-26
A Go to the IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. If the 1st BTR Power Supply is good, replace the 1st BTR (PL 7.6).
IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP

Procedure
Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup.
The problem is present in all four colors Y N This appears to be a mottle-like bead carryout problem (see Defect Sample 28), go to IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP to continue troubleshooting. Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If any Fault Codes are generated during the setup, use the RAPs for those Fault Codes to troubleshoot the problem. If the high density areas of the copy appear to light, perform a manual tone up and refer to the IQ 19 RAP.
1/05 3-27
Image Quality
IQ 22 Mottle RAP, IQ 23 Poor Color Balance RAP
IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination RAP

Procedure
Clean all Paper / Copy transports. Clean/replace the IBT Belt. Clean/inspect 2nd BTR roll Clean/inspect Vacuum Transport Assembly Heat Roll (PL 8.3) Pressure Roll (PL 8.3) External Heat Roll (PL 8.8) Donor Roll Assembly (Oil System Kit) (REP 8.2.1) Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5) Advance the web manually to a clean area.
IQ 25 Hollow Character RAP

Small circular-shaped deletions within a character that can occur when the image density is low or a transparency is used.
Procedure
Check the following items: If the problem is with Transparencies, ensure that the customer is running the correct Transparencies. Transparencies must be run out of Tray 5, and Transparencies must be selected under Paper Type. If the transparencies have white strips, ensure that the white strip is facing downward in the tray. Inspect the IBT Belt for wear, damage or IBT Belt over HFSI threshold. Replace IBT Belt (PL 7.5) as needed. Check for Developer over threshold.
Clean or replace the following parts:
NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure.
Image Quality
IQ 24 Back Side or Side Two Copy Contamination
1/05 3-28
IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP

Procedure
Clean both sides of the Document Glass. Replace developer material if near or over HFSI threshold. (Machine Consumables) Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup
IQ 27 Color-to-Color Misregistration RAP

Procedure
Perform the following: Check for IBT Belt loosing a pitch and ensure that the tensioner is engaged. Timing of the TR0 signal, Inspect the TRO Sensor. Ensure it is clean and not damaged. Ensure that the IBT Belt is not riding on the ridge on the outside edge of the Steering and Drive rollers. Perform ADJ 9.1.1 MAX Setup.
1/05 3-29
Image Quality
IQ 26 Low Contrast Reproduction RAP, IQ 27 Color-
IQ 28 Moire RAP
Moire can occur when the original is a halftone or contains a halftone. The halftone screen in the original can interfere with the halftone screens being generated by the copier.
IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP

Procedure
Clean the Document Glass with Anti Static Fluid. Place a transparency between the photo and the Document Glass.
Procedure
Perform the following: For Original Type of either Photo & Text or Photo, be certain to select Halftone for Photo Type.) Change the orientation of the original by rotating it 90 degrees. Decrease the Sharpness level (Softer, Softest). Reduce or enlarge the copy slightly (for example 95% or 105%). Change Original Type to Graphics & Maps (appearance may change -- some CQ adjustments may be necessary).
NOTE: Newton Rings usually occur when copying high gloss photos in Photo/Photograph mode.
Image Quality
IQ 28 Moire RAP, IQ 29 Newton Rings RAP
1/05 3-30
IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP

Toner that was not cleaned off the Heat Roll offsets onto the front or back side of copies. NOTE: Offsetting is most likely to occur when running long jobs of high area coverage, transparencies or coated papers. High AC transparencies should be run using paper interleaves. Offsetting is also likely to occur when running heavy paper in the normal paper mode. Offsetting is more likely to occur as the Heat Roll ages.
Run the Fuser Break-in Procedure GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure. Check for indications that the Web Supply Roll is rotating normally. If there is a buildup of toner across the entire length of the web, perform the Web Motor Checkout.
Web Motor Checkout +24 VDC is measured between P/J413A-2 on the IOT Drive PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J440-1 on the Web Drive PWB and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Distribution PWB (PL 9.3). +24 VDC is measured between P/J440-2 on the Web Drive PWB and GND. Y N Check the Web Motor (PL 8.4) for an open circuit. If it is OK, replace the Web Drive PWB (PL 8.4). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 10.5 and check the harness for an open circuit. Enter DC330 [10-032] Web Motor. Press the Start button. The voltage at P/J413A-2 decreases from +24 VDC to less than +1.0 VDC. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Install the Web CRU, Front Cover and Oil Cartridge. Replace the Web Drive PWB (PL 8.4). If that does not correct the problem, replace the Web Motor (PL 8.4). Table 1 Fuser temperature NVM values NVM loc. Default value New value 160 178 150 165 158 180 193 165 187 193 (NASG) 185 (ESG) 162 163 161 164 162 163 193 155 170 145 161 153 170 183 156 167 172 156 151 155 155 150 155 188 NVM loc. 777-137 777-138 777-139 777-166 777-194 777-195 777-196 777-256 777-257 777-272 777-276 777-280 777-299 777-300 777-301 777-309 777-310 Default value New value 190 183 195 164 185 182 190 1050 1050 165 160 156 193 10 168 168 169 183 180 188 156 165 165 170 18000 25000 161 155 151 175 2 161 161 163 Image Quality 777-001 777-003 777-005 777-010 777-013 777-016 777-017 777-018 777-019 777-020 777-021 777-023 777-026 777-027 777-028 777-098 777-135 1/05 3-31
Initial Actions
Perform the Fuser Nip (dC701) ADJ 8.1.1. If the nip width is very low at one end, check that the Heat and Pressure Roll Bearings are correctly positioned. Also check that the Pressure Roll Lift mechanism is functioning properly. Ensure that the 2 screws holding the upper and lower Fuser Frames together are tight. In some cases, highly contaminated fuser oil can lead to offsetting, especially with transparencies and black copies. This situation is possible under the following circumstances: The machine has a low oil supply (i.e., oil bottle is empty oil tank is low/add oil message is displayed). Oil level on the copies is low (indicated by the lack of oil streaks). The machine has high copy volume (more than 100K) and the oil in the tank is milky/ dirty. Low Humidity environments may increase the likelihood of offsetting.
If this is suspect, replace the Oil Tank and Oil Pipe (PL 8.7) and the Oil Wick and Oil Filter (PL 8.7), then go to the GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure. Excessively high Fuser temperature is a primary cause of Fuser contamination. This problem is prevalent when the machine is run in Extra Heavyweight mode, and increases when high area coverage images are run frequently. If this is suspect, change the default values for the NVM locations in Table 1 to the values listed in the New values column.
Procedure
Remove the Fuser Assembly. Check the following components. Clean excess toner from the components using the Cleaning Procedures in Section 1. Replace the components if contamination remains or if offsetting continues after cleaning. Heat Roll (PL 8.3) Pressure Roll (PL 8.3) External Heat Roll (PL 8.8) Donor Roll (PL 8.9) Pick Up Roll (PL 8.9). If Roll is replaced, also replace the Metering Blade (PL 8.9). Oil Wick (PL 8.7) Cleaning Roll (PL 8.5) Check the Oil Bottle, if empty, replace (Machine Consumables). Check the Oil supply system is functioning. Go to the OF10-2 Fuser Oil Pump RAP. Check that the load springs and bearings for the Donor Roll Assembly are properly positioned. Advance the web manually to a clean area. Access NVM location 777-079 and increase the value by 7,000 for each 25mm/one inch that the web was advanced.
Perform the actions indicated below:
IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP
Table 1 Fuser temperature NVM values NVM loc. 777-136 Default value New value 167 161 NVM loc. 777-312 Default value New value 168 159
IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP

Process direction streaks that show up first on transparencies or coated paper as low gloss streaks in solid areas. In severe cases, oil streaks can show up on paper as low density streaks in large halftone areas.
Initial Actions
NOTE: The primary cause of oil streaks is contamination of the oil Metering Blade. While the Fuser is still warm, clean the External Heat Roll using the Cleaning Procedures in Section 1. If the toner buildup cannot be removed, replace the roll (PL 8.8). Check the HFSI counter for Oil System in the Detailed Maintenance Activities. If the count is at or near 80,000, Install a new Oil System Repair Kit, (includes Donor Roll Assembly, Wick and Oil Filter) (includes Tag P12 and TAG P21). After Installing a new Oil System Kit, reset HSFI Counters 10-811 and 10-814.
Procedure
NOTE: Carefully observe the orientation of the Metering Blade to the Pickup Roll before disassembling it. Notice that there is an F stamped into the front frame of the Metering Blade and the Donor Roll Assembly Frame. When reassembling the Metering Blade, ensure that the two Fs are located at the front of the Donor Roll Assembly. NOTE: If the Metering Blade has less than 10,000 copies/prints on it, removing and cleaning the Metering Blade/Oil System Roll, and Donor Roll with a lint-free cloth (600S1276) and fuser oil should correct the problem. If the Metering Blade/Oil System has between 10,000 and 70,000 copies on it, perform the following steps: 1. Replace the Metering Blade REP 8.2.1 (PL 8.9), being careful to avoid contaminating the blade edge during replacement. While replacing the blade, clean the Donor Roll and Pickup Roll with a lint-free cloth (600S1276) and fuser oil. Before installing the blade, wipe the edge with a lint-free cloth and oil. Finally, wipe the edge of the blade with a clean finger. Tear off the corner from a sheet of 24#, (90 gsm) copy paper. After assembling the Metering Blade to the Pickup Roll, slide one of the clean edges of the paper between the blade and the roll, inboard to outboard, to clean off any remaining contamination. Inspect the Oil Wick and wipe off the surface with a lint-free cloth. Clean or replace the following parts as required: 5. 6. Heat Roll (PL 8.3) Pressure Roll (PL 8.3)
2.
3. 4.
Ensure that the Donor roll and Pickup Roll are in contact with each other after the Donor Roll Assembly has been installed (REP 8.2.1). Advance the Web manually to a clean area. Enter Diagnostics. Access NVM Location 777-079 and increase the value by 7,000 for each 25mm/one inch that the web was advanced. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
7.
Image Quality
IQ 30 Fuser Offsetting RAP, IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak
1/05 3-32
IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP

Intentional border deletions that exceed specifications (refer to ROS Borders for details).
IQ 33 Solid Area Reproduction RAP

Initial Actions
Load some new, dry 24 lb 11X17/A3 Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) into the paper tray. Make full color copies and check the Solid Area Reproduction. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure.
Procedure
Perform the ADJ 9.1.10 Side/Lead Edge Registration (dC129: System Registration).
Procedure
Perform the following: Replace the developer if the developer is near or over HFSI threshold. Replace the IBT Belt if the IBT Belt is over HFSI threshold. Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. Check for Mottle/BCO IQ 22 Mottle RAP. Check the 1st BTR HVPS IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP. Check the 2nd BRT HVPS IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP
1/05 3-33
Image Quality
IQ 32 ROS Borders RAP, IQ 33 Solid Area Repro-
IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP

When using the Original Type options of Photo and Text or Text, the copier attempts to discriminate between text and photo areas within the original. It then applies the appropriate image processing to each area. Text is reproduced at 600 lines per inch while photos are reproduced at 200 lines/dots per inch. On occasion, the defect may appear where an area is classified incorrectly and text is treated as photo or vise-versa.
IQ 35 Toner Starvation RAP

This defect occurs at the transition point between a high density area and a low density area of the same color. A localized area of the mag brush becomes starved for toner due to development fringe field effects. Starvation tends to worsen at low triboelectric levels (high toner concentration).
Procedure
Rotate the original 90 degrees. Reduce or enlarge slightly. In Photo & Text mode, change Photo Type from Half Tone to Photograph Under Tools - System Image Quality - Image Recognition, the Key operator can adjust Text & Photo Recognition and or Text & Photo Balance. It should be noted that these parameters are not intended to be adjusted on a job to job basis. These adjustments are trade-offs and should be treated with care. Change Original Type to Photo or to Graphic & Maps. (Appearance may change - some CQ adjustments may be necessary.
Initial Actions
Change the orientation of the original by rotating it 90 degrees or 180 degrees. If the machine shows a starvation problem and has Tag 14 ATC Sensor, refer to the IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP. NOTE: After replacing developer material, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC setup procedure.
Procedure
Place the Color Test Pattern on the platen and make a print in Black, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. The defect is present in all four colors. Y N Ensure that developer housing for the problem color is not damaged. Replace the developer if the developer is near or over HFSI threshold. Perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. NOTE: If the machine is showing objectionable starvation, and has an ATC Sensor and the sensor is activated, go to the IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP to check for proper operation.
Image Quality
IQ 34 Text / Image Separation RAP, IQ 35 Toner Star-
1/05 3-34
IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP

Unfused Image usually occurs because of lack of heat/pressure in the Fuser, or because of excess toner on the copy.
IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP

This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing or out-of-specification voltages.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the correct Paper Mode (i.e Normal, Heavyweight or Extra Heavyweight) has been selected for the paper being run. For electronic images, ensure that toner coverage has been limited to a total of less than 280% or less than 70% each color.
Procedure WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. Measure the Developer Bias output from the DB HVPS: Switch off the copier. Connect the DMM (+) lead to the developer bias terminal that attaches to the developer housing. Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Connect the DMM (-) lead to the copier frame. Set the DMM to measure 1 KVDC. Switch on the copier. Enter DC330 [09-076], press Start and observe the voltage measurement.
Procedure
Go to ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip Adjustment. Nip width near the maximum (10.6 mm) will provide the best fusing. Ensure that output image density is not too high. Compare the output image density to the density of the original. If output density is too high, go to IQ 11 High Image Density RAP to achieve the correct image density.
There is a steady voltage of approximately -550 VDC at this point. Y N Press Stop. Enter DC330 [09-077] and press Start. There is a steady voltage of approximately 415 VAC at this point. Y N Press Stop. Connect the DMM (+) lead to the output terminal of the Developer Bias HVPS. Press Start. There is approximately -550 VDC at this point. Y N Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured at P/J91-1 on the Developer Bias HVPS. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD9.3 and check the wiring for an open circuit. (If two or more input signal are missing, -550 VDC and 415 VAC outputs will not be present.) Go to Flag 4 on BSD9.3and check the wiring for an open circuit. If OK, replace the Developer Bias HVPS (PL 9.1). If the problem remains, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 3 BSD9.3 and check the Developer Bias Lead for an open circuit. Press Stop. Enter dC330 [09-076] and press Start. Approximately +2.7 VDC is measured at J[418]-A9 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Approximately +2.7 VDC is measured at P/J91-5 on the Developer Bias HVPS. Y N Go to Flag 5 BSD9.3 and check for an open circuit. Replace the Developer Bias HVPS (PL 9.1). Press Stop. Enter DC330 [09-077] and press Start. There is a steady voltage of approximately 415 VAC at this point. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 3-35 Image Quality
IQ 36 Unfused Copy RAP, IQ 37 Developer Bias
N Press Stop. Approximately +3.2 VDC is measured at P/J418A-10 on the IOT Drive PWB when Start is pressed. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Approximately +3.2 VDC is measured at P/J91-4 on the Developer Bias HVPS. Y N Go to Flag 6 BSD9.3 and check for an open circuit. Approximately +4.5 VDC is measured at P/J418A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Approximately +4.5 VDC is measured at P/J91-3 on the Developer Bias HVPS. Y N Go to Flag 7 BSD9.3 and check for an open circuit. Replace the Developer Bias HVPS (PL 9.1).
IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP

This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing or out-of-range voltages and current.
Procedure WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. Enter dC330 [09-070]. Press Start. Observe the B Monitor (Red) LED on the CC/PCC HVPS. The LED is lit or flickering. Y N +24 VDC is measured at P/J82-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS. Y N Approximately +1.0 VDC is measured at P/J82-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS. Y N +24 VDC is measured at P/J92-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS. Y N Go to Flag 1 BSD9.1 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Ensure that the following are OK: Fingers in front Developer Rotor End Frame (PL 6.7) Developer Bias Brush and Plate (PL 6.1) Wire from Bias Plate to Developer Roll (PL 9.1)
Go to Flag 1 BSD9.1 and check the wire for an open circuit. If OK, replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). Go to Flag 4 BSD9.1 and check the Charge output circuit, including the Charge Corotron wire (PL 5.4), for an open circuit. If OK, replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). Approximately +3.5 VDC is measured at P/J92-3. Y N Go to Flag 2 BSD9.1 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). The LED is on steady (not flickering). Y N +24 VDC is measured at P/J82-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS. Y N Check for an open connection between P/J82-1 and P/J82-1. If OK, replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). Go to Flag 3 BSD9.1 and check for an open circuit. Press Stop. Enter dC330 [09-081]. Press Start. Approximately +3.5 VDC is measure at P/ J92-4. Y N Go to Flag 5 BSD9.1 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). A
Image Quality
IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP, IQ 38 Charge
1/05 3-36
A Press Stop. Perform the following: Set the meter to measure micro amps. Disconnect the Charge output connector from the CC/PCC HVPS. Connect one meter lead to the supply side of the connector and the other lead to the harness side. Enter dC330 [09-070]. Press Start.
IQ 39 Preclean Corotron HVPS RAP

Procedure WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. Ensure that NVM location [774-031] is set at 3 and location [774-029] is set at 130. Enter and operate DC330 [09-068]. Observe the G Monitor (Red) LED on the CC/PCC HVPS. The LED is lit. Y N Enter and operate DC330 [09-070] and observe the B Monitor (Red) LED on the CC/PCC HVPS. The LED is lit. Y N +24 VDC is measured at P/J92-1 on the CC/PCC HVPS. Y N Go to Flag 2 BSD9.13 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2).
Approximately 600 to 800 micro amps is measured. Y N Replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). The Charge Corotron HVPS checks out OK. Check the following: Charge Corotron Assy (PL 5.4). Charge Corotron connector (PL 5.2).
Check for an open connection between P/J92-1 and P/J92-1. If OK, replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). Approximately +1.85 VDC is measured at P/J92-6. Y N Go to Flag 3 BSD9.13 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for an open connection at P/J92-6. If OK, go to Flag 4 BSD9.13 and check the Preclean output circuit, including the Preclean Corotron wire (PL 5.4) for and open circuit. If OK, replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). Set your meter to measure micro amps. Disconnect the Preclean output connector from the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). Connect one meter lead to the supply side of the connector and the other lead to the harness side. Make another full-color copy. Approximately 200 to 400 micro amps is measured. Y N Replace the CC/PCC HVPS (PL 9.1). The Preclean Corotron HVPS checks out OK. Check the following: Preclean Corotron (PL 5.4). Preclean Corotron connector (PL 5.2).
1/05 3-37
Image Quality
IQ 38 Charge Corotron HVPS RAP, IQ 39 Preclean
IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP

Procedure WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. In the following procedure, high DC voltage circuits will be tested. Use extreme caution when testing these circuits. Do not touch the multimeter or the meter leads while testing the circuits. Set your meter to measure micro amps. Disconnect the output connector from the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). Connect one meter lead to the supply side of the connector and the other lead to the harness side. Make one full-color copy. Approximately -50 to -70 micro amps is measured momentarily near the end of the copy cycle. Y N Approximately -20 to -30 micro amps is measured momentarily. Y N Approximately 0 micro amps is measured. Y N (This indicates that the measurement is between -1 and -19 micro amps, or -71 micro amps or higher.) Replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). Reconnect the output connector from the 2nd BTR HVPS. +24 VDC is measured at P/J95-1 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during Standby. Y N Go to Flag 1 BSD9.9 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Make one full-color copy. Approximately +1.5 VDC is measured momentarily at P/J95-3 on the 2nd BTR HVPS near the end of the copy cycle. Y N Go to Flag 2 BSD9.9 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Check for an open connection at P/J95-3, and at P/J95-1. If OK, go to Flag 3 BSD9.9 and check for an open in the output circuit. If OK, replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). Make another full-color copy. Approximately +4.0 VDC is measured momentarily at P/J95-7 on the 2nd BTR HVPS near the end of the copy cycle. Y N Check for an open connection at P/J95-7. If OK, replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 4 BSD9.9 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Reconnect the output connector to the 2nd BTR HVPS. Approximately +11.5 is measured at P/J95-4 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during standby. Y N Go to Flag 5 BSD9.9 and check for an open connection at P/J95-4. If OK, replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). A Image Quality
A Approximately +11.5 is measured at P/J95-6 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during standby. Y N Go to Flag 6 BSD9.9 and check for an open connection at P/J95-6. If OK, replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). Approximately +11.5 is measured at P/J95-5 on the 2nd BTR HVPS during standby. Y N Go to Flag 7 BSD9.9 and check for an open connection at P/J95-5. If OK, replace the 2nd BTR HVPS (PL 9.2). Make one full-color copy. Voltage decreases from approximately +11.5 VDC to +0.03 VDC momentarily near the end of the copy cycle. Y N Go to Flag 7 BSD9.9 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). The 2nd BTR HVPS checks out OK. Check the following: 2nd BTR Roll (PL 7.10). Earth Plates (PL 7.10). Wire Harness (PL 7.10). High Voltage Lead from the IBT Assy to the 2nd BTR Roll.
IQ 40 2nd BTR HVPS RAP
1/05 3-38
IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP

This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing or out-of-range voltages.
Procedure WARNING
Failure to operate ALL the dC330 output components listed below will result in permanent damage to the photoreceptor. Enter and stack the following dC330 components in the order listed: Drum Motor [04-021]; Erase Lamp [09-050]; Charge Corotron Wire [09-070]; Charge Corotron Grid [09-81]; and 1st BTR HVPS [09-047]. Approximately +3.0 VDC is measured at P/J416A-A4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured at P/J416A-A1 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Check for an open connection at P/J416A-A1. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB PL 9.2. Approximately +3.5 VDC is measured at P/J416A-A3. Y N Check for an open connection at P/J416A-A3. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB PL 9.2. Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 BSD9.8 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the 1st BTR HVPS PL 7.6. Check for an open connection at P/J416A-A4 on the IOT Drive PWB. If OK, go to Flag 4 and check for an open circuit. If OK, the 1st BTR HVPS checks out OK. Check the following: Bias Roll (PL 7.6). Earth Plates (PL 7.7). High Voltage Lead from the HVPS to the Bias Roll. Replace the BTR HVPS if damaged (PL 7.6).
1/05 3-39
Image Quality
IQ 41 1st BTR HVPS RAP
IQ 42 DTS HVPS RAP

This RAP is used to isolate the cause of missing voltages.
IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout Procedure

This Procedure is used to isolate the cause of Paper Feed problems for which no faults are declared.
Procedure
Make one full-color copy. Approximately +3.8 VDC is measured at P/J419A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB near the end of the copy cycle. Y N +24 VDC is measured at P/J419A-11 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Check for an open connection at P/J419A-11. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Approximately +1.5 VDC is measured at P/J419A-9. Y N Check for an open connection at P/J419A-9. If OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1, Flag 2, and Flag 3 BSD9.9 and check for an open circuit. If OK, replace the DTS HVPS PL 2.14. Check for an open connection at P/J419A-7 on the IOT Drive PWB. If OK, go to Flag 4 and check for an open circuit. If OK, the DTS HVPS checks out OK. Check the following: Wire Harness (PL 7.10). Earth Plates (PL 7.10). High Voltage Lead from the HVPS to the DTS.
Initial Actions
Check for bent or damaged baffles and guides in the paper feed area. Check for loose, missing or stretched springs in the paper feed area.
Procedure
For Trays 1-4, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Replace any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (PL 2.5) Retard Roll (PL 2.6) Friction Clutch (PL 2.6) T/A Roll (PL 2.7B) T/A Feed Clutch (PL 2.7A) Pinch Rolls (PL 2.8)
For Tray 5, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Replace any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Feed Roll (PL 2.9) Retard Roll (PL 2.12) Nudger Roll (PL 2.11) Friction Clutch (PL 2.12) T/A Pinch Roll (PL 2.10) Pinch Roll (PL 2.10) Registration Guide (PL 2.13) Side Guide (PL 2.13)
Image Quality
IQ 42 DTS HVPS RAP, IQ 43 Paper Feed Checkout
1/05 3-40
IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure

This procedure is used to isolate the cause of Registration problems for which no faults are declared.
IQ 45 Wrinkle RAP
This procedure is used when the copy/print contains wrinkles or closely spaced waves.
Initial Actions
Check for bent or damaged baffles and guides in the Registration area. Check for loose, missing or stretched springs in the Registration area.
Initial Actions
NOTE: Wrinkles (or waves) occur when there is non-uniform stress in the paper while it passes though the Fuser Assembly. These stresses can be caused by the following: paper type or condition (old light-weight paper is worse), uneven oil distribution front to rear (OB to IB), differences in contact arc front to rear (OB to IB), and the type of image density (dark solid area images, especially 2-sided copies/prints are worse). Ensure that the customer is using a fresh supply of copy paper. If oil streaks are present, go to the IQ 31 Fuser Oil Streak RAP. If the problem occurs only when printing, ensure that the image density is being controlled at a maximum of 70% for each color. Rotate the original 180 degrees.
Procedure
For Trays 1-5, check the following parts for wear, slipping, damage, or contamination. Replace any parts that are questionable in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Registration Roll (PL 2.15) Pinch Roll (PL 2.15) Pinch Roll(PL 2.16) Pre Registration Roll (PL 2.16) Pre Registration Chute (PL 2.16)
Procedure
NOTE: When performing the Fuser Nip adjustment, attempt to make both rear (IB) and front (OB) values equal to each other. Perform the Fuser Nip Adjustment ADJ 8.1.1. If the problem remains, perform this adjustment again and reset the nip to the low end of the specification at both ends. If the problem still remains, perform the following actions until the problem is resolved: Check the HFSI status of the following fuser components: Heat Roll, Pressure Roll, External Heat Roll, and the Oil System (Donor Roll Assembly). Replace any item that is over threshold. Ensure that the Color Gradation Check located in the Image Quality Specification section of the Image Quality Supplement is within specification. If it is not, perform ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup. If the problem occurs when the copy paper is being fed LEF, try feeding the paper SEF. Try using fresh 24 lb Xerox COLOR Xpressions paper (NASG) or 90 gsm Colortech + paper (ESG). If the problem is resolved, recommend it to the customer. If the problem occurs only when making 2-sided copies with high solid area density images on both sides, it may be necessary to make single-sided copies to minimize or eliminate the problem. If the problem occurs only when using plain or coated light-weight paper, it is recommended that a heavier weight paper be used to minimize the problem.
1/05 3-41
Image Quality
IQ 44 Registration Checkout Procedure, IQ 45 Wrin-
IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP

This RAP is used when the copy is experiencing bead carryout (BCO) for the color black. This defect looks like mottle and is most noticeable in the high density areas. BCO is caused by low toner concentration. NOTE: Only the effect the carrier beads have on the image of the output copy/print are visible. The beads are physically trapped by the fuser web and therefore will not be observed on the copy/print.
If the problem continues, perform the following corrective action steps in order until the problem is resolved. If the density is still light, check the Toner dispense system for any blockage or obstruction that could limit the amount of Toner reaching the Developer Housing. Enter dC922 (TRC Control) from dC929 (Max Setup). Manually tone up black by setting the Tone Interval to 12. If the problem is resolved, refer to Table 1 and set NVM 775-664 to 70 and NVM 775-669 to 65. Replace the Developer Bias Brush, if damaged (REP 6.1.4) Replace the Developer Housing, if damaged (PL 6.6). Go to IQ 37 Developer Bias HVPS RAP. Table 1 NVM Settings NVM Location 773-223 773-269 775-681 775-664 775-669 775-673 775-914 775-924 NVM Value 200 160 1 65 60 100 100 100
Initial Actions
This RAP assumes IOT s/w version 6.00.2 or higher is installed. If not, go to IQ 19 Bead Carryout RAP to begin troubleshooting. Ensure that the paper presently being used is fresh 24 lb. Xerox COLOR Xpressions (NASG), or 90 GSM Colortech + (ESG) paper or paper which is included in the customers Materials Usage Guide and Recommended Paper List. Run test copies. If the copies reproduced still have Bead Carryout, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
NOTE: Ensure that 8 1/2 X 11 LEF paper is installed in Tray 2 before continuing. Enter the diagnostic mode from the UI and select MAX Setup. Select TRC Set UP/Toner Concentration Adjustment. Select TRC Control (dC922). Make a ProCon test pattern by pressing the Start button. Examine the copy for mottle-like or non-uniform (spotty) density in the highdensity patches. One of these defects is present in the 100% patch (top row) in black. Y N Go to IQ 2 Defect Listing and choose one or more of the following defects to continue troubleshooting: mottle, high image density, deletions, or spots. Select Close three times to take you back to the main menu. Select NVM Read/Write. NVM locations 773-021 through 773-028 are set to 1. Y N Select MAX Setup. Select and run ADC AGC Setup (dC934) and VH/VM Setup (dC933) in Max Setup (dC929) and investigate any system failure that is declared. NVM 773-004 is set to 1; Y N Set NVM to 1. The value in NVM location 773-121 is between 5 and 95 (this number represents the percentage of room humidity). Y N Replace the Humidity Sensor (PL 7.1). Refer to Table 1 to ensure that all the NVM settings indicated are correct. If any NVM value needs to be changed, replace the developer material (REP 6.6.2). If all NVM values are correct but it has been less than 2,000 copies since the IOT s/w 6.00.2 was installed, replace the developer material (REP 6.6.2).
Image Quality
IQ 46 Black Bead Carryout RAP
1/05 3-42
IQ 47 ATC Sensor RAP

The purpose of the Automatic Toner Concentration Sensor, ATC, is to detect toner concentrations within the color developer housings (Y, M, and C). The DC12 process controls use the input from the ATC Sensor to maintain TC in the 5-10% range (as described below) minimizing TC related defects such as BCO and Starvation. BCO or Bead Carry Out commonly occurs when the TC drops below 5%. BCO appears as mottle or white spots in high-density areas. Starvation can occur when the TC exceeds 10%. Starvation appears as a deletion at the boundary between a high and low-density area. In the DC12 (DCCS50), 65% Y, M, C ADC process control patches are periodically read by the ADC Sensor and compared to ADC Targets. If the readings are not within a specified range of the targets, the machine will tone up or down as required. The machine is constantly adjusting the ADC Targets based on input from the Humidity Sensor and ATC Sensor. The process controls attempt to maintain densities across different environments while maintaining TC in the 510% range. For Black, the machine monitors a 60% and 100% ADC patch. Since the ATC Sensor cannot measure Black TC, the 100% Black ADC patch was implemented in software 6.002 or Tag#16. The ATC Sensor consists of; ATC Sensor Assembly, wire harness (J\P 423 on the IOT Drive PWB), Plate assembly, and an assisting IOT Drive PWB. Troubleshooting the functionality of the ATC Sensor is mainly executed through NVM read and write. dC330 component control has been implemented. Appendix 1 is the set-up procedure to turn ATC Sensor on for machines with software v7.5.3. NVM 775-748 775-749 775-750 Content
Table 1 M_TC measured value failure at setup C_TC measured value failure at setup Setup failure, any of the above failures
Recovery procedure at NVM Failure Table 2 NVM Value 1 = OK 0 = NG 775-741 775-742 775-743 775-744 775-745 775-746 775-747 775-748 775-749 775-750 NG action (perform action below) 1 3, 2, 1 4, 2, 1 4, 2, 1 4, 2, 1 2 4, 2, 1 4, 2, 1 4, 2, 1 3, 2, 1
Content Dark current failure Reference plane output failure Y_TC measured value failure M_TC measured value failure C_TC measured value failure Shutter open/close failure Y_TC measured value failure at setup M_TC measured value failure at setup C_TC measured value failure at setup Setup failure (any of the above failures
SOFTWARE (NVM) REPAIRS:

1. 2. 3. The machine must have software version V6.00.2 or higher installed. Make sure NVM 775-731=1on (ATC function 0=OFF / 1=ON) Check the value of NVM 775-815 (TC set average). Software v6.2.0 has default 250 without ATC Sensor set-up. Software v6.00.x has default 0 without ATC Sensor set-up. (See Appendix 3c). The value can also be affected by the space between the ATC Sensor and the Developer Housing Mag- Roll. See Appendix 1 for re-setup instructions. After a successful set-up, NVM 775-815 should be between 150 230. Using Table 1, confirm that the following NVM values are 1. If any of the values are 0, repeat steps b) through g) of Appendix 1. After steps b) through g) are completed, refer back to Table 1 and confirm that the values are all 1. If any values are 0, refer to the recovery procedure listed for the corrective action. Table 1 NVM 775-741 775-742 775-743 775-744 775-745 775-746 775-747 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Content Dark current failure Reference plane output failure Y_TC measured value failure M_TC measured value failure C_TC measured value failure Shutter open/close failure Y_TC measured value failure at setup
Action 1: Replace the ATC Sensor and verify the connection. Action 2: Verify shutter operation. dC330 component controls 009-039 shutter operation. (See step 8). Action 3: Ensure the Sensor/reference plane is free from contamination. Action 4: Verify correct installation of the ATC Sensor Assembly. 5. Check the following NVM. 775-761 (Measurement TC Sensor Dark Current) value should be less than 200. Check 775-762 (Measurement of TC Reference Plane) value range 200 ~ 600. If NVM are not within given range, perform step 8 (dC330 component control). If NVM are not within range after dC330 (step 8), ensure the ATC Sensor and shutter is free from contamination. If problem continues perform steps b) through g) of Appendix 1. If problem continues refer to the Hardware Repairs. ADC Targets. Check the NVM and change to given value if necessary. The ADC Targets must be set to nominal values. 773-266=230; 773-267=230; 773-268=250; 773-269=160. If any of the NVM values are not set to nominal, correct values and perform steps b) through g) of Appendix 1. When ATC Sensor is installed, specified developer is noted by NVM. Machines from manufacturing should have all new color developers. If ATC Sensor was installed in field, then the developer that is replaced must be specified by NVM. Check the NVM and ensure it corresponds with specified developer. (775-737 see Appendix 1e). dC330 (Component Control) after the ATC Sensor is implemented. The following dC330 routines have been added according to the ATC Sensor implementation: 1/05 3-43 Image Quality
4.
6.
7.
8.
009-038 (ATC_LED): actuates the LED ON/OFF. 009-039 (Opening/closing of the shutter and TC measurement): Measurement of the TC: NVM 775-982 (This function requires that the desired developer housing is facing the ATC Sensor. Perform the following steps: a. b. c. Enter sub-system check on the UI and sub-system test on the PWS for machine diagnostics. Select developer unit check. For best observation, remove machine Right Upper Cover PL 11.2. Press Start (if using the UI) or move desired developer into position. Please note the ATC Sensor is opposite the development position. (UI diagnostics) Select Black, results in Yellow at ATC Sensor position. Select Magenta, results in Cyan at ATC Sensor position. Select Cyan results in Black at ATC Sensor position. Select Yellow, results in Home position. Select Home, results in Magenta at ATC Sensor position. Close developer unit check screen. The desired developer housing remains in position. Enter dC330 Component control. Enter 009-039 and press Start. (Shutter activation). Close dC330. Enter NVM read \ write. NVM 775-982 = TC reading for desired color. (Black is not detectable with ATC Sensors) Value range 140 ~ 200 for selected color. If 775-982 is out of given range, perform steps b) through h) of Appendix 1. If problem continues refer to Hardware Repairs. NVM designation TC_OUT_Hilimit2[Y] TC_OUT_Hilimit2[M] TC_OUT_Hilimit2[C] TC_OUT_Lolimit1[Y] TC_OUT_Lolimit1[M] TC_OUT_Lolimit1[C] TC_CNT_Hi2_MAX TC_CNT_Lo2_MAX TC_CYAN_OFFSET TC_RADCS_UP_STEP2 TC_RADCS_DWN_STEP2 Delta_RADCS_TC_MAX[Y] Delta_RADCS_TC_MAX[M] Delta_RADCS_TC_MAX[C] TC_PV_INT Radc_SET_Adj_MIN[K] Radc_SET_DISP_Adj_MIN[K] TC_SET_OUT_MAX[Y] TC_SET_OUT_MAX[M] Link 223 286 287 289 309 664 669 673 731 773 776 777 779 783 784 785 786 821 822 823 SET value 200 961 250 624 0 65 60 100 1 200 200 600 350 420 173 173 175 30 30 30 Chain-Link NVM No. Designation 775-731 775-736 ATC_CTRL_SW TC_Flag1 Initial Value 1 0 TC_SET_OUT_MAX[C] TC_SET_INIT
Table 3 Chain 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 Link 825 826 827 829 830 831 839 840 850 859 860 874 875 876 896 914 924 966 967 968 991 SET value 15 15 15 20 20 20 8 8 494 10 8 592 592 592 4 100 100 300 300 300 205
d. e. f. g. 9.
Check the following NVM and ensure the values are set to given value. Correct values if needed and repeat steps b) through g) of Appendix 1 Table 3
NVM designation TH2_100_PV_K K_Delta_VHS_HUM_DWN K_Delta_VMS_HUM_DWN K_Delta_BIAS_HUM_DWN K_Delta_Radc_SET_HUM_K_DWN TH1_G100(K) TH2_G100(K) Delta_RADCS_100_MAX_K ATC_CTRL_SW TC_OFFSET_OUT_TH TC_Ref_OUT_MIN TC_Ref_OUT_MAX TC_OUT_Adj_MAX TC_Ref TC_SET[Y] TC_SET[M] TC_SET[C] TC_OUT_Hilimit1[Y] TC_OUT_Hilimit1[M] TC_OUT_Hilimit1[C] Image Quality
Chain 773 773 773 773 773 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775 775
10. dC131 (NVM) after the ATC Sensor is implemented. 11.Check that the following dC131 values have been added according to the ATC Sensor implementation. NVM are noted if values are judgements or result readings to clarify some NVM are readings and may vary. Table 4 Set Range 0~65535 0~65535 Meaning ATC Control Switch 1=ON, 0=OFF Calibration Control of the ATC Sensor for M/C to M/C variation 1: Execution of the TRC CON + Diag. 0: TRC CONT + MINISET by ATC
1/05 3-44
Table 4 Chain-Link NVM No. Designation Initial Value Set Range 0~65535 Meaning Color Selection for ATC Control 1: YMC (initial value) 2: only Y, 3: only M, 4: only C, 5: only YM, 6: only YC, 7: only MC Chain-Link NVM No. Designation 775-752 Initial Value
Table 6 Set Range 0~65535 Meaning Frequency of measured TC value fail with reference plane (hidden fail) Frequency of measured TC value fail (hidden fail) [Y] Frequency of measured TC value fail (hidden fail) [M] Frequency of measured TC value fail (hidden fail) [C] Frequency of measured TC value fail with shutter open (hidden fail)
TC_Ref_OUT_Fai 0 l TC_OUT_Fail[Y] TC_OUT_Fail[M] TC_OUT_Fail[C] TC_Ref_OPEN_ OUT_Fail 0 0 0 0
775-753 775-754 775-755 775-756
0~65535 0~65535 0~65535 0~65535
ATC SENSORS RESULT JUDGMENT OF TC (OK or NG, see step 4) Table 5 Chain-Link NVM No. Designation 775-741 775-742 Initial Value Set Range 0~65535 0~65535 Meaning Judgment of TCOFFSET output (1: OK, 0:NG) Judgement of TC reference plane measurement (1: OK, 0:NG) Judgement of measured TC value (1: OK, 0:NG) [Y] Judgement of measured TC value (1: OK, 0:NG) [M] Judgement of measured TC value (1: OK, 0:NG) [C] Judgement of measured TC value with shutter open (1: OK, 0:NG) Judgement of measured TC value at Diag setup (1: OK, 0:NG) [Y] Judgement of measured TC value at Diag setup (1: OK, 0:NG) [M] Judgement of measured TC value at Diag setup (1: OK, 0:NG) [C] General judgement of ATC control (1: OK, 0:NG)
TC_OFFSET_OU 1 T_jd TC_Ref_OUT_jd 1
ATC SENSOR TC READING RESULTS. (see value range description detailed in step 8f). Table 7 Chain-Link NVM No. Designation 775-791 775-792 775-793 775-782 TC_OUT_Adj[Y] TC_OUT_Adj[M] TC_OUT_Adj[C] Initial Value 200 200 200 Set Range 140 ~ 200 140 ~ 200 140 ~ 200 140 ~ 200 Meaning TC output adjustment value [Y] TC output adjustment value [M] TC output adjustment value [C] Adjustment results of TC measured value at Diag I/O check
775-743 775-744 775-745 775-746
TC_OUT_jd[Y] TC_OUT_jd[M] TC_OUT_jd[C] TC_Ref_OPEN_ OUT_jd
1 1 1 1
0~65535 0~65535 0~65535 0~65535
775-747
TC_SET_OUT_jd 1 [Y] TC_SET_OUT_jd 1 [M] TC_SET_OUT_jd 1 [C] TC_SET_ALL_jd 1
0~65535
TC_OUT_Daig_A 0 dj
775-748
0~65535
Appendix 1. ATC set-up procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install at least one new developer. The ATC Sensor must be calibrated from new developer. Set 775-731 to 1 turns ATC Sensor on. (0 = off). Confirm NVM 773-266 through 269 are set to 230, 230, 250, 160. (ADC Targets nominal values). Set 775-736 to 1. (Value will return to 0 after executing dC922). Set 775-737 to appropriate value depending on developer material replaced for set-up. 1 = replacement of YMC 2 = replacement of Y 3 = replacement of M 4 = replacement of C 5 = replacement of YM 6 = replacement of YC 7 = replacement of MC Image Quality
775-749
0~65535
775-750
0~65535
NVM COUNTER FOR TC MEASUREMENT FAILURE. (see Appendix 3c) Table 6 Chain-Link NVM No. Designation 775-751 Initial Value Set Range 0~65535 Meaning Frequency of TCOFFSET output fail (hidden fail) 1/05 3-45
TC_OFFSET_OU 0 T_Fail
6. 7. 8.
Mix developer by executing three (3) internal test pattern #10 from the UI diagnostics or Test Pattern #99 other halftones 0% Cin (blank print) from PWS. Execute dC922 TRC Control Ignore Tone-up or down result. Check 775-741 through 750 = 1 for successful setup. See step #4 of the Software Repairs and perform action if required.
Appendix 2 Necessity of Re-Setup ATC Sensor is required to be re-setup per the Setup Procedure in Appendix 1 in the following cases. When one or more developers are replaced. When the sensor or sensor assembly is replaced (not required for simple removal of bracket). When position of the sensor installed is obviously displaced (distortion of the bracket, installation error etc).
A Enter dC330 [9-038] ATC LED. Open and close the shutter. The LED changes state. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J 423-4 and DC COM. Y N Check the IOT Drive PWB for damage and loose mounting. Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2) as required. + 5 VDC is measured between P/J 750-4 and DC COM. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open. If the wires check OK, replace the ATC Sensor Assy (PL 9.1). Inspect the LED and ensure that it is clean and free of contamination. Replace the ATC Sensor Assy (PL 9.1) as required. The circuit appears to be functional. If the problem continues, inspect the LED and ensure that it is clean and free of contamination. Replace the ATC Sensor Assy (PL 9.1) as required.
Appendix 3 1. If an ATC Sensor is installed in a machine and NOT calibrated (i.e. 775-736 is not set to 1 and dC922 is not executed) the default value for 775-815 (calibration reference) is 250(SW V6.1X) or 0(SW V6.00.X). ATC Sensor takes readings every 5th copy based on A3 or 11 x 17 inch paper. The machine maintains a running average of the last 3 readings. Installing sw 6.12 or higher to a machine WITHOUT an ATC Sensor, 775-731 MUST BE TURNED OFF TO 0 MANUALLY. If the ATC Sensor remains on, the NVM fail counter will continue to count, but poses no problem to ATC related density. When upgrading software to sw6.12 or higher (machine that has ATC Sensor turned on), value 775-815 must be transferred to current machine NVM read and write.
2. 3.
Hardware Repairs
Initial Actions Ensure that wire harness P\J500 is connected from the ATC Sensor Assembly to P/J423 the of IOT DRV PWB. Inspect the ATC Sensor Assembly for shutter damage, LED/shutter for contamination, . Make sure the assembly is installed correctly If the shutter is contaminated wipe with soft cloth.
Procedure Check function of the shutter by dC330 009-039 closes and opens the shutter, 009-038 actuates the LED on and off. The ATC shutter operates. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J278-2 and P/J278-3 on the ATC Sensor Assy. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P423-1 and P423-3 on the IOT Driver PWB. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for a short circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 9.2 and check the wires for an open circuit. Replace the ATC Sensor Assy (PL 9.1) A Image Quality
1/05 3-46

Refer to the hard copy supplement for Image Quality Specifications (701P15670).
1/05 3-47
Image Quality
Image Quality
1/05 3-48

Refer to the hard copy supplement for Image Quality Defects (701P15670).
1/05 3-49
Image Quality
Image Quality
1/05 3-50
4 Repairs & Adjustments

REPAIRS 1. DRIVE
REP 1.3.1 Belt (Developer Drive) ................................................................................... REP 1.4.1 Belt (2nd BTR, Auger) ................................................................................... REP 1.5.1 Tray 5/Regi. /Tray 1 Take Away Drive........................................................... REP 1.6.1 Exit Drive ....................................................................................................... REP 1.6.2 Fuser Drive .................................................................................................... REP 1.6.3 Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly ...................................................................... 4-3 4-5 4-8 4-9 4-11 4-13 4-17 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-24 4-24 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-32 4-33 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-45 4-47 4-48 4-48 4-49 4-51 4-52 4-54 REP 3.3.1 Carriage Cables ............................................................................................. REP 3.3.2 Carriage Motor ............................................................................................... REP 3.4.1 Exposure Lamp.............................................................................................. REP 3.4.2 Lamp Wire Harness ....................................................................................... REP 3.5.1 IPS Chassis ................................................................................................... 4-55 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-65 4-67 4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-71 4-73 4-74 4-77 4-78 4-79 4-82 4-83 4-84 4-85 4-86 4-87 4-89 4-92 4-96 4-99 4-101 4-102 4-104 4-106 4-108 4-109 4-109 4-111 4-115 4-116 4-117 4-120
4. ROS
REP 4.1.1 ROS ...............................................................................................................
5. XEROGRAPHICS
REP 5.1.1 Erase Lamp.................................................................................................... REP 5.3.1 Drum Unit....................................................................................................... REP 5.3.3 Cleaning Brush .............................................................................................. REP 5.3.4 Cleaning Blade............................................................................................... REP 5.4.1 Charge Corotron ............................................................................................ REP 5.4.2 PCC Wire ....................................................................................................... REP 5.5.1 Waste Toner Auger........................................................................................ REP 5.5.2 Auger Belt ......................................................................................................
2. PAPER TRANSPORT
REP 2.1.1 Tray 1 Set Sensor.......................................................................................... REP 2.1.2 Tray 2/3/4 Size Sensor .................................................................................. REP 2.4.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feeder ....................................................................................... REP 2.5.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly ...................................................... REP 2.6.1 Feed Lift Motor............................................................................................... REP 2.6.2 Retard Roll..................................................................................................... REP 2.7.1 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive ............................................................................. REP 2.7.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed T/A Clutch............................................................................ REP 2.7.3 T/A Motor ....................................................................................................... REP 2.8.1 Tray 1 Feed-out Sensor, T/A Sensor............................................................. REP 2.8.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed-out Sensor........................................................................... REP 2.9.1 Tray 5............................................................................................................. REP 2.11.1 Tray 5 Nudger Roll....................................................................................... REP 2.11.2 Tray 5 Feed Roll .......................................................................................... REP 2.12.1 Tray 5 Lift Motor........................................................................................... REP 2.12.2 Tray 5 Retard Roll........................................................................................ REP 2.14.1 Regi. Unit ..................................................................................................... REP 2.15.1 Regi. Sensor ................................................................................................ REP 2.15.2 Regi. Roll ..................................................................................................... REP 2.15.3 Regi. Motor .................................................................................................. REP 2.16.1 Pre Regi. Sensor ......................................................................................... REP 2.16.2 Pre Regi. Roll............................................................................................... REP 2.17.1 Vacuum Transport ....................................................................................... REP 2.17.2 Vacuum Transport Belt ................................................................................ REP 2.21.1 Duplex Path Sensor ..................................................................................... REP 2.21.2 Duplex Out Sensor ...................................................................................... REP 2.21.3 Duplex Belt 1/2 ............................................................................................ REP 2.23.1 Inverter 1...................................................................................................... REP 2.23.2 Inverter 2...................................................................................................... REP 2.24.1 Inverter Motor .............................................................................................. REP 2.24.2 Release Solenoid......................................................................................... REP 2.26.1 Exit Roll........................................................................................................
6. DEVELOPMENT
REP 6.1.1 Rotary PWB ................................................................................................... REP 6.1.2 Rotary Home Position Sensor........................................................................ REP 6.1.3 Rotary Latch Lever......................................................................................... REP 6.1.4 Bias Brush...................................................................................................... REP 6.2.1 Toner Cartridge Unit ...................................................................................... REP 6.3.1 Toner Cartridge Housing (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) ............................ REP 6.3.2 Cartridge/Dispense Motor (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)........................... REP 6.4.1 Dispense PWB............................................................................................... REP 6.6.1 Development Housing.................................................................................... REP 6.6.2 Developer Replacement ................................................................................ REP 6.7.1 Rotary Auger (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)............................................... REP 6.7.2 Trickle Auger..................................................................................................
7. IBT
REP 7.1.1 IBT ................................................................................................................. REP 7.1.2 IBT Cleaner.................................................................................................... REP 7.5.1 IBT Belt .......................................................................................................... REP 7.6.1 Bias Roll......................................................................................................... REP 7.6.2 Drive Roll ....................................................................................................... REP 7.6.3 Back-up Roll................................................................................................... REP 7.6.4 Contact Roll ................................................................................................... REP 7.9.1 2nd BTR......................................................................................................... REP 7.10.1 2nd BTR Roll................................................................................................
3. IIT
REP 3.1.1 Platen Glass .................................................................................................. REP 3.1.2 IIT Opening/Closing ....................................................................................... REP 3.2.1 CCD PWB ...................................................................................................... Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
8. FUSER
REP 8.1.1 Fuser Unit ...................................................................................................... REP 8.2.1 Donor Roll Assembly ..................................................................................... REP 8.3.1 Heat Roll ........................................................................................................ REP 8.3.2 Heat Roll Heater Rod..................................................................................... 1/05 4-1
Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.3.3 Pressure Roll ................................................................................................. REP 8.3.4 Pressure Roll Heater Rod.............................................................................. REP 8.3.5 Heat Roll Stripper Finger ............................................................................... REP 8.4.1 Web Motor/EXT-HR Retract Motor ................................................................ REP 8.7.1 Oil Pump ........................................................................................................ REP 8.7.2 Oil Wick.......................................................................................................... REP 8.8.1 External H/R Heater Rod ............................................................................... REP 8.8.2 External Heat Roll.......................................................................................... REP 8.10.1 Pressure Roll Stripper Finger ......................................................................
4-122 4-125 4-127 4-128 4-131 4-132 4-133 4-136 4-137 4-139 4-139 4-141 4-143 4-145 4-146 4-148 4-149 4-151 4-152 4-153 4-155 4-156 4-156 4-158 4-159 4-160 4-161 4-162 4-163 4-164 4-165 4-166 4-167 4-168 4-170 4-172 4-173 4-175 4-176 4-177 4-179 4-180 4-182
REP 13.14.1 Decurler Stepping Motor ............................................................................
4-184 4-185 4-187 4-188 4-188
14. OCT
REP 14.1.1 Offset Motor .................................................................................................
19. IDFE
REP 19.1 Removing the IDFE......................................................................................... REP 19.2 Token Ring PWB (IDFE)................................................................................. REP 19.3 DIMMs on the Motherboard (IDFE).................................................................
9. ELECTRICAL
REP 9.2.1 Opening/Closing the IOT Control PWB Chassis............................................ REP 9.2.2 IOT Drive PWB .............................................................................................. REP 9.2.3 Half Tone PWB .............................................................................................. REP 9.3.1 Power Chassis............................................................................................... REP 9.3.2 IOT LVPS....................................................................................................... REP 9.3.3 B3/B3H (ESS) LVPS...................................................................................... REP 9.5.1 Control Panel ................................................................................................. REP 9.6 Billing Data PWB Replacement ........................................................................
ADJUSTMENTS 3. IIT
ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position............................................................ 4-189 4-193 4-193 4-197 4-197 4-199 4-199 4-200 4-200 4-201 4-201 4-202 4-203 4-203 4-207 4-208 4-209 4-211 4-212 4-213 4-215 4-216 4-217 4-218 4-221
6. DEVELOPMENT
ADJ 6.1.1 Rotary Home Position Sensor ........................................................................ ADJ 6.6.1 Rotary Development Housing Position...........................................................
8. FUSER
ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip (DC701) ......................................................................................... ADJ 8.8.1 External Heat Roll Nip Adjustment .................................................................
10. AIR SYSTEM

REP 10.2.1 Fuser Fan .................................................................................................... REP 10.2.2 Suction Blower Motor...................................................................................
9. ELECTRICAL
ADJ 9.1.1 MAX SET UP (dC929).................................................................................... ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945) ................................................................................... ADJ 9.1.3 ADC AGC Setup (dC934)............................................................................... ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM Setup (dC933).................................................................................... ADJ 9.1.5 IOT Highlight Setup (dC918) .......................................................................... ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density (dC922) .............................................................. ADJ 9.1.7 TRC Adjust (dC924)/TRC Check PG (dC939) ............................................... ADJ 9.1.8 Color Balance Setup (dC919: Copier/Printer) ................................................ ADJ 9.1.10 IOT Registration Series (dC129) .................................................................. ADJ 9.1.14 IIT Lead Edge Registration........................................................................... ADJ 9.1.15 IIT Side Edge Registration............................................................................ ADJ 9.1.16 IIT Horizontal Magnification/Vertical Magnification (IIT Machine)................. ADJ 9.1.17 Tray 5 Guide (dC740)................................................................................... ADJ 9.1.18 Touch Panel Starting Point Correction ......................................................... ADJ 9.1.19 Tray 2, 3, and 4 for 12 x 18 Paper................................................................
11. COVER
REP 11.1.1 Platen Cushion ............................................................................................
12. DADF
REP 12.1.1 DADF ........................................................................................................... REP 12.2.2 Registration Gate Solenoid.......................................................................... REP 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance.......................................................................... REP 12.3.2 DADF Control PWB ..................................................................................... REP 12.4.1 Feed Motor .................................................................................................. REP 12.4.2 Nudger Roll.................................................................................................. REP 12.4.3 Feed Roll ..................................................................................................... REP 12.5.1 Document Feed Lower Chute ...................................................................... REP 12.5.2 Retard Roll................................................................................................... REP 12.5.3 Set Gate Solenoid........................................................................................ REP 12.5.4 Registration Sensor ..................................................................................... REP 12.5.5 Size Sensors 1/2 (Rear/Front) ..................................................................... REP 12.6.1 DADF Belt Motor.......................................................................................... REP 12.7.1 Duplex Sensor ............................................................................................. REP 12.8.1 Registration Pinch Roll ................................................................................ REP 12.9.1 Exit Motor..................................................................................................... REP 12.10.1 Platen Belt .................................................................................................
12. DADF
ADJ 12.1.1 DADF Side Registration ............................................................................... ADJ 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance .......................................................................... ADJ 12.3.2 DADF Parallelism ......................................................................................... ADJ 12.3.3 DADF Height ................................................................................................ ADJ 12.4.1 DADF Lead Edge Registration .....................................................................
13. MAIL BOX SORTER

REP 13.3.1 Decurler ....................................................................................................... REP 13.5.1 Vertical LED/Sensor .................................................................................... REP 13.5.2 Bin Tray 1 .................................................................................................... REP 13.6.1 Bin Trays 2 - 10 ........................................................................................... REP 13.13.1 Decurler Rolls 1/2 ...................................................................................... REP 13.13.2 Gear and Cam ........................................................................................... Repairs and Adjustments
1/05 4-2
REP 1.3.1 Belt (Developer Drive)

Parts List on PL 1.3 Removal WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3). Remove the Toner Waste Bottle. Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1). Remove the flywheel and flange (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Flywheel. 3. Loosen the screws (2). 4. Remove the flange.
3. Remove the main motor.
Figure 2 Removing the Main Motor 7. Remove the Main Motor Bracket (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (7). 2. Remove the bracket.
Figure 1 Removing the Flywheel 5. 6. Remove the Waste Toner Auger (REP 5.5.1). Remove the Main Motor (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connectors (2). 2. Remove the screws (4).
1/05 4-3
REP 1.3.1
Figure 3 Removing the Main Motor Bracket 8. Remove the Rotary Developer Duct (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the VSEL rear bracket. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the Rotary Developer Duct.
Figure 4 Removing the Rotary Developer Duct 9. Remove the belt (Figure 5). 1. Remove the spring. 2. Loosen the screw. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the bracket. 5. Remove the belt.
REP 1.3.1
1/05 4-4
REP 1.4.1 Belt (2nd BTR, Auger)

Turn the power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7) Remove the Toner Waste Bottle. Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1). Remove the Flywheel and flange (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Flywheel. 3. Loosen the screws (2). 4. Remove the flange.
Figure 5 Removing the Belt
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Figure 1 Removing the Waster Toner Auger 5. 6. Remove the Waster Toner Auger (REP 5.5.1). Remove the Main Motor (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connectors (2). 2. Remove the screws (4).
1/05 4-5
REP 1.3.1, REP 1.4.1
Remove the Main Motor.
Figure 3 Removing the Main Motor Bracket Figure 2 Removing the Main Motor 7. Remove the Main Motor Bracket (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (7). 2. Remove the bracket. 8. Remove the Auger Drive (Figure 4). 1. Disconnect the connectors (2). 2. Remove the E-clip. 3. Remove the gear. 4. Remove the screws (3). 5. Remove the Auger Drive. 6. Disconnect the connector. 7. Remove the bearing.
REP 1.4.1
1/05 4-6
Figure 4 Removing the Auger Drive 9. Remove the belt (Figure 5). 1. Loosen the screws (2) and the belt tension. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the gear pulley. 4. Remove the gear pulley. 5. Remove the belt.
Figure 5 Removing the Belt
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-7
REP 1.4.1
REP 1.5.1 Tray 5/Regi. /Tray 1 Take Away Drive

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7) Remove the Left Upper Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 2) Remove the Tray 5/Regi. and Tray 1 Take Away Drive (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the bracket. 3. Release the clamp and remove the harness. 4. Disconnect the connectors (2). 5. Remove the screws (3). 6. Remove the drive.
Figure 1 Removing the Drives
Installation
REP 1.5.1
1/05 4-8
REP 1.6.1 Exit Drive

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7) Remove the Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2 Item 4) Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1). Move the wire harness (Figure 1). 1. Release the clamps (2). 2. Move the harness. 3. Remove the clamp.
Figure 1 Moving the Harness 5. Remove the duct (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the duct.
1/05 4-9
REP 1.6.1
Figure 2 Removing the Duct 6. Remove the Exit Drive (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Motor Cover. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the screws (4). 5. Remove the motor. 6. Remove the screws (3). 7. Remove the Exit Drive. Figure 3 Removing the Exit Drive
Installation
REP 1.6.1
1/05 4-10
REP 1.6.2 Fuser Drive

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following covers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7) Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 11) Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2 Item 4)
Pull out Tray 1. Remove the Auger Sensor and the 2nd BTR HVPS (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the sensor. 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Pull out the connector. 6. Remove the screws (3) 7. Remove the 2nd BTR HVPS.
Figure 1 Removing the Auger Sensor 6. Remove the duct (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Release the hook and remove the duct.
1/05 4-11
REP 1.6.2
Figure 2 Removing the Duct 7. Remove the Filter Case (Figure 3). 1. Remove the filter. 2. Remove the duct. 3. Remove the screws (3). 4. Remove the Filter Case.
Figure 3 Removing the Filter Case 8. Remove the Fuser Drive (Figure 4). 1. Disconnect the connector (2). 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove the Fuser Drive.
REP 1.6.2
1/05 4-12
REP 1.6.3 Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly

Parts List on PL 1.6 Removal
1. 2. Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. Remove the following covers: 3. IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7) Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 11) Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2 Item 4) 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Release the hook and remove the duct.
Remove the duct (Figure 2).
Figure 4 Removing the Fuser Drive
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. 4. 1. Remove the filter.
Figure 1 Removing the Duct Remove the Filter Case (PL 10.2 Item 3) (Figure 2). 2. Remove the duct by lifting up and out of the Filter Case. 3. Remove the screws (3). 4. Remove the Filter Case.
1/05 4-13
REP 1.6.2, REP 1.6.3
Figure 3 Removing the Duct 7. 8. Remove Inverter 2 (REP 2.23.2). Remove Inverter 1 (REP 2.23.1). NOTE: Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly is mounted on the rear frame at the top of the inverter opening 9. Remove the Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly (Figure 4 and Figure 5).
Figure 2 Removing the Filter Case 5. 6. Lower the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1). Remove the Filter Duct (PL 10.2 Item 2) (Figure 3) 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the duct.
REP 1.6.3
1/05 4-14
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly is seated correctly. If assembly is not in the correct position, the K-clips cannot be installed. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1
Remove screws (2) from bracket (inside of machine)
Figure 4 Removing the Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly - Inside of Machine
3
Unplug Clutch, release harness clamps (2)
1
Remove Screw
2
Remove K-clips (2)
Figure 5 Removing the Nip Clutch - Rear Frame of Machine
1/05 4-15
REP 1.6.3
REP 1.6.3
1/05 4-16
REP 2.1.1 Tray 1 Set Sensor

Turn the power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove trays 1 and 2 to allow easy access (PL 2.1 Item 4). Remove the Tray 1 Set Sensor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the Tray 1 Sensor.
REP 2.1.2 Tray 2/3/4 Size Sensor

NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 2 Sensor.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove Trays 1 through 4 to allow easy access (PL 2.1 Item 4). Remove the Tray 2 Size Sensor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the Tray 2 Size Sensor.
Figure 1 Removing the Tray 1 Set Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing the Tray 2 Size Sensor
Installation
1/05 4-17
REP 2.1.1, REP 2.1.2
REP 2.4.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feeder

NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1 Feeder. NOTE: If the Feeder Assembly must be replaced, make sure to reset the HFSI counter. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tray 1: DC135(008-801) Tray 2: DC135(008-802) Tray 3: DC135(008-803) Tray 4: DC135(008-804)
4.
Remove the Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the KL-clip. NOTE: The KL-clip exists only in trays 2/3/4. (Tray 1 does not have a KL-clip.) 3. Remove the stud. 4. Remove the Tray 1 Feeder.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Left Lower Cover. Pull out Tray 1. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 1 Feeder
Installation
Figure 1 Pulling out the Tray 1 Feeder
REP 2.4.1
1/05 4-18
REP 2.5.1 Tray 1/2/3/4 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly

NOTE: Replace the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly and the Retard Roll at the same time. NOTE: After replacing the Feed Nudger Roll Assembly, reset the HFSI counter. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tray 1: DC135(008-801) Tray 2: DC135(008-802) Tray 3: DC135(008-803) Tray 4: DC135(008-804)
4.
Remove the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (Figure 2). 1. Push the pins on both sides. 2. Remove the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly.
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1 Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Pull out Tray 1. Open the Left Lower Cover. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder.
Figure 2 Removing the Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly
Installation
Figure 1 Pulling out the Tray 1 Feeder Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 4-19 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 2.5.1
REP 2.6.1 Feed Lift Motor

NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1Feed Lift Motor.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder (REP 2.4.1). Remove the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (4). 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the E-clip and bearings. 4. Remove the bracket.
Figure 2 Removing the Feed Lift Motor
Installation
NOTE: Do not mistake the solenoid mounting screw for the bracket mounting screw. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Removing the Bracket 3. Remove the Feed Lift Motor (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Feed Lift Motor. 3. Disconnect the connector.
REP 2.6.1
1/05 4-20
REP 2.6.2 Retard Roll

NOTE: Replace the Retard Roll and Feed/Nudger Assembly at the same time. NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, reset the HFSI counter. 1. 2. 3. 4. Tray 1: DC135 (008-801) Tray 2: DC135 (008-802) Tray 3: DC135 (008-803) Tray 4: DC135 (008-804)
4.
Remove the Tray 1 Retard Roll (Figure 2). 1. Push in the pins on both sides. 2. Remove the Retard Roll.
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 1 Retard Roll.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Pull out Tray 1. Open the Left Lower Cover. Pull out Tray 1 Feeder (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Pull out the Tray 1 Feeder.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 1 Retard Roll
Installation
Figure 1 Pulling out the Tray 1 Feeder Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 4-21 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 2.6.2
REP 2.7.1 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive

Parts List on PL 2.7B Removal WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. IOT LVPS (REP 9.3.2). LVPS bracket (PL 9.3 Item 4) 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (4). 3. Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive.
REP 2.7.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed T/A Clutch

Parts List on PL 2.7A Removal
NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (REP 2.7.1). Disconnect the connector (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the wire from the saddle edge.
Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Disconnecting the connector Figure 1 Removing the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive 3. Remove the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch (Figure 2). 1. Remove the E-clip. 2. Remove the gear. 3. Remove the bearing. 4. Remove the shaft. (Push the release button on the clutch.) 5. Remove the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch.
Installation
REP 2.7.1, REP 2.7.2
1/05 4-22
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 2 Feed T/A Clutch
Figure 3 Reassembly
Installation
NOTE: When you reinstall the parts, make sure to insert the bracket stopper into the clutch tab (Figure 3). 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-23
REP 2.7.2
REP 2.7.3 T/A Motor

Parts List on PL 2.7A Removal WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (REP 2.7.1). Remove the T/A Motor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the T/A Motor.
REP 2.8.1 Tray 1 Feed-out Sensor, T/A Sensor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open the Left Lower Cover. Move the baffle in the direction shown and remove it (Figure 1). 1. Remove the baffle. 2. Remove the springs (2).
Figure 1 Removing the Baffle Figure 1 Removing the T/A Motor 3. Move the sensor with the bracket (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the bracket.
Installation
REP 2.7.3, REP 2.8.1
1/05 4-24
Figure 2 Moving the Sensor 4. Remove the Tray 1 Feedout Sensor and T/A Sensor (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the sensors (2).
Figure 3 Removing the Tray 1 Feedout Sensor and T/A Sensor
Installation
1/05 4-25
REP 2.8.1
REP 2.8.2 Tray 2/3/4 Feed-out Sensor

NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open the Left Lower Cover. Move the baffle in the direction shown and remove it (Figure 1). 1. Remove the baffle. 2. Remove the springs (2).
Figure 2 Removing the Bracket 4. Remove the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor (Figure 3). 1. Remove the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor.
Figure 1 Removing the Baffle 3. Remove the sensor (the whole bracket) (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the bracket.
REP 2.8.2
1/05 4-26
REP 2.9.1 Tray 5

NOTE: After replacing Tray 5, clear the HFSI counter [08-810].
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove Tray 5 (Figure 1). 1. Move Left Middle Cover downward. 2. Pull the hooks (2) outward. 3. Lift Tray 5 and remove it.
Figure 3 Removing the Tray 2 Feed-out Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing Tray 5
Installation
1/05 4-27
REP 2.8.2, REP 2.9.1
REP 2.11.1 Tray 5 Nudger Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Nudger Roll, clear the HFSI counter [08-810]. NOTE: Replace the Tray 5 Nudger, Feed and Retard Rolls at the same time.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Open the Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1). 1. Pull the lever up and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 5 Nudger Roll
Installation
Figure 1 Opening the Tray 5 Assembly 2. Remove the Tray 5 Nudger Roll (Figure 2). 1. Remove the KL-clip. 2. Push in the plunger. 3. Remove the Nudger Roll.
REP 2.11.1
1/05 4-28
REP 2.11.2 Tray 5 Feed Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Feed Roll, clear the HFSI counter. DC135(008-810) Diag. Screen NOTE: Replace the Tray 5 Feed, Nudger and Retard Rolls at the same time.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1). 1. Pull the lever up and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 5 Feed Roll
Installation
Figure 1 Opening the Upper Tray 5 Assembly 2. Remove the Tray 5 Feed Roll (Figure 2). 1. Remove the chute. 2. Remove the collar. 3. Remove the Feed Roll.
1/05 4-29
REP 2.11.2
REP 2.12.1 Tray 5 Lift Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1), or for ease of access, remove the Tray 5 Assembly from the machine (REP 2.9.1). 1. Pull up the lever and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Disconnecting the connector 3. Remove the bracket (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the bracket.
Figure 1 Opening the Upper Tray 5 Assembly 2. Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 1. Pull outward to extend the tray, then pivot the tray up. 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove the lower cover. 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the wire from the hooks (3).
REP 2.12.1
1/05 4-30
Figure 3 Removing the Bracket 4. Remove the Tray 5 Lift Motor (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the switch bracket. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the Tray 5 Lift Motor.
Figure 4 Removing the Tray 5 Lift Motor
Installation
1/05 4-31
REP 2.12.1
REP 2.12.2 Tray 5 Retard Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, clear the HFSI counter. DC135(008-810) Diag.Screen NOTE: Replace the Tray 5 Retard, nudger and feed rolls at the same time.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Open the upper Tray 5 Assembly (Figure 1). 1. Pull up the lever and open the Upper Tray 5 Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Tray 5 Retard Roll
Figure 1 Opening the Upper Tray 5 Assembly 2. Remove the Tray 5 Retard Roll (Figure 2). 1. Remove the Tray 5 Retard Roll. 2. Remove the collars (2). 3. Remove the shaft.
REP 2.12.2
1/05 4-32
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Tray 5 Retard Roll, make sure that the marking is at the rear (Figure 3).
REP 2.14.1 Regi. Unit

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Push the lever down and pull out the drawer assembly. Pull the drawer assembly out to a maintenance position. (Figure 1) 1. Push the stoppers on both sides. 2. Pull out the drawer assembly.
Figure 3 Reassembly 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Opening the Drawer 4. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. d. 5. Drawer Cover (PL 2.18) Knob (PL 2.22 Item 9) Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1 Item 5) Cartridge Guide (PL 8.1 Item 4) 1. Remove the screws (2).
Remove the ground wire (Figure 2).
1/05 4-33
REP 2.12.2, REP 2.14.1
2. Remove the plate. 3. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 4. Remove the screw. 5. Pull out the ground wire from the hole.
Figure 3 Removing the Regi. Unit
Installation
Figure 2 Removing the Ground Wire 6. Remove the Regi. Unit. (Figure 3) 1. Disconnect the connectors (2). 2. Remove the Regi. Unit.
REP 2.14.1
1/05 4-34
REP 2.15.1 Regi. Sensor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Push the lever down and pull out the drawer assembly. Pull the drawer assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1). 1. Push the stoppers on both sides. 2. Pull out the drawer assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Regi. Cover 5. Remove the Regi. Sensor (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the Regi.Sensor.
Figure 1 Opening the Drawer 4. Remove the Regi. Cover (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove the Regi. Cover.
1/05 4-35
REP 2.15.1
REP 2.15.2 Regi. Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1). Remove the Regi. Roll (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the gear. 3. Remove the E-clip. 4. Move the bearings (2). 5. Remove the Regi. Roll.
Figure 3 Removing the Regi. Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing the Regi. Roll
Installation
REP 2.15.1, REP 2.15.2
1/05 4-36
REP 2.15.3 Regi. Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1). Remove the Regi. Motor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 3. Remove the wire from the edge saddle. 4. Remove the screws (2). 5. Remove the Regi. Motor.
Figure 1 Removing the Regi. Motor
Installation
1/05 4-37
REP 2.15.3
REP 2.16.1 Pre Regi. Sensor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1). Remove the Pre-Regi. Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the bracket. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the wire from the edge saddle.
REP 2.16.2 Pre Regi. Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1). Lower the chute (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the coupling. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Lower the chute.
Figure 1 Removing the Pre-Regi. Sensor
Figure 1 Lowering the Chute 4. Remove the Pre-Regi. Roll (Figure 2). 1. Remove the E-clip. 2. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow. 3. Remove the Pre-Regi. Roll.
Installation
REP 2.16.1, REP 2.16.2
1/05 4-38
REP 2.17.1 Vacuum Transport

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Push the lever down and pull out the drawer assembly. Pull the drawer assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1). 1. Push the stoppers on both sides. 2. Pull out the Drawer Assembly.
Figure 2 Removing the Pre-Regi. Roll
Installation
Figure 1 Opening the Drawer 4. Remove the Vacuum Transport (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove the Vacuum Transport.
1/05 4-39
REP 2.16.2, REP 2.17.1
REP 2.17.2 Vacuum Transport Belt

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Vacuum Transport (REP 2.17.1). Release the hook from the duct (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Vacuum Transport
Installation
Figure 1 Releasing the Hook 4. Remove the Vacuum Transport Belt (Figure 2). 1. Remove the Idler Roll. 2. Remove the Vacuum Transport Belt.
REP 2.17.1, REP 2.17.2
1/05 4-40
REP 2.21.1 Duplex Path Sensor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Vacuum Transport (REP 2.17.1). Remove the Duplex Path Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the bracket.
Figure 2 Removing the Vacuum Transport Belt
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Vacuum Transport Belt, make sure the shiny side is inside. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Removing the Bracket 4. Remove the Duplex Path Sensor from the sensor bracket (Figure 2). 1. Remove the Duplex Path Sensor.
1/05 4-41
REP 2.17.2, REP 2.21.1
REP 2.21.2 Duplex Out Sensor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Regi. Unit (REP 2.14.1). Remove the Duplex Out Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 4. Remove the bracket.
Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Path Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing the Bracket 4. Remove the Duplex Out Sensor from the sensor bracket (Figure 2). 1. Remove the Duplex Out Sensor.
REP 2.21.1, REP 2.21.2
1/05 4-42
REP 2.21.3 Duplex Belt 1/2

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open the Front Door. Remove the following parts: a. b. 3. 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1). Vacuum Transport Unit (REP 2.17.1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the bracket.
Remove the bracket (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Duplex Out Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing the Bracket 4. Remove the joint (Figure 2). 1. Remove the E-clips (2). 2. Remove the pulley. 3. Remove the bearing and shaft. 4. Remove the bearing. 5. Remove the joint. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Repairs and Adjustments
1/05 4-43
REP 2.21.2, REP 2.21.3
Figure 2 Removing the Joint 5. Remove the Duplex Belt 1 (Figure 3). 1. Remove the E-clips (2). 2. Move the bearings (2) in the direction of the arrow. 3. Remove the Aligner Rolls 2/3. 4. Remove the Duplex Belt 1. 6.
Figure 3 Removing the Duplex Belt 1 Remove the Duplex Belt 2 (Figure 4). 1. Remove the E-clip. 2. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow. 3. Remove the Aligner Roll 1. 4. Remove the Duplex Belt 2.
REP 2.21.3
1/05 4-44
REP 2.23.1 Inverter 1

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1) Open the Inverter 2. Remove the Inverter Cover (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Lift the Inverter Cover and remove it.
Figure 4 Removing the Duplex Belt 2 7. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Removing the Inverter Cover 4. 5. Pull out the Drawer Assembly. Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 1. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 2. Disconnect the connectors (2).
1/05 4-45
REP 2.21.3, REP 2.23.1
Figure 2 Disconnecting the connector 6. Remove the Inverter 1 (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (5). 2. Lift the Inverter 1 and remove it.
Figure 3 Removing the Inverter 1
Installation
REP 2.23.1
1/05 4-46
REP 2.23.2 Inverter 2

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. 3. Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1) Exit Tray (PL 2.23 Item 11)
Open the Inverter 2. Remove the Inverter Cover (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Lift the Inverter Cover and remove it.
Figure 2 Removing the Inverter 2 NOTE: Ensure that the 5 tabs on the cover correctly latch into the Inverter before tightening the mounting screws. 5. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Removing the Inverter Cover 4. Remove the Inverter 2 (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 3. Remove the Inverter 2.
1/05 4-47
REP 2.23.2
REP 2.24.1 Inverter Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Inverter 1 (REP 2.23.1). Remove the Inverter Motor (Figure 1). 1. Release the clamps (3) and remove the wire. 2. Remove the cable tie. 3. Remove the screws (3). 4. Remove the Inverter Motor.
REP 2.24.2 Release Solenoid

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Inverter 1 (REP 2.23.1). Remove the Release Solenoid (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Cut off the cable tie. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the Release Solenoid.
Figure 1 Removing the Inverter Motor
Figure 1 Removing the Release Solenoid
Installation
Installation
REP 2.24.1, REP 2.24.2
1/05 4-48
REP 2.26.1 Exit Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Inverter 2 (REP 2.23.2). Remove the Exit Roll (Figure 1). 1. Raise the chute. 2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the E-clip. 4. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow. 5. Remove the Exit Roll. 6. Remove the bearing.
Figure 1 Removing the Exit Roll
Installation
1/05 4-49
REP 2.26.1
REP 2.26.1
1/05 4-50
REP 3.1.1 Platen Glass

CAUTION Ensure that Tag 8, IIT Support Weld Brace Kit, is installed before the following removal procedure is performed.
Installation
NOTE: Press the Platen Glass in the direction of arrow A; Press the Right Side Plate in the direction of arrow B (Figure 2).
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open the Platen Cover. Remove the Platen Glass (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Right Side Plate. 3. Remove the Platen Glass.
Figure 2 Reassembly
Figure 1 Remove the Platen Glass
1/05 4-51
REP 3.1.1
REP 3.1.2 IIT Opening/Closing

CAUTION Ensure that Tag 8, IIT Support Weld Brace Kit, is installed before the following removal procedure is performed.
1. Disconnect the connectors (2). 2. Remove screw
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: Remove the DADF if the unit is so equipped. (REP 12.1.1). 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. 3. IIT Left Cover (PL 11.3 Item 16) Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1)
Slide the Control Panel toward the front (see Figure 1 of REP 9.5.1). Remove the stopper (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the stoppers (2)
Figure 2 Disconnecting the connectors 5. Open the IIT (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Open the IIT 3. Insert the brace into the hole. 4. Lock the screw removed in step 5.1.
Figure 1 Removing the Stoppers 4. Disconnect the connectors (Figure 2). 1/05 4-52 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
REP 3.1.2
Installation
NOTE: When the stopper is installed, set it by pressing it toward the arrow. (Figure 4)
Figure 3 Opening the IIT
1/05 4-53
REP 3.1.2
REP 3.2.1 CCD PWB

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Platen Cover. Remove the Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1). Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1). Remove the Lens Cover (PL 3.2 Item 11). Remove the Cable Stoppers (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws, two per stopper (4 total). 2. Remove the Cable Stoppers (2).
Figure 2 Disconnecting the Connector 7. Remove the CCD PWB (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the CCD PWB.
Figure 1 Removing the Cable Stoppers 6. Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the connector. 3. Disconnect the connector.
REP 3.2.1
1/05 4-54
REP 3.3.1 Carriage Cables

NOTE: This page describes how to remove the Rear Carriage Cable.
WARNING
Turn power off disconnect the power plug. NOTE: Do not replace both cables at the same time. Remove the front and rear cables separately. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Platen Cover or DADF (REP 12.1.1). Remove the Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1). Platen machines: Remove the Blind Cover (PL 11.1 Item 7). Remove the Top Cover (PL 11.1 Item 1). Platen machines: Remove the Registration Guide (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Registration Guide.
Figure 3 Removing the CCD PWB
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the two locating holes line up with the semi-perf locating pin. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Removing the Registration Guide 6. DADF machines: Remove the registration gate and plate (Figure 2).
1/05 4-55
REP 3.2.1, REP 3.3.1
1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Registration Gate. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the plate.
Figure 3 Positioning the Half Rate Carriage 9. Figure 2 Removing the Registration Gate and Plate 7. 8. Remove the Full Rate Carriage from the IIT Frame (REP 3.4.2). Keep the lamp wire harness connector connected. Move the Half Rate Carriage so that the position of the Carriage Cable Ball on the Capstan is one of the following: (Figure 3) 1. Two Carriage Cable Rolls in front and rear. 2. The Carriage Cable Ball is directly above. Remove the Carriage Cable (Figure 4). 1. Remove the spring. 2. Separate the spring and the cable. 3. Pull out the ball from the hole. 4. Remove the cable.
REP 3.3.1
1/05 4-56
Figure 4 Removing the Carriage Cable
Figure 5 Winding the Carriage Cable 2. Wind the cable (spring hook side) onto the pulley for 2.5 turns (Figure 6). 3. Tape and lock the cable (on the spring hook) on the frame (Figure 6).
Installation
1. Wind the Carriage Cable into the pulley (Figure 5). 1. Insert the Carriage Cable Ball into the groove of the pulley.
1/05 4-57
REP 3.3.1
Figure 6 Locking the Cable 4. Wind the cable (ball side) onto the pulley for 2.4 turns (Figure 7). 5. Tape and lock the cable wound on the pulley (Figure 7).
Figure 7 Locking the Cable 6. The following figure shows the number of carriage cable windings (front/rear) (Figure 8).
REP 3.3.1
1/05 4-58
Figure 9 Installing the Carriage Cable (ball side) 3. Install the Carriage Cable (spring hook side) (Figure 10). 1. Hook the cable to the pulley (from bottom to top). 2. Hook the cable to the small pulley in the Half Rate Carriage (from bottom to top). 3. Hook the cable to the stud (from bottom to top). 4. Install the spring on the cable (spring hook side). 5. Hook the spring onto the frame.
Figure 8 Carriage Cable Windings 2. Install the Carriage Cable (ball side) (Figure 9). 1. Hook the cable to the pulley (from bottom to top). 2. Hook the cable to the large pulley in the Half Rate Carriage (from top to bottom). 3. Insert the ball into the frame hole.
1/05 4-59
REP 3.3.1
REP 3.3.2 Carriage Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Platen Cover or DADF (REP 12.1.1). Remove the Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1). Platen machine: Remove the Blind Cover (PL11.1). PL 11.1 Item 7 Remove the Top Cover (PL 11.1 Item 1) Remove the IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 15) Remove the Carriage Motor (Figure 1). 1. Release the clamps (2). 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the screws (3). 4. Remove the spring. 5. Remove the Carriage Motor.
Figure 10 Installing the Carriage Cable (spring hook side) 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the tape from the cable. Install the Full Rate Carriage in the IIT Frame. Adjust the positions of the Full Rate/Half Rate Carriages (ADJ. 3.4.1). Manually move the Full Rate Carriage to make sure it moves smoothly. Install the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly from Step 6.
REP 3.3.1, REP 3.3.2
1/05 4-60
REP 3.4.1 Exposure Lamp

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Avoid touching the exposure lamp with your bare hands during removal or installation. Oil from your hands will contaminate the surface of the lamp. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Platen Cover or DADF. Remove the Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1). Move the Full Rate Carriage to the frame notch. Remove the Exposure Lamp (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the Exposure Lamp.
Figure 1 Removing the Carriage Motor
Installation
Figure 1 Removing the Exposure Lamp
Installation
1/05 4-61
REP 3.3.2, REP 3.4.1
REP 3.4.2 Lamp Wire Harness

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Platen Cover or DADF (REP 12.1.1). Remove the Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1). Platen machines: Remove the Blind Cover (PL 11.1 Item 7). Remove the Top Cover (PL 11.1 Item 1). Disconnect the Lamp Wire Harness connector and release the Clamp Hook (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamp. 3. Remove the clamp. 4. Release the hook.
Figure 2 Removing the Full Rate Carriage 7. Remove the Lamp Wire Harness from the Full Rate Carriage (Figure 3). 1. Flip the Full Rate Carriage. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the guide. 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the Lamp Wire Harness.
Figure 1 Disconnecting the Lamp Wire Harness 6. Remove the Full Rate Carriage (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Full Rate Carriage.
REP 3.4.2
1/05 4-62
REP 3.5.1 IPS Chassis

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION The IPS chassis is heavy (16lb.). Take care to avoid injury when handling the IPS chassis. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1). Remove the IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 15). Disconnect the connectors at the right side of the IPS chassis (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the connector cover. 3. Disconnect the connectors (3).
Figure 3 Removing the Lamp Wire Harness
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. NOTE: After reinstalling the parts, adjust the positions of the Full Rate/Half Rate Carriages (ADJ. 3.4.1).
Figure 1 Disconnecting the Connectors 4. Disconnect the connectors in the rear side of the IPS chassis (Figure 2). 1. Release the clamp. 2. Disconnect the connectors (5).
1/05 4-63
REP 3.4.2, REP 3.5.1
Figure 2 Disconnecting the Connectors 5. Pull out the IPS chassis (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (6). 2. Ensure that the (3) connectors on the right side of the IPS chassis are disconnect. 3. Pull out the IPS chassis.
Figure 3 Pulling out the IPS Chassis
Installation
REP 3.5.1
1/05 4-64
REP 4.1.1 ROS

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION The ROS assembly is a precision optical component. Be careful not to damage the unit when handling it. 1. 2. Open/close the IIT (REP 3.1.2). Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the ROS Top Cover 4. Disconnect the connectors (Figure 3). 1. Disconnect the connectors (3).
Figure 1 Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover 3. Remove the ROS Top Cover (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove the ROS Top Cover.
1/05 4-65
REP 4.1.1
Figure 3 Disconnect the connectors 5. Remove the ROS (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the ROS.
Figure 4 Remove the ROS
Installation
NOTE: If installing a new ROS ensure that the tape covering the ROS window is removed. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
REP 4.1.1
1/05 4-66
REP 5.1.1 Erase Lamp

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong light. NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface. 1. 2. Remove the Drum Unit (REP 5.3.1). Remove the Erase Lamp (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the Erase Lamp.
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Erase Lamp, match the rails (on both sides of the Erase Lamp) with groove A (Figure 2).
Figure 1 Remove the Erase Lamp
1/05 4-67
REP 5.1.1
REP 5.3.1 Drum Unit

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong light. NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Turn the IBT Handle to the left. Pull the handle and pull out the Drum Unit (Figure 1). 1. Pull the handle. 2. Pull out the Drum Unit.
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Drum Unit, match the rails with groove A (Figure 2).
Figure 2 Reassembly 1. After reinstallation of the parts, perform the following steps. a. b. After replacing the Drum Unit, make sure that the Image Quality is correct (IQ 1 Image Quality Troubleshooting Entry RAP). If the Image Quality is not correct, perform the MAX set-up (ADJ 9.1.1).
Figure 1 Pull out the Drum Unit
REP 5.3.1
1/05 4-68
REP 5.3.3 Cleaning Brush

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong light. NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Drum (REP 5.3.1). Remove the gear (Figure 1). 1. Remove the gear.
4. Remove the Cleaning Brush.
Figure 2 Remove the Cleaning Brush
Figure 1 Remove the Gear 4. Remove the Cleaning Brush (Figure 2). 1. Remove the gear. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the bearing.
1/05 4-69
REP 5.3.3
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Cleaning Brush, make sure that the long shaft side is to the rear as shown in the figure below (Figure 3).
REP 5.3.4 Cleaning Blade

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong light. NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface. 1. 2. Remove the Drum (REP 5.3.1). Remove the Cleaning Blade (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Cleaning Blade.
Figure 1 Remove the Cleaning Blade
Installation
NOTE: After installing the Cleaning Blade, clean the Cleaning Blade. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
REP 5.3.3, REP 5.3.4
1/05 4-70
REP 5.4.1 Charge Corotron

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong light. NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface. 1. 2. Remove the Drum Unit (REP 5.3.1). Remove the Charge Corotron (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Charge Corotron.
REP 5.4.2 PCC Wire

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the Drum Unit, do not expose the Drum to direct sunlight or strong light. NOTE: Do not touch the Drum surface. 1. 2. Remove the Drum (REP 5.3.1). Remove the Pre-Clean Corotron (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Pre-Clean Corotron.
Figure 1 Remove the Charge Corotron
Figure 1 Remove the Pre-Clean Corotron 3. Remove the PCC Wire (Figure 2). 1. Remove the Arc Shields on both sides. 2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the PCC Wire.
Installation
NOTE: Do not touch the Corotron Wire during installation. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-71
REP 5.4.1, REP 5.4.2
Installation
NOTE: Install the PCC Wire as shown in the figure below (Figure 3).
Figure 2 Remove the PCC Wire
Figure 3 Install the PCC Wire NOTE: After installing the PCC Wire, clean the PCC Wire. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
REP 5.4.2
1/05 4-72
REP 5.5.1 Waste Toner Auger

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: Protect the floor with a sheet of paper where the removed waste Toner Auger is to be placed. 1. 2. 3. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3 Item 7). Remove the Fly Wheel (PL 1.1 Item 10). Remove the Waste Toner Auger (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the Auger Sensor. 4. Remove the wire from the wire clips. 5. Remove the screws (5). 6. Remove the Waste Toner Auger.
Figure 1 Remove the Waste Toner Auger
Installation
1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Ensure that the Drum CRU,IBT Assembly, and the Waste Toner Bottle are removed before installing the auger.
1/05 4-73
REP 5.5.1
REP 5.5.2 Auger Belt

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: Protect the floor with a sheet of paper where the removed Waste Toner Auger is to be placed. 1. 2. Remove the Waste Toner Auger (REP 5.5.1). Remove the spring (Figure 1). 1. Remove the E-clips (3). 2. Remove the bearings (3). 3. Remove the spring. 4. Loosen the screws (2).
Figure 2 Remove the Auger Belt
Figure 1 Remove the Spring 3. Remove the Auger Belt (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove the Auger Assembly. 3. Remove the Auger Belt. Repairs and Adjustments Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
REP 5.5.2
1/05 4-74
Installation
NOTE: Install the Auger Belt as shown in the figure below (Figure 3). NOTE: Protect the floor with a sheet of paper where the Waste Toner Auger is to be installed.
Figure 3 Install the Auger Belt 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-75
REP 5.5.2
REP 5.5.2
1/05 4-76
REP 6.1.1 Rotary PWB

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open/close the IOT Control PWB chassis (REP 9.2.1). Remove the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (5). 2. Remove the bracket.
Figure 2 Remove the Rotary PWB and Plate 4. Remove the Rotary PWB (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (4). 2. Remove the Rotary PWB.
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket 3. Remove the Rotary PWB with the plate (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connectors (3). 2. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the plate.
1/05 4-77
REP 6.1.1
REP 6.1.2 Rotary Home Position Sensor

Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord. 1. 2. Remove the Rotary PWB (steps 1 -3 of REP 6.1.1). Remove the Rotary Home Position Sensor with the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Loosen the screw. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the sensor.
Figure 3 Remove the Rotary PWB
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Rotary Home Position Sensor
Installation
1. Push the bracket in the direction of the arrow and lock it. (Figure 2).
REP 6.1.1, REP 6.1.2
1/05 4-78
REP 6.1.3 Rotary Latch Lever

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2 Item 1) Remove the Rotary PWB (Steps 1 - 3 of REP 6.1.1) Disconnect the connector (Figure 1). 1. Loosen the screws (2). 2. Disconnect the connectors (3). 3. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 4. Pull out the connector from the hole.
Figure 2 Position the Bracket 2. Adjust the Rotary Home Position Sensor (ADJ 6.1.1).
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connectors 4. Hook the bracket hooks (Figure 2). 1. Hook the bracket hooks (2).
1/05 4-79
REP 6.1.2, REP 6.1.3
Figure 2 Hook the Bracket Hooks 5. Remove the Rotary Latch Lever (Figure 3). 1. Remove the connectors (2). 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the Rotary Latch Lever. 4. If the Solenoid Assy is to be replaced, remove the screws (2). 5. If the Solenoid Assy is to be replaced, remove the Gear. 3. 2.
Figure 3 Remove the Rotary Latch Lever
Installation
1. Perform ADJ 6.6.1 Rotary Development Housing Position and install the locating pin to position the Black Development Housing against the Drum. If the Solenoid Assy was replaced, install the new Solenoid on the Rotary Latch lever bracket, and reinstall the Gear. Ensure that the flag on the plunger fully blocks the sensor when the plunger is pushed in. Lock the Rotary Latch Lever (Figure 4). 1. Turn the gear and push in the plunger.
REP 6.1.3
1/05 4-80
Figure 4 Lock the Rotary Latch Lever 4. Install the Rotary Latch Lever (Figure 5). 1. Push the Rotary Latch Lever in the direction of the arrow. 2. Fasten the screws (2). 5. 6.
Figure 5 Install the Rotary Latch Lever Remove the Locating Pin and return it to its storage position. After installation, check the gear play. Manually lock and release the solenoid. Make sure that the solenoid is properly locked. CAUTION Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed before attempting to run the machine.
1/05 4-81
REP 6.1.3
REP 6.1.4 Bias Brush

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. 3. Cover Assembly (PL 6.5 Item 18) Trickle Toner Bottle (PL 6.5 Item 23)
Installation
NOTE: Make sure that the protruding part of the Bias Brush is in the frame hole (Figure 2).
Remove the Drum Unit (REP 5.3.1). Remove the Bias Brush (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the fasten terminal. 3. Remove the Bias Brush.
Figure 1 Remove the Bias Brush
REP 6.1.4
1/05 4-82
REP 6.2.1 Toner Cartridge Unit

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Toner Cartridge Cover (PL 6.2 Item 7). Raise the Toner Cartridge Unit and close the Shutter (Figure 1). 1. 2. Disconnect the connectors (2). Close the Shutter.
Figure 2 Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit
Installation
Figure 1 Raise the Toner Cartridge Unit 3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit (Figure 2). NOTE: Since item 1 hooks onto item 2, push the Toner Cartridge Unit up and remove it (pull it out) in the forward direction. 3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit.
1/05 4-83
REP 6.2.1
REP 6.3.1 Toner Cartridge Housing (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble the Black Toner Cartridge Housing. NOTE: Protect the floor by placing a sheet of paper on the floor. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit (REP 6.2.1). Remove the Toner Cartridge (Yellow/Black) (PL 6.2 Item 1). Remove the Toner Cartridge Housing (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the Toner Cartridge Housing.
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Toner Cartridge Housing
REP 6.3.1
1/05 4-84
REP 6.3.2 Cartridge/Dispense Motor (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)

NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble the Black Cartridge/Dispense Motor.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit (REP 6.2.1). Remove the Cartridge Motor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the Cartridge Motor.
Figure 1 Remove the Cartridge Motor 4. Remove the Dispense Motor (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the terminals (2). 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the Dispense Motor.
1/05 4-85
REP 6.3.2
REP 6.4.1 Dispense PWB

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Toner Cartridge Cover (PL 6.2). Remove the Dispense PWB (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connectors (4). 2. Release the hooks (4) and remove the Dispense PWB.
Figure 2 Remove the Dispense Motor
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Dispense PWB
Installation
REP 6.3.2, REP 6.4.1
1/05 4-86
REP 6.6.1 Development Housing

NOTE: After replacing the Development Housing, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counters Diag. Screen: a. b. c. d. Yellow: location NVM 009-851 Magenta: location NVM 009-852 Cyan: location NVM 009-853 Black: location NVM 009-850
WARNING
WARNING
Do not put the Developer or Developer Unit into a fire. If the Developer or Developer Unit is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury. 1. 2. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2). Disconnect the connectors (Figure 1). 1. Loosen the screws (2). 2. Disconnect the connectors (3). 3. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 4. Pull out the connector from the hole.
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connectors 3. Hook the bracket hook s (Figure 2). 1. Hook the hooks (2).
1/05 4-87
REP 6.6.1
Figure 2 Hook the Bracket Hook s 4. Open the arms (white) (Figure 3). 1. Rotate the Rotary Assembly. 2. Loosen the screws (2). 3. Open the arms (2). 5.
Figure 3 Open the Arms Remove the Development Housing (Figure 4). 1. Remove the development housing.
REP 6.6.1
1/05 4-88
REP 6.6.2 Developer Replacement

Developer Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Do not put the Developer or Developer Unit into a fire. If the Developer or Developer Unit is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury. NOTE: After replacing the Development Housing, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen: a. b. c. d. 1. 2. 3. Yellow: location NVM 009-851 Magenta: location NVM 009-852 Cyan: location NVM 009-853 Black: location NVM 009-850 Remove the Development Housing (REP 6.6.1). Place a sheet of paper on the floor or desk. Place the removed Development Housing on it. Remove the Upper Cover (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Release the hooks (4) and remove the cover. Figure 4 Remove the Development Housing
Installation
NOTE: If the Development Housing cannot be easily installed, the gears may not be meshed properly. Rotate the gears clockwise slightly and then install the Development Housing. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
NOTE: If the developer material has been replaced, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-up procedure
1/05 4-89
REP 6.6.1, REP 6.6.2
Figure 1 Remove the Upper Cover 4. Turn the Development Housing upside down. Empty the Developer (Figure 2). NOTE: Be careful that the gear is not contaminated by Developer. If contaminated, clean the gear and make sure that the gear is moving smoothly. 1. Turn the Development Housing in the direction of the arrow. 2. Pour out the Developer. 3. Rotate the Magnet Roll Gear in the direction of the arrow. Pour out the remaining Developer. 5. Figure 2 Empty the Developer Add the Developer (Figure 3). 1. Rotate the Magnet Roll Gear in the direction of the arrow, move the Developer pack right and left, while adding the Developer.
REP 6.6.2
1/05 4-90
Figure 3 Add the Developer 6. Make sure that the Development Housing hook is not up on the Upper Cover (Figure 4). 7. 8. Restore the machine.
Figure 4 Position the Hook
Make 10 copies of the Test Pattern (82E10810) to mix the Developer in the following mode: a. b. 11 x 17 or A3 and 4-color mode (full color) 10 sheets
9.
Perform the MAX Set Up (ADJ 9.1.1).
NOTE: After performing MA Set Up, go to IQ47 ATC Sensor RAP, Appendix 1. ATC set-up procedure.
1/05 4-91
REP 6.6.2
REP 6.7.1 Rotary Auger (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)

NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble the Magenta Rotary Auger.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Be careful not to touch the seals or mating surfaces of the rotary dispense parts. Contamination by skin oils can cause toner problems. NOTE: Since a large amount of toner overflows during this procedure, use a plastic bag to recover the overflowing toner to prevent contaminating the work area. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. Development Housing (REP 6.6.1) Toner Cartridge Cover (PL 6.2 Item 7) Trickle Toner Bottle (PL 6.5 Item 23) Cover Assembly (PL 6.5 Item 18) Remove the Front Door Interlock Cover (PL 9.1)
Remove the Toner Cartridge Unit (REP 6.2.1). Remove the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the screws (2). 5. Remove the bracket. 4. Figure 1 Remove the Bracket Remove the Outer Dispense Cover (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Outer Dispense Cover. 3. Disconnect the sensor.
REP 6.7.1
1/05 4-92
Figure 2 Remove the Outer Dispense Cover 5. Remove the cover (Figure 3). 1.Remove the screws (4). 2. Remove the cover. 6.
Figure 3 Remove the Cover Remove the Inner/Outer DIspense Housings (Figure 4). 1. Remove the E-clip. 2. Remove the bearing (plastic). 3. Remove the Inner/Outer Dispense Housings.
1/05 4-93
REP 6.7.1
NOTE: Remove the Black, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Inner/Outer Dispense Housings.
Figure 5 Remove the Spacer Figure 4 Remove the Inner/Outer DIspense Housings 7. Remove the spacer (Figure 5). 1. Remove the block. 2. Remove the spacer. 8. Remove the Rotary Auger (Figure 6). NOTE: Mark the Developer Rotary Frame Assembly with the color of the Rotary Auger if removing more then one Rotary Auger. 1. From inside the machine, release the stopper tab on the Rotary Auger (PL 6.7). 2. Push the Rotary Auger toward the front of the machine to remove it from Rotary Frame.
REP 6.7.1
1/05 4-94
Figure 6 Remove the Rotary Auger
Figure 7 Tightening Sequence g. h. i. j. Because of the Counter Reaction torque from each screw, retighten the screw in the same sequence by turning each screw 1/4 (one quarter) of a turn (90 degrees). Repeat step g. Remove the screws (3) that were installed in step d. Continue the reassembly process.
Installation
a. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly until the installation of the Four (4) screws that secures the Inner Dispense Cover. NOTE: The following procedure is instructions for tightening the four (4) screws that secure the Inner Dispense Assembly. b. c. d. This procedure is to EVENLY distribute the torque throughout the Rotary Dispenser. Do not use Power Screwdrivers. Install the screws (3) that secure the Outer Dispense Assembly (PL 6.5) (only the screws, not the Outer Dispense Cover). This will secure the Dispense Assembly and align the Inner Dispense Assembly. Hand tighten the screws (4) until the lock washer closes (locks) in the sequence shown (Figure 7). DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN
e. f.
1/05 4-95
REP 6.7.1
REP 6.7.2 Trickle Auger

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open/close the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1). Remove the Flywheel (REP 1.3.1), (See Figure 1). Remove the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (5). 2. Remove the bracket.
Figure 2 Remove the Rotary Developer Duct 6. Remove the bracket (Figure 3). 1. Loosen the screw. 2. Remove the spring. 3.Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the bracket.
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket 4. 5. Remove the Rotary Developer Duct (PL 10.2 Item 4) Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connectors (2).
REP 6.7.2
1/05 4-96
Figure 3 Remove the Bracket 7. Remove the Development/BP0 Drive and IBT Cleaner Retract (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screws (4). 2. Remove the belt. 3. Remove the Development/BP0 Drive and IBT Cleaner Retract. 8.
Figure 4 Remove the Drives Remove the Trickle Auger (Figure 5). 1. Remove the Trickle Auger.
1/05 4-97
REP 6.7.2
NOTE: Place a sheet of paper on the floor when the Trickle Auger is pulled out to protect the floor from any spilled Developer.
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Development/BP0 Drive and IBT Cleaner Retract, make sure the couplings are properly meshed. Push the Development Clutch in after temporarily locking the Development BP0 Drive and the IBT Cleaner Retract (Figure 6).
Figure 5 Remove the Trickle Auger
Figure 6 Install the drives
REP 6.7.2
1/05 4-98
REP 7.1.1 IBT

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the IBT, do not expose the belt to direct sunlight or strong light. NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT belt does not touch any other part. NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with a sheet of paper). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Front Door. Remove the Drum Unit (REP 5.3.1). Remove the Trickle Toner Bottle (PL 6.5). Lower the lever and pull out the Drawer Assembly. Pull the Drawer Assembly out to the work position (Figure 1). 1. Push in the stoppers on both sides. 2. Pull out the Drawer Assembly.
1. Rotate the lever in the direction of the arrow. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Pull out the IBT.
Figure 2 Pull out the IBT 7. Remove the IBT Inner Cover (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the lever. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the IBT Inner Cover.
Figure 1 Pull out the drawer 6. Pull out the IBT (Figure 2). Repairs and Adjustments
1/05 4-99
REP 7.1.1
Figure 3 Remove the IBT Inner Cover 8. Remove the IBT (Figure 4). 1. Remove the IBT.
Figure 4 Remove the IBT
Installation
REP 7.1.1
1/05 4-100
REP 7.1.2 IBT Cleaner

NOTE: After replacing the IBT Cleaner, clear the HFSI counter. Enter thedC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen NVM 009-836.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not put the IBT Cleaner into a fire. If the IBT Cleaner is placed into a fire, it may explode and cause injury. NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part. NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with a sheet of paper). NOTE: Place the removed IBT Cleaner on the floor, protected by a sheet of paper. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the IBT (REP 7.1.1). Remove the IBT Cleaner (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the IBT Cleaner.
Figure 1 Remove the IBT Cleaner
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the inboard side of the IBT Cleaner is fully seated. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-101
REP 7.1.2
REP 7.5.1 IBT Belt

NOTE: After replacing the IBT Belt, clear the HFSI. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen: 1. 2. DC 135 (NVM 009-805) DC135 (NVM 009-806)
5. 6.
Raise the IBT. Remove the Inlet Plate (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Inlet Plate.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part. NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with a sheet of paper). 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Front Door. Remove the IBT (REP 7.1.1). Remove the IBT Cleaner (REP 7.1.2). Move the stoppers (2) in the direction of the arrow and lock the roll (Figure 1), front and rear. 1. Move the stoppers (2), front and rear.
Figure 2 Remove the Inlet Plate 7. Move the roll and loosen the tension (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the bracket. 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Hold the bracket and move the roll. 5. Hook the bracket hole to the boss.
Figure 1 Move the Stoppers Repairs and Adjustments 1/05 4-102 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
REP 7.5.1
Figure 4 Remove the IBT Belt
Figure 3 Loosen the Tension 8. Remove the IBT Belt (Figure 4). 1. Remove the IBT Belt.
1/05 4-103
REP 7.5.1
Installation
NOTE: When installing the IBT Belt, make sure that the silver seal is towards the inboard side. Also ensure that the Tracking Rings which are located on the inside of the IBT Belt, are not riding on the ends of the Steering Roll or Drive Roll (Figure 5).
REP 7.6.1 Bias Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part. NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with the sheet of paper). 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the IBT Belt (REP 7.5.1). Release the stoppers (Figure 1). 1. Move the stoppers (2) in the direction of the arrow and release them.
Figure 5 install the IBT Belt 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Move the Stoppers 4. Remove the Bias Roll (Figure 2). 1. Raise the Tension Roll. 2. Remove the Bias Roll.
REP 7.5.1, REP 7.6.1
1/05 4-104
Installation
NOTE: When installing the Bias Roll, make sure that the marking on the Bias Roll is towards the inboard side (Figure 3).
Figure 2 Remove the Bias Roll
Figure 3 Install the Bias Roll
1/05 4-105
REP 7.6.1
NOTE: Install the bearings at both sides of the Bias Roll in the positions shown in the figure below (Figure 4).
REP 7.6.2 Drive Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part. NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with sheet of paper). 1. 2. Remove the IBT Belt (REP 7.5.1). Remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade (Figure 1). 1. Remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade.
Figure 4 Install the Bearings 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade 3. Remove the gear (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the gear.
REP 7.6.1, REP 7.6.2
1/05 4-106
Figure 2 Remove the Gear 4. 5. Remove the front lever (PL 7.7 Item 15). Move the Drive Roll in the direction of the arrow and remove it (Figure 3). 1.Remove the screw. 2. Remove the bracket. 3. Remove the bracket. 4. Remove the Drive Roll.
Figure 3 Remove the Drive Roll
Installation
NOTE: To clean the Drive Roll, remove the Drive Roll Cleaning Blade and clean the Drive Roll with a cloth using Film Remover. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-107
REP 7.6.2
REP 7.6.3 Back-up Roll

NOTE: If replacing the Back-up Roll, clear the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen (009-808).
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part. NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with a sheet of paper). 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the IBT (REP 7.1.1). Remove the IBT Cleaner (REP 7.1.2). Remove the IBT Belt (REP 7.5.1). Remove the Back-up Roll (Figure 1). NOTE: Do not touch or hold the rubber layer of the Back-up Roll. 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the plate. 3. Remove the Back-up Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Back-up Roll
Installation
REP 7.6.3
1/05 4-108
REP 7.6.4 Contact Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: When removing the IBT, make sure that the IBT Belt does not touch any other part. NOTE: Carefully place the removed IBT on a flat surface (covered with a sheet of paper). 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 2. 3. IBT (REP 7.1.1). IBT Cleaner (REP 7.1.2). IBT Belt (Disassembly 7.5.1) REP 7.5.1).
REP 7.9.1 2nd BTR

NOTE: After replacing the 2nd BTR, clear the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen (009-809).
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Push the lever down and pull out the Drawer Assembly. Pull the Drawer Assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1). 1. Push in the stoppers on both sides. 2. Pull out the Drawer Assembly.
Remove the Back-up Roll (REP 7.6.3). Remove the Contact Roll (Figure 1). 1. Remove the Contact Roll. 2. Remove the bearings on both sides.
Figure 1 Pull out the Drawer 4. Figure 1 Remove the Contact Roll Remove the following parts. a. b. c. 5. Knob (PL 2.22 Item 9) Drawer Cover (PL 2.18 Item 6) Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1 Item 5) 1. Remove the screw. Repairs and Adjustments
Installation
Remove the indicator (Figure 2).
1/05 4-109
REP 7.6.4, REP 7.9.1
2. Remove the Cartridge Guide. 3. Remove the indicator.
Figure 3 Remove the 2nd BTR
Installation
CAUTION Be sure to rotate the drive shaft on the 2nd BTR to move the BTR Roll to the down position before closing the Drawer Assembly. 1. Figure 2 Remove the Indicator 6. Remove the 2nd BTR (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Pull out the ground wire from the hole. 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the 2nd BTR. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
REP 7.9.1
1/05 4-110
REP 7.10.1 2nd BTR Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1). Remove the cover (Figure 1). 1. Remove the wire from the hooks (3). 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the cover. 4. Remove the screws (3). 5. Remove the plate grounds (2).
Figure 2 Remove the Inlet Plate 5. Remove the gears (Figure 3). 1. Remove the E-clips (2). 2. Remove the gears (2).
Figure 1 Remove the Cover 4. Remove the Inlet Plate (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the wire from the hook. 3. Remove the Inlet Plate.
1/05 4-111
REP 7.10.1
Figure 3 Remove the Gears 6. Remove the arms (Figure 4). 1. Remove the springs (2). 2. Remove the E-clip and nylon washer. 3. Remove the arms (2). 7.
Figure 4 Remove the Arms Remove the 2nd BTR Roll (Figure 5). 1. Remove the 2nd BTR Roll.
REP 7.10.1
1/05 4-112
Figure 5 Remove the 2nd BTR Roll
Installation
NOTE: To clean the 2nd BTR Roll, wipe the roll surface with a dry cloth. CAUTION Be sure to rotate the drive shaft on the 2nd BTR to move the BTR roll to the down position before closing the drawer assembly. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-113
REP 7.10.1
REP 7.10.1
1/05 4-114
REP 8.1.1 Fuser Unit

NOTE: After replacing the Fuser Unit, clear all HFSI counters related to the Fuser. 5.
1. Lever (PL 2.22) 2. Drawer Cover (PL 2.18) 3. Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1) Remove the Fuser Unit (Figure 2). 1. Lower the baffle. 2. Loosen the screws (2). 3. Remove the bracket. 4. Disconnect the connector. 5. Remove the Fuser Unit.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Push the lever down and pull out the Drawer Assembly. Pull the Drawer Assembly out to a maintenance position (Figure 1). 1. Push in the stoppers at both sides. 2. Pull out the Drawer Assembly.
Figure 2 Remove the Fuser Unit
Installation
Figure 1 Pull out the Drawer Assembly NOTE: Spread a drop cloth on the floor before removing the Oil Cartridge, in order to avoid any spills. 4. Remove the following parts: NOTE: Make sure to re-connect the connector when the Fuser Unit is installed. 1. 2. 3. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Full Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure). Perform the Fuser Nip adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1).
1/05 4-115
REP 8.1.1
REP 8.2.1 Donor Roll Assembly

After replacing the Donor Roll Assembly, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen (010-811). If the wick is also replaced, reset HFSI 10-814.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the Donor Roll on the wire ties holding the fuser harness.
Installation
NOTE: If Donor Roll is replaced separately, make sure to reinstall the Donor Roll by placing the long journal in the rear (Figure 2). NOTE: When replacing only the Metering Blade, clean the Pickup Roll and the Donor Roll with a lint free cloth (600S1276) and Fuser Oil before installing the blade. Wipe off the edge of the blade with a lint free cloth and then with a clean finger. After assembling the Metering Blade to the Pickup Roll, use the corner of a piece of clean copy paper and slide it inboard to outboard between the blade and the roll to clean any remaining contamination.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Open the drawer to the maintenance position. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 4. Oil Cartridge (PL 8.1) Front Cover (PL 8.1) Top Cover (PL 8.2)
Remove the Donor Roll Assembly (Figure 1). Do not remove the Fuser Assembly from the machine. 1. Remove the springs (2). 2. Remove the KL-clips (2). 3. Remove the bearings (2). 4. Remove the gear. 5. Remove the Donor Roll Assembly.
Figure 2 Install the Donor Roll 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. a. b. Ensure that Oil Metering Blade is seated correctly against the wick. Ensure that springs (2) are located correctly at both ends of Donor Roll Assembly(Figure 1, step 1).
NOTE: If Donor Roll, Pick up Roll, or Oil Metering Blade (PL 8.9) are replaced individually, perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure). Figure 1 Remove the Donor Roll Assembly 2. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
REP 8.2.1
1/05 4-116
REP 8.3.1 Heat Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Heat Roller, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen (010-800). 6.
a. b.
Heat Roll Heater Rod (REP 8.3.2). Heat Roll Finger Assembly (REP 8.3.5). (Steps 1 - 3) 1. Pull out the Stand Plate.
Pull out the Stand Plate (Figure 2).
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the following parts: a. b. 4. Front Cover (PL 8.1) Top Cover (PL 8.2) 1. Press the latch release button. 2. Remove the Web Assembly.
Remove the Web Assembly (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Pull out the Stand Plate CAUTION Be careful when opening the Upper Frame Assembly, because the springs may come off the Donor Roll Assembly. 7. Open the Upper Frame Assembly (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Open the Upper Frame Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Web Assembly 5. Remove the following parts: 1/05 4-117 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.3.1
NOTE: Before removing the Heat Roll, observe the location of the flange on each bearing. They should be inside the Fuser Frame at each end (Figure 6).
Figure 3 Open the Upper Frame Assembly 8. Raise the stoppers on both sides (Figure 4). 1. Loosen the screws (2). 2. Raise the stoppers (2). 9. Figure 4 Raise the Stoppers Remove the Heat Roll (Figure 5). 1. Remove the Heat Roll.
REP 8.3.1
1/05 4-118
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the bearings are installed with the flanges toward the center of the roll so that they fit inside the Fuser Frame (Figure 6).
Figure 5 Remove the Heat Roll 10. Wipe off and then inspect the Heat Roll Thermistors (2) for wear or damage and replace them as needed.
Figure 6 Install the Heat Roll NOTE: When installing the Heat Roll, press the stoppers down and lock the Heat Roll (Figure 7). 1. Press down the stoppers (2). 2. Tighten the screws (2).
1/05 4-119
REP 8.3.1
REP 8.3.2 Heat Roll Heater Rod

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. CAUTION Do not touch the glass surface of the Heater Rod. If the glass surface is accidentally touched, wipe it with a dry cloth. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 2. Remove the wire from the saddle edge. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the bracket.
Figure 7 Lock the Heat Roll CAUTION After closing the Upper Frame Assembly, ensure that the two load springs are located correctly at each end of the Donor Roll Assembly, The springs may become loose during service. 1. 2. 3. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure). Perform the Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1).
REP 8.3.1, REP 8.3.2
1/05 4-120
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket (Front of Fuser) 5. Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 1. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the bracket. 6.
Figure 2 Disconnect the Connector (Rear of Fuser) Remove the Heat Roll Heater Rod (Figure 3). 1. Remove the Heat Roll Heater Rod.
1/05 4-121
REP 8.3.2
REP 8.3.3 Pressure Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Pressure Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen (010-802).
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod (REP 8.3.4). Pull out the Stand Plate (Figure 1). 1. Pull out the Stand Plate.
Figure 3 Remove the Heat Roll Heater Rod
Installation
Figure 1 Pull out the Stand Plate 4. Remove the Fuser Top Cover (PL 8.2).
REP 8.3.2, REP 8.3.3
1/05 4-122
CAUTION Be careful when opening the Upper Frame Assembly; the load springs at each end of the donor roll assembly may come off. 5. Open the Upper Frame Assembly (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Open the Upper Frame Assembly.
Figure 3 Remove the Pressure Roll 7. Wipe off, then inspect the Pressure Roll Thermistors (2) for wear or damage and replace them as needed.
Figure 2 Open the Upper Frame Assembly NOTE: Before removing the Pressure Roll, observe the location of the flange on each bearing. They should be inside the Lift Lever Frame (Figure 5). 6. Remove the Pressure Roll (Figure 3). 1. Remove the Inlet Chute. 2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the Pressure Roll.
1/05 4-123
REP 8.3.3
Installation
NOTE: Ensure that the bearings are installed with the flanges inside of the Lift Lever Frame (Figure 4) and (Figure 5).
Figure 5 Install the Pressure Roll
Figure 4 Install the Pressure Roll
REP 8.3.3
1/05 4-124
NOTE: Install the spring as shown in the figure below (Figure 6).
REP 8.3.4 Pressure Roll Heater Rod

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. CAUTION Do not touch the glass surface of the Heater Rod. If the glass surface is accidentally touched, wipe it with a dry cloth. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the bracket.
Figure 6 Install the Spring CAUTION After closing the Upper Frame Assembly, ensure that the two load springs are located correctly at each end of the Donor Roll Assembly, The springs may become loose during service. 1. 2. 3. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure). Perform the Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1).
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket (Front of Fuser)
1/05 4-125
REP 8.3.3, REP 8.3.4
5.
Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire.
Figure 3 Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod
Installation
Figure 2 Disconnect the Connector (Rear of Fuser) 6. Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod (Figure 3). 1. Remove the Pressure Roll Heater Rod. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
REP 8.3.4
1/05 4-126
REP 8.3.5 Heat Roll Stripper Finger

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger Assembly (Figure 1). NOTE: Do not damage the Stripper finger tips. 1. Raise the Exit Chute. 2. Loosen the screw. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger Assembly.
3. Remove the spring. 4. Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger.
Figure 2 Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger
Installation
1. Install the Heat Roll Stripper Finger (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger Assembly 4. Remove the Heat Roll Stripper Finger (Figure 2). 1. Remove the spring tip from the groove. 2. Remove the stud. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 4-127 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.3.5
REP 8.4.1 Web Motor/EXT-HR Retract Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the Web Assembly (Figure 1). 1. Press the Latch Release Buttons (2). 2. Remove the Web Assembly.
Figure 3 Install the Heat Roll Stripper Finger 1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
Figure 1 Remove the Web Assembly 5. Remove the bracket (Figure 2). 1. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 2. Remove the wire from the edge saddle. 3. Disconnect the connector.
REP 8.3.5, REP 8.4.1
1/05 4-128
4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the bracket.
Figure 3 Remove the Sensor Figure 2 Remove the Bracket 6. Remove the sensor (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the bracket. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the sensor. 7. Remove the EXT-H/R Retract Motor (Figure 4). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove the stud screw. 4. Remove the bracket. 5. Remove the screws (2). 6. Loosen the set screw. 7. Remove the gear. 8. Remove the motor.
1/05 4-129
REP 8.4.1
Figure 5 Remove the Web Motor
Installation
Figure 4 Remove the EXT-H/R Retract Motor 8. Remove the Web Motor (Figure 5). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the E-clip. 3. Remove the gear. 4. Remove the Web Motor.
REP 8.4.1
1/05 4-130
REP 8.7.1 Oil Pump

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Move the clamp in the direction of the arrow (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Move the clamps (2) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2 Remove the Oil Pump
Installation
1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Full Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
Figure 1 Move the Clamps 5. Remove the Oil Pump (Figure 2). NOTE: After removing the Oil Pump, drain the oil remaining in the tube into the tank. 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Oil Pump. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 4-131 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 8.7.1
REP 8.7.2 Oil Wick

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. NOTE: After replacing the Oil Wick, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counter List Diag. Screen (010-814). 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the following parts: a. b. 4. Front Cover (PL 8.1) Top Cover (PL 8.2) 1. Loosen the clamp. 2. Remove the Oil Pipe.
5.
Remove the Oil Wick (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove the Oil Wick and, if present, the backup plate.
Remove the Oil Pipe (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Oil Wick
Installation
1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
Figure 1 Remove the Oil Pipe
REP 8.7.2
1/05 4-132
REP 8.8.1 External H/R Heater Rod

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. CAUTION Do not touch the glass surface of the Heater Rod. If the glass surface is accidentally touched, wipe it with a dry cloth. 1. 2. 3. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the following parts: a. b. 4. Front Cover (PL 8.1) Top Cover (PL 8.2) 1. Disconnect the connectors (3). 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 3. Remove the wire from the saddle edge.
Disconnect the connectors (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connectors (Front of Fuser) 5. Disconnect the connectors (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connectors (2). 2. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 3. Remove the wire from the saddle edge.
1/05 4-133
REP 8.8.1
Figure 2 Disconnect the Connectors - Rear of Fuser 6. Remove the External Heat Roll Assembly (Figure 3). 1. Remove the KL-clips (2). 2. Move the bearing in the direction of the arrow. 3. Remove the External Heat Roll Assembly. 7.
Figure 3 Remove the External Heat Roll Assembly Remove the brackets (Figure 4). 1. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the brackets (2). 4. Clean the External Heat Roll Assembly.
REP 8.8.1
1/05 4-134
Figure 4 Remove the Brackets 8. Remove the External H/R Heater Rod (Figure 5). 1. Remove the External H/R Heater Rod.
Figure 5 Remove the External H/R Heater Rod
Installation
1/05 4-135
REP 8.8.1
REP 8.8.2 External Heat Roll

NOTE: After replacing the External Heat Roll, Enter dC135 HFSI Counter List and reset HFSI counter 010-803.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, Wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. CAUTION Do not touch the glass surface of the Heater Rod. If the glass surface is accidentally touched, wipe it with a dry cloth. 1. 2. 3. Open the front door. Remove the External H/R Heater Rod (REP 8.8.1). Remove the External Heat Roll (Figure 1 ). 1. Remove the rings (2). 2. Remove the bearings (2). 3. Remove the External Heat Roll. 4. Clean and inspect the two External Heat Roll Thermistors.
Figure 1 Remove the External Heat Roll
Installation
1. 2. 3. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure). Adjust the External Heat Roll Nip (ADJ 8.8.1).
REP 8.8.2
1/05 4-136
REP 8.10.1 Pressure Roll Stripper Finger

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. CAUTION Since the Fuser is very hot, wait until the Fuser becomes sufficiently cold. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Front Door. Remove the Fuser Unit (REP 8.1.1). Remove the Front Cover (PL 8.1). Remove the Exit Chute (Figure 1). NOTE: Do not damage the finger tip. 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the Exit Chute Assembly. 5.
NOTE: If the Pressure Roll Finger Assembly appears bent or damaged, replace the entire finger assembly. Remove the Pressure Roll Stripper Finger (Figure 2). 1. Remove the spring tip from the groove. 2. Remove the stud. 3. Remove the spring. 4. Remove the Stripper Finger.
Figure 2 Remove the Pressure Roll Stripper Finger
Installation
1. Install the spring as shown (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Remove the Exit Chute
1/05 4-137
REP 8.10.1
Figure 3 Install the Spring 1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Perform the Standard Fuser Break-In Procedure (GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure).
REP 8.10.1
1/05 4-138
REP 9.2.1 Opening/Closing the IOT Control PWB Chassis

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3). Remove the IOT Control PWB Cover (PL 9.2). Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Open the PWB chassis.
REP 9.2.2 IOT Drive PWB

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Remove the IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3). Remove the IOT Control PWB Cover (PL 9.2). Remove the IOT CPU PWB (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connectors (5). 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove the IOT CPU PWB.
Figure 1 Open the IOT Control PWB Chassis
Figure 1 Remove the IOT CPU PWB 4. Disconnect the IOT Drive PWB connectors (12) (Figure 2).
Installation
1/05 4-139
REP 9.2.1, REP 9.2.2
Figure 3 Remove the IOT Drive PWB
Installation
Figure 2 Disconnect the IOT Drive PWB Connectors 5. Remove the IOT Drive PWB (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (8). 2. Remove the IOT Drive PWB.
REP 9.2.2
1/05 4-140
REP 9.2.3 Half Tone PWB

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open/close the IIT (REP 3.1.2). Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Open the Half Tone PWB Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the VSEL BT PWB 4. Disconnect the connectors (Figure 3). 1. Disconnect the connectors (5).
Figure 1 Remove the Half Tone PWB Cover 3. Remove the VSEL BT PWB (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connectors (3). 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the screws (2). 4. Remove the VSEL BT PWB.
1/05 4-141
REP 9.2.3
Figure 3 Disconnect the Connectors 5. Remove the Half Tone PWB (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screws (12). 2. Remove the screws (2) and washers (2). 3. Remove the Half-Tone PWB. 2.
Figure 4 Remove the Half Tone PWB
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION Failure to comply with the board replacement procedure in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs , could result in catastrophic NVM corruption. Refer to GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs in order to synchronize the serial number of the PWB.
REP 9.2.3
1/05 4-142
REP 9.3.1 Power Chassis

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following covers. a. b. c. 2. Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3) Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2) Power Chassis Cover (PL 11.2) 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Release the hook and remove the duct.
Figure 2 Remove the Suction Blower 4. Remove the screws (large: 1/small:3) of the AC Drive PWB. Keep the AC Drive PWB connector connected (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw (large: 1). 2. Remove the screws (small: 2).
Figure 1 Remove the Duct 3. Remove the Suction Blower (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the Suction Blower.
1/05 4-143
REP 9.3.1
Figure 3 Remove the Screws 5. Remove the power chassis (Figure 4). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the screws (3). 4. Remove the power chassis.
Figure 4 Remove the Power Chassis
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. CAUTION The IOT Control PWB Power Chassis contains the IOT NVM PWB, and the IOT CPU PWB. Refer to GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs , when replacing this component.
REP 9.3.1
1/05 4-144
REP 9.3.2 IOT LVPS

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3). Disconnect the IOT LVPS connectors (11) (Figure 1).
1. Loosen the screws (2). 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove the IOT LVPS.
Figure 2 Remove the IOT LVPS
Installation
1. Figure 1 Disconnect the IOT LVPS Connectors 3. Remove the IOT LVPS (Figure 2). 1/05 4-145 Repairs and Adjustments Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
REP 9.3.2
REP 9.3.3 B3/B3H (ESS) LVPS

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following covers: a. b. c. 2. Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3) Filter Unit Cover (PL 11.2) Power chassis cover (PL 11.2) 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Release the hook and remove the duct.
Figure 2 Remove the Suction Blower 4. Disconnect the AC Drive PWB connectors (Figure 3). 1. Release the clamps (2). 2. Disconnect the ESS SSR connectors (2). 3. Disconnect the AC Drive PWB connectors (8). 4. Disconnect P/J20.
Figure 1 Remove the Duct 3. Remove the Suction Blower (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the Suction Blower.
REP 9.3.3
1/05 4-146
Figure 4 Remove the AC Drive PWB 6. Remove the B3/B3H LVPS (Figure 5). 1. Disconnect the connectors (3). 2. Remove the screw. 3. Loosen the screws (2). 4. Remove the B3/B3H LVPS.
Figure 3 Disconnect the AC Drive PWB Connectors 5. Remove the AC Drive PWB (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screw (large: 1). 2. Remove the screws (small: 3). 3. Remove the AC Drive PWB.
1/05 4-147
REP 9.3.3
REP 9.5.1 Control Panel

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open the Front Door. Remove the Control Panel (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Slide the Control Panel to the front. (Release it from the hook.) 3. Disconnect the connectors (3).
Figure 5 Remove the B3/B3H LVPS
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Control Panel
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Check/adjust the Touch Panel Starting Point Correction (ADJ 9.1.18).
REP 9.3.3, REP 9.5.1
1/05 4-148
REP 9.6 Billing Data PWB Replacement

Parts List on PL 9.2 Procedure
CAUTION This procedure is used to maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data, when one or more Billing PWBs must be replaced. To maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data, never replace all three PWBs at the same time. If any of the following billing data PWBs needs replacing, only replace them one at a time according to this procedure: CAUTION Failure to comply with the board replacement procedure in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs , could result in catastrophic NVM corruption. Whenever any of the following PWBs are replaced, follow the procedure in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs : IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2). IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2).
If two or more serial numbers DO NOT match the M/C label serial number, escalate the service call to Field Engineering or the NTC.
1/05 4-149
REP 9.6
REP 9.6
1/05 4-150
REP 10.2.1 Fuser Fan

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open/close the IOT Control PWB Chassis (REP 9.2.1). Remove the Fuser Cover (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the Fuser Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the Fuser Fan
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Fuser Cover 3. Remove the Fuser Fan (Figure 2). 1. Remove the Fuser Fan.
1/05 4-151
REP 10.2.1
REP 10.2.2 Suction Blower Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the following part: a. Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3) 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Release the hook and remove the duct. Remove the duct (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Suction Blower Motor
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Duct 3. Remove the Suction Blower Motor (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the Suction Blower Motor.
REP 10.2.2
1/05 4-152
REP 11.1.1 Platen Cushion

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: The Platen Cushion is fixed in place by double-sided tape. 1. Peel off the Platen Cushion (Figure 1). 1. Open the Platen Cover. 2. Peel off the Platen Cushion.
Figure 2 Install the Platen Cushion
Figure 1 Remove the Platen Cushion
Installation
NOTE: After peeling off the Platen Cushion, completely remove the tape from the Platen Cover. 1. Install the Platen Cushion (Figure 2). 1. Remove the seal. 2. Push the Platen Cushion in the direction of the arrow. 3. Slowly lower the Platen Cover and push it onto the Platen Cushion.
1/05 4-153
REP 11.1.1
REP 11.1.1
1/05 4-154
REP 12.1.1 DADF

WARNING
The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF. 1. Disconnect the connector (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector.
Figure 2 Remove the DADF
Installation
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connector 2. Remove the DADF (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the DADF.
1/05 4-155
REP 12.1.1
REP 12.2.2 Registration Gate Solenoid

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Front Cover (PL 12.1). Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 3. Loosen the screws (2). 4. Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid.
REP 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance

WARNING
The DADF is heavy (37.5lbs). Take care to avoid injury when handling the DADF. 1. 2. 3. Remove the DADF (REP 12.1.1). Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1). Remove the Left Counter Balance (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (4). 2. Remove the Left Counter Balance.
Figure 1 Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid
Installation
1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. 4.
Figure 1 Remove the Left Counter Balance Remove the Right Counter Balance (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (4). 2. Remove the fastening terminals (2). 3. Remove the Right Counter Balance.
REP 12.2.2, REP 12.3.1
1/05 4-156
Figure 2 Remove the Right Counter Balance
Figure 3 Install the Left/Right Counter Balance 2. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Installation
1. Make sure to install each counter balance (left/right) on the correct side since the load applied to each balance is different (Figure 3).
1/05 4-157
REP 12.3.1
REP 12.3.2 DADF Control PWB

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1). Remove the DADF Control PWB (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connectors (7). 2. Remove the DADF Control PWB from the PWB supports (3).
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the DADF Control PWB
REP 12.3.2
1/05 4-158
REP 12.4.1 Feed Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1) Disconnect the connector (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (3) and remove the wire.
Figure 2 Remove the Feed Motor
Installation
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connector 3. Remove the Feed Motor (Figure 2). 1. Loosen the screws (2). 2. Loosen the screws and remove the ground wire. 3. Remove the belt. 4. Remove the Feed Motor.
1/05 4-159
REP 12.4.1
REP 12.4.2 Nudger Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Nudger Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counters Diag. Screen (NVM 005-80). NOTE: Replace the Nudger Rolls and the Feed Roll at the same time.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Open the DADF Top Cover and remove the Inner Cover (Figure 1). 1. Open the Top Cover. 2. Loosen the screws (2). 3. Remove the Inner Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the Nudger Rolls
Installation
NOTE: The Nudger Rolls have a one-way clutch structure. Install them so that they rotate freely in the clockwise direction. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Inner Cover 2. Remove the Nudger Rolls (Figure 2). 1. Remove the KL-clips (2). 2. Remove the Nudger Rolls (2).
REP 12.4.2
1/05 4-160
REP 12.4.3 Feed Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Feed Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counters Diag. Screen (NVM 005-805). NOTE: Replace the Feed Roll and the Nudger Rolls at the same time.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Open the Top Cover and remove the Inner Cover (Figure 1). 1. Open the Top Cover. 2. Loosen the screws (2). 3. Remove the Inner Cover.
Figure 2 Remove the Feed Roll Assembly 3. Remove the Feed Roll (Figure 3). 1. Remove the bearing. 2. Remove the gear. 3. Remove the KL-clips (2). 4. Remove the Feed Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Inner Cover 2. Remove the Feed Roll Assembly (Figure 2). 1. Remove the KL-clip. 2. Slide the bearing. 3. Remove the Feed Roll Assembly.
1/05 4-161
REP 12.4.3
REP 12.5.1 Document Feed Lower Chute

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. 3. Entrance Tray (PL 12.1) Front Cover (PL 12.1)
Open the Document Feed Upper Chute. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute (Figure 1). 1. Open the Top Cover. 2. Loosen the screws (2). 3. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute.
Figure 3 Remove the Feed Roll
Installation
NOTE: The Feed Rolls have a one-way clutch structure. Install them so that they rotate freely in the clockwise direction. 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute
Installation
REP 12.4.3, REP 12.5.1
1/05 4-162
REP 12.5.2 Retard Roll

NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counters Diag. Screen (NVM 005-805).
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute (REP 12.5.1). Remove the Retard Roll (Figure 1). 1. Remove the spring. 2. Remove the KL-clip. 3. Remove the shaft. 4. Remove the arm. 5. Remove the shaft. 6. Remove the Retard Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Retard Roll
Installation
NOTE: The Retard Rolls have a one-way clutch structure. Install them so that they rotate freely in the clockwise direction. NOTE: After replacing the Retard Roll, make sure that the Retard Roll Mylar Guard is in the correct position. (It may be inside the document feed chute.) 1. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 4-163
REP 12.5.2
REP 12.5.3 Set Gate Solenoid

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute (REP 12.5.1). Remove the Set Gate Solenoid (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 3. Loosen the screws (2). 4. Remove the Set Gate Solenoid.
Figure 2 Install the Set Gate Solenoid 2. Install and lock the Set Gate Solenoid by pressing it in the direction of the arrow (Figure 3)
Figure 1 Remove the Set Gate Solenoid
Installation
1. Install the Set Gate Solenoid by inserting the pin into the gate (Figure 2).
REP 12.5.3
1/05 4-164
REP 12.5.4 Registration Sensor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute (REP 12.5.1). Disconnect P/J580 and remove the Registration Sensor (Figure 1). 1. Loosen the screw. 2. Remove the screw. 3. Remove the bracket. 4. Remove the Registration Sensor.
Figure 3 Lock the Set Gate Solenoid 3. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Registration Sensor
Installation
1. When installing the Registration Sensor, lock it by matching the bracket hole with the halfpunch (Figure 2).
1/05 4-165
REP 12.5.3, REP 12.5.4
REP 12.5.5 Size Sensors 1/2 (Rear/Front)

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Document Feed Lower Chute (REP 12.5.1). Remove the Set Gate Solenoid (REP 12.5.3). Remove the Size Sensors 1/2 (front/rear) (Figure 1). 1. Loosen the screws (2). 2. Remove the screws (2). 3. Remove the bracket. 4. Remove the Size Sensors 1/2.
Figure 2 Installing the Registration Sensor 2. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Size Sensors 1/2
Installation
REP 12.5.4, REP 12.5.5
1/05 4-166
REP 12.6.1 DADF Belt Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1). Slide the DADF Control PWB (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the Control PWB from the PWB supports (3) and slide the Control PWB in the direction shown.
Figure 2 Remove the DADF Belt Motor
Installation
1. Install the Belt (Figure 3 - looking from the rear).
Figure 1 Slide the DADF Control PWB 3. Remove the DADF Belt Motor (Figure 2). 1. Draw a line to mark the location of the motor. 2. Remove the screws (4). 3. Remove the belt. 4. Remove the DADF Belt Motor.
1/05 4-167
REP 12.6.1
REP 12.7.1 Duplex Sensor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 2. 3. Front Cover (PL 12.1) Rear Cover (PL 12.1) Top Cover (PL 12.2)
Slide the Feed Motor (REP 12.4.1). Incline the Invert Chute (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Incline the Invert Chute.
Figure 3 Install the Belt 2. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Incline the Invert Chute 4. Remove the Invert Chute (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the Invert Chute.
REP 12.6.1, REP 12.7.1
1/05 4-168
Figure 2 Remove the Invert Chute 5. Remove the Duplex Sensor (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Duplex Sensor.
Figure 3 Remove the Duplex Sensor
Installation
1/05 4-169
REP 12.7.1
REP 12.8.1 Registration Pinch Roll

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: Do not damage or scratch the surface of the Registration Pinch Roll. (Scratches may cause skewing.) 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. 3. Front Cover (PL 12.2) Rear Cover PL 12.1)
Remove the Registration Gate Solenoid (REP 12.2.2). Remove the Lower Chute (Figure 1). 1. Remove the E-clip. 2. Remove the pulley. 3. Remove the screws (4). 4. Remove the Lower Chute.
Figure 1 Remove the Lower Chute 4. Remove the gate (Figure 2). NOTE: When removing the gate, make sure not to lose the springs (2) since the springs may jump out. 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the gate.
REP 12.8.1
1/05 4-170
Figure 2 Remove the Gate 5. Open the Top Cover. Press the bearing and spring in the rear so that they do not separate and remove the Registration Pinch Roll (Figure 3). 1. Open the Top Cover. 2. Remove the C-clip. 3. Remove the C-clip. 4. Remove the spring. 5. Remove the bearing. 6. Remove the Registration Pinch Roll.
Figure 3 Remove the Registration Pinch Roll
Installation
1/05 4-171
REP 12.8.1
REP 12.9.1 Exit Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Cover (PL 12.1). Remove the Exit Motor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 3. Loosen the screws (2). 4. Remove the belt. 5. Remove the Exit Motor.
Figure 2 Install the Exit Motor 2. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Exit Motor
Installation
1. Install and lock the motor by pressing it in the direction of the arrow (Figure 2).
REP 12.9.1
1/05 4-172
REP 12.10.1 Platen Belt

NOTE: After replacing the Platen Belt, reset the HFSI counter. Enter the dC135 HFSI Counters Diag. Screen (NVM 005-805).
2. Move the shaft support in the direction of the arrow. 3. Remove the Platen Belt.
WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Front Cover (PL 12.1). Remove the Document Transport (Figure 1). NOTE: Remove the Document Transport by holding it in the rear. 1. Loosen the screws (3). 2. Remove the Document Transport.
Figure 2 Remove the Platen Belt
Installation
1. Install the parts in the reverse order of the disassembly, but keep the following in mind:
Figure 1 Remove the Document Transport CAUTION Document Handler rises quickly when Platen Belt is removed. 3. Remove the Platen Belt (Figure 2). 1. Loosen the screws (2).
1/05 4-173
REP 12.10.1
NOTE: Lock the shaft support by matching the hole with the frame's half-punch (Figure 3).
NOTE: Make sure that both sides of the Platen Belt are correctly set in the pulley (Figure 4).
CORRECT
INCORRECT
Figure 3 Lock the shaft support 2. 3. 4.
Figure 4 Install the Platen Belt Connect the power cord and switch on the power. Select and execute the DC330 Component Control Diag. Screen (005-055 Belt Motor CW). Press the START button. Rotate the Platen Belt for 15 seconds. Press the STOP button. Check that the Platen Belt has not shifted to either side.
REP 12.10.1
1/05 4-174
REP 13.3.1 Decurler

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the Decurler Front Cover (PL 13.11). Disconnect the connector (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector.
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler
Installation
Figure 1 Disconnect the Connector 3. Remove the Decurler (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Decurler.
1/05 4-175
REP 13.3.1
REP 13.5.1 Vertical LED/Sensor

Parts List on PL 13.5 PL 13.9 Removal WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 2. 3. Rear Cover (PL 13.4) Exit Cover (PL 13.4) Top Cover (PL 13.4)
2. Decline the chute to the right side. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the Vertical Sensor.
Open the front cover. Remove the Vertical LED (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the Vertical LED.
Figure 2 Remove the Vertical Sensor
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Vertical LED 4. Remove the Vertical Sensor (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (4) on the both sides.
REP 13.5.1
1/05 4-176
REP 13.5.2 Bin Tray 1

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. d. 2. Stopper (PL 13.1) Rear Cover (PL 13.4) Top Cover (PL 13.4) Left Cover (PL 13.4) 1. Remove the spring. 2. Remove the belt from the pulley.
Remove the spring (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the ACT Cover 4. Remove the Bin Tray Pawl from the gate (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Remove the Spring 3. Remove the ACT Cover (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw. 2. Remove the Vertical LED. 3. Remove the screws (3). 4. Remove the ACT Cover. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 4-177 Repairs and Adjustments
REP 13.5.2
Figure 3 Remove the Bin Tray Pawl 5. 6. Remove the Bin Panel (Numbered Panel) (PL 13.4). Remove the Bin Tray 1 (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove Bin Tray 1.
Figure 4 Remove Bin Tray 1
Installation
REP 13.5.2
1/05 4-178
REP 13.6.1 Bin Trays 2 - 10

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble Bin Tray 2. NOTE: To remove any Bin Tray (n), first remove Bin Trays 1 to (n-1). 1. 2. Remove the Bin Tray 1 (REP 13.5.2). Remove the Bin Tray Pawl from the gate (Figure 1).
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Bin Tray Pawl 3. 4. Remove the Bin Panel (Numbered Panel) (PL 13.4). Remove Bin Tray 2 (Figure 2). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove bin tray 2.
1/05 4-179
REP 13.6.1
REP 13.13.1 Decurler Rolls 1/2

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 2. Decurler Rear Cover (PL 13.11) Decurler Top Cover (PL 13.11) Decurler Inner Cover (PL 13.11) 1. Remove the E-clips (2). 2. Remove the bearings (2).
Remove the bearings (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Bearings 4. Remove Decurler Roll 1 (Figure 3). 1. Remove Decurler Roll 1.
Figure 1 Remove the Bearings 3. Remove the bearings (Figure 2). 1. Remove the E-clips (2). 2. Remove the bearings (2).
REP 13.13.1
1/05 4-180
Figure 3 Remove Decurler Roll 1 5. Remove Decurler Roll 2 (Figure 4). 1. Lower the baffle. 2. Remove Decurler Roll 2.
Figure 4 Remove Decurler Roll 2
Installation
1. Install Decurler Rolls 1/2. Identify them by their markings (Figure 5).
1/05 4-181
REP 13.13.1
REP 13.13.2 Gear and Cam

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. Decurler rear cover (PL 13.11) Decurler top cover (PL 13.11) 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamp and remove the wire. 3. Hook the spring to the wire. 4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the E-clip. 6. Remove the bracket.
Remove the bracket (Figure 1).
Figure 5 Install Decurler Rolls 1/2 2. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket 3. Remove the gear (Figure 2). 1. Remove the E-clip. 2. Remove the gear.
REP 13.13.1, REP 13.13.2
1/05 4-182
Figure 2 Remove the Gear 4. Remove the Cam (Figure 3). 1. Remove the E-clips (3). 2. Remove the reflector. 3. Remove the bearings (2). 4. Remove the lever. 5. Remove the cam.
Figure 3 Remove the Cam
Installation
This illustration shows installation for the rear side. Install the gear and cam for the front in the same way as for the rear. 1. Install the gear and cam. Align the holes in the two parts (Figure 4).
1/05 4-183
REP 13.13.2
REP 13.14.1 Decurler Stepping Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. 2. Decurler rear cover (PL 13.11) Decurler top cover (PL 13.11) 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Remove the decurler stepping motor.
Remove the Decurler Stepping Motor (Figure 1).
Figure 4 Install the Cam and Gear 2. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Decurler Stepping Motor
Installation
REP 13.13.2, REP 13.14.1
1/05 4-184
REP 14.1.1 Offset Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the OCT from the Sorter. Remove the support (view from bottom) (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the retaining covers (2). 3. Remove the support.
Figure 2 Remove the Offset Motor
Installation
Figure 1 Remove the Support 3. Remove the Offset Motor (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Remove the screws (2). 5. Remove the Offset Motor.
1/05 4-185
REP 14.1.1
REP 14.1.1
1/05 4-186
REP 19.1 Removing the IDFE

Parts List on PL 19.1 Removal (Product Code GL2)
NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. This REP applies generically to both. Where differences between the units exist, the applicable information is specified by the product code for the IDFE (GL2 or MFY). Perform the following to remove the GL2 version of the IDFE: 1. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). CAUTION If any of the following steps are not correctly followed, the IDFE will not shut down properly, and steps 2-3 of this procedure must be repeated. 2. 3. Switch OFF the Main Switch for the Printer/IDFE. Wait for 30 seconds. NOTE: Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Disconnect all network cables from the IDFE. Disconnect and remove the 2 DDI Cables from the IDFE to the Printer. Disconnect the IDFE wiring harness from the Printer and the IDFE. Loosen the 4 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer. Remove the IDFE from the Printer. If necessary, remove the Token Ring PWB from the IDFE (PL 19.1) NOTE: The IDFE comes with 128 MB of memory installed. Customers may have additional memory kit(s) installed in the IDFE. Remove this memory for installation into the replacement IDFE.
8. 9.
Remove the IDFE from the Printer. If necessary, remove any additional memory from the IDFE (REP 19.3). NOTE: The IDFE comes 128 MB of memory installed. Customers may have additional memory kit(s) installed in the IDFE. Remove this memory for installation into the replacement IDFE.
Replacement (Product Code GL2)

Perform the following to replace the GL2 version of the IDFE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If necessary, reinstall the Token Ring PWB into the IDFE (REP 19.2). If necessary, reinstall the customers additional memory kit(s) into the IDFE (REP 19.3). If necessary, remove the IDFE Cover from the existing IDFE and install the Cover on the replacement IDFE. Install the IDFE on the Printer. Tighten the 4 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer. Install the IDFE wiring harness between the IDFE and the Printer. CAUTION Do not cross the 2 DDI Cables. 7. 8. 9. Connect the 2 DDI Cables between the IDFE and the Printer. Connect all network cables to the IDFE. Switch on the Main Power to the Printer.
10. Ask the customer to use the Configuration Report to verify that the printer connectivity settings are correct.
10. If necessary, remove any additional memory from the IDFE (REP 19.3).
Replacement (Product Code MFY)

Perform the following to replace the MFY version of the IDFE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. If necessary, install the customers additional memory kit(s) into the IDFE (REP 19.3). If necessary, remove the IDFE Cover from the existing IDFE and install the Cover on the replacement IDFE. Install the IDFE on the Printer. Tighten the 6 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer. Install the IDFE wiring harness between the IDFE and the Printer. CAUTION Do not cross the 2 DDI Cables. 6. 7. 8. 9. Connect the 2 DDI Cables between the IDFE and the Printer. Connect all network cables to the IDFE. Switch on the power to the Printer. Ask the customer to use the Configuration Report to verify that the printer connectivity settings are correct.
Removal (Product Code MFY)

Perform the following to remove the MFY version of the IDFE: 1. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). CAUTION If any of the following steps are not correctly followed, the IDFE will not shut down properly, and steps 2-3 of this procedure must be repeated. 2. 3. Switch OFF the Main Switch for the Printer/IDFE. Wait for 30 seconds. NOTE: Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. 4. Disconnect all network cables from the IDFE. NOTE: The 2 DDI Cables removed in the next step will be used on the replacement IDFE. 5. 6. 7. Disconnect and remove the 2 DDI Cables from the IDFE to the Printer. Disconnect the IDFE wiring harness from the Printer and the IDFE. Loosen the 6 mounting screws that secure the IDFE to the Printer.
1/05 4-187
REP 19.1
REP 19.2 Token Ring PWB (IDFE)

NOTE: There are two configurations of the IDFE for this machine. However, this procedure applies only to the IDFE with the GL2 product code. CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs or accessing componets within the IDFE. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the IDFE from the IOT (REP 19.1). Place the IDFE on a clean static-free work surface. Remove the Cover from the IDFE (PL 19.1). Remove the 2 screws and the 2 grounding clips for the Token Ring PWB. Remove the 2 screws from the SCAN IIT PWBA. Remove the Token Ring PWB from connectors J3 and J4 on the SCAN IIT PWBA. Remove the 2 standoffs from the Token Ring PWB.
REP 19.3 DIMMs on the Motherboard (IDFE)

CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs, DIMMs or accessing components within the IDFE. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the IDFE from the IOT (REP 19.1). Place the IDFE on a clean static-free work surface. Loosen the 9 screws and open the Cover for the IDFE (PL 19.1). Remove the DIMM(s) (PL 19.1).
Replacement
CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs, DIMMs or accessing components within the IDFE. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the DIMM(s) from their anti-static packaging. Install the DIMM(s) into the Motherboard (PL 19.1). Close the cover and tighten the 9 screws on the IDFE (PL 19.1). Re-install the IDFE on the IOT (REP 19.1).
Replacement
CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when handling PWBAs or accessing components within the IDFE. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Token Ring PWB from its anti-static packaging. Install the 2 standoffs and the 2 screws for the Token Ring PWB. Install the Token Ring PWB into connectors J3 and J4 on the SCAN IIT PWB. NOTE: Carefully press the Token Ring PWB down onto Connectors J3 and J4 until the PWB is completely seated on the SCAN IIT PWBA. Do not force the PWB onto the Connectors. If you have difficulty installing the Token Ring PWB, remove it completely and try again. NOTE: Do not install the Token Ring PWBA onto Connectors J1 and J2 on the SCAN IIT PWBA. Connectors J1 and J2 are not functional and the Token Ring PWBA will not operate. 4. 5. Install the 2 screws for the SCAN IIT PWBA. Install the 2 grounding clips and the 2 screws. NOTE: Ensure that the 2 grounding clips touch the Chassis to form a path to ground. 6. 7. Replace the Cover on the IDFE (PL 19.1). Reinstall the IDFE on the IOT (REP 19.1).
REP 19.2, REP 19.3
1/05 4-188
ADJ. 3.4.1 Full Rate/Half Rate Carriage Position

Parts List on PL 3.4 Purpose
To adjust positional relationships between the Full and Half Rate Carriages.
Adjustment WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. Open the Platen Cover. Remove the Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1). Prepare the positional jigs (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (4). 2. Remove the jigs (4).
Figure 2 Align the Half Rate Carriage 5. Install the jigs on the Half Rate Carriage (front/rear) (Figure 3). 1. Install the jigs (front/rear). 2. Lock the jigs with the screws.
Figure 1 Prepare the Jigs 4. Align the Half Rate Carriage jig hole with the rail jig hole (front/rear) (Figure 2).
1/05 4-189
ADJ. 3.4.1
Figure 3 Install the Half Rate Jigs NOTE: If the Half Rate Carriage jig hole and the rail jig hole do not match and the jigs cannot be installed, change the pulley lock position (Figure 4). 6. Perform the following to match the jig holes: 1. Loosen the set screws (2), rotate the pulley and match the jig holes. 2. Match the jig holes. 7.
Figure 4 Change the Half Rate Pulley Lock Position Install the jig on the frame jig hole. Check that the jig holes of the frame and the Full Rate Carriage match (front/rear) (Figure 5). 1. Install the jig (front/rear). 2. Lock them with the screw.
ADJ. 3.4.1
1/05 4-190
Figure 5 Install the Full Rate Jigs NOTE: If the Full Rate Carriage jig hole and the rail jig hole do not match and the jigs cannot be installed, loosen the lock screw of the carriage cable and match the holes (front/rear) (Figure 6). 1. 2. Loosen the screw, move the Full Rate Carriage, and match the holes (front/rear). Match the holes (front/rear).
Figure 6 Change the Full Rate Carriage Position
1/05 4-191
ADJ. 3.4.1
ADJ. 3.4.1
1/05 4-192
ADJ 6.1.1 Rotary Home Position Sensor

This procedure sets the correct NVM values for the Rotary Home Position Sensor.
ADJ 6.6.1 Rotary Development Housing Position

To properly position the Rotary Development Housings when performing various set ups.
Adjustment
1. Perform ADJ 6.6.1 to set the Rotary Assembly to the Cyan position. CAUTION Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed before attempting to run the machine. 2. Without moving the Rotary Assembly, remove the locating pin and return it to its storage position.
Adjustment WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Open the Front Door. Remove the following parts: a. b. Toner Trickle Bottle (PL 6.5) Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2) CAUTION Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed and returned to its storage position before attempting to run the machine. 3. Remove the Locating Pin (Figure 1). 1. Loosen the screw. 2. Remove the pin.
NOTE: After 776-064 is executed, the value is reset to 0 automatically. There is no need to reset the NVM value. 3. 4. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and change the value in NVM location 776-064 Home Sensor Adjustment Mode to 1. Enter dC330 Component Control. Execute 009-034 (Dispense Motor C). While the housing moves from the Cyan position to the Home position, the machine automatically measures and corrects the moving pulses.
Figure 1 Remove the Locating Pin
1/05 4-193
ADJ 6.1.1, ADJ 6.6.1
4.
Disconnect the connector (Figure 2). 1. Loosen the screws (2). 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 4. Pull out the connector from the hole.
Figure 3 Hook the Bracket Hooks 6. Remove the plate (Figure 4). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the plate. Figure 2 Disconnect the Connector 5. Hook the bracket hooks (2) as shown in the figure below (Figure 3). 1. Hook the bracket hooks (2).
ADJ 6.6.1
1/05 4-194
Figure 4 Remove the Plate 7. Rotate the Rotary Assembly until the appropriate development housing and the drum are facing each other (Figure 5).
Figure 5 Rotate the Rotary Assembly 8. Match the front notch of the Rotary Assembly with the frame hole (Diameter 8).
1/05 4-195
ADJ 6.6.1
9.
Insert the locating pin into the frame hole (Diameter 8) and lock it with the screw (Figure 6). 1. Insert the locating pin. 2. Lock the screw.
Figure 6 Insert the Locating Pin CAUTION Ensure that the Locating Pin is removed and returned to its storage position before attempting to run the machine. 10. Return to ADJ 6.1.1 to adjust the Rotary Home Position Sensor.
ADJ 6.6.1
1/05 4-196
ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip (DC701)

Purpose
To make a copy for checking and adjusting the Fuser Nip Width.
ADJ 8.8.1 External Heat Roll Nip Adjustment

Purpose
The purpose of this adjustment is to ensure correct Heat Roll-to-External Heat Roll contact, which will aid in proper fusing and minimize web wrapping.
Check
NOTE: Use Tray 5 for making a measurement copy and a nip width measurement. The paper used for the nip width measurement differs depending on the market: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. XE, FX: A4L (90GSM Colotech+) XC, XCL, AO: Letter L (24# Color Expressions) Enter dC701 Fuser Nip Measurement. (PC-Diag. screen: Adjustment/Other Adjustment/Set Fuser Nip Adjustment) Place the specified paper in Tray 5. Follow the instructions on the screen and print three measurement copies. Place the copies just made back into Tray 5, face up. Select Make width measurement repeat this three times. Check that the nip width is an average of 10.3 +/- 0.3mm, front to rear. Adjust the screw (located on side requiring nip width adjustment) (Figure 1). 1. Rotate in the A direction (CCW): nip width becomes smaller. 2. Rotate in the B direction (CW): nip width becomes larger. NOTE: 1/2 turn = approximately 0.5mm nip width change.
Check
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter DC701 (PWS Tool) or Subsystem Check / Fuser Nip Measurement from the UI diagnostic screen. Place 24lb (90gsm) 8.5 x 11 LEF paper in Tray 5. Select Nip Adjustment Black Copy and make 1 copy. Cut the copy to make 6 - 70 mm x 60mm test strips as shown in Figure 1.
Adjustment
Figure 1 dC701 Test Page 5. 6. 7. 8. Fold each test strip along the edge where the black and white portions meet. Open the Front Door and pull the Drawer Assembly out to the maintenance position (REP 8.1.1). Remove the Fuser Top Cover (PL 8.2 item 1). Install a cheater in the Front Door Interlock, and allow the machine to come to Ready.
Figure 1 Adjust the Nip 2. Repeat the check and adjustment until the Nip Width is within specification.
NOTE: If strips will not fit between Heat and External Heat Roll, close copy drawer for approximately. 3 seconds and open drawer to install strips. If, after doing this several times, you cannot position the strips, replace the assembly because the frame is bent. 9. Insert 2 folded test strips (Figure 2) between Heat Roll and External Heat Roll approximately 50 mm from ends of rolls.
1/05 4-197
ADJ 8.1.1, ADJ 8.8.1
Adjustment
NOTE: If there is no fused transfer area, or if the difference between sides is excessive, preset the height of the External Heat Roll Springs (PL 8.8 Item 18) to 24 mm (Figure 4).
TEST STRIPS ADJUSTMENT SCREWS Figure 2 Test Strip/Adjustment Screw locations 10. Close the Copy Drawer. The External Heat Roll Retract Motor will cam and uncam External Heat Roll. This will take approximately 3 seconds. 11. Open the drawer and remove the Test Strips. 12. Unfold the Test Strips slowly and check for a 3mm 0.5 fused transfer area on both strips (Figure 3).
3 0.5mm 1. 2.
Figure 4 Spring Height Adjust screws (Figure 2) to achieve 3mm 0.5 fused transfer area on both strips. To increase nip turn screw counterclockwise. To decrease nip turn screw clockwise.
Repeat Check/Adjustment until nip is within specification.
Figure 3 Fused Transfer Area 13. If the measurement is not within specification, perform the Adjustment.
ADJ 8.8.1
1/05 4-198
ADJ 9.1.1 MAX SET UP (dC929)

Purpose
To conduct a check of the machine and set it up so that excellent copy quality can be consistently obtained by stabilizing the development potential and copy density.
ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945)

Purpose
1. 2. 1. Calculate and set the white reference correction factor. Correct the IIT sensitivity dispersion. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC945. NOTE: Before performing the following procedure, be sure that the values for dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only) = 4 and the values for dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG =128 (change all values for low, medium, and high settings). 2. White Reference Adjustment: a. Put ten sheets of 11 x 17 Color Xpressions paper (NASG) or ten sheets of A3 Colotech+ paper (XE) on the Platen Glass, evenly covering the glass and registered against the registration edges. Select White Reference Adjustment. Select Start. Follow the instructions on the screen. (Refer to step a above.) The Red, Green, and Blue values in the White Reference Set Values box will automatically update. NOTE: After completing the Max Setup, check for background. If there is persistent background in the image area on machines equipped with a DADF, manually reduce NVM locations 715-091, 715-092, and 715-093 by five units each, until background is acceptable. Do not exceed a maximum of ten units for each setting. 3. CCD Calibration: a. b. c. d. e. f. 4. Place the lead edge of the Color Test Pattern against the left registration edge of the Platen Glass. Select CCD Calibration. Select Start. Follow the instructions on the screen. (Refer to step a above.) If OKs are displayed for the b* Judgement and Reflection Ratio Judgement, proceed to step 4. If an NG is displayed, check the lower left corner of the screen for faults. Correct the faults and repeat the adjustment.
Check
1. 2. Enter the PWS Diag. Screen for dC929. Do the MAX SETUP according to the following procedure: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945) ADJ 9.1.3 ADC AGC SET UP (dC934) ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM SET UP (dC933) ADJ 9.1.5 Highlight SET UP (dC918) ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density (dC922) ADJ 9.1.7 TRC Adjust (dC924)/TRC Check PG (dC939) - NOT TO BE USED AT THIS TIME ADJ 9.1.8 Color Balance Setup (dC919: Copier/Printer)
Adjustment
b. c. d. e.
Perform (ADJ 9.1.3) ADC AGC Setup (dC934 ADC/AGC Setup).
1/05 4-199
ADJ 9.1.1, ADJ 9.1.2
ADJ 9.1.3 ADC AGC Setup (dC934)

Purpose
To adjust the ADC gain to obtain the specified Vclean and to measure the Vclean non-uniformity on the belt.
ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM Setup (dC933)

Purpose
To set the output values of the VG, LD light amount, development bias, and ASG bias.
Adjustment
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC934. Select Start. If OKs are displayed in the Set Value Judgement column, proceed to Step 5 below. If an NG is displayed, check the lower left corner of the screen for Faults. Correct the faults and repeat the adjustment. Perform (ADJ 9.1.4) VH/VM Setup (dC933 VH/VM Setup).
Adjustment
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC933. Select Start. If OKs are displayed in the Judgement column, proceed to step 5. If an NG is displayed, check the lower left corner of the screen for faults. Correct the faults and repeat the adjustment. Perform (ADJ 9.1.5) IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 IOT Highlight Setup).
ADJ 9.1.3, ADJ 9.1.4
1/05 4-200
ADJ 9.1.5 IOT Highlight Setup (dC918)

Purpose
a. b. c. 1. 2. To make the Highlight density reproduction starting points uniform for K, Y, M and C. To make the In/Out Highlight density uniform. To set the ESV/ADC control target values. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC918. Check the In(board)/Out(board) density difference. a. b. c. d. Select Tray: 11 x 17 or A3. Select Screen: 300 Select Start. Visually check the density differences between the inboard (rear) and the outboard (front) side of the output print. If there is no density difference from the outboard to the inboard side, for all colors, go to step 3. If adjustment is necessary, select the In/Out box of the color to adjust and perform one of the following: NOTE: The density of the inboard side of the output print is fixed, and the outboard side is adjusted to match the inboard. f. 3. a. To lighten the outboard density, increase the value using the (+) button and press Save to store the value. To darken the outboard density, decrease the value using the (-) button and press Save to store the value.
ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density (dC922)

Purpose
1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. Measure the gradient patch by the ADC sensor and create the IOT TRC correction LUT. If the measurement result is not within the margin, display the Tone Up/Down evaluation. Display the two patch densities for each color on the IBT belt. Enter the PWS Diag.Screen for dC922. Select Tray: 11 x 17 or A3. Select Start. Check the TRC Judge column: If all boxes display OK, proceed to step 5. If an NG is displayed, return to ADC AGC Setup (ADJ 9.1.3).
Check/Adjustment
Adjustment
e.
NOTE: The TRC Judgement is based on the Measurement vs. Target Table for TRC Patches #1 and #2 at the bottom of the screen. Patch #1 is 30% Cin for all four colors, while Patch #2 is 65% Cin for YMC and 60% Cin for K. 5. Check the RADC Judge Column: If all boxes display OK, proceed to step 6. If an NG is displayed, return to ADC AGC Setup (ADJ 9.1.3).
NOTE: The RADC Judgement is based on RADC patches: 65% Cin for YMC and 60% Cin for K. (Separate patches from the TRC patches.) 6. Check the Tone Judge column. a. b. c. If all boxes display OK, proceed to step 7. If an Up or Down is displayed for a given color, that color requires toning up or down. Select Run to start the tone up/down routine. The Tone Interval column automatically displays the required quantity. NOTE: No output prints are generated. d. Return to step 2 when the routine is completed. If the Tone Judge and Tone Interval results do not change after several attempts at the tone up/down routine, go to IQ 10 Low Image Density RAP.
Repeat Step 2 until the inboard and the outboard densities are equal. Using the print made in step 2, visually check the densities of the color squares (from left to right: Mono K, C, M, Y, and Process K): The Mono K, C, M, and Y squares in the fourth row down should be barely visible. The Mono K, C, M, and Y squares in the eighth row down should not be visible.
Check the CMYK Highlight densities.
b. c.
If the print meets specification, go to step 4. If the print does not meet specification, select the appropriate color in the Adjustment box in the 300 Lines column. Adjust the value using the +/- buttons and select Save. (Increasing the value increases the density.) Select Tray (11 x 17 or A3), Screen (300) and Start. Repeat step 3 using this output print.
NOTE: The Tone Judge column is based on the RADC patch measurements vs the RADC targets as follows: Machines without ATC Sensors: The RADC targets shown on dC922 TRC Control/ Toner Density Adjustment screen are humidity adjusted ADC targets that Correspond to NVMs 773-281 thru 773-284. If the RADC Measurement is within 30 bits of the RADC Target, the density of the patch is close to the target density. No tone up or down is required. If the RADC Measurement is more than 30 bits from the RADC Target, but is within 100 bits of the RADC Target for YMC (80 for K), the density of the patch is lighter or darker than the target, but output densities will be corrected automatically by LUTs. No tone up or down is required.
d. 4. 5.
Change the values in the 600 Lines column to match the numbers in the 300 Lines column (if they do not already match) and select Save. Perform (ADJ 9.1.6) TRC Control (dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment).
1/05 4-201
ADJ 9.1.5, ADJ 9.1.6
If the RADC Measurement is more than 100 bits from the RADC Target for YMC (more than 80 bits for K), LUTs cannot compensate, and toning up or down is required. If one color is out of range, the other colors may display an Up or Down in the Tone Judge column to move closer to their targets, even though they are within the appropriate range. Machines with ATC Sensors: The RADC targets shown on the dC922 TRC Control/ Toner Density Adjustment screen are humidity adjusted ADC targets that correspond to NVMs 773-281 thru 773-284. They are not the final TC adjusted ADC targets that the RADC measurements are being compared to with this configuration. The final TC adjusted ADC targets can only be found in NVMs 773-961 thru 773-964. using these final TC adjusted ADC targets, the same 100 bits for YMC (80 bits for K) tone up/down criteria as above applies.
ADJ 9.1.7 TRC Adjust (dC924)/TRC Check PG (dC939)

Purpose
To manually fine adjust the low/medium/high densities (TRC) for each color. NOT TO BE USED AT THIS TIME. NOTE: Although it appears that the densities can be adjusted independently for different screen types, this is not the case. An adjustment for one screen type will affect all of the screens (300, 150C, 200R, and 600). Also, there is quite a bit of overlap among the low, medium, and high densities. For these reasons, it is recommended that dC924/939 not be used.
7.
Perform (ADJ 9.1.8) Color Balance Setup dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only) only if required by the customer.
ADJ 9.1.6, ADJ 9.1.7
1/05 4-202
ADJ 9.1.8 Color Balance Setup (dC919: Copier/Printer)

Purpose
To set the system highlight densities and highlight gray balance. NOTE: 1. 2. This function should be done when the customer has requested further adjustment of low end density reproduction. Before executing this function, the dC918 Highlight Setup (ADJ 9.1.5) must be done correctly.
ADJ 9.1.10 IOT Registration Series (dC129)

Purpose
The purpose is to adjust the position of the image on the page. This is done by changing the value in the appropriate NVM location in dC129. This controls where the ROS writes the image.
Introduction
This series consists of 3 procedures: Lead Edge Registration for all Paper Trays Side Edge Registration for Paper Trays 1 - 6 Side 2 Registration for Duplex Tray All procedures must be checked.
Adjustment
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the PWS Diag. Screen for dC919 (IIT machines only). Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass. Select Start. (The output copy is in Photo/Halftone mode at Normal L/D.) Visually check the 20% densities on the output copy against the 20% densities on the pattern. a. If necessary, adjust the Y,M,C,K density levels so that the densities on the copy match the densities on the test pattern or the customer preference, using the + buttons. (Increasing the value increases the density.) Select Save.
Lead Edge Registration (all Paper Trays) Purpose

NOTE: There is only one lead edge setting for the paper supply. The Duplex Tray has a separate setting for second-side lead edge. To correctly set the lead edge of the image in relation to the edge of the paper.
b. 5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.
Check
1. 2. Launch the DC12 / DCCS 50 Diagnostic Tool. Select dC129 from the DC Quick menu Select Start Data Read to read the NVM values for this adjustment.
NOTE: For 20% gray balance, match the Y, M, and C patch densities and let the gray be an outcome. The gray patch on the dC 919 copy should not exactly match the gray patch on the test pattern. Compare the gray patch on the dC 919 copy with the drawer/shipping sample, if available. Adjustments to dC 919 affect all modes. The grays will look different in different modes. If dC 919 is adjusted based on the Photo/Halftone output, check the output from the other modes (Text, Photo, etc) to be sure that the gray is acceptable.
NOTE: Do not use Tray 5 (MSI) to set Lead Edge Registration. 3. 4. 5. When the Data Read is done, select a paper tray from the Tray/Size menu. If possible, use a tray that contains the largest paper used by the customer. Enter 3 into the Print Count: box, and click on Start. Skew Check: Compare the second print to Figure 1. If the skew is out of spec, go to the IQ3 RAP. Resolve the cause of the skew before proceeding with this adjustment.
1/05 4-203
ADJ 9.1.8, ADJ 9.1.10
1
Check distance from intersection of lines to edge of paper at points A and B, and at points C and D A
1
Check distance from intersection of lines to edge of paper at points A and B A
Lead Edge of Paper
A, B
LE
A, B
C, D Dimension A, B 11x17 or 8.5x11 LEF: 10.0 mm +/- 0.5 mm A3 or A4 LEF: 7.6 mm +/- 0.5 mm 12x18inch w/Tag P39: 22.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm 12x18inch w/out Tag P39: 10.0 mm +/- 0.5 mm
2
Skew is within spec. if difference between A and B, or C and D, is less than 2.5 mm.
Figure 1 Checking Skew 6. Lead Edge Check: Check the Lead Edge Registration (Figure 2). If the measured values are not within specification, perform the Adjustment.
Figure 2 Checking Lead Edge Registration
Adjustment
1. Use the Right and Left Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the lead edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.11mm. The cumulative amount of shift is indicated in the Lead Reg. box. After adjusting the registration, click Set Adjust Value. Select Start.
2. 3.
NOTE: If the Lead Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for the starting point may be out of range. Reset NVM location 761-043 to the default value of 3954 and perform the adjustment again. 4. 5. 6. Repeat the check/adjustment until the specifications are met. Select Save [LR] to save the new NVM settings. Proceed to Side Edge Registration for Paper Trays 1 - 6.
Side Edge Registration for Paper Trays 1 - 6 Purpose

NOTE: Each Paper Tray has a separate setting for side edge registration. To correctly position the side edge of the image in relation to the outboard edge of the paper.
ADJ 9.1.10
1/05 4-204
Check
1. Check that paper is loaded in all trays, and that the paper guides are adjusted correctly. For Tray 1 and Tray 6 (if present), load 8.5 x 11 in. or A4 paper. For Tray 2 through Tray 5, use 11 x 17 in. or A3 paper if available. Enter 1 into the Print Count: box, and click on Print All. NOTE: Print All prints from each tray in numerical sequence from Tray 1 through Tray 6 (HCF - if installed). Make sure to keep the sheets in the correct sequence. 3. Check the Side Edge Registration (Figure 3) for each page. If the measured values are not within specification, perform the Adjustment for that tray. NOTE: When the lead edge is to the right, the side to be checked is at the bottom of the sheet.
NOTE: If the Side Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for the starting point may be out of range. Reset the NVM location (Table 1) for the affected tray to the default value and perform the adjustment again. 5. 6. 7. 8. Repeat the check/adjustment until the specifications are met. Select Save [SR] to save the new NVM settings. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each tray that requires adjustment. Proceed to Lead Edge/Side Edge Registration for Duplex Tray. Table 1 Side Edge Reg. Defaults Tray 1 2 3 4 5 6 Location 720-003 720-004 720-005 720-006 720-007 720-003 Default 7406 7406 7406 7406 7406 7406
2.
1
Check distance from intersection of lines to edge of paper at points C and D
Side 2 Registration for Duplex Tray Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to correctly position the lead edge and side edge of the image in relation to the edge of the paper. LE
Check
1. C, D Select Duplex from the Tray/Size menu. Ensure that Paper Tray 2 contains paper and that the paper guides are adjusted correctly. If available, load the tray with 11 x 17 in. or A3 paper. Enter 1 into the Print Count: box, and click on Start.
2.
C Dimension C, D 11x17, 12x18, or 8.5x11 LEF: 10.0 mm +/- 0.5 mm A3, SR-A3, or A4 LEF: 7.6 mm +/- 0.5 mm 8.5x11 or 8.5x14 SEF: 7.6 mm +/- 0.5 mm
D Side Edge of Paper
NOTE: Side 2 will be face up in the output tray. 3. Check Skew: Compare Side 2 of the print to Figure 1. If the skew is out of spec, go to the IQ3 RAP. Resolve the cause of the skew before proceeding with this adjustment. 4. Check Lead Edge: Check the Side 2 Lead Edge Registration (Figure 2). If the measured values are not within specification, perform the Adjustment. 5. Check Side Edge: Check the Side Edge Registration (Figure 3). If the measured values are not within specification, perform the Adjustment.
Figure 3 Checking Side Edge Registration
Adjustment
1. 2. Select the paper tray to be adjusted from the Tray/Size menu. Use the Up and Down Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the outboard edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.0423 mm. The cumulative amount of shift is indicated in the Side Reg. box. After adjusting the registration, click Set Adjust Value. Select Start.
Adjustment
Duplex Lead Edge: 1. Use the Right and Left Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the lead edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.1mm. The cumulative amount of shift is indicated in the Lead Reg. box. After adjusting the registration, click Set Adjust Value.
3. 4.
2.
1/05 4-205
ADJ 9.1.10
3.
Select Start.
NOTE: If the Lead Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for the starting point may be out of range. Reset NVM location 761-048 to the default value of 1000 and perform the adjustment again. 4. 5. 1. Repeat the check/adjustment until the specifications are met. Select Save [LR] to save the new NVM settings. Use the Up and Down Arrow buttons to move the image toward or away from the outboard edge of the paper. Each click on the button moves the image 0.0423 mm. The cumulative amount of shift is indicated in the Side Reg. box. After adjusting the registration, click Set Adjust Value. Select Start.
Duplex Side Edge:
2. 3.
NOTE: If the Side Edge Registration cannot be brought within specification, the NVM value for the starting point may be out of range. Reset NVM location 720-008 to the default value of 7406 and perform the adjustment again. 4. 5. Repeat the check/adjustment until the specifications are met. Select Save [SR] to save the new NVM settings.
ADJ 9.1.10
1/05 4-206
ADJ 9.1.14 IIT Lead Edge Registration

Purpose
To adjust the copy position. CAUTION Do not adjust the lead registration unless absolutely necessary, when the registration is not correct in the IIT, since the IIT lead registration influences the precision of the document size detection. NOTE: Before running this function, check/adjust Side/Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 9.1.10).
Adjustment
1. 2. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Change the value in location [715-132]: a. b. c. 1 step: 0.0635mm Increase the value to move the image away from the lead edge. Decrease the value to move the image toward the lead edge.
Check
1. 2. Load 11 x 17 (A3) paper in Tray 2, if available. Place the B&W test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and copy it as follows: a. b. c. d. 3. Copy mode: Black Paper tray: Tray 2 Magnification: 100 Number of copies: 2
Check on the 2nd copy that the distance from the side edge to the top of Step 3 on the LE1 and LE3 scales is 10.0mm +/- 2.1mm (Figure 1).
10.0mm +/2.1mm
Figure 1 Checking the IIT Lead Registration 4. If the value is not within the allowable range, perform the Adjustment:
1/05 4-207
ADJ 9.1.14
ADJ 9.1.15 IIT Side Edge Registration

Purpose
To adjust the IIT scan timing in the main scanning direction and to correct the copy position. CAUTION Do not adjust the side registration unless absolutely necessary, when the registration is not correct in the IIT, since the IIT side registration influences the precision of the document size detection. NOTE: Before running this function, check/adjust Side/Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 9.1.10).
Adjustment
1. 2. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write [715-029] (REGI ADJ revise VAL) Change the value. a. b. c. 1 step: 0.0635mm Increase the value to move the image toward the edge. Decrease the value to move the image away from the edge.
Check
1. 2. Load 11 x 17 (A3) paper in Tray 2, if available. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and copy it in the following copy mode: a. b. c. d. 3. Copy mode: Black Paper tray: Tray 2 Magnification: 100 Number of copies: 2
Check on the 2nd copy that the distance from the side edge to the top of Step 3 on the SE2 and SE3 scales is 10.0mm 2.1mm (Figure 1).
PAPER FEED DIRECTION
Edge of Copy
10.0mm 2.1mm
Figure 1 Checking the IIT Side Registration 4. If the value is not within the allowable range, adjust the timing as follows: 1/05 4-208 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
ADJ 9.1.15
ADJ 9.1.16 IIT Horizontal Magnification/Vertical Magnification (IIT Machine)

Purpose
To correct the horizontal (main) and vertical (sub) magnification for a 100% copy. CAUTION Do not change these magnifications unless absolutely necessary, when the magnifications in the IIT are not correctly set. These magnifications influence the AE/ACS/TI separation. NOTE: Before running this function, make sure that the IOT horizontal magnification/vertical magnification are correct.
PAPER FEED DIRECTION 200mm+/1mm
Check
1. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and copy it in the following copy mode: a. b. c. d. e. 2. a. Copy mode: Black Document type: Text/Photo Paper size: 11 x 17 or A3 Magnification: 100% Number of copies: 2 Horizontal magnification (Figure 1): Measure the 200mm line running from near LE1 to near LE3. If the dimension is not 200mm 1mm, adjust the magnification as described below.
Check the following on the 2nd copy:
Figure 1 Checking the IIT Horizontal Magnification b. Vertical Magnification (Figure 2):
Measure the 300mm line running from near LE1 to the trail edge of the 1.8lp ladder. If the dimension is not 300mm 1.5mm, adjust the magnification as described below.
1/05 4-209
ADJ 9.1.16
1. PAPER FEED DIRECTION 2.
Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write. Change the value in location [715-133] (MAG Revise VAL). a. b. c. 1 step = 0.1% Increase the value to enlarge. Decrease the value to reduce.
300mm +/1.5mm
Figure 2 Checking the IIT Vertical Magnification
Adjustment
Horizontal magnification NOTE: If you change the magnification, the following problems may occur: a. b. 1. 2. Degraded resolution because of the ASIC digital correction Degraded AE/ACS/TI separation Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write [715-023] (FS Mag Adjustment). Change the value. a. b. c. 1 step = 0.1% Increase the value to enlarge. Decrease the value to reduce.
Vertical magnification NOTE: If you change the magnification, the following problems may occur: a. b. Improper RGB overlapping/color shift Degraded AE/ACS/TI separation Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
ADJ 9.1.16
1/05 4-210
ADJ 9.1.17 Tray 5 Guide (dC740)

Purpose
To check if the width direction size of the Tray 5 guide is being correctly detected. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. To set the sensor output values for the minimum/maximum position of the guide. To display the result of the width direction size detection. Enter dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment. Move the Tray 5 guide to the minimum position. Select Set at the minimum position on the PWS screen. Click Start. If OK, go to Step 5. If NG: a. b. 5. 6. 7. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and record the value in location [760-001] (Tray 5 Size Sensor Analog Value). Enter the recorded value into loc. [760-002] Tray 5 Size Sensor analog smallest Value. Exit dC131. Displayed paper group A4SEF A4SEF A4SEF A4SEF A4SEF B4SEF B4SEF B4SEF B4SEF B4SEF B4SEF B4SEF A3SEF A3SEF A3SEF A3SEF
Table 1 Paper Size Groups A/D range Paper 222`177 222`177 222`177 222`177 222`177 176`8D 176`8D 176`8D 176`8D 176`8D 176`8D 176`8D 8C`00 8C`00 8C`00 8C`00 A4S 8.5"~11"S 8.5"~12.4"S 8.5"~13"S 8.5"~14"S 8"~10L B5L B4S Width (mm) 210 215.9 215.9 215.9 215.9 254 257 257
Adjustment
TFX Special Paper 267 L TFX Special Paper 267 S 8.5"~11"L 11"~17"S A4L A3S 12"~18S" 12.6"~18S" 279.4 279.4 297 297 304.8 320
Move the Tray 5 guide to the maximum position. Enter dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment. Select Set at the maximum position on the PWS screen. Click Start. If OK, go to Step 8. If NG: a. b. Enter the dC131 NVM Read/Write and record the NVM (760-001 Tray 5 Size Sensor Analog Value) data. Enter the 760-001 data in the 760-002 Tray 5 Size Sensor analog smallest Value. Exit dC131.
8. 9.
If the Minimum and Maximum are being set, all sizes are automatically adjusted. If a particular size sheet causes a problem, check the following. Set the particular paper sheet in Tray 5 and adjust the guide accordingly.
10. Enter the dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment. Select Guide Test in the PWS screen. Click Start. The paper size group is displayed in the result window in the PWS screen. 11. Consult the table below and check if the correct group is displayed for the particular paper type. If an incorrect group is displayed, repeat Steps 2 - 7. Table 1 Paper Size Groups Displayed paper group Postcard Postcard A5SEF A5SEF A5SEF B5SEF A4SEF A/D range Paper 3FF`385 3FF`385 385`2AC 385`2AC 385`2AC 2AB`223 222`177 Postcard S A6S B6S 5.5"~8.5"S A5S B5S A5L Width (mm) 100 105 128 139.7 148 182 210
1/05 4-211
ADJ 9.1.17
ADJ 9.1.18 Touch Panel Starting Point Correction

Purpose
To align the starting points of the UI display and the touch panel switches.
5.
Press the starting point connection switch again in order to display the adjustment screen (Figure 2). A pattern of intersecting grid lines (P1 thru P9) will be displayed.
Check
This adjustment is required when replacing the Control Panel or the UI PWB.
Adjustment
NOTE: Each copier is equipped with an adjusting pen for this adjustment, which is stored under the right side panel of the control panel. 1. 2. Switch off the power. Access the UI touch panel and adjusting pen. a. b. 3. 4. Remove the right side panel from the control panel. Remove the adjusting pen. 6. Figure 2 Adjustment Screen #1 Apply the point of the adjusting pen in sequence to each line intersection(P1 thru P9) on the adjustment screen. 7. ADJUSTING PEN 8. One or more LEDs may light on the UI PWB. A new pattern of intersecting grid lines will be displayed. If four audible beeps are heard, adjustment is OK. If you dont hear four beeps, perform the adjustment again from the third step. Press the starting point correction switch again to display the next screen. Apply the adjusting pen to each of the four line intersections (Figure 3).
Switch on the copier. Push the starting point correction switch on the lower right corner of the UI PWB (Figure 1). A blank screen will be displayed.
DISPLAY
Figure 3 Adjustment Screen #2 9. LED(S) STARTING POINT CORRECTION SWITCH Reinstall the adjusting pen and all removed parts.
Figure 1 UI PWB and Touch Panel Display
ADJ 9.1.18
1/05 4-212
ADJ 9.1.19 Tray 2, 3, and 4 for 12 x 18 Paper

Purpose
To set Paper Trays 2, 3, and 4 to use 12 x 18 paper.
Adjustment
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the Paper Tray from the machine. Remove the Rear Stop (PL 2.1) item 17. Remove the Side Guide Plate (PL 2.3) item 1. Remove the Bottom Plate (PL 2.3) item 2. Remove the (3) screws securing the Regi. Side Guide (PL 2.3) item 8. Position the guide flush with the front wall and secure it with the (3) screws. Remove the End Guide (PL 3.2) item 10 by removing the E-rings and washers on the underside of the tray. Slide the guide to align the slot (Figure 1). 1. Align the slot in the guide with the hole in the tray, and secure with a screw. Install the Bottom Plate and the Side Guide Plate. Install the tray into the machine.
10. Store the Regi. End Guide, E-rings, washers and the Rear Stop Bracket in the tray 1 storage compartment. NOTE: The UI will sense and display the 12 x 18 size for the modified tray. NOTE: Paper specifications for Trays 2, 3, and 4; Standard Weight 16 to 24 #, Heavy Weight 32 #. NOTE: If heavy weight paper is to be fed from the modified tray a set up change is required. Go to Tools Management, disable Auto Tray and set up the modified tray for Heavy Weight paper. Figure 1 Align the Slot
1/05 4-213
ADJ 9.1.19
ADJ 9.1.19
1/05 4-214
ADJ 12.1.1 DADF Side Registration

To ensure that the document is set into the correct position on the Platen (front-to-rear drum axis direction).
5. 6. 7.
Check that the value A is 10.0mm 0.6mm. If the value is not within the range, perform Side/Lead Edge Registration(ADJ 9.1.10), then return to this procedure. Place the two document pages in the DADF. (The number "1" page is on top, and the bottom edge is fed in first.) Set the following copy mode and make a copy. a. b. c. d. Copy mode: Black Paper tray: 11 x 17 or A3 Magnification: 100 Number of copies: 1
Check
NOTE: Before running this function, the side registration in the Platen mode must be properly adjusted (ADJ 9.1.15). 1. 2. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the Platen so that there is no gap between the test pattern and the Registration Guide at the rear. Copy the test pattern in the following copy mode: a. b. c. d. 3. 4. Copy mode: Black Paper tray: 11 x 17 or A3 Magnification: 100 Number of copies: 2 8.
Using the number 2 copy, measure the distance between the paper side edge and the target line. Assume this distance is B (Figure 2).
Number the ejected document pages as "1" and "2" in the order that they are ejected. Measure the distance between the paper side edge of the second document (2) and the target line. Assume this distance is A (Figure 1).
B Edge of Copy
Figure 2 Checking the Side Registration B 9. A Edge of Copy Check if B - A is 0 1mm.
Adjustment
NOTE: You can adjust the side registration of the DADF simplex or duplex. 1. 2. Enter the dC131 NVM Read/Write[715-028] (DADF IPS Offset) If B in step 8 of the check is, a. Figure 1 Checking the Side Registration A b. 10.6mm or more: Increase the NVM value; 9.4mm or less: Decrease the NVM value. (each NVM step=1mm) 1/05 4-215 Repairs and Adjustments
ADJ 12.1.1
3.
Repeat check steps 1 - 5 and adjustment steps 1- 2 until the value is within the allowed range (B=10mm 0.6mm).
ADJ 12.3.1 Left/Right Counter Balance

To correct the spring pressure on the Left/Right Counter Balance.
Check
1. Operate the DADF so that it closes from the Open state. Check whether the DADF remains in the open position when fully raised and closes under its own weight from a height of 100 50mm (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Checking the Counter Balance
Adjustment WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. Remove the rear cover PL 12.1. Adjust the Left/Right Counter Balance (Figure 2). NOTE: If item b in the check steps is adjusted, adjust only the Left Counter Balance (as a rule). (This is because floating may occur at the right side due to DADF rigidity.) a. b. Rotate in the A direction for stronger spring pressure. Rotate in the B direction for weaker spring pressure.
ADJ 12.1.1, ADJ 12.3.1
1/05 4-216
1. Loosen the nut. 2. Turn the set screw to adjust the spring pressure. 3. Tighten the nut.
ADJ 12.3.2 DADF Parallelism

To correct the ADF front/back position by adjusting the Right Counter Balance and to correct any skew problems.
Check WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Front Cover, PL 12.1. Remove the Entrance Tray, PL 12.1. Remove the Document Transport (REP 12.10.1. Steps 1 and 2). Measure the distance between the DADF rear frame and the front surface of the Paper Side Guide. Check that the distance is 20mm (Figure 1).
NOTE: (Figure 1) The measurement point must be the center of the Right Counter Balance. Press the scale onto the DADF rear frame.
Figure 2 Adjusting the Left/Right Counter Balance
Figure 1 Checking the Frame-to-Guide Dimension
1/05 4-217
ADJ 12.3.1, ADJ 12.3.2
Adjustment
CAUTION The front/back position adjustment must be within 1mm. Do not adjust more than that. 1. Rotate the adjustment screw and adjust the DADF front/back position (Figure 2). a. b. Rotate in the A direction: The DADF moves to the rear. Rotate in the B direction: The DADF moves to the front. 1. Loosen the screws (4). 2. Loosen the screws (2). 3. Rotate the adjusting screw. 4. Tighten the screws (2). 5. Tighten the screws (4).
ADJ 12.3.3 DADF Height

To correct the DADF operation by adjusting the Counter Balance height. a. b. If the DADF mounting height is too low (23.5mm or less), too much load will be applied to the DADF Transport Motor, causing problems such as paper jams and malfunctions. If the DADF mounting height is too high (24.5mm or more), small-size paper may cause problems such as skewing and jams.
Check WARNING
Turn power off and disconnect the power plug. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 2. Front Cover, PL 12.1 Item 11 Rear Cover, PL 12.1 Item 1 Entrance Tray, PL 12.1 Item 6
Check the height of the Left/Right Counter Balance. At the two measurement positions shown in the figure, make sure that the gap between the Platen Glass Side Guide and the Transport Assembly Frame is 24 0.3mm (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Adjusting the DADF Front/Back Position 2. 3. 4. Adjust the left side according to the right side adjustment. Repeat the check steps to make sure that the adjustment has been done properly. Set various size paper sheets in the DADF and make sure there is no skew.
ADJ 12.3.2, ADJ 12.3.3
1/05 4-218
Figure 2 Preparing to Adjust Figure 1 Checking the Gap 2. Close the DADF and, by turning the Adjusting Screw, adjust the gap between the Platen Glass Side Guide and the Transport Assembly Frame (Figure 3).
Adjustment
NOTE: The steps are the same for the left and right sides. 1. Open the DADF and loosen the screws (Figure 2). 1. Loosen the screws (2).
1/05 4-219
ADJ 12.3.3
Figure 3 Adjusting the Gap NOTE: a. b. 3. Rotate once in the A direction, approximately 0.75mm lower. Rotate once in the B direction, approximately 0.75mm higher. 1. Tighten the screws (2). 4.
Figure 4 Tightening the Screws Repeat the check steps and make sure that the height is correct.
Open the DADF and tighten the screws (Figure 4).
ADJ 12.3.3
1/05 4-220
ADJ 12.4.1 DADF Lead Edge Registration

To ensure that the document is set into the correct position on the Platen (document feed direction). NOTE: Before running this function, the lead edge registration in platen mode must be adjusted (ADJ 9.1.14).
3.
Check that the distance between the paper top and the target line in the second copy is 10mm 0.6mm. If the distance is not within this range, do the following to adjust the registration (Figure 1).
Check
Check (Simplex mode) 1. 2. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the Platen so that there is no gap between the test pattern and the Top Registration Gate. Copy the test pattern in the following copy mode: a. b. c. d. 3. Copy mode: Black Paper tray: 11 x 17 or A3 Magnification: 100 Number of copies: 2
10.0 +/- 0.6 mm
Measure the distance between the paper top edge and the target line of the second document and check if the distance is 10mm 0.6mm. If the distance is not within this range, perform IIT Lead Edge Registration (ADJ 9.1.14), then return to this procedure. Place the copies made in Step 2 into the DADF. Place the second page at the bottom. Make sure the bottom edge (trail edge) is fed first. Measure the distance from the top of the paper to the target line of the copies made in Step 2 and Step 4. the difference between the two dimensions must be 1.5mm or less. Figure 1 Checking the Top Registration
4. 5.
Adjustment
Adjustment steps (Simplex mode) 1. 2. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write [710-004] (DADF Lead Registration Time Simplex). If the value obtained in the check steps is: a. b. c. 10.6mm or more, decrease the NVM value; 9.4mm or less, increase the NVM value. (each NVM step=0.3mm) Repeat Step 2 until the value is within the range (10mm 0.6mm). b. c. 1. 1. 2. Place the test pattern (82E8220) on the platen and make an A4S duplex copy. Place the copy made in Step 1 in the DADF and make a copy in the following mode: Copy mode: Black Paper tray: 8.5 x 11 or A4S Magnification: 100 Number of copies: 1 Mode: duplex-single Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 2.
Adjustment
Adjustment steps (Duplex mode) NOTE: Depending on the paper size, the NVM adjustment differs. a. DC131 [10-007] (Lead Registration Time Duplex 8.5x11LEF): Default 59): B5LEF, A5LEF, 8.5 x 11LEF DC131 [710-008] (Lead Registration Time Duplex A4SEF): Default 60): B5SEF, A5SEF, 8.5 x 11SEF DC131 [710-009] (Lead Registration Time Duplex 8.5x13LEF): Default 61): 8.5 x 14SEF, B4, A3 Check the paper size, enter dC131 NVM Read/Write and select the DC131 Chain Code from above 9each NVM step=0.3mm). Change the NVM value as shown below and adjust the registration to be within the allowed range (10mm 0.6mm). If the distance between the paper top and the target line measured in the check steps is: a. b. 10.6mm or more, decrease the NVM value; 9.4mm or less, increase the NVM value. (1 Step=0.3mm)
Check
Check (Duplex mode)
1/05 4-221
ADJ 12.4.1
3.
Repeat the adjustment steps until the registration is within the allowed range (10mm 0.6mm).
ADJ 12.4.1
1/05 4-222
5 Parts List
Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... Subsystem Information ................................................................................................... Symbology ...................................................................................................................... 5-3 5-4 5-5 PL 3.4 Full/Half Rate Carriage ........................................................................................ PL 3.5 IPS ....................................................................................................................... 5-43 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-47 5-48 5-49 5-50 5-51 5-52 5-53 5-54 5-55 5-56 5-57 5-58 5-59 5-60 5-61 5-62 5-63 5-64 5-65 5-66 5-67 5-68 5-69 5-70 5-71 5-72 5-73 5-74 5-75 5-76 5-77 5-78 5-79
ROS
PL 4.1 ROS .....................................................................................................................
Parts Lists Drive

PL 1.1 Drum/IBT Drive .................................................................................................... PL 1.2 Main Motor, Drum Brush Drive ............................................................................ PL 1.3 Deve./BPD Drive, IBT Cleaner Retract ................................................................ PL 1.4 2nd BTR/Oil Roll/Auger Drive .............................................................................. PL 1.5 Main Motor 2, Tray 5/Regi./Tray 1 Take Away Drive ........................................... PL 1.6 Fuser/Exit Drive ................................................................................................... 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-30 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-37 5-38 5-39 5-40 5-41 5-42
Xerographics
PL 5.1 ESV Sensor, Erase Lamp .................................................................................... PL 5.2 CC/PCC Connector, Waste Toner Bottle (IOT Rear)........................................... PL 5.3 Drum Component................................................................................................. PL 5.4 Charge/Pre Clean Corotron ................................................................................. PL 5.5 Waste Toner Auger..............................................................................................
Development
PL 6.1 Development Components .................................................................................. PL 6.2 Toner Cartridge Unit ............................................................................................ PL 6.3 Toner Cartridge Component (Part 1 of 2) ............................................................ PL 6.4 Toner Cartridge Component (Part 2 of 2) ............................................................ PL 6.5 Rotary Dispenser ................................................................................................. PL 6.6 Deve. Housing ..................................................................................................... PL 6.7 Rotary Frame/Auger ............................................................................................
Paper Transport
PL 2.1 Tray 1/2/3/4, Tray Sensor, Label ......................................................................... PL 2.2 Tray 1 Component ............................................................................................... PL 2.3 Tray 2/3/4 Component ......................................................................................... PL 2.4 Tray 1-4 Feeder ................................................................................................... PL 2.5 Feeder Component (Part 1 of 2).......................................................................... PL 2.6 Feeder Component (Part 2 of 2).......................................................................... PL 2.7A Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Part 1 of 2)............................................................. PL 2.7B Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Part 2 of 2)............................................................. PL 2.8 Left Lower Cover ................................................................................................. PL 2.9 Tray 5 Unit, Tray 5 Feed Clutch/Roll ................................................................... PL 2.10 Tray 5 Upper (Part 1 of 2).................................................................................. PL 2.11 Tray 5 Upper (Part 2 of 2).................................................................................. PL 2.12 Tray 5 Base ....................................................................................................... PL 2.13 Tray 5 Tray ........................................................................................................ PL 2.14 Regi. Unit, DTS HVPS ....................................................................................... PL 2.15 Regi.-Regi.......................................................................................................... PL 2.16 Regi.-Pre Regi. .................................................................................................. PL 2.17 Vacuum Transport ............................................................................................. PL 2.18 Drawer Accessory, Duplex Baffle ...................................................................... PL 2.19 Drawer Frame, Duplex Out Motor/Roll, Duplex Chute....................................... PL 2.20 Duplex In/Aligner Baffle Component.................................................................. PL 2.21 Duplex In/Aligner Chute Component ................................................................. PL 2.22 Drawer Frame Component ................................................................................ PL 2.23 Inverter Unit ....................................................................................................... PL 2.24 Inverter 1 Component ........................................................................................ PL 2.25 Inverter 2 Component (Part 1 of 2) .................................................................... PL 2.26 Inverter 2 Component (Part 2 of 2) ....................................................................
IBT
PL 7.1 IBT System Component....................................................................................... PL 7.2 Rail Front Plate .................................................................................................... PL 7.3 Left/Right Rail ...................................................................................................... PL 7.5 IBT-Belt, Sensor, Steering Roll ............................................................................ PL 7.6 IBT Component (Part 1 of 2)................................................................................ PL 7.7 IBT Component (Part 2 of 2)................................................................................ PL 7.8 IBT Cleaner.......................................................................................................... PL 7.9 2nd BTR............................................................................................................... PL 7.10 2nd BTR Component .........................................................................................
Fusing
PL 8.1 Fuser Unit, Front Cover ....................................................................................... PL 8.2 Fuser Sub Assembly............................................................................................ PL 8.3 Heat/Pressure Roll............................................................................................... PL 8.4 Heat Roll Sensor, External Heat Roll Retract/Web Motor.................................... PL 8.5 Web Shutter, Cleaning Roll (Heat Roll) ............................................................... PL 8.6 Pressure Roll Sensor, Pressure Roll Nip ............................................................. PL 8.7 Oil Pump/Tank ..................................................................................................... PL 8.8 External Heat Roll ................................................................................................ PL 8.9 Pick Up/Donor Roll............................................................................................... PL 8.10 Exit Chute ..........................................................................................................
IIT
PL 3.1 Platen Glass: ITT ................................................................................................. PL 3.2 CCD PWB, Sensor .............................................................................................. PL 3.3 Carriage Cable/Motor ..........................................................................................
Electrical
PL 9.1 Front, Right .......................................................................................................... PL 9.2 IOT Top/Rear ....................................................................................................... PL 9.3 Tray Module, Rear ...............................................................................................
1/05 5-1
Parts Lists
PL 9.4 Drawer Connectors.............................................................................................. PL 9.5 Control Panel ....................................................................................................... PL 9.6 EMI/Safety for Fuser Heat Lamp (50 Hz) ............................................................
5-80 5-81 5-82 5-83 5-84 5-85 5-86 5-87 5-88 5-89 5-90 5-91 5-92 5-93 5-94 5-95 5-96 5-97 5-98 5-99 5-100 5-101 5-102 5-103 5-104 5-105 5-106 5-107 5-108 5-109 5-110 5-111 5-112 5-113 5-114 5-115 5-116 5-117
Part Number Index ..........................................................................................................
5-119
Air System
PL 10.1 Air System-Front Door ....................................................................................... PL 10.2 Air System-Rear, Right ......................................................................................
Cover
PL 11.1 Platen/Top Cover............................................................................................... PL 11.2 Front/Right Cover .............................................................................................. PL 11.3 Rear/Left Cover .................................................................................................
DADF
PL 12.1 Front/Rear Cover, Entrance Tray ...................................................................... PL 12.2 Top Cover, Registration Gate Solenoid ............................................................. PL 12.3 Counter Balance, DADF Control PWB .............................................................. PL 12.4 Document Feed Chute (Upper), Feed Motor ..................................................... PL 12.5 Document Feed Chute (Lower) ......................................................................... PL 12.6 DADF Belt Motor, Duplex Roll ........................................................................... PL 12.7 Duplex Chute ..................................................................................................... PL 12.8 Registration Roll ................................................................................................ PL 12.9 Exit Motor/Chute ................................................................................................ PL 12.10 Document Transport, Platen Belt..................................................................... PL 12.11 Platen Glass, Registration Gate, Exit Tray: DADF ..........................................
Mail Box
PL 13.1 Mail Box Accessory ........................................................................................... PL 13.2 Docking Rail....................................................................................................... PL 13.3 Mail Box Sub Assembly ..................................................................................... PL 13.4 Mail Box Cover .................................................................................................. PL 13.5 ACT Cover, Bin Tray 1....................................................................................... PL 13.6 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8 ................................................................................................. PL 13.7 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9 ................................................................................................. PL 13.8 Bin Tray 10 ........................................................................................................ PL 13.9 Mail Box Roll, Chute .......................................................................................... PL 13.10 Mail Box Motor, PWB....................................................................................... PL 13.11 Decurler Cover................................................................................................. PL 13.12 Decurler Chute, PWB ...................................................................................... PL 13.13 Decurler Roll .................................................................................................... PL 13.14 Decurler Transport Roll.................................................................................... PL 13.15 Cabinet ............................................................................................................
Offset Catch Tray

PL 14.1 Offset Catch Tray...............................................................................................
IDFE Components
PL 19.1 IDFE Assembly and Components......................................................................
Electrical Connectors
PL 25.1 Electrical Connectors .........................................................................................
Common Hardware
Common Hardware ......................................................................................................... Parts Lists
1/05 5-2
Introduction
Overview
The Parts List section identifies all part numbers and the corresponding location of all spared subsystem components. Abbreviation R/E REF: SCSI W/ W/O Refer to
Table 1 Meaning Reduction/Enlargement Small Computer Systems Interface With Without Table 2 Operating Companies Abbreviation AO NASG - US NASG Canada XE Meaning Americas Operations North American Solutions Group - US North American Solutions Group Canada Xerox Europe
Organization
Parts Lists Each item number in the part number listing corresponds to an item number in the related illustration. All the parts in a given subsystem of the machine will be located in the same illustration or in a series of associated illustrations. Electrical Connectors and Fasteners This section contains the illustrations and descriptions of the plugs, jacks, and fasteners used in the machine. A part number listing of the connectors is included. Common Hardware The common hardware is listed in alphabetical order by the letter or letters used to identify each item in the part number listing and in the illustrations. Dimensions are in millimeters unless otherwise identified. Part Number Index This index lists all the spared parts in the machine in numerical order. Each number is followed by a reference to the parts list on which the part may be found.
Symbology
Symbology used in the Parts List section is identified in the Symbology section.
Service Procedure Referencing

If a part or assembly has an associated repair or adjustment procedure, the procedure number will be listed at the end of the part description in the parts lists e.g. (REP 5.1, ADJ 5.3)
Other Information
Abbreviations Abbreviations are used in the parts lists and the exploded view illustrations to provide information in a limited amount of space. The following abbreviations are used in this manual: Table 1 Abbreviation A3 A4 A5 AD AWG EMI GB KB MB MM MOD NOHAD PL P/O Meaning 297 x 594 Millimeters 210 x 297 Millimeters 148 x 210 Millimeters Auto Duplex American Wire Gauge Electro Magnetic Induction Giga Byte Kilo Byte Mega Byte Millimeters Magneto Optical Drive Noise Ozone Heat Air Dirt Parts List Part of
1/05 5-223
Parts Lists
Introduction
Subsystem Information
Use of the Term Assembly
The term assembly will be used for items in the part number listing that include other itemized parts in the part number listing. When the word assembly is found in the part number listing, there will be a corresponding item number on the illustrations followed by a bracket and a listing of the contents of the assembly.
Brackets
A bracket is used when an assembly or kit is spared, but is not shown in the illustration. The item number of the assembly or kit precedes the bracket; the item numbers of the piece parts follow the bracket.
Tag
The notation W/Tag in the parts description indicates that the part configuration has been updated. Check the change Tag index in the General Information section of the Service Data for the name and purpose of the modification. In some cases, a part or assembly may be spared in two versions: with the Tag and without the Tag. In those cases, use whichever part is appropriate for the configuration of the machine on which the part is to be installed. If the machine does not have a particular Tag and the only replacement part available is listed as W/Tag, install the Tag kit or all of the piece parts. The Change Tag Index tells you which kit or piece parts you need. Whenever you install a Tag kit or all the piece parts that make up a Tag, mark the appropriate number on the Tag matrix.
Parts Lists
Subsystem Information
1/05 5-224
Symbology
A Tag number within a circle pointing to an item number shows that the part has been changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure 1). Information on the modification is in the Change Tag Index.
A Tag number within a circle having a shaded bar and pointing to an item number shows that the configuration of the part shown is the configuration before the part was changed by the Tag number within the circle (Figure 2).
Figure 2 Without Tag Symbol Figure 1 With Tag Symbol
1/05 5-225
Parts Lists
Symbology
A tag number within a circle with no apex shows that the entire drawing has been changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure 3). Information on the modification is in the Change Tag Index.
A tag number within a circle with no apex and having a shaded bar shows that the entire drawing was the configuration before being changed by the tag number within the circle (Figure 4).
Figure 4 Entire Drawing Without Tag Symbol Figure 3 Entire Drawing With Tag Symbol
Parts Lists
Symbology
1/05 5-226
PL 1.1 Drum/IBT Drive

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 007K84662 007K84671 007E55221 007E55230 007E52280 009E32160 127K21671 600K86080 007K84871 007K84680 Description IBT Drive Assembly Gear (22/64) Bracket (Motor) (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1) Gear Gear (IBT Drive) Bracket (IBT Drive) (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 1.1 Item 1) Fly Wheel (Not Spared) Stopper Ring (Not Spared) Spacer Ring (Not Spared) Flange (Not Spared) Gear Spring Drum Motor Drum Motor Kit (W/TAG P34) Pin (Not Spared) Bearing (Not Spared) Drum Idler Gear Assembly Gear (23/64) Stud (P/O PL 1.1 Item 19) Bracket (P/O PL 1.1 Item 19)
1/05 5-227
Parts Lists
PL 1.1
PL 1.2 Main Motor, Drum Brush Drive

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 007K84820 007K84170 007K84634 007E50120 007E49980 007K84701 007E50112 007K84641 007K84650 127K21321 Description Main Motor Bracket Assembly Bracket (Main Motor) (P/O PL 1.2 Item 1) Gear (56/20) Drum Brush Drive Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 1.2 Item 4) Bracket (P/O PL 1.2 Item 4) Gear (Drum Brush) Gear Shaft (P/O PL 1.2 Item 4) Bearing (P/O PL 1.2 Item 4) Gear Gear Bearing (P/O PL 1.2 Item 4) Screw (P/O PL 1.2 Item 4) Gear Pulley (42/27) Gear Pulley (56/27) Main Motor
Parts Lists
PL 1.2
1/05 5-228
PL 1.3 Deve./BPD Drive, IBT Cleaner Retract

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Part 007K84468 007K84282 007K84291 006K84003 007E51790 007E50052 809E08690 007E50030 007E51800 007E51810 121K14881 007K84332 007E52290 121K17941 007E50042 423W55355 Description Developer/BPO Drive and IBT Cleaner Retract Assembly BPO Roll Drive Assembly Developer Drive Developer Housing Drive Shaft Bracket (P/O PL 1.3 Item 2) Bracket (P/O PL 1.3 Item 2) Gear Gear Pulley (P/O PL 1.3 Item 2) Coupling (BPO Drive) (P/O PL 1.3 Item 2) Spring Bracket (P/O PL 1.3 Item 3) Gear (18/44 ) Gear (16/26 ) Gear (22) Gear (P/O PL 1.3 Item 3) (40/44 ) Pulley (P/O PL 1.3 Item 3) Shaft (P/O PL 1.3 Item 4) Developer Clutch Gear (Developer Housing Drive) Bearing (P/O PL 1.3 Item 4) Bearing (P/O PL 1.3 Item 4) Bracket (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Gear Coupling (IBT Cleaner Retract) (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Cleaner Retract Clutch Shaft (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Screw (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Connector (P/O PL 1.3 Item 1) Bracket (Not Spared) Gear Pulley Spring (Not Spared) Belt (Developer Drive) (REP 1.3.1 )
1/05 5-229
Parts Lists
PL 1.3
PL 1.4 2nd BTR/Oil Roll/Auger Drive

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Part 600K85872 007E57660 007K84160 007K84265 007K84231 007K84240 423W57554 007E49950 130E82190 007E49940 007K84251 604K14830 Description 2nd BTR Drive Assembly (W/TAG P33) Bracket (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) Gear (16 ) (2nd BTR Roll ) Gear Shaft (P/O PL 1.4 Item 42) Shaft (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) Truque Limiter (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) 2nd BTR Retract Clutch Assembly (P/O PL 1.4 Item 42) Gear (28) (2nd BTR Retract) Bearing (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) Screw (P/O PL 1.4 Item 1) Oil Roll/Auger Drive Assembly Auger Drive (23T) (Includes gear and bracket) Tension Roll Spring (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Screw (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Belt (2nd BTR, Auger) (REP 1.4.1 ) Bearing (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Gear Oil Roll Clutch (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Bearing (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Bearing (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Bracket (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Cam (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Pin (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Wheel (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Shaft (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Bracket (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Oil Roll Home Position Sensor Gear (Waste Toner Bottle Auger) Pulley (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Shaft (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Connector (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Bearing (P/O PL 1.4 Item 15) Gear Pulley E-Ring (P/O PL 1.4 Item 42) E-Ring (P/O PL 1.4 Item 42) 2BTR Clutch Kit
Parts Lists
PL 1.4
1/05 5-230
PL 1.5 Main Motor 2, Tray 5/Regi./Tray 1 Take Away Drive

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 007K84313 127K21311 007E46890 007E46880 407W08223 407W08273 407W08222 407W08328 009P62975 121K30050 007E52250 Description Tray 5/Regi./Tray 1 Take Away Drive Assembly (REP 1.5.1 ) Bracket (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Main Motor 2 Gear Gear Dumper (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Gear Gear Gear Gear (28) Bracket (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Coupling (Slide) (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Coupling (Transmitter) (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Spring T/A Feed Clutch Shaft (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Gear (Tray 1 T/A Roll) Bearing (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.5 Item 1)
1/05 5-231
Parts Lists
PL 1.5
PL 1.6 Fuser/Exit Drive

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Part 007K84577 121K21612 007E50270 007E50280 007K84553 007K84800 007E51490 007K84690 007K84360 007K84922 007K84110 007E51680 127K21301 Description Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly (W/TAG P9) (REP 1.6.3) Bracket (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1) Fuser Nip Clutch Shaft (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1) Gear (26) Gear (16) (Exit Roll) Bearing (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1) Gear (25/19) (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1) Exit Drive Assembly (REP 1.6.1 ) Bracket (P/O PL 1.6 Item 11) Bracket (P/O PL 1.6 Item 1) Gear (41) Gear (23) Shaft (P/O PL 1.6 Item 11) Bearing (P/O PL 1.6 Item 11) Screw (P/O PL 1.6 Item 11) Gear (27) Gear (37/28) (Fuser Nip) Fuser Drive Assembly (Includes PWB) (REP 1.6.2 ) Gear (Fuser/V-Tra. Drive) (Fuser/V-tra. Drive ) Fuser Motor (P/O PL 1.6 Item 21) Bracket (P/O PL 1.6 Item 21) Gear (22) Exit Motor Bearing (Not Spared) Bearing (Not Spared) Motor Cover (Not Spared) Fuser Rear Bracket (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 1.6
1/05 5-232
PL 2.1 Tray 1/2/3/4, Tray Sensor, Label

Item 1 2 Part 130E82190 110K10460 Description Tray 1 Set Sensor (REP 2.1.1 ) Tray 2 Size Sensor, Tray 3 Size Sensor, Tray 4 Size Sensor (REP 2.1.2 ) Stopper Tray 1 Assembly Label (Tray 1) Label (Max) Label (Installation) Tray 2 Assembly, Tray 3 Assembly, Tray 4 Assembly Label (Tray 3) Label (Tray 4) Label (Tray 2) Label (Max) (Not Spared) Label (Size E End 1) Label (Installation) Label (Size E Side) Label (Max) Label (Size E End 2) Stopper (Not Spared) Stopper (Not Spared)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
003E38110 050K33129 891E76090 891E78030 891E82980 050K40941 891E49510 891E49520 891E49060 891E80410 891E80481 891E80400 891E78020 891E80420
1/05 5-233
Parts Lists
PL 2.1
PL 2.2 Tray 1 Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 015K34310 038E88641 038E88650 050E87465 019E39131 019K94390 015K41381 015K41370 015K31460 007E50410 007E30970 013E83730 007E50430 007E50420 Description Bottom Plate Assembly Bottom Plate (P/O PL 2.2 Item 1) Pad (P/O PL 2.2 Item 1) Side Guide End Guide Cassette Pad Pad Right Rail Plate Screw (P/O PL 2.1 Item 4) Left Rail Plate Shaft (P/O PL 2.1 Item 4) Rear Plate Gear (18/30) Gear (13) Bearing Gear (60) Gear (20/53) Cover (P/O PL 2.1 Item 4)
Parts Lists
PL 2.2
1/05 5-234
PL 2.3 Tray 2/3/4 Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Part 038K84621 019K94400 015K41503 038E88922 019E39131 038K83973 050E88159 007E50410 007E30970 007E50420 007E50430 Description Side Guide Plate Bottom Plate (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Plate (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Pad Actuator End Guide (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Plate Actuator Side Guide (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Regi. Side Guide Pad End Guide Cassette Link (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Roll (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Spacer (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Plate (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Shaft (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Plate (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Gear (18/30) Gear (13) Gear (20/53) Gear (60) Bearing (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8) Screw (P/O PL 2.1 Item 8)
1/05 5-235
Parts Lists
PL 2.3
PL 2.4 Tray 1-4 Feeder

Item 1 Part 059K09948 Description Tray 1 Feeder Assembly, Tray 2 Feeder Assembly, Tray 3 Feeder Assembly, Tray 4 Feeder Assembly (REP 2.4.1 ) Chute Chute Hinge Stud (Not Spared)
2 3 4 5
054E88230 054E88220 003E40140
Parts Lists
PL 2.4
1/05 5-236
PL 2.5 Feeder Component (Part 1 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Part 059K09561 007E52210 007E52220 007E52230 007E52240 032E10250 011E08060 011E08050 809E19530 013E15290 011E08071 012E98281 809E19540 121K17561 130E82190 130E82650 Description Feed/Nudger Roll Assembly (REP 2.5.1 ) Pin (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Gear (14) Gear (15) Gear (13/16) Gear (17) Bearing (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Support (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Paper Guide Nudger Roll (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Feed Roll (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Spring (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Paper Guide (P/O PL 2.5 Item 1) Lever Lever Spring Bearing Shaft (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Lever Link Spring Nudger Solenoid No Paper Sensor, Tray Stack Height Sensor Pre Feed Sensor Front Up Chute (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Actuator (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1)
1/05 5-237
Parts Lists
PL 2.5
PL 2.6 Feeder Component (Part 2 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Part 830E09140 127K23230 009E61300 413W75959 007K83610 006K83280 007E31090 007E52150 005K81750 007E52130 007E52140 005K81760 007E52171 007E52161 809E19560 007E56210 005K81600 059K09591 809E09100 Description Motor Bracket Feed/Lift Motor (REP 2.6.1 ) Bracket (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Spring Gear (31) (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Spacer (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Bearing Gear (24) Shaft Gear (13) Bearing (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Gear (16) One Way Clutch Gear (26) Gear (13) One Way Clutch Shaft (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Gear (20) Bearing (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Gear (17) Spring Retard Lever (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Gear (15) Collar (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Friction Clutch Shaft (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Spring (P/O PL 2.4 Item 1) Retard Roll Assembly (REP 2.6.2 ) Retard Roll (P/O PL 2.6 Item 30) Spring Pin (P/O PL 2.6 Item 30)
Parts Lists
PL 2.6
1/05 5-238
PL 2.7A Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Part 1 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 Part 007K84415 121K30050 Description Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (REP 2.7.1 ) Bearing (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1) Tray 2 T/A Feed Clutch, Tray 3 T/A Feed Clutch, Tray 4 T/A Feed Clutch (REP 2.7.2 ) Gear (43) Motor Plate (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1) Gear (22) Gear (23/45) Gear (56) Gear (45) Gear (100) Bracket (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1) T/A Motor (REP 2.7.3 )
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
007K84422 007E51580 007K84731 007E56020 007E56030 007E56010 127K23051
1/05 5-239
Parts Lists
PL 2.7A
PL 2.7B Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive (Part 2 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part 005K82730 059K06831 059K09930 600K74790 Description Gear (Teeth on both gears, pitch in different directions) (Not Spared) One Way Clutch T/A Roll 1 T/A Roll 2, T/A Roll 3, T/A Roll 4 Bearing (P/O PL 2.7A Item 1) Noise Impulse Kit T/A Roll 3, T/A Roll 4 (P/O PL 2.7B Item 6) One Way Clutch (P/O PL 2.7B Item 6) Bracket (P/O PL 2.7B Item 6)
Parts Lists
PL 2.7B
1/05 5-240
PL 2.8 Left Lower Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Part 048K65250 054K10350 809E07780 809E07770 054E10780 130E82650 013E83380 162K37160 059E92920 009E63110 003E38120 048E61482 011E07950 003E38130 003K84500 054K10341 130K60770 Description Left Lower Cover (Upper) and Chute 1 Assembly Chute 1 Assembly Left Lower Cover (Upper) (P/O PL 2.8 Item 1) Spring Spring Baffle T/A Sensor, Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor (REP 2.8.1 ) Bearing Bracket (P/O PL 2.8 Item 2) Wire Harness Pinch Roll Spring Hinge Left Lower Cover (Lower) Handle Latch Spring (Not Spared) Hinge Spring (Not Spared) Spring (Not Spared) Chute 2/3/4 Assembly Baffle (P/O PL 2.8 Item 21) Bracket (P/O PL 2.8 Item 21) Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor, Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor, Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor (REP 2.8.2 ) L/H Cover Interlock Switch Spring (P/O PL 2.8 Item 21) Bearing (P/O PL 2.8 Item 21)
25 26 27
068K14170
1/05 5-241
Parts Lists
PL 2.8
PL 2.9 Tray 5 Unit, Tray 5 Feed Clutch/Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 059K08821 121K17550 113E22970 114E11400 121E89780 830E09840 830E17961 059K31171 891E51581 891E73914 891E73982 891E73971 Description Tray 5 Feed Roll Collar (Not Spared) Tray 5 Feed Clutch Holder Bearing (Not Spared) Gear (Not Spared) Core (Not Spared) Connector (P703) Magnet Bracket Stopper Plate Pad (Not Spared) Chute (Not Spared) Tray 5 Assembly (REP 2.9.1 ) Label (Max) Label (Installation) Label (Size) Label (5) Bearing (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 2.9
1/05 5-242
PL 2.10 Tray 5 Upper (Part 1 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part 130E82190 059K08831 059E90770 130K58070 009E56020 009E56030 120E13100 809E09470 809E09410 Description Tray 5 Paper Sensor Pinch Roll Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Take Away Pinch Roll (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Feed Sensor Spring Spring Actuator Spring Latch Lever (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Spring Upper Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Latch Bracket (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Inner Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Paper Guide (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
1/05 5-243
Parts Lists
PL 2.10
PL 2.11 Tray 5 Upper (Part 2 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Part 032E10010 059K08850 007E31180 130E82190 121K17561 007E31160 009E76430 809E09410 Description Chute (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Shaft (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Paper Guide Support (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Collar (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Nudger Roll, Tray 5 Feed Roll (REP 2.11.1 REP 2.11.2 ) Gear Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Stack Up Sensor Gear (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid Gear Spring Lever Plate (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Chute (Upper Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Collar (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Link (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Gear (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Link (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Spring Lever (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Gear (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14)
Parts Lists
PL 2.11
1/05 5-244
PL 2.12 Tray 5 Base

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Part 110E93440 007E23260 007E50250 007E51430 007E22430 127K23470 059K08840 007E54910 005K82490 130E82190 113E24030 Description Bracket (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bracket (Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Damper (Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Damper (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Screw (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Interlock Switch Switch Bracket (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Frame (Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Frame (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Gear (12/28) Gear (10/20) Gear Frame (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Gear (12/28) Tray 5 Lift Motor (REP 2.12.1 ) Chute (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Shaft (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Retard Roll (REP 2.12.2 ) Shaft (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Collar (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Collar (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Support (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Spring (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Gear Fiction Clutch Collar (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Spring (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Stack Down Sensor Shaft (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Feeder Harness (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bracket Cover (Front) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bracket Cover (Rear) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Gear Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Connector (J703)
1/05 5-245
Parts Lists
PL 2.12
PL 2.13 Tray 5 Tray

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 009E53370 130K58001 038K14700 038E89060 019K93320 007E66030 600K82960 604K07960 600K85970 Description Screw (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Spring Link (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Bearing (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Size Sensor Tray (Lower) (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Rail Bracket (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray (Extension) (P/O PL 2.13 Item 21) Pad (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Regi. Guide Side Guide Pad (Bottom) Bottom Plate (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tray 5 Tray (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Lift Shaft (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Gear Actuator (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Tie Plate (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Lower Cover (P/O PL 2.9 Item 14) Size Sensor Kit Tray 5 Extension Kit Lift Shaft and Gear Kit
Parts Lists
PL 2.13
1/05 5-246
PL 2.14 Regi. Unit, DTS HVPS

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Part 059K10025 105K14923 Description Regi. Unit Assembly (REP 2.14.1 ) Chute (Not Spared) Stopper (Not Spared) Cover (Not Spared) Guide (Not Spared) Cover (Not Spared) DTS HVPS
1/05 5-247
Parts Lists
PL 2.14
PL 2.15 Regi.-Regi.
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 048K65921 160K46290 130K60600 127K21871 054K11072 809E09430 013E88020 059K08760 013E88030 013E82490 809E08090 059K08790 007E51370 Description Regi. Cover Assembly Regi. Cover (P/O PL 2.15 Item 1) OHP Sensor 1, OHP Sensor 2 Regi. Sensor (REP 2.15.1 ) Regi. Motor (REP 2.15.3 ) Upper Chute Spring Spring (P/O PL 2.15 Item 6) Bearing Pinch Roll Bearing Chute (P/O PL 2.15 Item 6) Bearing Label (P/O PL 2.15 Item 6) Spring Bearing (Not Spared) Regi. Roll (REP 2.15.2 ) Gear
Parts Lists
PL 2.15
1/05 5-248
PL 2.16 Regi.-Pre Regi.

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 005E85810 130K58030 059K08780 054K11090 013E88030 059K08770 013E88020 013E82490 009P61135 Description Coupling Pre Regi. Sensor (REP 2.16.1 ) Bearing (Not Spared) Pre Regi. Roll (REP 2.16.2 ) Pre Regi. Chute Assembly Pre Regi. Chute (P/O PL 2.16 Item 5) Bearing Spring (P/O PL 2.16 Item 5) Pinch Roll Bearing Spring (P/O PL 2.16 Item 5) Bearing Spring Paper Guide (P/O PL 2.16 Item 5)
1/05 5-249
Parts Lists
PL 2.16
PL 2.17 Vacuum Transport

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Part 059K10122 023E15480 059E92950 413W77359 007E46610 006K84210 007E49781 Description Vacuum Transport Assembly (REP 2.17.1 ) Vacuum Transport Belt (REP 2.17.2 ) Idler Roll Snap Bearing (P/O PL 2.17 Item 1) Chute (P/O PL 2.17 Item 1) Frame (P/O PL 2.17 Item 1) Seal (P/O PL 2.17 Item 1) Bearing Gear Shaft Gear
Parts Lists
PL 2.17
1/05 5-250
PL 2.18 Drawer Accessory, Duplex Baffle

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Part 054K11395 054K11416 003K84760 003K84750 032K93621 891E51561 891E51571 891E74062 015K33973 Description Duplex In Baffle Assembly Aligner Baffle Assembly (W/TAG P3) Hinge Hinge Guide Drawer Cover (Not Spared) Label Label Label Screw (Not Spared) Drawer Interlock Switch Guide (Not Spared) Guide (Not Spared)
1/05 5-251
Parts Lists
PL 2.18
PL 2.19 Drawer Frame, Duplex Out Motor/Roll, Duplex Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 054K11363 054K11373 059K08600 007E51840 423W82555 011K90420 127K23191 050K34065 038E89072 Description Duplex In Chute Assembly Aligner Chute Assembly Duplex Out Roll Bearing (Not Spared) Bearing (Not Spared) Bearing (Not Spared) Gear Pulley (Not Spared) Pulley (Not Spared) Belt Joint Shaft (Not Spared) Duplex Out Motor Drawer Frame Assembly Paper Guide Link (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 2.19
1/05 5-252
PL 2.20 Duplex In/Aligner Baffle Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Part 011E08041 003E40151 003E36290 809E16590 809E16580 809E14710 059K05750 059E92980 809E20210 011E08031 809E09040 Description Pinch Roll (Duplex In) (Roll:F) (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Duplex In Baffle (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Lever Latch Knob Spring Spring (16MM) Spring (12.4MM) Label (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Pinch Roll (Duplex Path) (Roll: F) (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Stopper (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Guide (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Spring (P/O PL 2.18 Item 1) Pinch Roll (Duplex Out) Aligner Baffle (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2) Pinch Roll Link (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2) Spring (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2) Spring Spring (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2) Shaft (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2) Lever Guide (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2) Spring Label (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2) Stopper (P/O PL 2.18 Item 2)
1/05 5-253
Parts Lists
PL 2.20
PL 2.21 Duplex In/Aligner Chute Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Part 059K08610 059K08621 423W11055 809E09150 059K09331 059K09341 059K09350 130K93210 423W10055 Description Duplex In Roll Duplex Path Roll Pulley (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1) Duplex In Chute (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1) Duplex Belt 1, Duplex Belt 2 (REP 2.21.3) Bearing (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1) Spring Coupling (Trans) (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1) Coupling (Slide) (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1) Pipe (P/O PL 2.19 Item 1) Aligner Chute (P/O PL 2.19 Item 2) Aligner Roll 1 Aligner Roll 2 Aligner Roll 3 Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 2.19 Item 2) Duplex Path Sensor, Duplex Out Sensor (REP 2.21.1 REP 2.21.2 ) Frange (P/O PL 2.19 Item 2) Bearing (P/O PL 2.19 Item 2) Belt Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 2.19 Item 2)
Parts Lists
PL 2.21
1/05 5-254
PL 2.22 Drawer Frame Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Part 001E50590 001E46411 003K85871 003K85851 003E37791 006E56620 008E93261 011E08111 809E09210 809E09171 809E09180 114E11390 113E24020 Description Rail (Left) Rail (Right) Shaft (P/O PL 2.19 Item 14) Bracket (P/O PL 2.19 Item 14) Wire Harness (P/O PL 2.19 Item 14) Screw (P/O PL 2.19 Item 14) Stopper (P/O PL 2.19 Item 14) Latch Assembly Knob Bracket (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Latch Shaft Stud (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Cam Joint Handle (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Bearing (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Bearing (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Plate (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Spring Spacer (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Block (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Spring Spring Finger Guide (P/O PL 2.22 Item 8) Frame Connector Drawer Connector (P701)
1/05 5-255
Parts Lists
PL 2.22
PL 2.23 Inverter Unit

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Part 059K08686 059K33080 054K11512 015E58040 012E98271 009E84220 003K84472 003K84792 050K36514 Description Inverter 1 Assembly (REP 2.23.1 ) Inverter 2 Assembly (REP 2.23.2) Inverter 3 Upper Chute Assembly Stopper Link Spring Inverter 3 Upper Chute (P/O PL 2.23 Item 3) Inverter 3 Lower Chute (Not Spared) Hinge Hinge Exit Tray
Parts Lists
PL 2.23
1/05 5-256
PL 2.24 Inverter 1 Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Part 054K10303 127K21661 121K16372 110E93440 001K56820 009E84220 059K09022 130K93220 007E50130 059K09030 007E51630 007E51641 059K09040 007K84601 007E91170 130K57810 007E50140 059E92850 011K94050 Description Inverter 1 Upper Chute Inverter Motor (REP 2.24.1 ) Release Solenoid (REP 2.24.2 ) Inverter Cover Switch Frame (P/O PL 2.23 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 2.23 Item 1) Rear Frame Spring Inverter Roll (Upper) Inverter Path Sensor Gear (14) Inverter Roll (Duplex) Gear (25/30) Gear Bracket (P/O PL 2.23 Item 1) Inverter Roll (Lower) Bearing (P/O PL 2.23 Item 1) Gear Gear (27) Duplex In Sensor Gear (15/20) Roll Lever Cover (P/O PL 2.23 Item 1) Solenoid Cover (P/O PL 2.23 Item 1)
1/05 5-257
Parts Lists
PL 2.24
PL 2.25 Inverter 2 Component (Part 1 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 054K10317 105E98690 121K16383 130K59660 802E30660 054K14675 130K57820 050K36851 891E82991 Description Inverter 2 Upper Chute Eliminator Inverter 2 Transport (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2) Inverter Gate Solenoid Bearing (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2) Exit Path Sensor Gate 1 Link (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2) Inverter 2 Cover Exit Chute M/C Exit Sensor Gate 1 Label Screw (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2) Screw (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2) Screw (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2) Spring (P/O PL 2.23 Item 2)
Parts Lists
PL 2.25
1/05 5-258
PL 2.26 Inverter 2 Component (Part 2 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Part 054K10323 009E62420 001K57333 059K14872 054K10333 059E92841 038E88772 054K11161 809E09530 011K94391 413W66250 005K82470 600K79560 600K83590 Description Inverter 2 Lower Baffle Inverter 2 Lower Chute (P/O PL 2.26 Item 1) Pinch Roll (P/O PL 2.26 Item 1) Spring Bearing (P/O PL 2.25 Item 3) Frame Exit Roll Assembly (W/TAG P23) (REP 2.26.1) Inverter 2 Mid.1 Baffle Chute (P/O PL 2.26 Item 8) Pinch Roll Spring (P/O PL 2.26 Item 8) Guide Shaft (P/O PL 2.26 Item 8) Inverter 2 Mid. 2 Baffle Link Shaft (P/O PL 2.25 Item 3) Bracket (P/O PL 2.25 Item 3) Spring Lever Spring (P/O PL 2.25 Item 3) Bearing Roller Shaft (P/O PL 2.26 Item 7) Clutch (One-way) Stopper (P/O PL 2.26 Item 7) Offset Roller Kit (W/O TAG P23) Offset Corrugation Mark Roller Kit (W/O TAG P23)
1/05 5-259
Parts Lists
PL 2.26
PL 3.1 Platen Glass: ITT

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 090K92572 015K37641 Description Stopper (Not Spared) (REP 3.1.2 ) Bracket (Rear) (Not Spared) Stopper (Rear) (Not Spared) Bracket (Front) (Not Spared) Stopper (Front) (Not Spared) Brace (Not Spared) Stud (Not Spared) Right Side Plate (Not Spared) Platen Glass (With ADF) (REP 3.1.1) Left Side Plate Screw (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 3.1
1/05 5-260
PL 3.2 CCD PWB, Sensor

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 048K71860 127K23590 107E06650 110K08471 130K57990 160K48230 160K51931 130K87150 Description Cable Stopper (Not Spared) Cable Stopper IPS Fan Bracket (Not Spared) IIT Regi. Sensor Platen Open Switch Platen Angle Sensor IIT Driver PWB Lens Assembly (Not Spared) CCD PWB Assembly (REP 3.2.1 ) Lens Cover (Not Spared) APS Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Shield (Not Spared) Ribbon Cable (P/O PL 3.2 Item 10) CCD PWB (P/O PL 3.2 Item 10)
1/05 5-261
Parts Lists
PL 3.2
PL 3.3 Carriage Cable/Motor

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 063E94040 020K94970 012K93440 012K93450 063E94050 020E25100 023E15550 020E25090 009E62830 017E92140 127K21513 Description Tape Frame (Not Spared) Pulley Front Carriage Cable (REP 3.3.1 ) Rear Carriage Cable (REP 3.3.1 ) Tape Timing Pulley Belt Capstan Shaft (Not Spared) Capstan Pulley Bearing (Not Spared) Spring Foot Stud (Not Spared) Pin (Not Spared) Carriage Motor (REP 3.3.2 )
Parts Lists
PL 3.3
1/05 5-262
PL 3.4 Full/Half Rate Carriage

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 041K94210 117E15970 062E98370 019E50400 118E12090 122E92000 105E08900 041K93792 062E98380 809E09110 809E15210 Description Harness Guide (Not Spared) Full Rate Carriage Assembly Full Rate Carriage (P/O PL 3.4 Item 2) Lamp Wire Harness (REP 3.4.2 ) Guide (P/O PL 3.4 Item 2) No.1 Mirror Clip (Single) Insulator Exposure Lamp (REP 3.4.1 ) Lamp Ballast PWB Half Rate Carriage Assembly (REP 3.4.1 ) Half Rate Carriage (P/O PL 3.4 Item 11) No.2, No.3 Mirror Dumper (P/O PL 3.4 Item 11) Clamp (Not Spared) Clip (Double) Clip (Single)
1/05 5-263
Parts Lists
PL 3.4
PL 3.5 IPS
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 105E07351 105E07322 160K57369 160K42710 160K60380 160K84771 160K57375 160K46113 048E62151 117E15951 160K53462 Description IPS Chassis (Not Spared) (REP 3.5.1 ) IIT/IPS LVPS (50 Hz) IIT/IPS LVPS (60 Hz) Pre. IPS PWB BR PWB XCD PWB Post. IPS PWB Mem. Sys PWB Option Memory PWB (Duplex) Wire Harness (DC) (Not Spared) Wire Harness (AC) (Not Spared) Cover Cover (Not Spared) Cable IPS Edit PWB Spacer Screw (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 3.5
1/05 5-264
PL 4.1 ROS
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part 062K10670 160K42851 048K76921 600K86001 Description ROS Assembly (W/TAG P5, TAG P32) (REP 4.1.1) ROS (P/O PL 4.1 Item 1) Ldd PWB Screw (P/O PL 4.1 Item 1) Wire Harness (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Bracket (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) ROS Top Cover ROS and Halftone PWB Repair Kit (W/TAG P32)
1/05 5-265
Parts Lists
PL 4.1
PL 5.1 ESV Sensor, Erase Lamp

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 114K81062 054K10151 122K92892 130K57720 006K84192 Description Connector (EP ROM PWB) Duct and Erase Lamp Assembly Erase Lamp (REP 5.1.1 ) Duct (P/O PL 5.1 Item 2) Duct (Not Spared) ESV Sensor and Cover Assembly (Not Spared) ESV Sensor ESV Sensor Cover (P/O PL 5.1 Item 6) Screw (P/O PL 5.1 Item 6) Plate (P/O PL 5.1 Item 6) Drum Shaft Screw (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 5.1
1/05 5-266
PL 5.2 CC/PCC Connector, Waste Toner Bottle (IOT Rear)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part 114K81082 114K81362 115K91160 007K84593 130E91010 130K82921 Description CC Connector PCC Connector Earth Plate Gear (Bottle Auger) Waste Toner Full Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Waste Toner Bottle Sensor Wire Harness (Not Spared) Waste Toner Bottle (REF: PL 5.2) (Not Spared)
1/05 5-267
Parts Lists
PL 5.2
PL 5.3 Drum Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Part 802K04428 059K09532 042K91811 033K92970 035E40690 Description Front Plate (Not Spared) (REP 5.3.1 ) Front Cover Drum (REP 5.3.1) Bearing (Not Spared) Bearing (Not Spared) Seal (Top Cover) (Not Spared) Top Cover (Not Spared) Seal (Blade Side) (Not Spared) Shutter Spring (Not Spared) Shutter Pipe (Not Spared) Auger (Not Spared) EP ROM PWB (Not Spared) Rear Cover (Not Spared) Cleaning Brush (REP 5.3.3 ) Bearing (Not Spared) Cleaning Blade (REP 5.3.4 ) Gear (Not Spared) Bearing (Not Spared) Side Seal Gear (Not Spared) Gear (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Stopper (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 5.3
1/05 5-268
PL 5.4 Charge/Pre Clean Corotron

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 125K03650 125K93062 118E12251 118K91900 009P62935 117K92100 604K22290 Description BPO Roll and Duct (Not Spared) Charge Corotron Assembly Spring (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) CC Wire (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) (REP 5.4.1 ) Arc Shield (Front) (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) Arc Shield (Rear) (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) CC Shield (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) Insulator (Front) (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) Insulator (Rear) (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) Grid Spring (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) CC Grid (P/O PL 5.4 Item 2) Pre Clean Corotron Assembly PCC Shield (P/O PL 5.4 Item 12) Insulator (Front) Insulator (Rear) Arc Shield (Rear) (Not Spared) Arc Shield (Front) (Not Spared) Spring PCC Wire (REP 5.4.2 ) Screw (Not Spared) Earth Wire (Not Spared) Wire Repair Kit
1/05 5-269
Parts Lists
PL 5.4
PL 5.5 Waste Toner Auger

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Part 119K90765 059K09510 059K09500 059K09490 011K94141 011K93990 011K94160 011E08021 011K94150 011E08010 052E93470 005E85760 052E93460 013K81260 007E52030 413W08350 413W88650 423W82054 007E51830 052E93640 413W77559 009E84150 052E93480 013K81270 068K14541 007E52040 007E52050 068K14550 020E26710 035E45550 020E26990 Description Waste Toner Junction Assembly (REP 5.5.1 ) Auger (Waste Toner Bottle) Auger (Drum) Auger Wing Plate (P/O PL 5.5 Item 1) Joint (Drum) Joint (IBT) Joint (Rear) Joint (Front) Joint (Rear) Joint (Front) Pipe Ring Pipe Bearing Spring (P/O PL 5.5 Item 1) Gear Bearing Bearing Plate (P/O PL 5.5 Item 1) Auger Belt (REP 5.5.2 ) Gear Pulley Shutter Bearing Spring Pipe (Waste Toner Bottle) Bearing Bracket Gear Gear Auger Sensor Pulley Seal Pulley
Parts Lists
PL 5.5
1/05 5-270
PL 6.1 Development Components

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 011K94091 121K16401 809E15180 130E82190 600K82900 068K86934 115K91133 127K28490 130K87380 099P03019 Description Rotary Latch Lever Assembly (REP 6.1.3 ) Rotary Latch Solenoid Assembly Solenoid (P/O PL 6.1 Item 2) Lever (P/O PL 6.1 Item 2) Spring Gear (P/O PL 6.1 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 6.1 Item 1) Rotary Latch Sensor Bearing (Not Spared) Rotary PWB (P/O PL 6.1 Item 22) High Frequence Noise Rotary PWB Kit (W/TAG P18) (REP 6.1.1) Film Seal (Not Spared) Bracket (Not Spared) Gear Assembly Bias Brush (REP 6.1.4 ) Rotary Motor Rotary Home Position Sensor (REP 6.1.2 ) Bearing (Not Spared) Support Tray (Not Spared) High Frequence Noise Rotary PWB (P/O PL 6.1 Item 11) Fuses Rotary PWB Assembly (Not Spared) (W/TAG P2)
1/05 5-271
Parts Lists
PL 6.1
PL 6.2 Toner Cartridge Unit

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Part 094K91307 055E30790 891E74014 891E74023 891E74033 891E74003 Description Toner Cartridge (Y) (Not Spared) (REF: PL 6.2) Toner Cartridge (M) (Not Spared) (REF: PL 6.2)) Toner Cartridge (C) (Not Spared) (REF: PL 6.2) Toner Cartridge (K) (Not Spared) (REF: PL 6.2)) Toner Cartridge Unit Assembly (REP 6.2.1 ) Shutter Toner Cartridge Cover (Not Spared) Label (Y) Label (M) Label (C) Label (K)
Parts Lists
PL 6.2
1/05 5-272
PL 6.3 Toner Cartridge Component (Part 1 of 2)

Item 1 2 Part 802K08652 130E82720 Description Toner Cartridge Housing (C) (REP 6.3.1 ) Low Toner Sensor (C), Low Toner Sensor (M), Low Toner Sensor (Y), Low Toner Sensor (K) Toner Cartridge Housing (M) (REP 6.3.1 ) Screw (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5) Toner Cartridge Housing (Y) (REP 6.3.1 ) Cartridge Motor (C), Cartridge Motor (M), Cartridge Motor (Y), Cartridge Motor (K) (REP 6.3.2 ) Toner Cartridge Housing (REP 6.3.1 ) Dispense Motor (REP 6.3.2 ) Bearing Coupling Gear Spring
3 4 5 6
802K08662 802K08672 127K32940
7 8 9 10 11 12
802K08682 127K21270 413W11660 005E85181 007E46710 809E06790
1/05 5-273
Parts Lists
PL 6.3
PL 6.4 Toner Cartridge Component (Part 2 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 007E46680 007E46780 007E46760 007E49650 007E46700 007E46720 413W11660 007E46740 009E34940 015E54911 015K29910 048K61830 048K61840 160K45930 Description Frame (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5) Shaft (K) (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5) Shaft (C, M) (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5) Gear (43) Gear (23) Gear (23) Gear Gear (25) Gear (21) Bearing Gear Spring Bracket (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5) Shutter Plate Auger (M, K) Auger (C) Pipe (Y) (P/O PL 6.2 Item 5) Dispense PWB (REP 6.4.1 )
Parts Lists
PL 6.4
1/05 5-274
PL 6.5 Rotary Dispenser

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Part 019K94332 026E58330 026K80730 026K80740 026K80750 048K61963 049E85681 068K87041 130K57930 048K76720 802K08850 809E08810 011E08640 600K83451 Description Bearing (Not Spared) Bearing (P/O PL 6.5 Item 24) Spacer (P/O PL 6.5 Item 24) Spacer (P/O PL 6.5 Item 24) Block Screw Screw Screw Assembly (With Spring ) Screw Spring (P/O PL 6.5 Item 8) Outer Dispense Housing (P/O PL 6.5 Item 24) (W/TAG P26) Inner Dispense Housing (W/TAG P26) Bracket (Not Spared) Outer Dispense Cover Inner Dispense Cover Trickle Toner Full Sensor Screw (Not Spared) Cover Assembly Cover Spring Lever Seal (P/O PL 6.5 Item 18) Trickle Toner Bottle (REF: PL 6.5) (Not Spared) DCD Kit (Tag P26) (W/TAG P26)
1/05 5-275
Parts Lists
PL 6.5
PL 6.6 Deve. Housing

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 007E46820 048K61638 096E75880 096E75850 048K77228 007K84881 096E75860 096E75870 019E39442 007E46650 Description Auger Gear (19) (M/C) Deve. Housing Assembly (Y/M/C) (REP 6.6.1 REP 6.6.2 ) Label (C) Label (K) Deve. Housing Assembly (REP 6.6.1 REP 6.6.2 ) Auger Gear (19) (Y/K) Label (Y) Label (M) Deve. Housing (Y/M/C) (P/O PL 6.6 Item 2) Holder Deve. Housing (K) (P/O PL 6.6 Item 5) Developer Housing Shaft Gear
Parts Lists
PL 6.6
1/05 5-276
PL 6.7 Rotary Frame/Auger

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Part 019K94230 019E33780 809E06550 019K94221 106K90660 052K91470 106K90650 106K90640 106K90670 Description Rotary Frame (Not Spared) Holder Assembly (Rear) Holder (P/O PL 6.7 Item 2) Clamp Spring Holder Assembly (Front) Holder (P/O PL 6.7 Item 6) Rotary Auger (Y) (REP 6.7.1) Brush (Not Spared) Trickle Auger (REP 6.7.2 ) Rotary Auger (M) (REP 6.7.1 ) Rotary Auger (C) (REP 6.7.1) Rotary Auger (K) (REP 6.7.1)
1/05 5-277
Parts Lists
PL 6.7
PL 7.1 IBT System Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 600K86096 042K91906 130K57690 015K36962 015K36972 015K29634 048K77264 011E07092 Description IBT Assembly (REP 7.1.1 ) Screw (M3 X 4) (Not Spared) IBT Cleaner Assembly (W/TAG P1) (REP 7.1.2 ) Temp Humidity Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Bracket (Not Spared) Right Rail Assembly Left Rail Assembly Rail Front Plate Assembly IBT Inner Cover Lever (Yellow Color) Screw (M3 X 12) (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 7.1
1/05 5-278
PL 7.2 Rail Front Plate

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part 014E87701 006E56632 009E43970 008E93400 Description Front Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9) Block Shaft Cam (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9) Spring Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9) Retract Cam Pin (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 9) Screw (P/O PL 8.7 Item 9)
1/05 5-279
Parts Lists
PL 7.2
PL 7.3 Left/Right Rail

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 162K37360 130E82190 001K59370 Description Left Tie Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 8) Left Rail (P/O PL 7.1 Item 8) Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 8) Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 8) Harness Cover Wire Harness IBT Cleaner Blade Home Position Sensor Shaft (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Cam (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Pin (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Seal (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Bearing (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Wheel (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Coupling (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Plate Spring (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7) Right Rail Right Tie Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 7)
Parts Lists
PL 7.3
1/05 5-280
PL 7.5 IBT-Belt, Sensor, Steering Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 064K91243 130K57973 048E64920 130E84270 600K82710 015K35842 Description IBT Assembly (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1) IBT Belt (REP 7.5.1 ) Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1) ADC Sensor Harness Cover Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1) TRO Sensor Drive Roll Kit (W/TAG P20) Bracket (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1) Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1) Inlet Plate IBT Rear Cover (P/O PL 7.1 Item 1)
1/05 5-281
Parts Lists
PL 7.5
PL 7.6 IBT Component (Part 1 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 059K07800 013K81510 013E88310 059K07843 007E46502 048K61601 059K07812 059K08160 013E85430 809E06330 042K91650 830E81410 105K14062 Description Bias Roll (REP 7.6.1 ) Bearing and Spring Assembly Bearing Spring (P/O PL 7.6 Item 2) Drive Roll (Pre-Tag 20) (REP 7.6.2 ) Gear Gear Cover Plate (P/O PL 7.5 Item 1) Back Up Roll (REP 7.6.3) Contact Roll (REP 7.6.4) Bearing Spring Drive Roll Cleaning Blade Bracket (P/O PL 7.5 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 7.5 Item 1) Plate 1st BTR HVPS Screw (P/O PL 7.5 Item 1)
Parts Lists
PL 7.6
1/05 5-282
PL 7.7 IBT Component (Part 2 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 059E92720 012E98080 029E26770 012E98070 059K07882 031E94101 809E06360 003E39980 008E93250 008E93090 008E93270 011E08081 006E56290 031E93022 Description Idler Roll Bearing (P/O PL 7.5 Item 1) Spacer (P/O PL 7.5 Item 1) Link (Rear) Arm Pivot Link (Front) Tension Roll Arm Spring Stopper Rear Cam Front Cam Earth Plate (Not Spared) Foot Cam Front Lever Shaft Earth Plate (Not Spared) Inboard Tension Roll Arm
1/05 5-283
Parts Lists
PL 7.7
PL 7.8 IBT Cleaner

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part 035K81498 033K93272 809E17001 809E17010 035E48290 035E48300 809E06401 Description Seal (W/TAG P17) Cleaning Blade Spring Spring Housing (P/O PL 7.1 Item 3) Seal Seal Spring Plate (P/O PL 7.1 Item 3) Bearing (P/O PL 7.1 Item 3)
Parts Lists
PL 7.8
1/05 5-284
PL 7.9 2nd BTR

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part 059K14186 029E26180 130E82190 Description 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1 ) Screw Indicator (Not Spared) Label (Not Spared) Plate (Not Spared) 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor
1/05 5-285
Parts Lists
PL 7.9
PL 7.10 2nd BTR Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Part 130K60600 809E06380 059K13021 031K92420 809E06370 006K84114 413W75959 007E46530 048K69086 048E64910 015K39880 015K35800 031K92410 007E46541 007E46551 054K19721 054E88182 130E91120 Description Inlet Plate (Not Spared) Pre IBT Sensor Cleaning Blade Assembly (P/O PL 7.9 Item 1) Cleaning Blade (P/O PL 7.10 Item 3) Plate (P/O PL 7.10 Item 3) Screw (P/O PL 7.10 Item 3) Spring 2nd BTR Roll (REP 7.10.1 ) Front Arm Spring Cam Shaft Assembly Shaft (P/O PL 7.10 Item 11) Pin (P/O PL 7.10 Item 11) Bearing Cam (P/O PL 7.10 Item 11) Gear 2nd BTR Housing Cover Earth Plate Earth Plate Rear Arm Gear Gear Exit Chute Assembly Plate (P/O PL 7.10 Item 24) Guide Pre Fuser Sensor Wire Harness (P/O PL 7.10 Item 24) Screw BTR Brush (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 7.10
1/05 5-286
PL 8.1 Fuser Unit, Front Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part 604K00846 604K00836 048E52741 068K87161 Description Fuser Unit (50 Hz) (W/TAG P12) (REP 8.1.1,ADJ 8.1.1) Fuser Unit (60 Hz) (W/TAG P12) (REP 8.1.1,ADJ 8.1.1) Front Cover Pin Bracket Cartridge Guide (Not Spared) Oil Cartridge (Not Spared) (REF: PL 8.1) Label (Not Spared)
1/05 5-287
Parts Lists
PL 8.1
PL 8.2 Fuser Sub Assembly

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Part 891E76040 891E76001 013E87700 891E75990 809E09190 007E49730 007K84120 007E49831 604K08100 Description Top Cover (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Label Label Bearing Screw (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Label Spring (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Screw (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Spring Web CRU (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Gear (19) Gear (28/49) Stud (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Frame (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Pin (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Plate (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Gear Donor Roll Assembly (P/O PL 8.2 Item 20) (REP 8.2.1) Fuser Reliability Improvement Kit (For Streaks and Offsetting)
Parts Lists
PL 8.2
1/05 5-288
PL 8.3 Heat/Pressure Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 059K39500 126K07960 126K08510 049E86600 019K94651 009E59690 019E42010 026P63503 059K39670 126K07970 126K08520 809E06730 049E86370 049E86360 Description Heat Roll (REP 8.3.1 ) Heat Roll Heater Rod (60 Hz) (REP 8.3.2 ) Heat Roll Heater Rod (50 Hz) (REP 8.3.2 ) Heat Roll Stopper (Front) (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Heater Rod Bracket (Front) Heater Rod Bracket (Rear) (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Heat Roll Stopper (Rear) (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Heat Roll Finger Assembly Plate (P/O PL 8.3 Item 7) Spring Heat Roll Striper Finger (REP 8.3.5 ) Stud Pressure Roll (REP 8.3.3 ) Pressure Roll Heater Rod (60 Hz) (REP 8.3.4 ) Pressure Roll Heater Rod (50 Hz) (REP 8.3.4 ) Spring Heater Rod Bracket (Rear) Heater Rod Bracket (Front)
1/05 5-289
Parts Lists
PL 8.3
PL 8.4 Heat Roll Sensor, External Heat Roll Retract/Web Motor

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 130K57471 130K57430 130K57390 130K57400 127K27910 007E82390 121K16800 160K46120 127K21351 007E51980 130K57490 Description Heat Roll Sensor Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 8.4 Item 1) H/R Thermostat H/R Control Thermistor H/R Overheat Thermistor Upper Frame (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Web Motor (REP 8.4.1 ) Screw (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Gear Magnet Bracket (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Holder (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Web Drive PWB PWB Support (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) External Heat Roll Retract Motor (REP 8.4.1 ) Gear External Heat Roll Retract Sensor
Parts Lists
PL 8.4
1/05 5-290
PL 8.5 Web Shutter, Cleaning Roll (Heat Roll)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Part 003K85453 003K85483 913W02310 162K37050 162K36960 600K84050 059K24360 013E87551 014K81273 003K85731 Description Web Guide Block Assembly (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Rear Guide Block (P/O PL 8.5 Item 1) Front Guide Block (P/O PL 8.5 Item 1) Contact Plate (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Wire Harness (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Front Latch Assembly Rear Latch Assembly Upper Frame (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Holder (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Connector (Blue) (PJ700) Fuser Side Harness Frame Side Harness Web Shutter Repair Kit Support (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Shutter (P/O PL 8.5 Item 13) Label (P/O PL 8.5 Item 13) Spring (P/O PL 8.5 Item 13) Cleaning Roll Bearing Tie Plate (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) CRU Block Guide Assembly Front Latch (P/O PL 8.5 Item 6) Web Release Button Rear Latch (P/O PL 8.5 Item 7)
1/05 5-291
Parts Lists
PL 8.5
PL 8.6 Pressure Roll Sensor, Pressure Roll Nip

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Part 130K57380 130K57370 130K87470 068K87410 007E49760 007E51500 007E49740 007K84130 007K84140 011K94040 026K80720 011K94030 013E87730 413W10650 008E93160 120E12630 015K33670 Description P/R Overheat Thermistor P/R Control Thermistor P/R Thermostat Bracket Shaft (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Harness Cover (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Gear (28) Gear (20) Gear (20) Gear (32) Gear (34) Bearing (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Rear Lever Assembly Rear Lever (P/O PL 8.6 Item 13) Adjust Screw Front Lever Assembly Front Lever (P/O PL 8.6 Item 16) Holder (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Bearing Bearing Cam Actuator Nip Sensor Shaft (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Stand Plate (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Harness Guard (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 8.1 Item 1)
Parts Lists
PL 8.6
1/05 5-292
PL 8.7 Oil Pump/Tank

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 127K21410 052E92750 019E39570 052E93181 809E06530 039K90592 068K21850 050E17450 054K11220 093E91961 130K57940 052E93920 052E96630 809E19010 053E92650 019E49780 604K01911 Description Oil Pump (REP 8.7.1 ) Tube Clamp Oil Pipe Spring Plate Oil Wick (W/TAG P12) (REP 8.7.2 ) Bracket Oil Pan Inlet Chute Oil Tank Oil Empty Sensor Tube Tube (Alternate) Support Plate Spring Oil Filter Hose Clamp Oil System Upgrade Kit (W/TAG P37)
1/05 5-293
Parts Lists
PL 8.7
PL 8.8 External Heat Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Part 001K62603 001K62613 130K87520 130K87500 130K57350 013E87600 013E87700 049E86030 049E86040 007K85270 013E87620 809E06770 059E92780 126K07980 126K08530 Description External Heat Roll Assembly (60 Hz) External Heat Roll Assembly (50 Hz) Frame (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) External H/R Overheat Thermistor External H/R Control Thermistor External H/R Thermostat Plate (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) Bearing Ring (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) Bearing Heater Rod Bracket (Rear) Plate (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) Heater Rod Bracket (Front) Gear (18) (18 ) Actuator (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) Shaft Cam (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) Bearing Lever (Rear) (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) Spring Lever (Front) (P/O PL 8.8 Item 1) External Heater Roll (REP 8.8.2,ADJ 8.8.1) External H/R Heater Rod (60 Hz) (REP 8.8.1 ) External H/R Heater Rod (50 Hz) (REP 8.8.1 )
Parts Lists
PL 8.8
1/05 5-294
PL 8.9 Pick Up/Donor Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Part 013E94380 600K83631 033K92892 013E94320 022K62370 Description Frame (P/O PL 8.2 Item 20) Bearing Pick Up Roll Kit (W/TAG P21) Blade Frame (P/O PL 8.2 Item 20) Bearing Screw (P/O PL 8.2 Item 20) Donor Roll
1/05 5-295
Parts Lists
PL 8.9
PL 8.10 Exit Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 054K10114 054K10115 130K92950 022K48260 413W77559 007E84880 022K48250 019E33860 009E59690 019K94202 Description Exit Chute Assembly (50 Hz) Exit Chute Assembly (60 Hz) Chute Frame (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1) Spring (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1) Fuser Exit Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1) Pinch Roll Wire Cover (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1) Bearing Gear (17) Handle (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1) Lower Chute (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1) Exit Roll Cover (P/O PL 8.10 Item 1) Plate (P/O PL 8.10 Item 18) Pressure Roll Stripper Finger (REP 8.10.1 ) Spring Stud (P/O PL 8.10 Item 18) Pressure Roll Finger Assembly
Parts Lists
PL 8.10
1/05 5-296
PL 9.1 Front, Right

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 910W00211 910W00122 015K38560 015K33986 105E99122 048E65041 117E22350 117K31400 117E10550 152S05105 152S05121 152S05106 152S05122 152S05107 152S05123 152S05104 152S05120 117K23770 117K22350 117E25300 962K01820 962K01830 962K01810 962K01840 130K60561 606K91040 Description Main Switch Wire Harness (Not Spared) Bracket (Not Spared) Front Door Interlock Switch Bracket (Not Spared) Wire Harness (Not Spared) Deve. Bias and CC/PCC HVPS Assembly Deve. Bias HVPS Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 9.1 Item 7) Screw (P/O PL 9.1 Item 7) Deve. Bias HVPS (P/O PL 9.1 Item 7) CC/PCC HVPS Interlock Cover Power Cord (120V) (60 Hz) Power Cord (110V) Power Cord (220V) (60 Hz) Power Cord (United Kingdom 250V/10A Gray) Power Cord (United Kingdom 240V/10A Black) Power Cord (Denmark 250V/10A Gray) Power Cord (Denmark 250V/10A Black) Power Cord (Switzerland 250V/10A Gray) Power Cord (Switzerland 250V/10A Black) Power Cord (Europe 250V/10A Gray) Power Cord (Europe 250V/10A Black) Power Cord (19A) Power Cord (20A) 1670 Epson Scanner Power Cord Power Cord (United Kingdom) Power Cord (Denmark) Power Cord (Europe) Power Cord (CH) Atc Sensor Bracket (W/TAG P14) ATC Sensor Kit (W/TAG P14)
1/05 5-297
Parts Lists
PL 9.1
PL 9.2 IOT Top/Rear

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Part 162K41511 162K41521 160K74412 160K61620 160K61611 160K47911 105K14914 127K21750 048K76941 160K48688 160K48704 162K42260 026E56431 Description Flat Cable (FPC-IOT) Flat Cable (FPC-ROS) (W/TAG P42) Half Tone PWB (W/TAG P32) (REP 9.2.3 ) PWB Bracket (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Washer (Not Spared) IOT Control PWB Chassis Assembly (Not Spared) (REP 9.2.1) PWB Chassis (P/O PL 9.2 Item 7) IOT Drive PWB (W/TAG P14) (REP 9.2.2) IOT CPU PWB (W/TAG P6) IOT NVM PWB (REF: PL 9.2) (Rep 9.2.2 ) Screw (P/O PL 9.2 Item 7) PWB Support (P/O PL 9.2 Item 7) Spacer (P/O PL 9.2 Item 7) 2nd BTR HVPS Rotary Fan Half Tone PWB Cover IOT Control PWB Cover (Not Spared) Extension Plate (Not Spared) VSEL Base TTL PWB VSEL Extension PWB (W/TAG P13) Flat Cable (J388/J389) Cover (Not Spared) Blind Cover (Not Spared) VSEL Screw
Parts Lists
PL 9.2
1/05 5-298
PL 9.3 Tray Module, Rear

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Part 160K45940 160K60770 108E94360 101K33185 101K31295 908W00914 908W00909 101K31312 101K31322 908W00134 908W00131 109E93220 109E93230 101K31342 101K31352 105E07314 105E07344 160K48351 105E98090 105E98110 109E93260 Description Distribution PWB Assembly Distribution PWB Assembly (Alternate) PWB (P/O PL 9.3 Item 1) Fuse (5A/125V) LVPS Bracket (Not Spared) Power Chassis Assembly (50 Hz) (W/TAG P28) (REP 9.3.1) Power Chassis Assembly (60 Hz) (W/TAG P28) (REP 9.3.1 ) Power Chassis (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5) Inlet (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5) Circuit Breaker (60 Hz) Circuit Breaker (50 Hz) Noise Filter (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5) Outlet (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5) Inlet Plate (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5) Outlet Plate (FX/TFX) (P/O PL 9.3 Item 5) AC Driver PWB Assembly (60 Hz) (REP 9.3.1 ) AC Driver PWB Assembly (50 Hz) (REP 9.3.1 ) PWB Chassis (P/O PL 9.3 Item 13) AC Driver PWB (P/O PL 9.3 Item 13) Fuse (6.3A/125V) Fuse (3.15A/125V) SSR (60 Hz) SSR (50 Hz) Transformer Assembly (60 Hz) Transformer (50 Hz) IOT LVPS (60 Hz) (REP 9.3.2 ) IOT LVPS (50 Hz) (REP 9.3.2 ) Tray PWB Assembly Tray PWB (P/O PL 9.3 Item 21) Fuse (P/O PL 9.3 Item 21) Cap (Not Spared) Printer B3 LVPS (60 Hz) (REP 9.3.3 ) Printer B3H LVPS (50 Hz) (REP 9.3.3 ) LVPS Bracket (Not Spared) Connector Bracket (Not Spared) Wire Harness (Not Spared) Transformer (P/O PL 9.3 Item 19) ESS SSR
1/05 5-299
Parts Lists
PL 9.3
PL 9.4 Drawer Connectors

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 009E73310 009E81210 101K24030 160K29150 160K80150 537K49510 537K43720 Description Screw (Not Spared) C/R Connector (Not Spared) Spring Screw (Not Spared) Connector Bracket (Not Spared) Connector Housing (P702 ) (Not Spared) Connector Bracket (Not Spared) Collar (Not Spared) Spring Connector Housing (J700 ) (Not Spared) Connector Bracket (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Connector Housing (P701 ) (Not Spared) Foreign Interface Bracket (Not Spared) Foreign Interface Chassis Assembly Foreign Interface Chassis (P/O PL 9.4 Item 15) A I/F PWB (Foreign Interface PWB) I/F PWB (Foreign Interface PWB) ROM (Coin Vend/Debit Card) ROM (External Auditron) Chassis Cover (P/O PL 9.4 Item 15)
Parts Lists
PL 9.4
1/05 5-300
PL 9.5 Control Panel

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 048K77776 802K31691 600K83650 Description Control Panel Assembly (W/TAG P24) (REP 9.5.1 ) Control Panel Housing Assembly Panel Housing (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2) Set Key (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2) Display (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2) Lamp (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2) Touch Panel (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2) (ADJ 9.1.18 ) Power Supply (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2) VR PWB (P/O PL 9.5 Item 2) UI PWB Kit (W/TAG P24) Screw (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1) Panel (Right) (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1) Panel (Center) (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1) Panel (Left) (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1) Bottom Plate (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1) Cover (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1) Screw (P/O PL 9.5 Item 1) Adjust Pen (Not Spared) Wire Harness (Edit Pad) (Not Spared)
1/05 5-301
Parts Lists
PL 9.5
PL 9.6 EMI/Safety for Fuser Heat Lamp (50 Hz)

Item 1 2 3 Part 103E24040 109E93260 160K61560 Description Surge Resistor Surge SSR Varistor PWB
Parts Lists
PL 9.6
1/05 5-302
PL 10.1 Air System-Front Door

Item 1 2 3 4 5 Part 127K21761 127K21801 054K99181 054K99191 Description Fuser Intake Fan and Duct Assembly Fuser Intake Fan Duct (Fuser Intake) Duct (CC Intake) Duct (Not Spared)
1/05 5-303
Parts Lists
PL 10.1
PL 10.2 Air System-Rear, Right

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 127K21770 127K21780 053K91410 053K91420 053K91430 127K21822 Description Duct (Not Spared) Duct (Not Spared) Filter Case (Not Spared) Duct (Rotary Deve.) (Not Spared) Vacuum Transport Duct (Not Spared) Fuser Fan and Duct Assembly Duct Fuser (P/O PL 10.2 Item 6) Fan Cover (P/O PL 10.2 Item 6) Fuser Fan (REP 10.2.1 ) Duct (Not Spared) Duct (Not Spared) Duct (Xero. Module) (Not Spared) Filter Assembly (Not Spared) Filter (Suction) Filter (Ozone) Filter (Ozone) Suction Blower Motor (REP 10.2.2 )
Parts Lists
PL 10.2
1/05 5-304
PL 11.1 Platen/Top Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 048E61921 004E08250 048E66331 048E66221 048K71213 048E62452 048E62462 003E40250 003K85090 121E90620 050E88440 003E43840 830E20010 Description Top Cover Screw (Not Spared) Label (Not Spared) Label (Not Spared) Platen Cushion (REP 11.1.1 ) Blind Cover Blind Cover Platen Cover Assembly Platen Cover Pocket Cover Hinge Stopper Magnet Wing Tray Thumb Screw (Not Spared) Bracket
1/05 5-305
Parts Lists
PL 11.1
PL 11.2 Front/Right Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Part 802K06232 048E60750 048K77462 048E60741 048E60762 048E60670 048E60690 891E75721 892E02000 891E75951 048K69818 017E93753 017E93743 802E61690 600K82870 Description Right Upper Cover Right Lower Front Cover Filter Unit Cover and Seal Assembly Filter Unit Cover Seal (P/O PL 11.2 Item 3) Power Chassis Cover Hinge (Not Spared) Blind Cover (PSW) Blind Cover (AC Out) Name Plate (DC12) Name Plate (DCCS50) Label (Not Spared) Logo Plate Front Door Assembly Front Door (P/O PL 11.2 Item 13) Block (P/O PL 11.2 Item 13) Plate (P/O PL 11.2 Item 13) Blind Cover (Not Spared) Caster (Front) (Locking) Caster (Rear) (Unlocking) Front Lower Cover Cover Seal Kit (W/TAG P15)
Parts Lists
PL 11.2
1/05 5-306
PL 11.3 Rear/Left Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Part 048E60772 048E60781 048E60790 802K04681 802K31420 048E65171 048E65391 048K76341 048E65330 048E65341 048E61933 048E61941 048E61950 802E61670 600K84700 Description Left Upper Front Cover Left Upper Rear Cover Left Inner Cover Bracket (Front) (Not Spared) Bracket (Rear) (Not Spared) Left Middle Cover IOT Rear Cover (W/TAG P38) Blind Cover (EPSV) ESS Cover Data Plate (Not Spared) Tray Module Rear Cover Connector Cover (Not Spared) ESS Left Cover ESS Rear Cover IIT Rear Cover IIT Left Cover Blind Cover Blind Cover (P/O PL 11.3 Item 23) Blind Cover (P/O PL 11.3 Item 23) Left Lower Rear Cover (Not Spared) Left Lower Front Cover Extension Bracket (Not Spared) Cover Kit
1/05 5-307
Parts Lists
PL 11.3
PL 12.1 Front/Rear Cover, Entrance Tray

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 048K76181 140K60480 891E65180 050K36410 032K93800 048E64201 891E77561 891E65210 059K23063 Description Rear Cover Assembly (REP 12.1.1 ) Rear Cover (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1) Led PWB Wire Harness (P/O PL 12.1 Item 1) Label (Display) Entrance Tray Assembly Entrance Tray (P/O PL 12.1 Item 6) Plate (P/O PL 12.1 Item 6) Plate Spring (P/O PL 12.1 Item 6) Document Guide Front Cover Label Label (Size) DADF Feeder Assembly
Parts Lists
PL 12.1
1/05 5-308
PL 12.2 Top Cover, Registration Gate Solenoid

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 054K13622 015E48890 809E11130 059K11880 015E48900 110K91972 121K93870 121K87790 121K86550 031E92550 Description Top Cover Assembly Top Cover (P/O PL 12.2 Item 1) Plate (Front Magnet) Spring Pinch Roll Plate (Rear Magnet) Top Cover Interlock Switch (Front), Top Cover Interlock Switch (Rear) Bracket (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Magnet Bracket (P/O PL 12.2 Item 13) Label (Not Spared) Registration Gate Solenoid Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 12.2 Item 13) Registration Gate Solenoid (REP 12.2.2 ) Regi. Arm Push Rivet (P/O PL 12.2 Item 13)
1/05 5-309
Parts Lists
PL 12.2
PL 12.3 Counter Balance, DADF Control PWB

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 003K91881 036K91431 036K91420 160K51502 537K51016 162K43311 Description Knob Screw Right Counter Balance Assembly (ADJ 12.3.1 ADJ 12.3.3 ) Counter Balance (P/O PL 12.3 Item 2) DADF Interlock Switch (P/O PL 12.3 Item 2) Screw (P/O PL 12.3 Item 2) Screw (Not Spared) Wire Harness (Not Spared) Left Counter Balance (ADJ 12.3.1 ADJ 12.3.3 ) PWB Support (Not Spared) PWB Support (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Safety Bracket (Not Spared) PWB Support (Not Spared) DADF Control PWB Assembly (ADJ 12.3.2 ) Fuse (F2 ) (P/O PL 12.3 Item 14) Fuse (F1 ) (P/O PL 12.3 Item 14) ROM DADF Control PWB (P/O PL 12.3 Item 14) Wire Harness
Parts Lists
PL 12.3
1/05 5-310
PL 12.4 Document Feed Chute (Upper), Feed Motor

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 054K13600 059K11840 007E39420 013E92760 007E39430 600K90370 413W77559 007E39410 007E39390 007E39400 802K08320 020E22160 023E12610 127K27590 Description Document Feed Upper Chute Assembly Feed Roll Assembly Upper Baffle (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1) Shaft (Drive) (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1) Gear Bearing Gear Nudger Roll Kit, Feed Roll Kit (2/Kit) (REP 12.4.2 ) Link (Not Spared) Bearing Gear Gear Shaft (Feed) (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1) Shaft (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1) Gear Housing (P/O PL 12.4 Item 1) Inner Cover Pulley Belt Bearing (Not Spared) Feed Motor (REP 12.4.1 ) Screw (Not Spared)
1/05 5-311
Parts Lists
PL 12.4
PL 12.5 Document Feed Chute (Lower)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Part 054K13591 009E71890 809E11120 055K19260 022K46560 121K87800 121K87810 130E80890 130E91220 050K27660 Description Document Feed Lower Chute Assembly (REP 12.5.1 ) Lower Chute (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1) Spring Link (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1) Plate Spring Arm (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1) Guard Shaft (Arm) (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1) Shaft (Retard) (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1) Retard Roll (REP 12.5.2 ) Screw (M3 X 12) (P/O PL 12.5 Item 1) Set Gate Solenoid Assembly (REP 12.5.3 ) Bracket (P/O PL 12.5 Item 12) Set Gate Solenoid Spring (P/O PL 12.5 Item 12) Bracket (Not Spared) Size Sensor 1 (Rear), Size Sensor 2 (Front) (REP 12.5.5 ) Registration Sensor, Document Sensor (REP 12.5.4 ) Damper (Not Spared) Set Gate Bracket (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.5
1/05 5-312
PL 12.6 DADF Belt Motor, Duplex Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 127K83520 013P60566 007K91871 023E92341 020K91230 022E93660 023E94140 020E21050 007E83260 022K37080 022K37070 023E12230 Description DADF Belt Motor Assembly (REP 12.6.1 ) DADF Belt Motor (P/O PL 12.6 Item 1) Damper (P/O PL 12.6 Item 1) Bracket (P/O PL 12.6 Item 1) Tension Roll Screw (Not Spared) Gear Pulley Belt Spacer (Not Spared) Pulley Spacer (Not Spared) Tension Roll Belt Pulley Bearing (Not Spared) Gear Pulley Duplex Roll (Upper) Duplex Roll (Lower) Belt
1/05 5-313
Parts Lists
PL 12.6
PL 12.7 Duplex Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Part 054K06692 130E91220 050K27670 054K18790 059K11850 121E90640 Description Duplex Chute Wire Harness (Not Spared) Duplex Sensor (REP 12.7.1 ) Gate Screw (Not Spared) Tapping Screw (Not Spared) Lower Chute Assembly Lower Chute (P/O PL 12.7 Item 7) Pinch Roll Magnet (Open Switch) Guide (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.7
1/05 5-314
PL 12.8 Registration Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 007K81120 059K11830 007K91860 009E28580 013E94561 022K38040 009E39080 009E28570 050K43870 009E28560 Description Spacer (Not Spared) Gear Pulley Bearing (Not Spared) Registration Roll Gear Spring (Rear) C-Clip (Not Spared) Bearing Cam (Rear) (Not Spared) Link (Not Spared) Registration Pinch Roll (REP 12.8.1 ) Cam (Front) (Not Spared) Spring (Front) Spring Gate Spring
1/05 5-315
Parts Lists
PL 12.8
PL 12.9 Exit Motor/Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Part 127K24060 127K24070 020E93240 423W07753 020E93230 059K11860 130E80890 054K18770 105E06910 054K13082 019E92320 059K11821 Description Exit Motor Assembly (REP 12.9.1 ) Exit Motor Pulley Damper (P/O PL 12.9 Item 2) Bracket (P/O PL 12.9 Item 2) Spacer (Not Spared) Belt Pulley Bearing (Not Spared) Exit Roll DADF Exit Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Exit Upper Chute Assembly Eliminator Exit Upper Chute (P/O PL 12.9 Item 13) Exit Lower Chute Assembly Exit Lower Chute (P/O PL 12.9 Item 16) Sensor Pad Pinch Roll Plate (P/O PL 12.9 Item 16)
Parts Lists
PL 12.9
1/05 5-316
PL 12.10 Document Transport, Platen Belt

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 059K11870 007E83141 013E80970 049E91070 022K39710 023E15690 022K39700 059K13440 Description Document Transport Assembly Self Lock Screw (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Gear Collar (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Bearing Tension Plate Idler Roll Platen Belt (REP 12.10.1 ) Drive Roll Belt Guide (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Belt Guide (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Transport Frame (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Deflector (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Pinch Roll (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Pinch Roll (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Pinch Roll Damper (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1) Eliminator (P/O PL 12.10 Item 1)
1/05 5-317
Parts Lists
PL 12.10
PL 12.11 Platen Glass, Registration Gate, Exit Tray: DADF

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part 090K92572 050K36421 015K83700 673K51383 003E43840 Description Platen Glass (REP 3.1.1 ) Registration Gate Plate Exit Roll Kit Knob Screw Bracket (Not Spared)
Parts Lists
PL 12.11
1/05 5-318
PL 13.1 Mail Box Accessory

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part 001K57693 003K91881 830E19412 029E21610 Description Mail Box Assembly (Not Spared) Docking Rail Assembly Knob Screw Docking Plate Docking Pin Stopper (Not Spared)
1/05 5-319
Parts Lists
PL 13.1
PL 13.2 Docking Rail

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part 015K31853 015K35862 068K14921 015K31871 830E17801 032E10210 015K31860 Description Rail Assembly Rail Bracket (Mail Box Left) Plate (Tray Module Left) Bracket (Mail Box Right) Guide (Tray Module Right) Bracket Gasket (P/O PL 13.1 Item 2) Label (P/O PL 13.1 Item 2)
Parts Lists
PL 13.2
1/05 5-320
PL 13.3 Mail Box Sub Assembly

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part 059K17861 022K65790 802K07903 048K77410 121E90490 Description Mail Box Assembly Decurler Assembly (REP 13.3.1) Cabinet Assembly Decurler Front Cover Catch Magnet Screw (Not Spared)
1/05 5-321
Parts Lists
PL 13.3
PL 13.4 Mail Box Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 049E77290 009E94910 110K08600 003K85101 048K77952 048E66520 048K77971 048E66540 802K08530 048E66560 891E73451 048E66571 048E66581 891E73441 Description Docking Plate Plate Spring (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Spring Mail Box Front Cover Interlock Switch Hinge Exit OCT Cover (Rear) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Front Cover Left Cover Top Cover Exit OCT Cover (Rear) Exit Cover Panel Label Damper (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Rear Lower Cover Rear Cover Label
Parts Lists
PL 13.4
1/05 5-322
PL 13.5 ACT Cover, Bin Tray 1

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 160K53431 802K09190 038E88980 038E86180 105E98450 022K43710 120E13130 120E17020 050K36832 005E83570 013E89540 020E21490 022E83451 830E32600 050E88781 413W77559 Description Vertical Led (REP 13.5.1 ) ACT Cover Assembly ACT Cover (P/O PL 13.5 Item 2) Paper Guide Paper Guide Eliminator Pinch Roll Actuator Actuator Bin Tray 1 Assembly (REP 13.5.2 ) Collar Bearing Pulley Roll Tapping Screw (M3 X 10) (P/O PL 13.5 Item 10) Support Bin Tray Bearing
1/05 5-323
Parts Lists
PL 13.5
PL 13.6 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part 050K36822 009E64140 013E89540 020E21490 022E83451 038E88980 050E88781 050K33220 105E98450 120E13130 120E17020 121E83120 413W77559 830E32600 Description Bin Tray 2/4/6/8 Assembly (REP 13.6.1 ) Spring Bearing Pulley Roll Tapping Screw (M3 X 8) (P/O PL 13.6 Item 1) Paper Guide Bin Tray Gate Eliminator Actuator Actuator Gate Solenoid Bearing Support
Parts Lists
PL 13.6
1/05 5-324
PL 13.7 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 050K36812 009E64140 013E89540 020E21490 022E83451 038E88980 050E88781 050K33220 059K13261 105E98450 120E13130 120E17020 121E83120 413W77559 830E32600 Description Bin Tray 3/5/7/9 Assembly (REP 13.6.1 ) Spring Bearing Pulley Roll Tapping Screw (M3 X 8) (P/O PL 13.7 Item 1) Paper Guide Bin Tray Gate Idler Roll Eliminator Actuator Actuator Gate Solenoid Bearing Support
1/05 5-325
Parts Lists
PL 13.7
PL 13.8 Bin Tray 10

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 050K36801 005E83570 009E64140 013E89540 020E21490 022E83451 050E88781 050K33220 121E83120 413W77559 830E32600 Description Bin Tray 10 Assembly (REP 13.6.1 ) Collar Spring Bearing Pulley Roll Tapping Screw (M3 X 8) (P/O PL 13.8 Item 1) Bin Tray Gate Gate Solenoid Bearing Support
Parts Lists
PL 13.8
1/05 5-326
PL 13.9 Mail Box Roll, Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Part 121K19230 059K12460 059K12471 050K30120 121K14541 054K14091 003E36290 059K08590 891E73331 054K14102 105E98690 130E80100 130K94740 160K53431 068K15350 054K14131 022K43720 022K48240 891E73431 005K82400 413W75959 Description Magnet Entrance Roll Exit Roll OCT Gate Link (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) OCT Gate Solenoid Pulley (Not Spared) Entrance Lower Baffle Assembly Entrance Lower Baffle (P/O PL 13.9 Item 8) Knob Pinch Roll Label (7) Exit Lower Chute (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Entrance Upper Chute (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Exit Upper Chute Assembly Exit Upper Chute (P/O PL 13.9 Item 15) Eliminator OCT Exit Sensor V-Tra. In Sensor Stopper (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Lower Tray Chute (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Mail Box Vertical Sensor (REP 13.5.1 ) Magnet Transport Baffle Assembly Transport Baffle (P/O PL 13.9 Item 24) Support (P/O PL 13.9 Item 24) Pinch Roll Pinch Roll Label (8) Torque Limiter Gear Bearing
1/05 5-327
Parts Lists
PL 13.9
PL 13.10 Mail Box Motor, PWB

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 015K48190 007E55351 007E56970 022E83460 023E13160 127K24943 127K24952 162K47062 162K47500 162K47510 007E55361 162K47050 160K56450 539K90924 Description Stopper (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Tension Roll Gear Pulley Gear Pulley (Not Spared) Roller Belt Mail Box Drive Motor Assembly Motor Bracket (P/O PL 13.10 Item 7) Mail Box Drive Motor Wire Harness (PWB-IOT) Wire Harness (PWB-Motor) Wire Harness (PWB-Sensor) Gear Pulley Plate (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Core (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Wire Harness (PWB-Decurler) Wire Harness (PWB-OCT) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 1) Mail Box Control PWB (Sorter Configuration Only) ROM
Parts Lists
PL 13.10
1/05 5-328
PL 13.11 Decurler Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Part 003K85570 003E46501 003K85101 048K77420 048E65721 110E97990 048E65730 048E65740 809E02991 003K83211 121E90490 Description Knob Assembly Handle Hinge Bracket (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Decurler Inner Cover Assembly Decurler Inner Cover Decurler Front Cover Interlock Switch Decurler Top Cover Decurler Rear Cover Spring Knob Catch Magnet Screw (Not Spared)
1/05 5-329
Parts Lists
PL 13.11
PL 13.12 Decurler Chute, PWB

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part 054K15550 059K08590 110K91391 054K13920 003E36290 121E89780 160K52902 130E82970 Description Entrance Lower Chute Assembly Entrance Lower Chute (P/O PL 13.12 Item 1) Pinch Roll Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch Mail Box Docking Interlock Switch (P/O PL 13.12 Item 1) Exit Lower Baffle Assembly Exit Lower Baffle (P/O PL 13.12 Item 6) Label (P/O PL 13.12 Item 6) Knob Chute (Not Spared) Upper Chute (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Magnet Catch Decurler Control PWB Wire Harness (PWB-Mail Box) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Decurler Exit Sensor
Parts Lists
PL 13.12
1/05 5-330
PL 13.13 Decurler Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 006E61320 007E54990 007E55010 007E55030 007E55040 015K28141 007E45091 008E93390 011K94401 011K94411 022K57120 022K57130 062E98711 121K83981 130E82530 809E14570 413W08350 413W75959 Description Cam Drive Shaft Gear (32) Gear (28/33) Gear (32) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Gear (52/56) Gear (20) (REP 13.13.2 ) Gear (32) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Idler Gear Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 13.13 Item 8) Gear Cam (REP 13.13.2 ) Lever (Front) Lever (Rear) Decurler Roll 1 (Upper) (REP 13.13.1 ) Decurler Roll 2 (Lower) (REP 13.13.1 ) Reflector Decurler Clutch Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Decurler Cam Sensor Spring Bearing Bearing
1/05 5-331
Parts Lists
PL 13.13
PL 13.14 Decurler Transport Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 007E54960 007E54980 007E54990 007E55000 407W08220 007E54970 022E19660 022E19670 022K51610 022K51621 127K24901 413W08350 413W75959 Description Gear (38) Torque Limiter Gear (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Gear (16) Gear (32) Gear (16) Gear (32) (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Gear (20) Gear (34) Decurler Drive Roll Decurler Drive Roll Entrance Roll Exit Roll Motor Shaft (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2) Decurler Stepping Motor (REP 13.14.1 ) Bearing Bering Stopper (P/O PL 13.3 Item 2)
Parts Lists
PL 13.14
1/05 5-332
PL 13.15 Cabinet
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Part 021E96430 003K91881 Description Cabinet (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3) Caster (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3) Nut (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3) Cap Front Cover (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3) Hinge (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3) OCT Guide (P/O PL 13.3 Item 3) Knob Screw
1/05 5-333
Parts Lists
PL 13.15
PL 14.1 Offset Catch Tray

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Part 050K36782 120E11991 007E40060 049E58660 127K18372 006E50190 013E85922 130E82190 015K30880 050E88161 130K60600 048E30000 049E86811 830E33491 809E08900 029E96861 026E68120 004K92210 Description Offset Catch Tray Assembly Tray (Lower) (P/O PL 14.1 Item 1) Actuator Rack Support Offset Motor (REP 14.1.1 ) Shaft Bearing Offset Home Sensor, Offset Position Sensor Gasket (P/O PL 14.1 Item 1) Wire Harness (P/O PL 14.1 Item 1) Plate Tray Full Stack Sensor Cover Topping Screw (M3 X 14) (P/O PL 14.1 Item 1) Motor Cover Baffle (P/O PL 14.1 Item 1) Extention Plate Spring Rivet Thumb Screw Exit Poper Guide
Parts Lists
PL 14.1
1/05 5-334
PL 19.1 IDFE Assembly and Components

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Part 600N01584 604K13420 600N01593 144N00070 152N01668 101N01175 Description IDFE Assembly (GL2) (REP 19.1 ) IDFE Assembly (MFY) (REP 19.1) Cobra AUI to BNC Transceiver (REP 19.2) 256MB Memory DIMM (REP 19.3 ) IDFE DC Wiring Harness DDI Cable IDFE Rear Cover (P/O PL 19.1 Item 1) IDFE Housing (P/O PL 19.1 Item 1)
1/05 5-335
Parts Lists
PL 19.1
PL 25.1 Electrical Connectors

Item 1 2 3 4 Part 114E08970 913W01400 114E11400 113E24020 113E20900 913W01399 113E24030 114E18430 498K02510 Description Connector (P543) Connector (P702) Connector (P703) Connector (P701) Connector (J543) Connector (J702) Connector (J703) Europe Converter Adapter
Parts Lists
PL 25.1
1/05 5-336
Common Hardware
Item A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z !! AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM AN AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part 112W27651 112W27851 112W27859 112W28051 112W28251 112W29151 112W29751 113W15551 113W20457 113W20657 113W20857 113W21057 113W21257 113W21651 113W21657 113W27451 113W27456 113W27551 113W27651 113W27851 113W28451 113W35657 113W35851 158W27663 158W35863 113W36051 113W36057 113W36251 113W36851 113W37457 113W38257 141W27351 141W27451 141W27851 141W35451 153W17655 153W17855 153W18055 153W18255 153W27650 153W27655 158W27655 158W27855 158W27863 158W28055 158W28255 158W28655 158W35655 Description Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw (M2.5 X 14) Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw (DB) Screw (M3 X 6) (DR) Screw (M4 X 8) Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Setscrew Setscrew Setscrew Setscrew Tapping Screw Tapping Screw Tapping Screw Tapping Screw Tapping Screw Tapping Screw Screw Screw Screw (M3 X 8) Screw Screw Screw Screw 1/05 5-337
AZ BA BB BC BD BE BF BG BH BJ BK BL BM BN BP BQ BR BS BT BU BV BW BX BY BZ CA CB CC CD CE CF CG CH CJ CK CL CM CN CP CQ CR CS CT CU CW CX CY CZ DA DB DC
158W35855 158W36050 158W36255 158W36655 158W45055 201W21251 220W21250 251W19251 251W21251 251W24251 251W27251 252W26450 252W27350 252W27450 252W29350 252W29450 252W31350 271W21650 271W28050 271W28250 271W28650 271W28850 271W37150 285W16251 354W15251 354W19251 354W21251 354W20952 354W21254 354W24251 354W24254 354W26251 354W27251 354W27254 354W29251 354W29254 220W24350 285W15851 113W35857 252W27250 113W15851 113W28056 113W28251 141W27651 153W27850 158W27650
Screw (M4 X 16) Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Nut (M3 ) Flange Nut (M3 ) Washer (2.5 ) Washer (3 ) Washer (4 ) Washer (6 ) Nylon Washer (5 ) Nylon Washer (6 ) Nylon Washer (6 ) Nylon Washer (8 ) Nylon Washer (8 ) Nylon Washer (10 ) Dowel (2.5 X 16 ) Dowel Pin (3 X 10 ) Dowel Pin (3 X 12 ) Dowel Pin (3 X 16 ) Dowel Pin (3 X 20 ) Dowel Pin (3 X 25 ) Dowel Pin (4 X 25 ) Dowel Pin (5 X 36 ) Spring Pin (2 X 12 ) Spring Pin (2 X 12 ) E-clip (2 ) E-clip (2.5 ) E-clip (3 ) KL-Clip (3) Kl-clip (3 ) E-clip (4 ) Kl-clip (4 ) E-clip (5 ) E-clip (6 ) Kl-clip (6 ) E-clip (8 ) Kl-clip (8 ) Flange Nut (M4 ) Spring Pin (2 X 8 ) Spring Pin (1.6 X 10 ) Screw Nylon Washer (6 ) Screw Screw Screw Setscrew Tapping Screw Screw (M3 X 6) Screw Parts Lists
Common Hardware
DD DE DF DG DH DJ DK DL DM DN DP DQ DR DS DT DU DV DW DX DY DZ EA EB EC ED EE EF
251W29251 153W16055 113W22557 113W35557 113W27656 113W35850 285W28651 285W29151 351W29250 113W28856 113W20557 102W27651 153W28050 112W25255 153W23452 354W00555 354W20852 354W20952 354W21052 153W23852
Setscrew (M4 X 5) Washer (8 ) Tapping Screw Tapping Screw (M3 X 10) Screw Screw Screw (M4 X 16) Spring Washer (12 ) Screw Screw Spring Pin (3-16 ) Spring Pin (3 X 25 ) Screw (M4 X 8) Retaining Clip (8 ) Screw Dowel Pin Pin (3 X 22 ) Screw Capscrew (M3 X 8) Screw Screw Screw (M3 X 8) Screw (M3 X 8) Screw (2.9 X 9.5) Retaining Ring (4MM) Retaining Ring (5 - 7MM) Retaining Ring (5 - 7mm) Retaining Ring Screw
Parts Lists
Common Hardware
1/05 5-338
Part Number Index

Part Number Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 001E46411 001E50590 001K56820 001K57333 001K57693 001K59370 001K62603 001K62613 003E36290 Part List PL 2.22 PL 2.22 PL 2.24 PL 2.26 PL 13.1 PL 7.3 PL 8.8 PL 8.8 PL 13.12 PL 2.20 PL 13.9 003E37791 003E38110 003E38120 003E38130 003E39980 003E40140 003E40151 003E40250 003E43840 003E46501 003K83211 003K84472 003K84500 003K84750 003K84760 003K84792 003K85090 003K85101 003K85453 003K85483 003K85570 003K85731 003K85851 003K85871 003K91881 PL 2.22 PL 2.1 PL 2.8 PL 2.8 PL 7.7 PL 2.4 PL 2.20 PL 11.1 PL 11.1 PL 12.11 PL 13.11 PL 13.11 PL 2.23 PL 2.8 PL 2.18 PL 2.18 PL 2.23 PL 11.1 PL 13.11 PL 13.4 PL 8.5 PL 8.5 PL 13.11 PL 8.5 PL 2.22 PL 2.22 PL 12.3 PL 13.15 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 5-339 007E31090 007E31160 007E31180 007E39390 007E39400 007E39410 007E39420 007E39430 007E40060 007E45091 007E46502 007E46530 005E85181 005E85760 005E85810 006E50190 006E56290 006E56620 006E56632 006E61320 006K83280 006K84003 006K84114 006K84192 006K84210 007E22430 007E23260 007E30970 004E08250 004K92210 005K81600 005K81750 005K81760 005K82400 005K82470 005K82490 005K82730 005E83570
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 13.1 PL 11.1 PL 14.1 PL 2.6 PL 2.6 PL 2.6 PL 13.9 PL 2.26 PL 2.12 PL 2.7B PL 13.5 PL 13.8 PL 6.3 PL 5.5 PL 2.16 PL 14.1 PL 7.7 PL 2.22 PL 7.2 PL 13.13 PL 2.6 PL 1.3 PL 7.10 PL 5.1 PL 2.17 PL 2.12 PL 2.12 PL 2.2 PL 2.3 PL 2.6 PL 2.11 PL 2.11 PL 12.4 PL 12.4 PL 12.4 PL 12.4 PL 12.4 PL 14.1 PL 13.13 PL 7.6 PL 7.10 Parts Lists
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 007E46541 007E46551 007E46610 007E46650 007E46680 007E46700 007E46710 007E46720 007E46740 007E46760 007E46780 007E46820 007E46880 007E46890 007E49650 007E49730 007E49740 007E49760 007E49781 007E49831 007E49940 007E49950 007E49980 007E50030 007E50042 007E50052 007E50112 007E50120 007E50130 007E50140 007E50250 007E50270 007E50280 007E50410 007E50420 007E50430 007E51370 007E51430 Parts Lists Part List PL 7.10 PL 7.10 PL 2.17 PL 6.6 PL 6.4 PL 6.4 PL 6.3 PL 6.4 PL 6.4 PL 6.4 PL 6.4 PL 6.6 PL 1.5 PL 1.5 PL 6.4 PL 8.2 PL 8.6 PL 8.6 PL 2.17 PL 8.2 PL 1.4 PL 1.4 PL 1.2 PL 1.3 PL 1.3 PL 1.3 PL 1.2 PL 1.2 PL 2.24 PL 2.24 PL 2.12 PL 1.6 PL 1.6 PL 2.2 PL 2.3 PL 2.2 PL 2.3 PL 2.2 PL 2.3 PL 2.15 PL 2.12 1/05 5-340 007E55000 007E55010 007E55030 007E55040 007E55221 007E55230 007E55351 007E55361 Part Number 007E51490 007E51500 007E51580 007E51630 007E51641 007E51680 007E51790 007E51800 007E51810 007E51830 007E51840 007E51980 007E52030 007E52040 007E52050 007E52130 007E52140 007E52150 007E52161 007E52171 007E52210 007E52220 007E52230 007E52240 007E52250 007E52280 007E52290 007E54910 007E54960 007E54970 007E54980 007E54990
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 1.6 PL 8.6 PL 2.7A PL 2.24 PL 2.24 PL 1.6 PL 1.3 PL 1.3 PL 1.3 PL 5.5 PL 2.19 PL 8.4 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 2.6 PL 2.6 PL 2.6 PL 2.6 PL 2.6 PL 2.5 PL 2.5 PL 2.5 PL 2.5 PL 1.5 PL 1.1 PL 1.3 PL 2.12 PL 13.14 PL 13.14 PL 13.14 PL 13.13 PL 13.14 PL 13.14 PL 13.13 PL 13.13 PL 13.13 PL 1.1 PL 1.1 PL 13.10 PL 13.10 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 007E56010 007E56020 007E56030 007E56210 007E56970 007E57660 007E66030 007K81120 007E82390 007E83141 007E83260 007K83610 007K84110 007K84120 007K84130 007K84140 007K84160 007K84170 007K84231 007K84240 007K84251 007K84265 007K84282 007K84291 007K84313 007K84332 007K84360 007K84415 007K84422 007K84468 007K84553 007K84577 007K84593 007K84601 007K84634 007K84641 007K84650 007K84662 007K84671 007K84680 007K84690 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part List PL 2.7A PL 2.7A PL 2.7A PL 2.6 PL 13.10 PL 1.4 PL 2.13 PL 12.8 PL 8.4 PL 12.10 PL 12.6 PL 2.6 PL 1.6 PL 8.2 PL 8.6 PL 8.6 PL 1.4 PL 1.2 PL 1.4 PL 1.4 PL 1.4 PL 1.4 PL 1.3 PL 1.3 PL 1.5 PL 1.3 PL 1.6 PL 2.7A PL 2.7A PL 1.3 PL 1.6 PL 1.6 PL 5.2 PL 2.24 PL 1.2 PL 1.2 PL 1.2 PL 1.1 PL 1.1 PL 1.1 PL 1.6 1/05 5-341 009P61135 009E61300 009E62420 009E62830 009P62935 009P62975 009E63110 009E64140 Part Number 007K84701 007K84731 007K84800 007K84820 007K84871 007E84880 007K84881 007K84922 007K85270 007E91170 007K91860 007K91871 008E93090 008E93160 008E93250 008E93261 008E93270 008E93390 008E93400 009E28560 009E28570 009E28580 009E32160 009E34940 009E39080 009E43970 009E53370 009E56020 009E56030 009E59690
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 1.2 PL 2.7A PL 1.6 PL 1.2 PL 1.1 PL 8.10 PL 6.6 PL 1.6 PL 8.8 PL 2.24 PL 12.8 PL 12.6 PL 7.7 PL 8.6 PL 7.7 PL 2.22 PL 7.7 PL 13.13 PL 7.2 PL 12.8 PL 12.8 PL 12.8 PL 1.1 PL 6.4 PL 12.8 PL 7.2 PL 2.13 PL 2.10 PL 2.10 PL 8.10 PL 8.3 PL 2.16 PL 2.6 PL 2.26 PL 3.3 PL 5.4 PL 1.5 PL 2.8 PL 13.6 PL 13.8 PL 13.7 Parts Lists
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 009E71890 009E73310 009E76430 009E81210 009E84150 009E84220 009E94910 011E07092 011E07950 011E08010 011E08021 011E08031 011E08041 011E08050 011E08060 011E08071 011E08081 011E08111 011E08640 011K90420 011K93990 011K94030 011K94040 011K94050 011K94091 011K94141 011K94150 011K94160 011K94391 011K94401 011K94411 012K93440 012K93450 012E98070 012E98080 012E98271 012E98281 013E15290 013P60566 013E80970 Parts Lists Part List PL 12.5 PL 9.4 PL 2.11 PL 9.4 PL 5.5 PL 2.23 PL 2.24 PL 13.4 PL 7.1 PL 2.8 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 2.20 PL 2.20 PL 2.5 PL 2.5 PL 2.5 PL 7.7 PL 2.22 PL 6.5 PL 2.19 PL 5.5 PL 8.6 PL 8.6 PL 2.24 PL 6.1 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 2.26 PL 13.13 PL 13.13 PL 3.3 PL 3.3 PL 7.7 PL 7.7 PL 2.23 PL 2.5 PL 2.5 PL 12.6 PL 12.10 1/05 5-342 013E92760 013E94320 013E94380 013E94561 014K81273 014E87701 015K28141 015K29634 015K29910 015K30880 015K31460 015K31853 015K31860 015K31871 015K33670 015K33973 015K33986 013E88310 013E89540 013E88030 013E87730 013E88020 013E83380 013E83730 013E85430 013E85922 013E87551 013E87600 013E87620 013E87700 Part Number 013K81260 013K81270 013K81510 013E82490
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 7.6 PL 2.15 PL 2.16 PL 2.8 PL 2.2 PL 7.6 PL 14.1 PL 8.5 PL 8.8 PL 8.8 PL 8.2 PL 8.8 PL 8.6 PL 2.15 PL 2.16 PL 2.15 PL 2.16 PL 7.6 PL 13.5 PL 13.6 PL 13.8 PL 13.7 PL 12.4 PL 8.9 PL 8.9 PL 12.8 PL 8.5 PL 7.2 PL 13.13 PL 7.1 PL 6.4 PL 14.1 PL 2.2 PL 13.2 PL 13.2 PL 13.2 PL 8.6 PL 2.18 PL 9.1 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 015K34310 015K35800 015K35842 015K35862 015K36962 015K36972 015K37641 015K38560 015K39880 015K41370 015K41381 015K41503 015K48190 015E48890 015E48900 015E54911 015E58040 015K83700 017E92140 017E93743 017E93753 019E33780 019E33860 019E39131 019E39442 019E39570 019E42010 019E49780 019E50400 019E92320 019K93320 019K94202 019K94221 019K94230 019K94332 019K94390 019K94400 019K94651 020E21050 020E21490 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part List PL 2.2 PL 7.10 PL 7.5 PL 13.2 PL 7.1 PL 7.1 PL 3.1 PL 9.1 PL 7.10 PL 2.2 PL 2.2 PL 2.3 PL 13.10 PL 12.2 PL 12.2 PL 6.4 PL 2.23 PL 12.11 PL 3.3 PL 11.2 PL 11.2 PL 6.7 PL 8.10 PL 2.2 PL 2.3 PL 6.6 PL 8.7 PL 8.3 PL 8.7 PL 3.4 PL 12.9 PL 2.13 PL 8.10 PL 6.7 PL 6.7 PL 6.5 PL 2.2 PL 2.3 PL 8.3 PL 12.6 PL 13.5 1/05 5-343 022E83460 022E93660 023E12230 023E12610 023E13160 020E22160 020E25090 020E25100 020E26710 020E26990 020K91230 020E93230 020E93240 020K94970 021E96430 022E19660 022E19670 022K37070 022K37080 022K38040 022K39700 022K39710 022K43710 022K43720 022K46560 022K48240 022K48250 022K48260 022K51610 022K51621 022K57120 022K57130 022K62370 022K65790 022E83451 Part Number
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 13.8 PL 13.6 PL 13.7 PL 12.4 PL 3.3 PL 3.3 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 12.6 PL 12.9 PL 12.9 PL 3.3 PL 13.15 PL 13.14 PL 13.14 PL 12.6 PL 12.6 PL 12.8 PL 12.10 PL 12.10 PL 13.5 PL 13.9 PL 12.5 PL 13.9 PL 8.10 PL 8.10 PL 13.14 PL 13.14 PL 13.13 PL 13.13 PL 8.9 PL 13.3 PL 13.5 PL 13.7 PL 13.8 PL 13.6 PL 13.10 PL 12.6 PL 12.6 PL 12.4 PL 13.10 Parts Lists
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 023E15480 023E15550 023E15690 023E92341 023E94140 026E56431 026E58330 026P63503 026E68120 026K80720 026K80730 026K80740 026K80750 029E21610 029E26180 029E26770 029E96861 031K92410 031K92420 031E92550 031E93022 031E94101 032E10010 032E10210 032E10250 032E13130 032K93621 032K93800 033K92892 033K92970 033K93272 035E40661 035E40690 035E45550 035E48290 035E48300 035K81498 036K91420 036K91431 038K14700 038K83973 Parts Lists Part List PL 2.17 PL 3.3 PL 12.10 PL 12.6 PL 12.6 PL 9.2 PL 6.5 PL 8.3 PL 14.1 PL 8.6 PL 6.5 PL 6.5 PL 6.5 PL 13.1 PL 7.9 PL 7.7 PL 14.1 PL 7.10 PL 7.10 PL 12.2 PL 7.7 PL 7.7 PL 2.11 PL 13.2 PL 2.5 PL 2.16 PL 2.18 PL 12.1 PL 8.9 PL 5.3 PL 7.8 PL 5.3 PL 5.3 PL 5.5 PL 7.8 PL 7.8 PL 7.8 PL 12.3 PL 12.3 PL 2.13 PL 2.3 1/05 5-344 038E89060 038E89071 038E89072 039K90592 041K93792 041K94210 042K91650 042K91811 042K91906 048E30000 048E52741 048E60670 048E60690 048E60741 048E60750 048E60762 048E60772 048E60781 048E60790 048E61482 048K61601 048K61638 048K61830 048K61840 048E61921 048E61933 048E61941 048E61950 048K61963 048E62151 048E62452 048E62462 Part Number 038K84621 038E86180 038E88641 038E88650 038E88772 038E88922 038E88980
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 048E64201 048E64910 048E64920 048E65041 048E65171 048K65250 048E65330 048E65341 048E65391 048K65660 048E65721 048E65730 048E65740 048K65921 048E66221 048E66331 048E66520 048E66540 048E66560 048E66571 048E66581 048K69086 048K69818 048K71213 048K71860 048K76181 048K76341 048K76720 048K76921 048K76941 048K77228 048K77264 048K77410 048K77420 048K77462 048K77776 048K77952 048K77971 049E58660 049E77290 049E85681 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part List PL 12.1 PL 7.10 PL 7.5 PL 9.1 PL 11.3 PL 2.8 PL 11.3 PL 11.3 PL 11.3 PL 5.1 PL 13.11 PL 13.11 PL 13.11 PL 2.15 PL 11.1 PL 11.1 PL 13.4 PL 13.4 PL 13.4 PL 13.4 PL 13.4 PL 7.10 PL 11.2 PL 11.1 PL 3.2 PL 12.1 PL 11.3 PL 6.5 PL 4.1 PL 9.2 PL 6.6 PL 7.1 PL 13.3 PL 13.11 PL 11.2 PL 9.5 PL 13.4 PL 13.4 PL 14.1 PL 13.4 PL 6.5 1/05 5-345 052K91470 052E92750 052E93181 052E93460 052E93470 052E93480 050K34065 050K36410 050K36421 050K36514 050K36782 050K36801 050K36812 050K36822 050K36832 050K36851 050K40941 050K43870 050E87465 050E88159 050E88161 050E88440 050E88781 Part Number 049E86030 049E86040 049E86360 049E86370 049E86600 049E86811 049E91070 050E17450 050K27660 050K27670 050K30120 050K33129 050K33220
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 052E93640 052E93920 052E96630 053K91410 053K91420 053K91430 053E92650 054K06692 054K10114 054K10115 054K10151 054K10303 054K10317 054K10323 054K10333 054K10341 054K10350 054E10780 054K11072 054K11090 054K11161 054K11220 054K11363 054K11373 054K11395 054K11416 054K11512 054K13082 054K13591 054K13600 054K13622 054K13920 054K14091 054K14102 054K14131 054K14675 054K15550 054K18770 054K18790 054K19721 054E88182 Parts Lists Part List PL 5.5 PL 8.7 PL 8.7 PL 10.2 PL 10.2 PL 10.2 PL 8.7 PL 12.7 PL 8.10 PL 8.10 PL 5.1 PL 2.24 PL 2.25 PL 2.26 PL 2.26 PL 2.8 PL 2.8 PL 2.8 PL 2.15 PL 2.16 PL 2.26 PL 8.7 PL 2.19 PL 2.19 PL 2.18 PL 2.18 PL 2.23 PL 12.9 PL 12.5 PL 12.4 PL 12.2 PL 13.12 PL 13.9 PL 13.9 PL 13.9 PL 2.25 PL 13.12 PL 12.9 PL 12.7 PL 7.10 PL 7.10 1/05 5-346 059K08600 059K08610 059K08621 059K08686 059K08760 059K08770 059K08780 059K08790 059K08821 059K08831 059K08840 059K08850 059K09022 059K09030 059K09040 059K09331 059K09341 059K09350 059K09490 059K09500 059K09510 059K09532 059K09561 059K09591 059K09930 Part Number 054E88220 054E88230 054K99181 054K99191 055K19260 055E30790 059K05750 059K05780 059K06831 059K07800 059K07812 059K07843 059K07882 059K08160 059K08590
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 2.4 PL 2.4 PL 10.1 PL 10.1 PL 12.5 PL 6.2 PL 2.20 PL 2.20 PL 2.7B PL 7.6 PL 7.6 PL 7.6 PL 7.7 PL 7.6 PL 13.12 PL 13.9 PL 2.19 PL 2.21 PL 2.21 PL 2.23 PL 2.15 PL 2.16 PL 2.16 PL 2.15 PL 2.9 PL 2.10 PL 2.12 PL 2.11 PL 2.24 PL 2.24 PL 2.24 PL 2.21 PL 2.21 PL 2.21 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 5.5 PL 5.3 PL 2.5 PL 2.6 PL 2.7B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 059K09948 059K10025 059K10122 059K11821 059K11830 059K11840 059K11850 059K11860 059K11870 059K11880 059K12140 059K12460 059K12471 059K13021 059K13261 059K13440 059K14186 059K14872 059K17861 059K23063 059K24360 059K31171 059K33080 059K39500 059K39670 059E90770 059E92720 059E92780 059E92841 059E92850 059E92920 059E92950 059E92980 062K10670 062E98370 062E98380 062E98711 063E94040 063E94050 064K91243 068K14170 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part List PL 2.4 PL 2.14 PL 2.17 PL 12.9 PL 12.8 PL 12.4 PL 12.7 PL 12.9 PL 12.10 PL 12.2 PL 2.20 PL 13.9 PL 13.9 PL 7.10 PL 13.7 PL 12.10 PL 7.9 PL 2.26 PL 13.3 PL 12.1 PL 8.5 PL 2.9 PL 2.23 PL 8.3 PL 8.3 PL 2.10 PL 7.7 PL 8.8 PL 2.26 PL 2.24 PL 2.8 PL 2.17 PL 2.20 PL 4.1 PL 3.4 PL 3.4 PL 13.13 PL 3.3 PL 3.3 PL 7.5 PL 2.8 1/05 5-347 093E91961 094K91307 096E75850 096E75860 096E75870 096E75880 099P03019 101N01175 101K24030 101K31295 101K31312 101K31322 101K31342 101K31352 101K33185 103E24040 105E06910 105E07314 105E07322 105E07344 105E07351 105E08900 105K14062 105K14914 105K14923 105E98090 105E98110 105E98450 Part Number 068K14541 068K14550 068K14921 068K15350 068K21850 068K86934 068K87041 068K87161 068K87410 090K92572
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 105E98690 105E99122 106K90640 106K90650 106K90660 106K90670 107E06650 108E94360 109E93220 109E93230 109E93260 110K08471 110K08600 110K10460 110K91391 110K91972 110E93440 110E97990 113E20900 113E22970 113E24020 113E24030 114E08970 114E11390 114E11400 114E18430 114K81062 114K81082 114K81362 115K91133 115K91160 117E10550 117E15951 117E15970 117E22350 Parts Lists Part List PL 13.9 PL 2.25 PL 9.1 PL 6.7 PL 6.7 PL 6.7 PL 6.7 PL 3.2 PL 9.3 PL 9.3 PL 9.3 PL 9.3 PL 9.6 PL 3.2 PL 13.4 PL 2.1 PL 13.12 PL 12.2 PL 2.12 PL 2.24 PL 13.11 PL 25.1 PL 2.9 PL 2.22 PL 25.1 PL 2.12 PL 25.1 PL 25.1 PL 2.22 PL 2.9 PL 25.1 PL 25.1 PL 5.1 PL 5.2 PL 5.2 PL 6.1 PL 5.2 PL 9.1 PL 3.5 PL 3.4 PL 9.1 1/05 5-348 121K83981 121K86550 121K87790 121K87800 121K87810 121E83120 121K17941 121K19230 121K21612 121K30050 121K14541 121K14881 121K16372 121K16383 121K16401 121K16800 121K17550 121K17561 120E17020 Part Number 117K22350 117K23770 117E25300 117K31400 117K92100 118E12090 118E12110 118E12251 118K91900 119K90765 120E11991 120E12630 120E13100 120E13130
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 5.4 PL 3.4 PL 9.3 PL 5.4 PL 5.4 PL 5.5 PL 14.1 PL 8.6 PL 2.10 PL 13.5 PL 13.6 PL 13.7 PL 13.5 PL 13.7 PL 13.6 PL 13.9 PL 1.3 PL 2.24 PL 2.25 PL 6.1 PL 8.4 PL 2.9 PL 2.11 PL 2.5 PL 1.3 PL 13.9 PL 1.6 PL 1.5 PL 2.7A PL 13.6 PL 13.8 PL 13.7 PL 13.13 PL 12.2 PL 12.2 PL 12.5 PL 12.5 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 121E89780 121E90490 121E90620 121E90640 121K93870 122E92000 122K92892 125K03650 125K93062 126K07960 126K07970 126K07980 126K08510 126K08520 126K08530 127K18372 127K21270 127K21301 127K21311 127K21321 127K21351 127K21410 127K21513 127K21661 127K21671 127K21750 127K21761 127K21770 127K21780 127K21801 127K21822 127K21871 127K23051 127K23191 127K23230 127K23470 127K23590 127K24060 127K24070 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part List PL 13.12 PL 2.9 PL 13.11 PL 13.3 PL 11.1 PL 12.7 PL 12.2 PL 3.4 PL 5.1 PL 5.4 PL 5.4 PL 8.3 PL 8.3 PL 8.8 PL 8.3 PL 8.3 PL 8.8 PL 14.1 PL 6.3 PL 1.6 PL 1.5 PL 1.2 PL 8.4 PL 8.7 PL 3.3 PL 2.24 PL 1.1 PL 9.2 PL 10.1 PL 10.2 PL 10.2 PL 10.1 PL 10.2 PL 2.15 PL 2.7A PL 2.19 PL 2.6 PL 2.12 PL 3.2 PL 12.9 PL 12.9 1/05 5-349 130E82190 130K60770 130E80100 130E80890 Part Number 127K24901 127K24943 127K24952 127K27590 127K27910 127K28490 127K32940 127K83520 130K57350 130K57370 130K57380 130K57390 130K57400 130K57430 130K57471 130K57490 130K57690 130K57720 130K57810 130K57820 130K57930 130K57940 130K57973 130K57990 130K58001 130K58030 130K58070 130K59660 130K60561 130K60600
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number Part List PL 2.12 PL 2.11 PL 2.10 PL 2.1 PL 14.1 130E82530 130E82650 130E82720 130K82921 130E82970 130E84270 130K87150 130K87380 130K87470 130K87500 130K87520 130E91010 130E91120 130E91220 130K92950 130K93210 130K93220 130K94740 140K60480 144N00070 152N01668 152S05104 152S05105 152S05106 152S05107 152S05120 152S05121 152S05122 152S05123 160K29150 160K42710 160K42851 160K45930 160K45940 Parts Lists PL 13.13 PL 2.5 PL 2.8 PL 6.3 PL 5.2 PL 13.12 PL 7.5 PL 3.2 PL 6.1 PL 8.6 PL 8.8 PL 8.8 PL 5.2 PL 7.10 PL 12.5 PL 12.7 PL 8.10 PL 2.21 PL 2.24 PL 13.9 PL 12.1 PL 19.1 PL 19.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.4 PL 3.5 PL 4.1 PL 6.4 PL 9.3 1/05 5-350 160K53462 160K56450 160K57369 160K57375 160K60380 160K60770 160K61560 160K61611 160K61620 160K74412 160K80150 160K84771 162K36860 162K36960 162K37050 162K37160 162K37360 162K41511 162K41521 162K42260 162K43311 162K47050 162K47062 162K47500 162K47510 407W08220 407W08222 407W08223 Part Number 160K46113 160K46120 160K46290 160K47911 160K48230 160K48351 160K48688 160K48704 160K51502 160K51931 160K52902 160K53431
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 407W08273 407W08328 413W08350 Part List PL 1.5 PL 1.5 PL 13.13 PL 13.14 PL 5.5 413W10650 413W11660 413W66250 413W75959 PL 8.6 PL 6.3 PL 6.4 PL 2.26 PL 13.13 PL 2.6 PL 13.9 PL 13.14 PL 7.10 413W77359 413W77559 PL 2.17 PL 12.4 PL 13.5 PL 13.6 PL 8.10 PL 5.5 PL 13.8 PL 13.7 413W88650 423W07753 423W10055 423W11055 423W55355 423W57554 423W82054 423W82555 498K02510 537K43720 537K49510 537K51016 539K90924 600N01584 600N01593 600K74790 600K79560 600K82710 600K82870 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 PL 5.5 PL 12.9 PL 2.21 PL 2.21 PL 1.3 PL 1.4 PL 5.5 PL 2.19 PL 25.1 PL 9.4 PL 9.4 PL 12.3 PL 13.10 PL 19.1 PL 19.1 PL 2.7B PL 2.26 PL 7.5 PL 11.2 1/05 5-351 Part Number 600K82900 600K82960 600K83451 600K83590 600K83631 600K83650 600K84050 600K84700 600K85872 600K85970 600K86001 600K86080 600K86096 600K90370 604K00836 604K00846 604K01911 604K07960 604K08100 604K13420 604K14830 604K22290 606K91040 673K51383 802K04428 802K04681 802K06232 802K07903 802K08320 802K08530 802K08652 802K08662 802K08672 802K08682 802K08850 802K09190 802E30660 802K31420 802K31691 802E61670 802E61690
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 809E02991 809E06330 809E06360 809E06370 809E06380 809E06401 809E06530 809E06550 809E06730 809E06770 809E06790 809E07770 809E07780 809E08090 809E08690 809E08810 809E08900 809E09040 809E09100 809E09110 809E09150 809E09171 809E09180 809E09190 809E09210 809E09410 809E09430 809E09470 809E09530 809E11120 809E11130 809E14570 809E14710 809E15180 809E15210 809E16580 809E16590 809E17001 809E17010 809E19010 Parts Lists Part List PL 13.11 PL 7.6 PL 7.7 PL 7.10 PL 7.10 PL 7.8 PL 8.7 PL 6.7 PL 8.3 PL 8.8 PL 6.3 PL 2.8 PL 2.8 PL 2.15 PL 1.3 PL 6.5 PL 14.1 PL 2.20 PL 2.6 PL 3.4 PL 2.21 PL 2.22 PL 2.22 PL 8.2 PL 2.22 PL 2.10 PL 2.11 PL 2.15 PL 2.10 PL 2.26 PL 12.5 PL 12.2 PL 13.13 PL 2.20 PL 6.1 PL 3.4 PL 2.20 PL 2.20 PL 7.8 PL 7.8 PL 8.7 1/05 5-352 830E33491 830E81410 891E48750 891E49060 891E49510 891E49520 891E50480 891E51561 891E51571 891E51581 891E51590 891E51600 891E65180 891E65210 891E73331 891E73431 891E73441 891E73451 891E73880 891E73900 891E73914 891E73971 891E73982 891E74003 891E74014 Part Number 809E19530 809E19540 809E19560 809E20210 830E09140 830E09800 830E09840 830E17550 830E17801 830E17961 830E19412 830E20010 830E32600
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 891E74023 891E74033 891E74062 891E75721 891E75951 891E75990 891E76001 891E76010 891E76020 891E76040 891E76090 891E77561 891E78020 891E78030 891E80400 891E80410 891E80420 891E80481 891E82980 891E82991 892E02000 908W00131 908W00134 908W00909 908W00914 910W00122 910W00211 913W01399 913W01400 913W02310 962K01810 962K01820 962K01830 962K01840 Part List PL 6.2 PL 6.2 PL 2.18 PL 11.2 PL 11.2 PL 8.2 PL 8.2 PL 8.2 PL 8.2 PL 8.2 PL 2.1 PL 12.1 PL 2.1 PL 2.1 PL 2.1 PL 2.1 PL 2.1 PL 2.1 PL 2.1 PL 2.25 PL 11.2 PL 9.3 PL 9.3 PL 9.3 PL 9.3 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 25.1 PL 25.1 PL 8.5 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1 PL 9.1
1/05 5-353
Parts Lists
Part Number Index
Parts Lists
Part Number Index
1/05 5-354
6 General Procedures & Information

General Procedures
GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure...................................................................................... GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup ......................................................................... GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP ...................................................................................... GP 5 Verifying the Administration Tools Password......................................................... GP 6 Verifying the Auditron Password............................................................................ GP 7 Verifying Tools Mode Password ............................................................................ GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO) Procedure ................................................. GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM) Procedure.................................................. GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ...................................................................................... GP 11 PWS (Diagnostics) Software Installation Procedure............................................ GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports ............................................................................. GP 13 Printing a Complex Test Page ............................................................................. GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T & M) Account .............................. GP 16 Setting the Machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox................................... GP 17 IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM) ....................................................................... GP 18 IOT UI Language Change.................................................................................... GP 20 2nd BTR Service Procedure ............................................................................... 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-8 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-19 6-20 6-22 6-23 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-26 6-27 6-30 6-33 6-33 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-43 6-44 6-44 6-47 6-81 6-82 6-83 6-84 6-86 6-87 6-88 dC131 Developer NVM List (776) ................................................................................... dC131 Fuser NVM List (777)........................................................................................... dC131 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780)(790).................................................................... dC132 Serial Number/Billing Meter Synchronization ...................................................... dC135 HFSI Counters ..................................................................................................... dC135 HFSI Counter List ................................................................................................ dC140 Analog Monitor..................................................................................................... dC188 How to Exit from Service Mode ........................................................................... dC301 NVM Initialization ................................................................................................. dC305 UI Component Check .......................................................................................... dC330 Component Control.............................................................................................. dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore ............................................................................... dC361 NVM Save/Restore .............................................................................................. dC371 Configuration Page .............................................................................................. dC391 Edit Pad .............................................................................................................. dC612 Color Test Pattern Print ....................................................................................... dC701 Fuser Nip Measurement ...................................................................................... dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment ..................................................................................... dC915 Machine Output .................................................................................................. dC918 IOT Highlight Setup ............................................................................................. dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only)................................................ dC920 Developer Unit Check.......................................................................................... dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment .............................................................. dC923 PROCON PG....................................................................................................... dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG ................................................................... dC929 Max Setup............................................................................................................ dC933 VH/VM Setup ....................................................................................................... dC934 ADC/AGC Setup .................................................................................................. dC945 IIT Calibration ...................................................................................................... 6-90 6-92 6-93 6-93 6-94 6-94 6-95 6-96 6-96 6-99 6-99 6-115 6-117 6-118 6-119 6-119 6-122 6-123 6-123 6-125 6-126 6-126 6-127 6-127 6-128 6-128 6-129 6-129 6-130 6-131 6-131 6-132 6-132 6-133 6-133 6-137 6-138 6-138 6-139 6-139 6-140 6-140 6-141 6-141 6-142
PWS Diagnostics
Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS ................................................... DC Quick (CODE Number LIST)..................................................................................... dC100 Service Entry ....................................................................................................... dC110 Displaying the CRU-Related Data ....................................................................... dC118 Jam Counter ........................................................................................................ dC120 Fail Counter ......................................................................................................... dC122 Shutdown History ................................................................................................ dC129 System Registration Adjustment ........................................................................ dC131 NVM Read/Write.................................................................................................. dC131 UI/Tools (700)...................................................................................................... dC131 UI NVM List (702) ................................................................................................ dC131 UI NVM List (800) ................................................................................................ dC131 UI NVM List (850) ................................................................................................ dC131 DADF NVM List (710).......................................................................................... dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719) ....................................................................................... dC131 ROS NVM List (720)............................................................................................ dC131 IPS NVM List (730).............................................................................................. dC131 PH NVM List (749)............................................................................................... dC131 PH NVM List (760)............................................................................................... dC131PH NVM List (761)................................................................................................ dC131SYS NVM List (752) ............................................................................................. dC131SYS NVM List (759) ............................................................................................. dC131 BILLING NVM List (990)...................................................................................... dC131 Procon1 NVM List (773) ...................................................................................... dC131 Procon2 NVM List (774) ...................................................................................... dC131 Procon3 NVM List (775) ...................................................................................... dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List (772) ...............................................
UI (IOT) Diagnostics
How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics Mode ........................................................... UI (IOT) Diagnostic Modes.............................................................................................. NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnostics) ................................................. NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics) ............................................................ Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics) ................................................................... Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics) ...................................................................... Fuser Nip Measurement (dC701 UI Diagnostics)............................................................ Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics) ............................................................... Max Setup (UI Diagnostics)............................................................................................. IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only)................................ ADC/AGC Setup (dC934 UI Diagnostics) ....................................................................... VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics) ............................................................................ IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics)................................................................... TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment (dC922 UI Diagnostics)............................ TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics)........................................................................ Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only) .....................
1/05 6-1
General Procedures
Product Specifications
General Information ........................................................................................................ Installation Space Requirements .................................................................................... Product Specifications..................................................................................................... 6-143 6-143 6-148 6-157 6-157 6-158 6-158 6-159 6-159 6-166 6-167 6-168
Tools and Supplies

Common Tools ................................................................................................................ Product Tools and Test Patterns..................................................................................... Cleaning Materials .......................................................................................................... Machine Consumables....................................................................................................
Change Tag Information

Change Tag Introduction................................................................................................. Processor (P) Tags ......................................................................................................... Mail Box / Sorter Tags..................................................................................................... High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Tags.................................................................................. Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Tags........................................................................
General Procedures
1/05 6-2
GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure

CAUTION Without following proper Fuser Break-In Procedures after servicing the Fuser Assembly, damage to the Fuser may occur due to lack of oil in the system.
5.
Visually observe that the clear oil tubes above and below the oil pump are full of oil and have no air bubbles and show no sign of leaks. If leaks or air bubbles are found, reposition clamps/fittings and repeat steps 3 and 4 above. Place a blank sheet of paper on the Platen Glass. Run 20 blank copies from Tray 1 in Full Color mode. Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass. Run 20 copies from Tray 1 in Full Color mode. (While running these copies, listen for unusual fuser or exit noises and observe output for Image Quality.) When entire Fuser Assembly is replaced, also perform Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1). If the External Heat Roll is replaced, adjust the External Heat Roll nip (ADJ 8.8.1).
6. 7.
Standard Break-In Procedure

1. Perform this procedure whenever any of the following components are either cleaned or replaced: 2. Donor Roll Assembly or Oil System Kit Heat Roll External Heat Roll Donor Roll Pickup Roll Pressure Roll Wick Heat Roll Stripper Fingers Pressure Roll Stripper Fingers Cleaning Roll
8.
After performing service, allow the machine to come to the Ready Condition. NOTE: During a full warm-up cycle, the Fuser Drives rotate for 2 minutes and Oil Pump runs for 5 minutes.
3. 4. 5.
Place a blank sheet of paper on the Platen Glass. Run 20 blank copies from Tray 1 in Full Color mode. Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass. Run 20 copies from Tray 1 in Full Color mode. When Heat or Pressure Rolls are replaced, also perform Fuser Nip Adjustment (ADJ 8.1.1). If the External Heat Roll is replaced, adjust the External Heat Roll nip (ADJ 8.8.1).
Full Break-In Procedure

1. Perform this procedure whenever any of the following components are replaced or the oil supply system has been emptied: 2. Entire Fuser Assembly Oil Pump Oil Supply Tubes Oil Drip Pipe Oil Tank
After performing service, allow the machine to come to the Ready condition. NOTE: During a full warm-up cycle, the Fuser Drives rotate for 2 minutes and Oil Pump runs for 5 minutes.
3. 4.
Enter Diagnostics. Select dC330 Component Control. Enter Code 10-033 (oil Pump ON) and press Start, repeat twice (pump will run for 90 seconds each time).
1/05 6-3
General Procedures
GP 1 Fuser Break-In Procedure
GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup

CAUTION This procedure is for DC12 Copier/Printers only. Attempting to use this setup on DCCS50 machines may result in Image Quality problems. The purpose of this procedure is to adjust the maximum imageable area to allow for full-bleed printing of 11 x 17 in. images onto 12 x 18 in. paper, or A3 images onto SR-A3 paper. This will allow oversize sheets to be trimmed to 11 x 17 or A3, with the image extending through the trimmed area.
GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP

The purpose of this RAP is to provide guidance for resolving an intermittent problem. This is not an exact procedure, but a set of recommended actions that use the resources of the service manual to help locate the cause of an intermittent problem.
Procedure
1. Check the service log. Recent service actions may provide information about the problem. For example, a component that was recently replaced to correct another problem may be the cause of the new intermittent problem. Run the machine in a mode that vigorously exercises the function that is suspected. The machine may fail more frequently or may fail completely under these conditions. Look for signs of failure or abnormal operation. An intermittent problem can usually be associated with a RAP, since when it does fail, it results in a Fail Code, a Jam Code, or some other observable symptom. 3. Using the RAP that is associated with the symptom of the intermittent problem, examine all of the components that are referenced in the RAP. Look for: 4. contamination, such as a feed roller that has a build up of dirt or toner wear, such as gear teeth that are rounded or have excessive backlash HFSI, even if they are not near or have not exceeded the SPEC LIFE or COPY COUNT value wires chafing against components of the machine, especially against moving components misaligned, misadjusted, or incorrectly installed components slow or slipping clutches; slow or binding solenoids damaged components excessive heat, or symptoms of excessive heat, such as the discoloration of a component loose cables or wires
Prerequisites
The following hardware/software are required in order to implement this procedure: Tag P39 (V5) or higher IOT software level DC12 with one of the following DFEs: EFI X12 with V1.5 software Splash G620 with V2.5 software Splash G630 with V3.0 software
2.
Specifications
The guaranteed imageable area is as follows: Print mode 12 x 18 paper - 297mm (+2.0/-0.5mm) x 438 mm (+13.0/- 0.5mm) SR A3 paper - 297mm (+6.0/-0.5mm) x 438 mm (+6.0/- 0.5mm) Copy mode 12 x 18 or SR A3 paper - 297mm x 432 mm (+/-0.5mm) @105% R/E
Procedure
NOTE: Registration adjustments are not affected by this procedure. 1. 2. 3. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the default screen. Select the ROS tab. CAUTION Make sure to change both NVM locations. Changing only one location will result in Image Quality problems. 4. Change the value in locations 720-360 and 720-361 to 1. 5.
Using the RAP that is associated with the symptom of the intermittent problem, perform all of the adjustments for the components or functions that are referenced in the RAP. Check to ensure that the adjustment CAN BE MADE and that there is an adequate range of adjustment, and that it can be set to or near the nominal value. Any abnormality that is observed may be an indication of the cause of the problem. For example, a component can be adjusted to the nominal value, but it is at the limit of the adjustment range. This is not normal and may be an indication of the cause of the problem. Operate all of the components in the appropriate RAP that is associated with the symptom of the intermittent problem with DC330 Component Control (refer to dC330 Component Control). Observe the components for any symptoms of abnormal operation, such as a hesitation, or an unusual sound. Check that the AC and DC power are within specification. Get technical advice or assistance when it is appropriate. This will depend upon the situation and the established local procedures. Examine the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with the function that is failing. Refer to the BSDs. Look for: contamination, such as a feed roller that has a build up of dirt or toner wear, such as gear teeth that are rounded or have excessive backlash
6. 7. 8.
General Procedures
GP 2 Increased Imageable Area Setup, GP 4 Intermit-
1/05 6-4
9.
HFSI, even if they are not near or have not exceeded the SPEC LIFE or COPY COUNT value wires chafing against components of the machine, especially against moving components misaligned, misadjusted, or incorrectly installed components slow or slipping clutches; slow or binding solenoids damaged components excessive heat, or symptoms of excessive heat, such as the discoloration of a component loose cables or wires
GP 5 Verifying the Administration Tools Password

This procedure will enable the CSE to read a machine Administration Tools password if the SA has forgotten their password or if the SA is unavailable. CAUTION Use this procedure only to read the password resident on the machine. Then use the password to access the Administration Tools Screen and change the password using the normal procedure.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the default screen. Select UI/Tools from the Vertical Left Tab List. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the default screen. Record and Retain NVM Values for the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 702-180 702-181 702-182 702-183 702-184 702-185
Perform the adjustments for the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with the function that is failing. Refer to the BSDs. Check to ensure that the adjustment CAN BE MADE and that there is an adequate range of adjustment, and that it can be set to or near the nominal value. Any abnormality that is observed may be an indication of the cause of the problem. For example, a component can be adjusted to the nominal value, but it is at the limit of the adjustment range. This is not normal and may be an indication of the cause of the problem
10. Operate all of the components that are not in the RAP, but are associated with the function that is failing with DC330 Component Control (refer to dC330 Component Control). Refer to the BSDs. Observe the components for any symptoms of abnormal operation, such as a hesitation, or an unusual sound. 11. Replace any components or consumables that are known to be a frequent cause of the problem. When doing this, consider the cost and time required. If the suspected item is inexpensive, can be installed quickly, and has a high probability of resolving the problem, then it is reasonable to replace it. 12. Leave an accurate and detailed record of your actions in the service log. Describe what you have observed, what actions you took, and the recommended next steps.
Calculating the Administration Tools Password Exit from dC131 NVM Read/Write Mode. Exit the Diagnostic Mode. Using the PWS, go to Programs/Accessories/Scientific Calculator (This is the standard accessory in Microsoft Windows) a. b. c. 4. a. 5. Calculator has two operating modes, select Scientific Format. To do this, on the calculator icon, go to View and click Scientific. Make sure the Decimal and the Deg formats are selected. Enter decimal number. Click the Hex format. (Select Dword on calculator) This will leave you with a pair of two digit hex words.
Convert the numbers recorded from the list above to hexadecimal.
Convert the hexadecimal numbers to their ASCII code equivalent. Refer to Table 1.
1/05 6-5
General Procedures
GP 4 Intermittent Problem RAP, GP 5 Verifying the
NOTE: The results from the above conversion will be the Administration Tools Password. Each memory location holds two digits of the Administration Tools Password. The Administration Tools Password may be 4-12 digits long. Unused memory will hold the ASCII code character for a space (20). Refer to Table 1. NOTE: If you DO NOT have the capability above, (Steps 6 through 8) on your PC or Laptop, please use the conversion matrix in Table 2. Table 1 Hex/ASCII Conversion HEX 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 20 ASCII 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Space
Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 12856 12857 13104 13105 13106 13107 13108 13109 13110 13111 13112 13113 13360 13361 13362 13363 13364 13365 13366 13367 13368 13369 13616 13617 13618 13619 13620 13621 13622 13623 13624 13625 13872 13873 13874 13875 13876 13877 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3238 3239 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 12592 12593 12594 12595 12596 12597 12598 12599 12600 12601 12848 12849 12850 12851 12852 12853 12854 12855 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1/05 6-6
General Procedures
Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 13878 13879 13880 13881 13888 13889 13890 13891 13892 13893 13894 13895 13896 13897 14384 14385 14386 14387 14388 14389 14390 14391 14392 14393 14640 14641 14642 14643 14644 14645 14646 14647 14648 14649 12320 12576 12848 13088 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3020 3120 3230 3320 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 *0 + (SPACE) *1 + (SPACE) *2 + (SPACE) *3 + (SPACE)
Table 2 . 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hecadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 13344 13600 13856 14112 14368 14624 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3420 3520 3620 3720 3820 3920 *4 + (SPACE) *5 + (SPACE) *6 + (SPACE) *7 + (SPACE) *8 + (SPACE) *9 + (SPACE)
* # + (SPACE) Key applies only on the last digit of the password, which was at 5th, 7th, 9th or 11th.
1/05 6-7
General Procedures
GP 6 Verifying the Auditron Password

This procedure will enable the CSE to read a machine Auditron password if the SA has forgotten their password or if the SA is unavailable. CAUTION Use this procedure only to read the password resident on the machine. Then use the password to access the Auditron Administrator Screen and change the password using the normal procedure.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode, refer to: Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the default screen. Select Other from the Vertical Left Tab List. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the default screen. Record and Retain NVM Values for the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 850-001 850-002 850-003 850-004 850-005 850-006 850-007
Exiting from the Auditron Password Exit from dC131 NVM Read/Write Mode. Exit the Diagnostic Mode. Using the PWS, go to Programs/Accessories/Scientific Calculator (This is the standard accessory in Microsoft Windows) a. b. c. 4. Calculator has two operating modes, select Scientific Format. To do this, on the calculator icon, go to View and click Scientific. Make sure the Decimal and the Deg formats are selected. Enter decimal number.
Convert the numbers recorded from the list above to hexadecimal (Select Dword on calculator) a. Click the Hex format. This will leave you with a pair of two digit hex words. Convert the hexadecimal numbers to their ASCII code equivalent. Refer to Table 1.
5.
General Procedures
1/05 6-8
NOTE: NVM Location 850-007 is a binary switch that turns Auditron ON and OFF. Its value will be 0 or 1 only. NOTE: The results from the above conversion will be the Auditron Password. Each memory location holds two digits of the Auditron password. The Auditron password may be 412 digits long. Unused memory will hold the ASCII code character for a space (20). Refer to Table 1. NOTE: If you DO NOT have the capability above, (Steps 6 through 8) on your PC or Laptop, please use the conversion matrix in Table 2. Table 1 Hex/ASCII Conversion HEX 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 20 ASCII 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Space
Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 12853 12854 12855 12856 12857 13104 13105 13106 13107 13108 13109 13110 13111 13112 13113 13360 13361 13362 13363 13364 13365 13366 13367 13368 13369 13616 13617 13618 13619 13620 13621 13622 13623 13624 13625 13872 13873 13874 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3330 3331 3332 3333 3334 3335 3336 3337 3338 3339 3430 3431 3432 3433 3434 3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3530 3531 3532 3533 3534 3535 3536 3537 3538 3539 3630 3631 3632 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 12592 12593 12594 12595 12596 12597 12598 12599 12600 12601 12848 12849 12850 12851 12852 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3130 3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136 3137 3138 3139 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1/05 6-9
General Procedures
Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 13875 13876 13877 13878 13879 13880 13881 13888 13889 13890 13891 13892 13893 13894 13895 13896 13897 14384 14385 14386 14387 14388 14389 14390 14391 14392 14393 14640 14641 14642 14643 14644 14645 14646 14647 14648 14649 12320 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642 3643 3644 3645 3646 3647 3648 3649 3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3020 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 *0 + (SPACE)
Table 2 2 Digits Password / ASCI Code / Hexadecimal Conversion Matrix NVM Value (Decimal) 12576 12848 13088 13344 13600 13856 14112 14368 14624 2 Digits Password (Hex. Dword) ASCII Code 3120 3230 3320 3420 3520 3620 3720 3820 3920 *1 + (SPACE) *2 + (SPACE) *3 + (SPACE) *4 + (SPACE) *5 + (SPACE) *6 + (SPACE) *7 + (SPACE) *8 + (SPACE) *9 + (SPACE)
* # + (SPACE) Key applies only on the last digit of the password, which was at 5th, 7th, 9th or 11th.
General Procedures
1/05 6-10
GP 7 Verifying Tools Mode Password

Entering, exiting and changing the Tools Mode Password.
GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO) Procedure

Description
This procedure is used when a full PO/PO is required for the Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE).
Procedure
Entering Tool Mode NOTE: You can use the default password (11111) to enter the Tools mode the first time. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press the Administration button on the Control Panel. Select the Tools button on the Touch Screen. Use the keypad to key-in the password (default is 11111). Select the Close button to exit any Tools Mode function without saving. Select Close to return to the Basic Copy tab. Select Change Tools Access Number button on the Tools screen. Key-in a New Number in the New Number field. Key-in the same number in Confirm New Number in the Confirm New Number field. Press the Enter button. Select the Close button to return to System Administration Item.
Procedure
CAUTION If any of the following steps are not correctly followed, the IDFE will not shut down properly, and the PO/PO process must be repeated. NOTE: The IDFE will take approximately three to five minutes to load its software after performing the following steps: Perform the following: 1. Switch OFF the Main Switch for the Printer. CAUTION When power to the IOT is switched-off, the IDFE Hard Disk Drive goes into a software shutdown. Damage to the Hard Disk Drive could occur if the IDFE is not allowed to complete the software shutdown process. 2. 3. Wait for 30 seconds. Switch ON the Main Switch for the Printer. NOTE: The configuration report may take 2 or 3 minutes to print.
Exit the Tool Mode
Changing the Password
1/05 6-11
General Procedures
GP 7 Verifying Tools Mode Password, GP 8 IDFE
GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM) Procedure

Description
This procedure is used to install software for the IDFE by using a CD-ROM. Refer to GP 17 IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM) for the procedure to update software for the IDFE. NOTE: The installation CD-ROM completely reformats the IDFE Hard Disk Drive and re-initializes the printers network configuration parameters. You will lose all information stored on the Hard Disk Drive. You will also lose your network configuration parameter setups. Software installations will change network parameters and require that customers re-establish Printer/IDFE network parameters. When in doubt always run a configuration report first and verify that Printer/IDFE network parameters are correct. NOTE: After completing the following procedure, ensure that the CD-ROM has been removed from the CD-ROM Drive. If the CD-ROM is not removed from the Drive the Controller will boot from the CD-ROM each time the Controller is switched-on.
NOTE: The loading process should take less than 10 minutes. The CD-ROM will eject if the software load was successful. NOTE: If the CD-ROM does not eject within 10 minutes, press the Eject Button, and ensure that the CD-ROM is inserted correctly. Now, switch off power to the Printer, wait for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off and then switch on the Printer. Now, wait for the software to load. NOTE: After the software has successfully loaded, a configuration report may be printed whenever the Printer is powered on. 11. Remove the CD-ROM and close the CD-ROM Tray. 12. Switch off power to the Printer and the IDFE. 13. Wait for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off. NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. 14. Re-connect all network interface cables to the IDFE. 15. Switch on power to the Printer/IDFE. 16. Wait for the IDFE to re-boot. NOTE: It takes approximately 5 to 7 minutes for the IDFE to reboot. NOTE: After the new software has been loaded a Configuration Report may print. 17. Use the Configuration Report to verify that the new Controller Software Version is correct. If the new software version is not correct, perform steps 4-17 of this procedure again. If the new software version is still not correct obtain a new installation CD-ROM and repeat steps 4-17 of this procedure. NOTE: If repeated (several occurrences of) Network Controller Disabled messages are displayed on the Local User Interface, obtain a new installation CD-ROM and repeat steps 4-17 of this procedure. 18. Ask your customer to perform the network setup procedures for re-establishing the Printer and IDFE network parameters. 19. Ask your customer to perform the Printer Driver installation for the type of workstation you have. NOTE: If necessary, ask your customer to refer to the Document Centre ColorSeries 50 Printer Installation Guide for Print Driver installation instructions. 20. Install or close the Cover for the CD-ROM Drive.
Procedure
NOTE: Be sure to read and follow the instructions in the release documentation, which is included with the software to be loaded. NOTE: Be sure to record the release version of the software being loaded. Perform the following: 1. 2. 3. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). If necessary, switch on power to the Printer/Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE). Remove or open the Cover for the IDFE CD-ROM Drive. NOTE: The Cover is located on the right end of the IDFE. NOTE: Some versions of the IDFE use a Cover and Screw to provide EME protection for the IOT. Some versions of the IDFE use a hinged Cover Assembly to provide EME protection. 4. 5. 6. 7. Press the Eject button on the IDFE CD-ROM Drive. Carefully insert the CD-ROM, and press the Eject Button to close the CD-ROM Tray. Switch off power to the Printer/IDFE. Wait for the Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) on the IDFE to switch off. NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. 8. Disconnect all Network Interface Cables to the IDFE. NOTE: Do Not disconnect the Digital to Digital Interface (DDI) Cables between the IDFE and the Printer. 9. Switch on power to the Printer/IDFE. 10. Wait for the software to load.
General Procedures
GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM)
1/05 6-12
GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs

Description
This procedure is used to maintain serial number and billing data integrity when Billing PWBs must be replaced.
GP 11 PWS (Diagnostics) Software Installation Procedure

Procedure
NOTE: For the PWS S/W Upgrade Installation Procedure, go to the DocuColor 12 PWS / IOT Software upgrade CD Installation Instructions, Section 1.
Procedure
CAUTION To maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data never replace all three PWBs at once. If any of the following billing data PWBs needs replacing, only replace them ONE AT A TIME according to this procedure: 1. 2. IOT NVM PWB (PL 9.2). IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2). Half Tone PWB (PL 9.2). Connect the PWS. Select dC 132 in the DC Quick Pull-down menu. Compare the serial numbers displayed for the three PWBs with the serial number on the data plate. Note any that do not agree.
NOTE: If any of the following conditions exist, escalate the call to Field engineering or the NTC: 3. The displayed serial numbers match each other but do not match the data plate. Two or more numbers do not agree with the data plate and the third number The displayed numbers are all different. If one serial number does not match the others, the Set Serial Number button will become active. Click on the button. A series of pop-up windows will open. Follow the instructions on the screen to synchronize the serial numbers. CAUTION To maintain the integrity of the serial number and billing data never replace all three PWBs at once. Replacing all three PWBs at once will cause unrecoverable NVM corruption. If a PWB needs replacing, only replace ONE AT A TIME. If the problem is not resolved, reinstall the original PWB and renter the serial number before attempting to replace a different PWB. 4. If any PWB will not synchronize, replace that PWB (PL 9.2) and re-synchronize.
1/05 6-13
General Procedures
GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs ,
GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports

Description
This procedure describes how to print a Configuration Report. Printing Configuration Reports can help you troubleshoot and configure the Printer.
GP 13 Printing a Complex Test Page

Description
This procedure describes how to print a Test Page. Printing Test Pages can help you troubleshoot the Printer and IDFE.
Procedure
NOTE: You can print a configuration report by using CentreWare Internet Services. Use this configuration report as a guide to help you re-establish network settings for the printer when new software is installed. NOTE: To access CentreWare Internet Services you will need to obtain the network IP address. The IP address can be obtained from the Printer UI. NOTE: Perform steps 6-9 of this procedure to print a Configuration Report directly from the workstation. NOTE: It is NOT possible to print a Configuration Report from the PWS. Ask the customer to print a Configuration Report. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Properties tab from the CentreWare Internet Services Home Page. Select Printer Defaults Select Print Start Up Page Select Apply New Settings. NOTE: A password dialog box will appear. You must enter the correct user name and password before the new settings are enabled. 5. PO/PO the Printer and IDFE (GP 8 IDFE Power OFF/Power ON (PO/PO)). NOTE: The configuration report may take 2 or 3 minutes to print. NOTE: The configuration report will print every time the Printer and IDFE are powered off and powered on. NOTE: If the configuration report does not print ask the customer to enable it for you from the web UI. 6. 7. 8. 9. Select the Print tab from the CentreWare Internet Services Home Page. Select Reports from the Print window. Select Configuration from the Report Type pop up menu. Select the Print button.
Procedure
NOTE: It is NOT possible to print the Complex Test Page from the PWS. Ask the customer to perform steps 1-4 of this procedure. NOTE: Test Pages can only be printed from the customers client or workstation to the printer. 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Print tab from the CentreWare Internet Services Home Page. Select Reports from the Print window. Select Test Page from the Report Type pop up menu. Select the Print button. NOTE: Printing a Complex Test Page could take up to several minutes to print depending on your Network Configuration.
General Procedures
GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports, GP 13 Printing
1/05 6-14
GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T & M) Account

Description
This procedure sets the machine for a T&M Account. NOTE: If the Customer was on a FSWA and is now a T & M, the message Draw Type Mismatch will appear on the UI. To remove this message and continue the make copies, the Customer will need to order a T & M Xerographic CRU.
GP 16 Setting the Machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox

Description
This procedure configures the machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox. NOTE: This procedure cannot be used with a Copier only configuration. NOTE: This procedure uses the machine UI to set the machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox. To set the machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox using the PWS, use the alternate procedure below.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. While holding down the 0" Button, press Start. A screen displays asking you to Enter your Access Number. Using the Keypad, enter 6789. Press Confirm when finished. If you make a mistake press C. The Customer Support Engineer Tools screen will display. Press the NVM Read/Write button in the center of the top row. The NVM Read/Write (dC131) screen will display. Press the Enter Number button to begin. Using the Keypad, enter 774-056. Press Start to bring up the current value. The Current Value will display in the box on the Left. If the current value is 48 the machine setup for a Full Service Maintenance Agreement FSMA account. Using the Keypad press 49 to set the account to T & M. The number you entered will display in the New Value box on the right.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. While holding down the 0" Button, press Start. A screen will display, asking you to Enter your Access Number. Using the Keypad, Enter 6789. Press Confirm when finished. If you make a mistake, press C". The Customer Support Engineer Tools screen will display. Press the NVM Read / Write button in the center of the top row. The NVM Read / Write (dC131) screen will display. Press the Enter Number button to begin. Using the Keypad, enter 780-001. Press Start to bring up the current value. The Current Value will appear in the box on the left. If the current value is 0" the device is set up as a Sorter. Using the Keypad, press 1" to set the device up as a Mailbox. The number you entered will appear in the New Value box on the right.
8. 9.
10. Press Start to accept the change. The number should now appear in the Current Value box. 11. Press Close to exit this screen. 12. After you press Close, the machine will re-start. 13. When the screen returns, press Done to finish. 14. The machine will now re-start and will recognize the account as T & M.
10. Press Start to accept the change. The new number should now appear in the Current Value. 11. Press Close to exit this screen. 12. After you press Close the machine will re-start. 13. When the screen returns press Done to finish. 14. The machine will re-start and will recognize the devise as a Mailbox. NOTE: The procedure below is an alternate method for setting the machine to recognize the Sorter as a Mailbox using the PWS.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode, refer to: Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Configuration Page (dC371) from the DC Quick pull down menu. Select Mailbox from Output Devices(s). Select the Save Button.
1/05 6-15
General Procedures
GP 15 Setting the Machine for a Time & Materials (T
GP 17 IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM)

Description
This procedure is used to update software for the IDFE by using a CD-ROM. Refer to GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM) to install software for the IDFE by using a CD-ROM. NOTE: The update CD-ROM does not format the IDFE Hard Disk Drive or re-initialize the printers network configuration parameters. A software update or patch will not typically change network parameters unless indicated in the release documentation. When in doubt always run a Configuration Report first and verify that Printer/IDFE network parameters are correct. NOTE: After completing the following procedure, ensure that the CD-ROM has been removed from the CD-ROM Drive. If the CD-ROM is not removed from the Drive the Controller will boot from the CD-ROM each time the Controller is switched-on.
NOTE: The loading process should take less than 10 minutes. The CD-ROM will eject if the software load was successful. NOTE: If the CD-ROM does not eject within 10 minutes, press the Eject Button, and ensure that the CD-ROM is inserted correctly. Now, switch off power to the Printer, wait for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off and then switch on the Printer. Now, wait for the software to load. NOTE: After the software has successfully loaded, a configuration report may be printed whenever the Printer is switched on. 11. Remove the CD-ROM and close the CD-ROM Tray. 12. Switch off power to the Printer and the IDFE. 13. Wait for the LEDs on the IDFE to switch off. NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. 14. Re-connect all Network Interface Cables to the IDFE. 15. Switch on power to the Printer/IDFE. 16. Wait for the IDFE to re-boot. NOTE: It takes approximately 5 to 7 minutes for the IDFE to re-boot. NOTE: After the new software has been loaded a configuration report may print. 17. Use the Configuration Report to verify that the new Controller Software Version is correct. If the new software version is not correct, perform steps 4-17 of this procedure again. If the new software version is still not correct obtain a new installation CD-ROM and perform steps 4 -17 of GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM), then repeat steps 4-17 of this procedure (GP 17). NOTE: If repeated (several occurrences of) Network Controller Disabled messages are displayed on the Local User Interface, obtain a new installation CD-ROM and perform steps 4-17 of GP 9 IDFE Software Installation (CD-ROM), then repeat steps 4-17 of this procedure (GP 17). 18. Ask your customer to perform the network setup procedures for re-establishing the Printer and IDFE network parameters. 19. Ask your customer to perform the Printer Driver installation for the type of workstation you have. NOTE: If necessary, ask your customer to refer to the Document Centre ColorSeries 50 Printer Installation Guide for Print Driver installation instructions. 20. Install or close the Cover for the CD-ROM Drive.
Procedure
NOTE: Be sure to read and follow the instructions in the release documentation, which is included with the software. NOTE: Be sure to record the release version of the software being loaded. Perform the following: 1. 2. 3. Print a Configuration Report (GP 12 Printing Configuration Reports). If necessary, switch on power to the Printer/Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE). Remove or open the Cover for the IDFE CD-ROM Drive. NOTE: The Cover is located on the right end of the IDFE. NOTE: Some versions of the IDFE use a Cover and Screw to provide EME protection for the IOT. Some versions of the IDFE use a hinged Cover Assembly to provide EME protection. 4. 5. 6. 7. Press the Eject button on the IDFE CD-ROM Drive. Carefully insert the CD-ROM, and press the Eject Button to close the CD-ROM Tray. Switch off power to the Printer/IDFE. Wait for the Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) on the IDFE to switch off. NOTE: The LEDs will switch off in 18-22 seconds. Allow 30 seconds to ensure complete shutdown of the Hard Disk Drive. 8. 9. Disconnect all Network Interface Cables to the IDFE. Switch on power to the Printer IDFE.
10. Wait for the software to load.
General Procedures
GP 17 IDFE Software Update (CD-ROM)
1/05 6-16
GP 18 IOT UI Language Change

Description
NOTE: For IOT UI Language Change Procedure, go to Appendix D of the IOT software v6.00.2 Install Instructions or Appendix B in any other IOT software above 6.00.2. This procedure is located in the IOT software CD.
GP 20 2nd BTR Service Procedure

At assembly install or at first call after machine install:
Apply a small amount of Plastislip Grease (43E550) to both cams on the Cam Shaft Assembly (PL 7.10, item # 11).
At 100k Interval:
Remove the Inlet Plate (PL 7.10, item #1), and thoroughly vacuum the assembly sump. Refer to REP 7.9.1 as required. Clean the plate, the 2nd BTR Roll and the Cleaning Blade with a clean, dry cloth. Check all four locating pins to ensure they are secured firmly on the assembly frame. Epoxy may be used for any loose pins. Perform the 100k Interval Maintenance Check all drive gears on the rear of the assembly for wear or damage, and replace as required (PL 7.10, item # 16, 22 and 23). Check the stub shaft which supports the drive gear (# 22). If the shaft is loose, Epoxy may be applied to the inside frame where the shaft attaches to the assembly. Perform the 100k Interval Maintenance. Remove the front cover of the Assembly (1 screw), and check the copper contact points at the front of the 2nd BTR Roll, and also below the large front camming spring. These two contact points provide a ground path through the drawer frame for the 2nd BTR Roll. If necessary, buff the contact points with an Emery cloth. Check the condition of the 2nd BTR Roll, and replace if wear or damage is observed (PL 7.10, item # 8). Refer to REP 7.10.1 as required. Replace the Cam Shaft Assembly (PL 7.10, item # 11). Apply a small amount of Plastislip Grease (43E550) to both cams on the Cam Shaft Assembly. Replace the Zinc Stearate Bar (655N00080). NOTE: A worn Zinc Stearate Bar will cause streaks in the process direction, because of inconsistent stearate coating of the 2nd BTR Roll Replace the Cleaning Blade (655N00081). NOTE: A worn Cleaning Blade will cause streaks in the process direction, because of inconsistent cleaning of the 2nd BTR Roll.
At 200K Interval:

At 300K Interval:

At 400K Interval:
Replace the 2nd BTR (REP 7.9.1). Reset HFSI Counter 009-809.
1/05 6-17
General Procedures
GP 18 IOT UI Language Change, GP 20 2nd BTR
General Procedures
GP 18 IOT UI Language Change, GP 20 2nd BTR Ser-
1/05 6-18
Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS

Procedure
The following procedure describe how to enter the Service Diagnostics Mode with the PWS. CAUTION If the PWS power is supplied from the service outlet of the machine, take the following precautions: 1. 2. Do not connect any device to this service outlet except the Convenience Stapler or the PWS. Connecting another device to this outlet may cause a fire or result in electrocution. This outlet is designed to be used by service personnel only. After service, place the cover on the outlet to prevent customer use. Inform the customer that the machine will be undergoing service and will not be available. (Copy jobs and local print jobs will be stopped) Connect the Portable Work Station (PWS) to the machine (Figure 1). 8. PWS Connector 9. 3. 4. 5. 6.
NOTE: A Cord Adapter must be used for 115V machines. NOTE: If the Service Outlet is being used by the Convenience Stapler and PWS power must be supplied, unplug the Convenience Stapler and install Cord Adapter between the machine and the PWS Power Cord. Switch on the PWS. Make sure the machine is not copying or printing. The machine UI should display Ready to Copy when there are no pending jobs. Enter the GSNLock Password and select OK. Double-click the Internet Explorer Icon. NOTE: The PWS Home Screen will display. Functions not available in the service mode are displayed in gray. 7. Click on the Case Server not running Click here to Start box. Wait for the Case server to load. If necessary, minimize the Case Server Box. On the Internet Explorer menu bar select the Contents Icon. Double-click the Product Tool Folder.
10. Scroll down and click Docu12 Diagnostics from Product Tools. 11. Select the Docu12 Diagnostics Button. a. b. Select Use Local DB from the opening screen. While the machine is connecting to the PWS, the machine UI will display the message, Please wait. Then the message will change to CE Remote Maintenance Mode is working. After the PWS connects to the machine, the message will change to connecting to the machine completed.
c.
12. When the system starts obtaining the machine data, the system displays that data (at the time you entered into the Service Mode) on the Service Entry Screen. When the system has obtained the machine data, it displays Complete at the top left corner of the Service Entry Screen. Table 1 list the Machine Data displayed at Service Entry 13. If communication is lost between the PWS and the machine, click Reconnect from the main file menu. Serial Cable PWS Power Cord Service Outlet Cord Adapter NOTE: The machine cannot exit from the Service Mode while in the PWS Service Diagnostic Mode. 14. To exit the Diagnostic Mode: a. b. Select the Service Exit Tab. Click on the appropriate close-out buttons: Complete Closeout Temporary Closeout Exit PWS
Figure 1 Connecting the PWS
1/05 6-19
General Procedures
Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the
DC Quick (CODE Number LIST)

Table 1 Machine Data displayed at Service Entry Heading Machine Data Contents Product Code Description Displays a 3-digit code allocated to each machine to identify the machine. Displays a 6-digit number (09) allocated to each machine type to identify the machine. Displays the total number of copies/prints Displays the total number of copies/prints since the last CSE visit (complete closeout). Displays current IOT S/W Version Displays the Jams that have occurred since the last complete closeout. Displays the component(s) (HFSI) that has exceeded the life Threshold). Displays current (active) faults in the machine. 110 118 CRU data Jam Counter Once in the Service Mode, dC Routines can be selected by dC Number or by selecting the appropriate tabs starting at the Service Entry Screen.
Procedure
1. 2. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Using the DC Quick pull-down menu (upper-right side of Diagnostics Service Entry Screen), select the desired dC routine. Table 1 is a complete list of dC Routines that are available from the DC Quick pull-down menu. Table 1 dC Routines dC Number 100 Name Service Entry Screen 1. 2. 3. Displays the Service Routine Tabs. Lists Active Faults Lists the item names of the HFSIs that exceeded life expectancy. Lists the jams that have occurred since the last Call Closeout. Displays IOT S/W Version. Description
Serial Number
Total Copies Copies Since Last Call
Software Version Non-Zero Jams ID, Description, Occurrences
HFSI Requiring Replacement ID, Description, Threshold, Count.
4.
Faults in Progress (Current Faults)
ID, Description, Primary
5.
Lists current and last 2 Xerographic CRU data. Displays the following: Number of jam events since the last Complete Closeout (performed in Service Exit) to the current Number of jams. Displays the following: Number of Fault events after the last Complete Closeout (performed in Service Exit) to the current copy count. 1. Displays the history in three categories: Document Jam, Paper Jam and Other Fault. Displays the most recent 40 Faults (without categorizing)
120
Fail Counters
122
Shut-down History
2. 129 131 Automatic Setting: Adjust System Registration NVM access: Read/Write NVM
The IOT lead registration and side registration are matched. You can reference or set/change the NVM data.
General Procedures
Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS,
1/05 6-20
Table 1 dC Routines dC Number 132 Name Set Machine Serial Number. Read Billing Meter Information Description If you have replaced the PWB that has a Machine Serial Number, check the PWB and set the Machine Serial Number. Reads Billing Meter Information for the following: IOT CPU PWB 135 Service Data HFSI Counter Half-Tone PWB IOT NVM PWB dC Number 351 Name
Table 1 dC Routines Description 1. Saves and restores values of all NVM in PWS dC131 databank. NOTE: Background Read must complete prior to saving. 2. 3. 4. 361 NVM access: Save/Restore NVM Start and Stop background NVM Read. Saves/restores machine settings. Saves NVM values listed: Resets all HFSI. NVM Background Processing
Displays the regular part replacement life expectancy (threshold) and current value (usage). You can change the replacement life expectancy to a preset value in the PWS database and reset the current value. Monitor the analog values of the sensors (A/D conversion) while operating the components (e.g., C.C). You can temporarily change the output value. Displays the requirements for exit from the Service Mode. Commands NVM Data initialization for initialization of: IISS Post IPS IOT SYS UI
Saves the machine NVM data in the PWS. Restores the machine NVM data (stored in the PWS) back to the machine. Allows viewing of current software version and Market Place setting, Machine Configuration, Output Device(s), Accessories, Tray 1 Paper Size setting, Feature Config., and Input Device. These settings can be changed to align with the machine configuration. Can change the Edit Pad custom color(s). 1. 2. Outputs a test pattern to identify a copy quality problem. Generates a test pattern from the Pattern Generator in the machine.
140
Component Check: Analog Monitor
371
Configuration Page
188 301
Service Mode Exit Screen NVM access: NVM initialization
391 612
Edit Pad Color Test Pattern Print
305 330
System Test: Component Operation Check UI Component Check
Checks the UI Screen and Component Panel Button operation.
701
Component Check: Component Con- Displays the instructions and results trol of the Input Component Check and Output Component Check 1. You can monitor each Input Component or check the operation of each Output Component. 2. You can simultaneously check multiple Input Components and Output Components up to 11 total.
Other Adjust/Set: Fuser Nip Measure- Make a copy for a contact arc adjustment ment and measure the fuser nip width by a simple operation. Tray 5 (Bypass) guide adjustment 1. 2. Re-calibrate Size Sensor Check if the Tray 5 guide size in the width direction has been properly detected.
740
915
Machine data output: XERO data dis- Displays the machine Xerographic play data in the PWS in a format that is easy to see and understand. IOT Highlight Setup Uniform the Highlight Density Reproduction Starting Point (for each K, Y, M, C) and the Highlight Density of In/ Out. Make a 4C copy in the Photo mode. Adjust the YMCK color balance.
918
919
Color Balance Setup (IIT machine only)
1/05 6-21
General Procedures
Table 1 dC Routines dC Number 920 922 Name Developer Unit Check TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment ProCon PG TRC Adjustment VH/VM Setup ADC/AGC Setup TRC Check PG IIT calibration (IIT machine only) Description Rotate the Rotary Developer and set it at the predetermined position. Measure the grayscale patch by the ADC sensor. Make the LUT for IOT TRC correction. Print the ProCon PG. Manually fine adjust each color (low/ mid/high density) in PG. Set VG, VD light amount, Developing Bias and ASG Bias output. Execute automatic adjustment of the ADC Sensor Gain. Print the TRC Check PG. 1. Calculate and set the white reference compensation coefficient. Correct the IIT sensitivity variation.
dC100 Service Entry

When entering Diagnostics, this routine allows you to view faults in progress, Non-Zero Jams and HFSI items requiring replacement. Service entry allows you to view product information, such as: 1. 2. 3. Product Code Machine Serial Number Total Copies Copies since Last Call IOT Software Version Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Check the HFSI Requiring Replacement. Check the Non-Zero Jams. Jams that have occurred since the last service exit with the Complete Closeout option selected. Check for any Jams that have a high number of occurrences. Check the Faults In Progress. If any faults in progress are displayed, troubleshoot accordingly. Select the Refresh button to have the PWS request and receive the latest information on Total Copies, Copies Since Last Call, Non-Zero Jams or HFSI Requiring Replacement.
923 924 933 934 939 945
Procedure
2.
4. 5.
General Procedures
dC100 Service Entry
1/05 6-22
dC110 Displaying the CRU-Related Data

Purpose
Displays the Xerographic CRU NVM data (current and previous data items) in a format that can be easily understood for effective operation.
dC118 Jam Counter

Purpose
Displays the number of occurrences of Jams from time of previous Complete Closeout on service exit until present. The following screen information displays on the Jam Counters Screen: All Jams DADF Jams Paper Jams Non-Zero Jams
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. Select Other Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. Select Display CRU Related Data (dC110). The system displays: a. The Current-CRU Related Data and the Previous-CRU Related Data. Scroll the lists to review the displayed Current and Previous CRU Related Data. Select the Refresh button to have the PWS request and receive the latest information on CRU-Related Data.
NOTE: This procedure does not count jams detected while in the Service Mode.
Procedure
All Jams 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select All Jams tab (default). The Diagnostic Screen displays all Fault codes in this category since the last Service Exit with the Complete Closeout option selected. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select DADF Jams tab. The Diagnostic Screen displays all DADF Jams that have occurred since the last Service Exit with the Complete Closeout option selected. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select Paper Jams tab. The Diagnostic Screen displays all Paper Jams that have occurred since the last Service Exit with the Complete Closeout option selected. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select Non-Zero Jams tab. The Diagnostic Screen displays all Jams that have occurred since the last Service Exit with the Complete Closeout option selected.
DADF Jams 1. 2. 3.
Paper Jam History 1. 2. 3. 4.
Non-Zero Jams 1. 2. 3. 4.
1/05 6-23
General Procedures
dC110 Displaying the CRU-Related Data, dC118
dC120 Fail Counter

Purpose
Displays the Number of occurrences of each fault since the last Service Exit with the Call Closeout option selected. This procedure displays from the time when the machine last exited the Service Mode with Complete Closeout until present. NOTE: The machine does not count the faults detected while in the Service Mode. The machine does not count the interlock open detected while the Main Processor is stopped. The data is obtained when opening the screen or entering the Service Mode.
System Faults NOTE: This procedure displays System Faults only. NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is displayed. Select the System Faults tab. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number from maximum to minimum. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from minimum to maximum.
NOTE: If the previous call was saved and closed on diskettes when dC120 was read, and the Diagnostic Mode was entered again with the read from diskettes option selected, the previous fault history #Occurrence will display in the P1 column. If this same procedure was performed previously, the fault history #Occurrence will display in P2, then P3, up to columns P7.
Xero Faults NOTE: This procedure displays System Faults only. NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is displayed. Select the Xero Faults tab. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number from maximum to minimum. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from minimum to maximum.
Procedure
All Faults NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is displayed. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number from maximum to minimum. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from minimum to maximum.
DADF Faults NOTE: This procedure displays DADF Faults only. NOTE: This procedure displays the list in the ascending order of ID number (fault code). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. dC118 displays as the default screen. Select Fail Counters dC120 on the Maintenance Screen. The "All Faults" screen is displayed. Select the DADF Faults tab. The default is the ascending order of NVM ID number. Click on Chain/Link ID Box in the table heading to change the order of the ID number from maximum to minimum. Click on Chain/Link ID Box again restores the original order of the ID number from minimum to maximum.
General Procedures
dC120 Fail Counter
1/05 6-24
dC122 Shutdown History

Purpose
1. 2. To display the Last 40 Faults (History) without categorization. To categorize the faults (document jams [DADF], paper jams and failures) and displays their histories. A fault detected while in Service Mode is not counted. An Interlock Open detected while the machine is being stopped is not counted. If multiple faults occurred in the machine, the primary fault is recorded. (Primary fault: The first fault occurred.) To clear data select Complete Closeout in the Service Mode Exit screen (dC188). Exiting from the Service Mode clears all data in the Shut-Down History.
2.
Select Paper Jams in the Shutdown History screen. a. b. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the Paper Jam History. The system displays the last 20 Paper Jam Faults that occurred in Customer Mode after the data was cleared upon completing the last operation.
Failures 1. Select Fail on the Shutdown History Screen. The system displays the fault screen. a. The system displays the Non-paper faults that are included in the Last 40 Faults History.
NOTE: 1. 2. 3.
Procedure
Last 40 Faults History 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select the Diagnostics Tab. Select Last 40 Faults History in the Shut-down History screen. Last 40 Faults History is the default screen. The information in the lower right corner of the screen (Input, Original, Paper, Tray, Output) reflects the fault highlighted in the Table. a. b. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the copy count when each of the last 40 faults occurred. The system displays the Last 40 Faults that occurred in Customer Mode after the data was cleared upon completing the last Complete Closeout.
Last 40 Faults Occurrences 1. 2. 3. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS Select the Diagnostics Tab. dC122 displays as the default screen. Select Last 40 Fault Occurrences. a. b. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the number of occurrences of the last 40 faults. The system displays the last 40 faults that occurred in Customer Mode after the data was cleared upon completing the last operation.
DADF Jams 1. 2. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select DADF Jams in the Shutdown History Screen. a. b. Based on data read from the machine, the system displays the DADF Jams. The system displays the last DADF Jams that occurred in Customer Mode after the data was cleared upon completing the last operation.
Paper Jams 1. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS.
1/05 6-25
General Procedures
dC122 Shutdown History
dC129 System Registration Adjustment

Purpose
Performs the Lead Registration and Side Registration Adjustments by looking at the output of the built-in Test Pattern for adjustment. NOTE: For details on the dC129 System Registration adjustment, see ADJ 9.1.10: IOT Side/ Lead Edge Registration (dC129: System Registration Adjustment).
dC131 NVM Read/Write

Purpose
Reads, sets or changes the NVM data. NOTE: You can access all NVMs including the NVM for a key operator. The billing forgery prevention function and the auditron administration password cannot be overwritten.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select the Adjustments Tab on the Service Entry Screen. Select Other Adjustments Tab on the Adjustment/Setup Screen. The System Registration Adjustment Screen is displayed. Specify the Tray at the Tray/Size pull-down and the number of copies at the Print Count Window. NOTE: Tray1 is the default Tray and cannot be changed to another Tray from the PWS. NOTE: Number of copies can be set between 1-99. NOTE: Selecting Print All will print a test pattern from each tray. 5. 6. Select Print All. The message, executing System Registration Setup (dc129) is displayed. The specified number of built-in patterns is output and the message, Completed is displayed in the status area. a. 7. The message screen informing that the Main Processor is, abnormal will be displayed if Test Copy of the built-in pattern cannot be executed.
Procedure
Module Selection 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. The system displays one of the Read/Write Screens. dC131 NVM Read/Write is the default screen. Select a Sub-System from the Vertical Left Tab List. The default tab is All. Table 1 Module Selection Module item All UI/Tools IISS Config ROS IPS PHM System Xero Drives / Output ProCon Developer Fuser Other Errors (number of errors) Changed (number pending change) Chain number allocation 700 - 999 700,702 715 719 720 730 740, 749, 760, 761 752, 759 771, 774 772, 780, 790 773 776 777 775, 800, 850 Displays and NVM outside of the ranges listed in the PWS database. Displays any with new value entered in the "New" column, but not written yet.
Add/Subtract the Registration Adjustment Value by looking at the copy. Using the arrows for the Lead Reg and Side Reg, adjust the Lead and Side Registrations: a. b. Lead Reg. 1step (click) =.1100mm. Maximum steps (clicks) = 100 Side Reg. 1step (click) = 0.0423mm. Maximum steps (clicks) = 300 Current NVM Value of the Lead Registration/Side Registration are renewed when this, Set Adjust Value and Save (LR) is selected. Restore (LR) and Restore (SR) buttons will restore the Current NVM Value to the initial value. NVM Value at Save is displayed. This display will be changed when Save (LR) or Save (SR) is selected again. Save (LR), Save (SR) will save LR or SR NVM in NVM Value at Save. When the machine cannot change the NVM value, the message, ! Unable to set up adjustment value. Cancel Adjustment Value Setup is displayed on the Information screen.
8.
Select Set Adjust Value after confirming the Registration Adjustment Value. a.
b. c. 9. a.
The message, In Progress is displayed. Reading NVM 1. Select an ID from the Sub-System Table, then click Read NVM or double click on the line ID (line) and the value will be read in the value column. The "Range Check" column will fill in.
10. Verify the adjustment by printing another pattern. 11. If the pattern does not meet Image Quality requirements, repeat steps 8-11 of this adjustment procedure.
General Procedures
dC129 System Registration Adjustment, dC131 NVM
1/05 6-26
NOTE: Values that are out of range will cause the Error Tab to turn Red. NOTE: While a value is highlighted, you can write an NVM value in it. Writing NVM 1. 2. To write a new value, first enter a new value in the "New" column Select Write NVM. a. b. c. d. If the input value is valid (within the range), the system writes the new NVM value in the NVM code in the machine. If the input value is invalid, the system displays the following message in the information screen, The given NVM value is out of range. NVM was not changed. If the NVM cannot be changed (Write protected NVM), the system displays the following message, ! The specified NVM is read only. When the system writes the new value in the specified NVM code, the value is updated in the New Box and reduces the count in the Changed Tab. NOTE: When a value is written in the vertical Changed Tab, the tab will turn green. The number in parenthesis() will count the number of pending NVM values. Clicking the tab once will show a list of all the changed values. If a new value is input but not yet written, the changed value is captured in the Changed Vertical Left Tab List.
dC131 UI/Tools (700)

Table 1 UI/Tools (700) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-297 0-432 0-40 Description Free Paper Size Registration (FS) Free Paper Size Registration (SS) 98-102%. In 0.1% increments. The equation is (98+(set value x 0.1)). Default of 20 = 100% From IOT S/W 6.00.2, can be set in tools mode 98-102%. In 0.1% increments. The equation is (98+(set value x 0.1)). Default of 20 = 100% To enable or disable PA Entry Key Display (for Coin Kit) 0= OFF 1= ON 0= Check on 1= Check off 0= Heavyweight Paper/Tracking film. 1= Heavyweight Paper, duplex (MN default. 2= Labels. 3= Label/tracing paper. 4= Duplex middle weight. 5= Label/Duplex heavy weight paper. UI Flag - enables features such as Posters, Cover Sheets, HCF 0= Poster Flag Off 1= Poster Flag On Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see-thru image) 1= 20 2= 10 3= 0 4= 10 5= 20
700-091 Customer Paper Size FS 200 700-092 Customer Paper Size SS 300 700-093 Equal Magnification Fine Adjustment (FS) 20
700-094 Equal Magnification Fine Adjustment (FS) 700-096 PA Entry Key - Coin Kit
0-40
0-1
700-097 ACS Platen Start Check 700-098 Tray 5 Paper Size
0 1
0-1 0-5
700-099 UI Post Flag
0-1
700-100 Lighter - Darker Default 700-101 Hue Control Default
3 3
0-7 0-5
700-102 Chroma Control Default 700-103 Sharpness Default
0 0
0-5 0-5 0-7 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see-thru image) General Procedures
700-104 Color Balance Default (Y 0 High) 700-105 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Middle) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 6-27
dC131 NVM Read/Write, dC131 UI/Tools (700)
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-5 Description Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see-thru image) 1= 20 2= 10 3= 0 4= 10 5= 20 700-134 Chroma Control Default 700-135 Sharpness Default ChainLink Name
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) Default Range 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-5 0-5 Description Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see-thru image) 1= 20 2= 10 3= 0 4= 10 5= 20
700-106 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Low) 700-107 Color Balance Default (M 0 High) 700-108 Color Balance Default (M 0 Middle) 700-109 Color Balance Default (M 0 Low) 700-110 Color Balance Default (C 0 High) 700-111 Color Balance Default (C 0 Middle) 700-112 Color Balance Default (C 0 Low) 700-113 Color Balance Default (K 0 High) 700-114 Color Balance Default (K 0 Middle) 700-115 Color Balance Default (K 0 Low) 700-116 Lighter - Darker Default 700-117 Hue Control Default 0 0
700-127 Color Balance Default (C 0 Middle) 700-128 Color Balance Default (C 0 Low) 700-129 Color Balance Default (K 0 High) 700-130 Color Balance Default (K 0 Middle) 700-131 Color Balance Default (K 0 Low) 700-132 Lighter - Darker 700-133 Hue Control Default 0 0
0 0
0-5 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image)
700-136 Color Balance Default (Y 0 High) 700-137 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Middle) 700-138 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Low) 700-139 Color Balance Default (M 0 High) 700-140 Color Balance Default (M 0 Middle)
0 0
0-5 0-5 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image)
700-120 Color Balance Default (Y 0 High) 700-121 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Middle) 700-122 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Low) 700-123 Color Balance Default (M 0 High) 700-124 Color Balance Default (M 0 Middle) 700-125 Color Balance Default (M 0 Low) 700-126 Color Balance Default (C 0 High)
700-141 Color Balance Default (M 0 Low) 700-142 Color Balance Default (C 0 High) 700-143 Color Balance Default (C 0 Middle) 700-144 Color Balance Default (C 0 Low) 700-145 Color Balance Default (K 0 High) 700-146 Color Balance Default (K 0 Middle) 700-147 Color Balance Default (K 0 Low)
General Procedures
1/05 6-28
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) ChainLink Name Default 0 0 Range 0-7 0-5 Description Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see-thru image) 1= 20 2= 10 3= 0 4= 10 5= 20 ChainLink Name
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) Default Range 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-1 Description Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Sure Screen with all Edit settings cleared= ON/OFF 0= OFF 1=ON Edit No. Extension Switching (4/8) 0= 4 1= 8
700-148 Lighter - Darker Default 700-149 Hue Control Default
700-169 Color Balance Default (Y 1 Middle) 700-170 Color Balance Default (Y 4 Low) 700-171 Color Balance Default (M 0 High) 700-172 Color Balance Default (M 1 Middle) 700-173 Color Balance Default (M 4 Low) 700-174 Color Balance Default (C 0 High) 700-175 Color Balance Default (C 1 Middle) 700-176 Color Balance Default (C 4 Low) 700-177 Color Balance Default (K 0 High) 700-178 Color Balance Default (K 1 Middle) 700-179 Color Balance Default (K 4 Low) 700-180 Edit Clear Sure 0
0 0
0-5 0-5 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-7 0-5 Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Color Balance Setup (To stress Bluish tone) Color Balance Setup (To stress Bluish tone) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) 1= 20 2= 10 3= 0 4= 10 5= 20
700-152 Color Balance Default (Y 0 High) 700-153 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Middle) 700-154 Color Balance Default (Y 0 Low) 700-155 Color Balance Default (M 0 High) 700-156 Color Balance Default (M 0 Middle) 700-157 Color Balance Default (M 0 Low) 700-158 Color Balance Default (C 0 High) 700-159 Color Balance Default (C 1 Middle) 700-160 Color Balance Default (C 1 Low) 700-161 Color Balance Default (K 0 High) 700-162 Color Balance Default (K 0 Middle) 700-163 Color Balance Default (K 0 Low) 700-164 Lighter - Darker Default 700-165 Hue Control Default 0 0
700-181 Enhance Edit Number
0-1
700-182 Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Type
0-65535 0= None 1= Plain Paper 2= Transparencies 4= Labels 5= Tack Paper 6= Translucent Paper 7= Heavyweight Paper (1) 8= Super Heavyweight Paper (2) 9= Tracing Paper 10= Postcards 0-65535 0= Standard Setting 1= Manual Setting 0-65535 255= Undefined
0 0
0-5 0-5 0-7 Copy Density Setup (Prevents copying see thru image) 1/05 6-29
700-183 Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Type
700-184 Tray 5 (Bypass) Standard 255 Size Code
700-168 Color Balance Default (Y 0 High) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
General Procedures
Table 1 UI/Tools (700) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range Description
dC131 UI NVM List (702)

Table 1 UI NVM List (702) ChainLink 702-056 702-180 Name R/E Presets 7 (Upper) Key Operator Tools Password1/6 Key Operator Tools Password2/6 Key Operator Tools Password3/6 Key Operator Tools Password4/6 Key Operator Tools Password5/6 Key Operator Tools Password6/6 CSE Tools Password1/6 Default [0.500]: [0.250]: Range Description
700-185 Tray 5 (Bypass) Fast Scan Size 700-186 Tray 5 (Bypass) Slow Scan Size
0-65535 Only valid with Tray 5 manual setting selected. Range is 148 to 297. Added with V7.3.3 IOT Software 0-65535 Only valid with Tray 5 manual setting selected. Range is 182 to 432. Added with V7.3.3 IOT Software
25-400: Fixed magnification 7 (every 1%). (every 1%) Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures CSE Tools password 2 of 6 CSE Tools password 3 of 6 CSE Tools password 4 of 6 CSE Tools password 5 of 6 CSE Tools password 6 of 6 Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color
[31h][31h] 0-65535
702-181
[31h][31h] 0-65535
702-182
[31h][20h] 0-65535
702-183
[20h][20h] 0-65535
702-184
[20h][20h] 0-65535
702-185
[20h][20h] 0-65535
702-186
[31h][31h] 0-65535
702-187 702-188 702-189 702-190 702-191 702-200 702-201 702-202 702-203 702-204 702-205 702-206 702-207
CSE Tools Password [31h][31h] 0-65535 2/6 CSE Tools Password [31h][20h] 0-65535 3/6 CSE Tools Password [20h][20h] 0-65535 4/6 CSE Tools Password [20h][20h] 0-65535 5/6 CSE Tools Password [20h][20h] 0-65535 6/6 Color Palette 1 (Y) Color Palette1 (M) Color Palette1 (C) Color Palette 2 (Y) Color Palette 2 (M) Color Palette 2 (C) Color Palette 3 (Y) Color Palette 3 (M) 100 100 100 0 0 0 57 64 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%)
General Procedures
dC131 UI/Tools (700), dC131 UI NVM List (702)
1/05 6-30
Table 1 UI NVM List (702) ChainLink 702-208 702-209 702-210 702-211 702-212 702-213 702-214 702-215 702-216 702-217 702-218 702-219 702-220 702-221 702-222 702-223 702-224 702-225 702-226 702-227 702-228 702-229 702-230 702-231 702-232 702-233 702-234 702-235 702-236 702-237 702-238 702-239 702-240 702-241 702-242 702-243 702-244 702-245 702-246 702-247 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Name Color Palette 3 (C) Color Palette 4 (Y) Color Palette 4 (M) Color Palette 4 (C) Color Palette 5 (Y) Color Palette 5 (M) Color Palette 5 (C) Color Palette 6 (Y) Color Palette 6 (M) Color Palette 6 (C) Color Palette 7 (Y) Color Palette 7 (M) Color Palette 7 (C) Color Palette 8 (Y) Color Palette 8 (M) Color Palette 8 (C) Color Palette 9 (Y) Color Palette 9 (M) Color Palette 9 (C) 0 20 0 17 0 17 43 0 31 41 45 6 65 31 0 44 20 25 60 Default Range 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) Description Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color ChainLink 702-248 702-249 702-250 702-251 702-252 702-253 702-254 702-255 702-256 702-257 702-258 702-259 702-260 702-261 702-262 702-263 702-264 702-265 702-266 702-267 702-268 702-269 702-270 702-271 702-272 702-273 702-274 702-275 702-276 702-277 702-278 702-279 702-280 702-281 702-282 702-283 702-284 702-285 702-286 702-287 Name Color Palette17(Y) Color Palette17(M) Color Palette17 (C) Color Palette18 (Y) Color Palette18 (M) Color Palette18(C) Color Palette19 (Y) Color Palette19(M) Color Palette19(C) Color Palette 20(Y)
Table 1 UI NVM List (702) Default 17 50 41 39 19 12 28 22 46 20 Range 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) Description Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad CE registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color General Procedures
Color Palette 20 (M) 26 Color Palette 20 (C) 60 Color Palette 21(Y) 37 Color Palette 21 (M) 33 Color Palette 21 (C) 18 Color Palette 22 (Y) 21 Color Palette 22 (M) 21 Color Palette 22 (C) 8 Color Palette 23(Y) 45 Color Palette 23 (M) 60 Color Palette 23 (C) 0 Color Palette 24(Y) 50 Color Palette 24 (M) 10 Color Palette 24 (C) 0 Color Palette 25 (Y) 28 Color Palette 25 (M) 0 Color Palette 25 (C) 52 Color Palette 26(Y) Color Palette26 Color Palette 27(Y) 63 40 71 Color Palette 26 (M) 0
Color Palette 10 (Y) 25 Color Palette 10 (M) 0 Color Palette 10 (C) 0 Color Palette 11(Y) Color Palette 11(C) Color Palette 12(Y) Color Palette12(M) Color Palette12(C) Color Palette13(Y) Color Palette13(M) Color Palette13(C) Color Palette14 (Y) Color Palette14(M) Color Palette14(C) Color Palette15(Y) Color Palette15(M) Color Palette15(C) Color Palette16(Y) Color Palette16(M) Color Palette16(C) 29 4 0 33 43 0 48 30 0 45 48 18 52 0 21 11 8 Color Palette 11 (M) 47
Color Palette 27 (M) 37 Color Palette 27 (M) 0 Color Palette 28(Y) 100 Color Palette 28 (M) 0 Color Palette 28 (C) 0 Color Palette 29 (Y) 62 Color Palette 29 (M) 0 Color Palette 29 (C) 0 Color Palette 30 (Y) 33
1/05 6-31
Table 1 UI NVM List (702) ChainLink 702-288 702-289 702-290 702-291 702-292 702-293 702-294 702-295 702-296 702-297 702-298 702-299 702-300 702-301 702-302 702-303 702-304 702-305 702-306 702-307 702-308 702-309 702-310 702-311 702-312 702-313 702-314 702-315 702-316 702-317 702-318 702-319 702-320 702-321 702-322 702-323 702-324 702-325 702-326 702-327 Name Color Palette 30 (M) 0 Color Palette 30 (C) 0 Color Palette 31 (Y) 100 Color Palette 31 (M) 48 Color Palette 31 (C) 2 Color Palette 32(Y) 60 Color Palette 32 (M) 31 Color Palette 32 (C) 4 Color Palette 33 (Y) 33 Color Palette 33 (M) 15 Color Palette 33 (C) 0 Color Palette 34 (Y) 63 Color Palette 34 (M) 100 Color Palette 34 (C) 0 Color Palette 35 (Y) 39 Color Palette 35 (M) 68 Color Palette 35 (C) 0 Color Palette 36 (Y) 20 Color Palette 36 (M) 33 Color Palette 36 (C) 0 Color Palette 37 (Y) 0 Color Palette 37 (M) 68 Color Palette 37 (C) 52 Color Palette 38 (Y) 0 Color Palette 38 (M) 51 Color Palette 38 (C) 38 Color Palette 39 (Y) 0 Color Palette 39 (M) 20 Color Palette 39 (C) 18 Color Palette 40 (Y) 22 Color Palette 40 (M) 32 Color Palette 40 (C) 100 Color Palette 41 (Y) 16 Color Palette 41 (M) 21 Color Palette 41 (C) 65 Color Palette 42 (Y) 7 Color Palette 42 (M) 10 Color Palette 42 (C) 33 Color Palette 43 (Y) 77 Color Palette 43 (M) 0 Default Range 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) Description Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color ChainLink 702-328 702-329 702-330 702-331 702-332 702-333 702-334 Name
Table 1 UI NVM List (702) Default Range 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) 0-100(%) Description Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color Edit Pad User registered color
Color Palette 43 (C) 75 Color Palette 44 (Y) 50 Color Palette 44 (M) 1 Color Palette 44 (C) 50 Color Palette 45 (Y) 30 Color Palette 45 (M) 0 Color Palette 45 (C) 24
General Procedures
1/05 6-32

Table 1 UI NVM List (800) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-255: 1Byte +0-255: 1Byte 0-255: 1Byte +0-255: 1Byte 0-255: 1Byte +0-255: 1Byte 0-255: 1Byte +0-255: 1Byte 0-255: 1Byte +0-255: 1Byte 0-255: 1Byte +0-255: 1Byte CP CP CP CP CP CP 0=[802.2] 1=[802.3] 2=[Ethernet II] 3=[802.5] 800-007 ESS Frame Type 2 0-3 CP 0=[802.2] 1=[802.3] 2=[Ethernet II] 3=[802.5] 800-008 ESS Source Routing 1 0-1 CP 0=[Yes] 1=[No] Description

Table 1 UI NVM List (850) ChainLink Name Default Range Description Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures Password setting - see General Procedures NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Password 1/6 Link Number of the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+8 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex:) 1. Password 1/6 Chain-Link number of the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31992 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =992 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =881-992
800-001 ESS IP Address (Upper) 800-002 ESS IP Address (Lower) 800-003 ESS Sub-Net Address (Upper) 800-004 ESS Sub-Net Address (Lower)
850-001 Auditron Admin. Password1/6 850-002 Auditron Admin. Password2/6 850-003 Auditron Admin. Password3/6 850-004 Auditron Admin. Password4/6 850-005 Auditron Admin. Password5/6 850-006 Auditron Admin. Password6/6 850-008 Auditron User 100Password
[31h][31h] 0-65535
[31h][31h] 0-65535 [31h][20h] 0-65535 [20h][20h] 0-65535 [20h][20h] 0-65535
800-005 ESS Gateway Address (Upper) 800-006 ESS Gateway Address (Lower)
[20h][20h] 0-65535
0-65535
1/05 6-33
General Procedures
dC131 UI NVM List (800), dC131 UI NVM List (850)
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-65535 Description 3rd and 4th digit of the password see General Procedures NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Password 2/6 Link Number of the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+9 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number Ex) 1. Password 2/6 Chain-Link number of the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31993 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =993 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =881-993 ChainLink Name -
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) Default Range 0-65535 Description 5th and 6th digit of the password see General Procedures NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Password 3/6 Link Number of the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+10 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number Ex) 1. Password 3/6 Chain-Link number of the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31994 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =994 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =881-994
850-009 Auditron User 100Password
General Procedures
1/05 6-34
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-65535 Description 7th and 8th digit of the password see General Procedures NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Password 4/6 Link Number of the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+11 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number Ex) 1. Password 4/6 Chain-Link number of the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31995 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =995 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =881-995 ChainLink Name -
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) Default Range 0-65535 Description 9th and 10th digit of the password see General Procedures NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Password 5/6 Link Number of the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+12 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex) 1. Password 5/6 Chain-Link number of the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31996 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =996 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =881-996
1/05 6-35
General Procedures
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-65535 Description 11th and 12th digit of the password see General Procedures NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Password 6/6 Link Number of the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099) is Y, then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+13 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex) 1. Password 6/6 Chain-Link number of the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31997 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =997 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =881-997 ChainLink Name -
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) Default Range 0-65535 Description 2Bytes: Color mode for every 100 pages. Default: Total pages of C/ L+B/W NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Link number of the copy count limit in the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099), then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+14 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex) 1. Chain-Link number of the copy count limit in the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31998 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =998 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =881-998
850-014 Auditron User 100: Copy Count Limit
General Procedures
1/05 6-36
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) ChainLink Name Default Range 0= [No limit] 1= [C/L only] 2= [B/W only] Description NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link Number search method Assume the Link number of the color mode copy count limit in the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099), then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+15 (Link Number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain Number. Ex) 1. Chain-Link Number of the color mode copy count limit in the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=31999 Chain Number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link Number =999 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link Number =881-999 850-016 Auditron User: 100B/W copy count Limit H 09999999: Upper 2 bytes 4Byte NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Link number of the color mode copy count limit in the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099), then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+16 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex) 1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy counts in the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=32000 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =000 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =882-000 ChainLink 850-017 Auditron User: 100B/W copy count Limit L Name -
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) Default Range 09999999: Upper 2 bytes 4Byte NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Link number of the color mode copy count limit in the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099), then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+17 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex) 1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy counts in the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=32001 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =001 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =882-001 Description
850-015 Auditron User 100: Color Mode Limit
1/05 6-37
General Procedures
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) ChainLink Name Default Range 09999999: Upper 2 bytes 4Byte NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Link number of the color mode copy count limit in the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099), then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+18 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex) 1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy counts in the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=32002 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =002 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =882-002 850-020 Auditron User: 100 B/W Large copy count Limit H 850-021 Auditron User: 100 (Lower) B/W Large copy count Limit L 850-022 Auditron User: 100 (Upper) C/L Large copy count Limit H 850-023 Auditron User: 100 (Lower) C/L Large copy count Limit L Description ChainLink Name -
Table 1 UI NVM List (850) Default Range 09999999: Upper 2 bytes 4Byte NOTE: User Account 101 or later: Chain Link number search method Assume the Link number of the color mode copy count limit in the Auditron User Account X (100<X<=2099), then Y can be obtained as follows: 1. Y=16(X-100)+19 (Link number: Lower 3 digits of Y) Number with 4 digits or more: Carried over to the Chain number. Ex) 1. Chain-Link number of B/W copy counts in the Auditron User Account 2099: Y=32003 Chain number =850 (Fixed) + 31(Upper 2 digits of Y)=881 Link number =003 (Lower 3 digits of Y): Chain-Link number =882-003 0-9999999: Upper 2 bytes - Only 4Byte ESG (TBD) Description
850-018 Auditron User: 100C/L copy count Limit H
850-019 Auditron User: 100C/L copy count Limit L
0-9999999: lower 2bytes - Only 4Byte ESG (TBD)
0-9999999: Upper 2 bytes - Only 4Byte ESG (TBD)
0-9999999: Lower 2 bytes - Only 4Byte ESG (TBD)
General Procedures
1/05 6-38
dC131 DADF NVM List (710)

Table 1 DADF NVM List (710) ChainLink Name Default 0 0 59 Range 0-1 0-1 1-255 Description Fault bypass= 1, No Fault bypass= 0 (Used in DADF) Jam bypass= 1, No Jam bypass= 0 (Used in DADF) Adjustment value for document registration (number of pulses from Registration Sensor OFF to Belt Motor Slow Down) (Used in DADF) Time period from Registration SNR ON to Feed Motor OFF (5ms step, Default= 50ms) (Used in DADF) ChainLink Name 710-044 Feed Count
Table 1 DADF NVM List (710) Default 0 Range Description
0-65535 Write protected: Accumulated value of DADF Feeds after reset
710-001 DADF Fail Bypass 710-002 DADF Jam bypass 710-004 Document Lead Registration Timer value in the DADF Simplex Mode
710-005 DADF Feed Motor OFF adjustment value
10
4-16
710-006 DADF B4 document size threshold
373
360-460 Threshold to determine the B4S or 11 X 17S in the RX mode. (Used in DADF) 0-100 Number of pulses from Registration Sensor OFF to Belt Motor Slow Down Number of pulses from Registration Sensor OFF to Belt Motor Slow Down Number of pulses from Registration Sensor OFF to Belt Motor Slow Down
710-007 Document Lead Registra59 tion Timer value in the DADF Duplex Mode (S: 8.5 X 11LEF or smaller) 710-008 Document Lead Registration Timer value in the DADF Duplex Mode (M: A4SEF or smaller) 60
0-100
710-009 Document Lead Registra61 tion Timer value in the DADF Duplex Mode (L: 8.5 X 13LEF or larger) 710-010 Belt Motor Stop Timer value 280 in DADF Duplex Mode (Loop in reverse) (S: 8.5 X 11LEF or smaller) 710-011 Belt Motor Stop Timer value 285 in DADF Duplex Mode (Loop in reverse) (M: A4SEF or smaller)
0-100
200-400 Time period from Duplex Sensor ON to Belt Motor OFF (Number of pulses until Belt Motor Slow Down) 200-400 Time period from Duplex Sensor ON to Belt Motor OFF (Number of pulses until Belt Motor Slow Down) 200-400 Time period from Duplex Sensor ON to Belt Motor OFF (Number of pulses until Belt Motor Slow Down) 0-65535 Write protected: Number of total DADF Feeds
710-012 Belt Motor Stop Timer value 290 in DADF Duplex Mode (Loop in reverse) (L: 8.5 X 13LEF or larger) 710-043 Total Feed Count 0
1/05 6-39
General Procedures
dC131 DADF NVM List (710)
dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719)

Table 1 IIT NVM List (715, 719) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-4 Description Level 0 (B/W) - Level 4 (Color) ChainLink Name 715-119 CCD Calibration PK read: Red 715-120 CCD Calibration PK read: Green 715-121 CCD Calibration PK read: Blue
Table 1 IIT NVM List (715, 719) Default 0 0 0 Range 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023 0-256 Description CCD Calibration: PK patch read - Red (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: PK patch read - Green (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: PK patch read - Blue (Reflection rate LSB) Minus direction offset (Dot/step) for Side Registration adjustment/ check 0= A6 document, 1= Postcard 0= Platen 1= ADF A4S/Letter document size threshold Default 3=213mm (Data 1= 2mm change) 0 (Letter) - 6(A4S) 715-132 Sub-scanning direction: 50 Registration correction 715-133 Sub-scanning direction: 50 Magnification correction 715-136 IIT Fault bypass 715-137 PreIPS fault bypass 715-165 DSWTh 0 0 780 20-75 Sub-scanning direction: Lead Registration correction (0.076mm/step) Scan magnification correction (0.1%/step) Fault bypass= 1, No fault bypass=0 Fault bypass= 1, No fault bypass=0 Platen half-open: White document detection threshold 0= White 1023= Black Main scanning direction: Ladder document detection threshold Data: B/W change (Ladder edge change) Main scanning direction - Number of ladder detection threshold Number of changes obtained in 715-166 3 =< Document, <3= No document
715-012 BW/Color automatic rec- 2 ognition level adjustment 715-023 PMadjF 50
0-100
Main scanning direction: Magnification correction value (Digital correction by ASCI: Low ACS/TI separation) Side Registration Offset when DADF is used (0.6mm/step) Side Registration correction value (Dot/setp) Main scanning direction - REJI correction value (Dot) Number of abnormal AOC flow terminations Red W-Ref correction factor Green W-Ref correction factor Blue W-Ref correction factor b* Correction standard value (Upper 8 bits in the 10 bits) Correction factor number Patch b* Measure value (9 bits including overflow) CCD Calibration: Y patch read Red (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: Y patch read Green (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: Y patch read Blue (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: M patch read Red (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: M patch read Green (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: M patch read Blue (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: C patch read Red (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: C patch read Green (Reflection rate LSB) CCD Calibration: C patch read Blue (Reflection rate LSB)
715-123 Side Registration Shift (- 0 ) 715-124 A6 document/Postcard check 715-125 Platen/ADF 715-126 A4S/Letter document size detection 0 0 3
715-028 DADF FS offset
32
0-100
0-1 0-1 0-6
715-029 PRadjF 715-062 AOCerr 715-091 Pshad(1) 715-092 Pshad(2) 715-093 Pshad(3) 715-103 SB SCAN 715-106 HOSEI SCAN 715-107 MB SCAN
50 0 150 160 167 220 3 0
0-100 0-255 115-255 115-255 115-255 0-255 0-6 0-511 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023 0-1023
44-56 0-1 0-1 0-1023
715-110 CCD Calibration Y read: 0 Red 715-111 CCD Calibration Y read: 0 Green 715-112 CCD Calibration Y read: 0 Blue 715-113 CCD Calibration M read: 0 Red 715-114 CCD Calibration M read: 0 Green 715-115 CCD Calibration M read: 0 Blue 715-116 CCD Calibration C read: 0 Red 715-117 CCD Calibration C read: 0 Green 715-118 CCD Calibration C read: 0 Blue
715-166 DSLTh
140
0-1023
715-167 DSLNum
0-255
General Procedures
dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719)
1/05 6-40
Table 1 IIT NVM List (715, 719) ChainLink Name Default 100 Range 1-1023 Description Document detection contrast allowance Document detection final check. The document is detected by checking the difference between the maximum and minimum between 97mm - 294mm. Difference =<100= Document, <100= No document Platen closed: Black document detection threshold 0= White, 1023= Black IISS SW Major Version number (Write protected) IISS SW Minor Version number (Write protected) IISS SW Revision Version number (Write protected) IISS SW Patch Version number (Write protected) ADF SW Major Version number (Write protected) ADF SW Minor Version number (Write protected) ADF SW Revision Version number (Write protected) ADF SW Patch Version number (Write protected)
dC131 ROS NVM List (720)

Table 1 ROS NVM List (720) ChainLink Name Default 525 Range 1-16383 [0.08461387.094 mm] Description Number of lines (Unit= 2 lines) from TR0 to the image write start position (sub-scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0846mm] A side lead registration adjustment [525=44.45mm] Number of lines (Unit= 2 lines) from TR0 to the image write start position (sub-scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0846mm] B side lead registration adjustment [413=34.967mm] Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from Paper Registration to the image (main scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 1 side lead registration adjustment [7406=311.05mm] Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from Paper Registration to the image (main scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 2 side lead registration adjustment Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from Paper Registration to the image (main scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 3 side lead registration adjustment Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from Paper Registration to the image (main scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0423mm] Tray 4 side lead registration adjustment Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from Paper Registration to the image (main scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0423mm] SMH (Tray 5) side lead registration adjustment Number of lines (Unit= 1 dot) from Paper Registration to the image (main scanning direction) [change per 1 step= about 0.0423mm] Duplex (Side 2) side lead registration adjustment
715-168 DSMMLimit
720-001 PS OFFSET 1
715-171 DSBTh
700
0-1023
720-002 PS OFFSET 2
413
719-005 IISS Major Version 719-006 IISS Minor Version 719-007 IISS Revision Version 719-008 IISS Patch Version 719-010 ADF Major Version 719-011 ADF Minor Version 719-012 ADF Revision Version 719-013 ADF Patch Version
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0 - 65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535
1-16383 [0.08461387.094 mm]
720-003 LS OFFSET T1
7406
71067706
7406
71067706
7406
71067706
7406
71067706
720-007 LS OFFSET S
7406
71067706
720-008 LS OFFSET D
7406
71067706
1/05 6-41
General Procedures
dC131 IIT NVM List (715, 719), dC131 ROS NVM List
Table 1 ROS NVM List (720) ChainLink Name Default 35 Range Description ChainLink Name
Table 1 ROS NVM List (720) Default 0 Range 0-65535 Description Use value of 62 for EPC
720-018 ERASE LE
0-255 [0- Top edge erase (Unit= 2 lines) 21.59mm [35=2.96mm] [Change per step= ] About 0.0846mm] 0-255 [0- Bottom edge erase (Unit= 2 lines) 21.59mm [35=2.96mm] [Change per step= ] About 0.0846mm] 0-255 [0- Side edge erase (Unit= 1 dot) 10.80mm [70=3.98mm] [Change per step= ] About 0.0423mm] 0-1 0-65535 0-65535 ROS module fault bypass 0= Bypass 1= No bypass ROS MOT time out= Unit= 100msec/ step Default= 1 minute Automatic gray-scale correction Range 0= Copy/Printer 1= Copy 2= None
720-794 PRPS_DELAY
720-019 ERASE TE
35
720-020 ERASE SIDE
70
720-036 ROS FAIL BYPASS 720-155 MOT TIME OUT 720-170 AUTO HALF LIMIT
0 600 0
720-181 ERASE SIDE 12C 720-182 ERASE SIDE 12P 720-185 ERASE LE 18
0 271 112
0-65535 0-65535 0-65535
Side edge erase= 12 X 18 paper Copy Mode (Unit= dot) Side edge erase= 12 X 18 paper Print Mode (Unit= dot) Top edge erase= 18-inch paper (Unit: SCAN) Erase LE 18 Top edge erase: 18-inch paper (Unit SCAN) ASIC R/W CHECK ERROR: ERR component details 0= Normal 1=PGD ASIC ERR 2=TIGER ASIC ERR 3=LAPD ASIC ERR 4=DIANA ASIC ERR 5=TIE ASIC ERR 6=PICUP ASIC ERR
720-200 DEBUG (ASIC RW ERR CODE)
0-65535
720-269 SCRN300 180 ST
0-65535
300-line screen operation 0= 0 degree 1= 180 degrees 0 = normal 1=enable increased image area (valid for DC12 w/DFE only) 0 = normal 1=enable increased image area (valid for DC12 w/DFE only) 1/05 6-42 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
720-360 Max image area adjust - FS direction w/ TAG P39 S/W 720-361 Max image area adjust - SS direction w/ TAG P39 S/W General Procedures
0-1
0-1
dC131 ROS NVM List (720)
dC131 IPS NVM List (730)

Table 1 VM List (&30) ChainLink 730-002 MUC ADJ 730-003 MUL ADJ for OHP 730-004 MUL M.Rate for Y-Y 730-005 MUL M.Rate for M-Y 730-006 MUL M.Rate for C-Y 730-007 MUL M.Rate for Y-M 730-008 MUL M.Rate for M-M 730-009 MUL M.Rate for C-M 730-010 MUL M.Rate for Y-C 730-011 MUL M.Rate for M-C 730-012 MUL M.Rate for C-C 730-013 MUL M.Rate for Y-B 730-014 MUL M.Rate for M-B 730-015 MUL M.Rate for C-B 730-016 MUL M.Rate for Y-G 730-017 MUL M.Rate for M-G 730-018 MUL M.Rate for C-G 730-019 MUL M.Rate for Y-R 730-020 MUL M.Rate for M-R 730-021 MUL M.Rate for C-R 730-022 SB 730-023 TH 730-024 TH-STE 730-025 HOSEI 730-026 MB 730-027 MB-Max 730-028 MB-Min 730-045 CBY 730-046 CBM 730-047 CBC 730-048 CBK 730-049 X-Regi Name Default 2 0 0 128 0 0 0 128 0 0 0 128 0 128 128 128 0 128 128 128 0 230 12 5 3 0 250 190 4 4 4 4 50 Range 0-4 0-8 0-8 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-30 0-15 0-6 0-511 0-511 0-255 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-8 0-100 Description TIS parameter MUL ADJ in Normal Paper Mode MUL ADJ in OHP Mode Y Mono Color ratio: Y Y Mono Color ratio: M Y Mono Color ratio: C M Mono Color ratio: Y M Mono Color ratio: M M Mono Color ratio: C C Mono Color ratio: Y C Mono Color ratio: M C Mono Color ratio: C B Mono Color ratio: Y B Mono Color ratio: M B Mono Color ratio: C G Mono Color ratio: Y G Mono Color ratio: M G Mono Color ratio: C R Mono Color ratio: Y R Mono Color ratio: M R Mono Color ratio: C b* Standard value Maximum allowance Step allowance Correction coefficient Number Measured patch Patch measurement: Upper limit Patch measurement: Lower limit Y Color balance default setting number M Color balance default setting number C Color balance default setting number K Color balance default setting number Editor sub-scanning direction: Origin position correction (1=0.5mm) 730-116 Non Edit Board 730-117 Non Option MEM 730-123 IPS Fail By Pass 730-126 PostIPS Major Version 730-127 PostIPS Minor Version 730-128 PostIPS Revision 730-129 PostIPS Patch 730-141 V-Min Reg aC-Loop 730-160 PLT-TH Reg 730-098 Color Output Copy 730-052 Sharpness Level 730-097 Photo Mode AE ON/OFF 730-051 X-Mag ChainLink 730-050 Y-Regi Name
Table 1 VM List (&30) Default 50 50 Range 0-100 0-100 Description Editor main scanning direction: Origin position (1=0.5mm) Editor sub-scanning direction: Coordinate magnification correction (1=0.1%) L/L (Enhanced black) Sharpness level adjustment value 0= Document type=AE OFF in photo 1= Document type=AE ON in photo 0= Photo paper 1= Photo paper using the G function Edit board (0= No/1= Yes) (Read only) Option MEM(0= No/1= Yes) (Read only) Fail By Pass [0= No / 1= Yes] PostIPS SW Version (1) (0-99) PostIPS SW Version (2) (0-99) PostIPS SW Version (3) (0-9) 64 64 0-9 a-z 0-255 0-255 PostIPS SW Version 4 ASCII Code Closed area detection Binary level
730-001 TIS PARAMETER
2 0
0-4 0,1
0,1
1 0 0
0-1 0-1 0-1
1/05 6-43
General Procedures
dC131 IPS NVM List (730)
dC131 PH NVM List (749)

Table 1 PH NVM List (749) ChainLink Name Default Range None None None None None None None None None None None Description Pitch width for paper size 8.5 or less (Tray) Pitch width for paper size B4S or less (Tray) Pitch width for paper size 17 or less (Tray) Pitch width for paper size 18 or less (Tray) Pitch width for paper size 8.5 or less (Tray 5) Pitch width for paper size B4S or less (Tray 5) Pitch width for paper size 17 or less (Tray 5) Pitch width for paper size 18 or less (Tray 5) Pitch width for all thick paper sizes (Tray 5) Pitch width for ultra thick paper longer 148mm (Tray 5) Pitch width for ultra thick paper 148mm or shorter (Tray 5)

Table 1 PH NVM List (760) ChainLink Name Default Range Description
749-001 B/W VARIABLE PITCH1 1200 749-002 B/W VARIABLE PITCH2 2083 749-003 B/W VARIABLE PITCH3 2400 749-004 B/W VARIABLE PITCH4 3000 749-005 B/W VARIABLE PITCH5 2400 749-006 B/W VARIABLE PITCH6 2400 749-007 B/W VARIABLE PITCH7 3000 749-008 B/W VARIABLE PITCH8 3000 749-009 B/W VARIABLE PITCH9 3000 749-010 B/W VARIABLE PITCH10 749-011 B/W VARIABLE PITCH11 3000 3000
760-001 Tray 5 SIZE SENSOR 0 ANALOG VALUE
0-65535 Always saves the current Tray 5 sensor analog value. Default=0V Range=0-5V (0-1023) Unit=0.0048V
760-002 Tray 5 SIZE SENSOR 972 ANALOG SMALLEST VALUE
0-65535 Saves the Tray 5 size sensor analog value of the minimum position. Default=0V Range=0-5V (0-1023) Unit=0.0048V
760-003 Tray 5 SIZE SENSOR 51 ANALOG GREATEST VALUE
0-65535 Saves the Tray 5 size sensor analog value of the maximum position. Default=0V Range=0-5V (0-1023) Unit=0.0048V
760-004 TRAY 1 PAPER SIZE 1=FX/ AP/ NASG 2=NAS G
0-3
Tray 1 paper size 0=B5 LEF (257 X 182mm) 1=A4 LEF (297 X 210mm) 2=8.5 x 11.0 LEF (279.4 X 215.9mm) 3=A5S (210 x 148mm) Higher=Free
760-007 TRAY 2 PAPER SIZE(SS)
0-65535 Tray 2: Free size - feed length (SS direction) Default=0mm (Automatic detection) Range=182-432mm Other: Determined by the Tray Size S/W (AD value). (0-65535) Unit=1mm
760-008 TRAY 2 PAPER SIZE(FS)
0-65535 Tray 2: Free size width (FS direction) Default=0mmb (Automatic detection) Range=148-297mm Other: Detected by the Tray Size S/W (AD value). (0-65535) Unit=1mm
General Procedures
dC131 PH NVM List (749), dC131 PH NVM List (760)
1/05 6-44
Table 1 PH NVM List (760) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range Description ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (760) Default Range Description
0-65535 Tray 3: Free size - Feed length (SS direction) Default=0mm (Automatic detection) Range=182-432mm Other: Detected by the Tray Size S/W (AD value). (0-65535) Unit=1mm
760-015 TRAY 2 PAPER THE 0 REST
0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time from Tray 2 insertion. Default=0ms Range=None (0-65535) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR) (Supplement)
0-65535 Tray 3: Free size width (FS direction) Default=0mm (Automatic detection) Range=148-297mm Other: Detected by the Tray Size S/W (AD value). (0-65535) Unit=1mm
0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time from Tray 3 insertion. Default=0ms Range=None (0-65535) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR) (Supplement)
0-65535 Tray 4: Free size - feed length (SS direction) Default=0mm (Automatic detection) Range=182-432mm Other: Detected by the Tray Size S/W (AD value). (0-65535) Unit=1mm
0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time from Tray 4 insertion. Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR) (Supplement)
760-018 TRAY 1 STATE
None
Saves the Tray 1 status. 0=Tray dislocation 1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion) 2=Tray lifter up 3=Tray lifter up - interrupted 4=Tray lifter up (READY) 5=Fault 6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation 7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down 8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 9=Last P-OFF - Lifer up interrupted 10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 11=Last P-OFF - Fault Other=Unknown
0-65535 Tray 4: Free size width (FS direction) Default=0mm (Automatic detection) Other: Detected by the Tray Size S/W (AD value). Range=148-297mm (0-65535) Unit=1mmDefault DATA=0 None Tray 5 size sensor size (mm)
760-013 Tray 5 PAPER WIDTH 0 760-014 TRAY 1 PAPER THE 0 REST
0-65535 Saves the lifter-up accumulation time from Tray 1 insertion. Default=0ms Range=None () Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10msRTMR) (Supplement)
1/05 6-45
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (760) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Saves the Tray 2 status. 0=Tray dislocation 1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion) 2=Tray lifter up 3=Tray lifter up - interrupted 4=Tray lifter up (READY) 5=Fault 6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation 7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down 8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 9=Last P-OFF - Lifter up interrupted 10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 11=Last P-OFF - Fault Other=Unknown 760-020 TRAY 3 STATE 0 None Saves the Tray 3 status. 0 =Tray dislocation 1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion) 2=Tray lifter up 3=Tray lifter up - interrupted 4=Tray lifter up (READY) 5=Fault 6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation 7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down 8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 9=Last P-OFF - Lifter up interrupted 10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 11=Last P-OFF - Fault Other=Unknown ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (760) Default 0 Range None Description Saves the Tray 4 status. 0=Tray dislocation 1=Tray lifter down (e.g. Insertion) 2=Tray lifter up 3=Tray lifter up - interrupted 4=Tray lifter up (READY) 5=Fault 6=Last P-OFF - Tray dislocation 7=Last P-OFF - Lifter down 8=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 9=Last P-OFF - Lifter up interrupted 10=Last P-OFF - Lifter up 11=Last P-OFF - Fault Other=Unknown
General Procedures
1/05 6-46
dC131PH NVM List (761)

Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range 565-615 Description #1 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed Start to Regi-Feed (Except B side) Default=1180ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 761-002 PRE FEED START 559 TIMINGTRAY1(PANEL B) 534-624 #1 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed Start to Regi-Feed (B side feed length: Less than 190mm (*)) Default=1118ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=559 (Quadrant Machine CLOCK) (*) Applied in the Nudger Roll 2-Drops Mode 761-003 DOUBLE PRE 559 FEED START TIMING-TRAY1 534-624 #1 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed Start to Regi-Feed (B side feed length: 190 mm or longer (*)) Default=1118ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step (*) Applied in the Double Pre Feed Mode. 761-004 PRE FEED START 710 TIMING-TRAY2 685-735 #2 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Regi-Feed (Except B side) Default=1420ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 761-005 PRE FEED START 679 TIMINGTRAY2(PANEL B) 654-704 #2 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Regi-Feed (B side) Default=1358ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 761-006 PRE FEED START 810 TIMING-TRAY3 785-835 #3 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Regi-Feed (Except B side) Default=1620ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 761-012 TRAY3 NUDGER ROLL SOLENOID ON TIME 761-013 TRAY4 NUDGER ROLL SOLENOID ON TIME 761-014 ADJUST TRAY 1 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(FEED ROLL 1 SPEED 300mm/s) 761-010 TRAY1 NUDGER ROLL SOLENOID ON TIME ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range 754-804 Description #3 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Regi-Feed (B side) Default=1558ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 761-008 PRE FEED START 910 TIMING-TRAY4 885-935 #4 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Regi-Feed (Except B side) Default=1820ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 761-009 PRE FEED START 879 TIMINGTRAY4(PANEL B) 854-904 #4 Tray: Time from Pre-Feed start to Regi-Feed (B side) Default=1758ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 39 0-45 #1 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON time Default=390ms Range=0-450ms (0 - 45) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR) 761-011 TRAY2 NUDGER ROLL SOLENOID ON TIME 39 0-45 #2 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON time Default=390ms Range=0-450ms (0-45) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR) 39 0-45 #3 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON time Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR) 39 0-45 #4 Tray Pre-Feed: Nudger Roll SOL ON time Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=39 (10ms RTMR) 24 4-39 Time from #1 Feed Out SNR ON to #1 Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/s Stop timing) Default=48ms Range=8-78ms (4-39) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=24 (2ms RTMR)
761-001 PRE FEED START 590 TIMING-TRAY1
761-007 PRE FEED START 779 TIMINGTRAY3(PANEL B)
1/05 6-47
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 24 Range 0-39 Description Time from #1 Feed Out SNR ON to #1 Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away Roll 220mm/s- Stop timing) Default=48ms Range=0-78ms (0-39) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=24 (2ms RTMR) 761-016 ADJUST TRAY 2 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(FEED ROLL 2 SPEED 300mm/s) 20 10-31 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/sStop timing) Default=40ms Range=20-62ms (10-31) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=20 (2ms RTMR) 761-017 ADJUST TRAY 2 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(TAKE AWAY ROLL 2 SPEED 450mm/s) 10 0-31 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away Roll 450mm/s - Stop timing) Default=20ms Range=0-62ms (0-31) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=10 (2ms RTMR) 761-018 ADJUST TRAY 3 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(FEED ROLL 3 SPEED 300mm/s) 20 10-31 Time from #3 Feed Out SNR ON to #3 Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/sStop timing) Default=40ms Range=20-62ms (10-31) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=20 (2ms RTMR) 761-019 ADJUST TRAY 3 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(TAKE AWAY ROLL 3 SPEED 450mm/s) 10 0-31 Time from #3 Feed Out SNR ON to #3 Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away Roll 450mm/s - Stop timing) Default=20ms Range=0-62ms (0-31) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=10 (2ms RTMR) 761-020 ADJUST TRAY 4 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(FEED ROLL 4 SPEED 300mm/s) 20 10-31 Time from #4 Feed Out SNR ON to #4 Feed Motor OFF (Feed Roll 300mm/s Stop timing) Default=40ms Range=20-62ms (10-31) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=20 (2ms RTMR) 761-027 TRAY 1 FEED START TIMING(PANEL B) 761-024 TRAY 3 LIFTER UP 5 TIME(DURING FEED) 761-023 TRAY 2 LIFTER UP 5 TIME(DURING FEED) 761-022 TRAY 1 LIFTER UP 5 TIME(DURING FEED) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 10 Range 10-31 Description Time from #4 Feed Out SNR ON to #4 Take Away Feed Clutch OFF (Take Away Roll 450mm/s - Stop timing) Default=20ms Range=0-62ms (0-31) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=10 (2ms RTMR) 0-23 #1 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up during Feed) Default=50ms Range=0-230ms (0-23) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=5 (10ms RTMR) 0-23 #2 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up during Feed) Default=50ms Range=0-230ms (0-23) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=5 (10ms RTMR) 0-23 #3 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up during Feed) Default=50ms Range=0-230ms (0-23) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=5 (10ms RTMR) 761-025 TRAY 4 LIFTER UP 5 TIME(DURING FEED) 761-026 TRAY 1 FEED START TIMING 252 0-23 #4 Lift Up time (Applied only to Lift Up during Feed) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=5 (10ms RTMR) 227-277 Time from #1 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (Except B side) Default=504ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step 245 220-270 Time from #1 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B side) Default=490ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step
761-015 ADJUST TRAY 1 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(TAKE AWAY ROLL 1 SPEED 220mm/s)
761-021 ADJUST TRAY 4 PRE FEED STOP POSITION(TAKE AWAY ROLL 4 SPEED 450mm/s)
General Procedures
1/05 6-48
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 364 Range 347-397 Description Time from #2 Take Away Feed ClutchON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (Except B side) Default=728ms Range=74450ms (37225) Unit=2ms/step 761-029 TRAY 2 FEED START TIMING(PANEL B) 357 340-390 Time from #2 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B side) Default=714ms Range=73050ms (36525) Unit=2ms/step 761-030 TRAY 3 FEED START TIMING 464 447-497 Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (Except B side) Default=928ms Range=94450ms (47225) Unit=2ms/step 761-031 TRAY 3 FEED START TIMING(PANEL B) 457 440-490 Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B side) Default=914ms Range=93050ms (46525) Unit=2ms/step 761-032 TRAY 4 FEED START TIMING 564 547-597 Time from #4 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (Except B side) Default=1128ms Range=114450ms (57225) Unit=2ms/step 761-033 TRAY 4 FEED START TIMING(PANEL B) 557 540-590 Time from #4 Take Away Feed ClutchON to Registration Motor ON (Feed start) (B side) Default=1114ms Range=113050ms (56525) Unit=2ms/step 761-034 FRAME OHP 0 ENABLE/DISABLE 0-1 Enable/Disable the B/W OHP (with frame) 0= Disable 1=Enable 761-041 ADJUST REGI LOOP(FROM Tray 5 & OHP) 761-040 ADJUST REGI LOOP(FROM Tray 5 & STRONG THICK PAPER) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range 7-57 Description Time from Registration SNR ON to Main Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - TRAY) (Normal paper) Default=64ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=32 (2ms RTMR) 761-036 ADJUST REGI 32 LOOP(FROM TRAY & THICK PAPER) 7-57 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - TRAY) (Thick paper) Default=64ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=32 (2ms RTMR) 761-038 ADJUST REGI LOOP(FROM Tray 5 & NORMAL PAPER) 67 42-92 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - Tray 5) (Normal paper) Default=134ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=67 (2ms RTMR) 761-039 ADJUST REGI 67 LOOP(FROM Tray 5 & THICK PAPER) 42-92 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - Tray 5) (Thick paper) Default=134ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=67 (2ms RTMR) 67 42-92 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - Tray 5) (Ultra thick paper) Default=134ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=67 (2ms RTMR) 67 42-92 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - Tray 5) (OHP) Default=134ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=67 (2ms RTMR)
761-028 TRAY 2 FEED START TIMING
761-035 ADJUST REGI 32 LOOP(FROM TRAY & NORMAL PAPER)
1/05 6-49
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 32 Range 7-57 Description Time from Registration SENSOR ON to Main Motor 2, DUP Motor OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - Duplex) Default=64 ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=32 (2ms RTMR) 761-043 REGI MOTOR ON 3962 TIMING(PANEL A & B) 38624062 Time from the last image Pitch generation to Registration Motor ON (Applied to all modes.) Default=1981ms Range=50ms (100) Unit=0.5ms/step, 0.11mm/step 761-044 ADJUST REGI 86 MOTOR ON TIMING(PANEL B & 17 INCH PAPER) 0-186 Time from the last image Pitch generation to Registration Motor ON (Adjusting value when the B side feed length is longer than A3) B side or feed length is longer than 420mm=(761-043) (761-044) Default=43ms Range=0-93ms (0-186) Unit=0.5ms/step, 0.11mm/step 761-045 ADJUST REGI MOTOR ON TIMING(THICK PAPER) 4800 47004900 Time from the last image Pitch generation to Registration Motor ON (Thick paper adjusting value) Thick paper Timing (420mm or less)=(761-043) + (761-045) Thick paper Timing (longer than 420mm)=(761-043) + (761-045) (761-044) Default=2400ms Range=50ms (100) Unit=0.5ms/step, 0.11mm/step 761-046 ADJUST REGI MOTOR ON TIMING(STRONG THICK PAPER) 4800 47004900 Time from the last image Pitch generation to Registration Motor ON (Ultra thick paper adjusting value) Ultra thick paper Timing (420mm or less)=(761043)+(761-046) Ultra thick paper Timing (Longer than 420mm)=(761-043)+(761046) -(761-044) Default=2400ms Range=50ms (100) Unit=0.5ms/step, 0.11mm/step 761-052 ADJUST REGI MOTOR SPEED(OHP: 60.301mm/s) 761-053 Tray 5 FEED CLUTCH ON TIMING 761-049 ADJUST REGI MOTOR ON TIMING(OHP FULL COLOR MODE) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 1000 Range 9001100 Description Time from the last image Pitch generation to Registration Motor ON (Duplex Mode adjusting value) Duplex Registration Feed Timing=(761043)+(761-048)-1000 Default=0ms Range=50ms (100) Unit=0.5ms/step, 0.11mm/step 4800 47004900 Time from the last image Pitch generation to Registration Motor ON (4C OHP adjusting value) OHP Timing (420mm or less)=(761-043)+(761049)OHP Timing (Longer than 420mm)=(761-043) +(761-049) -(761044) Default=2400ms Range=50ms (100) Unit=0.5ms/step, 0.11mm/step 761-050 ADJUST REGI 2680 MOTOR SPEED(NORMAL PAPER:221.168mm /s) 25462814 Registration Feed: Registration Motor speed (Normal paper) Dividing ratio=20MHzOctant divisionFrequency2+1 Default=2680PPS Range=2546-2814PPS (2546-2814) 761-051 ADJUST REGI MOTOR SPEED(STRONG THICK PAPER: 130mm/s) 1583 15031662 Registration Feed: Registration Motor speed (Thick paper) Dividing ratio=20MHzOctant divisionFrequency2+1 Default=1583PPS Range=1503-1662PPS (1503-1662) 731 694-768 Registration Feed: Registration Motor speed (OHP) Dividing ratio=20MHzOctant divisionFrequency2+1 Time from Tray 5 Nudger Solenoid ON to Tray 5 Feed Clutch OFF unit=10ms/step
761-042 ADJUST REGI LOOP(DUPLEX MODE)
761-048 ADJUST REGI MOTOR ON TIMING (DUPLEX MODE)
None
General Procedures
1/05 6-50
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-31 Description Time from #1 Feed Out SNR ON to #1 Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position - Adjustment) Default=0ms Range=0-62ms (0-31) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=0 (2ms RTMR) 761-055 ADJUST PRE 0 FEED STOP POSITION(TRAY 2 NUDGER ROLL) 0-39 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position - Adjustment) Default=0ms Range=0-78ms (0-39) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=0 (2ms RTMR) 761-056 ADJUST PRE 0 FEED STOP POSITION(TRAY 3 NUDGER ROLL) 0-39 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position - Adjustment) Default=0ms Range=0-78ms (0-39) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=0 (2ms RTMR) 761-057 ADJUST PRE 0 FEED STOP POSITION(TRAY 4 NUDGER ROLL) 0-39 Time from #2 Feed Out SNR ON to #2 Nudger Roll OFF (PRE Feed stop position - Adjustment) Default=0ms Range=0-78ms (0-39) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=0 (2ms RTMR) 761-058 FUSER ENTRANS 1 SENSOR ON JAM TIMER SELECT 761-061 ADJUST INVERT 101 MOTOR STOP POSITION(FROM FUSER EXIT SENSOR OFF) 761-062 INVERT MOTOR ON TIMING(FACE DOWN MODE) 55 None Switches the Fuser Entrance Sensor On Jam Timer 0:PM1 Non 0: PM2 or later 91-121 Time from Fuser Exit SNR OFF to Invert Motor OFF (Exit Invert Point stop position - Adjustment) Default=202ms Range=182.-242ms (91-121) Unit=2.ms/step 40-70 Time from Invert Motor OFF to Invert Motor ON (Exit Invert Point stop time) Default=110ms Range=80-140ms (40-70) Unit=2ms/step Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 761-066 INVERT MOTOR ON TIMING(DUPLEX MODE: PITCH 2083ms ONLY) 761-065 INVERT MOTOR ON TIMING(DUPLEX MODE: PITCH 2400ms ONLY) 761-064 INVERT MOTOR ON TIMING(DUPLEX MODE:PITCH 1200ms ONLY) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 51 Range 38-68 Description Time from Invert Path SNR OFF to Invert Motor OFF (Duplex Invert Point stop position - Adjustment) Default=102ms Range=76-136ms (38-68) Unit=2ms/step 328 325-331 Time from Registration Motor ON using Pitch 1200ms Duplex(*1) to Invert Motor ON (Duplex inversion start timing) Default=3280ms Range=3250-3310ms (30ms) (325331) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=3280 (10ms RTMR) (*1)LETL, A4L, B5L B/W, 4C MODE 426 423-429 Time from Registration Motor ON using Pitch 2400ms Duplex(*2) to Invert Motor ON (Duplex inversion start timing) Default=4260ms Range=4230-4290ms (30ms) (423429) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=4260 (10ms RTMR) (*2) B/W Mode except LETL, A4L, B5L and B4S, and, 4C Mode except LETL, A4L and B5L 395 392-398 Time from Registration Motor ON using Pitch 2083ms Single Leaf Duplex(*3) to Invert Motor ON (Duplex inversion start timing) Default=3950ms Range=3920-3980ms (30ms) (392398) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=3950 (10ms RTMR) (*3)B4S B/W MODE
761-054 ADJUST PRE 0 FEED STOP POSITION(TRAY 1 NUDGER ROLL)
761-063 INVERT MOTOR OFF TIMING(DUPLEX MODE)
1/05 6-51
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-85 Description Time from Duplex Out Sensor ON to Duplex Out Motor OFF (Duplex Wait Point stop position - Adjustment) Default=32ms Range=0-170ms (40ms) (0-85) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=16 (Quadrant MC CLK) 761-068 ADJUST DUPLEX OUT MOTOR ON START TIMING(FROM DUPLEX TRAY) 246 221-271 Duplex Out Motor ON start time to send paper from the Duplex Tray (Duplex Feed start timing) Default=492 ms Range=442-542ms (50ms) (221271) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=246 (Quadrant MC CLK) 761-069 SPAREINVERT MOTOR ON TIMING(DUPLEX MODE: PITCH 1500ms ONLY) 383 380-386 Time from Registration Motor ON using Pitch 1500ms Single Leaf Duplex(*4) to Invert Motor ON (Duplex inversion start timing) Default=3830ms Range=3800-3860ms (30ms) (380386) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=383 (10ms RTMR) (*4)40 PPM MODE 761-090 TAKE AWAY 3 15 CLUTCH ON TIMING(USED TRAY 4) 10-20 Time from #4 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON Default=150ms Range=100-200ms (10-20) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=15 (10ms RTMR) 761-091 TAKE AWAY 2 20 CLUTCH ON TIMING(USED TRAY 4) 15-25 Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to #2 Take Away Feed Clutch ON (Feed from #4 Tray) Default=200ms Range=150-250ms (15-25) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=20 (10ms RTMR) 761-103 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 1) 761-101 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 1) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range 10-20 Description Time from #3 Take Away Feed Clutch ON to #2 Take Away Feed Clutch ON (Feed from #3 Tray) Default=150ms Range=100-200ms (10-20) Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=15 (10ms RTMR) 761-095 ADJUST REGI 58 LOOP(From Tray 5 Postcard) 33-83 Time from Registration SNR ON to Main Motor 2 OFF (Registration Loop adjustment - Tray 5: Postcard) Default=116ms Range=50ms (25) Unit=2ms/step Default DATA=58 (2ms RTMR) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. 761-102 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351.
761-067 ADJUST DUPLEX 16 OUT MOTOR OFF TIMING(FROM DUPLEX OUT SENSOR ON)
761-092 TAKE AWAY 2 15 CLUTCH ON TIMING(USED TRAY 3)
General Procedures
1/05 6-52
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. 761-105 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) 761-111 Last storage location - see 761-351. 761-106 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. 761-107 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. 761-108 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. 761-113 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 2) 761-112 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 2) ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 2) 761-110 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 1) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Pre-Feed SENSOR ON Theoretical value=115ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-351. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352.
761-104 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 1)
1/05 6-53
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. 761-115 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. 761-116 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. 761-117 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. 761-118 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. 761-123 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 3) 761-122 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 3) 761-121 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 3) 761-120 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 2) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Pre-Feed Sensor ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-352. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353.
General Procedures
1/05 6-54
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. 761-125 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. 761-126 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. 761-127 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. 761-128 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. 761-133 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 4) 761-132 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 4) 761-131 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 4) 761-130 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 3) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #3 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-353. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354.
1/05 6-55
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. 761-135 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. 761-136 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. 761-137 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. 761-138 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. 761-143 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 1) 761-142 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 1) 761-141 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 1(USED TRAY1) 761-140 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 4) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Pre-Feed SNR ON Theoretical value=155ms JAM TIMER=408ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 458ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-354. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355.
General Procedures
1/05 6-56
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. 761-145 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. 761-146 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. 761-147 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) 761-148 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. 761-149 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 1) None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. 761-154 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 2) 761-152 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 2) 761-151 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 2) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Pre-Feed start to #1 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=291ms JAM TIMER=576ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 626ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-355. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. 761-153 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356.
761-144 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 1)
1/05 6-57
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. 761-156 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. 761-157 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. 761-158 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. 761-159 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. 761-164 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 3) 761-163 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 3)A 761-162 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 3) 761-161 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 3) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-356. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357.
General Procedures
1/05 6-58
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. 761-166 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. 761-167 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. 761-168 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. 761-169 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. 761-174 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 4) 761-173 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 4) 761-172 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 4) 761-171 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 4) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Pre-Feed start to #2 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-357. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358.
1/05 6-59
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. 761-176 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. 761-177 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. 761-178 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. 761-179 ARRIVE AT TRAY 4 0 FEED OUT SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 4) None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. 761-185 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 1) DSP: ARRV PreRegiSNR5 Tray1 0 761-182 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 1) 0 761-181 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 1) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Pre-Feed start to #4 Feed Out SNR ON Theoretical value=276ms JAM TIMER=560ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side) = 610ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper) Last storage location - see 761-358. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. 761-183 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. 761-184 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359.
General Procedures
1/05 6-60
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. 761-187 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. 761-188 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. 761-189 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. 761-190 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #1 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=130ms JAM TIMER=80-180ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-359. 761-191 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-195 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR5(USED TRAY 2) 0 761-193 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR3(USED TRAY 2) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-194 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR4(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-196 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR6(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360.
761-186 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 1)
761-192 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR2(USED TRAY 2)
1/05 6-61
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-198 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR8(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-199 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR9(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-200 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 REGI SENSOR10(USED TRAY 2) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-201 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #3 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=570ms AM TIMER=520-620ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-361. 761-207 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR7(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-206 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR6(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-205 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR5(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-204 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR4(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-203 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR3(USED TRAY 3) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360.
761-197 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR7(USED TRAY 2) DSP: ARRV PreRegiSNR7 Tray2
General Procedures
1/05 6-62
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-209 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR9(USED TRAY 3) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-210 ARRIVE AT PRE 0 REGI SENSOR10(USED TRAY 3) None Measurement result: Timing from #2 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=370ms JAM TIMER=320-420ms Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (Thick paper1) Last storage location - see 761-360. 761-211 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 4) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. 761-212 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 4) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. 761-213 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 4) 0 None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. 761-220 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-219 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-218 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-217 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-216 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-215 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 4) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361. None Measurement result: Timing from #4 Tray Feed start to Pre-Registration SNR ON Theoretical value=770ms JAM TIMER=720-820ms Unit=0.5ms/step Last storage location - see 761-361.
761-208 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR8(USED TRAY 3)
1/05 6-63
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. 761-222 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 1) 0 None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. 761-223 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 1) 0 None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. 761-224 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 4(USEDTRAY 1) 0 None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. 761-225 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 5(USEDTRAY 1) 0 None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. 761-230 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 1) 761-229 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 1) 0 761-228 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 1) 0 761-227 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 1) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363. None #1 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=367ms JAM TIMER=316-416ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 296-436ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper) Last storage location - see 761-363.
761-221 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 1)
General Procedures
1/05 6-64
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. 761-232 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 2) 0 None #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. 761-233 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY) 0 None #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. 761-234 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 2) 0 None #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. 761-238 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 2) 0 761-237 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 2) 0 761-236 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 2) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. None #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. None #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. None #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364.
1/05 6-65
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. 761-240 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 2) None #2 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=607ms JAM TIMER=556-656ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 536-676ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-364. 761-241 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 3) 0 None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. 761-242 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 3) 0 None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. 761-246 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-245 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-244 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 3) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365.
General Procedures
1/05 6-66
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. 761-248 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 3) 0 None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. 761-249 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 3)A 0 None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. 761-250 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 3) None #3 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=807ms JAM TIMER=756-856ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 736-876ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-365. 761-254 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-253 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-252 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 4) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366.
1/05 6-67
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. 761-256 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 4) 0 None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. 761-257 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 4) 0 None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. 761-258 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 4) 0 None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. 761-262 PASS REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 1) 0 761-261 PASS REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 1) 0 761-260 ARRIVE AT REGI 0 SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 4) ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. None #4 Tray: Measurement result - Registration Sensor ON timing after Feed start. Theoretical value=1007ms AM TIMER=956-1056ms (50PPM, 12.5PPM B side), 936-1076ms (Other) Unit=0.5ms/step (Normal paper), 0.8458ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-366. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. 761-263 PASS REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367.
General Procedures
1/05 6-68
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. 761-265 PASS REGI SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. 761-266 PASS REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. 761-267 PASS REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. 761-268 PASS REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. 761-269 PASS REGI SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 1) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. 761-273 PASS REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 2) 0 761-271 PASS REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 2) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 1). Theoretical value=Paper length221.168mm/S Unit=2ms/step Last storage location - see 761-367. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-272 PASS REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368.
761-264 PASS REGI SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 1)
1/05 6-69
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-275 PASS REGI SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-276 PASS REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-277 PASS REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 2) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. General Procedures 761-281 PASS REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-280 PASS REGI SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 2) 0 761-279 PASS REGI SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 2) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 3). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-369. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 6-70
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-283 PASS REGI SENSOR 3(USED TRAY 3) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-284 PASS REGI SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 3) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-285 PASS REGI SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 3) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 761-289 PASS REGI SENSOR9(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-288 PASS REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 3) 0 761-287 PASS REGI SENSOR 7(USED TRAY 3) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. General Procedures
1/05 6-71
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 2). Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-368. 761-291 PASS REGI SENSOR 1(USED TRAY 4) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. 761-292 PASS REGI SENSOR 2(USED TRAY 4) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. 761-296 PASS REGI SENSOR 6(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-295 PASS REGI SENSOR 5(USED TRAY 4) 0 761-294 PASS REGI SENSOR 4(USED TRAY 4) 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370.
761-290 PASS REGI SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 3) DSP: Pass RegiSNR10 Tray3
General Procedures
1/05 6-72
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. 761-298 PASS REGI SENSOR 8(USED TRAY 4) 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. 761-299 PASS REGI SENSOR 9(USED TRAY 4) DSP: Pass RegiSNR9 Tray4 0 None Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result: Register Sensor OFF timing from the Registration Feed (paper fed from Tray 4). Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=Paper length0.221168mm/s (Normal paper) Theoretical value=Paper length0.130mm/s (This paper 1) Unit=2ms/step (Normal paper) Unit=3.3832ms/step (This paper 1) Last storage location - see 761-370. 761-301 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 1 DSP: ARRV Fuser Exit SNR 1 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. 761-302 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 2 DSP: ARRV Fuser Exit SNR 2 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371.
761-300 PASS REGI SENSOR 10(USED TRAY 4) DSP: Pass RegiSNR10 Tray4
1/05 6-73
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. 761-304 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 4 DSP: ARRV Fuser Exit SNR 4 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. 761-305 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 5 DSP: ARRV Fuser Exit SNR 5 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. 761-306 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 6 DSP: ARRV Fuser Exit SNR 6 None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. 761-311 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 1 0 761-310 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 10 761-309 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 9 761-308 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 8 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default Range None Description Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. None Measurement result: Fuser Exit Sensor ON timing from Registration Feed start. Theoretical value=1815ms, 3071ms (This paper 1), 6655ms (Thick paper 2) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-371. None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372.
761-303 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 3 DSP: ARRV Fuser Exit SNR 3
761-307 ARRIVE AT FUSER 0 EXIT SENSOR 7
General Procedures
1/05 6-74
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. 761-313 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 3 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. 761-314 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 4 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. 761-315 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 5 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. 761-317 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 7 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. 761-318 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 8 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. 761-319 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 9 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372. 761-320 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 10 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Machine Exit Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=221ms (Straight ejection), 509.7ms+(Paper lengthmm+7.1mm) / 0.350mm/ms (Reverse ejection) Unit=10ms/step Last storage location - see 761-372.
761-312 PASS Machine 0 EXIT SENSOR 2 DSP: Pass Machine Exit SNR 2
761-316 PASS Machine EXIT SENSOR 6
1/05 6-75
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. 761-322 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 2 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. 761-323 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 3 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. 761-324 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 4 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. 761-325 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 5 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. 761-330 PASS INVERT 0 PATH SENSOR 10 761-329 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 9 0 761-328 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 8 0 761-327 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 7 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373. None Measurement result (Last 10): Invert Path Sensor OFF timing from Fuser Exit Sensor OFF. Theoretical value=331ms JAM TIMER=250-532ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-373.
761-321 1PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 1
761-326 PASS INVERT PATH SENSOR 6
General Procedures
1/05 6-76
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. 761-332 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 2 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. 761-333 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 3 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. 761-334 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 4 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. 761-335 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 5 DSP: ARRV DUP Path SNR 5 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. 761-336 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 6 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. 761-342 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 2 0 761-341 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 1 0 761-340 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 10 0 761-339 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 9 0 761-338 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 8 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. None Measurement result (Last 10): Dup Path Sensor ON timing from Dup In Sensor ON. Theoretical value=570ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-374. None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375.
761-331 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 1
761-337 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR 7
1/05 6-77
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Default=0ms Range=None Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. 761-344 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 4 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. 761-345 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 5 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. 761-346 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 6 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. 761-347 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 7 0 None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. 761-351 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 PRE FEED SENSOR INDICATE POINT 761-350 ARRIVE AT 0 DUPLEX OUTSENSOR 10 761-349 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 9 0 ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range None Description Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. None Measurement result (Last 10): Duplex Out Sensor ON timing from Duplex Path Sensor ON. Theoretical value=808ms Unit=10ms/step Default DATA=0 (10ms RTMR) Last storage location - see 761-375. 0-9 Shows the location of the latest timings (761-101-110) (#1 Pre-Feed Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-111-120) (#2 Pre-Feed Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.;: If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-121-130) (#3 Pre-Feed Sensor arrive timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3.
761-343 3ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 3 DSP: ARRV DUP out SNR 3
761-348 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 8
761-352 ARRIVE AT TRAY 2 0 PRE FEED SENSOR INDICATE POINT
0-9
761-353 ARRIVE AT TRAY 3 0 PRE FEED SENSOR INDICATE POINT
0-9
General Procedures
1/05 6-78
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-9 Description Shows the location of the latest timings (761-131-140) (#4 Pre-Feed Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-141-150) (#1 Feed Out Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-151-160) (#2 Feed Out Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-161-170) (#3 Feed Out Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-171-180) (#4 Feed Out Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-181-190) (#1 Pre-Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range 0-9 Description Shows the location of the latest timings (761-191-200) (#2 Pre-Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-201-210) (#3 Pre-Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-211-220) (#4 Pre-Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-221-230) (#1 Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-231-240) (#2 Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-241-250) (#3 Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3.
761-354 ARRIVE AT TRAY4 0 PRE FEED SENSOR INDICATE POINT
761-360 ARRIVE AT PRE REGI SENSOR INDICATE POINT(USED TRAY 2)
761-355 ARRIVE AT TRAY 1 0 FEED OUT SENSOR INDICATE POINT
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
761-363 ARRIVE AT REGI SENSOR INDICATE POINT(USED TRAY 1)
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
0-9
1/05 6-79
General Procedures
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range 0-9 Description Shows the location of the latest timings (761-251-260) (#4 Regi Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-261-270) (#1 Regi Sensor pass timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-271-280) (#2 Regi Sensor pass timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-281-290) (#3 Regi Sensor pass timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-291-300) (#4 Regi Sensor pass timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-301-310) (#1 Fuser Exit Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. ChainLink Name
Table 1 PH NVM List (761) Default 0 Range 0-9 Description Shows the location of the latest timings (761-311-320) (Machine Exit Sensor arrival timings 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-321-330) (Invert path Sensors 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-331-340) (Invert path Sensors 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3. Shows the location of the latest timings (761-341-350) (Duplex Out Sensors 1-10) e.g.; If the value is 5, the latest data is saved in 5, the previous data is saved in 4, and the data prior to the previous data is saved in 3.
761-372 Machine EXIT SENSORINDICATE POINT
761-367 PASS REGI SENSOR INDICATE POINT(USED TRAY 1)
0-9
761-373 PASS A INVERT PATH SENSOR INDICATE POINT
0-9
0-9
761-374 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX PATH SENSOR INDICATE POINT
0-9
0-9
761-375 ARRIVE AT DUPLEX OUT SENSOR INDICATE POINT
0-9
0-9
761-371 FUSER EXIT SEN- 0 SORINDICATE POINT
0-9
General Procedures
1/05 6-80
dC131SYS NVM List (752)

Table 1 SYS NVM List (752) ChainLink 752-001 MARKET Name Default Range 0-3 Description 0=FX 1=AP 2=NASG 3=ESG Machine determines the market from this parameter. This area is not initialized. 0= No 1= Yes 0= No 1= Yes This is sent as optional data when entering into the PWS Service Mode. 0 = No MDSS 1 = MDSS Connected Factory management code Factory management code Factory management code 0=DC 1=CP 2=CPS 3=P 4=P (with UI) For the optional data sent when entering into the PWS Service Mode 0= None (Platen) 1= DADF For the optional data sent when entering into the PWS Service Mode (Automatically set at Power On) 0= No (Top tray), 1= Offset Catch Tray, 2= Sorter, 3= Mail Box For the option data sent when entering into the PWS Service Mode (Automatically set at Power On) ChainLink Name
Table 1 SYS NVM List (752) Default Range 0-1 Description 0= No, 1= HCF For the optional data sent when entering into the PWS Service Mode (Automatically set at Power On) Product code (ASCII Code) Product code (ASCII Code) Product code (ASCII Code) Product code (ASCII Code) 0 = no EPC 1 = EPC @ 1st DDI 2 = EPC @ 2nd DDI
752-011 MULTI TRAY CONFIG
752-012 (Spare) 752-013 PRODUCT CODE No 1 752-014 PRODUCT CODE No 2 752-015 PRODUCT CODE No 3 752-016 PRODUCT CODE No 4 752-017 EPC Option Config
0-1 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-2
752-002 EPSV EXIST 752-003 TELEPHONE LINE EXIST
0-1 0-1
752-004 MDSS EXIST 752-005 XJ CODE PIN Number 1 752-006 XJ CODE PIN Number 2 752-007 XJ CODE PIN Number 3 752-008 Machine CONFIG
0 -
0-1 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-4
752-018 Auto Upgrade NVM
0-65535 NVM automatic upgrade function after introduction in the market.
752-009 DADF EXIST
0-1
752-010 OUTPUT CONFIG
0-3
1/05 6-81
General Procedures

Table 1 SYS NVM List (759) ChainLink Name Default 0 0 0 Range 0-1 0-1 0-1 Description 0= Invert ejection 1= Straight ejection 0= Repeat margin= 3mm 1= Repeat margin= 0mm The meaning differs depending on the Market data in SYS NVM number 752-001. (FX/AP, RX) 0= AB 1= Inch (NASG) 0= Inch 1= AB 759-014 NVM VERSION (for EP) 759-018 A-I/F SET 759-021 DADF MODE MAG100 ADJ 759-023 GRADATION ADJ RST SEL 0 1 0-1 0-1 (TBD) 0= No A-I/F KIT, 1= with A-I/F KIT (MN unique FX/FXAP is not used.) 0= Equal magnification - Fine adjust 1= Equal magnification - No fine adjustment 0= No Tools setup/No MAXSETUP 1= Tools reset/No MAXSETUP 2= Tools reset/MAXSETUP reset 759-024 NO PAPER RUN SEL 0 0-2 0= No Paper Run - Not selected 1= Stop at page count limit 2= Infinite Copy 759-042 Product Code Switch 759-051 ESS PORT PRIORITY 0 0 0-1 0-1 0 = 4 digit Product Code 1 = 8 digit Product Code 0= 1st I/F Port connection ESS priority 1= 2nd I/F Port connection ESS priority 759-052 Job Acceptance Prohibition Timer 759-053 Print ESS INFO 30 0 1-255 0-2 (Unit= Second) Max= 4 minutes 15 seconds Valid if Machine Config is P, P(with UI), CP, or CPS, and sets the Print ESS connection status. 0= 1st I/F Port connection 1= 2nd I/F Port connection 2= 1st, 2nd I/F Port connection ChainLink Name 759-054 Scan ESS INFO
Table 1 SYS NVM List (759) Default 0 Range 0-5 Description Valid if Machine Config is CPS, and sets the Print ESS connection status. 0= 1st I/F Port connection 1= 2nd I/F Port connection 2= 1st, 2nd I/F Port connection 3= 1st I/F Port connection (+Scan to File Job) 4= 2nd I/F Port connection (+Scan to File Job) 5= 1st, 2nd I/F Port connection (+Scan to File Job) 759-073 Accessory Kit Control 1 0 0-1 Sets the Print Job accessory (1st DDI Port). 0= With Card, No Job permission without job count card 1= With Card, No Job permission without job count card 759-074 Accessory Kit Control 2 0 0-1 Sets the Print Job accessory (2nd DDI Port). 0= With Card, No Job permission without job count card 1= With Card, No Job permission without job count card 759-075 Billing Counter Display 759-113 SET Major Version 759-114 SET Minor Version 759-115 SET Revision 759-116 SET Patch 759-117 IOSS Major Version 759-118 IOSS Minor Version 759-119 IOSS Revision 759-120 IOSS Patch 759-121 UI-P Major Version 759-122 UI-P Minor Version 759-123 UI-P Revision 759-124 UI-P Patch 759-125 UI-F Major Version 759-126 UI-F Minor Version 759-127 UI-F Revision 0 0-1 0-9 a-z 0-9 a-z 0-9 a-z 0= Not displayed, 1= Displayed SW Set Version 1 (0-99) SW Set Version 2 (0-99) SW Set Version 3 (0-9) SW Set Version 4 IOSS SW Version1 (0-99) IOSS SW Version2 (0-99) IOSS SW Version3 (0-9) IOSS SW Version UI Program SW Version1 (0-99) UI Program SW Version2 (0-99) UI Program SW Version3 (0-9) UI Program SW Version4 UI Frame SW Version1 (0-99) UI Frame SW Version2 (0-99) UI Frame SW Version3 (0-9) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
759-005 FORCED FACE UP EXIT 759-006 REPEAT MARGIN 759-011 APS PRIORITY
0-2
General Procedures
1/05 6-82
Table 1 SYS NVM List (759) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-9 a-z Description UI Frame SW Version4 (Initialization/Write: prohibited) Cap (ex: a ->10, b->11) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) VERSION (0-999) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited) (Initialization/Write: prohibited)
dC131 BILLING NVM List (990)

Table 1 Billing NVM List (900) ChainLink Name Default Range Description Full Color Copy electronic billing (001& 002: One billing) (001& 002: One) Full Color Print electronic billing (003& 004: One billing) (003& 004: One) B/W Copy electronic billing (005& 06: One billing) (005& 006: One) B/W Print electronic billing (007& 008: One billing) (007& 008: One) Large Size Full Color electronic billing (009& 010: One billing) (009& 010: One) Large Size B/W electronic billing (011& 012: One billing) (011& 012: One) Full Color Copy electronic billing (013& 014: One billing) (013& 014: One) Full Color Print electronic billing (015& 016: One billing) (015& 016: One) B/W Copy electronic billing (017& 018: One billing) (017& 018: One)
759-128 UI-F Patch 759-139 IOT-SYS ROM VER 1 759-140 IOT-SYS ROM VER 2 759-141 P-SYS 1 ROM VER 1 759-142 P-SYS 1 ROM VER 2 759-143 P-SYS 2 ROM VER 1 759-144 P-SYS 2 ROM VER 2 759-145 S-SYS 1 ROM VER 1 759-146 S-SYS 1 ROM VER 2 759-147 S-SYS 2 ROM VER 1 759-148 S-SYS 2 ROM VER 2 759-149 JOB CON ROM VER 1 759-150 JOB CON ROM VER 2
990-001 Full Color Copy billing meter (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-002 Full Color Copy billing meter (Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-003 Full Color Print billing meter (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-004 Full Color Print billing meter (Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-005 B/W Copy billing meter (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-006 B/W Copy billing meter (Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-007 B/W Print billing meter (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-008 B/W Print billing meter (Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM)
990-009 Large Size Full Color billing meter (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-010 Large Size Full Color billing meter (Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-011 Large Size B/W billing meter (Upper) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-012 Large Size B/W billing meter (Lower) (IOT EEP-ROM) 990-013 Full Color Copy billing meter (Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-014 Full Color Copy billing meter (Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-015 Full Color Print billing meter (Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-016 Full Color Print billing meter (Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-017 B/W Copy billing meter (Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-018 B/W Copy billing meter (Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 -
1/05 6-83
General Procedures
dC131SYS NVM List (759), dC131 BILLING NVM
Table 1 Billing NVM List (900) ChainLink Name Default Range Description B/W Print electronic billing (019& 020: One billing) (019& 020: One) Large Size Full Color electronic billing (021& 022: One billing) (021& 022: One) Large Size B/W electronic billing (023& 024: One billing) (023& 024: One) Full Color Copy electronic billing (025& 026: One billing)
dC131 Procon1 NVM List (773)

Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773) ChainLink Name Default 1 Range Description
990-019 B/W Print billing meter (Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-020 B/W Print billing meter (Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM)
773-001 DISP SW
990-021 Large Size Full Color billing meter (Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-022 Large Size Full Color billing meter (Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-023 Large Size B/W billing meter (Upper) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-024 Large Size B/W billing meter (Lower) (Half-Tone EEP-ROM) 990-025 Full Color Copy billing meter (Upper) (NVM) -
0-65535 Toner control switch 0= Display control by NVM timer 1= Display control by ADC+ICDC 2 or more= Display control by ICDC
773-002 ELEC SW
0-65535 Potential/Light control switch 0= Fixed NVM (773-401 - 773404): VG control, Fixed NVM (773-421): LD control, Fix NVM: BIAS/ASG control (VH/ VM Setup and LDCONT functions: Not done) (VH/VM patch: Created and measured, LDCONT VM patch: Not created) 1= VH/VM Setup - VG/BIAS/ ASG value corrected, LD CONT-LD value corrected 2 or more= VH/VM Setup - VG/ BIAS value/LD value corrected (LDCONT function not done. No VM patch is created)
773-007 TRC SW
0-65535 Gray scale control switch 0= LUT through - ADC patch is measured. 1= LUT calculation in the Gray scale control (TRC CONT MIN/ JOB) 2= LUT calculation only in TRC CONT MIN. ADC measurement. 3 or more= LUT is not calculated. ADC patch is measured.
773-011 Vclean Fail 773-012 VHVM Fail 773-013 LDCONT Fail 773-014 Hum Fail
0 0 0 0
0-65535 Vclean measurement= Number of Faults (Hidden Fault) 0-65535 VH/VM Setup= Number of Faults (Hidden Fault) 0-65535 LD CONTROL= Number of Faults (Hidden Fault) 0-65535 Humidity measurement= Number of Faults (Hidden Fault) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
General Procedures
dC131 BILLING NVM List (990), dC131 Procon1 NVM
1/05 6-84
Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773) ChainLink Name Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 300 0 0-1023 Range Description ChainLink Name
Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773) Default 280 Range Description
773-016 ADC Vp Fail (Y) 773-017 ADC Vp Fail (M) 773-018 ADC Vp Fail (C) 773-019 ADC Vp Fail (K) 773-071 VGS Fail 773-072 VHS FAIL 773-073 LDS FAIL 773-074 VMS FAIL 773-231 AGCS S 773-251 ADC Vclean S A
0-65535 ADC patch Fault (Y) 0-65535 ADC patch Fault (M) 0-65535 ADC patch Fault (C) 0-65535 ADC patch Fault (K) Number of VGS Faults Number of VHS Faults Number of LDS Faults Number of VMS Faults Gain output for ADC SNR mirror finished surface element
773-283 Radc SET Adj [C]
0-65535 C-color: Correction target ADC patch density (after correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-65535 K-color: Correction target ADC patch density (after correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-1023 0-255 0-255 VGS calculated value (VH/VM SETUP) LDS calculated value (VH/VM SETUP) LD light amount during copy (Updated: VH/VM SETUP and LDCONT)
773-284 Radc SET Adj [K]
180
773-382 VGS CALC 773-384 LDS CALC 773-421 LD JOB
710 126 126
0-65535 ADC non development output: Asurface measurement (Mirror surface element) 0-65535 ADC non development output: Bsurface measurement (Mirror surface element) 0-65535 ADC non development output: Asurface measurement (diffusion element) 0-65535 ADC non development output: Bsurface measurement (diffusion element) 0-65535 Target VH potential (before correction) at VH/VM SETUP: 700v 0-65535 Y-color - Target ADC patch density (before correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-65535 M-color - Target ADC patch density (before correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-65535 C-color - Target ADC patch density (before correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-65535 K-color - Target ADC patch density (before correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-65535 Correction target VH potential (after correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-65535 Y-color: Correction target ADC patch density (after correction) at VH/VM SETUP 0-65535 M-color: Correction target ADC patch density (after correction) at VH/VM SETUP 1/05 6-85
773-516 Kicdc [Y] 773-517 Kicdc [M] 773-518 Kicdc [C] 773-519 Kicdc [K] 773-571 Kadc posi [Y] 773-572 Kadc posi [M] 773-573 Kadc posi [C] 773-574 Kadc posi [K] 773-576 Kadc nega [Y]
7 7 7 10 250 250 250 350 375
773-252 ADC Vclean S B
0-65535 Y-color: ICDC supply calculation coefficient (positive only) 0-65535 M-color: ICDC supply calculation coefficient (positive only) 0-65535 C-color: ICDC supply calculation coefficient (positive only) 0-65535 K-color: ICDC supply calculation coefficient (positive only) 0-65535 Y-color: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for positive value) 0-65535 M-color: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for positive value) 0-65535 C-color: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for positive value) 0-65535 K-color: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for positive value) 0-65535 Y-color: DSP: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for negative value) 0-65535 M-color: DSP: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for negative value) 0-65535 C-color: DSP: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for negative value) 0-65535 K-color: DSP: ADC toner supply calculation coefficient (for negative value) 0-65535 Y-color: ADC patch measurement value (Mirror element)
773-256 ADC Vclean D A
773-257 ADC Vclean D B
773-261 VHS target 773-266 Radc SET [Y]
717 250
773-267 Radc SET [M]
250
773-268 Radc SET [C]
280
773-577 Kadc nega [M]
375
773-269 Radc SET [K]
180
773-578 Kadc nega [C]
375
773-276 VHS Adj 773-281 Radc SET Adj [Y]
717 250
773-579 Kadc nega [K]
500
773-282 Radc SET Adj [M]
250
773-591 ADC Vpatch S [Y]
General Procedures
Table 1 Procon 1 NVM List (773) ChainLink Name Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Range Description

Table 1 Procon2 NVM List (774) ChainLink Name Default 717 Range 0-1023 Description Current total CC electric current (0=0 micro ampere 1023=1000 micro ampere) Current grid CC voltage (0=0V 1023=1000V) Grid voltage to check the CC output (0=0V 1023=1000V) Waste bottle (0=Yes 1=No) EMPTY counter EMP Counter record when the Bottle Goal was determined. Collection status FLG (0= Empty 1= Near Full 2= Full) Near Full Counter 0-65536 0-255 Threshold to generate a Bottle Full Fault DC current to reduce cycle 1-2 (0=0 micro ampere 255=800 micro ampere) (If out of the range, MAX value is output.) DC current for elimination= Nominal (0=0 micro ampere 255=800 micro ampere) (If out of the range, MAX value is output.) Drum unit type (0XAA) Shut-down condition setting flag 0= Shut-down with the set count value. 1= Shut-down when exceeding the set count value. 774-070 DRUM CYCLEUPPER L 774-071 DRUM CYCLEUPPER H 0 3400 Drum cycle count: L side count (0-99) Drum cycle count: H side count (0-65535)
773-592 ADC Vpatch S [M] 773-593 ADC Vpatch S [C] 773-594 ADC Vpatch S [K] 773-596 ADC Vpatch D [Y] 773-597 ADC Vpatch D [M] 773-598 ADC Vpatch D [C] 773-599 ADC Vpatch D [K] 773-606 Radc patch [Y] 773-607 Radc patch [M] 773-608 Radc patch [C] 773-609 Radc patch [K]
0-65535 M-color: ADC patch measurement value (Mirror element) 0-65535 C-color: ADC patch measurement value (Mirror element) 0-65535 K-color: ADC patch measurement value (Mirror element) 0-65535 Y-color: DSP: ADC patch measurement value (Diffusion element) 0-65535 M-color: DSP: ADC patch measurement value (Diffusion element) 0-65535 C-color: DSP: ADC patch measurement value (Diffusion element) 0-65535 K-color: DSP: ADC patch measurement value (Diffusion element) 0-65535 Y-color: ADC patch measurement density 0-65535 M-color: ADC patch measurement density 0-65535 C-color: ADC patch measurement density 0-65535 K-color: ADC patch measurement density
774-001 CC I TOT
774-004 CC V GRID 774-005 CC V GRID DFLT
717 717
0-1023 0-1023
774-008 BOTTLE NOT IN POSI- 0 TION 774-015 BOTTLE EMP COUNTER 774-017 BOTTLE EMP HOLD 774-018 BOTTLE FULL 774-019 BOTTLE FULL COUNTER 774-020 BOTTLE GOAL 774-029 PCC dC 12 0 0 0 0 300 130
774-033 PCC dC ER
96
0-255
774-056 X CRU TYPE 774-057 CRU COUNT MODE
48=FSMA 0-255 49=T&M 0 0-1
General Procedures
dC131 Procon1 NVM List (773), dC131 Procon2 NVM
1/05 6-86
Table 1 Procon2 NVM List (774) ChainLink Name 0 2000 0 Default Range Description Toner dispense time: L side value (0-3599/Unit: 0.1 second) Toner dispense time: H side value (0-65535/Unit: 0.1 hour) Drum cycle counter: Counter sign (0: Positive, 256: Negative) Upper byte: Drum cycle counter sign 0-3 Auger rotation detection Status flag 0= Normal 1= Normal now but abnormal rotation before 2= Abnormal 3= Machine stop) Collection Auger Stop counter (Unit= Print) Threshold to generate the Cleaning AUGER Broken Fault

Table 1 Procon3 NVM List (775) ChainLink Name 0 0 0 0 0 1 Default Range 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-1 Description TRC ADC non-development: Output Fault counter TRC patch fault counter (Y) TRC patch fault counter (M) TRC patch fault counter (C) TRC patch fault counter (K) For Run Length=0 uncontrollable fault at Maxsetup (Tone Up/Down) 0= Tone Up/Down minimum run pages=3 (Mixing) 1 or more= Tone Up/ Down minimum run page=0 <1 or more= Not available in PWS. Cannot be set.>
774-074 DISP TIMELOWER 774-075 DISP TIMEUPPER 774-081 SIGN DRUM
775-001 Vclean TRC Fail 775-002 TRC MINI Fail [Y] 775-003 TRC MINI Fail [M] 775-004 TRC MINI Fail [C] 775-005 TRC MINI Fail [K] 775-019 MINI Timer SW
774-173 AUGER STOP
774-174 AUGER COUNTER 774-175 AUGER GOAL
0 200
0-65535 0-65535
1/05 6-87
General Procedures
dC131 Procon2 NVM List (774), dC131 Procon3
dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List (772)
Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772) ChainLink Name 0 Default Range 0-65535 Description Env. Control On/Off 0= Controls the environment. 1= Does not control the environment (Uses the Environment Number in ENV NO SET.) Other= No environment control (Determines the Environment Number based on temperature/humidity data specified in DBG TMP DAT and DBG HUM DATA) 771-012 BTR1 HV 32 5-65535 1st BTR Remote output unit: micro ampere (Valid range= 400800) 2nd BTR Remote output unit: 0.1kV (Valid range: 10-75) DTS dC Remote output unit: 0.1kV (Valid range: 10-45) 1st BTR Remote correction value Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) 2nd BTR Remote correction value Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) DTS dC Remote correction value Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) Environment Table No (Storage) 1st BTR HV output (Storage) unit: micro ampere 2nd BTR HV output (Storage) unit: -0.1kV DTS dC HV output (Storage) unit: -0.1kV 2nd BTR Contact/Retract Fail Bypass (Valid range: 0-1) 0: Yes 1: No IBT Cleaner Contact/Retract Fail Bypass (Valid range: 0-1) 0: Yes 1: No 2nd BTR cam - One rotation time (Unit: MC) ChainLink Name
Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772) Default 650 Range 0-65535 Description IBT Cleaner Blade cam - One rotation time (Unit: MC) 1st BTR output correction (Thick paper dummy cycle) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) 1st BTR output correction (Ultra thick paper dummy cycle) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) 1st BTR output correction (OHP dummy cycle) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-100) 1st BTR output correction (B/W mode) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-200) 1st BTR output correction (Color mode) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-200) 1st BTR output correction (Simplex mode) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-200) 1st BTR output correction (Duplex mode) Unit:% (Valid range: 0-200) Oil Roll stripe - Toner band write (Valid range: 1-258) Unit: mm Oil Roll stripe - Toner band SF direction (Valid range: 1-303) Unit: mm Monitor value (Storage) 1st BTR HV ON time adjustment Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment (Normal paper/Second original) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment (Normal paper/Second original) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment (Thick paper) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment (Thick paper) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment (Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC
771-046 IBTCLN CAM TIME
771-003 ENV CTL ON
771-051 BTR1 CD1 DUMMY
60
0-65535
771-052 BTR1 CD2 DUMMY
30
0-65535
771-053 BTR1 OHP DUMMY
30
0-65535
771-054 BTR1 BW REVISE 771-055 BTR1 COL REVISE 771-056 BTR1 SIMP REVISE
10 100 100
0-65535 0-65535 0-65535
771-013 BTR2 HV 771-014 DTS dC HV 771-017 BTR1 REVISE 771-018 BTR2 REVISE 771-019 DTS dC REVISE 771-026 ENV NO 771-037 BTR1 HV REM 771-038 BTR2 HV REM 771-039 DTS dC REM 771-042 BTR2 FAILBYPASS
18 30 100 100 100 0 0 0 0 0
10-65535 10-65535 0-65535 0-100 0-65535 0-65535
771-057 BTR1 DUP REVISE 771-063 OIL TONER BAND OFFSET
100 32
0-65535 0-65535
771-064 OIL TONER BAND FS 303
0-65535
771-074 DTS MONITOR 771-083 BTR1 ON ADJ
0 0
0-65535
771-085 BTR2HV ON ADJ NP
1121
0-65535
771-086 BTR2HV OFF ADJ NP 3
0-65535
771-087 BTR2HV ON ADJ CD1 1121 771-088 BTR2HV OFF ADJ CD1 3
0-65535 0-65535 0-65535
771-043 IBTCLN FAILBYPASS
0-65535
771-045 BTR2 CAM TIME
500
0-65535
771-089 BTR2HV ON ADJ CD2 1121 DSP: BTR 2 HV ON ADJ S-HVY
General Procedures
dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List (772)
1/05 6-88
Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772) ChainLink Name 3 1121 3 Default Range 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 Description 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment (Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment (Post card) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment (Post card) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV ON time adjustment (OHP/Tuck film) Unit: MC 2nd BTR HV Off time adjustment (OHP/ Tuck film) Unit: MC DTS dC HV ON time adjustment (Normal paper/Second original) Unit: MC DTS dC HV Off time adjustment (Normal paper/Second original) Unit: MC DTS dC HV ON time adjustment (Thick paper) Unit: MC DTS dC HV Off time adjustment (Thick paper) Unit: MC DTS dC HV ON time adjustment (Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC DTS dC HV Off time adjustment (Ultra thick paper) Unit: MC DTS dC HV ON time adjustment (Post card) Unit: MC DTS dC HV Off time adjustment (Post card) Unit: MC DTS dC HV ON time adjustment (OHP/Tuck film) Unit: MC DTS dC HV Off time adjustment (OHP/ Tuck film) Unit: MC 2nd BTR Contact On(Contact start) time adjustment (Normal paper/2nd original) Unit: MC 2nd BTR Contact Off(From Home SNR start-up detection to Clutch stop) time adjustment Unit: MC 2nd BTR Retract Off(From Home SNR stop detection to Clutch stop) time adjustment Unit: MC ChainLink Name
Table 1 IBT/Drive NVM List (771, 772) Default 1 Range 0-65535 Description IBT Cleaner Blade Contact Off(From Home SNR start-up detection to Clutch stop) time adjustment Unit: MC IBT Cleaner Retract Off(From Home SNR stop detection to Clutch stop) time adjustment Unit: MC Magnification storage NVM for IOT vertical magnification (Input range: 996-1004)
771-090 BTR2HV OFF ADJ CD2 771-091 BTR2HV ON ADJ POST 771-092 BTR2HV OFF ADJ POST
771-122 IBTCLN CONT OFF ADJ
771-124 IBTCLN RET OFF ADJI
0-65535
771-093 BTR2HV ON ADJ OHP 1121 771-094 BTR2HV OFF ADJ OHP 771-095 DTS ON ADJ NP 3 1155
772-238 nvm sp updn
1000
0-65535
771-096 DTS OFF ADJ NP
0-65535
771-097 DTS ON ADJ CD1 771-098 DTS OFF ADJ CD1 771-099 DTS ON ADJ CD2 771-100 DTS OFF ADJ CD2 771-101 DTS ON ADJ POST 771-102 DTS OFF ADJ POST 771-103 DTS ON ADJ OHP 771-104 DTS OFF ADJ OHP 771-109 BTR2CONT ON ADJ NP 771-114 BTR2CONT OFF ADJ
1155 3 1155 3 1155 3 1155 3 203
0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535
0-65535
771-120 BTR2RET OFF ADJ
0-65535
1/05 6-89
General Procedures
dC131 IBT NVM List (771), dC131 Drive NVM List
dC131 Developer NVM List (776)

Table 1 Developer NVM List (776) ChainLink Name Default Range 0-3 Description Toner Cartridge Empty status management: K FULL=0 LOW=1 NEAR EMPTY=2 EMPTY=3 776-060 NVM dispense status 0 (Y) 776-061 NVM dispense status 0 (M) 776-062 NVM dispense status 0 (C) 776-063 NVM dispense status 0 (K) 776-368 RESERVE TANK STS 0 Y 0-65535 0= dispense ready. 1= dispense near broken. 2= dispense broken. 0= dispense ready. 1= dispense near broken. 2= dispense broken. 0= dispense ready. 1= dispense near broken. 2= dispense broken. 0= dispense ready. 1= dispense near broken. 2= dispense broken. Toner Cartridge - Empty status management: Y FULL=0 LOW=1 NEAR EMPTY=2 EMPTY=3 776-369 RESERVE TANK STS 0 M 0-3 Toner Cartridge - Empty status management: M FULL=0 LOW=1 NEAR EMPTY=2 EMPTY=3 776-370 RESERVE TANK STS 0 C 0-3 Toner Cartridge - Empty status management: C FULL=0 LOW=1 NEAR EMPTY=2 EMPTY=3 776-371 NVM TNR STS K 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: K 0=TONER FULL 1=LOW TONER 2=TONER NEAR EMPTY 3=TONER EMPTY General Procedures 1/05 6-90 776-388 C WRN COUNT 776-373 NVM TNR STS M ChainLink Name 776-372 NVM TNR STS Y
Table 1 Developer NVM List (776) Default 0 Range 0-65535 Description Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: Y 0=TONER FULL 1=LOW TONER 2=TONER NEAR EMPTY 3=TONER EMPTY 0 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection M 0=TONER FULL 1=LOW TONER 2=TONER NEAR EMPTY 3=TONER EMPTY 776-374 NVM TNR STS C 776-375 TONER NEAR EMPTY 776-376 TONER EMPTY 776-377 K DISP SUM 776-378 Y DISP SUM 776-379 M DISP SUM 776-380 C DISP SUM 776-381 K TNR LCK 776-382 Y TNR LCK 776-383 M TNR LCK 776-384 C TNR LCK 776-385 K WRN COUNT 776-386 Y WRN COUNT 776-387 M WRN COUNT 0 250 (X 100ms) 1000 (X 100ms) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-65535 0-65535 Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: C Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: NEAREMPTY threshold - K default: 25s Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: EMPTY threshold - K default: 100s Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: DISPENSE accumulation time Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: DISPENSE accumulation time Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: DISPENSE accumulation time Toner Cartridge - Empty detection: DISPENSE accumulation time DISPENSE Black Dispense time accumulation (up to LOW TONER) DISPENSE Yellow Dispense time accumulation (up to LOW TONER) DISPENSE Magenta Dispense time accumulation (up to LOW TONER) DISPENSE Cyan Dispense time accumulation (up to LOW TONER) DISPENSE Black Dispense amount (up to NEAR EMPTY) DISPENSE Yellow Dispense amount (up to NEAR EMPTY) DISPENSE Magenta Dispense amount (up to NEAR EMPTY) DISPENSE Cyan Dispense amount (up to NEAR EMPTY)
776-367 RESERVE TANK STS 0 K
0-65535
0-65535
0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535 0-65535
0-65535
0-3
Table 1 Developer NVM List (776) ChainLink Name Default 0 Range 0-65535 Description Dispenser status detection STATUS management - K READY=0 DOUBT=1 NEAR BROKEN=2 BROKEN=3 776-405 NVM SUB CHK SW 0 0-2 Subsystem Check (Rotary movement) I/O component check switch: sw/0 component check= 0 Angle specification= 1 Target color - Move= 2 776-406 NVM SUB CHK RPOF 0 0-2 Subsystem Check (Rotary movement) Profile selection Fast= 0 Middle= 1 Slow= 2 776-407 NVM SUB CHK AGL 90 45,90,135, Subsystem Check (Rotary move180,225 ment) rotation angle 270,315,3 45= 45 degrees 60(degree) 225= 225 degrees 90= 90 degrees 135= 135 degrees 180= 180 degrees 225= 225 degrees 270= 270 degrees 315= 315 degrees 360= 360 degrees 776-408 NVM SUB CHK H 0 0-1 Subsystem Check (Rotary movement) Home Position - Move 0= (default) - K-color move 1= HomePosition move 776-409 NVM SUB CHK 90 0 0-1 Subsystem Check (Rotary movement) - 90 degree rotation pattern selection 0= 1 rotation 1= 45+45 rotations 776-410 NVM SUB CHK 360 0 0 Subsystem Check (Rotary movement) - 360 degree rotation pattern selection 0= 315+45-2 rotations Home Position correction fault - generation threshold 776-444 DISP TIMER C 776-443 DISP TIMER M ChainLink Name
Table 1 Developer NVM List (776) Default 90 90 90 90 Range Description Timer Dispense (K) Dispense time/Unit: 1ms Timer Dispense (Y) Dispense time/Unit: 1ms Timer Dispense (M) Dispense time/Unit: 1ms Timer Dispense (C) Dispense time/Unit: 10ms
776-395 DISPENSER STS K
776-441 DISP TIMER K 776-442 DISP TIMER Y
776-436 ROTARY HOMEADJ FAIL Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
8(step)
0-65535
1/05 6-91
General Procedures
dC131 Fuser NVM List (777)

Table 1 Fuser NVM list (777) ChainLink 777-001 TEMP1 777-002 TEMP2 777-003 TEMP3 777-006 TEMP8 777-007 TEMP9 777-008 TEMP10 777-010 TEMP12 777-011 TEMP13 777-012 TEMP14 777-051 OIL PUMP ON 777-055 OIL CV CNTR 777-056 OIL NEAR TO EMP 777-058 OIL LIMIT TIME 777-075 WEB NEMP Name Default 160 130 178 143 130 165 158 115 165 3000 0 2000 10 1994 5003000 1-20 0-65534 Range 150-165 70-135 170-198 100-160 70-135 100-180 150-160 70-130 165-180 4010000 Description H/R1st temperature control (Unit:degree (C)) P/R1st temperature control (Unit:degree (C)) Ext H/R1st temperature control (Unit: degree (C)) H/R Power save temperature (Unit: degree (C)) P/R Power save temperature (Unit: degree (C)) Ex. H/R Power save temperature (Unit: degree (C)) H/R Ready temperature (Unit: degree (C)) P/R Ready temperature (Unit: degree (C)) Ex. H/R Ready temperature (Unit: degree (C)) OIL PUMP ON time (ms) Number of pages ejected after OIL NEAR EMPTY (Max: 5000) Number of pages allowed from NEAR EMPTY to EMPTY. Time allowed after OIL NEAR EMPTY/EMPTY (Unit: Minute) Accumulated ON time threshold to detect WEB NEAR EMPTY (Minute) Displays the WEB status. 0=Full 1=Near Empty 2=Empty 777-079 WEB MOT ON TIME (L) 0 777-081 AIR TMP 777-082 ENV TIME 777-083 ENV TARGET 0 30 20 0-65535 Indicates Web material used. 7000 = 1 inch of Web. Environment temperature Environment temperature monitoring interval (min) Environment temperature correction threshold 777-135 TH0 4C NOR 777-136 TH0 BW NOR 777-137 TH0 4C HVY 777-138 TH0 BW HVY 777-139 TH0 4C OHP 777-140 TH0 BW OHP 777-160 LAMP OVHT FAIL 777-110 SIZE MIX DEF ChainLink Name 777-109 SIZE MIX TIME
Table 1 Fuser NVM list (777) Default 5 Range 1-15 Description Threshold to determine whether to do a dry run for size mix paper feed interval. (Unit= Minute) Determines whether to do a dry run for size mix paper feed interval. 0= Yes 1= No HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold: 4C/Normal paper BW, Normal paper 4C, Thick paper BW, Thick paper 4C, OHP BW, OHP Overheating fault 0= None 1=HR 2=HR Safety 3=PR 4=PR Safety 5=Ext HR 6=Ext HR Safety 7= Environment sensor 777-231 HR TEMP 777-232 PR TEMP 777-233 Ext HR TEMP 777-321 Auto Set Up NVM 0 0 0 0 0-1 HR temperature: Current calculated value PR temperature: Current calculated value Ext HR temperature: Current calculated value Automatic Set Up 0= Yes (default) 1= No
0-1
193 170 190 183 195 213 0
100-200 100-200 100-200 100-200 100-200 100-200 0-7
777-077 WEB STATE
General Procedures
dC131 Fuser NVM List (777)
1/05 6-92
dC131 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780)(790)

Table 1 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780, 790) ChainLink Name Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Range 0-1 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-99 0-100 Description 0= Sorter, 1= MailBox number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams number of jams Current humidity data (Detected by the environment sensor) Last Copy Side1: Toner ratio of first 1/3 Last Copy Side2: Toner ratio of first 1/3 Last Copy Side1: Toner ratio of last 1/3 Last Copy Side2: Toner ratio of last 1/3 0= AUTO 1= Dec1 Only 2= Dec2 Only 3= Release Only 0= 100 sets 1= 60 sets 0= 50 sheets 1= 25 sheets
dC132 Serial Number/Billing Meter Synchronization

Purpose
Checks the Billing Meters and sets the Machine Serial Number when fault 3-397 occurs. This routine also reads the Billing Meters and can be accessed at any time for this purpose.
780-001 Sorter Mail Box switching 780-002 JAM counter (011-145) 780-003 JAM counter (011-146) 780-004 JAM counter (011-142) 780-005 JAM counter (011-144) 780-006 JAM counter (011-143) 780-007 JAM counter (011-115) 780-008 JAM counter (011-116) 780-009 JAM counter (011-107) 780-010 JAM counter (011-109) 780-011 JAM counter (011-108) 780-012 Fail counter (011-273) 780-013 Fail counter (011-274) 780-020 Humidity (%)
Procedure
CAUTION Failure to comply with the board replacement procedure in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs , could result in catastrophic NVM corruption. Follow the procedure described in GP 10 Replacing Billing PWBs .
780-021 Toner ratio: Zl Side1 (%) 780-022 Toner ratio: Zl Side2 (%) 780-023 Toner ratio: Zt Side1 (%) 780-024 Toner ratio: Zt Side2 (%) 780-028 Decurler: Forced control
0 0 0 0 0
0 - 100 0 - 100 0 - 100 0 - 100 0-3
790-032 Stacker Capacity 790 -033 Set Eject
0 0
0-1 0-1
1/05 6-93
General Procedures
dC131 Sorter/Finisher NVM List (780), dC132 Serial
dC135 HFSI Counters

Purpose
This routine displays the service life (Threshold) and the current value (count) of the periodic replacement parts. Replacement life change, and current value resets are possible.
dC135 HFSI Counter List

NOTE: Refer to Detailed Maintenance Activities in Section 1.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Maintenance on the Service Entry Screen. The All Jams screen displays as the default screen. Select HFSI Counters (dC135) tab on the Maintenance screen. The HFSI Counters screen displays the replacement life (Threshold) and the current value (count) of the periodic replacement parts. Two vertical tabs allow display of all HFSI counters, or only those counters that are over threshold. Refer to Detailed Maintenance Activities in Section 1. Perform the listed Service Action for all HSFI counters that are at or near threshold. To reset the count after replacing the parts, select the appropriate HFSI item, then select the Reset Counter button.
5. 6.
General Procedures
dC135 HFSI Counters, dC135 HFSI Counter List
1/05 6-94
dC140 Analog Monitor

Purpose
Monitors the analog values of the A/D converter sensors by driving each component (e.g.;, C.C). Temporary change of output values is possible. Output component check is also possible.
3.
Increment or decrement the output level by 1. The new output level is input into the system and the Analog Monitor shows the new output level in the Level column. If the output level entered is out of the range, the Information screen shows the following message: ! Invalid value. Enter again. (A value that is out of the range is a value that is higher than the upper limit or lower than the lower limit defined by the machine.)
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Diagnostics in the Service Entry Screen. Select the Analog Monitor (dC140) Tab in the Diagnostics Screen." The system displays the Analog Monitor Screen. a. The system displays the analog output component names and the analog input component names with the Chain Link Numbers (ID column) in the table in the order of Chain Link number. The status of all output components show Disabled. The Level columns are blank. Select a component to check. Select Start in the output component check. The output component in the machine turns ON. The PWS changes the output component status to Enable. Turn ON another component to check the output component in the machine. NOTE: If the component has ON Time Restriction, the component is turned ON for that period and automatically turned OFF. NOTE: Some components cannot be turned ON at the same time another component is turned ON. If you turn ON a component, the first component turned ON will be automatically turned OFF. NOTE: If the component cannot be automatically turned OFF, the following message appears: ! Cannot check the component. Stop another output component. Check Multiple Components 1. 2. To check multiple components simultaneously, repeat Step 5a through 5e. To stop the check, select Stop while the component is selected, or select Stop All which turns OFF all output components. NOTE: The output component is turned OFF. The status shows Disabled. Changing Output Levels 1. 2. If you temporarily change the output level, you can check the output component by using the [+] or [-] to increment/decrement the output level by 1. Select the component whose output level you want to change. Select [+] to increment or [] to decrement.
b. 5. a. b. c. d. e.
Run the output component check:
1/05 6-95
General Procedures
dC140 Analog Monitor
dC188 How to Exit from Service Mode

Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select the Service Exit Tab on the Screen. The Service Exit Screen (dC188) displays. The exit options are: Complete Closeout Temporary Closeout
dC301 NVM Initialization

Purpose
This procedure may be needed when the machine cannot recover for some unknown reasons, including problems such as producing blank copies/prints, Xerographic CRUs not recognized, continuously giving system fault, etc.
Prerequisites
Ensure that the following conditions are met: 1. 2. IOT software level is v7.06.3 or higher. The PWS is running Next Generation PWS Tool Set Release 8.1 or higher. The PWS is running DC 12 PWS Tools v 7.1 or higher. The current IOT SW Upgrade CD (Tag P39 or higher) is available. The customer has recorded any settings from Tools Mode, and all Auditron account data. Disconnect any Foreign Interface devices. Disregard the FI fault codes that will be declared at power-up. Obtain the following data: 3. 4. 5. NVM Value Factory Setting Report (typically it is located in the Tray 1 pocket). Any setting changes (specifically NVM settings) shown on the machines service log. Any previously-saved machine NVM data on floppy disk.
NOTE: Selecting Complete Closeout resets the Shutdown History (dC122), Fault Counter (dC120), Jam Counters (dC118) and the numbers of copies since the last call. 5. Select Complete Closeout. The machine reboots. The UI Message Ready to Copy displays. NOTE: Selecting Temporary Closeout exits from the Service Mode without resetting the Shutdown History (dC122), Fault Counter (dC120), Jam Counter (dC118) and the number of copies since last call. 6. 7. 8. Select Temporary Closeout. Select Exit PWS to exit from the PWS Diagnostic Tool even if the PWS has been disconnected from the machine. After Exit PWS is selected, the following message will display, Would you like to copy Machine Data to the a:drive? Yes or No. If "Yes" is selected, insert a diskette into a:drive and the PWS will write Machine Data to a:drive and the Diagnostics Tool will close. If "No" is selected the Diagnostics Tool will close.
Procedure
Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Go to dC371 Configuration Page. Verify the machine configuration. Correct any errors before continuing. Go to dC351 NVM Background Processing. Select Save Machine Settings to save NVM data. If the process is successful, proceed to step 7. If the NVM data was not saved correctly, continue with step 6.
NOTE: If the PWS is disconnected from the machine after the machine entered the Service Mode, the PWS and the machine does not automatically exit from the Service Mode. If the machine is disconnected from the PWS, Power-OFF/ON to exit from the Service Mode.
NOTE: You may be unable to read or save NVM values using the PWS Diagnostics Tool due to either a failed IOT CPU PWB or a failed NVM PWB. If you were sent here by the IOT PWB replacement procedure, it may be possible to save NVM after the PWB is replaced. If the NVM PWB has failed you will be required to re-enter the values from the Factory NVM Settings or from a previous floppy disk database, and any other NVM changes retrieved in Initial Actions. You may need to perform setup and alignment procedures after initialization. 6. Go to dC131 NVM R/W. Record the values for the following locations: 749-030 Fault detection 759-053 Print ESS data 759-054 Scan ESS data 771-138 IBT Cleaner retract start time 772-017 Fuser Fan fail detection 773-004 Target Density switch 775-731 ATC Enable 775-750 ATC Calibration successful 775-815 TC set average 775-851 ADC change by ATC (Y) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
General Procedures
dC188 How to Exit from Service Mode, dC301 NVM
1/05 6-96
7.
775-852 ADC change by ATC (M) 775-853 ADC change by ATC (C) Record the value in location 990-302 (v7.06.3 software only) Record the value in location 759-039 (v7.06.3 software only) If IOT software v11.50.3 is loaded, set NVM location 752-017 to 0. If a Foreign Interface was enabled, record the value in NVM location 759-015, then set location 752-002 to 0. CAUTION Name IOT (IOSS)
Table 1 NVM Initialization Description The following NVM will be initialized. a. ROS NVM: Chain720 (All) b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. PH NVM: Chain740, 749, 760, 761 (All) Marking NVM: Chain770 (All except 087-100) IBT NVM: Chain771 (All) Drive NVM: Chain772 (All) Procon NVM: Chain773, 774, 775, 779 (All) Deve NVM: Chain776 (All) Fuser NVM: Chain777 (All) SorterNVM: Chain780 (All) Billing NVM: Chain990: 037, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302 SYS NVM: Chain752 (All except the following codes) (752-001-016) b. SYS NVM: Chain759 (All except the following codes) (759-130-150) UI The following NVM will be initialized: a. UI NVM: Chain700 (All) b. c. UI NVM: Chain702 (All) UI NVM: Chain850 (1-006) Default: See dC131. Chain802 is not initialized. a. Default: See dC131. a. Remarks Default: See dC131. a.
Go to dC131 NVM R/W:
DO NOT use the Select All button to perform a complete NVM Initialization! If a full initialization is indicated, reset each area one-at-a-time, in the following sequence: 8. 9. IISS POST IPS IOSS Sys UI Sys (again) Select dC301 NVM Initialize. Select the appropriate area(s) to be initialized. Table 1 lists the NVM locations that are initialized with each area selection. Table 1 NVM Initialization Name IISS (PreIPS) Description The following NVM will be initialized. a. IIT NVM: Chain710 (All) b. c. POST IPS IIT NVM: Chain715 (All) IIT NVM: Chain719 (All) Remarks Default: See dC131. a. SYS
a.
The following NVM will be initial- Default: See dC131. ized. a. a. IPS NVM:Chain730-001-169
10. After all initializations are complete, go to dC131 NVM R/W. Re-enter the values for those locations (759-015, 759-039, and/or 990-302) that were saved in step 7. 11. If NVM was successfully saved in step 5, go to dC351 and select Restore Machine Settings. If NVM was not successfully saved, use the date a from step 2 and step 6 to manually restore NVM. 12. Re-enter the values in the following tables even if the display indicates that the values are already correct.
1/05 6-97
General Procedures
Table 3 v7.06.3 software Table 2 v11.50.3 software Location 700-191 700-193 700-099 710-062 710-063 720-794 730-027 752-002 Value 1 0 1 0 0 62 260 (C/P only) 0 = no Foreign Interface NOTE: When F/I is plugged in at power-up, software will automatically enable F/I (value=1). 752-004 752-012 752-017 759-004 0 0 = No Edit Pad 1 = Edit Pad Installed 1 0 = DC12 with DFE 1 = DCCS 50 Use default for DC12 w/o DFE 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 13. Go to dC371 Configuration Page. Verify the machine configuration. Correct any errors before continuing. 14. Exit the Diagnostic Mode. To exit Diagnostic Mode, refer to dC188 How to Exit from Service Mode. 15. Reconnect any Foreign Interface devices. 16. Run several copies/prints to confirm normal machine behavior. 17. Re-enter the Diagnostic Mode. 18. Set NVM location 715-001 to 0. Set NVM location 720-368 to 0 19. Perform Max Setup (ADJ 9.1.1). 20. Exit the Diagnostic Mode. Location 759-004 Value 0 = DC12 with DFE 1 = DCCS 50 Use default for DC12 w/o DFE
759-047 759-051 759-041 759-042 761-424 990-302 990-303
Table 3 v7.06.3 software Location 710-062 710-063 752-002 Value 0 0 0 = no Foreign Interface NOTE: When F/I is plugged in at power-up, software will automatically enable F/I (value=1). 752-012 0 = No Edit Pad 1 = Edit Pad Installed
General Procedures
1/05 6-98
dC305 UI Component Check

Purpose
Checks the operations of the UI Screen and Control Panel buttons.
dC330 Component Control

Purpose
The purpose of the dC330 Component Control is to display the logic state of input signals and to energize output components. NOTE: Refer to Table 1 for a list of all Input Components listed by Chain/Link ID number. Refer to Table 2 for a list of all Output Components listed by Chain/Link ID number.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select the Diagnostics Tab in the Service Entry Screen. Select the System Test Tab in the Diagnostics Screen. The System Test Screen displays. The UI Component Check dC305 is the default screen. Select Start. The following message displays, Perform the UI Component Check on the Machine. When complete, select Stop. Select OK. Touch the UI Screen in a different locations. The highlighted point moves to the new location. All LEDs should be illuminated when the dC305 Touch Screen Test is displayed. Select Stop to Turn-OFF all LEDs. Select Stop on the Component Check Screen. The Touch Screen Test Screen on the machine UI closes.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select the Diagnostics Tab on the Service Entry Screen. Select Component Control (dC330) on the Diagnostic Entry Screen. The dC330 Screen is displayed. The display indicates the following: Input/Output Components ID Number (chain/function order) Active Stack (including ID and state of component)
NOTE: The Component Control Codes can be selected in categories by their related system, such as: Processor, System, Sorter / OCT / Mailbox, Finisher, DADF, HCF and ITT. 5. Activate the desired component code by double clicking on the Chain/Link ID number or by clicking once on the Chain/Link ID number then selecting the Start Button. NOTE: The IDs will display on the "Active Stack." 6. Press the Stop button or double click the active component in the active stack box to end the test. The ID and Active Stack components are removed from the Active Stack box. Tostack several codes, select the first code and press Start, then select the next code and press Start. Continue to enter up to eleven codes. The selected ID appears in the ID column of the Active Stack box and the state changes to Run; H or L as applicable. Stop a highlighted component by pressing Stop or double click the active component in the Active Stack Box To switch Off all components and clear the screen press Stop All.
Stacking Component Codes 1. 2. 3. 4.
1/05 6-99
General Procedures
dC305 UI Component Check, dC330 Component
NOTE: Components that are currently running are shaded in Green. Components that have been run are shaded in Yellow. NOTE: When exiting dc330, the machine resets and communication between the PWS and the machine is momentarily lost. The PWS will reconnect automatically. ID Description
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D DADF IIT IIT IIT IIT IIT IIT IIT IIT IIT HCF
In_Out Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Smart Help High: Open Low: Closed x H: Light block L: Light reception H: No DADF L: DADF High: No document Low: Document APS Sensor3 DSP: APS Sensor3 x H: Failure L: No Failure High: Open Low: Closed H: Light block L: Light reception High: Paper Low: No Paper Detects the presence / absence of a sheet in the HCF paper path. High: Stack is NOT home Low: Stack is home Detects the height of the HCF paper stack. High: Stack is NOT home Low: Stack is home Detects the height of the HCF paper stack. High: 8.5 x 11 Low: A4 Detects the size of the paper loaded in the HCF. High: Paper Low: Now paper Detects the presence / absence of a sheet in the HCF paper path.
Input CC Codes
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D System
005-301 TOP COVER I/L SWITCH 006-201 SHEET ABORT 006-212 REGI SENSOR 006-240 DADF EXIST 006-251 APS SENSOR 1
ID
Description
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Button press Low: Button release High: Not Connected Low: Connected High: Not Connected Low: Connected High: Open Low: Closed High: Open Low: Closed H: Mark detected L: Not a mark
001-200 POWER SAVE BUTTON
001-201 FOREIGN INTERFACE Input EXIST 001-202 PWS EXIST Input
System 006-253 APS SENSOR 3 System 006-272 PW-0 Processor Processor Processor 006-280 FAN FAIL 006-300 PLATEN I/L SWITCH 006-301 ANGLE SENSOR 007-100 HCF FEED TAR SENSOR
001-300 FRONT DOOR INTER- Input LOCK 001-304 LEFT HAND COVER INTERLOCK 001-306 DRAWER HANDLE INTERLOCK 003-213 TRO SENSOR Input Input Input
Run Drum Motor (004-021) simulta- Processor neously. High: Mark detected Low: Not a Mark High: No document Low: Document High: Document Low: No document High: Document Low: No document High: Document Low: No Document High: No document Low: Document High: No document Low: Document High: Document Exchange IISS exchange to DADF High: Open Low: Closed DADF DADF DADF DADF DADF DADF
005-102 DOCUMENT SENSOR Input 005-110 005-115 005-119 REGI SENSOR EXIT SENSOR DUP SENSOR Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
007-185 HCF Exist
Input
HCF
007-186 HCF STACK HEIGHT SENSOR
Input
HCF
005-150 1 SIZE SENSOR 005-151 2 SIZE SENSOR 005-201 EXCHANGE FROM IISS 005-300 PLATEN I/L SWITCH
007-187 HCF 8.5x11 / A4 SWITCH
Input
HCF
007-188 NO PAPER SENSOR DADF DADF
Input
HCF
General Procedures
1/05 6-100
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D HCF
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D Processor Processor Processor Processor
ID
Description
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Drawer / Tray is closed Low: Drawer / Tray is open. Detects when the HCF paper Drawer / Tray is closed.
ID
Description
In_Out Input Input Input
Smart Help High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Transparency Low: Transparency High: No Transparency Low: Transparency High: Light block Low: Light reception High: Light block Low: Light reception High: Light block Low: Light reception High: Light block Low: Light reception
007-189 TRAY CLOSED SWITCH
008-163 BEHIND REGI JAM SENSOR 008-198 TRANSPERENCY (OHP) 1 SENSOR 008-199 OHP 2 SENSOR
007-190 HCF FEED HOT LINE
Input
Signal from the IOT to initiate paper HCF feed from the HCF. In run mode a high to low transition on this signal will cause the HCF to feed paper. In the diagnostic mode, this signal has no effect on the HCF. High: Tray Inserted Low: Tray out High: HCF is docked Low: HCF is not docked. Detects that the HCF is properly docked to the IOT. High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: Paper Low: No Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper Processor HCF
008-221 #1 TRAY STACK Input HEIGHT (LEVEL) SENSOR 008-222 #2 TRAY STACK Input HEIGHT (LEVEL) SENSOR 008-223 #3 TRAY STACK Input HEIGHT (LEVEL) SENSOR 008-224 #4 TRAY STACK Input HEIGHT (LEVEL) SENSOR 008-226 #5 TRAY BYPASS) Input STACK HEIGHT LEVEL UP SENSOR
007-301 #1 TRAY SENSOR 007-308 HCF INTERLOCK SWITCH
Input Input
Processor
Processor
008-104 #1 PRE FEED SENSOR 008-105 #1 FEED OUT SENSOR 008-109 #2 PRE FEED SENSOR 008-110 008-114 008-115 008-119 #2 FEED OUT SENSOR #3 PRE FEED SENSOR #3 FEED OUT SENSOR #4 PRE FEED SENSOR
Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input
Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor
Processor
Run #5 (Bypass) Nudger Roll Sole- Processor noid Simultaneously. High: Lift up state Low: Lift down State
008-227 #5 TRAY (BYPASS) Input STACK HEIGHT LEVEL DOWN SENSOR 008-231 #1 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 008-232 #2 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 008-233 #3 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 008-234 #4 TRAY NO PAPER SENSOR 008-236 TRAY 5 PAPER SENSOR 008-240 #2 TRAY SIZE S/W 1 Input Input Input Input Input Input
High: Lift Down State Low: Lift Up State High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: Switch on (soft data) Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4
Processor
Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor
008-120 #4 FEED OUT SENSOR 008-135 TRAY 5 FEED SENSOR 008-150 TAKE AWAY SENSOR 008-153 PRE REGI SENSOR 008-155 REGI SENSOR
1/05 6-101
General Procedures
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D Processor
ID
Description
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Switch on (soft data) Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (soft data) Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (soft data) Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (Soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (Soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 4 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (Soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4
ID
Description
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Switch on (Soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (Soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4 High: Switch on (Soft data) Cannot run with Tray 2 size switch 1,2,3,4 Cannot run with Tray 3 size switch 1,2,3,4
008-241 #2 TRAY SIZE S/W 2
008-251 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 2
008-242 #2 TRAY SIZE S/W3
Input
Processor
008-252 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 3
Input
Processor
Input
Processor
008-253 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 4
Input
Processor
Input
Processor
008-305 Tray 5 Interlock 008-306 DRAWER HANDLE INTERLOCK
Input Input
High: Tray 5 (bypass) feeder open. Processor Low: Tray 5 feeder closed. High: Open Low: Close High: Light block Low: Light reception High: Home detected Processor Processor
Input
Processor
009-215 2ND BELT TRANSFER Input ROLL HOME POSITION SENSOR 009-216 IBT CLEANER RETRACT HOME POSITION 009-217 OIL ROLL RETRACT HOME POSITION Input
Processor
008-247 #3 TRAY SIZE S/W 3
Input
Processor
Input
High: Light block Low: Light reception High: Home detected High: Latch Low: Release
Processor Processor Processor
009-220 ROTARY HOME POSI- Input TION SENSOR Processor 009-237 ROTARY LOCK MECH Input SENSOR 009-245 CRU POSITION Processor 009-246 CRU TYPE Input Input
008-248 #3 TRAY SIZE S/W 4
Input
High: If CRUM (X CRU Type) is cor- Processor rectly read High: If CRUM (X CRU Type) is cor- Processor rectly read and NVM (CRU type) matches. x High: Set Low: Not Set Processor Processor
008-250 #4 TRAY SIZE S/W 1
Input
009-248 WASTE AUGER ROTATE SENSOR
Input
009-249 WASTE BOTTLE POSI- Input TION SENSOR
General Procedures
1/05 6-102
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor 011-115 Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor 011-250 011-273 011-274
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor
ID
Description
In_Out
Smart Help High: Full Low: Not Full High: Trickle Bottle Full Low: Not Full High: Toner Low: No Toner High: Toner Low: No Toner High: Toner Low: No Toner High: Toner Low: No Toner High: No Paper Low: Paper High: No Paper Low: Paper High: Paper Low: No Paper High: Paper Low: No Paper High: Paper Low: No Paper High: Paper Low: No Paper High: Paper Low: No Paper High: Paper Low: No Paper High: Release Position Low: NIP Position High: Retract Position Low: Contract Position High: Empty Low: Oil Not Empty High: No CRU Low: CRU Normal state is Low
ID
Description
In_Out Input Input Input Input Input Input
Smart Help High: OCT not connected Low: OCT connected High: Empty Low: Not Empty High: Home position detected High: Offset position detected High: Open Low: Close
009-250 WASTE BOTTLE FULL Input SENSOR 009-251 TRICKLE BOTTLE SENSOR 009-255 LOW TONER SENSOR K 009-257 LOW TONER SENSOR Y 009-258 LOW TONER SENSOR M 009-259 LOW TONER SENSOR C 010-100 FUSER ENTRANCE SENSOR Input Input Input Input Input Input
010-296 OCT DETECT 010-297 OCT FULL SENSOR 010-298 OCT HOME SENSOR 010-299 OCT POSITION SENSOR 010-300 INVERT COVER INTERLOCK 011-107 OCT EXIT SENSOR
High: Paper Sorter Low: No Paper Checks the paper ejection detection sensor input (OCT) High: Paper Sorter Low: No Paper Checks the paper ejection detection sensor input x High: Paper Low: No Paper Checks the paper ejection sensor input. (Bin 1-10) x High: Home High: Offset Checks the OCT Offset position detection sensor input High: Not Full Low: Full Sorter Sorter
010-105 FUSER EXIT SENSOR Input 010-110 010-115 MACHINE EXIT SENSOR EXIT PATH SENSOR Input Input Input Input
MAILBOX VERTICAL SENSOR
Input
011-117 011-142
DECURLER EXIT SEN- Input SOR VERTICAL TRANSPORT IN SENSOR Input
010-125 INVERT PATH SENSOR 010-130 DUPLEX IN SENSOR
OCT DEVICE DETECT Input OCT OFFSET HOME SENSOR OCT OFFSET POSITION SENSOR OCT FULL STACK SENSOR Input Input
Sorter Sorter Sorter
010-132 DUPLEX PATH 1 SEN- Input SOR 010-133 DUPLEX OUT SENSOR 010-220 PRESSURE ROLL RETRACT SENSOR Input Input
011-275 011-276 011-277 011-281
Input
Sorter
010-221 EXTERNAL HEAT Input ROLL RETRACT SENSOR 010-222 OIL SENSOR 010-223 WEB CRU HOME 010-224 IIT HOTLINE Input Input Input
DECURLER CAM Input POSITION SENSOR A DECURLER CAM Input POSITION SENSOR B BIN 1 FULL SENSOR Input
Checks the Decurler Cam Position Sorter sensor A input x High: Not Full Low: Full Checks Bin 1 full detection sensor status Sorter Sorter
Processor Processor Processor
1/05 6-103
General Procedures
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D Sorter
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D Sorter
ID 011-282
Description BIN 2 FULL SENSOR
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Not Full Low: Full Checks Bin 3 full detection sensor status. High: Not full Low: Full Checks Bin 3 full detection sensor status
ID 011-303
Description
In_Out
Smart Help High: Docking Low: Open Checks the IOT docking
MBX DOCKING INTLK Input SWITCHES Input
012-107 SCT EXIT SENSOR Sorter 012-115 VERTICAL SENSOR
011-283
BIN 3 FULL SENSOR
Input
High: Paper sensed Finisher Low: No paper sensed Senses Paper Ejected to SCT Tray High: Paper detected Finisher Low: No paper detected Detects paper ejected to Bins 1-10 High: Paper detected Finisher Low: No paper detected INTERRUPT TAMPER MOTOR drive starting signal, EJECT CLAMP & OFFSET MOTOR drive starting signal, STAPLER MOVE MOTOR drive starting signal, COMPILER TRAY UP/DOWN SOLENOID drive starting signal. High: Paper detected Low: No paper detected Senses paper ejected to Mailbox High: Paper detected Low: No paper detected Senses paper ejected to Decurler Exit HOTLINE High: Paper sensed Low: Paper not Sensed Senses STACKER TRAY full of small sized paper. High: Paper sensed Low: Paper not Sensed Senses STACKER TRAY full of large sized paper. High: Sensed Low: Not Sensed Senses EJECT ROLL UP/DOWN Position. STAPLER MOVE MOTOR drive starting signal, END WALL OPEN/ CLOSE MOTOR drive-for-open starting signal. Finisher
Input
011-284
BIN 4 FULL SENSOR
Input
High: Not full Sorter Low: Full Checks the Bin 4 full detection sensor status High: Not full Low: Full Checks Bin 5 full detection sensor status High: Not full Low: Full Checks Bin 6 full detection sensor status High: Not full Low: Full Checks Bin 7 full detection sensor status High: Not full Low: Full Checks Bin 8 full detection sensor status High: Not full Low: Full Checks Bin 9 full detection sensor status Sorter
012-120 COMPILER EXIT SEN- Input SOR
011-285
BIN 5 FULL SENSOR
Input
011-286
BIN 6 FULL SENSOR
Input
Sorter 012-142 MAILBOX ENTRANCE Input SENSOR Sorter 012-145 DECURLER EXIT SEN- Input SOR Sorter 012-200 MACHINE EXIT SENSOR Sorter 012-210 STACKER FULL SENSOR Input Input
011-287
BIN 7 FULL SENSOR
Input
Finisher
011-288
BIN 8 FULL SENSOR
Input
Finisher Finisher
011-289
BIN 9 FULL SENSOR
Input
011-290
BIN 10 FULL SENSOR Input
High: Not full Sorter Low: Full Checks Bin 10 full detection sensor status High: Open Low: Close High: Open Low: Close Checks the Front Cover B Sorter
012-212 STACKER FULL Input (MIXED SET SENSOR
Finisher
011-301
MAILBOX FRONT COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH DECURLER FRONT COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH
Input
012-240 EJECT CLAMP SENSOR
Input
Finisher
011-302
Input
Sorter
General Procedures
1/05 6-104
Table 1 Input Component Control Codes Module_I D Finisher
ID
Description
In_Out
Smart Help High: Not Sensed Low: Sensed Senses SET CLAMP HOME Position. SET CLAMP MOTOR drive stopping signal.
ID
Description
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Sensed Low: Not Sensed Senses Staple Head Home Position. Stapler Motor stop signal (hardware stops driving). Eject Motor drive starting signal. High: Sensed Low: Not Sensed Senses Low Staple status (40 or less staples remain).
012-241 EJECT CLAMP HOME Input SENSOR
012-271 STAPLE HEAD HOME SENSOR
012-250 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR
Input
High: Not Sensed Finisher Low: Sensed STACKER TRAY drive stopping signal. High: Paper sensed Low: No paper sensed Senses paper (un)available on COMPILER TRAY. High: Paper sensed Low: No paper Available Senses paper (un)available on STACKER TRAY. High: Sensed Low: Not Sensed Senses STACKER TRAY up limit. High: Sensed Low: Not Sensed Senses STACKER TRAY down limit. Finisher
012-272 LOW STAPLE SWITCH Input
Finisher
012-252 COMPILER PAPER SENSOR
Input
012-273 STAPLE READY SEN- Input SOR Finisher 012-274 CARTRIDGE SET SWITCH Finisher 012-275 SCT FULL SENSOR Finisher 012-276 DEC CAM POSITION SENSOR Input Input Input
012-253 STACKER PAPER SENSOR
Input
High: Not closed Finisher Low: Closed Senses a staple at front end of Staple Head. High: Sensed Finisher Low: Not Sensed Senses Staple Cartridge is properly installed. High: Tray not full Low: Tray full Senses SCT Tray full of paper. High: Reflector sensed Low: Reflector not sensed Checks Decurler Cam Position Sensor inputting. High: Not sensed Low: Sensed Senses Eject Roll Home Position. Eject Clamp & Offset Motor drive starting signal. High: Sensed Low: Not Sensed Interrupt Front Straight Position. Stapler Move Motor drive stopping signal. Finisher
012-259 STACKER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR 012-260 STACKER LOWER LIMIT SENSOR
Input
Input
Finisher
012-265 TAMPER HOME SENSOR
Input
High: Sensed Finisher Low: Not Sensed Senses INTERRUPT TAMPER HOME Position. TAMPER MOTOR drive stopping signal. High: Sensed Finisher Low: Not Sensed Senses INTERRUPT FRONT CORNER Position. STAPLER MOVE MOTOR drive stopping signal. High: Sensed Low: Not Sensed Senses End Wall open. Stapler Move Motor drive starting signal. Finisher
012-277 OFFSET HOME SENSOR
Input
Finisher
012-269 STAPLER FRONT CORNER SENSOR
Input
012-278 STAPLE FRONT STRAIGHT SENSOR
Input
Finisher
012-270 END WALL OPEN SENSOR
Input
012-279 STAPLE REAR STRAIGHT SENSOR
Input
High: Sensed Finisher Low: Not Sensed Senses Rear Straight Position. Stapler Move Motor drive stopping signal.
1/05 6-105
General Procedures
ID
Description
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 1 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 2 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 3 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 4 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 5 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 6 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 7 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 8 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Bin not full Low: Bin full Checks Bin 9 Full Detection SNR inputting.
ID
Description
In_Out Input
Smart Help High: Open Low: Closed Senses Compiler Cover Interlock Open. IOT Feed stop signal. High: Open Low: Closed Front Cover A Interlock Switch. High: Open Low: Closed Front Cover B Interlock Switch High: Docked Low: Undocked Senses the docking to Processor. IOT Feed stop signal. High: Open Low: Closed Senses Front Cover C Interlock open. IOT Feed Stop signal. High: Closed Low: Open Senses Compiler Upper Chute open. IOT Feed stop signal that turns off 24V to Staple Motor. High: Stop Low: Regular Rotation Checks the Polygon Motor Run Polygon Motor High Speed (014 - 051) simultaneously Checks IIT image area
012-281 BIN 1 FULL SENSOR
012-300 COMPILER COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH
Input
Finisher
012-301 MAILBOX DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH 012-302 DECURLER DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH
Input
Finisher
Input
Finisher
Input
Finisher
012-303 DOCKING INTERLOCK Input SWITCH Finisher 012-304 STAPLE DOOR INTER- Input LOCK SWITCH Finisher 012-306 COMPILER COVER SAFETY SWITCH Finisher Input
Finisher
Input
Finisher
Input
Finisher
Input
014-260 ROS READY Finisher
Input
Input
Input
Finisher
015-200 ITT IMAGE AREA
Input
IIT
Output CC Codes
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Finisher Module_I D Processor
Input
ID
Description
In_Out Output Output
Smart Help x
003-001 TRD ENABLE 003-002 24 OK
012-290 BIN 10 FULL SENSOR Input
High: Bin not full Finisher Low: Bin full Checks Bin 10 Full Detection SNR inputting. High: Open Low: Closed IOT Feed stop signal. Finisher
Turn on (force) the K1 Relay of the Processor AC Drive PWBA
012-291 UNLOAD WHITE RUN SWITCH
Input
General Procedures
1/05 6-106
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D IIT IIT
ID
Description
In_Out Output
Smart Help
ID
Description
Smart Help ON: L Cooling Fan: High Moves the Carriage 50mm in the scan direction and stops automatically IIT Scan Motor (Return) On: Active On: L On: Active On: Active Simultaneous on item Engages the HCF Nudger Roll to the Feed Motor.
004-007 MAIN MOTOR
The Main Motor rotates at a freProcessor quency of 2000.8 Hz The PR and IVT are turned on simultaneously IF you operate the Drum Motor and the main Motor at the same time, then start one of them, the other Motor will shut down. (This is because they are both using the same Hard signal) The fuser motor rotates with a frequency of 1495.886 Hz. Note: also used with V-TRA Processor
006-003 COOLING FAN LOW SPEED 006-005 IIT SCAN MOTOR (Scan) 006-006 IIT SCAN MOTOR (Return) 006-007 FUSER CUT 006-013 COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED 006-086 IIT IMAGE AREA 006-091 EXCHANGE TO ADF 007-078 HCF FEED CLUTCH
Output Output Output Output Output Output
IIT IIT IIT IIT IIT HCF
004-009 FUSER MOTOR
Output
004-021 DRUM MOTOR
Output
- The drum motor rotates with a Processor frequency of 1495.886 Hz. - Drum Motor Gain sell, 2 (low) - PR and IBT are turned on simultaneously - If you operate the drum motor and the main motor at the same time, then stop one of them, the other motor will slow down. (This is because they are both using the same hard signal) After 5 sec., turned OFF automatically After 5 sec., turned OFF automatically After 2 sec., turned OFF automatically The DADF Belt Motor forwards Belt Motor (Normal rotation) The DADF Belt Motor reverses After 5 sec., turned OFF automatically On: Rotates Simultaneous Output item: (IISS sheet abort) On: L DADF DADF DADF DADF DADF DADF DADF DADF DADF
007-079 HCF ELEVATE MOTOR Output
Unidirectional Motor to move the HCF HFC Paper Tray in the up direction only (motor is not engaged in the down direction). Unipolar 200 step / rev stepper motor with a maximum 800 PPS. One revolution = 200 steps = 152 mm paper travel. ON time is 2000 msec Motor reverse. Tray lift up (upper limit detection stop) ON time: 5500 msec Motor normal rotation: Feed Roll rotation On drives connection ON time is 2000 msec Motor reverse: Tray lift up (upper limit detection stop) Does not turn on if the tray is not set ON time: 6000 msec HCF
007-080 HCF FEED MOTOR
Output
005-011
SET GATE SOLENOID Output OPEN
005-012 SET GATE SOLENOID Output CLOSE 005-040 FEED MOTOR 005-055 BELT MOTOR CW 005-056 BELT MOTOR CCW 005-075 REGI GATE SOLENOID 005-081 EXIT MOTOR 005-083 DOC READY 005-084 DOC SET LED Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
008-006 #1 NUDGER ROLL SOLENOID
Output
Processor Processor
008-007 #1 FEED MOTOR CCW Output
008-008 #1 FEED MOTOR CW 008-009 #1 TAKE AWAY FEED CLUTCH 008-011 #2 NUDGER ROLL SOLENOID
Output Output Output
Processor Processor Processor Processor
006-002 ITT EXPOSURE LEAP Output
After 180 sec., Turns OFF automat- IIT ically
1/05 6-107
General Procedures
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D Processor Processor Processor Processor
ID
Description
In_Out Output Output Output
Smart Help Motor normal rotation: Feed Roll rotation On drives connection ON time is 2000 msec Motor reverse: Tray lift up (upper limit detection stop) Does not turn on if the tray is not set. ON time: 6000 msec Motor normal rotation: Feed roll rotation On drives connection ON time is 2000 msec Motor reverse: Tray lift up (upper limit detection stop) Does not turn on if the tray is not set ON time: 6000 msec Motor normal rotation: Feed Roll rotation On drives connection On (rotation) x On drives connection x
ID 009-011
Description
In_Out
Smart Help
CARTRIDGE MOTOR K Output
Automatically turns OFF after 10 Processor sec. Cannot run with Cartridge Motors Y (009-012), M (009-013), or C (009014) Automatically turns OFF after 10 sec. Cannot run with Cartridge Motors M (009-013), C (009-014) or K (009-011). Processor
009-012 CARTRIDGE MOTOR Y Output
Processor Processor Processor Processor
009-013 CARTRIDGE MOTOR M
Output
Automatically turns OFF after 10 Processor sec. Cannot run with Cartridge Motors Y (009-012), C (009-014) or K (009011). Automatically turns OFF after 10 Processor sec. Cannot run with Cartridge Motors Y (009-012), C (009-013) or K (009011). Latch - High: Rotary Lock SEL RETN Low: Rotary Lock SEL SUCF Release - High: Rotary Lock SEL RETN On (High): Latch Off (Low): Release Processor
009-014 CARTRIDGE MOTOR C
Output
009-018 ROTARY LOCK MECH Output LATCH Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor 009-026 IBT ROLL RETRACT Output 009-021 DEVE MOTOR CLUTCH 009-025 IBT ROLL CONTACT Output Output
008-023 #4 FEED MOTOR CW 008-024 #4 TAKE AWAY FEED CLUTCH 008-025 TAKE AWAY MOTOR
Processor
008-030 Tray 5 NUDGER ROLL Output SOLENOID 008-037 TRAY 5 FEED CLUTCH Output 008-049 TRAY 5 LIFTER MOTOR CCW (up) 008-042 TRAY 5 LIFTER MOTOR CW (down) 008-043 MAIN MOTOR 2 008-054 REGI MOTOR Output Output
Run simultaneously with Main Processor Motor (004-007) Automatically turns OFF after the Roll Retract Home Position Sensor detects the Contact Position (On: Low, Off: High) Run simultaneously with Main Processor Motor (004-007) Automatically turns OFF after the Roll Retract Home Position Sensor detects the Retract Position (On: Low, Off: High) Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor K color and dispensing the toner. NOTE: To drive the rotary, Move the rotary to the K color in dC920 (Developer Unit Check). Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Lower limit detection stop ON time: Processor 300 msec Tray 5 Lift Motor CCW On: Port (L) On: Port (L) Processor Processor 009-031 DISPENSE MOTOR K Output
Output Output
General Procedures
1/05 6-108
ID
Description
In_Out Output
Smart Help
ID
Description
In_Out
Smart Help
009-032 DISPENSE MOTOR Y
Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor Y color and dispensing the Toner. NOTE: To drive the rotary, move the rotary to the Y color in dC920 (Developer Unit Check) Automatically turns off after 2 sec. Cannot run with Dispense Motor M (009-033), C (009-034) or K (009031). Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor Y color and dispensing the Toner. NOTE: To drive the rotary, move the rotary to the Y color in dC920 (Developer Unit Check) Automatically turns off after 2 sec. Cannot run with Dispense Motor Y (009-032), C (009-034) or K (009031). Start after moving the Rotary to the Processor Y color and dispensing the Toner. NOTE: To drive the rotary, move the rotary to the Y color in dC920 (Developer Unit Check) Automatically turns off after 2 sec. Cannot run with Dispense Motor Y (009-032), C (009-033) or K (009031). On: L On: Turns on the lamp. Processor Processor
009-059 2ND BELT TRANSFER Output ROLL RETRACT
Run simultaneously with Drum Processor Motor (004-021) and Main Motor (004-007) Automatically turns off after the 2nd BTR Home Position Sensor detects the Retract Position, On: Low Cannot run with 2nd BTR CL On Contact (009-058) Run simultaneously with Main Processor Motor (004-007) Automatically turns off after the IBT Cleaner Contact Home Position Sensor detects the contact position. ON: Low, OFF: High Run simultaneously with Main Processor Motor (004-007) Automatically turns off after the IBT Cleaner Contact Home Position Sensor detects the contact position. Cannot run with IBT Cleaner Contact (009-066). Run simultaneously with Main Processor Motor (004-021) DC ON: PWM Output value = NVM (0-255) - Discharge (variable value) / NVM 774-031 = 1 oclock output value = 0 / NVM 774-031 = 2 oclock output value = 96. NVM 774-033 / NVM 774-031 = 3 oclock output value = 130 NVM 774-029 Run Simultaneously with Drum Motor (004-021) ON: 3 KV - Discharge. (can be changed in NVM 771-034) ON: PWM Output Value - 573 fixed - Apply Processor Processor Processor
009-033 DISPENSE MOTOR M Output
009-066 IBT CLEANER CONTACT
Output
009-067 IBT CLEANER RETRACT
Output
009-034 DISPENSE MOTOR C
Output
009-068 PRE CLEAN COROTRON dC
Output
009-040 ADC LED 009-050 ERASE LAMP
Output Output
009-057 2ND BELT TRANSFER Output ROLL
Run simultaneously with Drum Processor Motor (004-021) and 2nd BTR CL ON - Contact (009-058) DC ON: 2.2kV - Discharge (can be changed in NVM 771-033) Run simultaneously with Drum Processor Motor (004-007) Automatically turns off after the 2nd BTR Home Position sensor detects the Contact On Position, On: Low Cannot run with 2nd BTR CL On Retract (009-059)
009-070 CHARGE COROTRON Output WIRE 009-074 SAW COROTRON dC 009-076 DEVE BIAS dC Output Output
009-058 2ND BELT TRANSFER Output ROLL CONTACT
009-077 DEVE BIAS AC COLOR Output
ON: PWM Output Value - 165 Processor fixed - Apply Cannot be run with Deve Bias - AC B/W (009-079) ON: PWM Output Value - 165 Processor Cannot be run with Deve Bias - AC Color (009-077) General Procedures
009-079 DEVE BIAS AC BLACK Output
1/05 6-109
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D Processor
ID
Description
In_Out
Smart Help Run simultaneously with Drum Motor (004-021) ON: PWM Output Value = 717 (NVM 774-005) ON: L ON: L ON: L
ID
Description
In_Out Output
Smart Help
009-081 CHARGE COROTRON Output GRID
010-024 PRESSURE ROLL RETRACT
009-085 ROTARY MOT FAN 009-088 BLOWER 009-089 CC FAN 010-004 FUSER FAN-LOW SPEED
Output Output Output Output
Processor Processor Processor 010-025 INVERT ROLL NIP SOLENOID Output
Turn on Exit Motor (010-040) simul- Processor taneously. ON: L Automatically turns off after Pressure Roll Retract Sensor detects the contact position. Cannot run with Fuser Nip CL OFF (010-023). On (Roll Nip): L Processor Reverse: Keep the state. ON time: 100 msec Cannot run with Invert Nip Solenoid Release (010-026). On (Roll Nip): L Processor Reverse: Keep the state. ON time: 100 msec Cannot run with Invert Nip Solenoid Release (010-025). ON: L Processor Automatically turns off after the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor detects the Contact position. Cannot run with External Heat Roll Retract Motor - Retract (010-028) ON: L Processor Automatically turns off after the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor detects the Contact position. Cannot run with External Heat Roll Retract Motor - Retract (010-027) ON: L Processor Automatically turns off after 1 sec. NOTE: The fuser temperature control will be halted during the Diag. Component Control and Diag. subsystem check. The fuser temperature control continues in any other Diag.
ON: Port H Processor NOTE: When you exit from the I/O check, exit at high speed. Cannot run with Fuser Fan High Speed (010-018). ON (INV): L Reverse: Keep the state ON time: 100 msec Cannot run with Invert Gate Solenoid Exit (010-006) On (Exit): L Reverse: Keep the state ON time: 100 msec Cannot run with Invert Gate Solenoid Invert (010-005). Processor
010-005 INVERT GATE SOLENOID INVERT
Output
010-026 INVERT ROLL RELEASE SOLENOID
Output
010-006 INVERT GATE SOLENOID EXIT
Output
Processor
010-027 EXTERNAL HEAT ROLL CONTACT
Output
010-018 FUSER FAN-HIGH SPEED
Output
ON: L Processor NOTE: When you exit from the I/O check, exit at high speed. Cannot run with Fuser Fan Low Speed (010-004) Motor On: Port (L) [CW] normal rotation (upward): Port (H) Motor Speed = 350 mm/s Cannot run with Invert Motor CW Processor
010-028 EXTERNAL HEAT ROLL RETRACT
Output
010-020 INVERT MOTOR CW
Output
010-029 EXTERNAL HEAT ROLL LAMP
Output
010-021 INVERT MOTOR CCW Output
Motor On: Port (L) [CCW] reverse Processor rotation (downward): Port (L) Motor Speed = 450 mm/s Cannot run with Invert Motor CW Turn on Exit Motor (010-040) simul- Processor taneously. ON: L Automatically turns off after Pressure Roll Retract Sensor detects the contact position. Cannot run with Fuser Nip CL OFF (010-024).
010-023 PRESSURE ROLL CONTACT
Output
General Procedures
1/05 6-110
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D Sorter Sorter
ID
Description
In_Out Output
Smart Help
ID 011-005 011-010
Description MAILBOX DRIVE MOTOR DECURLER STEPPING MOTOR SPEED 60 DECURLER STEPPING MOTOR SPEED 130 DECURLER STEPPING MOTOR SPEED 220 DECURLER STEPPING MOTOR SPEED 350
Smart Help Starts / Stops the Paper Transport Roll Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Transport Roll. Speed: 60 mm / sec. Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Transport Roll. Speed: 130 mm / sec. Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Transport Roll. Speed: 220 mm / sec. Starts / Stops driving the Decurler Transport Roll. Speed: 350 mm / sec.
010-030 HEAT ROLL LAMP
ON: L Processor Automatically turns off after 1 sec. NOTE: The fuser temperature control will be halted during the Diag. Component Control and Diag. subsystem check. The fuser temperature control continues in any other Diag. ON: L Processor Automatically turns off after 1 sec. NOTE: The fuser temperature control will be halted during the Diag. Component Control and Diag. subsystem check. The fuser temperature control continues in any other Diag. ON: H Processor ON: H Processor Automatically turns off after 10 sec. ON: L x ON: Port (L) ON: H NOTE: When you exit the I/O check, exit at high speed. Cannot run with Fuser INT Fan High Speed (010-061) Processor Processor Processor Processor
011-011
Output
Sorter
010-031 PRESSURE ROLL LAMP
Output
011-012
Output
Sorter
011-013
Output
Sorter
010-032 WEB MOTOR 010-033 OIL PUMP 010-040 EXIT MOTOR
011-081
OCT GATE SOLENOID Output OCT-ON
Must have the OCT Gate Solenoid Sorter Bin Tray On (011-082). Switch the OCT Gate to the OCT direction. Return: OCT direction. Time: 150 msec Switch the OCT Gate to the Bin Tray direction. Suction: Bin tray direction. Cannot run with OCT Gate Solenoid OCT ON. Switch the 2 Bin Gate to the Bin Tray direction. Cannot run with the 3 to 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-084 through 011-091). Switch the 3 Bin Gate to the Bin Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2,4 to 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083, 011-085 through 011-091). Sorter
010-047 1ST BELT TRANSFER Output ROLL 010-050 DUPLEX OUT MOTOR Output 010-060 FUSER INT FAN-LOW SPEED Output
011-082
OCT GATE SOLENOID Output BIN TRAY-ON
011-083
BIN 2 GATE SOLENOID
Output
Sorter
010-061 FUSER INT FAN-HIGH Output SPEED
ON: L Processor NOTE: When you exit the I/O check, exit at low speed. Cannot run with Fuser INT Fan Low Speed (010-060) CCW (moves to the home position): Processor Port (H) Home detected. Stop ON time: 600 msec Cannot run with OCT Motor Forward (010-086) CW (moves to the offset position): Port (H) Offset detected. Stop ON time: 600 msec Cannot run with OCT Motor Reverse (010-085) Processor
011-084
BIN 3 GATE SOLENOID
Output
Sorter
010-085 OCT MOTOR REVERSE
Output
011-085
BIN 4 GATE SOLENOID
Output
010-086 OCT MOTOR FOREWARD
Output
Switch the 4 Bin Gate to the Bin Sorter Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2, 3, 5 to 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083, 011-084, 011-086 through 011-091).
1/05 6-111
General Procedures
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D Sorter
ID 011-086
Description BIN 5 GATE SOLENOID
In_Out Output
Smart Help Switch the 5 Bin Gate to the 5 Bin Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2 to 4, 6 to 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 through 011-085, 011-087 through 011-091). Switch the 6 Bin Gate to the 6 Bin Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2 to 5, 7 to 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 through 011-086, 011-088 through 011-091). Switch the 7 Bin Gate to the 7 Bin Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2 to 6, 8 to 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 through 011-087, 011-089 through 011-091).
ID 011-095
Description
In_Out
Smart Help
OCT OFFSET MOTOR Output BACK
011-087
BIN 6 GATE SOLENOID
Output
Sorter
Moves the OCT to the rear direction Sorter and stops at the OCT Offset Position. (CCW) Moves the OCT to the front Direction and stops 20 msec after the OCT Offset Position Sensor detects it. Cannot run with Offset Position Sensor ON. Cannot run with OCT Offset Motor Front. Low: On Drives MBX Drive Motor Finisher
012-005 MBX DRIVE MOTOR Sorter
Output
011-088
BIN 7 GATE SOLENOID
Output
012-010 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output 60 012-011 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output 130
Low: On Finisher Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at 60mm/s (actually 130mm/s) Low: On Finisher Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at 130mm/s. Low: On Finisher Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at 220mm/s. Low: On Finisher Drives DEC Paper Transport Roll at 130mm/s. Low: On Drives Finisher Transport Motor. Finisher
011-089
BIN 8 GATE SOLENOID
Output
Switch the 8 Bin Gate to the 8 Bin Sorter Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2 to 7, 9, 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 through 011-088, 011-090, 011-091). Switch the 9 Bin Gate to the 9 Bin Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2 to 8,10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 through 011-089, 011-091). Switch the 10 Bin Gate to the 10 Bin Tray direction. Cannot run with the 2 to 4, 6 to 10 Bin Gate Solenoids (011-083 through 011-085, 011-087 through 011-091). Moves the OCT to the front direction and stops at the OCT Offset Position. (CW) Moves the OCT to the front direction and stops 20 msec after the OCT Offset Position Sensor detects it. Sorter
012-012 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output 220 012-013 DEC MOTOR ON/OFF Output 350 012-020 FINSHER TRANSPORT MOTOR Output Output
011-090
BIN 9 GATE SOLENOID
Output
011-091
BIN 10 GATE SOLENOID
Output
Sorter
012-024 EJECT MOTOR FORWARD
Not measurable Finisher Drives Eject Roll forward. Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock. Not measurable Finisher Drives Eject Roll backward. Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock. High: On Finisher Drives Eject Roll up/down. (500ms) High: On Drives Eject Roll to front/rear. (500ms) Finisher
012-025 EJECT MOTOR REVERSE Sorter 012-026 EJECT CLAMP AND OFFSET MOTOR UP/ DOWN 012-027 EJECT CLAMP AND OFFSET MOTOR F/R
Output
011-093
OCT OFFSET MOTOR Output FRONT
Output
Output
General Procedures
1/05 6-112
ID
Description
Smart Help
ID
Description
In_Out
Smart Help
012-030 END WALL MOTOR OPEN 012-031 END WALL MOTOR CLOSE 012-036 COMPILER TRAY SOLENOID
High: On Finisher Drives End Wall to open it (300ms) High: On Finisher Drives End Wall to close it (300ms) Low: On Lowers Compiler Tray. High: On No output is allowed if a response is sensed from Tray Upper Limit SNR before or while Stacker Tray being driven upward. (500ms) High: On No output is allowed if a response is sensed from Tray Upper Limit SNR before or while Stacker Tray being driven downward. High: On Drives Set Clamp. (300ms) Finisher Finisher
012-065 TAMPER MOTOR MID- Output DLE REAR
Not measurable Finisher Drives Tamper to rear at a medium speed. (1000pps) (100 pulses) Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock. Low: On Switches Gate for MBX/SCT. (100 pulses) Low: On Switches Gate for Finisher. (100 pulses) High: On Does stapling. (Compiler cover Safety ON) (Stops at Home or times out in 500ms). Finisher
012-040 STACKER MOTOR UP Output
012-070 FIN GATE SOLENOID- Output MBX/SCT POSITION 012-071 FIN GATE SOLENOID- Output FINSHER POSITION
Finisher
012-041 STACKER MOTOR DOWN
Output
Finisher
012-075 STAPLER MOTOR CLOSE
Output
Finisher
012-053 EJECT PADDLE MOTOR
Output
Finisher
012-076 STAPLE POSITION MOTOR TOP FRONT
Output
012-060 TAMPER MOTOR LOW Output FRONT
Not measurable Finisher Drives Tamper to front at a low speed. (560pps) (100 pulses) Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock. Not measurable Finisher Drives Tamper to front at a high speed. (2000pps) (100 pulses) Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock. Not measurable Finisher Drives Tamper to rear at a low speed. (560pps) (100 pulses) Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock. Not measurable Finisher Drives Tamper to rear at a high speed. (2000pps) (100 pulses) Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock. Not measurable Finisher Drives Tamper to front at a medium speed. (1000pps) (100 pulses) Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock.
Not measurable Finisher Drives Stapler Unit to front at a high speed (2700pps). If End Wall Open Sensor doesnt sense any, no output is allowed. (250 pulses). Not measurable Finisher Drives Stapler Unit to front at a low speed (2000pps). If End Wall Open Sensor doesnt sense any, no output is allowed. (250 pulses). Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock Not measurable Finisher Drives Stapler Unit to rear at a high speed (2700pps). If End Wall Open Sensor doesnt sense any, no output is allowed. (250 pulses). Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock Not measurable Finisher Drives Stapler Unit to rear at a low speed (2000pps). If End Wall Open Sensor doesnt sense any, no output is allowed. (250 pulses). Note: Not measurable in field due to 24V Clock Low: On Switches MBX Gate for SCT. (150ms) Finisher
012-077 STAPLE POSITION MOTOR LOW FRONT
Output
012-061 TAMPER MOTOR TOP Output FRONT
012-062 TAMPER MOTOR LOW Output REAR
012-078 STAPLE POSITION TOP REAR
Output
012-063 TAMPER MOTOR TOP Output REAR
012-079 STAPLE POSITION MOTOR LOW REAR
Output
012-064 TAMPER MOTOR MID- Output DLE FRONT
012-081 MBX GATE SOLENOID CLOSE
Output
1/05 6-113
General Procedures
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D Finisher
Table 2 Output Component Control Codes Module_I D Processor Processor
ID
Description
In_Out Output
Smart Help Low: On Switches MBX Gate for MBX. (150ms) Low: On Switches 2Bin Gate for Bin 2 Low: On Switches 3Bin Gate for Bin 3 Low: On Switches 4Bin Gate for Bin 4 Low: On Switches 5Bin Gate for Bin 5 Low: On Switches 6Bin Gate for Bin 6 Low: On Switches 7Bin Gate for Bin 7 Low: On Switches 8Bin Gate for Bin 8 Low: On Switches 9Bin Gate for Bin 9 Low: On Switches 10Bin Gate for Bin 10
ID
Description
Smart Help ON: Port (H) ON: Port (H)
012-082 MBX GATE SOLENOID OPEN 012-083 2 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-084 3 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-085 4 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-086 5 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-087 6 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-088 7 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-089 8 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-090 9 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-091 10 BIN GATE SOLENOID 012-096 DEC PENETRATION CHANGE
014-053 LASER DIODE A ON 014-054 LASER DIODE B ON 015-001 MEMORY READY
Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
Finisher Finisher Finisher Finisher Finisher Finisher Finisher Finisher Finisher
Scan Start OK signal from IPS Processor (Done with IPS memory ready signal output check
Low: On Finisher Drives MBX Drive Motor, and 500ms after then switches Decurler Penetration (from Release position to Weak position or Weak to Strong or Strong to Release). (Completes at Cam position. Low: On Turns on per the Start instruction. Turns off per the Stop instruction. (250 pulses) Polygon Motor ON Signal ON: L Polygon Speed Signal ON: L Cannot run with Polygon Motor High speed (014-051). Polygon Motor ON Signal ON: L Polygon Speed Signal ON: H Cannot run with Polygon Motor Low speed (014-050). Finisher
012-099 UNLOAD WHILE RUN LED
Output
014-050 POLYGON MOTOR LOW SPEED
Output
Processor
014-051 POLYGON MOTOR HIGH SPEED
Output
Processor
General Procedures
1/05 6-114
dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore

Purpose
Save / Restore NVM This option saves current NVM settings that were changed since the last service call or to restore the saved NVM settings since the last service call. Machine Settings This option saves the machine settings that were changed since the last service call or to restore the machine settings since the last service call. Dust Off Reset Turns all counters back to zero. NVM Background Read This option will read/save all NVM locations found in dC131. Code 710-007 710-008 710-009 715-028 715-029 715-091 715-092 715-093 715-106 715-107 715-110 715-111 715-112 715-113 715-114 715-115 715-116 715-117 715-118 715-119 715-120 715-121 715-125 715-132 715-133 720-003 720-004 720-005 720-006 720-007 720-008 720-018 720-019 720-020 730-001 730-002 730-003 730-004 730-005 730-006 730-007 1/05 6-115 Description
Table 1 L-REGI Pulse Duplex 8.5x11 L-REGI Pulse Duplex A4 S L-REGI Pulse Duplex 8.5x13 DADF IPS Offset- FS REGI ADJ revise VAL-FS White Ref Adjustment Coefficient - Red White Ref Adjustment Coefficient - Green White Ref Adjustment Coefficient - Blue HOSEI SCAN MB_SCAN CCD Calibration Y Patch-R CCD Calibration Y Patch-G CCD Calibration Y Patch-B CCD Calibration M Patch-R CCD Calibration M Patch-G CCD Calibration M Patch-B CCD Calibration C Patch-R CCD Calibration C Patch-G CCD Calibration C Patch-B CCD Calibration K Patch-R CCD Calibration C Patch-G CCD Calibration C Patch-B Platen / DADF Selection REGI Revise VAL- SS MAG Revise VAL- SS LS OFFSET Tray 1 LS OFFSET Tray 2 LS OFFSET Tray 3 LS OFFSET Tray 4 LS OFFSET Tray 5 LS OFFSET Duplex ERASE LE ERASE TE ERASE SIDE TIS Parameter MUC Adj MUC Adj for OHP MUL M Rate for Y-Y MUL M Rate for M-Y MUL M Rate for C-Y MUL M Rate for Y-M General Procedures
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen. Select NVM Init, S/R. The "NVM Initialize Screen (dC301)" is displayed. Select the NVM Background Processing (dC351) Tab. Select Reset All HFSI to reset all HFSI counters to zero. Select Start Background Read to read the NVM settings to be saved/restored. NOTE: Select Stop Background Read to stop a "Background Read" in progress. NOTE: Table 1 list all NVM values read, saved or restored in NVM Background Processing dC351. 7. 8. Once the Background Read has completed, select Save Current NVM Settings or Restore NVM Settings. Once the NVM Settings have been "Saved" or "Restored", select Save Machine Settings or Restore Machine Settings. Table 1 Code 702-002 702-003 702-004 702-020 702-022 702-057 702-122 702-130 702-168 710-004 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Description Tools mode information Tools mode information Tools mode information Tools mode information Tools mode information Document Size 1 Tools mode information Tools mode information Tools mode information DADF Lead REGI Time Simplex
Table 1 Code 730-008 730-009 730-010 730-011 730-012 730-013 730-014 730-015 730-016 730-017 730-018 730-019 730-020 730-021 730-025 730-026 730-045 730-046 730-047 730-048 730-049 730-050 730-051 730-052 760-002 760-003 760-004 761-043 761-048 773-102 773-115 773-121 773-231 773-253 773-258 773-263 773-265 773-266 773-267 773-268 773-269 Description MUL M Rate for M-M MUL M Rate for C-M MUL M Rate for Y-C MUL M Rate for M-C MUL M Rate for C-C MUL M Rate for Y-B MUL M Rate for M-B MUL M Rate for C-B MUL M Rate for Y-G MUL M Rate for M-G MUL M Rate for C-G MUL M Rate for Y-R MUL M Rate for M-R MUL M Rate for C-R HOSEI MB CBY CBM CBC CBK X - Regi- Editor Y - Regi- Editor X - Mag- Editor Sharpness Level Tray 5 Size Sensor analog smallest Value Tray 5 Size Sensor Analog Greatest Value Tray 1 Paper Size Regi Motor On Timing (Panel A& B) Adjust Regi Motor On Timing (Duplex Mode) HILITE FLAG TEMP 1S HUM VH/VM ADJ ADC Sensor Gain - mirror ADC VCLEAN S AVE ADC VCLEAN D AVE VALCS TARGET VALCS2 TARGET RADC set Y RADC Set M RADC Set C RADC Set K 1/05 6-116 Code 773-276 773-381 773-383 773-456 773-476 773-477 773-478 773-479 773-481 773-482 773-483 773-484 773-496 773-497 773-498 773-499 773-606 773-607 773-608 773-609 774-018 774-019 774-020 774-179 775-085 775-086 775-087 775-088 775-279 775-280 775-281 775-282 775-415 775-416 775-417 775-418 775-815 776-010 776-011 776-012 776-136 Description VHS ADJ VGS LDS
Table 1
ALC 300L BIAS SET Y ALC 300L BIAS Y ALC 300L BIAS M ALC 300L BIAS C ALC 300L BIAS K ALC 600 BIAS Y ALC 600 BIAS M ALC 600 BIAS C ALC 600 BIAS K ALC_IO[Y] ALC_IO[M] ALC_IO[C] ALC_IO[K] RADC Patch Y RADC Patch M RADC Patch C RADC Patch K Bottle Full Flag Bottle Near Full Counter Bottle Goal Drum Cycle Ini Radc_TRC_CinB [Y] Radc_TRC_CinB [M] Radc_TRC_CinB [C] Radc_TRC_CinB [K] Val LUT Manu Adj (Y) Val LUT Manu Adj (M) Val LUT Manu Adj (C) Val LUT Manu Adj (K) P_LUT_B[Y] P_LUT_B[M] P_LUT_B[C]775-418 P_LUT_B[K] TC_SET_Kari_Ave Trickle bottle near full Trickle Bottle Full NVM TRICKLE STS DEVE HOME SENSOR Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
General Procedures
Table 1 Code 776-367 776-368 776-369 776-370 776-371 776-372 776-373 776-374 776-375 776-376 777-001 777-002 777-003 777-006 777-007 777-008 777-010 777-011 777-012 777-051 777-055 777-056 777-057 777-058 777-075 777-076 777-077 777-081 777-109 777-110 777-135 777-136 777-137 777-138 777-139 777-140 999-002 999-004 Description Toner Cartridge Status (K) Toner Cartridge Status (Y) Toner Cartridge Status (M) Toner Cartridge Status (C) Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (K) Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (Y) Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (M) Toner Cartridge Empty Detection (C) Toner Cartridge Near Empty Threshold Toner Cartridge Empty Detection H/R Temperature 1 P/R Temperature 1 Ext. H/R Temperature 1 H/R Power Save Temperature P/R Power Save Temperature Ext. H/R Power Save Temperature Heat Roll Ready Temperature Pressure Roll Ready Temperature Ext. Heat Roll Ready Temperature Oil Pump On Time PV after Oil Near Empty PV from Oil Near Empty to Empty OIL LIMIT PAP Limit Time after Oil Empty Threshold time Web Near Empty WEB EMP Web Status Environment temperature TH - Rotate woPPR-size Mix Rotate woPPR-size Mix TH TEMP Not RDY PPR 4C HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold B/W HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold 4C HVY HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold B/W HVY HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold 4C OHP HR & PR Not Ready temperature start threshold B/W OHP Output Configuration - Sorter / Mailbox CRU Type
dC361 NVM Save/Restore

Purpose
Restores the NVM data of the Main Processor after saving it to the PWS.
Procedure
A. Saving NVM Data 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen. Select NVM Save/Restore (dC361). The NVM Save/Restore Screen is displayed. Select the desired target module from Select All or Specify an Item from the Initialize Area screen. a. Module specification items are as described below. (Default: IISS) i. When selecting the target module of IISS or PostIPS, initialize area by selecting the desired target module and check that the selection is highlighted in blue. Hold the Shift Key and click other desired target modules to make multiple selections. Select All will select all the modules of Initialize Area. The NVM areas do not include the Dust Off target modules.
ii. iii. 5.
Select Start dC 361 Save. NOTE: It may take several moments to save the NVM data.
6.
Select OK to start.
B. Restoring NVM Data 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. This function performs PWB Replacement or NVM Initialization. Refer to dC301 NVM Initialization. Select Adjustments in the Service Mode. Select NVM Save/Restore. NVM Save/Restore Screen is displayed. Select the desired target module from Select All or Specify an item from the Initialize Area Screen. Select Start dC 361 Restore. The message confirming the start of restoring is displayed. Select Yes. a. a. An error message will be displayed if the Storage Medium has a problem. When restoring is not completed successfully, the message, ! The operation requested was not completed successfully will be displayed. Restoring Completed is displayed after the restoring.
1/05 6-117
General Procedures
dC351 NVM Initialize, Save/Restore, dC361 NVM
dC371 Configuration Page

Purpose
Allows easy viewing and set-up of machine configuration. 6.
h.
Input Device DADF Platen Only
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen. Select NVM Init, S/R. "NVM Init, S/R" is the default screen. Select Configuration Page (dC371). The Configuration Page Screen is displayed. Make selections on the screen from the following categories: a. Market Place b. c. d. e. f. g. XC (NASG) XE (ESG) FX FX / AP Digital Copier Copier / Printer Copier / Printer / Scanner Printer with UI Simple Catch Tray Offset Catch Tray Sorter Mailbox Finisher / Sorter Finisher / Mailbox Accessory Connection None Auditron Card Prepaid Coin Kit 8.5" x 11" A4 B5 A5 Edit Pad High Capacity Feeder
Select Save to save the options or select Reset to reset the default settings back to original options prior to entering Configuration Page (dC371).
Machine Config
Output Device(s)
Accessories Foreign Interface
Tray 1 Paper Size
Feature Config
General Procedures
dC371 Configuration Page
1/05 6-118
dC391 Edit Pad

Purpose
This routine allows you to set custom colors easily for the Customer Color Palette. Once a color is selected the Color Indices can be adjusted by percentage to obtain the custom color for a specific color. NOTE: The numbered locations on the dC391Color Palette match the colored locations on the Customer Color Palette. NOTE: The Edit Pad feature must be selected on the dC371 Configuration Page to enable the Edit Pad.
dC612 Color Test Pattern Print

Purpose
Prints the test pattern in the machine, to help identify Copy Quality problems.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Diagnostics in the Service Entry Screen. Select Test Pattern (dc612). a. To print an Image Process System Test Pattern, select Image Process System: i. ii. iii. b. i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. Select the Pattern Number from the menu. Select the Paper Tray. Set the number of prints to output in the Print Count Box and select Start. Image Output System Paper (Simplex/Duplex) Paper Tray/Size Paper Type Screen Type Color Mode Set the number of prints to output and select Start.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen. Select Edit Pad (dC391). The Edit Pad Screen is displayed. Select the number on the Color Palette that corresponds to the Customer Color Palette. Once the color is selected, Click and drag the slide bars in the Color Indices box to obtain the Custom Colors or click the arrow right of the slide bar to increase and click the left arrow to decrease. Select Save to save the changes. Select Reset to restore the original settings prior to entering dC Edit Pad.
To print the Image Output Test Pattern, select Image Output System.
6. 7.
Test Patterns
For details on the test pattern generation location and output path, Table 1: Table 1 Test Patterns Pattern Number 1 Pattern Name Description Remarks PreIPS (Image Processing)
IIT Analog Gradation Ch1- 3C color gradation PG 6-RGB - 300 lines (3C) with all CCD RGB Odd/ Even data
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IIT Analog Gradation Ch1, K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Processing) 2-R - 300 lines (K) CCD R Odd/Even data IIT Analog Gradation Ch3, K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Processing) 4-G - 300 lines (K) CCD G Odd/Even data IIT Analog Gradation Ch5, K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Process6-B - 300 lines (K) CCD B Odd/Even data ing) IIT Analog Gradation Ch1- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Processing) R - 300 lines (K) CCD R Odd data IIT Analog Gradation Ch2- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Processing) R - 300 lines (K) CCD R Even data IIT Analog Gradation Ch3- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image ProcessG - 300 lines (K) CCD G Odd data ing) IIT Analog Gradation Ch4- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Processing) G - 300 lines (K) CCD G Even data
1/05 6-119
General Procedures
dC391 Edit Pad , dC612 Color Test Pattern Print
Table 1 Test Patterns Pattern Number 9 10 11 12 13 14 Pattern Name Description Remarks Pattern Number 28 29 30 31 32 33 Pattern Name
Table 1 Test Patterns Description Remarks
IIT Analog Gradation Ch5- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image Processing) B - 300 lines (K) CCD B Odd data IIT Analog Gradation Ch6- K-color gradation PG with PreIPS (Image ProcessB - 300 lines (K) CCD B Even data ing) IIT digital FS gradation 300 lines (3C) IIT digital SS gradation 300 lines (3C) IIT digital FS/SS gradation - 300 lines (3C) IIT shading data output 300 lines (3C) SID horizontal stripe YMCK - 300 lines (4C) FS direction gradation PG PreIPS (Image Processing) SS gradation PG FS/SS gradation PG PreIPS (Image Processing) PreIPS (Image Processing)
MWAH PG 300 lines (3C) Solid L*, a*, b* - 300 lines PostIPS (Image Processing) PG MAD PG - 300 lines (4C) TRE PG - 300 lines (4C) SFM PG (Post IPS) 300 lines (B/W) TBC PG(Post IPS)- 300 lines (4C) TBC horizontal stripe YMCK (Post IPS) 300 lines (4C) TBC vertical stripe YMCK(Post IPS) - 300 lines (4C) Edit Bypass (Post IPS) 200R - 4C Solid M - 300 lines PG Solid YC - 300 lines PG Solid K 300 lines PG Solid YMCK - 300 lines PG Horizontal stripe - Solid YMCK - 300 lines PG Vertical stripes - Solid YMCK - 300 lines PG Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (4C). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing)
Current shading correction PreIPS (Image Processing) data is output. (PC with dark center) Each Y.M.C.K developer: PreIPS horizontal stripe PG PreIPS (Image Processing) PreIPS (Image Processing) PreIPS (Image Processing) PreIPS (Image Processing) PreIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing)
15
34
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SID slant lines - 600 lines Each Y.M.C.K developer: (4C) PreIPS slant lines PG SID grid: YMCK repeated Each Y.M.C.K developer: - 600 lines(4C) PreIPS grid PG First phase TRE PG1 300 lines (3C) First phase TRE PG2 300 lines (3C) MEM SYS PG1 (MEM SYS) - 300 lines (3C) MEM SYS PG2 (MEM SYS) - 300 lines (3C) CST horizontal stripe YMCK (Post IPS) - 300 lines (4C) Half tone (AAH) PG Half tone (55H) PG Solid RGB AAH - 300 lines PG
35
36
Edit Bypass (Post IPS) 200R - 3C
Set the test chart on the PostIPS (Image Processplaten and output the PG. ing) NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG.
Solid RGB 55H: 300 lines PostIPS (Image Processing) PG Each Y.M.C.K developer: PostIPS horizontal stripe PG. (Pattern: Same as number 15) PostIPS (Image Processing)
37
Edit Bypass (Post IPS) 200R - B/W
Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (B/W). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG.
PostIPS (Image Processing)
23 24 25 26
CST vertical stripe YMCK Each Y.M.C.K developer: PostIPS (Image Process(Post IPS) - 300 lines (4C) PostIPS vertical stripe PG ing) 64 gray-scale patch (Post 64 gray-scale patch PG IPS) - 200R lines (4C) YMCK overlaid grid - 600 lines-CST (4C) 4C grid PG PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) 38 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) 200R - Y
Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (Yellow). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG.
PostIPS (Image Processing)
Slant lines - 600 lines-CST Each Y.M.C.K developer: (4C) PostIPS horizontal stripe PG (Pattern: Same as number 16) Grid YMCK repeated - 600 4C grid repeated PG lines-CST (4C)
27
PostIPS (Image Processing) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
General Procedures
1/05 6-120
Table 1 Test Patterns Pattern Number 39 Pattern Name Edit Bypass (Post IPS) 200R - M Description Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (Magenta). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 40 Edit Bypass(Post IPS) 200R - C Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (Cyan). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 41 Edit Bypass(Post IPS) 200R - R Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (Red). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 42 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) 200R - G Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (Green). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 43 Edit Bypass (Post IPS) 200R - B Output a normal copy (bypassed the Editor) in 200R (Blue). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 44 Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - 4C Output a normal copy in 200R (4C). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 45 Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - 3C Output a normal copy in 200R (3C). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. PostIPS (Image Processing) 53 PostIPS (Image Processing) 52 PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) 50 PostIPS (Image Processing) 49 PostIPS (Image Processing) Remarks PostIPS (Image Processing) Pattern Number 46 Pattern Name
Table 1 Test Patterns Description Output a normal copy in 200R (B/W). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 47 Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - Y Output a normal copy in 200R (Yellow). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 48 Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - M Output a normal copy in 200R (Magenta). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - C Output a normal copy in 200R (Cyan). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - R Output a normal copy in 200R (Red). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. 51 Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - G Output a normal copy in 200R (Green). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - B Output a normal copy in 200R (Blue). NOTE: Set the test chart on the platen and output the PG. ALL IPS PG(ANASimplified output - PWB PostIPS (Image ProcessLOG+PRE+MEM+POST) PG (Analog, CMM and ing) PostIPS) in one sheet output Color patch: 1st page The upper color patch for the Editor Pad is output. PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) PostIPS (Image Processing) Remarks PostIPS (Image Processing)
Normal copy (Post IPS)200R - B/W
54
1/05 6-121
General Procedures
Table 1 Test Patterns Pattern Number 55 56 82 84 Pattern Name Color patch: 2nd page Color patch: 3rd page Description Remarks
dC701 Fuser Nip Measurement

Purpose
Makes a copy for the Contact Arc Adjustment and measures the Fuser Nip Width with a simple operation. NOTE: For details, see Adjustments Section 4:ADJ 8.1.1 Fuser Nip Adjustment (dC701).
The middle color patch for PostIPS (Image Processing) the Editor Pad is output. The bottom color patch for PostIPS (Image Processthe Editor Pad is output. ing) IOT (Image output)
Grid (Measurement) - 600 20mm pitch/2dotline grid Paper size: A3 or 17 Grid (Registration) - 600
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen. Select Other Adjustments on the Adjustments Screen. Other Adjustments Screen is displayed. Select Fuser Nip Adjustments (dC701). Fuser Nip Adjustment Screen is displayed. Check that A4 LEF or Letter LEF paper has been loaded into Tray 5. Select Nip Adjustment Black Copy and press Start. The message execute is displayed. a. b. Make a copy for measuring the nip width by using A4 LEF or Letter LEF. A error message screen will be displayed if there is no paper tray loaded with A4 LEF or Letter LEF.
Scale/2dotline grid IOT (Image Processing) Paper size: A3A4L/A4S/ B4S/B5L/B5S/LetterL/LetterS 45 degree grid/2dotline Paper size: A3 or 17 Cross mark/4dotline Paper size: A3 or 17 Color registration visual check pattern Paper size: 17 or A3 Any density pattern (Variable Cin% can be set). Paper size: A3 or 17 Any density pattern (Variable Cin% can be set). Paper size: A3 or 17 Any density pattern (Variable Cin% can be set). Paper size: A3 or 17 SS direction: 16 grayscale Paper size: A3 or 17 ProCon patch pattern/ 16.3x19.3 mm patch Paper size: A3 or 17 TED/STV Paper size: A4L SS direction pattern/1 gray-scale Paper size: A3 or 17 IOT (Image Processing) IOT (Image Processing) IOT (Image Processing)
85 88 89
Grid (45 degree) - 600 Color registration (Measurement) - 600 Color registration (Visual observation) - 600 Half tone - 4C
97
IOT (Image Processing)
8.
The message Completed is displayed when the Nip Adjustment Black Copy is completed successfully. a. When the Nip Adjustment Black Copy is not completed successfully, the message Not completed successfully will be displayed.
98
Halftone - 3C
IOT (Image Processing) 9. IOT (Image Processing)
Select Nip Adjustment Sequence.
99
Other Halftones
10. The message Executing in Progress is displayed at the same time the Nip Width Measurement begins. 11. The message Completed is displayed when the Nip Adjustment Sequence is completed successfully. The message Not completed successfully will be displayed when the Nip Adjustment Sequence is not completed successfully. 12. Measure the nip width of the output paper for Nip Adjustment Sequence.
100
16 grasslike SS
101
ProCon
102 103
TED/STV - 600 Wedge SS - 600
IOT (Image Processing) IOT (Image Processing)
General Procedures
dC612 Color Test Pattern Print, dC701 Fuser Nip Mea-
1/05 6-122
dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment

Purpose
Checks whether the Tray 5 guide size (width) has been properly detected. NOTE: For details on adjustment, see ADJ 9.1.17 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment (dC740).
dC915 Machine Output

Purpose
Displays Xerographic information on the Main Processor in an easily seen and understandable format on the PWS. 1. 2. XERO Related Data Display: Displays all the NVM data related to the Copy Quality as a set. Displays the machine NVM data on the PWS UI.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments in the Service Entry Screen. Select Other Adjustments in the Adjustments screen. In the Other Adjustments Screen, select and execute the Tray 5 Guide Adjustment (dC740). Run the guide detection. a. Set at the minimum position. i. ii. iii. iv. b. i. ii. iii. iv. c. i. ii. iii. Set the Tray 5 Guide at the minimum position. In the Tray 5 Guide Adjustment Selection Screen, select Minimum Position and press Start. If the sensor output is within the range, the system displays OK. If the sensor output is out of the range, the system displays NG. Set the guide at the maximum position. In the Tray 5 Guide Adjustment Selection Screen, select Maximum Position and press Start. If the sensor output is within the range, the system displays OK. If the sensor output is out of the range, the system displays NG. Set the guide at the position. Select and run the Guide Test in the Tray 5 Guide Adjustment Selection Screen. The system displays the detected paper size group in the "Results" (Tray 5 Guide Adjustment Selections).
Procedure
Displaying the dC915 XERO Data 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen. Select Machine Output on the Adjustments Screen. Machine Data Output Screen is displayed. Select PWS Display for the Output Medium. Select Start. XERO Related Data Display Screen is displayed. Refer to XERO Related Chain Link Number List for the Output Items by the XERO Related Data Display and the details of XERO Related NVM Data.
Set at the maximum position.
XERO Related Chain Link Number List Table 1 Xero-related NVM ID (dec) NVM Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 773-028 773-021 775-010 775-011 773-022 773-027 773-099 773-016 773-017 773-018 773-019 773-011 775-002 775-003 775-004 775-005 775-001 773-012 773-013 773-014 Item ADC Vpatch Fault flag ADC Vclean Fault flag Gray-scale ADC Vpatch Fault flag Gray-scale ADC V clean Fault flag VH/VM Fault flag LD CONT Fault flag HUM Fault flag ADC V patch Fault counter: Y ADC V patch Fault counter: M ADC V patch Fault counter: C ADC V patch Fault counter: K ADC V clean Fault counter Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: Y Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: M Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: C Gray-scale ADC V patch Fault counter: K Gray-scale ADC V clean Fault counter VH/VM Fault counter LD CONT Fault counter HUM Fault counter Max. (dec) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535
Guide test
1/05 6-123
General Procedures
dC740 Tray 5 Guide Adjustment, dC915 Machine
Table 1 Xero-related NVM ID (dec) NVM Number 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 773-357 773-356 773-342 773-343 773-344 773-345 773-281 773-282 773-283 773-284 775-036 775-037 775-038 775-039 773-606 773-607 773-608 773-609 775-085 775-086 775-087 775-088 775-081 775-082 775-083 775-084 773-251 773-252 773-256 773-257 773-231 773-114 773-115 773-121 773-276 Item Number of drum cycles: Sign (0: Positive/10: Negative) Number of drum cycles (Unit: 100cycle decrementing count) Number of developer cycles: Y (Unit: Mot. ON 0.1 hour) Max. (dec) 1 65535 65535 ID (dec) NVM Number 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 65535 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1/05 6-124 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 70 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 773-277 773-396 773-278 773-388 773-394 773-397 773-431 773-401 773-421 773-406 773-451 773-452 773-453 773-454 773-461 773-462 773-463 773-464 775-741 775-742 775-746 775-743 775-744 775-745 775-750 775-747 775-748 775-749 775-751 775-752 775-756 775-753 775-754 775-755 775-761 775-762 775-763 775-764 775-765 775-766 775-784
Table 1 Xero-related NVM Item VM target Vadc target V hi-light control target VH measurement VM measurement Vadc measurement V hi-light control measurement VG setup LD setup Vbias setup Hi-light setup: Y(300) Hi-light setup: M(300) Hi-light setup: C(300) Hi-light setup: K(300) Hi-light setup: Y(600) Hi-light setup: M(600) Hi-light setup: C(600) Hi-light setup: K(600) TC Offset Out ID TC Ref OUT id TC Ref OPEN OUT id TC OUT id - Y TC OUT id - M TC OUT id - C TC SET ALL id TC SET OUT id - Y TC SET OUT id - M TC SET OUT id - C TC OFFSET OUT Fail TC Ref OUT Fail TC Ref OPEN OUT Fail TC OUT Fail - Y TC OUT Fail - M TC OUT Fail - C TC OFFSET OUT TC Ref OUT TC Ref TC OUT Adj - Y TC OUT Adj - M TC OUT Adj - C TC SET - Y Max. (dec) 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 255 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 65535 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Number of developer cycles: M (Unit: Mot. ON 65535 0.1 hour) Number of developer cycles: C (Unit: Mot. ON 0.1 hour) Number of developer cycles: K (Unit: Mot. ON 0.1 hour) Number of transfer belt cycles (Unit: TBD) ADC target/gray-scale target1: Y ADC target/gray-scale target1: M ADC target/gray-scale target1: C ADC target/gray-scale target1: K ADC gray-scale target2: Y ADC gray-scale target2: M ADC gray-scale target2: C ADC gray-scale target2: K ADC measurement: Y ADC measurement: M ADC measurement: C ADC measurement: K ADC gray-scale measurement1: Y ADC gray-scale measurement1: M ADC gray-scale measurement1: C ADC gray-scale measurement1: K ADC gray-scale measurement2: Y ADC gray-scale measurement2: M ADC gray-scale measurement2: C ADC gray-scale measurement2: K ADC Vclean1_QA ADC Vclean1_QB ADC Vclean2_QA ADC Vclean2_QB ADC Gain Humidity raw data (%) Temperature raw data (degree (C)) Set-up humidity (%) VH target 65535 65535
General Procedures
dC915 Machine Output
Table 1 Xero-related NVM ID (dec) NVM Number 98 99 775-785 775-786 Item TC SET - M TC SET - C Max. (dec) 65535 65535
dC918 IOT Highlight Setup

Purpose
Sets the same Hi-Light density reproduction start points (for K, Y, M and C) and sets the same Hi-Light densities for In-Board and Out-Board. Sets the ESV/ADC control target values.
NOTE: For details on dC918 IOT Highlight Setup, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.5 IOT Highlight Setup (dC918).
1/05 6-125
General Procedures
dC915 Machine Output , dC918 IOT Highlight Setup
dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only)

Purpose
Takes a 4C copy in the Photo Mode and visually checks the Color Balance and then sets the KYMC Color Balance NVM. NOTE: 1. 2. Run this function only when requested by the customer for a Color Adjustment after the Automatic Gray-Scale Correction has been performed (Tool mode). Before running this function the dC918 High Light Setup must have been performed properly.
dC920 Developer Unit Check

Purpose
Rotates the Rotary Developer and sets it at the desired position.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Diagnostics on the Service Entry Screen. Select System Test in the Fault Diagnostics Screen. Select Developer Unit Check (dc920). Select the Developer Unit to move. Select Start. After checking, move the Developer Unit to the Home Position.
NOTE: For details on dC919 Color Balance Setup, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.8 Color Balance Setup (dC919).
General Procedures
dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine
1/05 6-126
dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment

Purpose
Measures the Gray-Scale Patch with the ADC Sensor and creates the TRC Correction LUT in the IOT. If the result is not within the range, the system displays the Tone up/down result. Displays the density of the 2 patches for each color on the IBT Belt. NOTE: For details on dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.6 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment (dC922).
dC923 PROCON PG
Purpose
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Outputs the PRCON PG (ProCon pattern), measures the ADC Patch density by the ADC Sensor and displays the result on the PWS Screen. The PRCON PG should be used only for individual Adjust/Recover. Enter the Service Diagnostics Mode. Refer to Entering the Service Diagnostic Mode using the PWS. Select Adjustments on the Service Entry Screen. Select the MAX Setup (dC929) Tab. Select ProCon PG (dC923) in the Max Setup (dC929) Screen. Select a Tray from the Tray Drop Down List (paper: 11x17/A3 or 8.5x11/A4L) and click Start. 6. The ProCon PG is printed. (normal paper, full color, 300-lines, LUT off) The system generates an ADC Patch for each color and updates the NVM value after measuring the density. The system checks the RADC Patch.
Procedure
If OK, click Close to return to the Max Setup Screen. NOTE: It is not necessary to run this routine to perform Max Setup. This routine can be used as a quick check of the ADC Patch status.
1/05 6-127
General Procedures
dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment,
dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG

NOTE: NOT TO BE USED AT THIS TIME.
dC929 Max Setup

Purpose
The system displays the following Setup functions which you can use to set the image quality. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. dC945 IIT Calibration (See dC945 IIT Calibration) (IIT installed machine only) dC934 ADC/AGC Setup (See dC934 ADC/AGC Setup) dC933 VH/VM Setup (See dC933 VH/VM Setup) dC918 IOT Highlight Setup (See dC918 IOT Highlight Setup) dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment (See dC922 TRC Control/Toner Density Adjustment) dC924 TRC Adjustment/939TRC Check (See dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG) dC919 Color Balance Setup (See dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only)) (IIT installed machine only) dC923 PROCON PG (See dC923 PROCON PG).
Purpose
To manually fine adjust the low/medium/high densities (TRC) for each color. NOTE: Although it appears that the densities can be adjusted independently for different screen types, this is not the case. An adjustment for one screen type will affect all of the screens (300, 150C, 200R, and 600). Also, there is quite a bit of overlap among the low, medium, and high densities. For these reasons, it is recommended that dC924/939 not be used.
NOTE: For the execution sequence of the Max Setup Functions, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup (dC929). NOTE: If a 3-510 fault occurs while performing Max Setup, ensure that Automatic Tray switching for Trays 1 - 4 is enabled in Customer Tools
General Procedures
dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG, dC929 Max
1/05 6-128
dC933 VH/VM Setup

Purpose
Sets the VG, LD light amount, Development Bias and ASG Bias output value by determining: The VG value wherein the Drum surface potential becomes the target VH in two different VGs. The LD light that is the target VM in three different LD light amounts. The ASG Bias to correct the high light unit.
dC934 ADC/AGC Setup

Purpose
Automatically adjusts the ADC Sensor Gain. Adjusts the ADC Sensor Gain and automatically sets the gain so that the Vclean within the range is obtained. At the same time, measures the Vclean irregularity (Vclean P-P) for one belt circumference.
NOTE: For details on dC933 VH/VM Setup, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.4 VH/VM Setup (dC933).
NOTE: For details on dC934 ADC/AGC Setup, see Adjustment Section 4: ADJ 9.1.3 ADC/ AGC Setup (dC934).
1/05 6-129
General Procedures
dC933 VH/VM Setup, dC934 ADC/AGC Setup
dC945 IIT Calibration

Purpose
Functional details: Computes and sets the White Reference Correction Coefficient. Corrects the IIT Sensitivity Dispersion.
NOTE: For details on dC945 IIT Calibration, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945).
General Procedures
dC945 IIT Calibration
1/05 6-130
How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics Mode

Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Power ON the machine. While holding down the 0" Button, press Start. A screen will display, asking you to Enter your Access Number. Using the Keypad, Enter 6789. Press Confirm when finished. If you make a mistake, press C". The Customer Support Engineer Tools screen will display. Select one of the following options on the screen: 6. NVM Initialize NVM Read/Write Component Control Print Subsystem Check Max Setup
UI (IOT) Diagnostic Modes

The UI (IOT) Diagnostic supports the following modes. These selections are displayed on the UI Customer Support Engineer Tools Screen. NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnostics) NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics) Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics) Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics) Subsystem Check 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. Fuser Nip Measurement (dC701 UI Diagnostics) Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics) ADC/AGC Setup (dC934 UI Diagnostics) VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics) IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics) TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment (dC922 UI Diagnostics) a. b. c. 5. 6. TRC Control Toner Concentration Adjustment TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics)
Max Setup (UI Diagnostics)
To exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics Mode, select Done.
Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only) IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only) a. b. White Reference Adjustment CCD Calibration
1/05 6-131
General Procedures
How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics, UI (IOT)
NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Initializes NVM for each subsystem and Initializes NVM for the entire system. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. No dust-off function.
NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Accesses NVM Read/Write Data by specifying the Chain-Link Number. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. No module specification. All direct code specification.
Procedure
1. To perform NVM Reset or NVM Initialization, refer to dC301 NVM Initialization.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. In the Diagnostics Setup Screen, select NVM Read/Write. See the dC131 Code List and enter the Chain-Link Number. Selecting the Enter Number Button allows you to enter the number from the Ten-key Pad. for the Read/Write dC131 NVM List. CAUTION Enter a correct number. (Make sure you have entered a correct number before you execute the function. If you enter an invalid number, a secondary problem will occur.) 4. 5. 6. Select the Start Button. The Screen shows the current NVM Value. Enter a new value from the ten-key pad. Select Start. After the operation, return to the Diagnostics Setup Screen by selecting Close on the UI Screen.
General Procedures
NVM Reset / NVM Initialization (dC301 UI Diagnos-
1/05 6-132
Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Checks the Input/Output of each component by specifying the Chain-Link Number. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics: 1. 2. UI Diag.: No module specification. All direct code specification. Counter: a. Input/Output display - Input: The count is increased every time the High/Low Level changes. The maximum count is 256. After reaching the maximum count, the counter starts from 0. 12 (Same as PWS). If the number exceeds 12, the oldest code is stopped. A warning message is displayed on the UI when the following occurs: Number of simultaneous executions exceeded 12 and you pressed Start. You stopped a code that is not being executed or displayed the status. You specified a cycle for the code that cannot be cycled. The combination of a code that has already been executed and the new code is illegal. You specified an undefined code. You stopped the code from being executed.
Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Provides a Print Pattern for Setup and Diagnostics, performing a faster and more efficient service. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics: UI Diag. restrictions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Paper type cannot be specified (Normal paper - Fixed) Tray cannot be specified (Normal paper - Fixed) Duplex cannot be specified (Normal paper - Fixed) Half-tone Cin%=20% fixed You cannot select a pattern with the Color Test Pattern. You must enter a number from the Code Table.
3. 4.
Number of simultaneous executions: a. a. Other message:
Procedure
1. 2. 3. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Print in the Diagnostics Setup Screen. Select a Test Pattern to output in the Test Pattern Print List and set the following on the screen: a. b. c. 4. 5. Category: IOT (Image output) or IPS (Image process) Pattern No: 1-30(IOT), 1-56(IPS) Mode: 4C, 3C, K, Y, M, C, R, G, B
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Component Control in the Diagnostics Setup Screen. Select the Input Number Button on the UI Screen. See the dC330 Code List (Input), (Output), and enter an appropriate Chain-Link No. NOTE: Selecting the Input Number Button allows you to enter a number from the tenkey pad. CAUTION Enter a correct number. (Make sure you have entered a correct number before you execute the function. If you enter an invalid number, a secondary problem will occur.) 5. 6. 7. Select the Start Button. The Status Screen shows Low/High (Input) or ON/Off (Output). To stop the operation, select the Stop Button. After the operation, all Input/Output tasks being executed will stop.The system returns to the Diagnostics Setup Screen.
Select the Start Button. After the operation completes, select Close and return to the Diagnostics Setup Screen.
Test Pattern Print List (UI Diagnostic Mode)

Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) PG NO 1 ASIC name ANALOG Pattern name IIT Analog Gradation Ch1 - 6-RGB, 300 lines (3C) IIT Analog Gradation Ch1,2-R, 300 lines (K) IIT Analog Gradation Ch3,4-G, 300 lines (K) Description Remarks 3C gradation PG PreIPS (Image process) Reading all CCD RGB Odd/Even data. 3C gradation PG PreIPS (Image proReading all CCD cess) RGB Odd/Even data. K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image process) - Reading CCD G Odd/Even data.
ANALOG
ANALOG
ANALOG
IIT Analog Gradation K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image process) Ch5,6-B, 300 lines (K) - Reading CCD B Odd/Even data. IIT Analog Gradation Ch1-R, 300 lines (K) IIT Analog Gradation Ch2-R, 300 lines (K) K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- Reading CCD R cess) Odd data. K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- Reading CCD R cess) Even data. General Procedures
ANALOG
ANALOG
1/05 6-133
Component Control (dC330 UI Diagnostics), Print
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) PG NO 7 ASIC name ANALOG Pattern name IIT Analog Gradation Ch3-G, 300 lines (K) IIT Analog Gradation Ch4-G, 300 lines (K) IIT Analog Gradation Ch5-B, 300 lines (K) IIT Analog Gradation Ch6-B, 300 lines (K) Description Remarks PG NO 23 ASIC name CST K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image process) - Reading CCD G Odd data. K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image pro- Reading CCD G cess) Even data. K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image process) - Reading CCD B Odd data. K-color gradation PG PreIPS (Image process) - Reading CCD B Even data. 27 CST
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) Pattern name CST vertical stripes: YMCK(POST IPS)300 lines (4C) 64 gray-scale patch (POST IPS)200R lines (4C) YMCK overlaid grid: 600 lines-CST (4C) Slant line: 600 linesCST (4C) Description Remarks PostIPS vertical stripe PostIPS (Image proPG for each Y.M.C.K cess) developer. 64 gray-scale patch PG 4C grid PG PostIPS horizontal stripe PG for each Y.M.C.K developer. (Pattern: Same as No. 16) PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process)
ANALOG
24
CST
ANALOG
25 26
CST CST
10
ANALOG
11 12 13
IIC IIC IIC
IIT DIGITAL FS gra- FS direction gradation PreIPS (Image prodation, 300 lines (3C) PG cess) IIT DIGITAL SS gra- SS gradation PG dation, 300 lines (3C) IIT DIGITAL FS/SS gradation, 300 lines (3C) IIT shading data output, 300 lines (3C) FS/SS gradation PG PreIPS (Image process) PreIPS (Image process) PreIPS (Image process)
Grid: Repeated for 4C grid repeated PG YMCK, 600 lines-CST (4C) MWAH PG300 lines (3C) MAD PG300 lines (4C) TRE PG300 lines (4C) SFM PG (POST IPS)300 lines (B/W) TBC PG (POST IPS)300 lines (4C) Solid L*, a*, b*300 lines PG
PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process)
28 29
MWAH MAD TRE SFM TBC TBC
14
IIC
Outputs the current shading correction data. (PG with dark center). PreIPS horizontal stripe PG for each Y.M.C.K developer PreIPS slant line PG for each Y.M.C.K developer PreIPS grid PG for each Y.M.C.K developer Half-tone (AAH)PG Half-tone (55H)PG
Solid M 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image process) Solid YC 300 lines PG Solid K 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process)
30 31
15
SID
SID horizontal stripes: YMCK, 300 lines (4C) SID slant lines, 600 lines (4C) SID grid: Repeated for YMCK, 600 lines (4C) 1st phase TRE PG1, 300 lines (3C) 1st phase TRE PG2, 300 lines (3C)
PreIPS (Image process) PreIPS (Image process) PreIPS (Image process) PreIPS (Image process) PreIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process)
32 33
Solid YMCK 300 lines PostIPS (Image process) PG
16
SID
TBC horizontal Horizontal stripe PostIPS (Image prostripes: YMCK (POST solid: YMCK 300 lines cess) IPS) 300 lines (4C) PG TBC vertical stripes: YMCK(POST IPS)300 lines (4C) Vertical stripes Solid: YMCK 300 lines PG PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process)
17
SID
34
TBC
18 19 20 21 22
TRE TRE CMM CMM CST
35
TBC
MEM SYS PG1(MEM Solid RGB AAH 300 SYS)300 lines (3C) lines PG MEM SYS PG2(MEM Solid RGB 55H 300 SYS)300 lines (3C) lines PG CST horizontal PostIPS horizontal stripes: YMCK(POST stripe PG for each IPS)300 lines (4C) Y.M.C.K developer. (Pattern: Same as No. 15)
EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal IPS), 200R, 4C copy (bypassing the Editor): 200R (4C) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal IPS), 200R, 3C copy (bypassing the Editor): 200R (3C) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG.
36
TBC
PostIPS (Image process)
General Procedures
1/05 6-134
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) PG NO 37 ASIC name TBC Pattern name Description Remarks PostIPS (Image process) PG NO 44 ASIC name TBC EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal IPS), 200R, B/W copy (bypassing the Editor): 200R (B/W) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG.
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) Pattern name Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, 4C Description Output a normal copy: 200R (4C) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (3C) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (B/W) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (Yellow) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (Magenta) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (Cyan) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (Red) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (Green) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Output a normal copy: 200R (Blue) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. Remarks PostIPS (Image process)
45
TBC
38
TBC
EDIT BYPASS(POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image proIPS), 200R, Y copy (bypassing the cess) Editor): 200R (Yellow) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal IPS), 200R, M copy (bypassing the Editor): 200R (Magenta) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal IPS), 200R, C copy (bypassing the Editor): 200R (Cyan) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal IPS), 200R, R copy (bypassing the Editor): 200R (Red) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. PostIPS (Image process)
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, 3C
46
TBC
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, B/W
39
TBC
47
TBC
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, Y
40
TBC
48
TBC
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, M
41
TBC
49
TBC
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, C
42
TBC
EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal PostIPS (Image proIPS), 200R, G copy (bypassing the cess) Editor): 200R (Green) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. EDIT BYPASS (POST Outputs a normal IPS), 200R, B copy (bypassing the Editor): 200R (Blue) Note: Place the test chart on the platen and output the PG. PostIPS (Image process)
50
TBC
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, R
43
TBC
51
TBC
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, G
52
TBC
Normal copy (POST IPS), 200R, B
1/05 6-135
General Procedures
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) PG NO 53 ASIC name TBC Pattern name Description Remarks PG NO 12 ASIC name HALFTONE ALL IPS PG(ANAIntegrated the PWB PostIPS (Image proLOG+PRE+MEM+PO PGs of Analog, CMM cess) ST) and PostIPS into one simplified output. Color patch: 1st page Outputs the top color PostIPS (Image process) patch for the Editor Pad. Color patch: 2nd page Outputs the middle color patch for the Editor Pad. PostIPS (Image process) PostIPS (Image process) 16 17 HALFTONE HALFTONE 14 15 HALFTONE HALFTONE
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) Pattern name Description Remarks 16 gray-scale SS, 300 16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output) THE SS DIRECTION Paper size: A3 ProCon, 300 ProCon patch pattern/16.3 X 19.3mm patch Paper size: A3 TED/STV Paper size: A4 IOT (Image output)
13
HALFTONE
54
TBC
55
TBC
TED/STV, 300 Wedge SS, 300
IOT (Image output)
56
TBC
Color patch: 3rd page Outputs the lower color patch for the Editor Pad. Grid (Measurement), 600 Grid (Registration), 600
SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output) gray-scale width: 12dots Paper size: A3 Any density pattern IOT (Image output) Paper size: A3 or 17 16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output) THE SS DIRECTION Paper size: A3 ProCon patch pattern/16.3 X 19.3mm patch Paper size: A3S TED/STV Paper size: A4L IOT (Image output)
HALFTONE
20mm pitch/2dotline IOT (Image output) grid Paper size: A3 or 17 Scale/2dotline grid Paper size:A3A4L/ A4S/B4S/B5L/B5S/ LetterL/LetterS IOT (Image output)
Half-tone, 200R 16 gray-scale SS, 200R ProCon, 200R
HALFTONE
18
HALFTONE
HALFTONE
Grid 45 degree, 600
45 degree grid/ IOT (Image output) 2dotline Paper size: A3 or 17 Cross mark/4dotline IOT (Image output) Paper size: A3 or 17 Color registration IOT (Image output) visual check pattern Paper size: A3 or 17 Any density pattern IOT (Image output) Paper size: A3 or 17 IOT (Image output)
19 20
HALFTONE HALFTONE
TED/STV, 200R Wedge SS, 200R
IOT (Image output)
4 5
HALFTONE HALFTONE
Color registration (Measurement), 600 Color registration (Visual check), 600 Half-tone, 600
SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output) gray-scale width: 12dots Paper size: A3S Any density pattern Paper size: A3S or 17S IOT (Image output)
6 7
HALFTONE HALFTONE
21
HALFTONE
Half-tone, 200C
16 gray-scale SS, 600 16 gray-scales in the SS direction Paper size: A3 ProCon, 600 ProCon patch pattern/16.3 X 19.3mm patch Paper size: A3 TED/STV Paper size: A4L
22 IOT (Image output) 23
HALFTONE
16 gray-scale SS, 200C ProCon, 200C
HALFTONE
16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output) THE SS DIRECTION Paper size: A3S ProCon patch pattern/16.3 X 19.3mm patch Paper size: A3S TED/STV Paper size: A4L IOT (Image output)
HALFTONE
9 10
HALFTONE HALFTONE
TED/STV, 600 Wedge SS, 600
IOT (Image output) 24 25 HALFTONE HALFTONE TED/STV, 200C Wedge SS, 200C
IOT (Image output)
SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output) gray-scale width: 12dots Paper size: A3 Any density pattern IOT (Image output) Paper size: A3 or 17
11
HALFTONE
Half-tone, 300
SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output) gray-scale width: 12dots Paper size: A3S
General Procedures
1/05 6-136
Table 1 Test Patterns (UI Diagnostic Mode) PG NO 26 ASIC name HALFTONE Pattern name Half-tone, 150C Description Any density pattern Paper size: A3S or 17S Remarks IOT (Image output)
Fuser Nip Measurement (dC701 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Creates a special copy and measures the Fuser Nip pressure. NOTE: The External Heat Roll is not latched while this function is running. Measurement must be done after the P/R is warm. If the P/R is not warm, copy 40 or 50 pages first.
27
HALFTONE
16 gray-scale SS, 150C ProCon, 150C
16 GRAY-SCALES IN IOT (Image output) THE SS DIRECTION Paper size: A3S ProCon patch pattern/16.3 X 19.3mm patch Paper size: A3S TED/STV Paper size: A4L IOT (Image output)
28
HALFTONE
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics: UI Diag.: 1. Measurement copy is limited only to 1 page. dC701 Jam: Close first and re-run the function. XE: A4L NASG: Letter, 8.5x11 LEF
29 30
HALFTONE HALFTONE
TED/STV, 150C Wedge SS, 150C
IOT (Image output)
2.
SS direction pattern/1 IOT (Image output) gray-scale width: 12dots Paper size: A3S
NOTE: Paper used varies depending on the market.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Subsystem Check in the Diagnostics Setup Screen. Select Fuser Nip Measurement in the Subsystem Screen. Select the following instructions on the screen: a. b. 5. a. Set the A4L (8.5 X 11 LEF) in the Tray 5 and select Start. Set the measurement copy in the Tray 5 and select Start. Normal value i. ii. 6. 7. In: 10.3 0.3mm Out: 10.3 0.3mm
Measure the In/Out Nip Width on the measurement copy. (Use the scale.)
If the measurement value differs, adjust the value. See ADJ 8.1.1 Adjusting the Fuser Nip Pressure. Repeat Steps 4-5. If the correct value is obtained, select Close and return to the Diagnostics Setup Screen.
1/05 6-137
General Procedures
Print (dC612 Test Pattern UI Diagnostics), Fuser
Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Specifies the K/Y/M/C Home Positions and rotates the Rotary Developer to the Home Position. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. 2. You cannot select and execute the function. When the developer moves to the Home Position correctly, the system turns on the Yellow Indicator and then, at every Start, the developer moves to the Magenta, Cyan and Black Home Positions. If you select the End Button, the developer automatically moves back to the Home Position. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Subsystem Check in the Diagnostics Setup Screen. Select Developer Unit Check in the Subsystem Check Screen. The indicator arrow is located at the HomePosition. NOTE: The Rotary Developer Unit moves to the Home Position. 4. 5. 6. Select the Start Button. Every time you select the Start Button, the Developer Unit moves as follows: YellowN MagentaN CyanN BlackN Home When the Developer Unit Check ends, select Close. The system returns to the Diagnostics Setup Screen.
Max Setup (UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
The Max Set Up in the UI Diagnostics does not have all the functions of the PWS Diagnostics. If you need to adjust the following, do so using the PWS Diagnostics: NOTE: For the execution sequence of the Max Setup Functions, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.1 Max Setup (dC929). 1. The following describes the Max Setup flow. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. dC945 IIT Calibration (IIT installed machine only) dC918 IOT Highlight Setup dC922 TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment dC924 TRC Adjustment dC939 TRC Check PG dC934 ADC/AGC Setup dC933 VH/VM Setup dC919 Color Balance Setup (IIT installed machine only) dC945 IIT Calibration dC934 ADC/AGC Setup dC933 VH/VM Setup dC918 IOT Highlight Setup dC922 TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment dC924 TRC Adjust dC919 Color Balance Setup
Procedure
1. 2. 3.
Functions that the UI Diag. supports:
NOTE: Execute 2f and 2g above only if a fault has occurred after the setup. 3. Functions that the UI Diag. does not support: a. b. dC939 TRC Check PG dC923 ProCon PG
General Procedures
Developer Unit Check (dC920 UI Diagnostics), Max
1/05 6-138
IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only)

Purpose
Sets the Correction Coefficient that corrects the dispersion of the B-CCD Sensor Color Sensitivity caused by dispersion in the Blue Filter's Spectral Distribution. Calculates the IIT Correction Coefficient and IPS Correction Coefficient. Sets the IIT Density Target Value for Automatic Gray-Scale Correction.
ADC/AGC Setup (dC934 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Automatically adjusts and sets the ADC Sensor Gain so that the Vclean within the range is obtained. At the same time, the Vclean Irregularity (Vclean RD) for the belt circumference is measured. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. No Target Value displays. NOTE: This section only describes the ADC/AGC Setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details on PWS-Diagnostics, see Adjustment Section 4: ADJ 9.1.3 ADC/AGC Setup (dC934).
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. The White Reference function in the PWS-Diagnostics is not provided in the UI-Diagnostics.
NOTE: This section only describes the calibration in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see Adjustments Section 4: ADJ 9.1.2 IIT Calibration (dC945).
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Max SetupADC/AGC Setup. Select Start. The system displays the Set Value on the UI. Select Close and return to the Max Setup Screen.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Max Setup IIT Calibration. Place the Color Test Pattern on the Platen Glass. Select Start. The system displays the Coefficient and the results display on the UI.
1/05 6-139
General Procedures
IIT Calibration (dC945 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed
VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Sets the VG/LD Light Amount, Development Bias and the ASG Bias Output. From any 2 VGs, set the VG Value so that the Drum Surface Potential becomes the Target VH. From any 3 Light Amounts, set the LD Light Amount that is the Target VM.
IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Sets the Hi-Light Density Reproduction Start Points for K/Y/M/C and Uniform Hi-Light Density for In-board/Out-board. Visually check the PG Copy, adjust the "IOT Reproduction Start Points for K/Y/M/C Colors (300/600) using the ASG Bias. Adjust the IOT IN/OUT Density Difference for K/Y/M/C colors (common to 300 and 600 lines) using the ASG Bias (EOS side). Measure the ASG Bias and Highlight Potential after In/Out Adjustment, and set the Target Control Value.
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. No Target Value displays. NOTE: This section only describes the Setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details on PWS-Diagnostics, see dC933 VH/VM Setup.
NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. 2. No Target Value displays Tray 2 fixed
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Max SetupVH/VM Setup. Select Start. The system displays the results on the UI. Select Close and return to the Max Setup Screen.
NOTE: This section only describes the Setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see dC918 IOT Highlight Setup.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select Max SetupIOT Highlight Setup. Check and adjust the In/Out Density Difference. NOTE: If the paper is A3 or A4L, select 300. a. b. Select PG Print 300/600. Select Start. The system prints the checking PG. Visually check the In/Out Density Differences for all 4 colors. If there is NO difference, proceed to Step 4. If there is difference, perform the following steps: Select In/Out on the Screen. Select the Color (Y, M, C, K) to be adjusted. Change the value by using the +/- Button. NOTE: To darken the density for Out, decrease the value. 4. a. b. c. d. 5. Repeat Steps 3-a through 3-b until there is no density difference. Select the PG Print 300 or 600 (A4L). The system prints a 300 or 600 line PG. Visually check the 300 or 600 line PG if Cin 8.6% (for each K, Y, M and C) has been reproduced and Cin 7.1% is NOT reproduced. Select the mode 300 or 600 to adjust. Select a color (Y, M, C, K) to be adjusted. Change the value by using the +/- Button. Check the Highlight as described in 4-b. Repeat Steps 4-a through 4-c until the High Light is satisfactory. Check and adjust the Hi-Light Density Start Point.
Select Close and return to the Max Setup Screen.
General Procedures
VH/VM Setup (dC933 UI Diagnostics), IOT Highlight
1/05 6-140
TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment (dC922 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
The system displays the control function buttons (TRC Control, TRC Adjustment,) for the TRC Setup. NOTE: Functional comparison between the UI Diagnostics and the PWS Diagnostics. UI Diag.: 1. 2. No target value display Tray2 fixed
TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics)

Purpose
Checks the PG Output with the PG Test Print Pattern. Manually fine-adjusts the density (low/ middle/high) for each color. NOTE: This section only describes the Adjustment in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see dC924 TRC Adjust / dC939 TRC Check PG. Preparation Visually check the PG with all OK colors in dC924 TRC Setup. Check the density (low/middle/ high) and perform the following steps as needed:
NOTE: This section only describes the Setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details see dC922 TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select the following: Max SetupTRC Setup/Toner Concentration AdjustmentTRC Adjustment. Select a Color to adjust and the Density (Low, Mid, High). Change the Value with the up/down button. (up: Darker density/down: Lighter density) Perform Step 3 in all modes that need an adjustment. Select Close twice to return to the Max Setup Screen.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select the following: Max SetupTRC Setup/Toner Concentration AdjustmentTRC Control Select the Start Button. The system displays the measurement value and displays the results on the UI. If the evaluation of each color is OK, select Close twice and return to the Max Setup Screen. Select the Toner Density Adjustment. Select an NG Color (Y, M, C, K) in Step 5. Select the Start Button. Run Step 8 in all NG items. Select Close to return to the TRC Setup/Toner Density Adjustment Screen. If there is an NG, repeat Steps 2-10. 11. Select Close twice to return to the Max Setup Screen. 12. Visually check the low/middle/high density of the PG with all OK colors. Adjust the density if needed, refer to; TRC Adjustment (dC924 UI Diagnostics).
10. Select the TRC Control and check if there is no NG.
1/05 6-141
General Procedures
TRC Setup/Toner Concentration Adjustment
Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT installed machine only)

Purpose
To correct the YMCK Color Balance. Take a 4C copy in the Photo Mode. Visually check the copy. Reset the YMCK Color Balance Value.
NOTE: Run this function at the customers request, after the automatic gray-scale is corrected. NOTE: The Hi-Light Setup must be performed before running this function. NOTE: This section only describes the setup in the UI-Diagnostics. For details, see IOT Highlight Setup (dC918 UI Diagnostics).
Procedure
1. 2. 3. Enter the UI Diagnostics Mode. Refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics. Select the following: Max SetupColor Balance Setup. Place Test Pattern (82E10810) on the Platen Glass. Select the Start Button. Take a PG Print in the following mode: a. APS, 100%, Normal paper, LUTON NOTE: If each color has no defects in density, go to Step 4. If there are defects in color density, adjust the color balance for colors with defects using the UI. 4. Select Close to return to the Max Setup Screen.
General Procedures
Color Balance Setup (dC919 UI Diagnostics) (IIT in-
1/05 6-142
General Information
Product Codes
Table 1 Product Codes USA (60Hz) FU2 FU0 GC1 KM6 GF6 FT4 FY8 RV8 MFY GL2 HY6 LY7 HY8 MC4 GC0 VM0 FKP FGT GL1 Canada (60Hz) FU2 FU0 GC1 KM6 GF6 FT4 FY8 RV8 MFY GL2 HY6 LY7 HY8 MC4 GC0 VM0 FKP FGT GL1 Latin Latin America America (110V) (220V) FU2 FU0 GC1 KM6 GF6 FT4 FY8 RV8 MFY GL2 HY6 LY7 HY8 MC4 GC0 VM0 FKP FGT GL1 FU3 FU1 GC1 KM6 GF6 FT4 FY8 RV8 MFY GL2 HY6 LY7 HY8 MC4 GC0 VM0 FKP FGT GL1 Xerox Europe (220V) FU3 FU1 GC1 KM6 GF6 FT4 FY8 RV8 MFY GL2 HY6 LY7 HY8 MC4 GC0 VM0 FKP FGT GL1
Installation Space Requirements

Installation Space Requirements without Accessories
(Figure 1)
Product DocuColor 12 Digital Copier/Printer DocuColor 12 LP Wing (Left/Right) Convenience Stapler Kit Off-Set Catch Tray High Capacity Feeder Sorter/Mailbox Finisher IDFE Cobra L (1 Byte) Cobra Memory Upgrade Kit Cobra Token Ring Kit BNC Transceiver Kit Mobility Kit DocuColor 12 Edit Pad DocuColor 12 Edit Pad w/o DADF Electronic Pre Collation (EPC) Kit EPC Enablement Kit DocuColor 12 Foreign Interface
Figure 1 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories Table 1 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E in. 21 24 23 91.5 95.5 68.5 mm 533 610 585 2324 2426 1740 Movable Space Requirements in. 21 4 23 71.5 75.5 ** 68.5 mm 533 100 585 1816 * 1918 ** 1740
Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present. 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway. 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. * 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway. **90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
1/05 6-143
General Procedures
General Information, Installation Space Require-
Installation Space Requirements with Edit Pad (Right Side)

(Figure 2)
Installation Space Requirements with HCF
Figure 3 Installation Space Requirements with HCF Figure 2 Installation Space Requirements with Edit Pad (Right Side) Table 2 Installation Space Requirements with Edit Pad Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E in. 21 24 55 91.5 95.5 100.5 mm 533 610 1400 2324 2426 2555 Movable Space Requirements in. 21 4 55 71.5 * 75.5 ** 100.5 mm 533 100 1400 1816 * 1918 ** 2555 A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E Dimensions Table 3 Installation Space Requirements with HCF Fixed Space Requirements in. 51 24 23 91.5 95.5 98.5 mm 1300 610 585 2324 2426 2500 Movable Space Requirements in. 51 4 23 71.5 * 75.5 ** 98.5 mm 1300 100 585 1816 * 1918 ** 2500
Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present. 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway. 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. * 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway. ** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Edit Pad (Right Side)
(Figure 4)
General Procedures
1/05 6-144
Figure 4 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Edit Pad (Right Side) Table 4 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Edit Pad Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E in. 51 24 55 91.5 95.5 130.5 mm 1300 610 1400 2324 2426 3315 Movable Space Requirements in. 51 4 55 71.5 * 75.5 ** 130.5 mm 1300 100 1400 1816 * 1918 ** 3315
Figure 5 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Sorter/Mailbox Table 5 Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Sorter/Mailbox Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E in. 51 24 65.5 91.5 95.5 141 mm 1300 610 1665 2324 2426 3580 Movable Space Requirements in. 51 4 65.5 71.5 * 75.5 ** 141 mm 1300 100 1665 1816 * 1918 ** 3580
Installation Space Requirements with HCF and Sorter/Mailbox

(Figure 5)
Installation Space Requirements with HCF, Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad (Left Side)
(Figure 6)
1/05 6-145
General Procedures
Figure 6 Space Requirements with HCF, Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad (Left Side) Table 6 Space Requirements with HCF, Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E in. 86 24 65.5 91.5 95.5 176 mm 2185 610 1665 2324 2426 4470 Movable Space Requirements in. 86 4 65.5 71.5 * 75.5 ** 176 mm 2185 100 1665 1816 * 1918 ** 4470 Dimensions A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E
Figure 7 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox Table 7 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox Fixed Space Requirements in. 21 24 65.5 91.5 95.5 111 mm 533 610 1665 2324 2426 2819 Movable Space Requirements in. 21 4 65.5 71.5 * 75.5 ** 111 mm 533 100 1665 1816 * 1918 ** 2819
Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox

(Figure 7)
Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad (Left Side)
(Figure 8)
General Procedures
1/05 6-146
Figure 8 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad (Left Side) Table 8 Installation Space Requirements with Sorter/Mailbox and Edit Pad Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D w/o IDFE D w/ IDFE E in. 86.5 24 65.5 91.5 95.5 176 mm 2185 610 1665 2324 2426 4470 Movable Space Requirements in. 86 4 65.5 71.5 * 75.5 ** 176 mm 2185 100 1665 1816 * 1918 ** 4470
Figure 9 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories (LP Only) Table 9 Installation Space Requirements without Accessories (LP Only Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D E in. 21 24 23 95.5 68.5 mm 533 610 585 2324 1740 Movable Space Requirements in. 21 4 23 71.5 68.5 mm 533 100 585 1918 1740
Measured from the rear of Integrated Digital Front End. Measured from the rear of processor if IDFE is not present. 106.5 in. (2705mm) if installed in hallway. 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. * 86.5 in. (2200mm) if installed in hallway. ** 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway. 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
Installation Space Requirements with HCF

(Figure 10)
Installation Space Requirements without Accessories

(Figure 9)
1/05 6-147
General Procedures
Electrical Specifications
Input Service Requirements The requirements for input power in each market are shown below: Table 1 Line Requirements Specification Voltage Frequency Phase Service ** C/P LP NASG 115VAC 10% * line - to - neutral 60 Hz Single phase, 2-wire plus earth ground 20 Amps 15 Amps ESG 220-240VAC 10% line - to - neutral 50 Hz Single phase, 2-wire plus earth ground 15 Amps 15 Amps
Figure 10 Installation Space Requirements with HCF Table 10 Installation Space Requirements with HCF Fixed Space Requirements Dimensions A B C D E in. 51 24 23 95.5 98.5 mm 1300 610 585 2426 2500 Movable Space Requirements in. 51 4 23 75.5 98.5 mm 1300 100 585 1918 2500
NOTE: * For Mexico only, the machine must be functional at 10% above the rated voltage input of the power supply. NOTE: ** Dedicated service line is recommended, but not required. System plugs into standard office outlets with a single power cord. Current/ Power Requirements Current and Power specifications for each market are as follows: Table 2 Power Consumption Specification Max Power Consumption C/P LP Avg. Warm-up Current C/P LP Avg. Standby Current C/P LP NASG (@ 115VAC) 2.112 kVA 1.584 kVA (@ 115VAC) 12.5A (1.6 kVA) 11.0A (1.265 kVA) (@ 115VAC) 7.0A (0.8 kVA) 5.3A (0.6 kVA) ESG (@ 220VAC) 2.2 kVA 1.584KVA (@ 240VAC) 8.0A (1.6kVA) 6.3A (1.265 kVA) (@ 240VAC) 3.8A (0.8 kVA) 3.0A (0.6 kVA) (@ 240VAC) 5.7A (1.2 kVA) 4.5A (0.9 kVA) 10 Amps 10 Amps
Measured from the rear of Integrated Digital Front End. 110.5 in. (2807mm) if installed in hallway. 90.5 in. (2300mm) if installed in hallway.
Avg. Run Current (4-color) (@ 115VAC) C/P 10.0A (1.2 kVA) LP Current Rating C/P LP 7.5A (0.9 kVA) 16 Amps 12 Amps
General Procedures
Installation Space Requirements, Product Specifica-
1/05 6-148
Other Electrical Specifications 1. 2. 3. Leakage protection Internal earth leakage breaker VCCI Class 1 compliance Class 3 Electrical Noise Ground
201% through 400%: 1.5%
Copy Speed First copy out time Black/White: 7.9 sec. 8.511 (A4) LEF Full Color: 18 sec. 8.511 (A4) LEF Black/White 10 sec. - 8.511 (A4) LEF Full Color: 22 sec. - 8.511 (A4) LEF 1.8 copies/min.
First copy out time with EPC option - Collated mode
Environmental Specifications
Heat Output Table 3 Model C/P LP Audible Noise Table 4 Audible Noise Continuous Noise Stand by Copy Cycle Ozone Generation Maximum 0.02 ppm 50F (10C) to 95F (35C) 15% TO 85% (Non-condensing) 0-10,000 ft. (3050M) (Above 2,000 meters requires adjustment by a CSE) Maximum level difference - 5mm or less (front to back) Maximum level difference - 10mm or less (right to left) Temperature Relative Humidity Altitude Levelness 48.3 67.1 Impulse Noise (db) 62.2 avg. BTU/hr. (operating) 4080 3755 avg. BTU/hr. (standby) 2720 1230
Tray 5 or Transparency mode Continuous copy in copies/min. Table 5 Copies per Minute Paper Size 1117 (A3) 8.514 (B4) 8.511 (A4) LEF 8.511 (A4) SEF Image Loss Lead Edge: 31mm or the optional setting of 4mm Sides: 31mm Trail Edge: 31mm Copy Mode B/W 25 28.8 50 28.8 4 Color 6.2 6.2 12.5 6.2
Copy Paper Capability Paper Trays Tray 1 16 lb. (64 G/m2) through 24 lb. (90 G/m2) 16 lb. (64 G/m2) through 32 lb. (134 G/m2) 16 lb. (64 G/m2) through 60 lb. (250 G/m2) Tray 2, 3, 4 Tray 5
System Capability
Warm-up Time 100V: 8 minutes 45 seconds or less (20(C) 68(F), 60%) 110V: 8 minutes 45 seconds or less (20(C) 68(F), 60%) 220V: 8 minutes 30 seconds or less (20(C) 68(F), 60%)
Magnification 25% to 400% in 1% increments 25% through 200%: 1% 1/05 6-149 General Procedures
Paper Cassette Sizes Available Table 6 Paper Cassette Sizes - NASG and ESG NASG 810 LEF A4 LEF 8.511 LEF A3 SEF 8.511 SEF 912 SEF 8.513 SEF 8.514 SEF A4 SEF 1117 SEF Paper Cassette/receiving Tray Capacity Cassette 500 sheets Paper Tray Bypass 100 sheets (20 lb./80gsm) Receiving tray 100 Sheets A4 LEF 215279 LEF A3 SEF 215279 SEF B4 ISO SEF 215315 SEF 215330 SEF 215356 SEF A4 SEF 279432 SEF ESG
General Procedures
1/05 6-150
Size Sensing (NASG) Table 7 Size Sensing - (NASG) Document Size 1117 4mm 912 SEF 4mm 8.514 SEF 4mm 8.513 SEF 4mm 8.512.4 SEF 4mm 8.511 SEF 4mm 8.511 LEF 4mm 810 SEF 4mm 810 LEF 4mm 8.55.5 SEF 4mm 8.55.5 LEF 4mm Size Sensing (ESG) Table 8 Size Sensing - (ESG) Document Size A3 4mm B4 SEF 4mm A4 SEF 4mm A4 LEF 4mm B5 SEF 4mm B5 LEF 4mm A5 SEF 4mm A5 LEF 4mm B6 SEF 4mm B6 LEF 4mm A6 SEF 4mm A6 LEF 4mm B7 SEF 4mm B7 LEF 4mm A7 SEF 4mm A7 LEF 4mm B8 SEF 4mm B8 LEF 4mm A8 SEF 4mm A8 LEF 4mm B9 SEF 4mm B9 LEF 4mm Sensed Size A3 (297420) B4 (257364) A4 (210297) A4 (297210) B5 (182257) B5 (257182) A5 (148210) A5 (210148) B6 (128182) B6 (182128) A6 (105148) A6 (148105) B7 (91128) B7 (12891) A7 (74105) A7 (10574) B8 (6491) B8 (9164) A7 (5274) A7 (7452) B9 (4564) B9 (6445) Sensed Size 1117 (280432) 912 (229305) 8.514 (216356) 8.513 (216331) 8.512.4 (216315) 8.511 (216280) 118.5 (280216) 810 (204254) 108 (254204) 5.58.5 (140216) 8.55.5 (216140)
DADF Product Specifications

DADF Physical Characteristics Dimensions (DADF) Table 9 DADF Dimensions and Weights Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight: DADF only Machine with DADF DADF Electrical Specifications FREQUENCY 50/60Hz 2% 24" 20.5" 9" 31lb. 549 lb. US 640mm 535mm 130mm 14kg 249kg Metric
INPUT VOLTAGE Supplied by machine
POWER CONSUMPTION 120 Watts
DADF System Capability DOCUMENT SIZE Maximum 1117 (A3) Minimum 5.58.5 (A5)
DOCUMENT TRAY Capacity 50 documents
SIZE MIXED MODE In this mode sizes from 5.58.5 (A5) to 1117 (A3) can be mixed.
REGISTRATION Lead edge 2.5 Side edge 3 Skew 2.5
1/05 6-151
General Procedures
DADF SIZE SENSING (NASG) Table 10 DADF Size Sensing - (NASG) Document Size 1117 1114.9 SEF 8.514 SEF 8.513 SEF 8.512.4 SEF 8.511 SEF 8.511 LEF 810 SEF 810 LEF 8.55.5 SEF 8.55.5 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF DADF SIZE SENSING (ESG) Table 11 DADF Size Sensing - (ESG) Document Size 1114.9 SEF 8.514 SEF 8.513 SEF 8.512.4 SEF A3 B4 SEF A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF Sensed Size ESG 1117 (280432) 8.514 (216356) 8.514 (216356) -A3 (297420) B4 (257364) A4 (210297) A4 (297210) B5 (182257) B5 (257182) A5 (148210) A5 (210148) Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight: Finisher Only Sensed Size 1117 (280432) 1117 (280432) 8.514 (216356) 8.514 (216356) -8.511 (216280) 118.5 (280216) 811 (216280) 118.5 (280216) 5.58.5 (140216) 8.55.5 (216140) A4 (210297) A4 (297210) Dimensions Depth Height Weight: Sorter/Mailbox Only
Table 12 Sorter/Mailbox Dimensions and Weights US 29" 46" 110lb. 744mm 1170mm 50kg Metric
Sorter/Mailbox Electrical Specifications FREQUENCY 50/60Hz 2%
Sorter/Mailbox System Capability COPY SORT SIZE Maximum 1218 Minimum A6 Postcard-OCT
TRAY CAPACITIES Copy Output Tray 400 Copies-OCT
BASIC WEIGHT RANGE Sorter/Mailbox 60-105 gsm Offset Catch Tray 60-250 gsm
Finisher Product Specifications

Finisher Physical Characteristics Dimensions (Finisher) Table 13 Finisher Dimensions and Weights US 29.9" 25.9" 41.7" 132lb. 760mm 660mm 1060mm 60kg Metric
Sorter/Mailbox Product Specifications

Sorter/Mailbox Physical Characteristics Dimensions (Sorter) Table 12 Sorter/Mailbox Dimensions and Weights Dimensions Width General Procedures 23.5" US 599mm Metric
Finisher Electrical Specifications FREQUENCY 50/60Hz 2%
1/05 6-152
Table 14 Magnification Accuracy UI display magnification (%) 282 400 Actual magnification Actual magnification (%) (Reference) 282.8 400.0 A6A3 -
Finisher System Capability COPY SORT SIZE Maximum 1218 Minimum A6 Postcard-OCT 2.
NOTE: Variable magnification (25~400%) for every 1%. Variable magnification a. 1. 25%~400% (every 1%)
TRAY CAPACITIES Copy Output Tray 400 Copies-OCT
Magnification Precision
Longitudinal magnification precision a. b. 2. Fixed magnification: 100%0.5% Free magnification: 25% ~200%:1.0% 201% ~400%:1.5%
BASIC WEIGHT RANGE 1. Finisher 60-105 gsm Offset Catch Tray 60-250 gsm Fixed Magnification a. The key operator tool provides 7 types of fixed magnification. From these, 6 types can be selected from the table below. One type can be set for every 1%. (m in the table: Factory default) Table 14 Magnification Accuracy UI display magnification (%) 25 35 50 64 70 78 81 86 97 115 122 127 129 141 154 180 200 220 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Actual magnification Actual magnification (%) (Reference) 25.0 35.4 50.0 64.7 70.7 78.0 81.6 86.6 97.3 115.0 122.4 127.3 129.4 141.4 154.5 180.0 200.0 220.0 A3A6 A3A5 11X178.5X11 A3A4, B4B5 8.5X148.5X11 B4A4, B5A5 A4B5, A3B4 A48.5X11 B5A4, B4A3 A4B4, A5B5 8.5X13A3 8.5X1111X17 A4A3, B5B4 5.5X8.58.5X14 8.5X13A2 A5A3 5.5X8.511X17 1/05 6-153 A3 B4 A3 B4 1.
Lateral magnification precision a. b. Fixed magnification: 100%0.5% Variable magnification: 25% ~200%: 1.0% 201% ~400%:1.5%
Magnification
Copy Speed (CPM)

Tray 1-4 a. Regular paper (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) CPM (Regular paper (64gsm~less than 105gsm)/No1~No4 trays) Table 15 Copy Speed Black/White Simplex 25 28.8 50 28.8 Black/White Duplex 25 28.8 50 28.8 Full color Simplex 6.2 6.2 12.5 6.2 Full color Duplex 6.2 6.2 12.5 6.2
A4 LEF A4 SEF b.
Thick paper (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) CPM - Simplex Mode (Thick paper (105~128gsm))
Table 16 Thick paper Copy Speed Black/White 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.8 Full color 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
A4 LEF A4 SEF
General Procedures
2.
Tray 5 (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) CPM - Tray 5 Table 17 Tray 5 Copy Speed Black/White Full color 6.2 6.2 2.4 3.5 3.5 2.4 2.4 2.4 Weight 64~105gsm 64~105gsm 105~162gsm 105~162gsm 163~250gsm 163~250gsm 1. 2.
a. b. a. b. c.
Maximum: 297X432mm (A3,11X17) Minimum: No limitation Maximum: 297X432mm (A3,11X17) Minimum: 148.5mmX210mm (A5S, 5.83X8.27) Weight (DADF): 38gsm~128gsm (Duplex: 50gsm~110gsm)
Document size/weight through the DADF:
Regular paper A4 L/Letter L Regular paper A3 OHPA4 L/Letter L OHPA3 Thick paper A4 L/Letter L Thick paper A3 Extra thick paper A3 Postcard
25 20 20 5.8 5.8 3.3 3.3
Document Size Detection

Document scanning Table 20 Document Size Detection Machine can detect the following sizes of originals. Document orientation Postcard SEF (Post Card) A6 SEF B6 SEF B6 LEF A5 SEF Document size (mm) 100X148 (101X152) 105X148 128X182 182X128 148X210 210X148 140X215.9 215.9X140 Platen NASG X ALT X X X X X ESG ALT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DADF NASG X X X X X ESG X X X X X X X X X
Extra thick paper A4 L/Letter L 3.3
A3OHP - Feed 1 sheet at a time. No CPM specification.
Copy Speed (DPM)

1. Auto Feed (Duplex) (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) Table 18 Duplex Copy Speed Paper size Black/White Black/White Black/White Full color Full color Full color 2. A4 LEF B4 A3 A4 LEF B4 A3 AE off/ACS off 40 25.7 22 12.5 6.2 6.2 AE ON/ACS Off 40 23.6 20 12.5 6.2 6.2 AE either on/off. ACS must be on. 40 19 16.6 12.5 6.2 6.2
A5 LEF 5.5X8.5 SEF 5.5X8.5 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF 8.5X13 SEF 8.5X14 SEF B4 SEF 8th Opening SEF A3 SEF 11X17 SEF
215.9X279.4 X 279.4X215.9 X 215.9X330.2 215.9X355.6 X 257X364 267X388 297X420 X X X
Auto Feed (Simplex) (Continuous copy - Unit: sheets/minute) Table 19 Auto Feed Copy Speed Paper size AE off/ACS off 40 25 20 12.5 6.2 6.2 AE ON/ACS Off 40 14 12.5 9.3 5 5 AE either on/off. ACS must be on. 23.6 14 12.5 9.4 6.2 6.2
297.4X431.8 X
NOTE: Mix Mode only Default is A6S, Postcard S is selectable. Default is Postcard S; A6 S is selectable.
Black/White Black/White Black/White Full color Full color Full color
A4 LEF B4 A3 A4 LEF B4 A3
Image Loss
1. 2. 3. Lead edge: 31mm Bottom edge: 31mm Side edge: 31mm
Document Size/Weight (DADF)

1. Document sizes using Platen:
General Procedures
1/05 6-154
Copy (Print) Paper

1. Tray (B5~A3, Letter) a. b. 2. NO1 Tray: 64~105gsm NO2~4 Tray: 64~128gsm (105~128gsm paper: Select Thick Paper 1.) Tray 1 Tray 2-4 Tray 5 HCF (option) ESG Market 80 gsm Premier 3R91720, 3R91721 Colortech Plus (90gsm) 3R94641 (A4), 3R94642 (A3) Table 24 Tray Settings Refer to: Table 22 Adjustable Tray Adjustable Tray Adjustable Tray (8.5x11 or A4 only)
Tray 5: 64~250gsm Table 21 Paper Part Numbers NASG Market
For B/W
4024DP (20#)
Set Paper Guides at new paper position and select the loaded paper size using the User Interface. Paper size setting is performed automatically at setting the guide for the regular sized paper. NOTE: Tray 5 paper sizes are selected from the Control Panel.
For Color
Color Xpressions 93 (24# bond) 3R5464, 3R5465
Table 25 Tray 5 Paper Sizes
Paper Cassette Type

Paper sizes and orientation loadable in each tray are as follows: Table 22 Paper Size Specifications Tray 1 NASG spec ESG spec (8.5x11) LEF A4 LEF
Machine can detect the following sizes of originals. Paper Size / Orientation
Tray 5 NASG ESG
Postcard SEF
100X148
X X ALT ALT X X X X X
ALT ALT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
(Post Card) LEF (101X152) (Post Card) LEF (101X152) A6 SEF A6 LEF B6 SEF B6 LEF A5 SEF 105X148 105X148 128X182 182X128 148X210 210X148 140X215.9 215.9X140
A5 SEF, A4 LEF, Letter (8.5x11) LEF paper load is possible if paper guide position is changed and the size is input in NVM R/W (dC131) or in Configuration Page (dC371).
Table 23 Paper Size Specifications Tray 2,3 and 4 NASG spec. ESG spec. Common specification among NASG and ESG. A3SEF, B4SEF, A4SEF, A4LEF, B5SEF, B5LEF, Letter (8.5x11) SEF, Letter (8.5x11) LEF, Legal (8.5x14) SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8th Opening SEF, Suryu-kai LEF, Legal (8.5x13) SEF, 8x10 LEF
A5 LEF 5.5X8.5 SEF 5.5X8.5 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A4 LEF 8x10 SEF 8x10 SEF 8x11 SEF 8x11 LEF 8.5X13 SEF 8.5X14 SEF 8.5X14 SEF B4 SEF
215.9X279.4 X 279.4X215.9 X 210x297 297x210 X X X X 215.9x279.4 X 279.4x215.9 X 215.9X330.2 215.9X355.6 X 215.9X355.6 X 257X364 -
12x18 SEF can be loaded in special Tray 5. 12x18 SEF can be loaded in Trays 2,3 or 4 if modified by the CSE per ADJ 9.1.19 (Tray 2, 3, and 4 for 12 x 18 Paper). For the irregular sized paper, tray can be used if paper guide position is changed and the size is input using the User Interface.
1/05 6-155
General Procedures
Table 25 Tray 5 Paper Sizes Machine can detect the following sizes of originals. Paper Size / Orientation NASG ESG 8th Opening SEF A3 SEF 11X17 SEF 12X18 SEF SRA3:12.6x17.7 320x450 SEF 267X388 297X420 X X X X X X X Tray 5 Side registration (mm) 3.0
Table 27 Platen Registration Tray 5 (Platen) Tray (Platen) 2.1 (Side1) 2.1 (Side2) 1.6 (Side1) 1.6 (Side2) 3.2 (Side1) 3.2 (Side2) 1.0 (Side1) 1.0 (Side2) 1.0 (Side1) 1.0 (Side2) 2.0 (Side1) 2.0 (Side2) 1.3 (Side1) 1.3 (Side2) 0.5%/280mm 0.5%/280mm 1.0%/280mm 1.0%/280mm 2.0%/280mm 2.0%/280mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/400mm 0.5%/400mm 0.5%/280mm 0.5%/280mm 2.0%/280mm DADF 2.5 (Side1) 2.5 (Side2) 2.0 (Side1) 2.2 (Side2) 4.0 (Side1) 4.0 (Side2) 1.0 (Side1) 1.0 (Side2) 1.0(Side1) 1.0 (Side2) 2.0 (Side1) 2.0 (Side2) 1.3 (Side1) 1.3 (Side2) 0.5%/280mm 0.5%/280mm 1.0%/280mm 1.0%/280mm 2.0%/280mm 2.0%/280mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/200mm 0.5%/400mm 0.5%/400mm 0.5%/280mm 0.5%/280mm 2.0%/280mm 2.0%/280mm DADF single unit 1.5 (Side1) 1.5 (Side2) -
Lead skew (200mm) 2.0 (mm) Size skew (400mm) 4.0 (mm) Linearity (Longitudi- 1.0 (Side1) nal: 400mm) (mm) 1.0 (Side2) Linearity (Lateral/ 1.0 (Side1) Skew: 280mm) (mm) 1.0 (Side2) Perpendicularity (400mm) (mm) 2.0 (Side1) 2.0 (Side2)
297.4X431.8 X
Others: Non-standard size (Enter the size from the Control Panel). Range 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 4. Main scanning direction: 148~297mm (Default: 257mm) Subscanning direction: 203~432mm (Default: 257mm) Tray 1: 500 sheets (4024DP20lb) Tray 2~4: 550 sheets (4024DP20lb) Tray 5: 100 sheets (15mm stack) (4024DP20lb) HCF: 2000 sheets (4024DP20lb)
Parallelism (400mm) 1.3 (Side1) 1.3 (Side2) (mm) Lateral magnification% (100%) Lateral magnification% (25~200%) Lateral magnification% (201~400%) 0.5%/280mm 0.5%/280mm 1.0%/280mm 1.0%/280mm 2.0%/280mm 2.0%/280mm
Tray/Cassette Capacity
Longitudinal magnifi- 0.5%/200mm cation (Top half)% 0.5%/200mm (100%) Longitudinal magnifi- 0.5%/200mm cation (Bottom 0.5%/200mm half)% (100%) Longitudinal magnifi- 0.5%/400mm cation% (100%) 0.5%/400mm Longitudinal magnifi- 0.5%/280mm cation% 0.5%/280mm (25%~200%) Longitudinal magnifi- 2.0%/280mm cation% 2.0%/280mm (201%~400%)
Document Input Tray, Tray/Exit Tray Capacity (DADF) (Unit: sheet)

Both Input tray and exit tray have the same capacity, as follows: Table 26 A4 or less Thin paper (38~49gsm) Regular paper (50~100gsm) Thick paper (101~128gsm) 50 50 40 B4 50 50 40 A3 50 50 40
Output Tray (Bin) Capacity (Unit: sheet)

1. 2. 3. Exit Tray: 200 Sheets OCT (Offset Catch Tray): 500 sheets Sorter/Mailbox Bin: 100 sheets/Bin (No. of bins: 10 Bins)
Copy Consistency
Table 27 Platen Registration Tray 5 (Platen) Tray (Platen) Lead edge registration (mm) 2.2 1.6 (Side1) 1.6 (Side2) DADF 2.5 (Side1) 2.5 (Side2) DADF single unit 1.5 (Side1) 1.5 (Side2)
General Procedures
1/05 6-156
Common Tools
Table 1 Common Tools Description Screw Driver (-) 3 x 50 Screw Driver (+) 6 x 100 Screw Driver (+) NO.1 Stubby Driver (+) (-) Screw Driver (=) 100MM Spanner and Wrench 5.5 x 5.5 Spanner and Wrench 7x 7 Hex Key Set Box Driver 5.5MM Side Cutting Nipper Round Nose Pliers Digital Multi-meter Set Interlock Cheater Silver Scale 150MM CE Tool Case Magnetic Screw Pick-up Tool Scriber Tool Magnetic pickup Loupe Flash Light Brush Tester Lead Wire (red) Tester Lead Wire (black) Part Number 600T40205 600T1989 499T356 600T40210 499T355 600T40501 600T40502 600T02002 600T1988 600T40903 600T40901 600T2020 600T91616 600T41503 600T1901 600T41911 600T41913 600T41911 600T42008 600T1824 600T41901 600T 9583 600T2030
Product Tools and Test Patterns

Table 1 Tools and Test Patterns Description Color Test Pattern Black & White Test Pattern 0.3 Density Gray Test Pattern HVPS test probe HVPS test probe adapter Corotron wire installation tool Corotron cleaning wand (20 per kit) Copy Paper Carrying Case Copy Paper Zip Lock Bag Xerox Color Xpressions 24# 11 17 Colourtech 90 GSM A3 Service and Machine NVM Log Serial Cable Parallel Cable PWS Powercord Adapter (for convenience outlet) Miniature Test Probe Part Number 82E13120 82E8220 82P207 600T1653 600T1996 600T1990 600K39410 600T1999 600T2000 3R5465 3R94642 700P97436 600T2058 600T2065 600T2018 600T02177
1/05 6-157
General Procedures
Common Tools, Product Tools and Test Patterns
Cleaning Materials
Table 1 Cleaning Materials Description Cleaning fluid (8oz., Formula A) Film remover (8 oz.) Lens/mirror cleaner Lint-free (white) cleaning cloth Cleaning towels Drop cloth Cotton Swab NASG Part Number 43P48 43P45 43P81 19P3025 ESG Part Number 8R90034 8R90176 8R90178 19P3025
Machine Consumables
Table 1 Machine Consumables Description Developer - Black Developer - Cyan Developer - Magenta 499T90417 600S4372 35P1737 35P2162 Developer -Yellow Toner Cartridge - Black Toner Cartridge - Cyan Toner CartridgeMagenta 5R619 6R945 6R946 6R947 5R90244 6R90280 6R90281 6R90282 6R90283 13R560 490g 35P3191 35P1737 35P2162 NASG Part # 5R616 5R617 5R618 ESG Part # 5R90241 5R90242 5R90243 Weight 490g 490g 490g Capacity Remarks (Nominal Life) Replace when an error occurs. Replace when an error occurs. Replace when an error occurs. Replace when an error occurs.
Lint-free Optics cleaning cloth 499T90417
490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images 140g (empty) Carrier:66.3g (Note 1) 490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images 140g (empty) Carrier:66.3g (Note 1) 490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images 140g (empty) Carrier:66.3g (Note 1) 490g (full) Toner:284g 5,000 images 140g (empty) Carrier:37.9g (Note 1) 1,900g 40,000 (Note 2)
Toner Cartridge - Yellow 6R948 Xerographic Module (Copy/Print Cartridge) T&M Drum Xerographic Module (Copy/Print Cartridge) FSMA Drum Fuser Oil Cartridge, CRU Toner Waste Bottle Waste Carrier Bottle Fuser Web Assembly, CRU NOTE: 1. Toner Life 2. 13R558
13R557
13R559
1,900g
40,000 (Note 2)
8R7975 8R7976 8R7977 8R7980
8R7982 8R7983 8R7984 8R7985
450g (full) 300cc/CRU 150g (empty) 1,600g (full) 250 (empty) 1,000g (full) 160g (empty) 950g
40,000 prints 40,000 prints 40,000 prints 40,000 prints
Y, M, C: 5,000 images when documents with a 5% image density are copied in full color mode using A4 paper. K: 5,000 images when documents with a 5% image density are copied in black mode using A4 paper.
C.C assembly life is 50,000 prints.
General Procedures
Cleaning Materials, Machine Consumables
1/05 6-158
Change Tag Introduction

Important modifications to the copier are identified by a tag number which is recorded on a tag matrix label attached to the inside of the Front Fuser Cover, or inside the Front Door. This section describes all of the tags associated with the copier, as well as multinational applicability, classification codes, and permanent or temporary modification information.
Processor (P) Tags

Processor Tags
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P1
N ALL FU2: 040199 FU0: 025021 FU3: 310512043x FU1: 310512691x
Classification Codes
A tag number may be required to identify differences between parts that cannot be interchanged, or differences in diagnostic, repair, installation, or adjustment procedures. A tag number may also be required to identify the presence of optional hardware, special nonvolatile memory programming, or whether mandatory modifications have been installed. Each tag number is given a classification code to identify the type of change that the tag has made. The classification codes and their descriptions are listed in the table below. Table 1 Classification Code M N O R Description Mandatory tag. Tag not installed in the field. Optional tag. Repair Tag.
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: N/A PL 7.1 IBT Cleaner Assy.
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P2
N ALL FU2: 040199 FU0: 025021 FU3: 310512153x FU1: 310512691x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE:
Rotary PWB/Plate Assy. Countermeasure for Rotary PWB short circuit problem N/A PL 6.1
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P3
N ALL FU2: 040321 FU0: 025022 FU3: 310512332x FU1: 310512707x
Aligner Baffle Assy. Duplex Aligner performance improvement N/A PL 2.18
1/05 6-159
General Procedures
Change Tag Introduction, Processor (P) Tags
TAG:
CLASS: USE: NAME: PURPOSE:
P4
N ALL N/R BR PWB This Tag indicates presence of Omron BR PWB (before cut-in of XCD PWB) N/A PL 3.5
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P7
N ALL Cut-in: Oil Roll Assembly deleted from BI first M/C: FU2: 040051 FU0: 025010 FU3: 310512016x FU1: 310512684x Cut-in: Deletion of Drive Assy: FU2: 040329 FU0:025037 FU3: 310512332x FU1: 310512707x Cut-in: Tag 7 marked (Harness change): FU2: 040321 FU0:025022 FU3: 310512332x FU1: 310512707x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE:
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P5
N ALL FU2: 040920 FU0: 025093 FU3: 310512545 FU1: 310512719
NAME: PURPOSE:
IBT Oil Roll Assembly and Drives removal. IBT redesign N/A N/A
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: ROS Assembly
Updated Assy to correct 1mm banding problem N/A PL 4.1
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P8
M ALL Cut-in: New Welding cutin: FU2: 040199 FU3: 3105123123x, Cut-in: Tag 8 marked: FU2: 040321 FU3: 3105123332x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P6
M ALL Cut-in FU2:040321, FU0:025022, FU3:310512332x, FU1:310512707x NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: IIT Brace Kit
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: IOT CPU PWB
The purpose of this kit is to install a new Brace in the IIT Assembly 605K91041 PL 3.1
New pull up resistor on the IOT CPU PWB allows use of all WCS-approved PWBs for downloading of IOT Software. N/A PL 9.2
General Procedures
Mail Box / Sorter Tags, Mail Box / Sorter Tags
1/05 6-160
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P9
N ALL Cut-in: Temporary change: FU2: 040199 FU0: 025022 FU3: 310512179x FU1: 310512691x Cut-in: Permanent change: FU2:040321, FU0:025022, FU3:310512332, FU1:310512702x Cut-in: Tag 9 marked: FU2: 040479 FU0: 025052 FU3: 310512394x FU1:310512707x
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P12
R ALL FU2: 040823 FU0: 025093 FU3: 310512545x FU1: 310512719x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: Wick Assembly Kit
Wick Assembly change for image disturbance correction NASG - 600K78063 PL 8.7 ESG - 600K78073
NAME: PURPOSE:
Exit/Fuser Nip Drive Assembly To repair Exit Drive short circuit due to excessive cable length N/A PL 1.6
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P13
M ALL FU2: 040694 FU0: 25093 FU3: 310512538x FU1: 310512719x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME:
VSEL Extension PWB PWB Update N/A PL 9.2
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P10
M ALL FU2: 040547 FU0:025052 FU3: 310512438x FU1:310512707x
PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE:
IOT CPU S/W V4.43.1h CD-ROM IOT CPU S/W upgrade with alternate UI language support 133K21302
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P14
M ALL FU2: 041304 FU3: 310512662x FU1: 310512729x FU0:025138
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: ATC Sensor Kit
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P11
M ALL FU2: 040592 FU0:025052 FU3: 310512438x FU1: 310512707x
PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE:
The kit adds ATC Sensor and revised IOT Drive PWB, to detect TC from the Developer Roll surface. 606K91040 PL 9.2
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Support weld for Fuser Exit ON Jam Support weld for Fuser Exit ON Jam 605K91060
1/05 6-161
General Procedures
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P15
N ALL FU2: 041442 FU3: 310512781x FU1: 310512734x FU0: 025138
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P18
S N/A
Rotary Motor Noise Kit Change to Rotary Motor switching frequency to eliminate high frequency sound complaints 600K82900 PL 6.1
Cyan Toner Leak Fix Eliminate gap in Cyan Oil Seal, to prevent Cyan Toner leakage 600K82870
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P16
N ALL FU2: 041304 FU3: 310512662x FU1: 310512729x FU0: 025138
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P19
M ALL FU2: 041496 FU0: 025138 FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x
IOT Software Retrofit Kit Software Upgrade to V6.00.2 605K07201 TAG P6 is a prerequisite for this Kit.
DADF Software Upgrade to V2.2 The purpose of this kit is to install new DADF Software 635K07220 (XC) TAG P16 is a prerequisite for this Kit.
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P17
M ALL FU2: 041496 FU0: 025138 FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x
TAG:
P20
R ALL Roll Assy Field Retrofit Kit Exchange IBT Drive Roll to improve banding (105mm pitch, etc.) occurring in A-zone. 600K82710 PL 7.1
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
Film Seal Assy Mandatory Retrofit Kit Install thicker Film Seal to prevent toner splatter 605K91090 PL 7.1, PL 7.8
General Procedures
1/05 6-162
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P21
N ALL FU2: 041496 FU0: 025138 FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x
TAG:
P24
N ALL UI PWB with Edit Function UI PWB with Edit function added to all machines; PWB removed from Edit Pad Kit 600K83650 Kit purpose is to add updated PWB to pre-Tag 24 cutin machines when installing new Edit Pad kit
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
Pickup Roll for Fuser Assy improvement To improve life of Oil Metering System 600K83630 PL 8.9
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P22
N
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P25
M ALL FU2: 041496, FU0: 025138 FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: IOT Software Retrofit Kit IOT S/W upgrade to V6.20.2h 630K11450
Repair miswiring of AC outlet N/A This Tag cancelled; replaced by TAG P28
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P23
N ALL FU2: 041496 FU0: 025138 FU3: 310512785x FU1: 310512734x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: Exit Roll
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P26
R ALL FU2: 046765, FU0: 025138 FU3: 310868820x FU1: 31051273x
To reduce corrugation marks N/A PL 2.26
Distributor Field Repair Kit To repair DCD (debris centered deletions problem) and prevent damage to Dispenser seals. 600K83451 PL 6.5
NOTE: Certain machines received the change during manufacturing, but were not tagged. The serial number for these machines are as follows: FU2: 044535 - 046764 FU3: 310868415x - 310868819x
1/05 6-163
General Procedures
TAG:
P27
N ESG only 213 7078999 XCD PWB (Mitcheldean Production Only) ESG-specific XCD PWB N/A PL 3.5
TAG:
CLASS: NAME: PURPOSE:
P30
M N/A S/W V 7.06 for Finisher upgrade Finisher upgrade to S/W V 7.06 635K7230
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
KIT NUMBER:
TAG: TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P31
N ESG Only EU Safety/EMI fix Fuser modifications to accommodate new EMI requirements PL 9.6
P28
M ALL FU2: 043894 FU0: 025138 FU3: 31086831x FU1: 310512734x
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
REFERENCE:
Incorrect AC Inlet and Outlet connector wiring To correct the AC wiring problem on the AC Power Inlet and Outlet connectors 605K9740 Kit number is for RITS tracking purposes
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P32
R ALL FU2: 054790 FU0: 310868312x FU3: 310869570x FU1: 310512734x
TAG:
CLASS: NAME: PURPOSE:
P29
R N/A Magnification Distortion Kit Kit provides new Half Tone PWB to alleviate interval distortion 600K84300 PL 9.2
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: 600K86000
New ROS and Half Tone PWB design (42.37 MHz)
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
PL 4.1, PL 9.2
General Procedures
1/05 6-164
TAG:
P33
R ALL Toner Spray Kit Reduce trail edge toner spray and banding that occurs 150 mm from trail edge 600K85871
TAG:
P36
N ALL Sorter/Mailbox Crease Reduction Kit 600K83420 TAG S2
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
P34
R ALL
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
P37
N FU2:58493 - 059335 FU0:025257 - 025357
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: To reduce the appearance of 6.6 mm pitch banding 600K86080
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: NAME: PURPOSE: REFERENCE:
Countermeasure for oil leak from Oil Pan
TAG:
P35
R ALL
TAG:
P38
N ALL FU2:58884 EPC Enablement Harnessing changes to allow installation of EPC option 498K2440 PL 20.1
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: To reduce banding that occurs 60 mm from the trail edge 600K86090
1/05 6-165
General Procedures
TAG:
P39
O ALL V11.5x Software update Updates software to enable EPC and increased imageable area. 630K12210
Mail Box / Sorter Tags TAG:

CLASS: USE: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
S1
R ALL 830564 S/W and Tag Matrix Adds Tag Matrix to the Mail Box/Sorter and firmware upgrade 635K780
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
P40
N ESG ONLY ESS PS Removal Component not required in DC12 - DCCS50 Only N/A
TAG:
S2
N ALL Sorter/Mailbox Crease Reduction Kit 600K83420 TAG P36
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
CLASS: USE: NAME:
P41
N ALL VOID
REFERENCE:
TAG:
P42
N ALL 3-380 Fault Countermeasures Mfg. change to prevent short circuits N/A
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
General Procedures
1/05 6-166
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Tags TAG:

CLASS: USE: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE:
TAG:
HCF4
N ALL FT4:688798 HCF Control PWB w/ V2.5 software New software to fix 8-190 and 8-192 faults PL 15.16
HCF1
N ALL FT4 685969 HCF Control PWB w/V2.4 S/W update V2.4 software fixes 8-190 and 8-192 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam faults N/A PL 15.16
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
REFERENCE:
TAG:
CLASS: USE:
HCF5
N
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
HCF2
N ALL FT4 687185 Drive Belt Tensioner Feed Head modification N/A PL 15.10
NAME: PURPOSE:
Lift Motor Fix
REFERENCE:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
CLASS: USE: NAME:
HCF6
R All Low torque HCF kit Paper feeder modified to reduce mis-feeds 604K22210 PL 15.10
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER: REFERENCE: FT4 687185
TAG:
HCF3
N ALL Skew Kit Resolve skewed feeding problem 600K89040
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
1/05 6-167
General Procedures
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Tags, Integrated Digi-
Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Tags TAG:

CLASS: USE: NAME: PURPOSE: KIT NUMBER:
TAG:
IDFE 5
O NASG (US), NASG (Canada), AO, ESG. GL2 - 385719 DCCS 50 Controller/Software Software roll from version 1.02 to 1.07 (System Software installation CD-ROM v1.1) 701P33191 Software Upgrade Kit, 701P33197 Software Upgrade Kit Instructions
IDFE 1
N ALL Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 383925 and above EME fixes/UL Label Support of Manufacturing Standard Configuration
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
KIT NUMBER:
TAG:
IDFE 2
N ALL Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 384046 and above Manufacturing Firmware Upgrades for U33 and U34 Print and Image Quality fixes
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
IDFE 6
N ALL GL2 386198 - QC47 350216 Electromagnetic Compliance Comply with EMC limits, addition of Ethernet grounding, filter array to power connector, copper fingers and tape to DDI Connector Plate
KIT NUMBER:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
IDFE 3
N ALL Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 384331 and above EE Seal Noise Fix EE Seal added to DB 15 to solve IOT noise problem
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
KIT NUMBER:
TAG:
IDFE 4
M ALL Manufacturing Cut-in S/N GL2 384467 and above DCCS 50 Controller/Software Launch Software Version 1.0 software is available by ordering Customer Support Pack 701P31194
TAG:
IDFE 7
N ALL GL2 386533 Maintenance release V1.2 Software to support TAG IDFE 8, and fix reported field problems
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
KIT NUMBER:
General Procedures
Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Tags,
1/05 6-168
TAG:
IDFE 8
N ALL GL2 387285 New hardware configuration Hardware update to obsolete components
TAG:
IDFE 11
N ALL GL2 393154 S/W release V2.1 Fixes reported field problems
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
REFERENCE:
TAG:
IDFE 9
N ALL GL2 387895 S/W release V2.0 New software to support Finisher option
TAG:
IDFE 12
N ALL GL2 395206 Centreware S/W release V3.1 Features enhancement
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
TAG:
IDFE 10
O ALL GL2 392943 Video Board PWB Hardware change to eliminate system crashes 606K7490
TAG:
IDFE 13
N ALL New hardware configuration Hardware update to obsolete components
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
MFG SERIAL NUMBERS:
REFERENCE:
1/05 6-169
General Procedures
General Procedures
1/05 6-170
7 Wiring Data
Plug/Jacks
Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... Plug/Jack IndexP/JP/JP/J .............................................................................................. Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams ........................................................................................... 7-3 7-3 7-9 7-41 7-42 7-44 7-48 7-57 7-65 7-66 7-67 7-68 7-69 7-76 7-81 7-83 7-91 7-97 7-107 7-109 7-117 7-125 7-141 7-155 7-179 7-199 7-211
Wirenets
AC Power Wirenets ....................................................................................................... 18VAC Wirenet ............................................................................................................... 3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets.............................................................. +5VDC Wirenets ............................................................................................................. DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets ....................................................................................... +12/-12VDC Wirenet ....................................................................................................... DC COM (+12/-12V RET) Wirenet .................................................................................. 13.3VDC Wirenet ............................................................................................................ DC COM (13.V RET) Wirenet ........................................................................................ +24VDC Wirenets ........................................................................................................... DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets ....................................................................................... BSDs ............................................................................................................................... Chain 01.......................................................................................................................... Chain 02.......................................................................................................................... Chain 03.......................................................................................................................... Chain 04.......................................................................................................................... Chain 05.......................................................................................................................... Chain 06.......................................................................................................................... Chain 07.......................................................................................................................... Chain 08.......................................................................................................................... Chain 09.......................................................................................................................... Chain 10.......................................................................................................................... Chain 11.......................................................................................................................... Chain 16..........................................................................................................................
1/05 7-1
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
1/05 7-2
Wiring Connector List

How to use the Wiring Connector List
1. To find the location of a connector, refer to the Figure and Item Number of the Plug/Jack Location Drawings section, by referring to Figure and Item Number of the Wiring Connector List. The Plug/Jack and P/J in the Index are identified by following method: a. b. c. d. J250 represents Jack 250. P250 represents Plug 250 Numerals without P or J represent both Jack and Plug CN1 represents Connector 1.
Plug/Jack IndexP/JP/JP/J
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list P/J No. P/J1 P/J2 P/J3 P/J4 J5 P5 P10 P/J11A P/J11B P12 P/J13 P/J14 P/J15 Illustration No. 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.25 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis Item No. 11 11 15 12 8 14 12 6 6 5 4 15 20 19 18 17 8 1 10 6 5 2 3 4 12 10 11 9 9 7 8 1 10 12 13 10 11 14 3 Wiring Data
2.
Refer to Figure 1 for an example of a Plug/Jack Index connector list entry.
Figure x
P/J16 P/J17 P/J18 Item number in the Illustration that shows the specific location of a Plug/Jack. P/J19 J20 P20 P/J21 P/J22 P/J23 P/J24 P/J25 P/J31 P/J33 P/J34 P/J35 P/J41 P/J42
P/J Number
Figure number of the Illustration showing the area of the Finisher where the Plug/Jack can be located.
Figure 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list example
P/J43 P/J44 P/J45 P/J53 P/J54 P/J55 P/J56 P/J57 P/J58
1/05 7-3
Wiring Connector List, Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list P/J No. P/J59 P/J70 J71 J72 J73 J74 P/J76 P/J81 P/J81 P/J82 P/J82 P/J83 P/J84 P/J84 P/J91 P/J92 P/J93 P/J95 P/J96 P/J98 P/J98 P/J99 P/J99 P/J100 P/J101A P/J101B P/J101C P/J101D P/J101E P/J101F P/J105 P/J109 P/J110 P/J111 P/J112 P/J113 P/J114 P/J115 P/J116 P/J117 P/J118 Wiring Data Illustration No. 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 7.2.30 w/Tag P31 (ESG only) 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.25 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.8 IBT 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.8 IBT 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 19 7 14 8 10 8 9 18 15 3 23 7 1 4 7 6 13 1 6 3 4 5 2 14 13 3 5 11 2 1 29 8 13 14 1/05 7-4 Item No. 1 3 6 5 8 7 P/J No. P/J119 P/J120 P/J121 P/J122 P/J123 P/J124 P/J125 P/J127 P/J128 P/J129 P/J130 P/J131 P/J132 P/J134 P/J136 P/J139 P/J140 P/J141 P/J142 P/J144 P/J145 P/J146 P/J147 P/J148 P/J149 P/J150 P/J151 P/J152 P/J153 P/J154 P/J157 P/J158 P/J159 P/J160 P/J161 P/J162 P/J163 P/J164 P/J167 P/J168 P/J169
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list Illustration No. 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7.2.8 IBT 7.2.8 IBT 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.11 2nd BTR 7.2.11 2nd BTR 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) Item No. 15 16 16 15 15 14 13 17 4 3 2 4 5 6 7 1 2 10 16 8 10 9 7 11 6 2 3 10 2 7 2 1 3 3 1 2 4 5 16 1 6 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list P/J No. P/J170 P/J171 P/J172 P/J173 P/J174 P/J175 P/J176 P/J191 P/J192 P/J193 P/J194 P/J195 P/J196 P/J198 P/J199 P/J201 P/J202 P/J203 P/J204 P/J209A P/J209B P/J210A P/J210B P/J211A P/J211B P/J212A P/J212B P/J213 P/J214 P/J215 P/J216 P/J217 P/J218 P/J220 P/J222 P/J223 P/J224 P/J233 P/J251 P/J252 P/J253 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Illustration No. 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR Item No. 7 20 21 15 17 19 13 2 5 3 12 14 11 4 18 7 26 5 32 11 12 9 10 7 8 5 6 1 2 3 4 2 9 9 18 12 5 8 4 30 1 1/05 7-5 P/J No. P/J254 P/J255 P/J256 P/J257 P/J260 P/J261 P/J262 P/J264 P/J266 P/J268 P/J272 P/J273 P/J274 P/J275 P/J276 P/J280 P/J281 P/J282 P/J283 P/J284 P/J289 P/J341 P/J342 P/J345 P/J347 J387 P387 P/J388 P/J389 P/J391 J393 P393 P/J395 J396 P396 P/J397 P/J398 P/J399 P/J400 P401 P402
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list Illustration No. 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB Item No. 6 15 19 10 2 1 36 3 4 6 12 7 1 1 1 21 35 15 11 12 14 3 1 4 2 6 10 1 2 7 5 8 9 17 7 6 5 11 20 21 22 Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list P/J No. P/J403 P/J404 P/J405 P/J406 P/J411 P/J412A P/J412B P/J413A P/J413B P/J414A P/J414B P/J415A P/J415B P/J416A P/J416B P/J417A P/J417B P/J418A P/J418B P/J419A P/J419B P/J420A P/J420B P/J421A P/J421B P/J422A P/J422B P/J431 P/J432 P/J433A P/J433B P/J434 P/J440 P/J441 P/J482A (CN1) P/J482A P/J482B(CN2) P/J482B P/J484 P/J486 P/J490 Wiring Data Illustration No. 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel Item No. 4 6 23 5 12 16 16 9 9 7 7 14 14 11 11 19 19 10 10 8 8 18 18 17 17 13 13 18 17 20 20 19 10 9 9 10 7 11 5 4 12 1/05 7-6 P/J No. P491 P/J492(CN4) P/J493 P/J500 P/J508 P/J509 P/J510 P512 P/J513 P/J514 P/J515 P516 P/J517 P518 P/J519 P/J520 P/J521 P/J522 P/J523 P/J524 P/J530 P/J531 P/J532 P/J533 P/J534 P/J535 P536 P/J537 P/J540 P/J541 P/J542 J543A J543B P543A P543B P/J544 P/J550 P/J550 P/J551 P/J551 P/J552
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list Illustration No. 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.3 IIT 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter Item No. 14 8 13 1 3 2 1 8 25 26 18 21 13 27 19 10 14 11 13 12 7 6 5 2 9 3 17 2 18 4 16 17 17 10 10 15 5 26 4 6 7 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list P/J No. P/J553 P/J554 P/J555 P/J556 P/J557 P/J558 P/J559 P/J560 P/J560 P/J561 P/J561 P/J562 P/J562 P/J563 P/J563 P/J564 P/J564 P/J565 P/J566 P/J567 P567 P/J569 P/J570 P/J570 J571 J571 P571 P571 P/J572 J572 P572 P/J573 P573 P573 P575 P578 P/J580 P/J581 P/J582 P/J583 P/J584 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Illustration No. 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 Item No. 8 9 11 12 13 2 1 23 33 3 32 24 31 22 20 20 29 18 28 27 16 16 5 14 11 17 28 9 10 30 10 5 6 2 29 4 8 9 6 5 7 1/05 7-7 P/J No. P/J585 P/J586 P/J587 P/J588 P/J589 P/J590 P/J591 P/J592 J594 P/J594 P/J595 P/J596 P/J597 P/J598 P/J599 P/J651 P/J652 P/J653 P/J654 P/J656 P/J658 P658 P/J659 P/J660 P/J661 P/J664 P/J665 J700A P700B J701A P701A J701B P701B J701C P701C J702A P702A J702B P702B J703A P703A
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list Illustration No. 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.27 DADF-2 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.4 IPS 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.29 Decurler 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.8 IBT 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.8 IBT 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.17 Tray 5 Item No. 4 11 1 6 2 7 2 1 37 9 10 12 8 11 3 10 8 5 11 1 2 7 4 12 3 7 6 31 8 5 22 6 21 4 20 4 9 4 9 3 5 Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list P/J No. J703B P703B P/J704 P/J710 P/J711 P/J712 P/J713 P/J714 P/J715 P/J716 P/J717 P/J718 P/J719 P/J720 P/J722 P/J723 P/J724 P/J725 P/J726 P/J728 P/J729 P/J730 P/J731 P/J732 P/J734 J765 P769 P/J791 P/J792 P/J793 P/J794 P/J795 P/J796 P799 P/J800 P/J801A P/J801B P/J802A P/J802B P/J803 P/J803A Wiring Data Illustration No. 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.10 Registration 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7.2.9 Drawer 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.16 Inverter Unit 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.26 DADF-1 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR Item No. 3 5 4 9 38 7 24 3 12 1 27 6 5 3 8 13 7 34 33 9 8 4 17 16 7 3 3 18 11 8 9 5 10 9 2 26 26 23 23 25 25 1/05 7-8 P/J No. P/J803B P/J804 P/J805 P/J805 P/J806 P/J807 P/J818 P/J819 P/J823 P/J880 P/J880A J880 J880A P880 J880B P880B P/J892 P899 J900 P903 P905 P906 P/J1100 P/J1150 P/J2010 P/J2020 P/J2030 CN1 CN2 CN3 CN5 CN6 DP J2 DS J2 F51 F52 F53 F54 F55 F56 FS1
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list Illustration No. 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.28 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.20 Rear Upper 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.1 Control Panel 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.2 Front Upper Item No. 25 22 3 21 22 24 30 3 4 19 19 24 24 15 24 15 14 5 16 12 13 11 7 28 6 25 8 3 15 6 1 2 3 2 23 22 2 3 4 5 8 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index connector list P/J No. FS2 FS3 FS4 FS11 FS12 FS50 FS51 FS52 FS60 FS61 FS62 FS63 FS800 FS801 JC JD SJ10 SJ51 SJ52 SJ801 SP71 SP72 TIJ1 TPJ1 TSJ1 Illustration No. 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.2 Front Upper 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.23 Power Chassis 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.15 Tray Feeder 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.17 Tray 5 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) Item No. 6 5 9 2 1 8 9 7 2 4 5 6 7 6 13 16 27 4 2 23 6 1 4 3 1
Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams
1/05 7-9
Wiring Data
Plug/Jack Index, Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams
Figure 1 - 7.2.1 Control Panel Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-10
Figure 2 - 7.2.2 Front Upper Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-11
Figure 3 - 7.2.3 IIT Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-12
Figure 4 - 7.2.4 IPS
1/05 7-13
Wiring Data
Figure 5 - 7.2.5 Toner Cartridge Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-14
Figure 6 - 7.2.6 ROS/Half Tone PWB Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-15
Figure 7 - 7.2.7 VSEL Base TTL PWB (AP) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-16
Figure 8 - 7.2.8 IBT Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-17
Figure 9 - 7.2.9 Drawer Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-18
Figure 10 - 7.2.10 Registration Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-19
Figure 11 - 7.2.11 2nd BTR
Wiring Data
1/05 7-20
Figure 12 - 7.2.12 Fuser Unit (Front) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-21
Figure 13 - 7.2.13 Fuser Unit (Rear) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-22
Figure 14 - 7.2.14 Tray 1-4 Sensor Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-23
Figure 15 - 7.2.15 Tray Feeder Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-24
Figure 16 - 7.2.16 Inverter Unit Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-25
Figure 17 - 7.2.17 Tray 5 Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-26
Figure 18 - 7.2.18 Main Switch/Deve.Bias HVPS/CC/PDD HVPS Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-27
Figure 19 - 7.2.19 IOT Driver PWB/IOT CPU PWB Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-28
Figure 20 - 7.2.20 Rear Upper Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-29
Figure 21 - 7.2.21 AC Drive PWB/Tray PWB/SSR Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-30
Figure 22 - 7.2.22 Distribution PWB/IOT LVPS Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-31
Figure 23 - 7.2.23 Power Chassis Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-32
Figure 24 - 7.2.24 Tray 2-4 Take Away Drive/Transformer Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-33
Figure 25 - 7.2.25 B3H LVPS/SSR/Transformer (AP) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-34
Figure 26 - 7.2.26 DADF-1 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-35
Figure 27 - 7.2.27 DADF-2 Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-36
Figure 28 - 7.2.28 Mail Box Sorter Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-37
Figure 29 - 7.2.29 Decurler Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-38
Figure 30 - 7.2.30 Tag P 31 Components Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-39
Wiring Data
1/05 7-40
AC Power Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet AC Power (Neutral) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-41
AC Power Wirenets
Figure 2 Wirenet AC Power (HOT)
18VAC Wirenet
Wiring Data
AC Power Wirenets , 18VAC Wirenet
1/05 7-42
Figure 1 Wirenet AC 18V
1/05 7-43
Wiring Data
18VAC Wirenet
3.3VDC/3.3V RET/3.5VDC/3.5V RET Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet 3.3VDC Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 7-44
Figure 2 Wirenet DC COM (3.3V RET)
1/05 7-45
Wiring Data
Figure 3 Wirenet 3.5VDC
Wiring Data
1/05 7-46
Figure 4 Wirenet DC COM (3.5V RET)
1/05 7-47
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet +5VDC-1 Wiring Data 1/05 7-48 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
+5VDC Wirenets
Figure 2 Wirenet +5VDC-2
1/05 7-49
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
Figure 3 Wirenet +5VDC-2 (cont)
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
1/05 7-50
1/05 7-51
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
Figure 5 Wirenet +5VDC-3 (cont)
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
1/05 7-52
1/05 7-53
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
1/05 7-54
1/05 7-55
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
Wiring Data
+5VDC Wirenets
1/05 7-56
DC COM (+5V RET) Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (+5V RET) -1 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-57 Wiring Data
Figure 2 Wirenet DC COM (+5V RET) -2
Wiring Data
1/05 7-58
1/05 7-59
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
1/05 7-60
1/05 7-61
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
1/05 7-62
1/05 7-63
Wiring Data
Wiring Data
1/05 7-64
+12/-12VDC Wirenet
Figure 1 Wirenet +12/-12VDC Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-65 Wiring Data
+12/-12VDC Wirenet
DC COM (+12/-12V RET) Wirenet
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (+12/-12V RET) Wiring Data 1/05 7-66 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
DC COM (+12/-12V RET) Wirenet
13.3VDC Wirenet
Figure 1 Wirenet 13.3VDC Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-67 Wiring Data
13.3VDC Wirenet
DC COM (13.V RET) Wirenet
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (13.V RET) Wiring Data 1/05 7-68 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
DC COM (13.V RET) Wirenet
+24VDC Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet +24VDC-1 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-69 Wiring Data
+24VDC Wirenets
Wiring Data
+24VDC Wirenets
1/05 7-70
1/05 7-71
Wiring Data
+24VDC Wirenets
Wiring Data
+24VDC Wirenets
1/05 7-72
1/05 7-73
Wiring Data
+24VDC Wirenets
Wiring Data
+24VDC Wirenets
1/05 7-74
Figure 7 IIT/IPS LVPS Wirenet +24VDC-7
1/05 7-75
Wiring Data
+24VDC Wirenets
DC COM (24V RET) Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet DC COM (24V RET) -1 Wiring Data 1/05 7-76 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Figure 2 Wirenet DC COM (24V RET) -2
1/05 7-77
Wiring Data
Figure 3 Wirenet DC COM (24V RET) -3
Wiring Data
1/05 7-78
Figure 4 Wirenet DC COM (24V RET) -4 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-79
Wiring Data
1/05 7-80
BSDs
Purpose
The Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs), show the distribution of electrical and mechanical power. Each functional chain is represented by a BSD. A BSD is a functional flow diagram containing electrical circuit information and mechanical inputs and outputs. The functional flow is from left to right (inputs on the left, outputs on the right).
1/05 7-81
Wiring Data
BSDs
Wiring Data
BSDs
1/05 7-82
Chain 01
Figure 1 BSD 1.1 Main Power On (1 of 2)
1/05 7-83
Wiring Data
Chain 01
Figure 2 BSD 1.1 Main Power On (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-84 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 01
Figure 3 BSD 1.2 DC Power Generation (IOT LVPS) (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-85
Chain 01
Figure 4 BSD 1.2 DC Power Generation (IOT LVPS) (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 01
1/05 7-86
Figure 5 BSD 1.3 DC Power Generation (IIT LVPS) (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-87
Chain 01
Figure 6 BSD 1.3 DC Power Generation (IIT LVPS) (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 01
1/05 7-88
Figure 7 BSD 1.4 Power Interlock Switching Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-89
Chain 01
Figure 8 BSD 1.5 Monitoring Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 01
1/05 7-90
Chain 02
Figure 1 BSD 2.1 Control Panel Switches and LEDs (1 of 2)
1/05 7-91
Wiring Data
Chain 02
Figure 2 BSD 2.1 Control Panel Switches and LEDs (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 02
1/05 7-92
Figure 3 BSD 2.2 UI Display Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-93
Chain 02
Figure 4 BSD 2.3 Power Save Switch and LED Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 02
1/05 7-94
Figure 5 BSD 2.4 Monitoring Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-95
Chain 02
Wiring Data
Chain 02
1/05 7-96
Chain 03
Figure 1 BSD 3.1 PWB Communications (UI) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-97
Chain 03
Figure 2 BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 03
1/05 7-98
Figure 3 BSD 3.2 PWB Communications (IPS) (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-99
Chain 03
Figure 4 BSD 3.3 PWB Communications (DADF) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 03
1/05 7-100
Figure 5 BSD 3.4 PWB Communications (Mailbox) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-101
Chain 03
Figure 6 BSD 3.5 PWB Communications (PWS) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 03
1/05 7-102
Figure 7 BSD 3.6 Foreign Interface Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-103
Chain 03
Figure 8 Wiring Data
BSD 3.12 Monitoring (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 03
1/05 7-104
Figure 9 BSD 3.12 Monitoring (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-105
Chain 03
Wiring Data
Chain 03
1/05 7-106
Chain 04
Figure 1 BSD 4.1 Main and Drum Drive Control (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-107 Wiring Data
Chain 04
Figure 2 BSD 4.2 Main and Drum Drive Control (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-108 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 04
Chain 05
Figure 1 BSD 5.1 Interlock Switching Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-109 Wiring Data
Chain 05
Figure 2 BSD 5.2 Document Setting and Feeding Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 05
1/05 7-110
Figure 3 BSD 5.3 Document Transportation (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-111
Chain 05
Figure 4 BSD 5.3 Document Transportation (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-112 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 05
Figure 5 BSD 5.4 Document Transport Mechanism Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-113
Chain 05
Figure 6 BSD 5.5 Document Exit Transportation Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 05
1/05 7-114
Figure 7 BSD 5.6 Monitoring Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-115
Chain 05
Wiring Data
Chain 05
1/05 7-116
Chain 06
Figure 1 BSD 6.1 Document Illumination Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-117 Wiring Data
Chain 06
Figure 2 BSD 6.2 Image Input
Wiring Data
Chain 06
1/05 7-118
Figure 3 BSD 6.3 Carriage Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-119
Chain 06
Figure 4 BSD 6.4 Video Data and Signal Control Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 06
1/05 7-120
Figure 5 BSD 6.5 Laser Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-121
Chain 06
Figure 6 BSD 6.6 Laser Scanning Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 06
1/05 7-122
1/05 7-123
Chain 06
Figure 8 BSD 6.7 Monitoring (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 06
1/05 7-124
Chain 07
Figure 1 BSD 7.1 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-125 Wiring Data
Chain 07
Figure 2 BSD 7.2 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 07
1/05 7-126
Figure 3 BSD 7.3 Tray 4 Paper Size Sensing Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-127
Chain 07
Figure 4 BSD 7.4 Tray 5 Paper Size Sensing Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 07
1/05 7-128
Figure 5 Tray 1 BSD 7.5 Paper Stacking (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-129
Chain 07
Figure 6 Tray 1 BSD 7.5 Paper Stacking (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-130 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 07
Figure 7 BSD 7.6 Tray 2 Paper Stacking (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-131
Chain 07
Figure 8 BSD 7.6 Tray 2 Paper Stacking (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-132 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 07
1/05 7-133
Chain 07
Chain 07
1/05 7-135
Chain 07
Chain 07
1/05 7-137
Chain 07
Chain 07
1/05 7-139
Chain 07
Figure 16 BSD 7.10 Monitoring (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-140 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 07
Chain 08
Figure 1 BSD 8.1 Tray 1 Paper Feed
1/05 7-141
Wiring Data
Chain 08
Figure 2 BSD 8.2 Tray 2 Paper Feed Wiring Data 1/05 7-142 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 08
Figure 3 BSD 8.3 Tray 3 Paper Feed Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-143 Wiring Data
Chain 08
Figure 4 BSD 8.4 Tray 4 Paper Feed Wiring Data 1/05 7-144 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 08
Figure 5 BSD 8.5 Tray 5 Paper Feed Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-145 Wiring Data
Chain 08
Figure 6 BSD 8.6 Vertical Transportation Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 08
1/05 7-146
Figure 7 BSD 8.7 Vertical Transport Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-147
Chain 08
Figure 8 BSD 8.8 Registration (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 08
1/05 7-148
Figure 9 BSD 8.8 Registration (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-149 Wiring Data
Chain 08
Figure 10 BSD 8.9 Registration Control Mechanism (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 08
1/05 7-150
Figure 11 BSD 8.9 Registration Control Mechanism (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-151
Chain 08
Chain 08
1/05 7-152
Figure 13 BSD 8.10 Monitoring (2 of 3) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-153 Wiring Data
Chain 08
Figure 14 Monitoring (3 of 3) Wiring Data 1/05 7-154 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 08
Chain 09
Figure 1 BSD 9.1 Charging and Exposure (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-155 Wiring Data
Chain 09
Figure 2 BSD 9.1 Charging and Exposure (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-156
Figure 3 BSD 9.2 Developer Rotor Drive Control (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-157
Chain 09
Figure 4 BSD 9.2 Developer Rotor Drive Control (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-158 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
Figure 5 BSD 9.3 Development Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-159
Chain 09
Figure 6 BSD 9.4 Toner Loading (Black/Yellow) (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-160
Figure 7 BSD 9.4 Toner Loading (Black/Yellow) (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-161 Wiring Data
Chain 09
Figure 8 BSD 9.5 Toner Loading (Magenta/Cyan) (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-162
Figure 9 BSD 9.5 Toner Loading (Magenta/Cyan) (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-163 Wiring Data
Chain 09
Figure 10 BSD 9.6 Toner Dispense Control Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-164
Figure 11 BSD 9.7 Toner Dispense Mechanism Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-165
Chain 09
Figure 12 BSD 9.8 IBT Belt Drive and 1st Transfer (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-166
Figure 13 BSD 9.8 IBT Belt Drive and 1st Transfer (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-167
Chain 09
Figure 14 BSD 9.9 2nd Transfer and IBT Cleaning (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-168
Figure 15 BSD 9.9 2nd Transfer and IBT Cleaning (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-169
Chain 09
Figure 16 BSD 9.10 2nd BTR Contact/Retract Switching Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-170
Figure 17 BSD 9.11 2nd Belt Cleaner Contact/Retract Switching Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-171
Chain 09
Figure 18 BSD 9.12 Oil Winding Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-172
Figure 19 BSD 9.13 Drum Cleaning and Toner Reclaim (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-173
Chain 09
Figure 20 BSD 9.13 Drum Cleaning and Toner Reclaim (2 of 2) Wiring Data 1/05 7-174 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
Figure 21 BSD 9.14 Fan Control (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-175
Chain 09
Figure 22 BSD 9.14 Fan Control (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 09
1/05 7-176
1/05 7-177
Chain 09
Chain 09
1/05 7-178
Chain 10
Figure 1 BSD 10.1 Pre-Fusing and Fuser Air Control (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 7-179 Wiring Data
Chain 10
Figure 2 BSD 10.1 Pre-Fusing and Fuser Air Control (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 10
1/05 7-180
Figure 3 BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (1 of 2 w/o Tag P31) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-181
Chain 10
Figure 4 BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (1 of 2 with Tag P31) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 10
1/05 7-182
Figure 5 BSD 10.2 Fusing Heat Control (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-183
Chain 10
Figure 6 BSD 10.3 External Heat Control Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 10
1/05 7-184
Figure 7 BSD 10.4 Fuser Drive Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-185
Chain 10
Figure 8 BSD 10.5 Fuser Oil Dispense and Web Winding Mechanism (1 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 10
1/05 7-186
Figure 9 BSD 10.5 Fuser Oil Dispense and Web Winding Mechanism (2 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-187
Chain 10
Figure 10 BSD 10.6 External Heat Roll and Pressure Roll Nip Control
Wiring Data
Chain 10
1/05 7-188
Figure 11 BSD 10.7 Fuser Exit Transportation Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-189
Chain 10
Figure 12 BSD 10.8 Inverter Transportation Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 10
1/05 7-190
Figure 13 BSD 10.9 Exit and Inverter Motor Drive Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-191
Chain 10
Figure 14 BSD 10.10 Duplex Transportation Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 10
1/05 7-192
Figure 15 BSD 10.11 OCT Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-193
Chain 10
Chain 10
1/05 7-194
Chain 10
Figure 18 BSD 10.12 Monitoring (3 of 4) Wiring Data 1/05 7-196 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 10
Chain 10
Wiring Data
Chain 10
1/05 7-198
Chain 11
Figure 1 BSD 11.1 Mail Box DC Power & Interlock Switching (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-199
Chain 11
Figure 2 BSD 11.1 Mail Box DC Power & Interlock Switching (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 11
1/05 7-200
Figure 3 BSD 11.2 Mail Box Drives (1 of 2) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-201
Chain 11
Figure 4 BSD 11.2 Mail Box Drives (2 of 2) Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 11
1/05 7-202
Figure 5 BSD 11.3 Decurler Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-203
Chain 11
Figure 6 BSD 11.4 Mail Box Transportation Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 11
1/05 7-204
Figure 7 BSD 11.5 Bin Tray Transportation Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-205
Chain 11
Figure 8 BSD 11.6 Bin Full Sensors Wiring Data Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Chain 11
1/05 7-206
Figure 9 BSD 11.7 Mail Box OCT Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-207
Chain 11
Chain 11
1/05 7-208
1/05 7-209
Chain 11
Chain 11
1/05 7-210
Chain 16
Figure 1 BSD 16.1 Integrated Digital Front End Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Wiring Data
1/05 7-211
Chain 16
Wiring Data
Chain 16
1/05 7-212
8A HCF
Status Indicator RAPs HCF Paper Faults
07-280 HCF Communication Fault RAP ........................................................................ 07-289 HCF Broken Failure RAP ................................................................................... 07-308 Interlock Switch Open RAP ................................................................................ OF7-001 HCF Out of Paper RAP.................................................................................... 8a-3 8a-3 8a-4 8a-5 8a-7 8a-8 8a-9 8a-10 8a-10 8a-11 8a-13 PL 15.10 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 1 OF 6.............................................................. PL 15.11 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 2 OF 6.............................................................. PL 15.12 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 3 OF 6.............................................................. PL 15.13 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 4 OF 6.............................................................. PL 15.14 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 5 OF 6.............................................................. PL 15.15 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 6 OF 6.............................................................. PL 15.16 Elevator Motor and Feed Motor ....................................................................... Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8a-36 8a-37 8a-38 8a-39 8a-40 8a-41 8a-42 8a-43 8a-45 8a-45 8a-46 8a-47
HCF Handling Faults

08-190 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................... 08-191 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................... 08-192 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP ....................................................... 8-193 HCF (Tray 6) Pre Registration Sensor On Jam .................................................... 8-194 HCF (Tray 6) Registration Sensor On Jam ........................................................... OF8-001 HCF Does not feed - No Fault Code RAP .......................................................
Plug/Jacks
Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... Plug/Jack Index ............................................................................................................... Plug/Jack Locator Diagram .............................................................................................
Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs)

HCF BSDs.......................................................................................................................
HCF Paper Supply

8-501 HCF Paper Size Mismatch RAP .........................................................................
Repairs 7. HCF
REP 2.7.5 HCF Assembly............................................................................................... REP 2.7.6 HCF Elevator Motor ....................................................................................... REP 2.7.7 HCF Elevator Long/Short Cables .................................................................. REP 2.7.8 HCF Brake ..................................................................................................... REP 2.7.9 HCF Control PWB.......................................................................................... 8a-15 8a-16 8a-17 8a-19 8a-20 8a-21 8a-21 8a-22 8a-23 8a-24 8a-24 8a-25 8a-25 8a-26 8a-26 8a-27 8a-29
8. HCF
REP 2.8.26 HCF Feed Motor .......................................................................................... REP 2.8.27 HCF Feeder Assembly ................................................................................ REP 2.8.35 HCF Front/Rear Spring................................................................................ REP 2.8.36 HCF Baffle Assembly................................................................................... REP 2.8.37 HCF Feed Belt ............................................................................................. REP 2.8.38 HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls................................................................... REP 2.8.39 HCF One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch ................................................................ REP 2.8.40 HCF Friction Clutch ..................................................................................... REP 2.8.41 HCF Feed Clutch ......................................................................................... REP 2.8.42 HCF TAR Sensor ......................................................................................... REP 2.8.43 HCF Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensors ......................................................
Adjustments
ADJ 2.1 HCF Registration...............................................................................................
Parts Lists HIGH CAPACITY FEEDER

PL 15.1 Elevator Assembly: Part 1 OF 3 ........................................................................ PL 15.2 Elevator Assembly: Part 2 OF 3 ........................................................................ PL 15.3 Elevator Assembly: Part 3 OF 3 ........................................................................ Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 8a-33 8a-34 8a-35 High Capacity Feeder
1/05 8a-1
High Capacity Feeder
1/05 8a-2
07-280 HCF Communication Fault RAP

Fault Code 07-280 indicate that an HCF communication fault has occurred.
07-289 HCF Broken Failure RAP

The HCF Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after the HCF Tray started to lift. NOTE: Prior to switching off the machine, ensure all pending jobs are saved.
Procedure
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to ground. If the wires are good, replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2).
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions in the paper path. Ensure connector P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB is seated properly. Refer to BSD 7.11 and 7.12 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330, 007-186 HCF Stack Height Sensor and press Start. Pull the HCF Tray out. The display changed from L to H. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 3 and 4 of J2. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44 Distribution PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 20 and 9 ofP/J44. Y N Go to Wirenet +5 VDC-1 Figure 7. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.13. Check the connector and wiring for an open circuit. Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.11. Check the connectors and wiring for an open circuit. If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 15.12). Enter dC330, 007-079 HCF Elevator Motor and press Start. CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. Ensure that the Elevator Motor energizes. The Elevator Motor energizes and then deenergizes within 30 seconds. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 2 and 1 of P/J845 HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of P/J845 on the HCF Control PWB (This measurement must be taken within 30 seconds after closing the tray.) Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8a-3 B High Capacity Feeder
07-280 HCF Communication Fault RAP , 07-289
B Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Go to Wirenet +24 VDC-1 Figure 29. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.13. Check the connectors and wiring. Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.12. Check the connectors and wiring. If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the HCF Elevator Motor Assembly (PL 15.16)
07-308 Interlock Switch Open RAP

HCF Interlock is open.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the HCF is properly aligned and pushed tightly against the IOT. Refer to BSD 7.12 and 8.13 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330, 007-308 HCF Interlock Switch and press Start. Move the HCF away from the machine. The displays changes. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins NO and C of P/J-847 on the HCF Interlock Switch. +5VDC is measured between pins NO and C of P/J-847on the HCF Interlock Switch. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 1 and 2 of P/J843 on the HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of P/J843. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 3 and 4 of J2. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44 Distribution PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44. Y N Go to Wirenet +5 VDC-1 Figure 7. Go to Flag 3 on BSD8.13 and check the connector and wiring for an open circuit. Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Go to Flag 2 on BSD7.12 and check the connector and wiring for an open circuit. Replace the HCF Interlock Switch (PL 15.1). Ensure that there are no obstacles in the docking area of HCF or the machine.
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping: Elevator Motor (PL 15.16) HCF Stack Height Sensor (PL 15.12) HCF Feeder Assembly (PL 15.10) HCF Assembly (PL 15.1) Wiring Harness
07-289 HCF Broken Failure RAP , 07-308 Interlock
1/05 8a-4
B Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Go to Wirenet +24 VDC-1 Figure 29. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.13. Check the connectors and wiring. Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 7.12. Check the connectors and wiring. If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the HCF Elevator Motor Assembly PL 15.16.
OF7-001 HCF Out of Paper RAP

The HCF Stack Height Sensor failed to change state within the specified time after the HCF Tray started to lift. NOTE: Prior to switching off the machine, ensure all pending jobs are saved.
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions in the paper path. Ensure connector P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB is seated properly. Refer to BSD 7.11 and 7.12 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330, 007-186 HCF Stack Height Sensor and press Start. Pull the HCF Tray out. The display changed from L to H. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 1 and 3 of P/J841. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 3 and 4 of J2. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44 Distribution PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 20 and 9 of P/J44. Y N Go to Wirenet +5 VDC-1 Figure7. Go to Flag 3 and check the connector and wiring for an open circuit. Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Go to Flag 2 and Flag 4 on BSD 7.11. Check the connectors and wiring. If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 15.12). Enter dC330, 007-079 HCF Elevator Motor and press Start. CAUTION Do not operate the component control more than twice before resetting paper position. To lower the paper from the feed position, pull out respective tray. If the tray is overdriven it will be hard to pull out and may cause component damage. Ensure that the Elevator Motor energizes. The Elevator Motor energizes and then deenergizes within 30 seconds. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 2 and 1 of P/J845 HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of P/J845 on the HCF Control PWB (This measurement must be taken within 30 seconds after closing the tray.) Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2 HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB.
Check/replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping: Elevator Motor (PL 15.16) HCF Stack Height Sensor (PL 15.12) HCF Feeder Assembly (PL 15.10) HCF Assembly (PL 15.1) Wiring Harness
1/05 8a-5
1/05 8a-6
08-190 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP

The control logic detected that paper from the HCF was late to the HCF TAR sensor.
If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the HCF Feed Motor (PL 15.16). Enter dC330, 007-078 HCF Feed Clutch and press Start. Check that the HCF Feed Clutch energizes. The HCF Feed Clutch energizes. Y N Check for +24VDC at pins 1 and 3 of J-851 on the HCF Feed Clutch. 24VDC is measured at pins 1 and 3 of J-851 on the HCF Feed Clutch. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 11 and 10 of P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 11 and 10 of P/J841 on the HCF Control PWB. Y N Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.12. Check the connectors and wiring. repair or replace as required (PL 15.11). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.12. Check the connectors and wiring. If the connectors and wiring are OK, then replace the HCF Feed Clutch (PL 15.13). Check /replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, loose or slipping. Drive Roll (PL 15.12) Pinch Roll (PL 15.15) Feeder Housing (PL 15.14) Feed/Nudger Roller (PL 15.14) One Way Clutch (PL 15.14) Gear Clutch (PL 15.14) Paper Feeder Harness (PL 15.11) HCF Mounting Bracket
Initial Actions
Check for obstructions in the paper path Check to ensure that the Feed Belt is not overtensioned Check for contamination on the HCF TAR Sensor lens Ensure that connector P/J405 on the IOT CPU PWB is seated correctly Refer to BSD 8.11 and 8.12 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330, 007-100 HCF TAR Sensor and press Start. Block the HCF TAR Sensor with paper. The Display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.12 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the TAR Sensor (PL 15.11). Connect the meter from P/J841-5 on the HCF Control PWB to machine frame. Block the TAR Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J841-5 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J841-4 and P/J841-6 on the HCF Control PWB. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.12 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16.) Go to Flag 1 and Flag 3 on BSD 8.12 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the HCF TAR Sensor (PL 15.11). If the problem continues, replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16.) Enter dC330, 007-080 HCF Feed Motor and press Start. Check that the HCF Feed Motor energizes. The HCF Feed Motor energizes. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Go to Wirenet +24 VDC-1 (Figure 29). Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.13. Check the connectors and wiring. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.11. Check the connectors and wiring. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8a-7

The control logic detected that paper from the HCF was late to the IOT Takeaway Sensor.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor and press Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J420-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420-B5 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420-B6 and P/J420-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway (D1-T/A) Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330, 007-080 HCF Feed Motor and press Start. Check that the HCF Feed Motor energizes. The HCF Feed Motor energizes. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Go to Wirenet +24 VDC-1 Figure 29. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.13. Check the connectors and wiring. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.11. Check the connectors and wiring. A High Capacity Feeder 1/05 8a-8

The control logic detected that paper from the HCF was late to the IOT Takeaway Sensor.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Cheat the L/H Cover Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 008-150 Take Away Sensor and press Start. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from H to L. Y N The display indicates a constant H. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Takeaway Sensor (PL 2.8). Connect the meter from P/J420-B5 on the IOT Drive PWB to machine frame. Block the Takeaway Sensor with a sheet of paper. The voltage at P/J420-B5 goes from +5 VDC when the sensor is unblocked, to less than +1.0 VDC when the sensor is blocked. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J420-B6 and P/J420-B4 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Takeaway (D1-T/A) Sensor (PL 2.8). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330, 007-080 HCF Feed Motor and press Start. Check that the HCF Feed Motor energizes. The HCF Feed Motor energizes. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 1 and 2 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. Y N Check for +24VDC between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. +24VDC is measured between pins 13 and 17 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Go to Wirenet +24 VDC-1 Figure 29. Go to Flag 2 on BSD 8.13. Check the connectors and wiring. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.11. Check the connectors and wiring. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8a-9
8-193 HCF (Tray 6) Pre Registration Sensor On Jam

The Pre Registration Sensor did not actuate within the specified time after the feed started from HCF (Tray 6).
8-194 HCF (Tray 6) Registration Sensor On Jam

The Registration Sensor did not actuate within 956 - 1056 msec after the feed started from HCF (Tray 6).
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J419-13 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 15.2). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Pre Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-153 Pre Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J419-14 and P/J419-12 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Pre Registration Sensor (PL 2.16). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-043 Main Motor 2. Press Start. Main Motor 2 energizes. Y N Go to the Main Motor 2 RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Pre Registration Roller and Bearings (PL 15.2) Rollers and Springs (PL 15.2) Check for burrs on the Chute and Upper Chute in the Pre Registration Assembly (PL 15.2) All components in the Main Motor 2 Assembly (PL 1.5) Pinch Rolls and Springs in the Lower Left Cover (PL 2.8)
Procedure
Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measure between P/J421-11 on the IOT Drive and GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 15.1). Replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Cheat the Front Door Interlock. Open the Drawer and block the Registration Sensor with a sheet of paper. Carefully close the drawer. Enter dC330 008-155 Registration Sensor and press Start. The display is L. Y N There is +5 VDC between P/J421-12 and P/J421-10 on the IOT Drive PWB. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 8.8 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK, replace the Registration Sensor (PL 15.1). If the problem continues, replace the IOT Drive PWB (PL 9.2). Enter dC330 008-054 Registration Motor. Press Start. The Registration Motor energizes. Y N Go to the Registration Motor RAP. Check/replace the following components until the problem is resolved. Replace any components that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping. Registration Roller and Roller, Springs, and Bearings in the Registration Assembly (PL 15.1) Gear in the Registration Assembly (PL 15.1) Check for burrs on the Upper Chute and Chute in the Registration Assembly (PL 15.1).
8-193 HCF (Tray 6) Pre Registration Sensor On Jam,
1/05 8a-10
OF8-001 HCF Does not feed - No Fault Code RAP

The HCF will not feed paper and does not display a Fault Code.
Initial Actions
Ensure that the machine Software is at 6.00.2h or higher. Check the following NVM locations: 761-070 = 608 and 761-071 = 601
Procedure
Go to 08-190 HCF Take Away Roll Sensor On Jam RAP .
1/05 8a-11
1/05 8a-12
8-501 HCF Paper Size Mismatch RAP

An incorrect paper size was selected for HCF Tray.
Initial Actions
Ensure HCF Rear Paper Guide is installed correctly. Ensure HCF Tray paper size selected matches the paper size loaded in HFC Tray. Ensure that the HCF Paper Tray Size Switch is not obstructed. Ensure HCF Tray paper size selected matches the Paper Guide size selection. Ensure connector P/J405 on the IOT CPU PWB is seated properly. Refer to BSD 7.11 in the following procedure.
Procedure
Set the HCF Rear Paper Guide to the A4 position. Enter dC330 007-187 HCF Paper Size Switch and press Start. Pull out the HCF Paper Tray. The Display changes. Y N Check for +5VDC at pins NO and C of P/J-849 at the HCF Paper Size Switch, Tray In Switch. +5VDC is measured at pins NO and C of P/J-849 at the HCF Paper Size Switch. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 5 and 6 of P/J843 on the HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 5 and 6 of P/J843 on the HCF Control PWB. Y N Check for +5VDC between pins 3 and 4 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB. +5VDC is measured between pins 3 and 4 of J2 on the HCF Control PWB Y N Check for +5 VDC between pins 20 and 9 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. +5 VDC is measured between pins 20 and 9 of P/J45 on the Distribution PWB. Y N Go to Wirenet +5 VDC-1 Figure 7. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 8.13 and check the wiring for an open circuit. Replace the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 7.11 and check the wiring for an open circuit. Replace the HCF Paper Size Switch (PL 15.16). Remove the obstruction and check/replace the following parts until the problem is resolved. Replace any parts that are worn, broken, binding, or slipping: High Capacity Feeder Assembly (PL 15.1) HCF Paper Size Switch (PL 15.16) Wiring Harness.
1/05 8a-13
1/05 8a-14
REP 2.7.5 HCF Assembly

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Pull out the HCF Assembly (Figure 1).
Unscrew the knurled knob Figure 2 Preparing to remove the HCF Assembly CAUTION Support the HCF Drawer on a ream of paper so as not to put undue stress on the Drawer Cover. 3. Remove the HCF Assembly (Figure 3).
Figure 1 Pull out the HCF Drawer 2. Prepare to remove the HCF Assembly (Figure 2).
Remove the Assembly Figure 3 Removing the HCF Assembly
1/05 8a-15
REP 2.7.5
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Assembly.
REP 2.7.6 HCF Elevator Motor

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the HCF Rear Cover. Remove the HCF Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the HCF Elevator Motor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect P/J-845
3. Remove the HCF Elevator Motor
2. Remove the Screws (2) from the Motor. Figure 1 Removing the HCF Elevator Motor
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Elevator Motor.
REP 2.7.5, REP 2.7.6
1/05 8a-16
REP 2.7.7 HCF Elevator Long/Short Cables

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the HCF Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the Front Cover to access the Long Cables only. (Figure 1). 1. Remove the Screws (4) 1. Remove the screw 3. Pull out the cables
2. Remove the cover
2. Slide the Pulley Figure 2 Removing the Cable from the Drive Shaft. Figure 1 Removing the Front Cover 3. Remove the Cables (Figure 2). 4. Remove the Cables from the Front Pulley's (Figure 3).
1/05 8a-17
REP 2.7.7
2. Remove the Cables from the Pulleys
2. Remove the Cables from Pulleys
1. Lift the Elevator Plates 1. Lift the Elevator Plates
Figure 3 Removing the Cables from the Front Pulleys. 5. Remove the Cables from the Rear Pulleys (Figure 4).
Figure 4 Removing the Cables from the Rear Pulleys
Replacement
1. Ensure that the Cables are positioned correctly (Figure 5).
REP 2.7.7
1/05 8a-18
REP 2.7.8 HCF Brake

Cable guides

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. Pull open the HCF Drawer. Remove the HCF Brake (Figure 1).
Short cable
Long cable
Remove the screws (2) while holding Brake Figure 1 Removing the HCF Brake
Figure 5 Positioning the Cables in the correct position 2. Reconnect the Cable Ends to the Shaft refer to (Figure 2). NOTE: Position the Long Cable to the rear of the short cable on the two pulleys. 3. Manually rotate the drive shaft to check that the elevator plate raises and lowers evenly and without interference.
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Brake.
1/05 8a-19
REP 2.7.7, REP 2.7.8
REP 2.7.9 HCF Control PWB

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the HCF Rear Cover. Remove the Control PWB (Figure 1).
Disconnect the P/Js and remove the PWB Figure 1 Removing the Control PWB
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feeder Control PWB.
REP 2.7.9
1/05 8a-20
REP 2.8.26 HCF Feed Motor

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.3) Remove the HCF Feed Motor (Figure 1). 2. Remove the Screws (4)
REP 2.8.27 HCF Feeder Assembly

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.10). Disconnect P/J 841 from the HCF Control PWB (PL 15.16). Remove the 2 screws on the right side and 1 from the front of the HCF. Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (Figure 1). 2. Remove the Feeder Assembly
1. Remove the Feed Belt
1. Disconnect P/J-842
3. Remove the Feed Motor
Figure 1 Removing the HCF Feed Motor
Replacement
NOTE: Do not over tension the Feed Belt. The tension produced by the weight of the motor is sufficient. 1. 2. 3. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Feed Motor. Set the belt tension by loosening the four screws securing the Feed Motor and bias the motor down to the bottom of the slots and tighten the four screws. Loosen the screw securing the tensioning bracket and allow it to pivot into the drive belt. Tighten the screw
Figure 1 Removing the HCF Feeder Assembly
Replacement
NOTE: Ensure that the Clutch and Locator Tab are engaged. NOTE: Do not over tension the Feed Head Drive Belt. The tension produced by the spring is sufficient. 1. 2. 3. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Feeder Assembly. Set the belt tension by loosening the four screws securing the Feed Motor and bias the motor down to the bottom of the slots and tighten the four screws. Loosen the screw securing the tensioning bracket and allow it to pivot into the drive belt. Tighten the screw.
1/05 8a-21
REP 2.8.26, REP 2.8.27
REP 2.8.35 HCF Front/Rear Spring

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). 1. Remove the KL-clips and Bushings (2) at shaft ends
2. 3.
Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27). Remove the HCF Front/Rear Spring (Figure 1).
4. Slide the shaft left/right to remove the Front/Rear Springs
3. Release the Spring from the Spring Stop 2. Remove the Retard Spring at rear Figure 1 Removing the Front/Rear Spring
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Front/Rear Spring.
REP 2.8.35
1/05 8a-22
REP 2.8.36 HCF Baffle Assembly

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5).
2. 3. 4.
Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27). Remove the HCF Front/Rear Springs (REP 2.8.35). Remove the HCF Baffle Assembly (Figure 1).
1. Remove the KL-clip and Bushing at each end of shaft 2. Remove the Baffle Assembly
Figure 1 Removing the Baffle Assembly
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the HCF Baffle Assembly.
1/05 8a-23
REP 2.8.36
REP 2.8.37 HCF Feed Belt

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.10). Remove the HCF Feed Belt (Figure 1). 3. Remove Drive Motor and Mounting Bracket as one (4 screws)
REP 2.8.38 HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the HCF Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls (Figure 1). NOTE: The Front Chute must be removed to allow clearance to remove the Feed Roll. Rolls are identical and interchangeable. Feed Roll Nudger Roll
2. Remove KL-clip and Pulley
Front Chute
Retard Roll
Push the Lock Tab and slip Roll off shaft (3)
Figure 1 Removing the Feed/Nudger/Retard Rolls 4. Remove Feed Belt 1. Remove the KL-clip and Feed Clutch
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Rolls.
Figure 1 Removing the Feed Belt
Replacement
NOTE: Place the Feed Belt on the Pulley before replacing the Drive Motor. NOTE: Do not over tension the Feed Belt. The tension produced by the spring is sufficient. 1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feed Belt.
REP 2.8.37, REP 2.8.38
1/05 8a-24
REP 2.8.39 HCF One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27). Remove the One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch (Figure 1). 1. Remove the Front Chute
REP 2.8.40 HCF Friction Clutch

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the HCF Paper Tray Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the Friction Clutch (Figure 1). 3. Remove the Friction Clutch 2. Remove the Spacer
2. Push the Lock Tab and slide the Feed Roll off shaft
3. Remove the C-clip and Gear
4. Remove the Feed and Gear Clutch
1. Push the Release Tab and slide the Retard Roll off shaft Figure 1 Removing the Friction Clutch
Figure 1 Removing the Feed/Gear Clutch
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Friction Clutch.
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the One-Way Feed/Gear Clutch.
1/05 8a-25
REP 2.8.39, REP 2.8.40
REP 2.8.41 HCF Feed Clutch

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the HCF Rear Cover (PL 15.10) Remove the Feed Clutch (Figure 1). 1.Remove the KL-clip 2. Disconnect P/J851
REP 2.8.42 HCF TAR Sensor

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the HCF Assembly (REP 2.7.5). Remove the HCF Feeder Assembly (REP 2.8.27). Remove the Feed Sensor (Figure 1).
2. Remove Screws (2) and Bracket
1. Disconnect P/J-853
3. Remove the Sensor 3. Remove the Feed Clutch
Figure 1 Removing the Feed Clutch
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feed Clutch
Figure 1 Removing the Feed Sensor
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Feed Sensor.
REP 2.8.41, REP 2.8.42
1/05 8a-26
REP 2.8.43 HCF Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensors

To avoid electrical shock, switch-OFF the Main Power Switch and disconnect the Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the HCF (REP 2.7.5). Remove the Tray Empty/Stack Height Sensor (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connectors
2. Remove the Sensor (s)
Figure 1 Removing the Sensor(s)
Replacement
1. Reverse the above procedures to replace the Sensor.
1/05 8a-27
REP 2.8.43
REP 2.8.43
1/05 8a-28
ADJ 2.1 HCF Registration

Purpose
The purpose of this adjustment is to set HCF Side Edge Registration to within specification.
Check
1. 2. 3. Load HCF with 8.5X11/A4 long edge feed paper. Make a 100% copy of Test Pattern 82P522 side A (USO) 82P521 side A (XL). Registration should be 5.0 +/-1.1mm (Figure 1).
Side Registration 5.0 +/-1.1mm Figure 1 Checking the Registration
1/05 8a-29
ADJ 2.1
Adjustment
NOTE: It may be necessary to perform this adjustment more than once to obtain the correct Side Edge Registration. 1. 2. 3. Pull out the HCF. Adjust the HCF Side Edge Registration (Figure 2). If necessary, loosen the two Front Cover alignment screws and adjust the Front Cover gap (Figure 2).
ADJ 2.1
1/05 8a-30
1. Loosen Two Screws on Both Sides
Front Cover Alignment Screws
2. Adjust the Tray
Scale
Figure 2 Adjusting the Registration NOTE: Ensure that both sides of the High Capacity Feeder are positioned at the same point on Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 the scales before tightening the screws. High Capacity Feeder
1/05 8a-31
ADJ 2.1
ADJ 2.1
1/05 8a-32
PL 15.1 Elevator Assembly: Part 1 OF 3

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Part 010K02271 026E57490 110E10051 017E09330 030K68140 Description Elevator Assembly (Not Spared) (REP 2.7.5) Slide Plate (Not Spared) Screw HCF Interlock Switch Front Caster (Adjustable) Rear Caster (Not Spared) Docking Bracket
1/05 8a-33
PL 15.1

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Part 802K21821 Description Flexure Spring (Not Spared) Elevator Housing (Not Spared) Front Cover (Includes Brackets) Paper Guide (Not Spared) Left Hand Bracket (Not Spared) Latch (Not Spared) Spring (Not Spared)
PL 15.2
1/05 8a-34

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part Description Long Cable (Not Spared) Elevator Housing (Not Spared) Wire Guide (Not Spared) Pulley (Not Spared) Short Cable (Not Spared) Cable Pulley (Not Spared) Shaft (Not Spared) Gear (Not Spared) Brake (Not Spared) Bumper (Not Spared)
1/05 8a-35
PL 15.3
PL 15.10 Paper Feeder Assembly: Part 1 OF 6

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part 022K78881 604K22210 892E26370 127K34670 004E11220 003E28840 Description HCF Feeder Assembly (W/TAG HCF2) (REP 2.8.27) HFC Feeder Assmebly Kit (W/TAG 6) Paper Jam Instruction Label (REP 2.8.37) HCF Feed Motor Bumper Pin Lock (Not Spared) Latch
PL 15.10
1/05 8a-36

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Part 030K70290 130E81311 913W01205 Description Bumper (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Feeder Housing Sensor Bracket (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) HCF Tar Sensor (REP 2.8.42) Wire Harness (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Wire Clip (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Connector
1/05 8a-37
PL 15.11

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part 007E89010 054E06492 120E15182 074E91050 107E08680 022K55041 413W29457 020E31540 121K10533 023E23160 007E88990 Description Gear (22/20T) Feeder Housing (P/O PL15.11 Item 2) Front Chute Sensor Actuator Actuator Support Tray Empty Sensor (REP 2.8.43), Stack Height Sensor (REP 2.8.43) Drive Roll Bearing Pulley Gear/Pulley (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Clutch Feed Belt Idler Bracket (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Idler Roller (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Gear (22T)
PL 15.12
1/05 8a-38

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Part 005K04490 809E25230 809E02540 023E15032 Description One Way Clutch (REP 2.8.41) Feeder Housing (P/O PL15.11 Item 2) Bearing (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Front Spring (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) (REP 2.8.35) Rear Spring (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) (REP 2.8.35) Retard Spring Link Spring Stopper Link
1/05 8a-39
PL 15.13

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 005K04460 007E88971 013E92890 022K64850 059K27640 022K49980 006E58342 413W29357 007E88961 005K04470 Description Feeder Housing (P/O PL15.11 Item 2) Nudger Feeder Assembly (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) One Way Clutch (REP 2.8.39) Gear (25T) Bearing Feed/Nudger Roller (REP 2.8.38) Feed/Nudger Roller (Alternate) Feed/Nudger Roller (Alternate) Support (P/O Item 2) Feed Shaft Bearing Gear (31T) Nudger Shaft (P/O Item 2) Gear Clutch (25T) (REP 2.8.39)
PL 15.14
1/05 8a-40

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part 059K00470 005K04480 014E83230 022K64850 022K49980 059K27640 013E14600 600K89040 Description Retard Assembly (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Pivot Shaft (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Bearing (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Exit Baffle (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) (REP 2.8.36) Pinch Roll Extension Spring P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Friction Clutch (REP 2.8.40) Retard Shaft (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Spacer Retard Roller Retard Roller (Alternate) Retard Roller (Alternate) Retard Support (P/O PL15.10 Item 1) Feeder Housing (P/O PL15.11 Item 2) Bearing HCF Skew Repair Kit (W/TAG 3)
1/05 8a-41
PL 15.15
PL 15.16 Elevator Motor and Feed Motor

Item 1 2 3 4 Part 127K40720 127K34670 160K72183 Description HCF Elevator Motor Assembly Feed Motor (REP 2.8.26) Damper (Not Spared) HCF Control PWB (W/TAG HCF1, TAG HCF4, TAG HCF5) (REP 2.7.9) Rear Frame Spring (P/O Item 1) Harness Clip (Not Spared) HCF/IOT Interface Harness Bushing (Not Spared) Cable Tie PWB Standoff Standoff Harness (Not Spared) Switch Harness HCF Paper Size Switch, Tray In Switch Coupler (P/O Item 1) HCF Elevator Motor (P/O Item 1) (REP 2.7.6)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
001E51850 162K51600 420W10201 116P20301 116P20612 162K21160 110E07300
PL 15.16
1/05 8a-42
Part Number Index

Part Number Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 001E51850 003E28840 003E80700 004E11220 005K04460 005K04470 005K04480 005K04490 006E58342 007E88961 007E88971 007E88990 007E89010 010K02271 012E07691 013E14600 013E82480 013E92890 014E83230 017E09330 017E09680 020E17410 020E25770 020E31540 022E24880 022K49980 022K55041 022K64850 022K78881 023E15032 023E23160 026E57490 029E29580 030K68140 030K70290 032E91250 050K39670 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part List PL 15.16 PL 15.10 PL 15.3 PL 15.10 PL 15.14 PL 15.14 PL 15.15 PL 15.13 PL 15.14 PL 15.14 PL 15.14 PL 15.12 PL 15.12 PL 15.1 PL 15.3 PL 15.15 PL 15.15 PL 15.14 PL 15.15 PL 15.1 PL 15.1 PL 15.3 PL 15.3 PL 15.12 PL 15.12 PL 15.14 PL 15.15 PL 15.12 PL 15.14 PL 15.15 PL 15.10 PL 15.13 PL 15.12 PL 15.1 PL 15.10 PL 15.1 PL 15.11 PL 15.3 PL 15.15 1/05 8a-43 127K40720 130E81311 160K72183 162K21160 162K51600 413W29357 413W29457 420W10201 600K89040 604K22210 802K21821 809E02540 809E25230 892E26370 913W01205 068K26210 068K91010 074E91050 107E08680 110E07300 110E10051 116P20301 116P20612 120E15182 121K10533 127K34670 054E06492 059K00470 059K27640
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 15.12 PL 15.15 PL 15.14 PL 15.15 PL 15.12 PL 15.2 PL 15.12 PL 15.12 PL 15.16 PL 15.1 PL 15.16 PL 15.16 PL 15.12 PL 15.12 PL 15.10 PL 15.16 PL 15.16 PL 15.11 PL 15.16 PL 15.16 PL 15.16 PL 15.14 PL 15.12 PL 15.16 PL 15.15 PL 15.10 PL 15.2 PL 15.13 PL 15.13 PL 15.10 PL 15.11
Part Number Index
Part Number Index
1/05 8a-44

1. To find the location of a connector, refer to the Figure and Item Number of the Plug/Jack Location Drawings section, by referring to Figure and Item Number of the Wiring Connector List. The Plug/Jack and P/J in the Index are identified by following method: a. b. c. J250 represents Jack 250. P250 represents Plug 250 Numerals without P or J represent both Jack and Plug
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index P/J No. J1 J2 P/J7 P/J841 P/J842 P/J843 P/J845 Figure No. Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Item No. 4 5 3 1 7 6 2
2.
Refer to Figure 1 for an example of the Plug/Jack Index connector list.
1056
Figure x
Item number in the Illustration that shows the specific location of a Plug/Jack. Figure number of the Illustration showing the area of the Finisher where the Plug/Jack can be located.
P/J Number
1/05 8a-45
Wiring Connector List, Plug/Jack Index
Plug/Jack Locator Diagram
Figure 1 HCF Control PWB High Capacity Feeder Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 8a-46
HCF BSDs
Purpose
The Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs) show the distribution of electrical and mechanical power. Each functional chain is represented by a BSD. A BSD is a functional flow diagram containing electrical information and mechanical inputs and outputs. The functional flow is from left to right (inputs on the left and outputs on the right). The HCF BSDs are divided into the following functional chains: Chain 7 Paper Supply Chain 8 Paper Feed
1/05 8a-47
HCF BSDs
Chain 7 Paper Supply
Figure 1 BSD 7.11 HCF Paper Stacking
HCF BSDs
1/05 8a-48
Figure 2 BSD 7.12 HCF Elevator Motor Control
1/05 8a-49
HCF BSDs
Chain 8 Paper Feed
Figure 3 BSD 8.11 HCF Drive Control
HCF BSDs
1/05 8a-50
Figure 4 BSD 8.12 HCF Paper Feed
1/05 8a-51
HCF BSDs
Figure 5 BSD 8.13 HCF Communication
HCF BSDs
1/05 8a-52
8B Convenience Stapler
Status Indicator RAPs Convenience Stapler RAPs
ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP...................................................................................... OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure .................................................................. 8b-3 8b-5 8b-7
Repairs
REP 15-1 Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness.....................................................
Parts Lists Convenience Stapler

PL 16.1 Convenience Stapler ......................................................................................... Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8b-9 8b-10
1/05 8b-1
Convenience Stapler
Convenience Stapler
1/05 8b-2
B The Convenience Stapler Top Cover closes securely and remains closed during operation of the Stapler. Y N Replace the Convenience Stapler Top Cover (PL 16.1). Check the red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated. Y N Go to the Stapler Checkout Procedure. Replace the Staple Cartridge. If the problem continues after replacing the Staple Cartridge, replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
ST-1 Convenience Stapler RAP

The Convenience Stapler is exhibiting one or more of the following problems: The Stapler is not operating correctly; poorly clinched staples, no staples. The green LED is not illuminated; indicating low staples, jammed staple, or loss of power to the Stapler. The red LED is illuminated; indicating low staples. Ensure there is power to the Convenience Stapler. Ensure that the Stapler Top Cover is closed and that Interlock Actuator is not damaged.
Initial Actions
Do the following:
Check the position of the Stapler Head.

The Convenience Stapler is stuck in the down (clinched or stapled) position. Y N Close the Convenience Stapler Top Cover and attempt to staple a stack of paper. Check the green LED on the Convenience Stapler. The green LED is illuminated. Y N Check the Stapler Interlock Switch Actuator, located on the Convenience Stapler Top Cover. Ensure that it is not missing or damaged. The check of the Stapler Interlock Switch Actuator is good. Y N Replace the Convenience Stapler Top Cover (PL 16.1). Check the Convenience Stapler Power Cord. The Power Cord for the Convenience Stapler is connected securely to the Convenience Stapler. Y N Ensure the Convenience Stapler Power Cord is connected securely. Check the green LED on the Convenience Stapler. The green LED is illuminated. Y N Go to the Convenience Stapler Electrical Check. Check the red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated. Y N Remove and the reinstall the Staple Cartridge. The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after reinstalling the Staple Cartridge. Y N Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1). Go to Final Actions. Replace the Staple Cartridge. If the problem continues after replacing the Staple Cartridge, replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1) Go to the Convenience Stapler Electrical Check.
Close the Convenience Stapler Top Cover to actuate the interlock switch. Ensure there is power at the Convenience Stapler.
Check the position of the Stapler Head. The Convenience Stapler remains stuck in the down (clinched or stapled) position. Y N Go to Final Actions. Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
Convenience Stapler Electrical Check

Check for 110 VAC at the Convenience Stapler. The voltage is 110 VAC. Y N Remove the Stapler PWB Cover to gain access to Stapler Power Cord to PWB connector. Measure the voltage across the connector. The voltage is 110 VAC. Y N Ensure that the wires are seated securely into the connector on the PWB. Repair as required. Do the following: Ensure the Stapler Harness is connected to the Convenience Stapler PWB. Remove the Staple Cartridge. Close the Convenience Stapler Top Cover.
Check the red LED on the Convenience Stapler. The red LED is illuminated. Y N Replace the Convenience Stapler PWB (PL 16.1). If the problem continues, replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1). Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1). Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1).
1/05 8b-3
Convenience Stapler
Stapler Checkout Procedure

NOTE: The customer has described the problem as poorly clinched staples or missing staples. The customer describes the problem as poorly clinched staples. Y N Remove and then reinstall the Staple Cartridge. The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after reinstalling the Staple Cartridge. Y N The unformed staple roll may be wound too tightly or the Driver Bar may be out of position. Do the following: Remove the Staple Cartridge. Perform the OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure. Reinstall the Staple Cartridge. Convenience Stapler Top Cover Stapler Head
The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after performing the Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure. Y N Replace the Staple Cartridge and attempt to staple a stack of documents. The Convenience Stapler operates correctly after replacing the Staple Cartridge. Y N Replace the Convenience Stapler Assembly (PL 16.1). Go to Final Actions. Go to Final Actions. Go to Final Actions. The customer is attempting to staple a set that is greater than 50 sheets of 24 lb (120 gsm) or equivalent thickness. Y N Replace the Staple Cartridge in the Convenience Stapler Inform the customer the stapling capacity of the Convenience Stapler is 50 sheets of 24 lb (120 gsm) or equivalent thickness.
red LED
green LED
Figure 1 Stapler Components
Convenience Stapler
1/05 8b-4
OF-8 Staple Cartridge Checkout Procedure

The unformed staple roll is wound too tightly in the Staple Cartridge and/or the Driver Bar is out of position. This may cause the following: The Convenience Stapler is failing to staple documents. The Staple Cartridge cannot be installed correctly in the Convenience Stapler. The Staple Cartridge pops out of the Convenience Stapler when attempting to staple. NOTE: Do not grasp the exposed staple roll
Staple Cartridge Checkout

To ensure the unformed staple roll in the Staple Cartridge is not wound too tight, do the following: Orient the Staple Cartridge as shown in Figure 1. Using one hand, grasp the Staple Cartridge along the top and bottom. Vigorously snap the cartridge in the direction of the arrow (refer to Figure 1) about 10 times being careful not to squeeze the cartridge too tightly. You should be able to hear the roll clunking back and forth inside the cartridge. Check to see if the Driver Bar is flush with the leading edge of the cartridge as shown in Figure 2. If necessary, use a pen or other pointed tool to move the plate edge tab located on the left side of the cartridge. Move the tab until the Driver Bar is even with the leading edge of the cartridge. Ensure the stapler is in the home position when re-inserting the cartridge into the Staple Head. If correctly positioned, the staple will be laying down flat on the Driver Bar. If the staple is oriented on end, as shown in Figure 3, or if the staple appears to be malformed in any way, remove it. Figure 1 Checking the Cartridge
To ensure the Driver Bar is in the correct position, do the following:
Ensure the first staple is in the correct position and the staple is not damaged:
1/05 8b-5
Convenience Stapler
Incorrect edge Correct edge tab position tab position
If the Driver Bar is not even with the edge of the cartridge, use a pen or other pointed tool to move the edge tab to the correct position.
Ensure the Driver Bar is even with the edge of the cartridge.
Figure 2 Checking the Driver Bar
Remove the staple if it is malformed, or it is in this position.
Figure 3 Checking the Staples
Convenience Stapler
1/05 8b-6
REP 15-1 Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness

1. 2. 3. Disconnect the Convenience Stapler Harness from the back of the Convenience Stapler. Remove the bottom plate from the Convenience Stapler (Figure 1). Remove the Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness (Figure 2).
1
Remove the screws (3).
1
Disconnect the connectors.
2
Carefully separate the bottom plate just enough to access the connector for the stapler.
2
Remove the harness
Figure 2 Remove the Harness
3
Disconnect the stapler connector from the PWB.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install the new Convenience Stapler Internal DC Harness. Reconnect the stapler connector to the PWB. Reinstall the bottom plate. Connect the Convenience Stapler Harness to the Convenience Stapler. Check the operation of the Convenience Stapler by removing the Staple Cartridge and closing the Convenience Stapler Cover. The red LED should be illuminated.
Figure 1 Remove the Plate
1/05 8b-7
Convenience Stapler
REP 15-1
Convenience Stapler
REP 15-1
1/05 8b-8
PL 16.1 Convenience Stapler

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Part 802K22721 014K06500 108R00152 802K23162 160K65236 117E22380 Description Stapler Cover Stapler Head Cartridge (3 Packs) Stapler Mounting Cover (Not Spared) PWB Cover (Not Spared) Stapler PWB Wire
1/05 8b-9
Convenience Stapler
PL 16.1
Part Number Index

Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 014K06500 108R00152 117E22380 160K65236 802K22721 802K23162 Part List PL 16.1 PL 16.1 PL 16.1 PL 16.1 PL 16.1 PL 16.1
Convenience Stapler
Part Number Index
1/05 8b-10
8C Edit Pad
02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP ............................................................ OF-2 LED/Switch Panel PWB Communication Fail RAP ............................................... 8c-3 8c-3
Parts Lists Edit Pad Components

PL 17.1 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2) ........................................................................... PL 17.2 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2) ........................................................................... 8c-5 8c-6 8c-7 8c-8 8c-9 8c-10 8c-13
Common Hardware
Common Hardware ......................................................................................................... Part Number Index ..........................................................................................................
Plug/Jacks
Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... Plug/Jack Index...............................................................................................................

Edit Pad BSDs ................................................................................................................
1/05 8c-1
Edit Pad
Edit Pad
1/05 8c-2
02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP

The UI PWB detected a communication fault between the UI PWB and the Edit Pad PWB.
OF-2 LED/Switch Panel PWB Communication Fail RAP

The UI PWB detected a communication fault between the UI PWB and the LED/Switch Panel PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 2.5 and BSD 2.6 in the following procedure. Verify that P800 at the rear of machine is firmly connected. Verify that P/J820 and P/J824 on the Edit Pad are firmly connected.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 2.5 and BSD 2.6 on the following procedure. Verify that P800 at the rear of machine is firmly connected. Verify that P/J821 and P/J824 on the Edit Pad are firmly connected.
Procedure
There is +24 VDC between P/J824-19 and P/J824-18,20,21. Y N Switch off the power. Disconnect P800. Switch on the power. There between P800-19 and P800-18,20,21. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Power (IIT/IPS LVPS) RAP. is +24 VDC
Procedure
Select the Edit Pad option. The LEDs on the Edit Pad Switch Panel light. Y N There is +5 VDC between P800-5,6,23,24 and P800-10,25,26 on the Edit Pad. Y N Switch off the power. Disconnect P800. Switch on the power. There is +5 VDC between P800-5,6,23,24 and P800-10,25,26. Y N Switch off the power. Go to the +5VDC Power (IIT/IPS) RAP. Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 and check the harness between P800 and P/ J821 for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC between P/J824-5,6,23,24 and P/J824-10,25,26 on the Edit Pad. Y N Switch off the power. Go to Flag 1 and check the harness between P800 and P/ J821 for an open circuit. Switch off the power. Go to Flag 2 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK replace the LED/Switch Panel (PL 17.1). If the problem continues replace the UI PWB (PL9.5). Switch off the power. Go to Flag 3 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK replace the LED/Switch Panel (PL 17.1). If the problem continues replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5).
Switch off the power. Go to Flag 4 and check the harness between P800 and P/J824 for an open circuit. There is +24 VDC between P/J820-7 and P/J820-6,8,9. Y N Switch off the power. Go to Flag 4 and check the harness between P/J824 and P/J820 for an open circuit. There is +24 VDC between CN1-7 and CN1-6,8,9. Y N Switch off the power. Go to Flag 4 and check the harness between P/J820 and CN1 for an open circuit. Switch off the power. Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 and check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is OK replace the Edit Pad Control PWB (PL 17.2). If the problem continues replace the UI PWB (PL 9.5). If the problem continues replace the IPS-EDIT PWB (PL 3.5).
1/05 8c-3
Edit Pad
02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP,
Edit Pad
02-282 Edit Pad PWB Communication Fail RAP, OF-2
1/05 8c-4
PL 17.1 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Part 802K10992 802K10950 802K08940 003E48130 177K99192 117K19730 019E31060 121E90620 004E99060 120K91660 048E35191 048K37862 892E27311 892E27301 892E27291 Description Edit Pad Assembly Screw (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1) Edit Panel Assembly Platen Cover Assembly Platen Stopper (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1) Hinge Inner Cover (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1) Clamp (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1) Edit Cable Connector Support (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1) Screw (P/O PL 17.1 Item 1) Led/Switch Cable Pen Holder Magnet Cushion Platen Cover (P/O PL 17.1 Item 4) Actuator Sheet (P/O PL 17.1 Item 3) Color Sheet Led/Switch Panel Top Overlay (P/O PL 17.1 Item 3) Top Overlay (Portugese) Top Overlay (Spanish) Top Overlay (French) Platen Cushion (Not Spared) Platen Inner Cover (Not Spared)
1/05 8c-5
Edit Pad
PL 17.1
PL 17.2 Edit Pad Components (1 of 2)

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 802K10940 802K10960 802E09660 002K48500 120E92600 071K90530 160K62600 Description Edit Pad Assembly Screw (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1) PWB Cover (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1) Wire Harness (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1) Edit Pad Sheet Sheet Cover Clamp Plate (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1) Lock Pin Pen Bracket (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1) Edit Pad Control PWB Shield Sheet (P/O PL 17.2 Item 1) Edit Pad Control PWB Kit (Not Spared)
Edit Pad
PL 17.2
1/05 8c-6
Common Hardware
Item A B C D E Part 113W20857 113W36057 158W27855 153W16055 153W27850 Description Screw (M5 x 8) Screw (M4 x 10) Screw (M3 x 8) Screw (M2 x 10) Screw (M3 x 8)
1/05 8c-7
Edit Pad
Common Hardware
Part Number Index

Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 002K48500 003E48130 004E99060 019E31060 048E35191 048K37862 071K90530 117K19730 120K91660 120E92600 121E90620 160K62600 177K99192 802K08940 802E09660 802K10940 802K10950 802K10960 802K10992 892E27291 892E27301 892E27311 Part List PL 17.2 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.2 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.2 PL 17.1 PL 17.2 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.2 PL 17.2 PL 17.1 PL 17.2 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.1 PL 17.1
Edit Pad
Part Number Index
1/05 8c-8

1. To find the location of a connector, refer to the Figure and Item Number of the Plug/Jack Location Drawings section, by referring to Figure and Item Number of the Wiring Connector List. The Plug/Jack and P/J in the Index are identified by following method: a. b. c. J250 represents Jack 250. P250 represents Plug 250 Numerals without P or J represent both Jack and Plug
2.
Refer to Figure 1 for an explanation of each column heading in the Plug/Jack Index.
P/J No.
Figure No.
Item No.
P/J Number or Designator
1/05 8c-9
Edit Pad
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index P/J No. CN1 CN2 CN3 P800 P/J820 P/J821 P/J824 Figure No. Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Item No. 4 1 3 7 5 2 6
Edit Pad
Plug/Jack Index
1/05 8c-10
Figure 1 Edit Pad
1/05 8c-11
Edit Pad
Plug/Jack Index
Edit Pad
Plug/Jack Index
1/05 8c-12
Edit Pad BSDs

Purpose
The Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs) show the distribution of electrical and mechanical power. Each functional chain is represented by a BSD. A BSD is a functional flow diagram containing electrical information and mechanical inputs and outputs. The functional flow is from left to right (inputs on the left and outputs on the right).
1/05 8c-13
Edit Pad
Edit Pad BSDs
Figure 1 BSD 2.5 Edit Pad
Edit Pad
Edit Pad BSDs
1/05 8c-14
Figure 2 BSD 2.6 Edit Pad Monitoring
1/05 8c-15
Edit Pad
Edit Pad BSDs
Edit Pad
Edit Pad BSDs
1/05 8c-16
8D Finisher
Chain 03
3-319 Finisher/Sorter Communication Failure RAP ........................................................ 8d-3 8d-5 8d-7 8d-8 8d-10 8d-10 8d-11 8d-12 8d-13 8d-15 8d-16 8d-17 8d-19 8d-21 8d-22 8d-22 8d-23 8d-23 8d-24 8d-24 8d-25 8d-26 8d-27 8d-27 8d-28 8d-28 8d-29 8d-29 8d-30 8d-30 8d-31 8d-31 8d-32 8d-32 8d-33 8d-34 8d-36 8d-37 8d-37 8d-38 8d-39 8d-39 8d-40 1/05 8d-1
Chain 11
11-107 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP .................................................................. 11-108 SCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP ........................................................................... 11-109 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP ................................................................. 11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP ............................................ 11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP ........................................... 11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam RAP......................................... 11-116 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP......................................... 11-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP..................................................... 11-143 Mailbox Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP .............................................................. 11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP .................................................... 11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP ............................................................ 11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP ........................................................... 11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP ........................................................... 11-191 Paper Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP ........................ 11-192 Paper Remains at SCT Exit Sensor RAP ........................................................... 11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP ................................................................. 11-301 Mailbox Door Interlock Open RAP ...................................................................... 11-302 Decurler Door Interlock Open RAP ..................................................................... 11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP .............................................................................. 11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP ............................................................................................ 11-512 Simple Catch Tray (SCT) Full Stack RAP........................................................... 11-911 Bin 1 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-912 Bin 2 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-913 Bin 3 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-914 Bin 4 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-915 Bin 5 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-916 Bin 6 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-917 Bin 7 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-918 Bin 8 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-919 Bin 9 Full Stack RAP........................................................................................... 11-920 Bin 10 Full Stack RAP......................................................................................... 11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP ................................................................................... 11-922 Sorter Stacker Full RAP......................................................................................
12-246 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-248 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-249 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-251 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-253 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-254 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-255 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-256 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-264 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-265 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-266 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-302 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-303 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-305 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-306 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-400/12-538 RAP......................................................................................................... 12-531 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-536 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-537 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-570 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-571 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-580 RAP.....................................................................................................................
8d-41 8d-42 8d-43 8d-43 8d-44 8d-45 8d-46 8d-47 8d-48 8d-49 8d-50 8d-51 8d-51 8d-52 8d-52 8d-53 8d-53 8d-54 8d-55 8d-55 8d-56 8d-57 8d-59 8d-59 8d-62 8d-63 8d-64 8d-65 8d-65 8d-66 8d-67 8d-68 8d-69 8d-70 8d-71 8d-72 8d-73 8d-73 8d-74 8d-75 8d-75 8d-76 8d-76 8d-77
15.1
REP 15.1.1 Decurler ....................................................................................................... REP 15.1.2 Decurler Rolls 1 and 2 ................................................................................. REP 15.1.3 Reflector and Cam ....................................................................................... REP 15.1.4 Decurler Stepper Motor................................................................................ REP 15.1.5 Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll ......................................................... REP 15.1.6 Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll.................................................................. REP 15.1.7 Decurler PWB .............................................................................................. REP 15.1.8 Cam Drive Shaft........................................................................................... REP 15.1.9 Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper ................................................................ REP 15.1.10 Decurler Drive Roll 2.................................................................................. REP 15.1.11 Decurler Drive Roll 1.................................................................................. REP 15.1.12 Decurler Entrance Roll............................................................................... REP 15.1.13 Decurler Exit Roll ....................................................................................... REP 15.1.14 Entrance Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll ....................................................... REP 15.1.15 Finisher Transport Motor............................................................................ REP 15.1.16 Finisher Drive Belt...................................................................................... REP 15.1.17 Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly ........................................................... REP 15.1.18 SCT Static Eliminator................................................................................. REP 15.1.19 SCT Exit Sensor ........................................................................................ REP 15.1.20 SCT Pinch Roll........................................................................................... REP 15.1.21 Finisher Transport Roll 1............................................................................ REP 15.1.22 Finisher Transport Roll 2............................................................................
Chain 12
12-120 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-121 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-170 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-180 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-181 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-240 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-243 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-244 RAP..................................................................................................................... 12-245 RAP..................................................................................................................... Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
15.2
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.1 Compiler Tray Solenoid ............................................................................... REP 15.2.2 Stacker Tray Assembly................................................................................ REP 15.2.4 Stacker Full Sensors.................................................................................... REP 15.2.5 Stacker Upper and Lower Limit Sensors ..................................................... REP 15.2.6 Stacker Tray Paper Sensor ......................................................................... REP 15.2.7 Stacker Motor .............................................................................................. REP 15.2.8 Lower Exit Chute Assembly ......................................................................... REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts .............................................................................. REP 15.2.10 Stacker Tray .............................................................................................. REP 15.2.11 Tamper Motor ............................................................................................ REP 15.2.12 Tamper Home Sensor ............................................................................... REP 15.2.13 Compiler Paper Sensor ............................................................................. REP 15.2.14 End Wall Open Sensor .............................................................................. REP 15.2.15 Tamper Motor Drive Belt............................................................................ REP 15.2.16 End Wall Motor .......................................................................................... REP 15.2.17 Eject Clamp Sensor ................................................................................... REP 15.2.18 Stacker Offset Home Sensor ..................................................................... REP 15.2.19 Eject Bracket Assembly ............................................................................. REP 15.2.20 Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt ............................................................. REP 15.2.21 Eject Shaft Assembly ................................................................................. REP 15.2.22 Compiler Cover Assembly ......................................................................... REP 15.2.23 Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly................................................................ REP 15.2.24 Upper Exit Chute Assembly ....................................................................... REP 15.2.25 Exit Roll...................................................................................................... REP 15.2.26 Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly .............................................................. REP 15.2.27 Paddle Drive Belt ....................................................................................... REP 15.2.28 Stacker Height Sensor............................................................................... REP 15.2.29 Unload While Run Switch .......................................................................... REP 15.2.30 Compiler Entrance Sensor......................................................................... REP 15.2.31 Eject Paddle Home Sensor........................................................................ REP 15.2.32 Eject Motor................................................................................................. REP 15.2.33 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor...........................................................................
8d-79 8d-80 8d-81 8d-82 8d-82 8d-83 8d-83 8d-84 8d-85 8d-87 8d-88 8d-89 8d-90 8d-91 8d-92 8d-93 8d-94 8d-95 8d-96 8d-97 8d-98 8d-99 8d-100 8d-101 8d-102 8d-104 8d-105 8d-106 8d-106 8d-107 8d-108 8d-109 8d-111 8d-111 8d-112 8d-112 8d-113 8d-113 8d-114 8d-114 8d-115 8d-115 8d-116 8d-116 8d-117 8d-117 8d-118 8d-118 8d-119 8d-121 1/05 8d-2
REP 15.3.19 Stapler Position Motor................................................................................ REP 15.3.20 Mailbox Drive Motor ................................................................................... REP 15.3.21 Mailbox Drive Belt ...................................................................................... REP 15.3.23 Docking Interlock Switch............................................................................ REP 15.3.25 Decurler Door Interlock Switch .................................................................. REP 15.3.28 Finisher PWB ............................................................................................. REP 15.3.29 Finisher PWB EPROM............................................................................... REP 15.3.30 Vertical LED and Sensor............................................................................ REP 15.3.31 Bin Tray 1................................................................................................... REP 15.3.32 Bin Trays 2 - 10..........................................................................................
8d-123 8d-123 8d-124 8d-125 8d-125 8d-126 8d-126 8d-127 8d-128 8d-129
Adjustments
ADJ 15.3.1 Staple Position Adjustment........................................................................... 8d-131 ADJ 15.3.2 Stacker Tray Level........................................................................................ 8d-132
Parts Lists Sorter/Finisher

PL 18.1 Finisher Accessory............................................................................................. PL 18.2 Covers - Left, Front ............................................................................................ PL 18.3 Covers - Right, Rear .......................................................................................... PL 18.4 Finisher Components......................................................................................... PL 18.5 Decurler Cover................................................................................................... PL 18.6 Decurler Chute, PWB......................................................................................... PL 18.7 Decurler Roll ...................................................................................................... PL 18.8 Decurler Transport Roll...................................................................................... PL 18.9 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance Roll ......................................................................... PL 18.10 Mailbox Entrance Roll, Sct Exit Roll................................................................. PL 18.11 Mailbox - Gate, PWB, Interlock Switch ............................................................ PL 18.12 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance Chute .................................................................... PL 18.13 Mailbox Chute .................................................................................................. PL 18.14 Stapler - Exit Chute.......................................................................................... PL 18.15 Stapler-Compiler .............................................................................................. PL 18.16 Compiler Tray Components ............................................................................. PL 18.17 Stapler Accessory ............................................................................................ PL 18.18 Stapler Rail Component................................................................................... PL 18.19 Offset And Set Eject......................................................................................... PL 18.20 Eject And Paddle Components ........................................................................ PL 18.21 Eject And Offset Components.......................................................................... PL 18.22 Bin Tray 1......................................................................................................... PL 18.23 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8................................................................................................ PL 18.24 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9................................................................................................ PL 18.25 Bin Tray 10....................................................................................................... PL 18.26 Stacker Tray Drive ........................................................................................... PL 18.27 Stacker Tray..................................................................................................... 8d-135 8d-136 8d-137 8d-138 8d-139 8d-140 8d-141 8d-142 8d-143 8d-144 8d-145 8d-146 8d-147 8d-148 8d-149 8d-150 8d-151 8d-152 8d-153 8d-154 8d-155 8d-156 8d-157 8d-158 8d-159 8d-160 8d-161
15.3
REP 15.3.1 Finisher ........................................................................................................ REP 15.3.2 Stapler Door Assembly ................................................................................ REP 15.3.3 Stapler Cover Assembly .............................................................................. REP 15.3.4 Decurler Door Assembly.............................................................................. REP 15.3.5 Mailbox Door Assembly ............................................................................... REP 15.3.6 Left Lower Cover ......................................................................................... REP 15.3.7 Rear Upper Cover........................................................................................ REP 15.3.8 IOT Connector Cover................................................................................... REP 15.3.9 Finisher PWB Cover .................................................................................... REP 15.3.10 Left Upper Cover ....................................................................................... REP 15.3.11 Top Cover .................................................................................................. REP 15.3.12 Decurler Top Cover ................................................................................... REP 15.3.13 Decurler Rear Cover.................................................................................. REP 15.3.14 Decurler Inner Cover ................................................................................. REP 15.3.15 Rear Lower Cover...................................................................................... REP 15.3.16 Stapler Assembly ....................................................................................... REP 15.3.17 Stapler Position Sensors ........................................................................... REP 15.3.18 Stapler Rail Belt ......................................................................................... Finisher/Sorter
Common Hardware
Common Hardware ......................................................................................................... 8d-162 Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8d-163
Finisher Plug/Jacks
Wiring Connector List ...................................................................................................... 8d-167 Plug/Jack Locator Diagrams .......................................................................................... 8d-169 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Wirenets
Finisher Wirenets ............................................................................................................ 8d-175

Finisher BSDs ................................................................................................................. 8d-183
1/05 8d-3
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-4
3-319 Finisher/Sorter Communication Failure RAP

The 3-319 Fault Code indicates a communication failure between the IOT PWB and the Finisher PWB.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.4 PWB Communications (Finisher) and to BSD 12.7, Monitoring, in this procedure.
Procedure
PO/PO the machine. Fault Code 3-319 is still declared. Y N If an intermittent is suspected, perform the following: Check the connections to the IOT CPU PWB and the Finisher PWB, and the interconnecting harness Reseat P/J405 at the IOT CPU PWB, P/J1027, and P/J1026 at the Finisher PWB, and P880, the Double Plug
Check for +5 VDC at P/J1026-3. +5 VDC is measured at P/J1026-2 on the Finisher PWB. Y N Perform the following: Go to +5VDC Wire Nets and check for an open/short circuit Go to the +5 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Check for +24 VDC at P/J1026-1 on the Finisher PWB. +24 VDC is measured at P/J1026 4. Y N Perform the following: Go to +24VDC-1 Wire Net and check for an open/short circuit Go to the +24 VDC Power (IOT LVPS) RAP
Perform the following: Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.4, and check the following wires for an open/short circuit: Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J1027-1 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-1 Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J1027-2 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-2 Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J1027-3 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-3 Check the wire between Mailbox Control PWB P/J1027-4 and IOT CPU PWB P/ J405-4
Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the IOT CPU PWB (PL 9.2)
1/05 8d-3
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-4
F Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.5. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
11-107 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP

The SCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper. NOTE: Long indicates that the trail edge of the paper has not passed through the Machine Exit Sensor.
Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. There is less than +1 VDC from P/J1021-3 to GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Pulley for proper tension Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.1, BSD12.5, BSD12.10 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mailbox/Sorter paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox/Sorter paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mailbox/Sorter Entrance Roll and the SCT Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, P/J1076, and P/J1078 on the SCT Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the SCT Exit Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2,4 of the Mailbox Drive Motor. Y N There is +24 VDC from pin 1 to pin 4 of P/J1025 on the Mailbox PWB. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.5. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, go to Flag 1 through Flag 5 on BSD 12.1. Check the interlock circuit for an open wire or a malfunctioning interlock switch. If the circuit is OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N There is +5 VDC from pin 3 to pin 4 of P/J1025 on the Mailbox PWB. A B C Reissue D E F 1/05 8d-5 A G
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. The Mailbox Gate is in the Up position Y N Enter dC330 012-081 Mailbox Gate Solenoid Closed. Press Start. The Mailbox Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 and P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 on the Finisher PWB and GND Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) H I J Finisher/Sorter
DocuColor 12/DCCS50
J Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
A Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). The Finisher Gate is in the Down position Y N Enter dC330 012-070 Finisher Gate Solenoid Closed. Press Start. The Finisher Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 and P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB and GND Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the Finisher gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Solenoid (PL 18.11). Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the Vertical Transport.
Enter dC330 012-107 SCT Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the SCT Exit Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13). +5 VDC is measured between P/J1078-1 and P/J1078-3 at the SCT Exit Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and P/J1026-2 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2. Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenet and check wires for an open or short circuit. Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 2 on BSD12.10 and check the harness for an open or a short circuit. Replace or repair as required. Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13). With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1040-1 and GND. Y N Replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
A Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-6
11-108 SCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP

The SCT Exit Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the SCT Exit Sensor actuated.
B Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.5 and BSD12.7 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mailbox paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mailbox Transport Roll and the SCT Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Mailbox PWB and P/J1076 on the SCT Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the SCT Exit Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The actuator is binding. Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the SCT Exit Sensor. Replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the SCT Exit Sensor Y N Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11) Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
1/05 8d-7
Finisher/Sorter
11-108 SCT Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP
11-109 SCT Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP

The SCT Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the trail edge of the same paper. NOTE: Short indicates that the trail edge of the paper has passed through the Machine Exit Sensor.
E Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.5, BSD12.7, BSD12.10 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mailbox paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Mailbox Transport Roll and the SCT Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Mailbox PWB and P/J1076 on the SCT Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. The SCT Gate is in the Up position. Y N Enter dC330 012-061 Tamper Motor Top Front. Press Start. The SCT Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 and P/J1042-13 on the Mailbox PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-15 Mailbox PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Mailbox PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J1042-13 on the Mailbox PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 and GND Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the SCT Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the SCT gate is connected to the SCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the SCT Gate (PL 18.11) and the SCT Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Ensure that the SCT gate is connected to the SCT Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the SCT Gate (PL 18.11) and the SCT Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). The Finisher Gate is in the Down position A 1/05 8d-8 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the SCT Exit Sensor Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11) Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). A B C D Finisher/Sorter E
A Y N Enter dC330 012-070 Finisher Gate Solenoid Closed. Press Start. The Finisher Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 and P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J1042-14 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB and GND Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the Finisher gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Solenoid (PL 18.11). Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper to enter the Vertical Transport. Ensure that the Mailbox Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
G +5 VDC is measured between P/J1078-1 and v-3 Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and P/J1026-2. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2. Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenet and check wires for an open or short circuit. Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 2 on BSD12.10 and check the harness for an open or a short circuit. Replace or repair as required. Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
With paper at the sensor, less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1040-1 and GND. Y N Replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Enter dC330 012-107 SCT Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the SCT Exit Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13). F G Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 8d-9
Finisher/Sorter
11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on.
11-111 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Short RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor at power on.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.6 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the Decurler Exit sensor Ensure that P/J651 and P/J654 on the Decurler Control PWB, and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N Go to Flag 9, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on BSD12.6 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). +5VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND on the Decurler PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Check the Decurler Exit Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Procedure
Finisher/Sorter
11-110 Paper Remains at Decurler Exit Sensor Long
1/05 8d-10
B Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam RAP

The Mailbox Vertical Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.5, BSD12.8 , BSD12.9, and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mailbox paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023 and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Enter dC330 012-115 Vertical Sensor. Manually block the Mailbox Vertical Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes from L to H to L as the paper moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 21 and Flag 22 on BSD12.8. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13). The Vertical LED is on. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and P/J1004-1 on the Mailbox PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1025-3 and P/J1025-4 on the Mailbox PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1029-3 and P/J1029-4 on the Finisher PWB Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/ J1029-1 and P/J44-22 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Go to Flag 19 and Flag 20 on BSD12.8. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Vertical LED (PL 18.22). Go to Flag 21 and Flag 22 on BSD12.8. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13). With paper at the sensor, more than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and DC Com. Y N Replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Finisher/Sorter
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mailbox Vertical Sensor Y N Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2, 4, 6 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage
1/05 8d-11
11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On
Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
11-116 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off Jam RAP

The Mailbox Vertical Sensor did not detect the Trail edge of the paper within the specified time after the Mailbox Vertical Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.5 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mailbox paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023 and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the Mailbox Vertical Sensor Y N Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2, 4, 6 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. A Finisher/Sorter B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8d-12 Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Drive Belt for Damage
11-115 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor On Jam
11-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP

The Mailbox Entrance Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Check the bin entrance area for obstructions. Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) Pinch Rolls (PL 18.12) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.5, BSD12.7 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Mailbox paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Mailbox paper path Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Ensure that connectors P/J1004 on the Mailbox PWB, P/J1022 double plug, P/J1023 and P/J1024, on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor is seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping.
Check the bin entrance area for obstructions. Ensure that the Mailbox front Door is closed properly, in order to provide proper nip pressure to the Vertical Transport Rolls. Check the Mailbox Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. Replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13) if the problem is not resolved.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N The Mailbox Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position. Y N Enter dC330 012-082 Mailbox Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Mailbox Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1024-15 and P/J1024-17 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1024-15 Finisher PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1024-17 and GND Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8d-13 B C D E Finisher/Sorter
11-116 Mailbox Vertical Sensor / Bin 1 Sensor Off
E Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues, replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
A SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Enter dC330 012-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the Mailbox Entrance Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). +5 VDC is measured between P/J1017-1 and P/J1017-3 on the Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2. Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenet and check wires for an open or short circuit. Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. Go to Flag 7 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open. If the wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 8 and Flag 7 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-4 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Ensure that the Mailbox Gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to enter the Vertical Transport. Ensure that the Mailbox Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Pulley for proper tension Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
A Finisher/Sorter
11-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Long RAP
1/05 8d-14
11-143 Mailbox Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP

The Mailbox Entrance Sensor did not deactuate within the specified time after the V-Tra In Sensor actuated.
Initial Actions
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Check the Mailbox Entrance Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The actuator is binding. Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the fed paper to be slow to deactuate the Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13).
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the SCT Exit Sensor Y N Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Check the Drive Belt Tension Pulley for proper tension Check the Drive Belt for Damage 1/05 8d-15 Finisher/Sorter
11-143 Mailbox Entrance Sensor Off Jam RAP
11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP

The Mailbox Entrance Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the Decurler Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the same paper.
E Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, ensure that the Mailbox gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues, replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Initial Actions
Ensure that the Mailbox Gate is connected to the Mailbox Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Check the paper path for any obstructions that could cause the paper not to enter the Vertical Transport. Ensure that the Mailbox Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Mailbox Gate (PL 18.11) and the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Vertical Transport. Y N The Mailbox Gate is in the down or Bin Tray position. Y N Enter dC330 012-082 Mailbox Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Mailbox Gate Solenoid energized. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-15 and P/J1042-17 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J1042-15 Finisher PWB and GND Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Go to the +24 VDC Wirenet and troubleshoot the wire between P/J1042-13 on the Finisher PWB and P/J45-6 on the Distribution PWB Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1042-17 and GND Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). A B C D Finisher/Sorter E A 1/05 8d-16
Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Transport Roll is rotating. Y N The Mailbox Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Drive Belt Tension Pulley for proper tension Check the Drive Belt for Damage Check that the gear pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12)
11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short RAP
A SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)

The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the M/C Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Check the Drive Belt Tension Roll for proper tension. Enter dC330 012-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Manually actuate the Mailbox Entrance Sensor actuator. The display changes from L to H to L as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always H Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for a short circuit to ground. If the harness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-2 and P/J1040-3 Y N CR1 on the Mailbox PWB is on. Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J1040-4 and P/J44-22 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 8 and Flag 7 on BSD12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). With paper at the sensor, less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-4 and GND. Y N Replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10)
Initial Actions
Refer toBSD12.1, BSD12.5, BSD 12.6 and BSD12.7 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Decurler paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the MC Exit Roll and the Decurler Entrance Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler PWB, Double Plug P/J661, P/J1028 on the Finisher PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Decurler Exit Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Decurler. Y N The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs Y N Enter dC330 012-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Check F1 fuse on the Decurler PWB. The fuse is open (blown). Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler PWB. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1026-1 and GND on the Finisher PWB. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Wire Net +24VDC-2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/ J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND A B C D E F Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-17
11-144 Mailbox Entrance Sensor On Jam Short
F Y N Go to Wire Net +5VDC-1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
G Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Enter dC330 012-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10) Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). The Entrance Rolls are rotating. Y N Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping. Entrance Roll Drive Gear (PL 18.8) Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 18.8) Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear (PL 18.8)
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP. Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10) Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)
Enter dC330 012-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Enter dC330 012-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. A B C G Finisher/Sorter
Ensure that the Decurler paper path is free of any paper. Enter dC330 012-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-B5 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 11 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J654-1 and P/J654-3 on the Decurler PWB. H Reissue 1/05 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
8d-18
H Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J651-3 and P/J651-4 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-3 and P/J1028-4 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2. Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or short circuit. Go to Flag 17 on BSD12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Go to Flag 9 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND on the Decurler Exit Sensor. Y N Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10) Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)

The Decurler Exit Sensor did not detect the lead edge of the paper within the specified time after the MC Exit Sensor detected the lead edge of the same paper.
Initial Actions
Refer toBSD12.1, BSD12.5, BSD 12.6 and BSD12.7 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Decurler paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Decurler paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the MC Exit Roll and the Decurler Entrance Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J654, P/J653, and P/J651 on the Decurler PWB, Double Plug P/J661, P/J1028 on the Finisher PWB and P/J658 on the Decurler Exit Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Decurler Exit Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Decurler. Y N The Entrance Rolls are rotating when the Jam occurs Y N Enter dC330 012-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Check F1 fuse on the Decurler PWB. The fuse is open (blown). Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J1026-1 and GND on the Finisher PWB. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Wire Net +24VDC-2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/ J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND A B C D E F Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-19
11-145 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Long RAP, 11-
F Y N Go to Wire Net +5VDC-1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
G Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6).
Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Enter dC330 012-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10) Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)
Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). The Entrance Rolls are rotating. Y N Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping. Entrance Roll Drive Gear (PL 18.8) Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 18.8) Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear (PL 18.8)
Go to the 10-111 Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP Machine Exit Sensor Off Jam RAP. Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10) Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)
Enter dC330 012-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Enter dC330 012-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler Stepping Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. A B C G Finisher/Sorter
Ensure that the Decurler paper path is free of any paper. Enter dC330 012-145 Decurler Exit Sensor. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J654-2 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-B5 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 11 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Use a sheet of paper to actuate the Decurler Exit Sensor. The display changes to H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J654-1 and P/J654-3 on the Decurler PWB. H Reissue 1/05 DocuColor 12/DCCS50
8d-20
H Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J651-3 and P/J651-4 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1028-3 and P/J1028-4 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2. Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or short circuit. Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1 and check the harness for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Go to Flag 9 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). More than +4.5 VDC is measured between P/J658-2 and GND on the Decurler Exit Sensor. Y N Replace the Decurler Exit Sensor (PL 18.6). Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping. Mailbox Entrance Roll (PL 18.10) Pinch Rollers (PL 18.12) SCT Exit Roll (PL 18.10) Drive Belt (PL 18.10) Drive gears (PL 18.7) (PL 18.8)
11-190 Paper Remains on V-Tra In Sensor RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the V-Tra In Sensor at power on.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.7 and BSD12.17 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the V-Tra In sensor and the sensor actuator moves freely. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Ensure that P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, P/J1076 double plug, and P/J1017 on the Mailbox Entrance Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-142 Mailbox Entrance Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD12.7 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). More than +4.3 VDC is measured between P/J1040-4 and GND on the Finisher PWB. Y N Replace the Mailbox Entrance Sensor (PL 18.13). Check the Mailbox Entrance Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
1/05 8d-21
Finisher/Sorter
11-146 Decurler Exit Sensor On Jam Short RAP, 11-
11-191 Paper Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1 Bin Sensor RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor at power on.
11-192 Paper Remains at SCT Exit Sensor RAP

The Control Logic detected that paper remained on the SCT Exit Sensor at power on.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.10 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper is blocking the SCT Exit sensor and the sensor actuator moves freely. Check for excessive static on copies. Check for any obstructions in the paper path. Ensure that P/J1040 on the Mailbox PWB, and P/J1017 on the Mailbox Entrance Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.8 for the following procedure. Ensure that no paper or foreign object is blocking the Mailbox Vertical sensor. Ensure that the Mailbox Vertical sensor and the Vertical LED are clean. Ensure that P/J1004 on the Finisher PWB, and P/J1023 and P/J1024 on the Mailbox Vertical Sensor are connected before beginning this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-115 Vertical Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and P/J1004-1 on the Mailbox PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1025-3 and P/J1025-4 on the Mailbox PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1029-3 and P/J1029-4 on the Finisher PWB Y N Go to the +5 VDC wirenet and troubleshoot the wires between P/J1029-1 and P/J44-22 on the Distribution PWB. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Go to Flag 19 and Flag 20 on BSD12.8. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the harness is good, replace the Vertical LED (PL 18.13). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J1004-3 and DC COM on the Mailbox PWB. Y N Replace the Mailbox Vertical Sensor (PL 18.13). Check the Mailbox Vertical Sensor for intermittent operation. If the sensor is good, Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-107 SCT Entrance Sensor. Press Start. The display is L. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). +5VDC is measured between P/J1040-1 and GND on the Mailbox PWB. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD12.10 and check the harness for a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13). If the problem is intermittent, ensure that the SCT Exit Sensor is clean. If the problem continues, go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD12.10 and check for loose connectors or crimped wires. If the problem continues, replace the SCT Exit Sensor (PL 18.13).
Finisher/Sorter
11-191 Paper Remains at Mailbox Vertical Sensor / 1
1/05 8d-22
11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP

The Control Logic detected paper remained on the Decurler Exit Sensor.
11-301 Mailbox Door Interlock Open RAP

Mailbox Door Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch is open.
Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.1 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J1033 on the Finisher PWB, and P/J1018 on the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch are connected before beginning this RAP. Check the Front Door for proper alignment. Verify that the Front Door closes properly.
Procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-301 Mailbox Door Intlk Sw. The state of the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch is Low and switches to High when the Mailbox Door is opened. Y N With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J1033-1 on the Finisher and GND. Y N Go to the Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
1/05 8d-23
Finisher/Sorter
11-193 Decurler Exit Sensor Static Jam RAP, 11-
11-302 Decurler Door Interlock Open RAP

Decurler Door Interlock Open Failure. This status code is declared when the Decurler Front Cover is open.
11-303 Docking Interlock Open RAP

Docking Interlock Open failure. This status code is declared when the Mailbox is not properly docked.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.1 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J1033 on the Finisher PWB, and P/J1018 on the Decurler Door Interlock Switch are connected before beginning this RAP. Check the Front Cover for proper alignment. Verify that the Front Cover closes properly.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.1 for the following procedure. Ensure that P/J1028 on the Finisher PWB, P/J664 and P/J665 on the Docking Interlock Switches, P/J651 and P/J652 on the Decurler PWB are connected before beginning this RAP. Check the Finisher/Mailbox for proper alignment.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-302 Decurler Door Intlk Sw. The state of the Decurler Door Interlock Switch is Low and switches to High when the Decurler Door is opened. Y N With the Front Cover closed, there is +0 VDC between P/J1028-B6 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Go to the Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.1. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Decurler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check the Decurler Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check the Decurler Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-303 Mailbox Docking INTLK Switches. The status of the Docking Interlock Switches is High and changes to Low when the Mailbox is undocked. Y N With the Finisher/Mailbox docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J1028-B7 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Disconnect P/J665 from the Docking Interlock Switch 2. With the Finisher/Mailbox docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J1028-B7 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Disconnect P/J664 from the Mailbox Docking Interlock Switch 1. With the Finisher/Mailbox docked, there is +5 VDC between P/J1028-B7 on the Finisher PWB and GND. Y N Go to the Flag 10, Flag 11 and Flag 13 on BSD12.1. Check the wires for an short circuit to ground. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Docking Interlock Switch 1 (PL 18.6). Replace the Docking Interlock Switch 2 (PL 18.6). Check the Docking Interlock Switches for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switches are properly aligned and adjusted. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check the Mailbox Door Interlock Switch for intermittent operation. Ensure that the switch and the cover are properly aligned and adjusted. Check that the Finisher/Mailbox is standing on an even floor. Adjust Castors if necessary. If the problem continues, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Finisher/Sorter
11-302 Decurler Door Interlock Open RAP, 11-303
1/05 8d-24
B Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).

This status code is declared when the Decurler Cam Position Sensor did not energize within the specified time (1400msec) after the Decurler Cam Clutch is energized.
Go to Wire Net +24VDC-2. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Press Stop. +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Press Start. approximately +1.5 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND on the Decurler Control PWB. Y N Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND Y N Go to Wire Net +5VDC-1. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Start. +2.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A6 and GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1026-3 and GND Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-A5 and GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). The Entrance Rolls are rotating. Y N Check the following parts for wear, damage, or slipping. Entrance Roll Drive Gear (PL 18.8) Decurler Drive Roll Torque Limiter Gear (PL 18.8) Decurler Stepping Motor Drive Gear (PL 18.8)
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.6 for the following procedure. Ensure that connectors P/J652, and P/J651 on the Decurler PWB, P/J1028 on the Finisher PWB, and P/J656 on the Decurler Cam Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
At Power On, the Mailbox Drive Belt is moving Y N Enter dC330 012-005 Mailbox Drive Motor. Press Start. The Mailbox Drive Motor is rotating Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/J1021-2 of the Mailbox Drive Motor Y N Switch Off the Power. Disconnect P/ P/J1021 from the Mailbox Drive Motor. Switch On the Power. +24 VDC is measured between P/J1021-1 and P/ J1021-2. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10) Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND on the Mailbox Drive Motor. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured between P/J1021-3 and GND on the Mailbox Drive Motor. Y N Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11) Replace the Mailbox Drive Motor (PL 18.10). Ensure that the Mailbox Drive Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft and the drive belt is properly tensioned. Enter dC330 012-010 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 60. The Decurler Motor rotates. Y N +24 VDC is measured between P/J653-1 and GND on the Decurler PWB. Y N +24 VDC is Measured between P/J1026-1 and GND on the Finisher PWB. A B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Enter dC330 012-011 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 130. The Decurler Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +1.5VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). C Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-25
C Enter dC330 012-012 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 220. The Decurler Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +16 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Enter dC330 012-013 Decurler Stepping Motor Speed 350. The Decurler Motor rotates. Y N Approximately +23 VDC is measured between P/J653-3, 4, 5, 6 and GND. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Replace the Decurler Motor (PL 18.8). Enter dC330 012-276 Decurler Cam Position Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the Reflector in and out of the sensor The Decurler Cam Position Sensor alternates between H and L as the reflector is moved in and out of the sensor. Y N The Display is always L Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J652-2 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 8 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler Cam Position Sensor (PL 18.7). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Less than +0.5 VDC is measured between P/J651-B1 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 12 on BSD12.6. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). +5 VDC is Measured between P/J652-1 and P/J652-3 on the Decurler PWB. Y N Replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Go to Flag 7 on BSD12.6. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Decurler Cam Position Sensor (PL 18.7). If the problem continues, replace the Decurler PWB (PL 18.6). Clean the Decurler Cam Position Sensor and the Decurler Cam Position Sensor Reflector. Ensure that there are no obstructions between the Decurler Cam Position Sensor and the Decurler Cam Position Sensor. If the problem continues, replace the Decurler Cam Position Sensor (PL 18.7).
11-512 Simple Catch Tray (SCT) Full Stack RAP

The Control Logic detected that the Simple Catch Tray is full.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.10 for the following procedure. Ensure that the Simple Catch Tray is empty Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, Double Plug P/J1080, and P/ J1079 on the SCT Full Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-275 SCT Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-6 and DC-COM on the Finisher PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.10. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Block the SCT Full Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1079-1 and P/J1079-3 on the SCT Full Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-7 and P/J1040-5 on the Finisher PWB. Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or short circuit. Go to Flag 1 on BSD12.4. Check the harness for an open or short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3). Replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3). Check the Full Stack Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3).
Finisher/Sorter
11-350 Decurler 1 Fail RAP, 11-512 Simple Catch Tray
1/05 8d-26

The Control Logic detected that Bin 1 is full.

Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-281 Bin 1 Full Sensor. Press Start. Manually move the actuator in and out of the sensor The display Changes from H to L to H as the actuator is moved in and out of the sensor. Y N Press Stop. +5VDC is measured between P/J1002-1 and DC COM on the Mailbox PWB. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J1031-11 and DC COM on the Finisher PWB. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 1 on BSD12.9 and check the wires for an open circuit. Replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11). Check the Bin 1 Full Sensor for intermittent operation. If the problem continues, replace the Mailbox PWB (PL 18.11).
Procedure
1/05 8d-27
Finisher/Sorter


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-28


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
1/05 8d-29
Finisher/Sorter


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-30


Initial Actions
Initial Actions
Procedure
Procedure
1/05 8d-31
Finisher/Sorter
11-919 Bin 9 Full Stack RAP, 11-920 Bin 10 Full
11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP

The Control Logic detected that the SCT Tray is full.

The Control Logic has determined that bin 10 is full while operating in the Stack Mode.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.10 for the following procedure. Ensure that the SCT Tray is empty Ensure that connectors P/J1040 on the Finisher PWB, Shorting Plug P/J1080, and P/ J1079 on the SCT Full Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Initial Actions
Ensure that there are no obstructions in the Stacker area
Procedure
Go to 11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP to check out the SCT Full Sensor for any malfunctions.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-275 SCT Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is H. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-6 and DC-COM on the Finisher PWB. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.10. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Block the SCT Full Sensor with a sheet of paper. The display changes to L. Y N +5VDC is measured between P/J1079-1 and P/J1079-3 on the SCT Full Sensor. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J1040-7 and P/J1040-5 on the Finisher PWB. Y N +5 VDC is measured between P/J880-3 and P/J880-2. Y N Go to the +5VDC Figure 1 wirenets and check wires for an open or short circuit. Check the wires between P/J44 on the Distribution PWB and P/J1026 on the Finisher PWB. If the wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 4 on BSD12.10. Check the harness for an open or a short circuit. If the harness is good, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3). Go to Flag 4 and check for an open or short circuit. If the problem continues, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.3). Check the SCT Full Sensor for intermittent operation, If the problem continues, replace the SCT Full Sensor (PL 18.4).
Finisher/Sorter
11-921 SCT Tray Full Stack RAP, 11-922 Sorter Stack-
1/05 8d-32
12-120 RAP
The Compiler Entrance Sensor did not detect the lead edge of a sheet of paper within a specified period of time after the lead edge of the same sheet was detected by the Decurler Exit Sensor.
C Check the paper path for any obstructions that could prevent the sheet from entering the Finisher Transport. Ensure that the Finisher Gate moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate (PL 18.11) and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD12.7, BSD 12.5, and BSD 12.1 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Finisher Transport paper path Bent or out of position paper chutes/guides in the Finisher Transport paper path Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Finisher Transport Rolls and the Exit Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J1039 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1052 on the Compiler Entrance Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Enter dC330 012-020 Finisher Transport Motor. Press Start. The Finisher Transport Rolls are rotating. Y N The Finisher Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Finisher Transport Motor is rotating. Y N +24 VDC is measured from P/J1084-1 to P/J1084-2 of the Finisher Transport Motor. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Finisher Transport Motor (PL 18.9). Ensure that the Finisher Transport Motor Pulley (PL 18.9) is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Finisher Drive Belt for slipping or damage. Check that the gears/ pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls. Ensure that the Finisher Entrance Baffle is correctly positioned and free from damage. Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping: Finisher Transport Rolls (PL 18.9) Pinch Rolls (PL 18.12) Exit Roll (PL 18.14) Finisher Drive Belt (PL 18.9)
Procedure
The lead edge of the paper is at or past the Compiler Entrance Sensor. Y N The paper entered the Finisher Transport. Y N The Finisher Gate is in the Compiler position. Y N Enter dC330 012-071 Finisher Gate Solenoid Open. Press Start. The Finisher Gate moved to the Compiler position. Y N +24 VDC is measured from P/J1081-A2 to GND. Y N +24 VDC is measured from P/J1042-16 on the Finisher PWB to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. There is +24 VDC from P/J1042-18 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.7. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11). If this does not resolve the problem, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Ensure that the Finisher Gate is connected to the Finisher Gate Solenoid and that it moves freely. If the problem continues replace the Finisher Gate and the Finisher Gate Solenoid (PL 18.11).
NOTE: The output of the Compiler Entrance Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and High when the sensor is not blocked. Paper on the sensor moves the actuator away from the sensor, unblocking it. Enter dC330 012-120 Compiler Entrance Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler Entrance Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. D Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-33
12-120
D Y N Disconnect P/J1052. There is +5 VDC from J1052-1 to J1052-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-1 to P/J1039-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1052-2 to J1052-3. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1052. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). Check the actuator of the Compiler Entrance Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. Check Flag 9 and Flag 10 on BSD12.7 for loose connectors or an intermittent short circuit. Check the paper path for scraps of paper or other obstructions. Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping: Finisher Transport Rolls (PL 18.9) Pinch Rolls (PL 18.12) Exit Roll (PL 18.14) Finisher Drive Belt (PL 18.9) Press Start. Less than +1 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher Transport Motor (PL 18.9). Ensure that the Finisher Transport Motor Pulley is fastened to the motor shaft. Check the Compiler Drive Belt for proper tension or damage. Check that the gears/ pulleys are properly fastened to the drive rolls. The Exit Roll Belt is moving. A Finisher/Sorter 1/05 8d-34 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
12-121 RAP
The Compiler Entrance Sensor does not detect the trail edge of a sheet of paper within a specified period of time after the lead edge of the same sheet was detected.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1, BSD 12.5, and BSD 12.7 and for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Finisher paper path Obstructions in the Compiler Tray Ensure that there is sufficient nip force at the Finisher Transport Rolls and the Entrance Roll. Ensure that connectors P/J1039 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1052 on the Compiler Entrance Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
The trail edge of the paper is past the Compiler Entrance Sensor. Y N Enter dC330012-020 Finisher Transport Motor. Press Start. The Finisher Transport Rolls are rotating. Y N The Finisher Drive Belt is moving. Y N The Finisher Transport Motor is rotating. Y N +24 VDC is measured from P/J1084-1 to P/J1084-2 of the Finisher Transport Motor. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD12.5. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Stop. +5 VDC is measured from P/J1084-3 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.5. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
12-120, 12-121
A Y N Check the gears and pulleys. Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies and drive belts that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the sensor.
Check the following parts for wear, glazing, or slipping: Lower Exit Chute (PL 18.14) Exit Roll (PL 18.14) Exit Roll Belt (PL 18.14) Compiler Drive Belt (PL 18.9) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14).
NOTE: The output of the Compiler Enter Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and High when the sensor is not blocked. Paper on the sensor moves the actuator away from the sensor, unblocking it. Enter dC330 012-120 Compiler Entrance Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler Entrance Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1052. There is +5 VDC from J1052-1 to J1052-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-1 to P/J1039-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1052-2 to J1052-3. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1052. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). Check the actuator for the Compiler Entrance Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The actuator is binding.
1/05 8d-35
Finisher/Sorter
12-121
12-170 RAP
The Compiler Paper Sensor detects a sheet of paper present 250 ms. after Eject drive is initiated.
B Check the actuator for the Compiler Paper Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. The actuator is binding. Y N Check for obvious damage, missing and/or broken Drive Motor gear assemblies, or slipping drive rolls that would cause the copy to be slow to actuate the sensor. Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.11 and BSD 12.14 for the following procedure. Check for the following: Obstructions in the Finisher paper path Obstructions in the Compiler Tray Ensure that connectors P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1048 on the Compiler Paper Sensor are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
There is a sheet of paper in the Compiler Tray. Y N Enter dC330 012-252 Compiler Paper Sensor.Press Start.Manually actuate the Compiler Paper Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1048. There is +5 VDC from J1048-1 to J1048-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1035-10 to P/J1035-8. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1048-2 to J1048-3. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1048. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.11. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16). A B Finisher/Sorter
Enter dC330 012-024 Eject Motor Forward. Press Start. The Eject Roll is rotating. Y N The Eject Motor is rotating. Y N Press Stop. Disconnect the Eject Motor Drive Belt. Press Start. The Eject Motor is rotating. Y N Go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Motor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check the Eject Roll and Bearing (PL 18.19) for damage or contamination. Check the following: Ensure that the Eject Motor Drive Belt PL 18.19 is clean and undamaged. Ensure that the Pulley is fastened to the Exit Roll shaft (PL 18.19). Check that the teeth in the Eject Motor pulley are clean and undamaged(PL 18.19).
Check the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls (PL 18.20) and Eject Roll PL 18.19 for glazing or contamination.
12-170
1/05 8d-36
12-180 RAP
The Compiler Entrance Sensor detects a sheet of paper present in standby or at initialization.
12-181 RAP
The Compiler Paper Sensor detects a sheet of paper present at power up or at Job Complete.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.7 for the following procedure. Check the Finisher Transport paper path for uncleared jams or obstructions. If no obstruction or paper is found, continue with this RAP.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.11 for the following procedure. Check the Compiler Tray for uncleared jams or obstructions. If no obstruction or paper is found, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-120 Compiler Entrance Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler Entrance Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1052. There is +5 VDC from J1052-1 to J1052-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-1 to P/J1039-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1052-2 to J1052-3. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.7. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1052. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 10 on BSD12.7. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Entrance Sensor (PL 18.14). Check the Compiler Entrance Sensor Actuator for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-252 Compiler Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Compiler Paper Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1048. There is +5 VDC from J1048-1 to J1048-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1035-10 to P/J1035-8. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1048-2 to J1048-3. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1048. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD12.11. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16). Check the actuator for the Compiler Paper Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. If the actuator is binding, replace the Compiler Paper Sensor (PL 18.16).
1/05 8d-37
Finisher/Sorter
12-180 , 12-181
12-240 RAP
The Control Logic does not detect one of the following conditions: End Wall Open (H) +5 VDC, from the End Wall Open Sensor, within 300msec after the signal, End Wall Motor Open. End Wall Open (L) +5 VDC, from the End Wall Open Sensor, within 300msec after the signal, End Wall Motor Close.
A Press Stop. Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-036 Compiler Tray Solenoid Down. Press Start. The Compiler Tray Solenoid energizes. Y N The solenoid is always in the energized position. Y N Press Stop. There is + 24 VDC from P/J1041-2 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 7 and Flag 8 on BSD 12.11. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the circuit is good, replace the Compiler Tray Solenoid (PL 18.15).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1, BSD 12.11, and BSD 12.12 for the following procedure.
Procedure
NOTE: The output of the End Wall Open Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and High when the sensor is not blocked. Open the Stapler Door and cheat the interlock. Enter dC330 012-270 End Wall Open Sensor. Press Start. Block and unblock the End Wall Open Sensor with a piece of paper. The display changes from High to Low to High as the paper moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1046. There is +5 VDC from J1046-1 to J1046-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1035-12 to P/J1035-13. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 8 on BSD 12.12. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1046-2 to J1046-3. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.12. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the End Wall Open Sensor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1046. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the End Wall Open Sensor (PL 18.16).
Press Start. There is less than 1.0 VDC from P/J1041-2 to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB. Check the alignment of the solenoid. Check for binding of the linkage. If the checks are good, replace the Compiler Tray Solenoid (PL 18.15). Disconnect P/J1082. The solenoid deenergizes. Y N Replace the Compiler Tray Solenoid (PL 18.15). Go to Flag 8 on BSD 12.11. Check the harness for a short circuit. If the circuit is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Press Stop. Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-030 End Wall Motor Open. Press Start. The End Wall moves to the open position. Y N The End Wall can be manually moved to the open position. Y N Check for binding of the linkage, or damage to the End Wall. Connect the DMM between P/J1083-1 (+) and P/J1083-2 (-). set the meter for negative Peak Hold. Press Start. A pulse of -20 VDC or greater is recorded. Y N Go to Flag 12 and Flag 13 on BSD 12.12. Check the harness for an open circuit or a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the End Wall Motor (PL 18.15). Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-031 End Wall Motor Close. Press Start. The End Wall moves to the closed position. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). If the problem persists, replace the End Wall Motor (PL 18.15). Go to Flag 8, Flag 9, Flag 12, and Flag 13 on BSD 12.12. Check the circuit for an intermittent connection.
A Finisher/Sorter
12-240
1/05 8d-38
12-243 RAP
The Staple Ready Sensor does not detect the Staple sheet in the Ready position just prior to stapling, or within 13 dummy staplings at Stapler initialization.
12-244 RAP
The Staple Head Home Sensor does not detect the Stapler in the home position within 600 ms from the start of Stapler Motor reverse.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.13 for the following procedure: Ensure that connector P/J1092 is seated correctly to the Stapler Assembly, that connector P/J1044 is seated correctly to the Finisher PWB and that there are no obvious crimped or broken wires on either connector. Ensure that the Staple Cartridge contains staples and that it is correctly installed in the Stapler Assembly.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.13 for the following procedure: Ensure that connector P/J1092 is seated correctly to the Stapler Assembly, that connector P/J1044 is seated correctly to the Finisher PWB and that there are no obvious crimped or broken wires on either connector. Check for staple jams.
Procedure
Remove, then reinstall, the Staple Cartridge. Enter dC330 012-273 Staple Ready Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates Low. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.13. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). The Stapler Assembly appears to be operating correctly. If the problem continues, replace the Staple Cartridge and test the system. If the problem continues, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
Procedure
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Staple Cartridge. Push the Staple Assembly toward the rear of the Finisher until the semicircular cam on the front of the assembly is facing forward. Rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat portion of the cam is facing up. Enter dC330 012-273 Staple Ready Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates High. Y N Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. The display indicates High. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.13. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). Rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat portion of the cam is facing down. The display changes to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. +5 VDC is measured between J1092-9 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.13. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
1/05 8d-39
Finisher/Sorter
12-243, 12-244
12-245 RAP
This fault is declared when either of the following occur: The Stapler is not detected at the Front Corner position within 2000msec (1000ms if shifting from Front Straight to Front Corner), after the Stapler Position Motor was energized to move the Stapler to the front. The Stapler remains at the Front Corner position xxx msec after Stapler Position Motor On
C Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Position Motor (PL 18.17). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.12 for the following procedure. Check the following: Obstructions in the Stapler Rail Assembly (PL 18.18) that would prevent movement of the Stapler Bent or out of position End Wall Bent or out of position Compiler Tray Clean the Stapler Front Corner Sensor Ensure that connectors P/J1043 and P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB, P/J1089 on the Stapler Position Motor, and P/J1057 on the Stapler Front Corner Sensor and seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Ensure that the Stapler is in the front position and that the Stapler Front Corner Sensor is blocked (manually move the Stapler toward the front if necessary). Enter dC330 012-269 Stapler Front Corner Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates High. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Move the Stapler to the rear, to unblock the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. The display changes to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1057 from the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. +5 VDC is measured between J1057-1 and J1057-3. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB. Perform the following: Manually move the Stapler toward the front and rear of the Finisher to ensure that it moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any problems found. Replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Procedure
Open the Stapler Cover. isher). Y N The Stapler is in the home position (at the front of the Fin-
NOTE: In the following step, dC330 [12-076] should move the Stapler toward the front of the Finisher in small steps. Each time Start is pressed, the Stapler should move. Cheat the Stapler Door Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 012-030 End Wall Motor Open. Press Start. Press Clear then enter 012-036 Compiler Tray Solenoid Down. Press Start. Press Clear then enter 012-076 Staple Move Motor Top Front. Press Start. The Stapler Position Motor moves the Stapler toward the front of the Finisher each time the Start button is pressed. Y N Check the Stapler Drive Belt (PL 18.17), the Stapler Rail Belt (PL 18.18), and Pulleys to ensure they are in place and are not loose or broken. The Belts and Pulleys are OK. Y N Replace any defective components as required. Remove the IOT Connector Cover (REP 15.3.8). +24 VDC is measured from P/ J1089-2 to GND and from P/J1089-5 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 11 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit. If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
NOTE: In the following step, dC330 [12-078] should move the Stapler toward the rear of the Finisher in small steps. Each time Start is pressed, the Stapler should move. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Cheat the Stapler Door Interlock Switch. Enter dC330 012-030 End Wall Motor Open. Press Start. Press Clear then enter 012-036 Compiler Tray Solenoid Down. Press Start. Press Clear then enter 012-078 Staple Move Motor Top Rear. Press Start. The Stapler Position Motor moves the Stapler toward the rear of the Finisher each time the Start button is pressed. Y N Check the Stapler Drive Belt (PL 18.17), the Stapler Rail Belt (PL 18.18), and Pulleys to ensure they are in place and are not loose or broken. The Belts and Pulleys are OK. Y N Replace any defective components as required. Remove the IOT Connector Cover (REP 15.3.8). +24 VDC is measured from P/J10892 to GND and from P/J1089-5 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 11 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit. D E Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
A B C Finisher/Sorter
12-245
1/05 8d-40
E Go to Flag 10 on BSD 12.12. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Position Motor (PL 18.17). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
12-246 RAP
This fault is caused by one of the following conditions: During Initialization, the Control Logic does not detect the Stacker Offset Home Sensor in the home position (High) within 500ms of the start of Offset Home recovery operation. During Set Eject, the Control Logic does not detect the Stacker Offset Home Sensor in the offset position (Low) within 300ms from the start of the offset cycle. During Set Eject, the Control Logic does not detect the Stacker Offset Home Sensor in the home position (High) within 300ms of the command to return to the home position.
Ensure that the Stapler is in the front position and that the Stapler Front Corner Sensor is blocked (manually move the Stapler toward the front if necessary). Enter dC330 012-269 Stapler Front Corner Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates High. Y N Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Move the Stapler to the rear, to unblock the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. The display changes to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1057 from the Stapler Front Corner Sensor. +5 VDC is measured between J1057-1 and J1057-3. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB. Perform the following: Manually move the Stapler toward the front and rear of the Finisher to ensure that it moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any problems found. Replace the Stapler Front Corner Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.14 for this procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-027 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor F/R. Press Start. The Eject Roll and Clamp move to the offset position and back to home. Y N Switch off the power. Remove the rear covers. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) clockwise. The shaft moves freely. Y N Disassemble the gear cluster (PL 18.21) connected to the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor. Manually rotate the motor shaft The shaft moves freely. Y N Replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21). Check the following: Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding. Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL 18.20). Ensure that the Offset Lever and Cam Follower (PL 18.19) are correctly installed, and that the Cam follower is positioned in the spiral groove in the Offset Cam (PL 18.21).
The Eject Shaft moves front/rear as the motor shaft is rotated Y N Check the following: Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding. Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL 18.20). Ensure that the Offset Lever and Cam Follower (PL 18.19) are correctly installed, and that the Cam follower is positioned in the spiral groove in the Offset Cam (PL 18.21).
Go to Flag 10 and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8d-41 Finisher/Sorter
12-245 , 12-246
A NOTE: The output of the Stacker Offset Home Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and High when the sensor is not blocked. Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-277 Offset Home Sensor. Press Start. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) in the clockwise direction (as viewed from the rear). The display changes from High to Low as the motor shaft rotates. Y N Unfasten the bracket for the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (refer to REP 15.2.18). Block and unblock the sensor with a sheet of paper The display changes from High to Low to High as the sensor is blocked and unblocked. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1051. There is +5 VDC from J1051-1 to J1051-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1037-7 to P/J1037-5. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1051-2 to J1051-3. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Offset Home Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1051. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to ground. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (PL 18.19). Check the actuator on the Offset Cam (PL 18.21) for damage. Ensure that the Sensor is installed so that the actuator passes through the center of the sensor. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.14. Check the wiring for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit.
12-248 RAP
The Stapler Front Straight Sensor does not detect the presence of the Stapler within 1200 msec. after the Stapler Position Motor was energized to move the Stapler.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.12 for the following procedure. Check the following: Obstructions in the Stapler Rail Assembly (PL 18.18) that would prevent movement of the Stapler Bent or out of position End Wall Bent or out of position Compiler Tray Clean the Stapler Front Straight Sensor Ensure that connector P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1059 on the Stapler Front Straight Sensor and seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Manually move the Stapler toward the rear of the Finisher until it has cleared the Stapler Front Straight Sensor and the sensor is not blocked. Enter dC330 012-278 Stapler Front Straight Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates Low. Y N Go to Flag 3 and Flag 5 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Front Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB. Block the Stapler Front Straight Sensor. The display changes to High. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Front Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Perform the following: Manually move the Stapler toward the front and rear of the Finisher to ensure that it moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any problems found. Replace the Stapler Front Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Finisher/Sorter
12-246 , 12-248
1/05 8d-42
12-249 RAP
The Stapler Rear Straight Sensor does not detect the presence of the Stapler within 1600 msec. after the Stapler Position Motor was energized to move the Stapler.
12-251 RAP
When either of the following occur: The Eject Paddle Home Sensor does not detect the Eject Paddle in the Home position within 400msec of the signal, Eject Paddle Motor On. The Eject Paddle remains at the Home position 200msec after the signal, Eject Paddle Motor On.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.12 for the following procedure. Check the following: Obstructions in the Stapler Rail Assembly (PL 18.18) that would prevent movement of the Stapler Bent or out of position End Wall Bent or out of position Compiler Tray Clean the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor Ensure that connector P/J1035 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1060 on the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor and seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.14 for the following procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-053 Eject Paddle Motor. Press Start. The Eject Paddle rotates. Y N Remove the Belt from the Eject Paddle Motor (PL 18.19). Enter dC330 012-053 Eject Paddle Motor. Press Start. The Eject Paddle Motor rotates. Y N Go to Flag 12 and Flag 13 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Paddle Motor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage, binding or misalignment NOTE: The output of the Eject Paddle Home Sensor is Low when the sensor is blocked, and High when the sensor is not blocked. Enter dC330 012-241 Eject Paddle Home Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Eject Paddle Home Sensor. The display changes from High to Low to High as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1055. There is +5 VDC from J1055-1 to J1055-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1037-2 to P/J1037-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1055-2 to J1055-3. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4)
Procedure
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Manually move the Stapler to the rear of the Finisher until it has cleared the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor and the sensor is not blocked. Enter dC330 012-279 Stapler Rear Straight Sensor. Press Start. The display indicates Low. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 5 on BSD 12.12. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB. Block the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor. The display changes to High. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.12. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Perform the following: Manually move the Stapler toward the front and rear of the Finisher to ensure that it moves smoothly and that there are no obstructions in the Stapler travel. Correct any problems found. Replace the Stapler Rear Straight Sensor (PL 18.18). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8d-43
C Finisher/Sorter
12-249 , 12-251
C Replace the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
12-253 RAP
When one of the following occur: The Tamper Home Sensor detects that the Tamper remained in the Home position 800msec after Tamper Motor On. The Tamper is not detected in the Home position after the Tamper cycle is complete.
Disconnect P/J1055. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (PL 18.19). Check the actuator for the Eject Paddle Home Sensor for binding as it moves in and out of the sensor. Ensure that the actuator is secured to the shaft. Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.14. Check for an intermittent short circuit or loose connections. If the problem continues, replace the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (PL 18.19).
Initial Actions
NOTE: It is much easier to access the Tamper components if the Stacker Assembly is removed. Refer to REP 15.2.2 for this procedure. Refer to BSD 12.1 and 12.11 for the following procedure.
Procedure
CAUTION Do not continue to press the Start button after the Tamper reaches either the fully-forward or fully-rearward position. Push the Tamper towards the rear of the Finisher. Enter dC330 012-060 Tamper Motor Low Front. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the front each time the Start button is pressed. Y N There is 24 VDC from P/J1087- 3 to GND and from P/J1087-6 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit. Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace The Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Enter dC330 012-062 Tamper Motor Low Rear. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the rear each time the Start button is pressed. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace The Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Enter dC330 012-061 Tamper Motor Top Front. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the front each time the Start button is pressed. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace The Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Enter dC330 012-063 Tamper Motor Top Rear. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the rear approximately 30-50 mm each time the Start button is pressed. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace The Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
A Finisher/Sorter
12-251 , 12-253
1/05 8d-44
A Enter dC330 012-064 Tamper Motor Middle Front. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the front each time the Start button is pressed. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace The Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Enter dC330 012-065 Tamper Motor Middle Rear. Press Start. The Tamper moves toward the rear each time the Start button is pressed. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, Replace the Tamper Motor (PL 18.16). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Enter dC330 012-265 Tamper Home Sensor. Press Start. Push the Tamper to the rear of the Compiler Tray. The display is High. Y N The Actuator is blocking the Tamper Home sensor. Y N Check that the Tamper, Belt, Sensor, and Motor are correctly mounted (PL 18.16). Disconnect P/J1045. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.11. Check for a short circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Tamper Home Sensor (PL 18.16). Push the Tamper toward the front. The display changes to Low Y N Disconnect P/J1045. There is +5 VDC from J1045-1 to J1045-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1035-12 to P/J1035-13. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
12-254 RAP
This fault is declared if one of the following occurs: The Stack Height Sensor does not detect the Tray descending, upon initialization. The Stack Height Sensor does not detect the Tray ascending within 5000msec from the start of tray-ascend.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and 12.15 for the following procedure
Procedure
Remove the Front and Rear Lower Covers. Manually rotate the Stacker Motor shaft counterclockwise until the Stacker Tray is at the top of its range of travel. Enter dC330 012-041 Stacker Motor Down and press Start. The Stacker Tray moves down. Y N Remove the Stacker Motor Belt. Enter dC330 012-041 Stacker Motor Down and press Start. The Stacker Motor rotates. Y N Go to Flag 15 and Flag 16 on BSD 12.15 Check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Motor (PL 18.26) If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Ensure that the gears in the Stacker Motor Assembly are installed correctly, and are free from damage. Ensure that the Front and Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts are installed correctly (refer to REP 15.2.9). Enter dC330 012-250 Stack Height Sensor. Press Start. The display is High. Y N Remove the Compiler Cover Sensor (REP 15.2.22). Check that the Actuator is positioned correctly, and is blocking the sensor. If the actuator is functioning correctly, Disconnect P/J1073. The display changes to High. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). Raise the Actuator. The display changes to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1073. There is +5 VDC from J1073-1 to J1073-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-10 to P/J1039-8. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). A B C Finisher/Sorter
Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.11. Check for an open circuit Replace the Tamper Home Sensor (PL 18.16). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.11. Check the circuit of the Tamper Home Sensor for loose connections or an intermittent short circuit.
1/05 8d-45
12-253 , 12-254
C Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit.
12-255 RAP
The Stacker Upper Limit Sensor detects the Stacker Tray at the upper limit during ascension, or does not detect a change of state during descension
There is +5 VDC from J1073-2 to J1073-3. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for loose connections or an intermittent short circuit to GND. If the problem continues, replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSDs 12.1 and 12.15 for the following procedure.
Procedure
Remove the Rear Lower Cover. The Stacker Upper Limit Sensor is blocked by the Actuator. Y N Enter dC330 012-259 Stacker Upper Limit Sensor.Press Start. Manually actuate the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1065. There is +5 VDC from J1065-1 to J1065-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1038-5 to P/J1038-6. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 7 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1065-2 to J1065-3. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1065. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 4 and Flag 7 on BSD12.15. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.15. Check for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). Enter dC330 012-041 Stacker Motor Down and press Start. The Stacker Tray moves down.
Finisher/Sorter
12-254, 12-255
1/05 8d-46
N Remove the Stacker Motor Belt. Enter dC330012-041 Stacker Motor Down and press Start. The Stacker Motor rotates. Y N Go to Flag 15 and Flag 16 on BSD 12.15 Check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Motor (PL 18.26) If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Ensure that the gears in the Stacker Motor Assembly are installed correctly, and are free from damage. Ensure that the Front and Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts are installed correctly (refer to REP 15.2.9).
12-256 RAP
The Stacker Lower Limit Sensor detects the Stacker Tray at the lower limit during ascension, or does not detect a change of state during ascension.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and 12.15 for the following procedure
Procedure
Remove the Rear Lower Cover. The Stacker Lower Limit Sensor is blocked by the Actuator. Y N Enter dC330 012-260 Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1066. There is +5 VDC from J1066-1 to J1066-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1038-5 to P/J1038-6. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 7 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1066-2 to J1066-3. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1066. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 6 and Flag 7 on BSD12.15. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.15. Check for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor (PL 18.27). Enter dC330 012-040 Stacker Motor Up and press Start. The Stacker Tray moves up.
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 7, Flag 15, and Flag 16 on BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Motor and the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND.
1/05 8d-47
Finisher/Sorter
12-255, 12-256
N Remove the Stacker Motor Belt. Enter dC330 012-040 Stacker Motor Up and press Start. The Stacker Motor rotates. Y N Go to Flag 15 and Flag 16 on BSD 12.15 Check for an open circuit or a short to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Motor (PL 18.26) If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Ensure that the gears in the Stacker Motor Assembly are installed correctly, and are free from damage. Ensure that the Front and Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts are installed correctly (refer to REP 15.2.9).
12-264 RAP
The Eject Clamp Sensor does not detect the Eject Clamp in the open position within 500msec from the start of Eject Roll Up.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.14 for the following procedure
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-026 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor Up/Down. Press Start. The Eject Clamp opens and/or closes. Y N Switch off the power. Remove the rear covers. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The shaft moves freely. Y N Disassemble the gear cluster (PL 18.21) connected to the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor. Manually rotate the motor shaft The shaft moves freely. Y N Replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21). Check the following: Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding. Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL 18.20). Ensure that the Offset Lever and Cam Follower (PL 18.19) are correctly installed, and that the Cam follower is positioned in the spiral groove in the Offset Cam (PL 18.21).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 5, Flag 6, Flag 7, Flag 15, and Flag 16 on BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Motor and the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND.
The Eject Clamp opens and/or closes as the motor shaft is rotated Y N Check the following: Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding. Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL 18.20).
Go to Flag 10 and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Remove the rear covers. Enter dC330 012-240 Eject Clamp Sensor. Press Start. Manually display rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The changes from High to Low as the motor shaft is rotated. Y N The display is a constant Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1054. There is +5 VDC from J1054-1 to J1054-3. A Finisher/Sorter B Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
12-256, 12-264
1/05 8d-48
B Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1037-2 to P/J1037-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 7 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1054-2 to J1054-3. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1054. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19).
12-265 RAP
The Eject Clamp Sensor does not detect the Eject Clamp in the closed position within 500msec from the start of Eject Roll Down.
Initial Actions
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-026 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor Up/Down. Press Start. The Eject Clamp opens and/or closes. Y N Switch off the power. Remove the rear covers. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The shaft moves freely. Y N Disassemble the gear cluster (PL 18.21) connected to the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor. Manually rotate the motor shaft The shaft moves freely. Y N Replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21). Check the following: Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding. Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL 18.20). Ensure that the Offset Lever and Cam Follower (PL 18.19) are correctly installed, and that the Cam follower is positioned in the spiral groove in the Offset Cam (PL 18.21).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 7, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the circuits of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) and the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19) for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND
The Eject Clamp opens and/or closes as the motor shaft is rotated Y N Check the following: Check the gears for damage or dirt that may cause binding Check the Eject Roll (PL 18.19) for damage or binding. Check the Pinch Roll/Compiler Cover/Set Separator area for binding (PL 18.20).
Go to Go to Flag 10 and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the wires for an open circuit or a short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Remove the rear covers. Enter dC330 012-240 Eject Clamp Sensor. Press Start. Manually rotate the shaft of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) counterclockwise. The display changes from High to Low as the motor shaft is rotated. Y N The display is a constant Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1054. There is +5 VDC from J1054-1 to J1054-3. A Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8d-49 B Finisher/Sorter
12-264, 12-265
B Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1037-2 to P/J1037-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 7 on 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1054-2 to J1054-3. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1054. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.14. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19).
12-266 RAP
The Compiler Cover Safety Switch is closed within 60msec since the completion of Eject Roll Up.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.1 and BSD 12.2 for the following procedure. Ensure that the Compiler Cover Moves freely.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-306 Compiler Cover Safety Sw. Press Start. The display is Low. Y N Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly. The actuator on the Compiler cover presses down on the metal leaf of the Compiler Safety Switch. Y N There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1099. There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND. Y N Replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit between the two wires. If the wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check for damage or incorrect installation of the Compiler Cover (REP 15.2.22). Ensure that the metal leaf of the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15) is not bent. The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check the circuit for loose connections. Ensure that the Compiler cover is correctly installed. If the problem persists replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15).
The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 10, and Flag 11 on BSD 12.14. Check the circuits of the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (PL 18.21) and the Eject Clamp Sensor (PL 18.19) for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND.
Finisher/Sorter
12-265, 12-266
1/05 8d-50
12-302 RAP
The Compiler Cover Interlock Switch detects the Compiler Cover open.
12-303 RAP
The Compiler Cover was detected in the up position during the period between Eject Roll Down and Eject Roll Up.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.3 for the following procedure. Ensure that the Compiler Cover moves freely.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.2 for this procedure.
Procedure
Enter dC330012-300 Compiler Cover Intlk Sw. Press Start. Raise and lower the Compiler Cover. The display changes from Low to High to Low. Y N The display is always Low. Y N There is less than 1.0 VDC from P/J1033-5 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.3. Check for an open circuit. If the problem persists, replace the Compiler Cover Interlock Switch (PL 18.15). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1098. Enter dC330 012-300 Compiler Cover Intlk Sw. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.3. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15). The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 5 and Flag 6 on BSD 12.3. Check for a loose connection. If the problem persists, replace the Compiler Cover Interlock Switch (PL 18.15).
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-306 Compiler Cover Safety Sw. Press Start. Press down on the Compiler cover. The display changes from Low to High. Y N Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly. The actuator on the Compiler cover presses down on the metal leaf of the Compiler Safety Switch. Y N There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1099. There is 24 VDC from J1099-2 to GND. Y N Replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Check for damage or incorrect installation of the Compiler Cover (REP 15.2.22). Ensure that the metal leaf of the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15) is not bent. The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.2. Check the circuit for loose connections. Ensure that the Compiler cover is correctly installed. If the problem persists replace the Compiler Cover Safety Switch (PL 18.15).
1/05 8d-51
Finisher/Sorter
12-302, 12-303
12-305 RAP
The Stacker Tray could not be lowered to the correct height, relative to the ejected sheets, within 250msec during the height adjustment operation.
12-306 RAP
The Stapler Door Interlock Switch detects the Stapler Door open.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.15 for the following procedure. Check that the actuator for the Stack Height Sensor is free to move.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.3 for the following procedure. Ensure that the Stapler Door is closed. Check for damage to the actuator, or an incorrectly installed door. If the fault remains when the door is closed, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-250 Stack Height Sensor. Press Start. The display is High. Y N Remove the Compiler Cover (REP 15.2.22). Check that the Actuator is positioned correctly, and is blocking the sensor. If the actuator is functioning correctly, Disconnect P/J1073. The display changes to High. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). Raise the Actuator. The display changes to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1073. There is +5 VDC from J1073-1 to J1073-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1039-10 to P/J1039-8. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1073-2 to J1073-3. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 12.15. Check for loose connections or an intermittent short circuit to GND. If the problem continues, replace the Stack Height Sensor (PL 18.20).
Procedure
Close the Stapler Door. Enter dC330 012-304 Staple Door INTLK Switch. Press Start. display is Low. Y N Open the Stapler Door. Use the Interlock Cheater to actuate the Interlock Switch. display is Low. Y N There is +5 VDC from P/J1033-3 to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). The
The
Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.3. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11). Check the Stapler Door (PL 18.2) for damage. Open the Stapler Door. The display is High. Y N There is less than 1 VDC from P/J1033-5 to GND. Y N Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.3. Check for a short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11) The problem may be intermittent. Check the Stapler Door for warping or damage. Ensure that the actuator lines up with the switch. Go to Flag 3 and Flag 4 on BSD 12.3. Check for loose connections or an intermittent short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Door Interlock Switch (PL 18.11)
Finisher/Sorter
12-305, 12-306
1/05 8d-52
12-400/12-538 RAP
12-400: The Low Staple Sensor detects the Stapler is nearly empty. 12-538: The Stapler is empty. This fault is declared if 30 sets are stapled after 12-400 is declared.
12-531 RAP
This fault is declared if Control Logic detects more than 100 stapled sets in the Stacker Tray. NOTE: The actual number of stapled sets allowed in the Stacker is determined by NVM location 790-032. a value of 0 (default) allows 100 sets to accumulate before declaring the fault. A value of 1 limits the number of sets to 60.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.13 for this procedure.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.15 for this procedure. Ensure that the Stacker Tray is empty. If the fault is declared with an empty Stacker Tray, continue with this RAP.
Procedure
There are at least three sheets of staples in the Staple Cartridge. Y N Replace the Staples. Enter dC330 012-272 Low Staple Switch. Press Start. The display is Low. Y N There is less than 1 VDC from P/J1044-7 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.13. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is good, Replace the Stapler (PL 18.17). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 3 on BSD 12.13. Check for a loose connection. If the wire is good, Check for damage to the Staple Cartridge. if the problem persists, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-253 Stacker Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Stacker Paper Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1069. There is +5 VDC from J1069-1 to J1069-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1038 -1 to P/J1038-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 8 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1069-2 to J1069-3. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1069. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27). The problem may be intermittent. Remove the Stacker Tray Bottom Cover. Check the actuator of the Stacker Paper Sensor for damage or binding.
1/05 8d-53
Finisher/Sorter
12-400/12-538, 12-531
If the actuator is OK, go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27).
12-536 RAP
The Staple Cartridge Set Switch does not detect the presence of a Staple Cartridge.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.13 for this procedure. Check the following: A loaded Staple Cartridge is installed in the Stapler. Connectors P/J1044 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1092 on the Stapler are seated correctly, and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-274 Cartridge Set Switch. Press Start. The display is Low. Y N There is less than 1 VDC from P/J1044-8 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.13. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 1 on BSD 12.13. Check for a loose connection. If the wire is good, Check for damage to the Staple Cartridge. if the problem persists, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17).
Finisher/Sorter
12-531, 12-536
1/05 8d-54
12-537 RAP
Control Logic does not detect the signal Staple Head Home (L) within 450msec since the start of Staple Head Close operation.
12-570 RAP
This fault is declared if one of the following occur: Stacker Full (H) is detected during the Stacker Tray height adjustment (descending). Stacker Full (Mixed Size) (H) is detected during the Stacker Tray height adjustment (descending) while ejecting mixed-size sets. A mixed-size set is ejected after Stacker Full (Mixed Size) (H) is detected.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.13 for the following procedure: Ensure that connector P/J1092 is seated correctly to the Stapler Assembly, that connector P/J1044 is seated correctly to the Finisher PWB and that there are no obvious crimped or broken wires on either connector. Check for staple jams.
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.15 for the following procedure. Ensure that the Stacker Tray is empty. If the fault is declared with an empty Stacker Tray, proceed with this RAP.
Procedure
Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Staple Cartridge. Push the Staple Assembly toward the rear of the Finisher until the semicircular cam on the front of the assembly is facing forward. Manually rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat portion of the cam is facing up. Enter dC330 012-273 Staple Ready Sensor. The display indicates High. Y N Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. The display indicates High. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.13. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). Rotate the cam in a clockwise direction until the flat portion of the cam is facing down. The display changes to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler. +5 VDC is measured between J1092-9 and GND. Y N Go to Flag 2 on BSD 12.13. Check the wire for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 7 on BSD 12.13. Check the wires for an open circuit or short circuit to GND. If the wires are good, replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). Replace the Stapler Assembly (PL 18.17). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-253 Stacker Paper Sensor. Press Start. Manually actuate the Stacker Paper Sensor. The display changes from Low to High to Low as the actuator moves in and out of the sensor. Y N The display is always Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1069. There is +5 VDC from J1069-1 to J1069-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1038 -1 to P/J1038-3. Y N +5 VDC is measured from P/J1026-3 to P/J1026-2. Y N Go to Flag 17 on BSD 12.1. Check the +5VDC wiring for an open circuit. Replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 8 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. There is +5 VDC from J1069-2 to J1069-3. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check the harness for an open circuit. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27). If the problem continues, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Disconnect P/J1069. The display is High. Y N Go to Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check the wire for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is good, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27). Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-210 Stacker Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is Low.
1/05 8d-55
Finisher/Sorter
12-537, 12-570
N Go to Flag 10, Flag 11 and Flag 14 on BSD 12.15. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor (PL 18.27).
12-571 RAP
Control Logic detected the signal Stacker Full (Mixed Set) (H) while mixed-size sets were present in the Stacker Tray.
Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-212 Stacker Full (Mixed Sets) Sensor. Press Start. The display is Low. Y N Go to Flag 12, Flag 13 and Flag 14 on BSD 12.15. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Full Sensor (PL 18.27). The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 8, Flag 9,Flag 10, Flag 11, Flag 12, Flag 13, and Flag 14 on BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Sensor s for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.15 for this procedure. Ensure that the Stacker Tray is empty. If the fault is declared with an empty Stacker Tray, proceed with this RAP.
Procedure
Enter dC330 012-253 Stacker Paper Sensor. Press Start. The display is Low. Y N Go to Flag 8 and Flag 9 on BSD 12.15. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Paper Sensor (PL 18.27). Press the C button. Enter dC330 012-210 Stacker Full Sensor. Press Start. The display is Low. Y N Go to Flag 10, Flag 11 and Flag 14 on BSD 12.15. Check for an open circuit. If the wires are good, replace the Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor (PL 18.27). The problem appears to be intermittent. Go to Flag 8, Flag 9, Flag 10, Flag 11, and Flag 14 on BSD 12.15. Check the circuits of the Stacker Sensors for a loose connection or an intermittent short circuit to GND
Finisher/Sorter
12-570, 12-571
1/05 8d-56
12-580 RAP
This fault is declared if Control Logic detects the Unload While Run Switch activated while a job is being printed.
C Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15).
Initial Actions
Refer to BSD 12.2 for this procedure. Ensure that connectors P/J1039 on the Finisher PWB and P/J1075 on the Unload While Run Switch are seated correctly and there are no obvious crimped or broken wires.
The problem may be intermittent. Go to Flag 3, Flag 4, Flag 5, and Flag 6on BSD 12.2. Check for an intermittent short circuit or a loose connection. If the problem is unresolved, replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15). Enter dC330 012-099 Unload while Run LED. The LED remains lit. Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is OK, replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15). If the problem is unresolved, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15). Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4).
Procedure
The Unload While Run LED is always lit. Y N Press the Unload While Run Switch several times. The Unload While Run LED switches on and off. Y N Enter dC330 012-291 Unload While Run Switch. Press Start. Press the Unload While Run Switch several times. The display alternates from High to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1075 from the Unload While Run Switch. There is +5VDC from J 1075-3 to GND Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15). There is +5 VDC from P/J1075-1 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 6 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4) Enter dC330 012-099 Unload while Run LED. Press Start There is less than 1 VDC from P/J1075-2 to GND. Y N Go to Flag 5 on BSD 12.2. Check for an open circuit. If the wire is OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). Replace the Unload While Run Switch (PL 18.15). Enter dC330 012-291 Unload While Run Switch. Press Start. Press the Unload While Run Switch several times. The display alternates from High to Low. Y N Disconnect P/J1075 from the Unload While Run Switch.There is +5VDC from J 1075-3 to GND Y N Go to Flag 4 on BSD 12.2. Check for a short circuit to GND. If the wire is OK, replace the Finisher PWB (PL 18.4). A B C Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 8d-57
Finisher/Sorter
12-580
Finisher/Sorter
12-580
1/05 8d-58
REP 15.1.1 Decurler

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the screws (2). Remove the screws (2). Remove the Decurler.
REP 15.1.2 Decurler Rolls 1 and 2

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher Cable Connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the bearings (Figure 1). 1. Remove shouldered screws (2). 2. Remove the E-clips (2). 3. Remove the bearings (2).
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler
Figure 1 Remove the Bearings 6. Remove the bearings (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the E-clips (2). 3. Remove the bearings (2).
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 8d-59
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.1, REP 15.1.2
Figure 2 Remove the Bearings 7. Remove Decurler Roll 1 (Figure 3). 1. Remove Decurler Roll 1. 8.
Figure 3 Remove Decurler Roll 1 Remove Decurler Roll 2 (Figure 4). 1. Lower the baffle. 2. Remove Decurler Roll 2.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.2
1/05 8d-60
Figure 4 Remove Decurler Roll 2
Figure 5 Install the Rolls
Replacement
1. Install the Rolls with the marks towards the rear of the Finisher (Figure 5). 1. 2. Roll 1 has one mark. Roll 2 has two marks.
1/05 8d-61
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.2
REP 15.1.3 Reflector and Cam

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the bracket (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the harness from the Clamps (4). 3. Remove the E-clip. 4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the spring from the Bracket. 6. Remove the bracket.
5. Remove the lever. 6. Remove the cam.
Figure 2 Remove the Cam
Replacement
1. 2. Reinstall the Cam (Figure 3). 1. Align the hole on the Cam with the hole on the Gear. Reinstall the remaining components in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Bracket 4. Remove the cam (Figure 2). 1. Remove the shoulder screw. 2. Remove the E-clips (3). 3. Remove the reflector. 4. Remove the bearings (2).
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.3
1/05 8d-62
REP 15.1.4 Decurler Stepper Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Stepper Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the connector from the Decurler Control PWB. Remove the screws (2). Remove the Decurler Stepping Motor.
Figure 3 Reinstall the Cam
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Stepper Motor
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Stepper Motor in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 8d-63
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.3, REP 15.1.4
REP 15.1.5 Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Entrance Lower Chute (Figure 1). 1. Remove screws (4). 2. Disconnect P/J664 and P/J665. 3. Remove the Entrance Lower Chute.
Figure 2 Remove the Pinch Rolls
Replacement
Reinstall the Entrance Lower Chute and Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Entrance Lower Chute 6. Remove the Pinch Rolls (Figure 2). 1. Remove Pinch Rolls (5) from the Entrance Lower Chute.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.5
1/05 8d-64
REP 15.1.6 Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4). Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Exit Lower Baffle (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (2). 2. Remove the Exit Lower Baffle. 3. Remove Pinch Rolls.
REP 15.1.7 Decurler PWB

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). NOTE: Observe the ESD procedures when removing the Decurler PWB. 2. Remove the Decurler PWB (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the PWB connectors (4). 2. Remove the screws (4). 3. Remove the PWB.
Figure 1 Remove the Exit Lower Baffle
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler PWB
Replacement
Reinstall the Exit Lower Baffle and Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler PWB in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 8d-65
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.6, REP 15.1.7
REP 15.1.8 Cam Drive Shaft

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4). Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Reflector and Cam (REP 15.1.3). Remove the Gear and Decurler Cam Clutch (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector from Clutch. 2. Remove E-clip. 3. Remove the Gear. 4. Remove the Decurler Cam Clutch. 5. Remove the E-clip. 6. Remove the Bearing.
2. Remove the Gear. 3. Remove the Cam Drive Shaft.
Figure 2 Remove the Cam Drive Shaft 8. Remove the Bearing from the Shaft (Figure 3). 1. Remove E-Clip 2. Remove Bearing.
Figure 1 Remove the Gear and Decurler Cam Clutch 7. Remove the Cam Drive Shaft (Figure 2). 1. Remove the E-Clip.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.8
1/05 8d-66
REP 15.1.9 Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Torque Limiter Gear (Figure 1). 1. Remove E-Clip. 2. Remove the Stopper. 3. Remove the Torque Limiter Gear.
Figure 3 Remove the Bearing
Replacement
Reinstall the Cam Drive Shaft in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Torque Limiter Gear
Replacement
Reinstall the Torque Limiter Gear and Stopper in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 8d-67
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.8, REP 15.1.9
REP 15.1.10 Decurler Drive Roll 2

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the Reflector and Cam (REP 15.1.3). At the front of the Finisher, remove the Bearing (Figure 1). 1. Remove the E-Clip. 2. Remove the Bearing.
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler Drive Roll 2
Replacement
1. 2. Install the Bearing at the gear end of the shaft, into the frame, prior to installing the Drive Roll. Reinstall the remaining components in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Bearing 3. At the rear of the Finisher, remove the Decurler Drive Roll 2 (Figure 2). 1. 2. 3. Remove the E-Clip. Remove the gear. Remove the Bearing and Drive Roll from the rear of the Finisher.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.10
1/05 8d-68
REP 15.1.11 Decurler Drive Roll 1

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Decurler Door (REP 15.3.4). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Reflector and Cam (REP 15.1.3). Remove the Front Lever (PL 18.7). Remove the Bearing from the roll at the front of the Finisher (Figure 1). 1. Remove the E-Clip. 2. Remove the Bearing.
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler Drive Roll 1
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Drive Roll 1 in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Bearing 8. Remove the Decurler Drive Roll 1 at the rear of the Finisher (Figure 2). 1. 2. 3. 4. Disengage the Drive Roll from the frame. Remove the E-Clip. Remove the gear. Remove the bearing and then remove the Drive Roll.
1/05 8d-69
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.11
REP 15.1.12 Decurler Entrance Roll

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Decurler Door (REP 15.3.4). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Sensor Bracket (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the harness from the Clamps (4). 3. Remove the E-clip. 4. Remove the screw. 5. Remove the spring from the Bracket. 6. Remove the bracket.
3. Remove the Torque Limiter. 4. Remove the Bearing.
Figure 2 Remove the Torque Limiter Gear
7.
Remove the Decurler Entrance Roll at the front of the Finisher (Figure 3). 1. Remove the C-Clip. 2. Remove the Bushing. 3. Remove the Decurler Entrance Roll.
Figure 1 Remove the Sensor Bracket 6. Remove the Torque Limiter Gear at the rear of the Finisher (Figure 2). 1. Remove the E-Clip. 2. Remove the Stopper.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.12
1/05 8d-70
REP 15.1.13 Decurler Exit Roll

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Decurler Door (REP 15.3.4). Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the Torque Limiter, from the roll, at the rear of the Finisher (Figure 1). 1. Remove the E-Clip. 2. Remove the Stopper. 3. Remove the Torque Limiter Gear. 4. Remove the Bearing.
Figure 3 Remove the Decurler Entrance Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Entrance Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Torque Limiter Gear 6. Remove the Decurler Exit Roll at the front of the Finisher (Figure 2). 1. Disengage the Exit Roll from the frame. 2. Remove the E-Clip. 3. Remove the Bearing, then remove the roll.
1/05 8d-71
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.12, REP 15.1.13
REP 15.1.14 Entrance Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5). Remove the Entrance Chute Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the screw. Remove the Entrance Upper Baffle. Remove the appropriate Pinch Roll(s).
Figure 2 Remove the Decurler Exit Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Exit Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Entrance Chute Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the Entrance Chute Upper Baffle and Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.13, REP 15.1.14
1/05 8d-72
REP 15.1.15 Finisher Transport Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Finisher Transport Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the connector P/J1084. Remove the three screws securing the motor. Pull the motor straight out to remove.
REP 15.1.16 Finisher Drive Belt

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Finisher Drive Belt (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disconnect the connector P/J1084. Disengage the wire harnesses from the harness holders. Remove the three screws securing the motor bracket. Remove the bracket with the motor. Remove the E-clip and the Decurler Gear. Remove the two screws securing the belt idler bracket. Remove the Finisher Drive Belt.
Figure 1 Remove the Finisher Transport Motor
Replacement
Reinstall the Finisher Transport Motor in the reverse order of disassembly. Figure 1 Remove the Finisher Drive Belt
Replacement
1. Reinstall the shaft and the one-way pulleys onto the belt idler bracket, ensuring that the Finisher Drive Belt and Mailbox Drive Belt are installed onto the correct one-way pulley.
1/05 8d-73
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.15, REP 15.1.16
2.
Route the Finisher Drive Belt onto the gears per the illustration (Figure 2).
REP 15.1.17 Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the SCT Exit Cover. Remove one screw from the bottom of the tray. Lift up the tray, tilt out, and move the tray slightly away from the Finisher. Disconnect the sensor connector. Disengage the wire harness from the harness holders on the tray and remove the tray.
Figure 2 Install the Finisher Drive Belt 3. 4. 5. Reinstall the belt idler bracket. Reinstall the E-clip and the gear. Reinstall the bracket with the motor. NOTE: In the following step, ensure that the wires are secured away from belts, pulleys, and all moving components. 6. Reinstall the wire harnesses into the harness holders and reconnect the connector P/ J1084.
Figure 1 Remove the Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly
Replacement
Reinstall the Single Catch Tray (SCT) Assembly in the reverse order of disassembly.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.16, REP 15.1.17
1/05 8d-74
REP 15.1.18 SCT Static Eliminator

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the SCT Static Eliminator (Figure 1). 1. 2. Remove the SCT Exit Cover. Remove the Static Eliminator.
REP 15.1.19 SCT Exit Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the SCT Exit Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the SCT Cover. Disconnect the Sensor Connector. Remove the SCT Exit Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the SCT Static Eliminator
Figure 1 Remove the SCT Exit Sensor
Replacement
Align the Static Eliminator strip with the top of the SCT Exit Upper Chute, from which you removed the old Static Eliminator, and stick the strip in place.
Replacement
Reinstall the SCT Exit Sensor in the reverse order of disassembly.
1/05 8d-75
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.18, REP 15.1.19
REP 15.1.20 SCT Pinch Roll

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the SCT Pinch Roll (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the SCT Exit Cover. Remove the Mailbox Rear Lower Cover. Remove the four screws securing the SCT Exit Upper Chute, in order to provide access to the Pinch Rolls. Remove the appropriate Pinch Roll(s).
REP 15.1.21 Finisher Transport Roll 1

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5). Remove the Stapler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.2). Remove the wire harness from the Finisher Transport Motor Bracket (PL 18.9 item 10). Remove the Finisher Transport Motor Bracket from the Finisher (3 screws). Remove the Transport Roll 1 (Figure 1). 1. On the rear of the Finisher Transport Roll shaft 1, remove the E ring, Stopper Collar, Friction Clutch, Pulley and the Bearing. 2. On the front of the Finisher Transport Roll shaft 1, remove the E ring and Bearing. 3. Remove the Finisher Transport Roll from the front of the Finisher.
Replacement
1. Install the Finisher Transport Roll 1 into the frame in reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the SCT Pinch Roll
Replacement
Reinstall the SCT Pinch Roll in the reverse order of disassembly.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.20, REP 15.1.21
1/05 8d-76
REP 15.1.22 Finisher Transport Roll 2

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the Machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the MailBox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5). Remove the Transport Roll 2 (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the E ring and Collar from the Idler Pulley that is being driven by the Finisher Transport Roll 2. Remove the E ring, Idler Pulley and Bearing from the rear of the Finisher Transport Roll shaft. Remove the E ring and Bearing from the front of the Finisher Transport Roll 2 shaft. Remove the screws (4) securing the Entrance Lower Chute to the frame (PL 18.14 item 25). Do not remove the Entrance Lower Chute. This will provide enough room to allow the Finisher Transport Roll 2 shaft to be removed. Remove the Finisher Transport Roll 2 from the front of the Finisher.
5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Replacement
Install the Finisher Transport Roll 2 into the Finisher frame. Install the Bearing and E ring onto the front end of the Finisher Transport Roll 2 shaft. Install the Bearing, Idler Pulley, and E ring onto the rear of the Finisher Transport Roll 2 shaft. Ensure the Finisher Drive Belt is installed on the Pulley. Reinstall the Entrance Lower Chute to the frame using the screws (4). Install the Collar and E ring on the Idler Pulley that is driven by the Finisher Transport Roll 2. Install the Rear Upper Cover. Install the Rear Lower Cover. Install the Mailbox Door Assembly. Install the Stapler Cover.
Figure 1 Remove the Transport Roll 1
1/05 8d-77
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.21, REP 15.1.22
Figure 1 Remove the Transport Roll 2
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.1.22
1/05 8d-78
REP 15.2.1 Compiler Tray Solenoid

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Move the Stapler to the rear end of the Stapler track. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the wire harness from the harness clamps. Remove the lower screw that secures the wire harness holder to the Compiler Tray Solenoid (PL 18.15 item 6). Remove the Compiler Tray Solenoid (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the Compiler Tray Solenoid Connector P/J1082. Remove the End Wall Spring (PL 18.15 item 2). Remove the K Clip securing the End Wall Motor Link to the End Wall Motor, and remove the Link. Remove the two screws securing the Compiler Tray Solenoid to the Finisher frame. Remove the Compiler Tray Solenoid. Slide the solenoid plunger Link off the End Wall Shaft, and remove the solenoid plunger and Link.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Reconnect P/J1082. Route the wire harness through the harness clips and lock the clips. Slide the solenoid Link onto the End Wall Shaft. Slide the End Wall Motor Link onto the End Wall Motor Shaft, and use a K Clip to secure the Link to the shaft. Install the End Wall Spring. Install the Compiler Tray Solenoid Plunger into the Solenoid and secure the solenoid with the screws (2). Install the wire harness bracket to the Compiler Tray Solenoid with the screw (1). Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Tray Solenoid
1/05 8d-79
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.1
REP 15.2.2 Stacker Tray Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the front wheel Caster Cap (PL 18.4 item 8). Disconnect P/J1090, P/J1071, P/J1067 and P/J1064 and remove the wire harness from the harness clips. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. Remove the screws (5) securing the Stacker Tray Assembly to the Finisher frame front and rear. Lift the Stacker Tray Assembly off the screws and remove the assembly from the frame.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Tighten the two middle screws. Reconnect P/J1090, P/J1071, P/J1067 and P/J1064 (Figure 1). Secure the wire harness into the harness clips. Install the Front Wheel Caster Cap. Install the Rear Lower Cover. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly
Replacement
1. 2. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly by hooking the keyhole screw holes at the middle of the Assembly over the two screws on the frame. Use two screws to secure the bottom of the Assembly to the frame. 1/05 8d-80 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.2
REP 15.2.4 Stacker Full Sensors

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Tray Full Sensors (Figure 1). 1. 2. Remove the screws (2) securing the Sensor Bracket to the Stacker Tray frame, and remove the Bracket. Disconnect P/J1062 from the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor. Press in and release the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Sensor Bracket, and remove the Sensor. Disconnect P/J1063 from the Stacker Full Sensor. Press in and release the Stacker Full Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Sensor Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Position the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reconnect P/J1062 to the Stacker Full (Mixed Sizes) Sensor. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket on the Stacker Tray frame, ensure the Limit Actuator tab is aligned properly in the Sensor Bracket. Use screws (2) to secure the Bracket. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
3.
Figure 1 Stacker Tray Full Sensors
Replacement
1. 2. Position the Stacker Full Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reconnect P/J1063 to the Stacker Full Sensor.
1/05 8d-81
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.4
REP 15.2.5 Stacker Upper and Lower Limit Sensors

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Lower and Upper Limit Sensors (Figure 1). 1. 2. Disconnect P/J1065 from the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor. Disconnect P/J1066 from the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that secures the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
REP 15.2.6 Stacker Tray Paper Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the Stacker Tray Paper Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Turn the Stacker Tray Assembly upside down. Remove the screws (3) that secure the Bottom Cover to the bottom of the Tray. Remove the Bottom Cover. Disconnect P/J1069 from the Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
Figure 1 Stacker Limit Sensors
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Position the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reconnect P/J1066 to the Stacker Lower Limit Sensor. Position the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reconnect P/J1065 to the Stacker Upper Limit Sensor. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket on the Stacker Tray Assembly, ensure the Limit Actuator tab is aligned properly in the Sensor Bracket. Use screws (2) to secure the Bracket. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 1/05 8d-82 2. 3. 4.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Tray Paper Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Stacker Tray Paper Sensor and insert it into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reconnect P/J1069 to the Sensor. Reinstall the Bottom Cover to the Tray, and use screws (3) to secure the Cover. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.5, REP 15.2.6
REP 15.2.7 Stacker Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the screws (3) securing the Motor to the Bracket, and remove the Motor. Disengage the Drive Belt from the Motor Pulley. Disconnect P/J1090, remove the wire harness from the harness clips and remove the Motor.
REP 15.2.8 Lower Exit Chute Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23). Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.24). Remove the Exit Roll (REP 15.2.21). Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the E-ring securing the rear bearing to the Paddle Drive Shaft, and slide the bearing off the Shaft. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the rear of the Finisher frame. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the front of the Finisher frame. Remove the Lower Exit Chute Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Motor
Replacement
1. 2. 3. Engage the Drive Belt then use the screws (3) to secure the Motor. Reconnect P/J1090. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly
1/05 8d-83
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.7, REP 15.2.8
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Reinstall the Lower Exit Chute Assembly onto the Finisher frame. Use the screws (4) to secure the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the Finisher frame. Slide the metal bearing onto the rear of the Paddle Drive Shaft, and use an E-ring to secure the bearing to the rear of the Finisher. Reinstall the Exit Roll. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the Stacker Motor Bracket and the Sensor Bracket (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the screws (3) securing the Stacker Motor Bracket. Pull the Dog Clutch Gear away from the Dog Clutch Pulley then remove the Bracket. Remove the screws (2) securing the Sensor Bracket to the Tray Frame, and remove the Sensor Bracket.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Motor Bracket 4. Remove the Front Stacker Tray Drive Belt (Figure 2). 1. To remove the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt, raise the Stacker Tray to the top of the stacker. Remove the screws (2) from the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp. Remove the E-ring from the top front Pulley and remove the Flange. Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt and the Belt Clamp from the Tray bracket. Remove the Belt Clamp from the Front Belt, and remove the Front Belt from the Stacker Tray Assembly.
2.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.8, REP 15.2.9
1/05 8d-84
REP 15.2.10 Stacker Tray

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Removing the Stacker Motor Bracket and Sensor Bracket (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screws (3) that secures the Stacker Motor Bracket and set the Bracket to one side. 2. Remove the screws (2) the secures the Sensor Bracket and set the Bracket to one side. 3. Disconnect the Stacker Tray in line connector P/J1070 from the Sensor Bracket and remove the wire harness from the harness clamps. 4. Pull the Dog Clutch Gear away from the Dog Clutch Pulley then remove the Stacker Motor Bracket.
Figure 2 Remove the Front Stacker Tray Drive Belt 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. 2. 3. To remove the Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt, raise the Stacker Tray to the top of the stacker. Remove the screws (2) from the Rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp (Figure 2). Remove the E-ring from the top rear Pulley and remove the Flange. Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the Rear Belt and the Belt Clamp from the Tray bracket. Remove the Belt Clamp from the Rear Belt. Remove the Rear Belt from the Stacker Tray Assembly. Install the front and rear Belts onto the top pulleys and install the Pulley Flanges on the front and rear pulley and secure with E-rings (2). Reinstall the Stacker Motor Bracket. ensure that the rear Stacker Tray Drive Belt is routed under the Worm Wheel, and secure the Stacker Motor Bracket with screws (3). Reinstall the Sensor Bracket onto the Stacker Frame, ensure the Actuator tab is aligned properly in the Sensor Bracket. Also ensure that the rear Drive Belt Clamp properly engages the Sensor Actuator. Use the screws (2) to secure the Bracket. Install the Belts Clamps (2) onto the front and rear Stacker Tray Drive Belts. Ensure the Stacker Tray is level with the Stacker Tray Assembly and install the Belt Clamps into the Stacker Tray brackets. Adjust the Stacker Tray Level (ADJ 15.3.2). Install the Stacker Tray Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly. Finisher/Sorter 4. Figure 1 Removing the Stacker Motor Bracket and Sensor Bracket Removing the Stacker Drive Belt Clamps (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screws (2) from the Front Drive Belt Clamp and the Rear Drive Belt Clamp.
Replacement
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
1/05 8d-85
REP 15.2.9, REP 15.2.10
Figure 2 Removing the Stacker Drive Belt Clamps 5. Remove the Stacker Tray (Figure 3). 1. Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the front and rear Belt Clamps from the Tray brackets. 2. With one end of the Tray Carriage at the bottom of the Carriage track, raise the opposite end of the Tray Carriage out of the slots in the Front and Rear Tray Frames, and remove the Stacker Tray.
Figure 3 Remove the Stacker Tray
Replacement
1. 2. 3. Reinstall the Stacker Tray into the slots in the Front and Rear Tray Frames. Install the Drive Belts and Belt Clamps into the Stacker Tray Brackets. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket onto the Stacker Frame, ensure the Actuator tab is aligned properly in the Sensor Bracket. Also ensure that the rear Drive Belt Clamp properly engages the Sensor Actuator. Use the screws (2) to secure the Sensor Bracket. Connect the Stacker Tray in line connector P/J1070 from the Sensor Bracket and install the wire harness into the harness clamps. Adjust the Stacker Tray Level (ADJ 15.3.2). Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.10
1/05 8d-86
REP 15.2.11 Tamper Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Lower the Stacker Elevator so the tray is at the lowest possible position. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the screws (4) from the Tie Plate and remove the Tie Plate from the Finisher Frame. Remove the Tamper Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the Drive Belt from the Tamper Motor Pulley. Disconnect connector P/J1087 and remove the Tamper Motor wiring harness from all cable ties. Accessing the rear of the Tamper Motor, remove the two screws that secure the Motor to the Compiler Bin and remove the Tamper Motor.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Install the Tamper Motor onto the Compiler Bin and secure it with two screws. Reinstall the Tamper Motor Drive Belt over the Tamper Motor Pulley. Reinstall the Tie Plate and secure it to the Finisher Frame with the screws (4). Connect connector P/J1087 and install the Tamper Motor wiring harness into the cable ties. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly. Install the Rear Lower Cover. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 1 Remove the Tamper Motor
1/05 8d-87
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.11
REP 15.2.12 Tamper Home Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher Frame. Remove the Tie Plate. Remove the Tamper Home Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Loosen the screw (1) securing the Tamper Home Sensor Bracket to the Compiler and remove the Bracket along with the Tamper Home Sensor. Disconnect P/J1045 from the Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Connect P/J1045 to the Sensor. Reinstall the Tamper Home Sensor Bracket onto the Compiler and use the screw (1) to secure the Bracket. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. Install the Rear Lower Cover. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 1 Remove the Tamper Home Sensor
Replacement
1. Position the Tamper Home Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. 1/05 8d-88 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.12
REP 15.2.13 Compiler Paper Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher frame. Remove the Tie Plate. Remove the Compiler Paper Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor Bracket. Disconnect P/J1048 from the Sensor.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Reinstall the Compiler Paper Sensor Bracket onto the Compiler and use the screw (1) to secure the Bracket. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Paper Sensor
Replacement
1. 2. Position the Compiler Paper Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Connect P/J1048 to the Sensor.
1/05 8d-89
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.13
REP 15.2.14 End Wall Open Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher frame (Figure 1). Remove the Tie Plate. Remove the End Wall Open Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the screw (1) securing the Compiler Paper Sensor Bracket to the Compiler. Remove the Bracket along with the Compiler Paper Sensor. Disconnect P/J1046 from the Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that are securing the Sensor to the Bracket. Remove the Sensor.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Position the End Wall Open Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 1 Remove the End Wall Open Sensor
Replacement
1. Reconnect P/J1046 to the Sensor. 1/05 8d-90 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.14
REP 15.2.15 Tamper Motor Drive Belt

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Lower the Stacker Elevator so the Stacker Tray is at the lowest possible position. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the screws (4) securing the Tie Plate to the Finisher Frame. Remove the Tie Plate. Remove the Tamper Motor (REP 15.2.11). Remove the Tamper Motor Drive Belt (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Loosen, do not remove, the screw (1) on the Belt Holder, and slip the Belt out of the holder. Loosen the screw that secures the Belt Tension Pulley. Slip the Belt off of the Tension Pulley, and remove the Belt.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Position the Tamper Motor Drive Belt so the ribs are on the inside of the Belt loop. Slip the Belt over the Tension Pulley. Insert the Belt between the top and bottom of the Belt Holder, and tighten the screw on the Belt Holder. Reinstall the Tamper Motor. Tighten the Belt Tension Screw. Reinstall the Tie Plate and use the screws (4) to secure it to the frame. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
10. Connect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 1 Remove the Tamper Motor Drive Belt
1/05 8d-91
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.15
REP 15.2.16 End Wall Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the End Wall Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the screws (2) securing the Harness Holder to the Finisher frame and push the wire harness to one side. Remove the End Wall Spring. Remove the screws (2) securing the End Wall Motor Bracket to the finisher frame. Remove the Bracket along with the attached End Wall Motor. Release the end Wall Motor wire harness from the harness clips. Disconnect the End Wall Motor wire harness at the back of the motor or disconnect P/J1083. Remove the screws (2) securing the End Wall Motor to the Bracket, and remove the Motor.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Reinstall the End Wall Motor onto the Motor Bracket. Reconnect the End Wall Motor Wire Harness. Reinstall the End Wall Motor Bracket onto the Finisher frame, making sure the End Wall Link is captured inside the End Wall Motor yoke. Connect the End Wall Motor Connector P/J1083. Use the screws (2) to secure the End Wall Motor Bracket to the Finisher frame. Reinstall the End Wall Spring, with one end of the Spring attached to the End Wall Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the End Wall Motor
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.16
1/05 8d-92
REP 15.2.17 Eject Clamp Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the wire harnesses from the wire clamps that are attached to the Eject Bracket. Remove the screw (1) securing the Eject Clamp Sensor Bracket to the Eject Bracket, and remove the Sensor Bracket, along with Sensor. Disconnect P/J1054 from the Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that secure the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
4. 5.
Reinstall the wire harnesses to the wire clamps that are attached to the Eject Bracket. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor
Replacement
1. 2. 3. Position the Eject Clamp Sensor into the Eject Clamp Sensor Bracket. Reconnect P/J1054 to the Sensor. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor Bracket onto the Eject Bracket. Use the screw (1) to secure the Sensor Bracket. 1/05 8d-93 Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.17
REP 15.2.18 Stacker Offset Home Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the screws (2) securing the Offset Home Sensor Bracket to the Finisher frame, and remove the Bracket. Free the two wire harnesses from the wire clamp that is attached to the Bracket. Disconnect P/J1051 from the Stacker Offset Home Sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latches that secure the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
5.
Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. Position the Stacker Offset Home Sensor into the cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reconnect P/J1051 to the Stacker Offset Home Sensor. Secure the two wire harnesses in the wire clamp that is attached to the Bracket. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor Bracket onto the Finisher frame. Use two screws to secure the Bracket to the frame. 1/05 8d-94 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.18
REP 15.2.19 Eject Bracket Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Move the Finisher away from the Printer. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17). Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (REP 15.2.18). Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect P/J1086 and free the harness from all cable clamps. Remove the screws (3) securing the Harness Bracket Assembly to the Finisher frame, and remove the Assembly. Unhook the Tension Spring from the Eject Bracket Assembly. Remove the screws (4) securing the Eject Bracket Assembly to the finisher frame, and remove the Assembly.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Use the screws (4) to secure the Assembly. Hook the Tension Spring onto the Eject Bracket Assembly. Reinstall the Harness Bracket Assembly to the Finisher frame, and use the screws (3) to secure the Bracket. Ensure that P/J1055 to the Eject Paddle Sensor did not accidentally become disconnected when the Harness Bracket Assembly was moved. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor. Reconnect P/J1086 and replace the harness in the harness clamps. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
10. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly onto the Finisher frame. Ensure the cam follower pin on the Offset Lever is correctly positioned in the cam in the Exit Bracket Assembly. 1/05 8d-95 Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.19
REP 15.2.20 Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the finisher away from the printer until it stops. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17). Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (REP 15.2.18). Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly (REP 15.2.19). Remove the Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disconnect P/J1088. Disconnect P/J1055. Remove the screws (2) securing the Motor Bracket to the finisher frame, and pull the Bracket away from the Finisher frame. Free the Eject Paddle Drive Belt from the Motor Pulley, and remove the Motor Bracket. Remove the E-ring securing the Shaft Pulley to the Motor Shaft, and remove the Pulley. Remove the screws (2) securing the Eject Paddle Motor to the Motor Bracket, and remove the Motor. Remove the Eject Paddle Motor Drive Belt from the Eject Pulley. Figure 1 Remove the Eject Paddle Motor and Drive Belt
Replacement
1. 2. 3. Reinstall the Eject Paddle Motor onto the Motor Bracket, and use the screws (2) to secure the Motor. Slide the Shaft Pulley, with the lip facing away from the Motor onto the Motor Shaft. Use the E-ring to secure the Pulley onto the Shaft. Reinstall the Motor Bracket onto the Finisher frame, by first slipping the Eject Paddle Drive Belt over the Shaft Pulley. Use the screws (2) to secure the Motor Bracket to the Finisher frame. Reconnect P/J1088 and P/J1055. If removed, reinstall the Finisher PWB Cover and the Harness Cover. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.20
1/05 8d-96
REP 15.2.21 Eject Shaft Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the Printer. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17). Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (REP 15.2.18). Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly (REP 15.2.19).
10. Remove the Eject Paddle Motor (REP 15.2.20). 11. Remove the Eject Shaft Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the screws (4) securing the Frame tie plate, and remove the plate. Remove the E-ring securing the Set Clamp Actuator to Shaft 1, and remove the Actuator, Pulley, and rear metal bearing. Remove the E-ring securing the front metal bearing for Shaft 1, and remove the front bearing. Remove the E-ring securing the Offset Lever to Shaft 2, and remove the Offset Lever. Remove the E-ring securing the Eject Gear to Shaft 2, and remove the Eject Gear. Remove the screw (1) securing the rear plastic bearing to Shaft 2, and slide the front bearing off of the Shaft. Remove the screw (1) securing the front plastic bearing to Shaft 2, and slide the front bearing off of the Shaft. Remove Shaft 1 and Shaft 2 (the Eject Shaft Assemblies) as a unit. Figure 1 Remove the Eject Shaft Assembly
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Reinstall the Eject Shaft Assemblies into the Finisher frame. Slide the front and the rear metal bearings over the ends of Shaft 1. Position the Compiler Bin so the arms at the front and rear of the Bin line up with Shaft 1. Slide the front and the rear metal bearings into the bearing cutouts in the Finisher frame, and through the arms of the Compiler Bin. use an E-ring to secure the front metal bearing to the front end of Shaft 1. Slide the Pulley and the Set Clamp Actuator over the rear end of Shaft 1, and use an Ering to secure them to the Shaft. Slide the front plastic bearing onto the front end of Shaft 2, and use the screw (1) to secure the bearing to the Finisher frame. Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-97
REP 15.2.21
8. 9.
Slide the rear plastic bearing onto the rear end of Shaft 2, and use the screw (1) to secure the bearing to the Finisher frame. Slide the Eject Gear onto the rear end of Shaft 2, and use an E-ring to secure the Gear to the Shaft.
REP 15.2.22 Compiler Cover Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Remove the Eject Cover (PL 18.15 item 10). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (Figure 1). 1. Remove the E-ring securing the Offset Lever to the rear of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Slide the Offset lever off the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft (rotate the Offset Cam if necessary). Remove the screw securing the Lever to the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Remove the Lever. Remove the screw (1) securing the rear Pinch Roll Bearing to the finisher frame, and slide the Bearing to the rear. Remove the screw securing the front Pinch Roll Bearing to the Finisher frame, and slide the Bearing to the front. Lift the Compiler Cover Assembly and the Pinch Roll Assembly and remove the Compiler Cover Assembly from the finisher frame.
10. Slide the Offset Lever over the rear end of Shaft 2, and use an E-ring to secure the Offset Lever. 11. Reinstall the Eject Paddle Motor. 12. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly. 13. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor. 14. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor. 15. Reinstall the Eject Roll Chute, and use the screws (4) to secure the Chute. 16. Reinstall the Harness Cover. 17. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. 18. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 19. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.21, REP 15.2.22
1/05 8d-98
REP 15.2.23 Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the front and rear bearings from the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Disconnect P/J1075 from the Stack Height Sensor. Slide the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly to the rear and remove it from the Finisher.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly by first sliding the Stack Height Actuator and the Pinch Rolls through the cutout in the Assembly. Hook the two arms of the Compiler Cover Assembly over the Pinch Roll Shaft. Slide the front Pinch Roll Bearing to the rear so the arms of the Compiler Cover Assembly ride on the Bearing. Use the screw (1) to secure the Bearing to the Finisher frame. Slide the rear Pinch Roll Bearing to the front so the arms of the Compiler Cover Assembly ride on the Bearing. Use the screw (1) to secure the Bearing to the Finisher frame. Insert the Lever on the shaft and secure with the screw (1). Insert the Offset Lever into the Offset Cam and onto the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Use the Ering to secure the lever. Raise and lower the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely, and the Stack Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls also move freely. Reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Figure 1 Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly
10. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. Insert the rear of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly into the bearing hole at the rear of the Finisher. Insert the front of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly into the bearing hole at the rear of the Finisher. Reconnect P/J1075 to the Stack Height Sensor.
1/05 8d-99
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.22, REP 15.2.23
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Slide the front and rear bearings over the ends of the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. Raise and lower the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely, and the Stack Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls also move freely. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
REP 15.2.24 Upper Exit Chute Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23). Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (Figure 1). 1. Remove the screw (1) securing the Finisher Interlock Switch Bracket to the front of the Finisher frame, and remove the Bracket to gain access one of the Upper Exit Chute Assembly screws. Remove the screws (2) securing the Upper Exit Chute Assembly to the front Finisher frame. Remove the screws (2) securing the Upper Exit Chute Assembly to the rear Finisher frame. Rotate the Upper Exit Chute Assembly and remove the Assembly from the Finisher.
2. 3. 4.
Figure 1 Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.23, REP 15.2.24
1/05 8d-100
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly into the Finisher frame. Use the screws (4) to secure the front and rear of the Upper Exit Chute Assembly. Reinstall the finisher Interlock Switch Bracket to the front of the Finisher frame, and use one screw to secure the Bracket. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly. Reinstall the Exit Chute Assembly. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
REP 15.2.25 Exit Roll

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23). Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.24). Remove the Exit Roll (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the E-ring securing the Paddle Shaft Drive Gear, that is located just below the Exit Shaft Pulley, and remove the Drive Gear. Loosen the screws (2) that secure the Transport Motor Drive Belt Tension Assembly. Push the idler pulley up to release the tension. Tighten the screws (2). Remove the screw securing the Exit Shaft Pulley to the Shaft, and remove the Pulley. Remove the E-ring securing the front and rear Exit Shaft bearings, and remove the bearings. Slide the Exit Roll out of the Finisher frame.
Figure 1 Remove the Exit Roll
1/05 8d-101
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.24, REP 15.2.25
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Reinstall the Exit Roll. Reinstall the Exit Roll front and rear bearings into the bearing cutouts at the front and rear of the finisher frame. Use an E-ring at both ends of the Shaft. Reinstall the Exit Shaft Pulley onto the Exit Shaft, and use one screw to secure the Pulley to the Shaft. Ensure the Transport Motor Drive Belt is properly installed on all pulleys. Loosen the screws that secures the Belt Tension Assembly. Allow the assembly to properly tension the belt, then tighten the two screws. Reinstall the Paddle Shaft Drive Gear and use the E-ring to secure the Gear to the Shaft. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly.
REP 15.2.26 Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23). Remove the Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.24). Remove the Exit Roll (REP 15.2.21). Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the E-ring securing the rear bearing to the Paddle Drive Shaft, and slide the bearing off the Shaft. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the rear of the Finisher frame. Remove the screws (2) securing the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the front of the Finisher frame. Remove the Lower Exit Chute Assembly and place it on a stable work surface. Remove the E-rings from both ends of the Paddle Shaft. Slide the Paddle Drive Belt off of the Paddle Drive Pulley. Slide the Paddle Drive Pulley off of the Paddle Shaft. Remove the screw securing the front Paddle Bearing, and slide the bearing off of the Shaft. Remove the screw securing the rear Paddle Bearing, and remove the bearing, Drive Belt, Drive Shaft, and Paddle Shaft from the Lower Exit Chute Assembly.
10. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. 11. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 12. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
10. Slide the Paddle Shaft out of the rear bearing.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.25, REP 15.2.26
1/05 8d-102
7. 8. 9.
Use an E-ring to secure the front of the Paddle Shaft to the front bearing. Reinstall the Lower Exit Chute Assembly onto the Finisher frame. Use the screws (4) to secure the Lower Exit Chute Assembly to the Finisher frame.
10. Slide the metal bearing onto the rear of the Paddle Drive Shaft, and use an E-ring to secure the bearing to the rear of the Finisher. 11. Reinstall the Exit Roll. 12. Reinstall the Upper Exit Chute Assembly. 13. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly. 14. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. 15. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 16. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly
Replacement
1. 2. 3. Reinstall the Drive Belt onto the Drive Pulley. Slide the end of the Paddle Shaft into the rear bearing. Install the Compiler Paddle Shaft Assembly, along with the attached rear Paddle Bearing, onto the Lower Exit Chute Assembly. Use the screw (1) to secure the rear bearing to the Exit Chute. Reinstall the front Paddle Bearing by sliding the bearing over the front end of the Paddle Shaft. Slide the Paddle Drive Pulley, with a lip facing in, onto the rear of the Paddle Shaft, and use an E-ring to secure the drive Pulley to the Shaft. Slide the Drive Belt onto the Paddle Drive Pulley. Finisher/Sorter
4. 5. 6.
1/05 8d-103
REP 15.2.26
REP 15.2.27 Paddle Drive Belt

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23). Remove the Paddle Drive Belt (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the two screws securing the Front Pinch Roll Cover to the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft, and slide the Cover off of the Shaft. Remove the E-ring securing the Paddle Cover Assembly to the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft, and slide the Cover Assembly off of the Shaft. Remove the screw securing the Sensor Bracket to the Paddle Cover Assembly, and remove the Bracket. Remove the Paddle out of the Paddle Cover Assembly. Remove the Paddle Drive Belt.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Slip the Paddle Drive Belt over the Paddle Gear. Press the Paddle onto the Paddle Cover Assembly. Reinstall the Sensor Bracket Assembly onto the Paddle Cover Assembly, and use the screw (1) to secure the Bracket. Reinstall the Drive Gear onto the other end of the Belt, and position the Gear in the Paddle Cover Assembly. Slide the Paddle Cover Assembly onto the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Use an E-ring to secure the Paddle Cover Assembly to the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft. Slide the Front Pinch Roll Cover onto the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft, and use the screws (2) to secure the Cover to the Shaft. Reinstall the Eject Pinch Roll Assembly. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly. Raise and loser the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely, and the Stack Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls also move freely.
10. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 11. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Paddle Drive Belt
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.27
1/05 8d-104
REP 15.2.28 Stacker Height Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Compiler Cover Assembly (REP 15.2.22). Remove the Eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly (REP 15.2.23). Remove the Stacker Height Sensor (Figure 1). 1. Release the latches that are securing the Stack Height Sensor to the Sensor Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Raise and lower the Compiler Cover Assembly to make sure it moves freely. Check that the Stack Height Actuator and Pinch Rolls moves freely. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Stacker Height Sensor
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. Position the Stack Height Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Raise and lower the Stack Height Sensor Actuator to make sure the Actuator arm moves freely between the arms of the Stack Height Sensor. Reinstall the eject Pinch Roll Shaft Assembly. Reinstall the Compiler Cover Assembly.
1/05 8d-105
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.28
REP 15.2.29 Unload While Run Switch

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Unload While Run Switch (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the screw (1) securing the Switch Bracket to the Finisher frame, and remove the Bracket. Disconnect P/J1075 from the Switch. Remove the screw (1) securing the Switch to the Bracket, and remove the Switch.
REP 15.2.30 Compiler Entrance Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5). Remove the Compiler Entrance Sensor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the Compiler Entrance Sensor Connector P/J1052. Remove the screws (2) securing the Compiler Entrance Sensor Bracket. Pull the Sensor Bracket up and remove the Compiler Enter Sensor.
Figure 1 Remove the Unload While Run Switch
Figure 1 Remove the Compiler Entrance Sensor
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reinstall the Unload While Run Switch onto the Switch Bracket. With the screw (1) secure the Switch to the Bracket. Reconnect P/J1075 to the Switch. Reinstall the Bracket to the Finisher frame, and use the screw (1) to secure it to the frame. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. Install the Compiler Entrance Sensor bracket into place. Route the Compiler Entrance Sensor harness through the opening in the frame and connect P/J1052 connector. Install the screws (2) and secure the Compiler Entrance Sensor Bracket. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.29, REP 15.2.30
1/05 8d-106
REP 15.2.31 Eject Paddle Home Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until it stops. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17). Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (REP 15.2.18). Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly (REP 15.2.19). Remove the Eject Paddle Motor (REP 15.2.20). NOTE: Do not remove the Motor from the Bracket. 8. Remove the Eject Paddle Home Sensor (Figure 1). 1. Press in and release the Sensor latches that secure the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor. Reinstall the Upper Rear Cover. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Paddle Home Sensor
Replacement
1. 2. Position the Eject Paddle Home Sensor into the cutout in the Motor Bracket. Reinstall the Eject Paddle Motor. 1/05 8d-107 Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.31
REP 15.2.32 Eject Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until it stops. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Eject Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Free the wire harnesses that run the length of the Harness Bracket. Remove the screws (3) securing the Harness Bracket to the Finisher frame, and remove the Bracket. Disconnect P/J1091. Remove the screws (2) securing the Eject Motor Bracket to the Finisher frame. Slip the Motor shaft pulley free of the Eject Motor Drive Belt, and remove the Bracket and Motor. Remove the screws (2) securing the Eject Motor to the Motor Bracket, and remove the Motor.
2.
Reinstall the Motor Bracket onto the Finisher frame, making sure to loop the free end of the Eject Motor Drive Belt over the Motor shaft pulley. Use the screws (2) to secure the Eject Motor Bracket to the Finisher frame, but do not tighten the screws at this time. Push down slightly on the Eject Motor, to apply tension to the Drive Belt, and hold the Motor down while tightening the screws (2) securing the Bracket to the frame. Reconnect P/J1091. Reinstall the Harness Bracket to the Finisher frame, and use the screws (3) to secure it to the frame. Route the wire harnesses through the clips that run the length of the Harness Bracket. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Figure 1 Remove the Eject Motor
Replacement
1. Position the Eject Motor against the Eject Motor Bracket. Use the screws (2) to secure the Motor to the Bracket. 1/05 8d-108 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.32
REP 15.2.33 Eject Clamp/Offset Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until it stops. Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17). Remove the Stacker Offset Home Sensor (REP 15.2.18). Remove the Eject Bracket Assembly (REP 15.2.19). Remove the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the E ring securing the One Way Gear to the Offset Cam Assembly, and remove the Gear. Remove the E ring securing the Rear Offset Cam Assembly Bearing, and remove the Bearing. Remove the Offset Cam Assembly from the Eject Bracket. Remove the E ring securing the Drive Gear, and remove the Gear. Remove the two Idler Gears. Remove the screws (3) securing the Eject Clamp Offset Motor, and remove the Motor from the Eject Bracket Assembly. Figure 1 Remove the Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Offset Motor into the Eject Bracket Assembly, and use the screws (3) to secure the Motor. Reinstall the two idler Gears. Reinstall the Drive Gear, and use an E ring to secure the Gear. Reinstall the Offset Cam Assembly, with the Actuator toward the inside wall of the Eject Bracket, into the Eject Bracket Assembly. Reinstall the bearings to both ends of the Offset Cam Assembly Shaft. Reinstall an E ring to the short end of the Offset Cam Assembly Shaft. Reinstall the One Way Gear to the end of the Offset Cam Assembly Shaft, and use an E ring to secure the Gear to the Shaft. Reinstall the Eject Bracket Assembly. Reinstall the Stacker Offset Home Sensor.
10. Reinstall the Eject Clamp Sensor. 11. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 12. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
1/05 8d-109
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.33
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.2.33
1/05 8d-110
REP 15.3.1 Finisher

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Move the Finisher away from the printer. Disconnect the Finisher (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the thumb screw from the end of the Docking Rail Assembly, and pull the Finisher free from the Docking Rail Assembly. Disconnect the Finisher IOT Connector from the rear of the printer. Roll the Finisher away from the printer.
REP 15.3.2 Stapler Door Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Door Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 1. Open the Stapler Door. Remove the C-Clip securing the top hinge. Lift and remove the Stapler Door.
Replacement
Reinstall the Stapler Door in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
Move the Finisher to within 12 inches (304.8 mm) of the printer. Reinstall the Docking Rail Assembly under the printer. Secure the Docking Rail Assembly with the thumb screw. Reconnect the Finisher IOT Connector to the printer. Push the Finisher in against the printer, making sure that the Docking pin on the printer is aligned with the Docking Plate locating hole on the Finisher.
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Door Assembly
Figure 1 Disconnect the Finisher
1/05 8d-111
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.1, REP 15.3.2
REP 15.3.3 Stapler Cover Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5). Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 1. Open the Stapler Door Assembly. Remove the three screws securing the Cover Assembly. Lift and pull to remove the Stapler Cover Assembly.
REP 15.3.4 Decurler Door Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Decurler Door Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 1. Open the Decurler Door Assembly. Remove the C-clip securing the bottom hinge. Lift and remove the Decurler Door Assembly.
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Door Assembly in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Door Assembly Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.3, REP 15.3.4
1/05 8d-112
REP 15.3.5 Mailbox Door Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 1. Open the Mailbox Door Assembly. Remove the C-clip securing the top hinge. Lift and remove the Mailbox Door Assembly.
REP 15.3.6 Left Lower Cover

Parts List on 18.2 Removal WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. Remove the Left Lower Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 1. Remove the two screws securing the Left Lower Cover. Remove the Left Lower Cover.
Replacement
Reinstall the Mailbox Door Assembly in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
Replace the Left Lower Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Mailbox Door Assembly
Figure 1 Remove the Left Lower Cover
1/05 8d-113
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.5, REP 15.3.6
REP 15.3.7 Rear Upper Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 1. Remove the three screws securing the Rear Upper Cover. Pull out while lifting, to remove the Rear Upper Cover.
REP 15.3.8 IOT Connector Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the IOT Connector Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear left Caster Cap. Remove the one screw securing the cover. Disengage the wire harness and the IOT Connector support link from the cover to remove the IOT Connector Cover.
Replacement
Ensure that the tabs of the Rear Upper Cover are snapped onto the ledge of the Rear Lower Cover before installing the three screws.
Replacement
1. Replace the IOT Connector Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Rear Upper Cover Figure 1 Remove the IOT Connector Cover
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.7, REP 15.3.8
1/05 8d-114
REP 15.3.9 Finisher PWB Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. Remove the Left Lower Cover (REP 15.3.6). Remove the Finisher PWB Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 1. Remove the 12 screws securing the Finisher PWB Cover. Remove the Finisher PWB Cover.
REP 15.3.10 Left Upper Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Left Upper Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 1. Remove the two screws securing the cover. Remove the Left Upper Cover.
Replacement
Replace the Left Upper Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
Replace the Finisher PWB Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Left Upper Cover Figure 1 Remove the Finisher PWB Cover
1/05 8d-115
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.9, REP 15.3.10
REP 15.3.11 Top Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Top Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Open the Mailbox Door. Loosen the one screw at the front of the cover. Loosen the screw at the rear and the screw at the top inside. Lift to remove the Top Cover.
REP 15.3.12 Decurler Top Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 1. Remove the two screws on the left side of the cover. Remove the one screw on the rear side of the cover. Remove the Decurler Top Cover.
Replacement
Replace the Decurler Top Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
Replace the Top Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Top Cover Figure 1 Remove the Top Cover
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.11, REP 15.3.12
1/05 8d-116
REP 15.3.13 Decurler Rear Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Move the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. Remove the three screws securing the Decurler Rear Cover. Disengage the wire harness from the cover at the bottom, as you remove the Decurler Rear Cover.
REP 15.3.14 Decurler Inner Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Decurler Door. Remove the 6 Knob. Remove the two screws securing the Decurler Inner Cover. Disconnect the connector to the Decurler Door Interlock Switch as you remove the Decurler Inner Cover.
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Decurler Rear Cover in the reverse order of removal. 1.
Replacement
Reinstall the Decurler Inner Cover in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Rear Cover Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Inner Cover
1/05 8d-117
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.13, REP 15.3.14
REP 15.3.15 Rear Lower Cover

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. Remove the three screws securing the Rear Lower Cover. Snap off the Rear Panel securing the wire harness to the cover. Lift up and remove the Rear Lower Cover.
REP 15.3.16 Stapler Assembly

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Reach in from the side and pull the Stapler Assembly to the front of the Finisher, if required. Remove the Stapler Assembly (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect P/J1092 from the Stapler Assembly. Release the harness clip from the side of the Stapler Assembly. Observe the orientation of the scribe lines so that the Stapler Assembly can be repositioned correctly during the replacement. Remove the two screws securing the Stapler Assembly to the Slider Bracket, and remove the Stapler Assembly. Release the wire harness from the harness clip near the rear of the Stapler Assembly. Remove the screw to remove the green ground wire.
Replacement
Place the cover back into position and secure it with the three screws. Align the wire harness into the cutout of the Rear Panel and snap the Rear Panel into place.
Figure 1 Remove the Rear Lower Cover
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.15, REP 15.3.16
1/05 8d-118
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Position the Stapler Assembly near the Slider Bracket. Route the wire harness through the harness clip near the rear of the Stapler Assembly. Install the screw to secure the green ground wire to the Stapler Assembly. Reinstall the Stapler Assembly onto the Slider Bracket, making sure to slide the rear tab of the Stapler Assembly into the cutout on the Slider Bracket. Position the Stapler assembly to align with the scribe lines as observed during the removal, and then use two screws to secure the Stapler Assembly to the Rail. Reinstall the harness clip to the side of the Stapler Assembly. Reconnect P/J 1092 to the Stapler Assembly. Reinstall the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Check the Staple Position Adjustment (ADJ 15.3.1).
REP 15.3.17 Stapler Position Sensors

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer (REP 15.3.1). Remove the Stapler Cover (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover REP 15.3.15. Remove the Stapler Assembly (REP 15.3.16). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). At the rear of the Finisher, prepare to remove the Stapler Position Sensors by rotating the Stapler Position Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt off of the Drive Pulley. Remove the Stapler Position Sensors (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the three connectors from the Stapler Sensors, and free the wire harnesses from the harness clip that is located on the Stapler Rail. Remove two screws at the rear of the Finisher and two screws at the front of the Finisher that secure the Stapler Rail to the Finisher frame, and remove the Rail. Place the Stapler Rail on a flat work surface. Remove the screw that secures the sensor bracket of the sensor you are changing. Remove the Bracket along with the attached sensor. Press in and release the Sensor latch that is securing the Sensor to the Bracket, and remove the Sensor.
1/05 8d-119
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.16, REP 15.3.17
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Reinstall the Sensor Bracket onto the Stapler Rail, and use one screw to secure the Bracket to the Rail. Reinstall the Stapler Rail into the Finisher frame. Use four screws to secure the Rail to the frame. Reconnect the three connectors to the three sensors. Route the wire harness through the harness clips that are located on the Stapler Rail. Rotate the Stapler Transport Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt onto the Drive Pulley. Reinstall the Stapler Assembly. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. Reinstall the Stapler Cover.
10. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Position Sensors
Replacement
1. Position the Sensor into the Sensor cutout in the Sensor Bracket. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.17
1/05 8d-120
REP 15.3.18 Stapler Rail Belt

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Disconnect the Finisher from the Printer (REP 15.3.1). Remove the Stapler Cover (REP 15.3.3). Remove the Rear Lower Cover REP 15.3.15. Remove the Stapler Assembly (REP 15.3.16). Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). At the rear of the Finisher, prepare to remove the Stapler Position Sensors by rotating the Stapler Position Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt off of the Drive Pulley. Remove the Stapler Rail (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the three connectors from the Stapler Sensors, and free the wire harnesses from the harness clip that is located on the Stapler Rail. 2. Remove two screws at the rear of the Finisher and two screws at the front of the Finisher that secure the Stapler Rail to the Finisher frame, and remove the Rail. 3. Place the Stapler Rail on a flat work surface.
Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Rail 9. Remove the Stapler Rail Belt (Figure 2). 1. Remove the two screws securing the Tension Cover to the Rail, and remove the Cover. Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-121
REP 15.3.18
2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove the ten screws securing the Upper Rail to the Lower Rail, and remove the Upper Rail. Remove the screw securing the Belt Clamp to the Slider Bracket. Disengage the Belt from the Lower Rail. Remove the Belt from the Belt Clamp.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Reinstall the Belt Clamp onto the Slider Bracket, and use one screw to secure the Clamp. Ensure that the tension idler engages the belt. Push out on the Tension Bracket so that the springs are stretched, and reinstall the Upper Rail onto the Lower Rail. Reach under the Lower Rail and position the Belt so the back (non-ribbed side) of the Belt rides against the Tension Roll. Release the Tension Bracket. Use the remaining screws to secure the Upper Rail to the Lower Rail. Ensure that the belt moves freely without binding. Reinstall the Tension Cover over the Tension Bracket, and use two screws to secure the Cover to the Upper Rail. Rotate the Drive Pulley to make sure that the Belt tracks correctly and that the Slider Bracket moves smoothly along the Rail.
10. Reinstall the Stapler Rail into the Finisher frame. Use four screws to secure the Rail to the frame. 11. Reconnect the P/J connectors to the sensors. 12. Route the wire harness through the harness clips that are located on the Stapler Rail. 13. Rotate the Stapler Transport Motor Drive Belt as you slip the Belt onto the Drive Pulley. 14. Reinstall the Stapler Assembly. 15. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 16. Reinstall the Stapler Cover. 17. Reconnect the Finisher to the Printer.
Figure 2 Remove the Stapler Rail Belt
Replacement
1. 2. Ensure that the belt is positioned as shown in the illustration and reinstall the Belt Clamp onto the Belt. Reinstall the Belt on the Lower Rail.
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.18
1/05 8d-122
REP 15.3.19 Stapler Position Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Remove the Stapler Position Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the harness clamp securing the wire harness and disconnect the motor connector P/J1089. Remove the two screws securing the motor to the motor bracket. Disengage and remove the belt. Remove the Stapler Position Motor.
REP 15.3.20 Mailbox Drive Motor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Mailbox Drive Motor (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the P/J1021 from the connector on the motor PWB. Remove the two screws at the bottom of the motor bracket. While holding the motor bracket, remove the top screw from the bracket and remove the Mailbox Drive Motor.
Replacement
1. 2. 3. 4. Engage the teeth of the motor gear onto the Mailbox Drive Belt and ensure that the motor shaft is installed into the hole in the frame. Secure the motor bracket with the three screws. Rotate the motor in order to ensure that the drives are engaged correctly. Reconnect P/J1021.
Replacement
Install the Stapler Position Motor onto the motor bracket. Place the drive belt onto the gear. Bring the motor into position and engage the belt and the motor drive gear. Secure the motor with the screws.
Figure 1 Remove the Mailbox Drive Motor Figure 1 Remove the Stapler Position Motor
1/05 8d-123
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.19, REP 15.3.20
REP 15.3.21 Mailbox Drive Belt

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the SCT Exit Cover (PL 18.3). Remove the Mailbox Drive Motor (REP 15.3.20). Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt (Figure 1). 1. 2. Remove the two screws securing the Belt Idler Bracket. Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt.
Figure 2 Install the Mailbox Drive Belt 2. 3. 4. 5. Reinstall the Belt Idler Bracket and secure with the two screws. Reinstall the Mailbox Drive Motor (REP 15.3.20). Reinstall the SCT Exit Cover (PL 18.3). Reinstall the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7).
Figure 1 Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt
Replacement
1. Route the Mailbox Drive Belt onto the gears per the illustration (Figure 2).
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.21
1/05 8d-124
REP 15.3.23 Docking Interlock Switch

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Move the Finisher away from the printer until the Finisher stops. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13). Remove the appropriate Docking Interlock Switch (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Disconnect the Docking Switch Connector, P/J664 or P/J665. Remove the four screws securing the Entrance Lower Chute. Disengage the switch harness from the harness clamps. Remove the two screws to remove the appropriate Docking Interlock Switch.
REP 15.3.25 Decurler Door Interlock Switch

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12). Remove the Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14). Remove the Decurler Door Interlock Switch (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector, then push in the tabs to remove the Decurler Door Interlock Switch from the Decurler Inner Cover.
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Decurler Door Interlock Switch in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
Reinstall the Docking Interlock Switch in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Decurler Door Interlock Switch
Figure 1 Remove the Docking Interlock Switches
1/05 8d-125
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.23, REP 15.3.25
REP 15.3.28 Finisher PWB

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Roll the Finisher away from the printer until it stops. Remove the Left Lower Cover (REP 15.3.6). NOTE: Observe the ESD procedures while removing the Finisher PWB. 4. Remove the Finisher PWB (Figure 1). 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Finisher PWB Cover. Disconnect the 18 connectors from the Finisher PWB. Remove the harness from the harness holder and move the harness lines away. Remove eight screws securing the Finisher PWB. Grasp the PWB at the bottom and move the bottom away first to remove the Finisher PWB.
REP 15.3.29 Finisher PWB EPROM

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Observe the ESD procedures. Remove the Finisher PWB (REP 15.3.28). Remove the EPROM. Reinstall the EPROM in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Finisher PWB in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Finisher PWB
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.28, REP 15.3.29
1/05 8d-126
REP 15.3.30 Vertical LED and Sensor

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 2. 3. Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). SCT Exit Cover (PL 18.3). Top Cover (REP 15.3.11).
1. Remove the four screws securing the chute to the frame at the front and at the rear. 2. Rotate the chute to the right side to access the screw securing the sensor. 3. Remove the screw. 4. Remove the Vertical Sensor.
Remove the Mailbox Door (REP 15.3.5). Remove the Vertical LED (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector. 2. Release the clamps (2) and remove the wire. 3. Remove the LED Sensor screw. 4. Remove the Vertical LED.
Figure 2 Remove the Vertical Sensor
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Vertical LED and Sensor in the reverse order of disassembly.
Figure 1 Remove the Vertical LED 4. Remove the Vertical Sensor (Figure 2).
1/05 8d-127
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.30
REP 15.3.31 Bin Tray 1

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. Remove the following parts: a. b. c. 2. Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7) Top Cover (REP 15.3.11) Left Upper Cover (REP 15.3.10) 1. Remove the spring. 2. Remove the Mailbox Drive Belt from the pulley.
Remove the spring (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Bin Tray Cover 4. 5. Remove the Panel Assembly (Numbered Panel) (PL 18.2 item 25). Remove the Bin Tray 1 (Figure 3). 1. Remove the screws (3). 2. Lift up on Bin Tray 1 to snap the pawl free from the gate, then remove Bin Tray 1.
Figure 1 Remove the Spring 3. Remove the Bin Tray Cover (Figure 2). 1. Remove the screw from the Vertical LED. 2. Remove the Vertical LED. 3. Remove the screws (3) from the Bin Tray Cover. 4. Remove the Bin Tray Cover. Finisher/Sorter 1/05 8d-128 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
REP 15.3.31
REP 15.3.32 Bin Trays 2 - 10

To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. NOTE: This page describes how to disassemble Bin Tray 2. NOTE: To remove any Bin Tray (n), first remove Bin Trays 1 to (n-1). 1. 2. 3. Remove the Bin Tray 1 (REP 15.3.31). Remove the Panel Assembly (Numbered Panel) (PL 18.2 item 25). Remove the Bin Tray 2 (Figure 1). 1. Disconnect the connector (if required). 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Lift up on Bin Tray 2 to snap the pawl free from the gate, then remove Bin Tray 2.
Replacement
1. Reinstall the Bin Tray 1 in the reverse order of removal.
Figure 1 Remove the Bin Tray 2
Installation
1. Reinstall the Bin Trays 2 - 10 in the reverse order of removal.
1/05 8d-129
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.31, REP 15.3.32
Finisher/Sorter
REP 15.3.31, REP 15.3.32
1/05 8d-130
ADJ 15.3.1 Staple Position Adjustment

Purpose
The purpose is to ensure that the staples are in the correct position.
2.
Using the scribe lines as a reference, move the Stapler Assembly to achieve the desired dimension. Dimension A changes in increments of approximately 4 mm. To increase the dimension A, move the stapler in the direction of the (+) sign. To decrease the dimension A, move the stapler in the direction of the (-) sign (Figure 2). Tighten the two screws.
Check
1. 2. Run a copy set into the Finisher in the staple mode. Check the staple position (Figure 1).
3. 4.
Perform the check again.
Figure 2 Adjust the Staple position (Dimension A) Figure 1 Check the Staple Position 3. 4. To change dimension A, perform Dimension A adjustment. To change dimension B, perform Dimension B adjustment.
Adjustment
Dimension B adjustment
Adjustment
Dimension A adjustment
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or shock, disconnect the Finisher cable connector. Switch off the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord. 1. 2. Remove the Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3). Adjust the position of the Stapler Assembly (Figure 2). 1. Loosen the two screws.
1. 2. 3.
Remove the Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7). Remove the Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15). Adjust the position of the Compiler Tray (Figure 3). 1. 2. Loosen the screw. Using the scribe lines as a reference, move the Compiler Tray to achieve the desired dimension. Dimension B changes in increments of approximately 6 mm. To increase the dimension B, move the tray in the direction of the (+) sign. To decrease the dimension B, move the tray in the direction of the (-) sign (Figure 3). Tighten the screw.
3.
1/05 8d-131
Finisher/Sorter
ADJ 15.3.1
ADJ 15.3.2 Stacker Tray Level

Purpose
The purpose of this adjustment is to ensure the Stacker Tray Carriage is level with the frame of the Stacker Tray Assembly.
Check
1. Lower the Stacker Tray to the bottom of the Stacker Tray Assembly by supporting the Stacker Tray with one hand then pull to separate the Dog Clutch Gear from the Dog Clutch Pulley. Check that the Stacker Tray Carriage is touching the Stacker Tray Assembly Tie Plate on the front and rear of the Assembly (Figure 1). If both ends of the Stacker Tray Carriage are touching the Tie Plate, the check is good.
2. 3.
Figure 3 Adjust the Staple position (Dimension B) 4. Perform the check again.
Figure 1 Checking the Stacker Tray Carriage
Adjustment
NOTE: If entering this procedure from REP 15.2.9 Stacker Tray Drive Belts or REP 15.2.10 Stacker Tray, proceed to Step 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC Power Cord. Remove the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2). Support the Stacker Tray with one hand and pull the Dog Clutch Gear away from the Dog Clutch Pulley and lower the Tray to the bottom of the Stacker Tray Assembly (PL 18.22). Remove the screws (2) from the front Stacker Tray Drive Belt Clamp and remove the Clamp (Figure 2). Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Finisher/Sorter
ADJ 15.3.1, ADJ 15.3.2
1/05 8d-132
5.
Adjust the Tray level by pulling the Belt Clamp off the front Drive Belt and reinstalling the Clamp up or down the Belt to move the front end of the Stacker Tray Carriage up or down in order to be level with the rear end of the Stacker Tray Carriage. Install the Drive Belt and Belt Clamp into the Tray bracket. Check the adjustment and repeat step 5 and step 6 if necessary. Install the screws (2) to secure the front Belt Clamp to the front Drive Belt. Return to REP 15.2.9 or REP 15.2.10 or reinstall the Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2).
6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Reinstall the Rear Lower Cover. 11. Install the Stapler Cover Assembly.
Figure 2 Leveling the Stacker Tray
1/05 8d-133
Finisher/Sorter
ADJ 15.3.2
Finisher/Sorter
ADJ 15.3.2
1/05 8d-134
PL 18.1 Finisher Accessory

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 015K35862 003K91881 830E19412 029E21610 015K31860 015K31871 032E10210 Description Finisher Assembly (Not Spared) (REP 15.3.1) Docking Rail Knob Screw Docking Plate Docking Pin Stopper (Not Spared) Vcci Bracket (Not Spared) Thumb Screw (Not Spared) Rail Bracket Plate (Tray Module Left) Guide (Tray Module Right) Gasket (P/O PL 18.1 Item 2) Bracket (Mailbox Left) (P/O PL 18.1 Item 2) Bracket (Mailbox Right) (P/O PL 18.1 Item 2) Label (P/O PL 18.1 Item 2) Docking Rail (P/O PL 18.1 Item 2) Rail Assembly (Not Spared)
1/05 8d-135
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.1
PL 18.2 Covers - Left, Front

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Part 802E13930 048K77410 121E90490 802K14650 830E59990 048E65721 121E84720 802K14660 892E13300 891E73451 048E66520 048K77971 802K05082 048E66560 Description Finisher (REF: PL 18.4) (Not Spared) Finisher PWB Cover (Not Spared) (REP 15.3.9) Left Lower Cover (REP 15.3.6) Decurler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.4) Decurler Door (P/O PL 18.2 Item 4) Magnet Plate (P/O PL 18.2 Item 4) Hinge (P/O PL 18.2 Item 4) Magnet Catch Screw (P/O PL 18.2 Item 4) Stapler Door Assembly (REP 15.3.2) Stapler Cover (P/O PL 18.2 Item 10) Magnet Plate Stapler Cover Assembly (REP 15.3.3) Stapler Cover (P/O PL 18.2 Item 13) Magnet Catch Screw (P/O PL 18.2 Item 13) Mailbox Door Assembly (REP 15.3.5) Mailbox Door (P/O PL 18.2 Item 17) Wrench (P/O PL 18.2 Item 17) Label Screw (P/O PL 18.2 Item 17) Label Left Upper Cover (REP 15.3.10) Top Cover (REP 15.3.11) Panel Assembly Panel
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.2
1/05 8d-136
PL 18.3 Covers - Right, Rear

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 048E65740 802E13940 802E13950 802E13960 050K41310 130K60600 162K60401 830E34990 830E35000 048E66571 802E13990 802E14000 802E14010 Description Finisher (REF: PL 18.4) (Not Spared) Decurler Rear Cover (REP 15.3.13) IOT Connector Cover (REP 15.3.8) Rear Panel (Not Spared) Rear Upper Cover (REP 15.3.7) Rear Lower Cover (REP 15.3.15) Single Catch Tray Assembly (REP 15.1.17) Single Catch Tray (P/O PL 18.3 Item 7) SCT Full Sensor Screw (P/O PL 18.3 Item 7) Wire Harness (Finisher PWB-IOT) Support Link (Left) Support Link (Right) Wire Harness (P/O PL 18.3 Item 11) Mailbox Rear Lower Cover SCT Exit Front Cover SCT Exit Cover SCT Exit Rear Cover
1/05 8d-137
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.3
PL 18.4 Finisher Components

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 160K67951 417W30349 021E96430 050K41320 121E87250 Description Stapler (Not Spared) PWB Chassis (Not Spared) Finisher PWB (REP 15.3.28) Decurler (Not Spared) (REP 15.1.1) Cabinet (Not Spared) Nut (Not Spared) (4 Places) Caster (4 Places) Caster Cap (4 Places) Stacker Mailbox (Not Spared) Front Bracket (Not Spared) Rear Bracket (Not Spared) Magnet Bracket (Not Spared) Magnet Catch
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.4
1/05 8d-138
PL 18.5 Decurler Cover

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 003K85570 003K83211 003E46501 003K85101 048K77420 110E97990 048E65730 809E02991 Description Knob Assembly Knob Label (P/O PL 18.5 Item 1) Handle Hinge Decurler Inner Cover (REP 15.3.14) Decurler Inner Cover (P/O PL 18.5 Item 6) Decurler Door Interlock Switch (REP 15.3.25) Decurler Top Cover (REP 15.3.12) Spring Bracket (Not Spared) Label (Not Spared)
1/05 8d-139
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.5
PL 18.6 Decurler Chute, PWB

Item 1 2 3 4 Part Description Entrance Lower Chute (Not Spared) Entrance Lower Chute (P/O PL 18.6 Item 1) Wire Harness (Decurler PWB-Finisher PWB) (P/O PL 18.6 Item 1) Docking Interlock Switch 1, Switch 2 (P/O PL 18.6 Item 1) (REP 15.3.23) Chute Exit Lower Baffle Assembly Exit Lower Baffle (P/O PL 18.6 Item 6) Pinch Roll (5 Places) (REP 15.1.6 REP 15.1.5) Knob Label (5) (P/O PL 18.6 Item 6) Upper Chute (Not Spared) Static Eliminator Magnet Catch Decurler PWB (REP 15.1.7)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
054E14510 054K13920 059K08590 003E36290 105E09160 121E91450 160K67991
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.6
1/05 8d-140
PL 18.7 Decurler Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Part 006E61320 007E54990 007E55010 007E45131 007E55030 007E55040 015K28141 007E45091 008E93390 011K94401 011K94411 022K57120 022K57130 062E98711 121K83981 130E82530 809E14570 413W08350 413W75959 Description Cam Drive Shaft (REP 15.1.8) Gear (32) Gear (28/33) Gear (32) Gear (52/56) Gear (20) Idler Gear Assembly Gear (32) Bracket (P/O PL 18.7 Item 7) Screw (Not Spared) Cam (REP 15.1.3) Front Lever Rear Lever Decurler Roll 1 (Upper) (REP 15.1.2) Decurler Roll 2 (Lower) (REP 15.1.2) Reflector (REP 15.1.3) Decurler Cam Clutch Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Decurler Cam Position Sensor Spring Bearing Bearing
1/05 8d-141
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.7
PL 18.8 Decurler Transport Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Part 007E54960 007E54980 007E54990 007E55000 007E45091 407W08220 007E54970 022E19660 022E19670 022K61500 022K51621 127K24901 413W08350 413W75959 003E48920 604K13030 Description Gear (38) Torque Limiter Gear (Not Spared) (REP 15.1.9) Gear (16) Gear (32) Gear (16) Gear (32) Gear (20) Gear (34) Decurler Drive Roll 2 (REP 15.1.10) Decurler Drive Roll 1 (REP 15.1.11) Decurler Entrance Roll (REP 15.1.12) Decurler Exit Roll (REP 15.1.13) Motor Shaft (Not Spared) Decurler Stepper Motor (REP 15.1.4) Bearing Bearing Wheel (Not Spared) Stopper (One-Way Clutch) (Not Spared) Stopper Finisher/Sorter Mailbox Gear Repair Kit
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.8
1/05 8d-142
PL 18.9 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Part 005E15360 007E62850 007E62860 009E72520 020E25141 020E33850 022K61450 022K61460 007E62870 015K44950 020K09460 020K98320 423W87254 007E62880 015K44960 007E62890 413W75959 499W14524 127K24952 007E62830 423W30754 Description Collar (Not Spared) Friction Clutch Decurler Gear Idler Pulley Spring Idler Pulley Pulley (21) Finisher Transport Roll 1 (REP 15.1.21) Finisher Transport Roll 2 (REP 15.1.21) Motor Bracket (Not Spared) Gear Pulley Collar (Not Spared) Transmission Gear Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 18.9 Item 13) Shaft (P/O PL 18.9 Item 13) One Way Pulley (23) One Way Pulley (26) Finisher Drive Belt Decurler Gear Bearing (P/O PL 18.9 Item 13) Tension Pulley Stopper Collar (Not Spared) Decurler Gear Bearing Idler Pulley Finisher Transport Motor (REP 15.1.15) Collar (Not Spared) Gear Pulley Compiler Drive Belt Plate (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared)
1/05 8d-143
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.9
PL 18.10 Mailbox Entrance Roll, Sct Exit Roll

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Part 005E15350 020E33840 022K61470 023E13160 015K48190 809E14980 022E83460 022K61490 127K37840 7E56970 413W75959 499W17061 499W14123 162K47500 Description Collar (Not Spared) Friction Clutch Pulley (23) Mailbox Entrance Roll Mailbox Drive Belt (Not Spared) (REP 15.3.21) Belt Tension Bracket Tension Pulley (Not Spared) Screw (Not Spared) Spring Idler Pulley Stopper Collar (Not Spared) SCT Exit Roll (REP 15.1.20) Mailbox Drive Motor Assembly (REP 15.3.20) Motor Bracket (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13) Mailbox Drive Motor (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13) Pulley (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13) Pulley (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13) Belt (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13) Collar (P/O PL 18.10 Item 13) Bearing (Not Spared) Bearing Idler Pulley Pulley Wire Harness (Motor Mailbox PWB)
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.10
1/05 8d-144
PL 18.11 Mailbox - Gate, PWB, Interlock Switch

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 012E09860 012E09870 110E97990 121E87250 050E16500 050E16510 160K67960 121K14541 Description Hinge (Not Spared) Link (Finisher Gate) Link (SCT Gate) Switch Bracket (Not Spared) Stapler Door Interlock Switch, Mailbox Door Interlock Switch Magnet Bracket (Not Spared) Magnet Catch (3 Places) Magnet Bracket (Not Spared) Bearing (Not Spared) Mailbox Gate E-Ring (Not Spared) Finisher Gate Mailbox PWB Mailbox Solenoid, Finisher Gate Solenoid
1/05 8d-145
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.11
PL 18.12 Mailbox - Stapler Entrance Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 032E15690 054K16800 003E36290 059K00521 054K16810 054K16790 054K16820 891E73431 Description Chute Guide Entrance Upper Baffle Entrance Upper Baffle (P/O PL 18.12 Item 2) Knob Pinch Roll (8 Places) Label 7 (P/O PL 18.12 Item 2) Entrance Lower Chute (Not Spared) Finisher Entrance Baffle Assembly Finisher Entrance Baffle 1 Finisher Entrance Baffle 2 Finisher Entrance Baffle 1 (P/O PL 18.12 Item 8) Label 8 (P/O PL 18.12 Item 9) Finisher Entrance Baffle 2 (P/O PL 18.12 Item 10) Screw (P/O PL 18.12 Item 8)
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.12
1/05 8d-146
PL 18.13 Mailbox Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Part 162K60451 054K16780 022K43720 022K48240 127K31260 059K08590 130E80100 130K94740 105E98690 160K53431 Description SCT Exit Lower Chute (Not Spared) Bin Tray Lower Chute (Not Spared) Wire Harness (Sensor-Mailbox PWB) Mailbox Transport Baffle Assembly Support (P/O PL 18.13 Item 4) Pinch Roll (12 Places) Pinch Roll (3 Places) Knob (P/O PL 18.13 Item 4) Bracket (P/O PL 18.13 Item 4) 10-SCT Exit Upper Chute Lower Baffle Pinch Rolls (4 Places) (REP 15.1.20) SCT Exit Sensor (REP 15.1.19) Mailbox Entrance Sensor Static Eliminator (REP 15.1.18) Mailbox Vertical Sensor (REP 15.3.30) Label (P/O PL 18.13 Item 4) Mailbox Transport Baffle (P/O PL 18.13 Item 4)
1/05 8d-147
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.13
PL 18.14 Stapler - Exit Chute

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Part 006K83590 006K83620 007E45120 054K09360 054K09462 423W23354 054K16770 105K18810 407W08174 423W24953 020E33860 499W15121 130K94740 Description Collar (Not Spared) Exit Roll (REP 15.2.25) Reverse Paddle Drive Shaft Gear Pulley Screw (Not Spared) Lower Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.26) Lower Exit Chute Bearing (P/O PL 18.14 Item 6) Compiler Paddle (P/O PL 18.14 Item 6) (REP 15.2.26) Paddle Drive Shaft (P/O PL 18.14 Item 6) Pulley (P/O PL 18.14 Item 6) Pulley (P/O PL 18.14 Item 6) Compiler Paddle Belt Upper Exit Chute Assembly (REP 15.2.24) Upper Exit Chute (P/O PL 18.14 Item 14) Plate Spring (P/O PL 18.14 Item 14) Static Eliminator Gear Bearing (Not Spared) Belt Pulley Pulley Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Compiler Entrance Sensor (REP 15.2.30) Tie Plate (Not Spared)
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.14
1/05 8d-148
PL 18.15 Stapler-Compiler
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part 009E72530 009E72550 012E94950 013E13600 038K83030 050K41330 054K09382 110K10710 110E94510 Description Spring Spring Link Bearing Support (Not Spared) Harness Holder (Not Spared) Registration Guide (Not Spared) End Guide Guide (Not Spared) Eject Cover (Not Spared) Compiler Tray Assembly (REF: PL 18.16) Compiler Exit Cover (REP 15.2.22) Switch Assembly Switch Bracket (P/O PL 18.15 Item 13) Compiler Cover Safety Switch (1 Place), Compiler Cover Interlock Switch (2 Places) Label (Not Spared) Actuator Unload While Run Switch (REP 15.2.29) Compiler Tray Solenoid (REP 15.2.1) End Wall Motor (REP 15.2.16)
16 17 18 19 20
120E99661 110K08140 121K13070 127K23320
1/05 8d-149
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.15
PL 18.16 Compiler Tray Components

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Part 038K83340 423W21053 015K28290 005E91640 009E72520 127K20871 004E08030 130E82530 130E82540 Description Compiler Tray (Not Spared) Tamper Actuator (Not Spared) Holder (Not Spared) Belt Clip (Not Spared) Tamper Drive Belt (REP 15.2.15) Tension Pulley Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 18.16 Item 7) Pulley (P/O PL 18.16 Item 7) Flange Spring Tamper Motor (REP 15.2.11) Bearing (Not Spared) Damper Damper (Not Spared) Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Tamper Home Sensor (REP 15.2.12) Compiler Paper Sensor (REP 15.2.13), End Wall Open Sensor (REP 15.2.16) Wire Harness (Not Spared) Actuator (Not Spared)
20 21
120E99480
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.16
1/05 8d-150
PL 18.17 Stapler Accessory

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part 029K91881 050K41290 015K45020 127K18880 127K16600 423W46753 Description Stapler Assembly (REP 15.3.16,ADJ 15.3.1) Stapler Housing (P/O PL 18.17 Item 1) Staple Cartridge Stapler Rail Assembly (REF: PL 18.18) Harness Arm (Not Spared) Stapler Position Motor Assembly Motor Bracket (P/O PL 18.17 Item 6) Stapler Position Motor (REP 15.3.19) Wire Harness (Not Spared) Belt
1/05 8d-151
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.17
PL 18.18 Stapler Rail Component

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 015K28452 005E91660 020E22210 020E22220 023E15560 130K55360 Description Stapler Rail Slider (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Upper Bracket (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Lower Bracket (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Flange Pulley Pulley Belt Clamp (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Stapler Rail Belt (REP 15.3.18) Stopper (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Tension Pulley (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Rear Spring (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Front Spring (P/O PL 18.18 Item 1) Stapler Position Sensor (Front Corner, Front Straight, Rear Straight) (3 Places) (REP 15.3.17) Tension Cover (Not Spared) Wire Harness (Not Spared)
15 16
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.18
1/05 8d-152
PL 18.19 Offset And Set Eject

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Part 006K21000 006K83642 007E45170 011K93650 011K93870 013E85870 013P60796 015K89062 020E24820 059E92070 120E99651 127K20930 127K20900 127K29540 130E82540 Description Eject Clamp Pinch Roll And Reverse Paddle (REF: PL 18.20) Eject Paddle Eject Roll (REP 15.2.21) Gear Offset Lever Eject Clamp Lever Bearing Bearing Eject Clamp/Offset Cam (REF:PL 18.21) Gear Pulley Screw (Not Spared) Bracket (Not Spared) Bracket (Not Spared) Cam Follower Eject Paddle Actuator Eject Motor Assembly Motor Bracket (P/O PL 18.19 Item 15) Eject Motor (REP 15.2.32) Eject Paddle Motor Assembly Eject Paddle Motor (P/O PL 18.19 Item 18) (REP 15.2.20) Eject Paddle Home Sensor (REP 15.2.31), Offset Home Sensor (REP 15.2.18) Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Eject Clamp Sensor (REP 15.2.17) Sensor Bracket (Not Spared) Pulley Eject Paddle Drive Belt (REP 15.2.20) Eject Motor Belt
21 22 23 24 25 26
130E82530 499W15123 423W25953 423W46753
1/05 8d-153
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.19
PL 18.20 Eject And Paddle Components

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 048K62471 022K61480 020E24800 033K92751 130K87332 130E82530 Description Pinch Roll Shaft (Not Spared) (REP 15.2.23) Pinch Roll Cover Pinch Spring (Not Spared) Shaft (Not Spared) Eject Clamp Pinch Roll Gear Pulley Reverse Paddle Assembly Cover (P/O PL 18.20 Item 7) Paddle (P/O PL 18.20 Item 7) Paddle Drive Belt (P/O PL 18.20 Item 7) (REP 15.2.27) Stack Height Sensor Assembly Bracket (P/O PL 18.20 Item 11) Stack Height Sensor (REP 15.2.28) Actuator (P/O PL 18.20 Item 11) Spring (P/O PL 18.20 Item 11) Lever (Not Spared)
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.20
1/05 8d-154
PL 18.21 Eject And Offset Components

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 008K91360 008K91370 007K83910 007E39910 407W07626 127K16360 012K93390 809E03071 809E03080 413W77559 Description Eject Bracket Assembly (Not Spared) (REP 15.2.19) Eject Clamp Cam Offset Cam One Way Gear Gear Gear Eject Clamp/Offset Motor (REP 15.2.33) Shaft (Not Spared) Clamp Up Lever Plate Spring Spring Bearing
1/05 8d-155
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.21
PL 18.22 Bin Tray 1

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part 160K53431 802K09190 038E88980 038E86180 038E21280 022K43710 120E13130 120E17020 050K36832 005E83570 013E89540 022E83451 830E32600 050E88781 413W77559 Description Vertical LED (REP 15.3.30) Bin Tray 1 Cover Assembly Bin Tray 1 Cover (P/O PL 18.22 Item 2) Paper Guide Paper Guide Static Eliminator Pinch Roll (3 Places) Actuator Actuator Bin Tray 1 Assembly (REP 15.3.31) Collar Bearing Pulley (P/O PL 18.22 Item 10) Roll Tapping Screw (P/O PL 18.22 Item 10) Support Bin Tray Bearing
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.22
1/05 8d-156
PL 18.23 Bin Tray 2/4/6/8

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Part 050K36822 009E64140 013E89540 022E83451 038E88980 050E88781 050K33220 120E13130 120E17020 121E83120 413W77559 830E32600 Description Bin Tray 2/4/6/8 Assembly (REP 15.3.32) Spring Bearing Pulley (P/O PL 18.23 Item 1) Roll Tapping Screw (P/O PL 18.23 Item 1) Paper Guide Bin Tray Gate Static Eliminator (P/O PL 18.23 Item 1) Actuator Actuator Gate Solenoid Bearing Support
1/05 8d-157
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.23
PL 18.24 Bin Tray 3/5/7/9

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part 050K36812 009E64140 013E89540 022E83451 038E88980 050E88781 050K33220 059K13261 120E13130 120E17020 121E83120 413W77559 830E32600 Description Bin Tray 3/5/7/9 Assembly (REP 15.3.32) Spring Bearing Pulley (P/O PL 18.24 Item 1) Roll Tapping Screw (P/O PL 18.24 Item 1) Paper Guide Bin Tray Gate Idler Roll Static Eliminator (P/O PL 18.24 Item 1) Actuator Actuator Gate Solenoid Bearing Support
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.24
1/05 8d-158
PL 18.25 Bin Tray 10

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part 050K36801 005E83570 009E64140 013E89540 022E83451 050E88781 050K33220 121E83120 413W77559 830E32600 Description Bin Tray 10 Assembly (REP 15.3.32) Collar Spring Bearing Pulley (P/O PL 18.25 Item 1) Roll Tapping Screw (P/O PL 18.25 Item 1) Bin Tray Gate Gate Solenoid Bearing Support
1/05 8d-159
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.25
PL 18.26 Stacker Tray Drive

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Part 005E91640 020E24770 015K28070 006E70950 007E62840 809E26230 020E33820 802E13970 802E13980 127K29491 127K29500 007K85791 413W75959 499W14233 423W25954 020E33830 413W77559 423W90654 499W14432 809E27360 Description Front Frame (Not Spared) Flange Pulley Tension Roll Rear Frame Shaft Dog Clutch Gear Dog Clutch Spring Spacer (Not Spared) Tie Plate (Not Spared) Dog Clutch Pulley Guide Tray (Not Spared) Rear Inner Cover Front Inner Cover Stacker Motor Assembly Stacker Motor (REP 15.2.7) Motor Bracket (P/O PL 18.26 Item 15) Worm Bearing Pulley Belt Worm Wheel Shaft (P/O PL 18.26 Item 15) Nylon Washer (P/O PL 18.26 Item 15) Bearing Stacker Tray Drive Belt (REP 15.2.9) Pulley Spring Washer (Not Spared)
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.26
1/05 8d-160
PL 18.27 Stacker Tray

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Part 019E31680 050K41330 048E45760 050E86731 130E82530 Description Belt Clamp Stacker Tray Assembly (REP 15.2.2,ADJ 15.3.2) Tray Spacer (P/O PL 18.27 Item 2) Carriage (P/O PL 18.27 Item 2) Bottom Cover Stacker Tray (REP 15.2.10) Sensor Bracket (P/O PL 18.27 Item 2) Stacker Upper Limit Sensor (REP 15.2.5), Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor (REP 15.2.4), Stacker Full Sensor (REP 15.2.4), Stacker Lower Limit Sensor (REP 15.2.5), Stacker Paper Sensor (REP 15.2.10) Actuator Stacker Harness (P/O PL 18.27 Item 2) Spring Actuator Sensor Bracket (Not Spared)
9 10 11 12 13
120E12360 809E02941 120E18280
1/05 8d-161
Finisher/Sorter
PL 18.27
Common Hardware
Item C G H J K L M N P R S T X Y AB AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM AN AP AQ AR AS AT AU AV AW AX AY AZ BA BC BD BE BH BL BM BQ BR BS BT BU BV BW Part 112W27859 112W29751 113W15551 113W20457 113W20657 113W20857 113W21057 113W21257 113W21657 113W27456 113W28451 113W35657 113W36057 113W37457 113W38257 141W27351 141W27451 141W27851 141W35451 153W17655 153W17855 153W18055 153W18255 153W27655 158W27655 158W27855 158W28055 158W28255 158W28655 158W35655 158W35855 158W36255 158W36655 158W45055 252W26450 252W29350 252W31350 271W21650 271W28050 271W28250 271W28650 Description Screw Screw Screw Screw (M3 X 4) Screw (M3 X 6) Screw (M3 X 8) Screw (M3 X 10) Screw (M3 X 12) Screw (M2.5 X 14) Screw (M3 X 16) Screw (M3 X 4) Screw (M3 X 4) Screw (M3 X 14) Screw (M4 X 6) Screw Screw Screw (M4 X 45) Setscrew (M3 X 3) Setscrew (M3 X 4) Setscrew (M3 X 8) Setscrew (M4 X 4) Tapping Screw (M3 X 6) Tapping Screw (M3 X 8) Tapping Screw (M3 X 10) Tapping Screw (M3 X 12) Tapping Screw (M3 X 6) Tapping Screw (M3 X 6) Screw (M3 X 6) Screw (M3 X 8) Screw (M3 X 8) Screw (M3 X 10) Screw (M3 X 12) Screw (M3 X 16) Screw (M4 X 12) Screw (M4 X 16) Screw (M4 X 8) Screw (M4 X 12) Screw (M4 X 16) Screw (M5 X 10) Washer (2.5) Washer (6) Nylon Washer (5) Nylon Washer (8) Nylon Washer (8) Nylon Washer (10) Dowel (2.5 X 16) Dowel Pin (3 X 10) Dowel Pin (3 X 12) Dowel Pin (3 X 16)
BX BY BZ CA CB CC CE CF CG CH CJ CK CL CM CP CQ CS CT CW CX CZ DB DC DD DF DG DH DJ DK DL DP DQ DR DT DU DV DW DY DZ
271W28850 271W37150 285W16251 354W19251 354W21254 354W24254 354W27254 354W29254 220W24350 113W35857 113W15851 113W28056 141W27651 158W27650 153W16055 113W22557 113W35557 285W28651 285W29151 113W28856 113W20557 153W28050
Dowel Pin (3 X 20) Dowel Pin (3 X 25) Dowel Pin (4 X 25) Dowel Pin (5 X 36) Spring Pin (2 X 12) Spring Pin (2 X 12) E-clip (2.5) E-clip (3) Kl-clip (3) E-clip (4) Kl-clip (4) E-clip (5) E-clip (6) Kl-clip (6) Kl-clip (8) Flange Nut (M4) Spring Pin (1.6 X 10) Screw (M4 X 8) Screw (M2 X 8) Screw (M3 X 10) Setscrew (M3 X 6) Screw (M3 X 6) Screw (M3 X 6) Setscrew (M4 X 5) Tapping Screw (M4 X 10) Tapping Screw (M3 X 10) Screw (M3 X 25) Screw (M4 X 5) Screw (M4 X 16) Spring Washer (12) Spring Pin (3-16) Spring Pin (3 X 25) Screw (M4 X 8) Screw (M3 X 20) Dowel Pin Pin (3 X 22) Screw (M3 X 5) Capscrew (M3 X 8) Screw (M3 X 10) Screw (M3 X 8)
Finisher/Sorter
Common Hardware
1/05 8d-162
Part Number Index

Part Number Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 003E36290 003E46501 003E48920 003K83211 003K85101 003K85570 003K91881 004E08030 005E15350 005E15360 005E83570 005E91640 005E91660 006K21000 006E61320 006E70950 006K83590 006K83620 006K83642 007E39910 007E45091 007E45120 007E45131 007E45170 007E54960 007E54970 007E54980 007E54990 007E55000 007E55010 007E55030 007E55040 007E56970 007E62830 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Part List PL 18.12 PL 18.6 PL 18.5 PL 18.8 PL 18.5 PL 18.5 PL 18.5 PL 18.1 PL 18.16 PL 18.10 PL 18.9 PL 18.22 PL 18.25 PL 18.16 PL 18.26 PL 18.18 PL 18.19 PL 18.7 PL 18.26 PL 18.14 PL 18.14 PL 18.19 PL 18.21 PL 18.7 PL 18.8 PL 18.14 PL 18.7 PL 18.19 PL 18.8 PL 18.8 PL 18.8 PL 18.7 PL 18.8 PL 18.8 PL 18.7 PL 18.7 PL 18.7 PL 18.10 PL 18.9 015K28070 015K28141 015K28290 015K28452 015K31853 015K31860 015K31871 015K35862 1/05 8d-163 009E72530 009E72550 011K93650 011K93870 011K94401 011K94411 012E09860 012E09870 012K93390 012E94950 013E13600 013P60796 013E85870 013E89540 009E72520 007E62840 007E62850 007E62860 007E62870 007E62880 007E62890 007K83910 007K85791 008K91360 008K91370 008E93390 009E64140
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 18.26 PL 18.9 PL 18.9 PL 18.9 PL 18.9 PL 18.9 PL 18.21 PL 18.26 PL 18.21 PL 18.21 PL 18.7 PL 18.23 PL 18.24 PL 18.25 PL 18.16 PL 18.9 PL 18.15 PL 18.15 PL 18.19 PL 18.19 PL 18.7 PL 18.7 PL 18.11 PL 18.11 PL 18.21 PL 18.15 PL 18.15 PL 18.19 PL 18.19 PL 18.22 PL 18.23 PL 18.25 PL 18.24 PL 18.26 PL 18.7 PL 18.16 PL 18.18 PL 18.1 PL 18.1 PL 18.1 PL 18.1 Finisher/Sorter
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 015K44950 015K44960 015K45020 015K48190 015K89062 019E31680 020K09460 020E22210 020E22220 020E24770 020E24800 020E24820 020E25141 020E33820 020E33830 020E33840 020E33850 020E33860 020K98320 021E96430 022E19660 022E19670 022K43710 022K43720 022K48240 022K51621 022K57120 022K57130 022K61450 022K61460 022K61470 022K61480 022K61490 022K61500 022E83451 Part List PL 18.9 PL 18.9 PL 18.17 PL 18.10 PL 18.19 PL 18.27 PL 18.9 PL 18.18 PL 18.18 PL 18.26 PL 18.20 PL 18.19 PL 18.9 PL 18.26 PL 18.26 PL 18.10 PL 18.9 PL 18.14 PL 18.9 PL 18.4 PL 18.8 PL 18.8 PL 18.22 PL 18.13 PL 18.13 PL 18.8 PL 18.7 PL 18.7 PL 18.9 PL 18.9 PL 18.10 PL 18.20 PL 18.10 PL 18.8 PL 18.22 PL 18.24 PL 18.25 PL 18.23 022E83460 023E13160 023E15560 Finisher/Sorter PL 18.10 PL 18.10 PL 18.18 1/05 8d-164 050E86731 050E88781 050K36801 050K36812 050K36822 050K36832 050K41290 050K41310 050K41320 050K41330 048E45760 048K62471 048E65721 048E65730 048E65740 048E66520 048E66560 048E66571 048K77410 048K77420 048K77971 050E16500 050E16510 050K33220 Part Number 029E21610 029K91881 032E10210 032E15690 033K92751 038E21280 038K83030 038K83031 038K83340 038E86180 038E88980
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number Part List PL 18.24 PL 18.23 054K09360 054K09382 054K09462 054K13920 054E14510 054K16770 054K16780 054K16790 054K16800 054K16810 054K16820 059K00521 059K08590 059K13261 059E92070 062E98711 105E09160 105K18810 105E98690 110K08140 110K10710 110E94510 110E97990 120E12360 120E13130 PL 18.14 PL 18.15 PL 18.14 PL 18.6 PL 18.6 PL 18.14 PL 18.13 PL 18.12 PL 18.12 PL 18.12 PL 18.12 PL 18.12 PL 18.13 PL 18.6 PL 18.24 PL 18.19 PL 18.7 PL 18.6 PL 18.14 PL 18.13 PL 18.15 PL 18.15 PL 18.15 PL 18.11 PL 18.5 PL 18.27 PL 18.22 PL 18.24 PL 18.23 120E17020 PL 18.22 PL 18.24 PL 18.23 120E18280 120E99480 120E99651 120E99661 121K13070 121K14541 121E83120 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 PL 18.27 PL 18.16 PL 18.19 PL 18.15 PL 18.15 PL 18.11 PL 18.23 160K67951 160K67960 160K67991 1/05 8d-165 160K53431 130E82970 130K87332 130K94740 130E82540 121E90490 121E91450 127K16360 127K16600 127K18880 127K20871 127K20900 127K20930 127K23320 127K24901 127K24952 127K29491 127K29500 127K29540 127K31260 127K37840 130K55360 130K60600 130E80100 130E82530 121K83981 121E84720 121E87250 Part Number
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 18.24 PL 18.25 PL 18.7 PL 18.2 PL 18.11 PL 18.4 PL 18.2 PL 18.6 PL 18.21 PL 18.17 PL 18.17 PL 18.16 PL 18.19 PL 18.19 PL 18.15 PL 18.8 PL 18.9 PL 18.26 PL 18.26 PL 18.19 PL 18.13 PL 18.10 PL 18.18 PL 18.3 PL 18.13 PL 18.16 PL 18.20 PL 18.7 PL 18.27 PL 18.19 PL 18.16 PL 18.19 PL 18.6 PL 18.20 PL 18.13 PL 18.14 PL 18.13 PL 18.22 PL 18.4 PL 18.11 PL 18.6 Finisher/Sorter
Part Number Index
Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 162K47500 162K60401 162K60451 407W07626 407W08174 407W08220 413W08350 413W75959 Part List PL 18.10 PL 18.3 PL 18.13 PL 18.21 PL 18.14 PL 18.8 PL 18.7 PL 18.8 PL 18.10 PL 18.7 PL 18.26 PL 18.9 PL 18.8 413W77559 PL 18.21 PL 18.24 PL 18.25 PL 18.23 PL 18.22 PL 18.26 417W30349 423W21053 423W23354 423W24953 423W25953 423W25954 423W30754 423W46753 423W87254 423W90654 499W14123 499W14233 499W14432 499W14524 499W15121 499W15123 499W17061 604K13030 802K05082 802K09190 802E13930 Finisher/Sorter PL 18.4 PL 18.16 PL 18.14 PL 18.14 PL 18.19 PL 18.26 PL 18.9 PL 18.17 PL 18.19 PL 18.9 PL 18.26 PL 18.10 PL 18.26 PL 18.26 PL 18.9 PL 18.14 PL 18.19 PL 18.10 PL 18.8 PL 18.2 PL 18.22 PL 18.2 1/05 8d-166 830E34990 830E35000 830E59990 891E73431 891E73451 892E13300 Part Number 802E13940 802E13950 802E13960 802E13970 802E13980 802E13990 802E14000 802E14010 802K14650 802K14660 809E02941 809E02991 809E03071 809E03080 809E14570 809E14980 809E26230 809E27360 830E19412 830E32600
Table 1 Part Number Index Part List PL 18.3 PL 18.3 PL 18.3 PL 18.26 PL 18.26 PL 18.3 PL 18.3 PL 18.3 PL 18.2 PL 18.2 PL 18.27 PL 18.5 PL 18.21 PL 18.21 PL 18.7 PL 18.10 PL 18.26 PL 18.26 PL 18.1 PL 18.22 PL 18.23 PL 18.25 PL 18.24 PL 18.3 PL 18.3 PL 18.2 PL 18.12 PL 18.2 PL 18.2
Part Number Index

1. To find the location of a connector in the Finisher, perform the following steps. a. b. c. d. Refer to the Plug/Jack Index. Find the connector number in the P/J No column. Find the Figure number and Item number in that row. Go to the Diagram and find the Figure, then locate the Item number that identifies the specific location of the Plug/Jack. P/JNo. P/J659 P/J660 P/J661 P/J664 P/J665
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index FigureNo. Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 5 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 2 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 5 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 ItemNo. 4 11 3 7 6 9 15 16 3 2 1 18 4 5 17 10 11 12 14 2 3 14 7 8 7 6 9 13 13 11 14 15 16 17 12 10 7 4 5 18 9 Finisher/Sorter
P/J800/800B P/J1001 P/J1002 P/J1004 P/J1005 P/J1006 P/J1007 P/J1008 P/J1009 P/J1010
Refer to Figure 1 for an example of the Plug/Jack Index connector list.
1056
Figure x
P/J1011 P/J1012 P/J1013 P/J1014 P/J1017 P/J1018 P/J1019 P/J1020 P/J1021 P/J1022 P/J1023 P/J1024 P/J1025 P/J1026
P/J Number
P/J1027 P/J1028 P/J1029
Plug/Jack Index
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index P/JNo. P/J651 P/J652 P/J653 P/J654 P/J656 P/J658 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 FigureNo. Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 6 Figure 6 ItemNo. 9 8 5 10 1 2
P/J1030 P/J1031 P/J1032 P/J1033 P/J1034 P/J1035 P/J1037 P/J1038 P/J1039 1/05 8d-167
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index P/JNo. P/J1040 P/J1041 P/J1042 P/J1043 P/J1044 P/J1045 P/J1046 P/J1047 P/J1048 P/J1049 P/J1050 P/J1051 P/J1052 P/J1053 P/J1054 P/J1055 P/J1056 P/J1057 P/J1058 P/J1059 P/J1060 P/J1061 P/J1062 P/J1063 P/J1064 P/J1065 P/J1066 P/J1067 P/J1069 P/J1070 P/J1071 P/J1073 P/J1074 P/J1075 P/J1076 P/J1078 P/J1079 P/J1080 P/J1081 P/J1082 P/J1083 Finisher/Sorter FigureNo. Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 4 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 5 Figure 2 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 1 Figure 5 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 5 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 5 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 5 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 5 Figure 2 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 5 Figure 2 Figure 2 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 1 Figure 1 ItemNo. 6 8 1 2 3 7 6 11 5 12 19 1 1 8 2 3 20 11 25 15 16 10 12 11 17 8 10 18 13 9 16 4 9 5 4 1 3 6 5 13 10 1/05 8d-168 P/JNo. P/J1084 P/J1086 P/J1087 P/J1088 P/J1089 P/J1090 P/J1091 P/J1092 P/J1093 P/J1094 P/J1096 P/J1098 P/J1099
Table 1 Plug/Jack Index FigureNo. Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 5 Figure 1 Figure 5 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 Figure 1 ItemNo. 8 21 23 22 14 15 24 12 13 2 4 6 7
Figure 1 Compiler Plug/Jack Locations Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-169
Figure 2 Stacker Plug/Jack Locations Finisher/Sorter Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 8d-170
Figure 3 Mail Box Plug/Jack locations Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-171
Figure 4 Finisher PWB Plug/Jack Locations Finisher/Sorter Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 8d-172
Figure 5 Finisher Rear (Inline) Plug/Jack Locations Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-173
Figure 6 Decurler Plug/Jack Locations Finisher/Sorter Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 8d-174
Finisher Wirenets
Figure 1 Wirenet Finisher/Mailbox Sorter +5VDC-1 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Finisher/Sorter
1/05 8d-175
Finisher Wirenets
Figure 2 Wirenet Finisher/Mailbox Sorter +5VDC-2
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher Wirenets
1/05 8d-176
Figure 3 Wirenet Finisher/Mailbox Sorter +24VDC-1
1/05 8d-177
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher Wirenets
Figure 4 Wirenet Finisher/Mailbox Sorter +5VDC RTN-1
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher Wirenets
1/05 8d-178
1/05 8d-179
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher Wirenets
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher Wirenets
1/05 8d-180
1/05 8d-181
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher Wirenets
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher Wirenets
1/05 8d-182
Finisher BSDs
Purpose
The Block Schematic Diagrams (BSDs) show the distribution of electrical and mechanical power. Each functional chain is represented by a BSD. A BSD is a functional flow diagram containing electrical information and mechanical inputs and outputs. The functional flow is from left to right (inputs on the left and outputs on the right).
1/05 8d-183
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 1 BSD 12.1 Finisher/MBS DC Power and Interlock Switching (1 of 2)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-184
Figure 2 BSD 12.1 Finisher/MBS DC Power and Interlock Switching (2 of 2)
1/05 8d-185
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 3 BSD 12.2 Unload While Run and Compiler Cover Safety Switch
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-186
Figure 4 BSD 12. 3 Interlock Monitoring
1/05 8d-187
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 5 BSD 12.4 Finisher-IOT CPU Communication
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-188
Figure 6 BSD 12.5 Transport Drives
1/05 8d-189
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 7 BSD 12.6 Decurler Control (1 of 2)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-190
Figure 8 BSD 12.6 Decurler Control (2 of 2)
1/05 8d-191
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 9 BSD 12.7 Finisher Transportation (1 of 2)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-192
Figure 10 BSD 12.7 Finisher Transportation (2 of 2)
1/05 8d-193
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 11 BSD 12.8 Bin Tray Transportation (1 of 2)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-194
Figure 12 BSD 12.8 Bin Tray Transportation (2 of 2)
1/05 8d-195
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 13 BSD 12.9 Bin Full Sensors
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-196
Figure 14 BSD 12.10 SCT Tray Control
1/05 8d-197
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 15 BSD 12.11 Compiling
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-198
Figure 16 BSD 12.12 Stapler Positioning (1 of 2)
1/05 8d-199
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 17 BSD 12.12 Stapler Positioning (2 of 2)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-200
Figure 18 BSD 12.13 Stapler Control
1/05 8d-201
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 19 BSD 12.14 Offset and Eject (1 of 2)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-202
Figure 20 BSD 12.14 Offset and Eject (2 of 2)
1/05 8d-203
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 21 BSD 12.15 Stacker Tray Control (1 of 2)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-204
Figure 22 BSD 12.15 Stacker Tray Control (2 of 2)
1/05 8d-205
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Figure 23 BSD 12.17 Monitoring (1 of 5)
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-206
1/05 8d-207
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-208
1/05 8d-209
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
Finisher/Sorter
Finisher BSDs
1/05 8d-210
8E Electronic Pre-Collation
Status Indicator RAPs Chain 3
OF3-1 EPC Fault Entry RAP ........................................................................................... OF3-2 Operator Message RAP ....................................................................................... 3-285 EPC Communications Fault RAP ......................................................................... 8e-3 8e-3 8e-4 8e-5 8e-5 8e-6 8e-6 8e-7 8e-9 8e-10 8e-11 8e-12 8e-13
Chain 40
40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 EPC PWB Failure RAP........................................................... 40-281 / 40-282 HDD Failure RAP.................................................................................. 40-284 EPC Hard Drive Detection RAP.......................................................................... 40-285 / 40-286 EPC Memory Failure RAP .................................................................... 40-287 EPC HDD Format Failure RAP ...........................................................................
Repairs
REP 20.1 EPC PWB ....................................................................................................... REP 20.2 EPC Hard Drive .............................................................................................. REP 20.3 EPC Scan Cable............................................................................................. REP 20.4 EPC Print Cable.............................................................................................. REP 20.5 EPC Memory PWB .........................................................................................
Parts Lists EPC Module

PL 20.1 EPC Components .............................................................................................. Part Number Index .......................................................................................................... 8e-15 8e-16 8e-17 8e-17
General Procedures
GP 1 EPC Initialization.................................................................................................... dC131 EPC NVM Read/Write .........................................................................................
Wiring Data EPC Plug/Jacks

EPC Plug/Jack Locator Diagram..................................................................................... 8e-19 8e-21 8e-22
EPC BSDs
EPC BSDs (Chain 01)..................................................................................................... EPC BSDs (Chain 03).....................................................................................................
1/05 8e-1
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC)
1/05 8e-2
OF3-1 EPC Fault Entry RAP

NOTE: Use this RAP if the IOT does not recognize the presence of the EPC unit. For Finisher configurations, correct communications is determined by the presence of the Stapling and More . . option under Copy Output, on the Basic Copying Tab. For other configurations, check for Additional Originals and Output Delivery options on the Job Assembly Tab. Use this RAP to determine where to start troubleshooting EPC failures when no fault code is displayed on the copier UI.
OF3-2 Operator Message RAP

Listing of operator message codes declared by EPC-enabled machines.
Procedure
If one of the codes in Table 1 is displayed, perform the actions listed in the third column of the row corresponding to the displayed code. Ensure that the customer understands the specifications and limitations of the copier (refer to the EPC Customer Supplement). Table 1 Operator Message/Fault Code Table Fault Code Description Action Cancel the job. Reload appropriate paper in the tray(s), and/or deselect APS Cancel the job. Reload correct paper in the tray(s).
Initial Actions
Check that NVM location 752-017 [EPC Option Config] is set to 1.
Procedure
Connect the PWS and launch the DC12/DCCS 50 Diagnostic Tool. A Fault Code is displayed in Active Faults or in Last 40 Faults. Y N Go to the 3-285 RAP. The fault is a 3-5XX-series fault. Y N For the following faults, go to the associated RAP. If the fault does not appear on this list, return to Section 2 in the main portion of this Service Manual to locate the fault. Fault Code 3-285 - go to the 3-285 RAP Fault Code 40-040 - go to the 40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 RAP Fault Code 40-280 - go to the 40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 RAP Fault Code 40-281 - go to the 40-281 / 40-282 RAP Fault Code 40-282 - go to the 40-281 / 40-282 RAP Fault Code 40-283 - go to the 40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 RAP Fault Code 40-284 - go to the 40-284 RAP Fault Code 40-285 - go to the 40-285 / 40-286 RAP Fault Code 40-286 - go to the 40-285 / 40-286 RAP Fault Code 40-287 - go to the 40-287 RAP
3-513 The paper in the tray selected by APS (Auto Paper Select) cannot be output to the Stacker. 3-514 Paper too heavy to feed through Stacker.
3-515 One of the following occurs when the non-stapled Press Start to continue stacker output is selected with Mix Original Size spec- (forces the job to the Top ified or with the addition of originals for platen copy Tray), or select Job Cancel. specified: Paper in the tray selected by APS is different in size from previously selected paper. The paper in the tray selected by APS cannot be output to the stacker. The paper selected by APS is different in size from the paper already output to the stacker. Press Start to continue, cancel Staple, (forces the job to the Top Tray) or select Job Cancel. Reload correct paper in the tray(s) if indicated.
3-516 One of the following occurs when stacker stapled output is selected with Mix Original Size specified or with the addition of originals for platen copy specified: Paper selected by the APS is different in size from previously selected paper. The paper in the tray selected by APS cannot be output to the Stacker.
3-517 APS invert NG
Go to the OF3-2 RAP. 3-545 Staple position is different than that specified.
Cancel the job. Reload appropriate paper in the tray(s), and/or deselect APS Cancel Staple or select Job Cancel.
03-555 For the 2nd and subsequent originals, with APS or Cancel Staple or select Job AMS, cannot staple at the position specified, or staple Cancel. position is different from that specified. 03-590 EPC memory full failure. Select Job Cancel or Continue. If the problem persists, initialize the EPC (GP 1).
1/05 8e-3
OF3-1, OF3-2
Table 1 Operator Message/Fault Code Table Fault Code Description Action
3-285 EPC Communications Fault RAP

Control Logic was unable to communicate with the EPC PWB.
03-591 The number of originals exceeds the EPC controllable Select Job Cancel or Continue. If the code is displayed number limit. before the limit is actually reached, initialize the EPC (GP 1).
Initial Actions
Refer to EPC BSDs (Chain 01) and EPC BSDs (Chain 03) for this procedure. Check that the EPC Scan Cable and Print Cable are seated correctly. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
Procedure
There is +5VDC from pin 8 to pin 5 of P640 on the EPC PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). check for an open circuit or an open fuse F6. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Check the EPC Scan Cable and Print Cable for damage or poor connections. If the problem continues, replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved: EPC Print Cable (PL 20.1) EPC Scan Cable (PL 20.1) EPC PWB (PL 20.1) VSEL Base TTL PWB (PL 9.2)
OF3-2, 3-285
1/05 8e-4
40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283 EPC PWB Failure RAP

40-040: Control Logic detects that the IOT cannot retrieve image(s) from the EPC. 40-280: Control Logic has detected an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) failure on the EPC PWB. 40-283: Control Logic detects a file system failure in EPC NVM.
40-281 / 40-282 HDD Failure RAP

40-281: Control Logic detects an EPC Hard Drive read/write check error. 40-282: Control Logic detects an unlogged bad sector on the EPC Hard Drive.
Procedure
Switch off the power. Reseat the EPC Hard Drive Cable on the Hard Drive and on the EPC PWB. Switch on the power. If the problem continues, initialize the EPC (GP 1). If the problem continues, replace the EPC Hard Drive (PL 20.1).
Procedure
Switch the power off then on. If the problem continues, initialize the EPC (GP 1). If the problem remains replace the EPC Memory PWB (PL 20.1). If the problem continues, replace the EPC PWB (PL 20.1).
1/05 8e-5
40-040 / 40-280 / 40-283, 40-281 / 40-282
40-284 EPC Hard Drive Detection RAP

Control Logic did not detect the presence of an EPC Hard Drive.
40-285 / 40-286 EPC Memory Failure RAP

40-285: Page Buffer read/write check error 40-286: DIMM Failure
Initial Actions
Refer to EPC BSDs (Chain 01) and EPC BSDs (Chain 03) for this procedure. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
Initial Actions
Switch the power off then on. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
Procedure
There is +5VDC from pin 4 to pin 3 of P656 on the EPC Hard Drive. Y N There is +5VDC from pin 1 to pin 2 of P653 on the EPC PWB. Y N There is +5VDC from pin 8 to pin 5 of P640 on the EPC PWB. Y N Go to Flag 2 and Flag 3 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). Check for an open circuit or an open fuse F6. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the EPC PWB (PL 20.1). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). check for an open circuit. There is +12VDC from pin 1 to pin 2 of P656 on the EPC Hard Drive. Y N There is +12VDC from pin 4 to pin 3 of P653 on the EPC PWB. Y N There is +12VDC from pin 1 to pin 4 of P640 on the EPC PWB. Y N Go to Flag 1 and Flag 2 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). Check for an open circuit. If the wires are OK, replace the IOT LVPS (PL 9.3). Replace the EPC PWB (PL 20.1). Go to Flag 4 on BSD 1.1 (EPC DC Power). check for an open circuit. Reseat the EPC Hard Drive Cable on the Hard Drive and on the EPC PWB. Switch the power off then on. If the problem continues, replace the following parts in the order listed until the problem is resolved: EPC Hard Drive Cable (PL 20.1) EPC Hard Drive (PL 20.1) EPC PWB (PL 20.1)
Procedure
If the problem continues, reseat the Memory PWB (PL 20.1). If the problem persists, replace the Memory PWB. If the fault remains, replace the EPC PWB (PL 20.1).
40-284, 40-285 / 40-286
1/05 8e-6
40-287 EPC HDD Format Failure RAP

Control Logic detects EPC Hard Drive format failure.
Procedure
Switch the power off then on. If the problem continues, initialize the EPC (GP 1). If the fault persists or is a recurring problem, replace the EPC Hard Drive (PL 20.1).
1/05 8e-7
40-287
40-287
1/05 8e-8
REP 20.1 EPC PWB

CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when replacing the EPC PWB. The EPC PWB can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. 1. For DCCS50: Switch Off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Disconnect the IDFE DDI Cables. Perform the correct power down procedure. Disconnect the DFE DDI cables. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
4
Remove the screws (3)
1
Disconnect the Connectors (3)
3
For DC12 with attached Fiery or Splash DFE: 2. For DC12 without an attached DFE: Access the EPC PWB (Figure 1).
2
Remove the Memory PWB Figure 2 Removing the EPC PWB
Replacement 2
Loosen the screws (6) 1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
1
3
Lower the Cover
Figure 1 Accessing the EPC PWB 3. Remove the EPC PWB (Figure 2).
1/05 8e-9
REP 20.1
REP 20.2 EPC Hard Drive

CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when replacing the EPC PWB. The EPC PWB can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. 1. For DCCS50: Switch Off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Disconnect the IDFE DDI Cables. Perform the correct power down procedure. Disconnect the DFE DDI cables. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
1
For DC12 with attached Fiery or Splash DFE: 2. For DC12 without an attached DFE: Access the EPC Hard Drive (Figure 1).
3
Remove the EPC Hard Drive
2
Figure 2 Removing the EPC Hard Drive.
Replacement
1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
1
Loosen the screws (6)
2
Lower the Cover
Figure 1 Accessing the EPC Hard Drive 3. Remove the EPC Hard Drive (Figure 2).
REP 20.2
1/05 8e-10
REP 20.3 EPC Scan Cable

1. For DCCS50: Switch Off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Disconnect the IDFE DDI Cables. Perform the correct power down procedure. Disconnect the DFE DDI cables. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
For DC12 with attached Fiery or Splash DFE: 2. 3. For DC12 without an attached DFE: Undock the Finisher or Mailbox/Sorter, if present. Remove the following: 4. Exit Tray (PL 12.11) Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2) IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3) IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3) CAUTION Take note of the routing for the Scan Cable, the Print Cable and the Ribbon Cable. These components must be reinstalled carefully to avoid damage. 5. Remove the Scan Cable (Figure 1 and Figure 2): Figure 1 Accessing the VSEL PWB
2
Remove the Cover
Open the IIT (REP 3.1.2)
1
1/05 8e-11
REP 20.3
2
Disconnect the Scan Cable
REP 20.4 EPC Print Cable

1. For DCCS50: Switch Off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Disconnect the IDFE DDI Cables. Perform the correct power down procedure. Disconnect the DFE DDI cables. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
For DC12 with attached Fiery or Splash DFE: 2. 3. For DC12 without an attached DFE: Undock the Finisher or Mailbox/Sorter, if present. Remove the following: 4. Exit Tray (PL 12.11) Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2)
Remove the Print Cable (Figure 1):
1
Disconnect the Flat Cable
Figure 2 Removing the Scan Cable
Replacement
Disconnect the Connector
Figure 1 Removing the Print Cable
Replacement
REP 20.3, REP 20.4
1/05 8e-12
REP 20.5 EPC Memory PWB

CAUTION Use the ESD Kit and the established ESD procedures when replacing the Memory PWB. The Memory PWB can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. 1. For DCCS50: Switch Off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Disconnect the IDFE DDI Cables. Perform the correct power down procedure. Disconnect the DFE DDI cables. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord.
1
Remove the Memory PWB
For DC12 with attached Fiery or Splash DFE: 2. For DC12 without an attached DFE: Access the Memory PWB (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Removing the Memory PWB.
Replacement
1. 2. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of disassembly. Initialize the EPC (GP 1).
1
Loosen the screws (6)
2
Lower the Cover
Figure 1 Accessing the Memory PWB 3. Remove the Memory PWB (Figure 2).
1/05 8e-13
REP 20.5
REP 20.5
1/05 8e-14
PL 20.1 EPC Components

Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Part 962K22550 117E20391 162K63570 162K64021 160K76442 121K24580 133E69730 117E20380 802K31420 027E92270 Description EPC Enablement Harness (W/TAG P38) Scan Cable (W/TAG P38) EPC LV Harness EPC Hard Drive Cable EPC PWB Assembly (Includes Item 7) EPC Hard Drive EPC Memory PWB Print Cable EPC IOT Rear Cover (W/TAG P38) Thumbscrews EPC Hard Drive Bracket (Not Spared) Clamp (Scan Cable) (Not Spared) Clamp (Print Cable) (Not Spared) EPC Mounting Plate (Not Spared)
1/05 8e-15
PL 20.1
Part Number Index

Table 1 Part Number Index Part Number 027E92270 117E20380 117E20391 121K24580 133E69730 160K76442 162K63570 162K64021 802K31420 962K22550 Part List PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1 PL 20.1
Part Number Index
1/05 8e-16
GP 1 EPC Initialization
Perform this procedure whenever the EPC PWB or the EPC Hard Drive is replaced, or when directed to do so by another procedure.
dC131 EPC NVM Read/Write

Procedure
NOTE: Currently, EPC NVM locations can only be accessed through the UI Diagnostic Mode. 1. 2. 3. 4. Enter the UI Diagnostic Mode From the Diagnostics Setup Screen, select NVM Read/Write. Press the Enter Number button on the display. Enter the Chain-Link number of the location you wish to view. Refer to Table 1. CAUTION Enter a correct number. (Make sure you have entered a correct number before you execute the function. If you enter an invalid number, a secondary problem will occur.) 5. 6. 7. Press the Start button. The display will shows the current value of the displayed location. To change the value enter the new number using the ten-key pad and press the Start button. After the operation, return to the Diagnostics Setup Screen by selecting Close on the UII screen. Table 1 EPC NVM List Chain-Link Number 757-010 757-011 757-012 757-013 757-014 757-015 757-016 757-017 757-018 757-020 757-102 Name SW Set Version PRODUCT CODE 1 PRODUCT CODE 2 PRODUCT CODE 3 PRODUCT CODE 4 PRODUCT CODE 5 PRODUCT CODE 6 PRODUCT CODE 7 PRODUCT CODE 8 DUSTOFF_INIT HDD Control Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Range 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-65535 0 = Disable 6789 = Enable 0-65535 22184 = formatting and initialization command (GP 1) Description
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enter the UI Diagnostic Mode (refer to How to Enter/Exit the UI (IOT) Diagnostics). From the Diagnostics Setup Screen, select NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics). Check that NVM location 752-017 [EPC Option Config] is set to 1. Set the value for location 757-020 [Dustoff Init] to 6789. Close the NVM Read/Write screen. From the Diagnostics Setup Screen, select NVM Initialize. Select EPC. Initialize the EPC NVM. Exit NVM Initialize. Select NVM Read/Write. Set the value for location 757-102 [HDD Control] to 22184.
10. Exit the UI Diagnostic Mode.
0 -65535 NOTE: Octal value
1/05 8e-17
GP 1, dC131
GP 1, dC131
1/05 8e-18
EPC Plug/Jack Locator Diagram
Figure 1 EPC Assembly Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 8e-19 Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC)
1/05 8e-20
EPC BSDs (Chain 01)
Figure 1 BSD 1.1 EPC DC Power Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC)
1/05 8e-21
EPC BSDs (Chain 01)
EPC BSDs (Chain 03)
Figure 1 BSD 3.1 EPC System Interconnections
EPC BSDs (Chain 03)
1/05 8e-22
9 Installation
Edit Pad Installation Instructions
Edit Pad Installation ........................................................................................................ 9-3 9-9 9-13 9-25 9-35 9-37 9-42
Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation Instructions

Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation ........................................................................
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation

High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation ........................................................................
Convenience Stapler Installation Instructions

Convenience Stapler Installation.....................................................................................
Foreign Interface Install Instructions

Foreign Interface Install Instructions ..............................................................................
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Kit Installation

Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Enablement Kit Installation ............................................ Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Kit Installation ................................................................
1/05 9-1
Installation Instructions
1/05 9-2
Edit Pad Installation

Procedure
NOTE: Ensure that TAG P30, 7.06.3 IOT SW or higher is installed in the machine. TAG P24 must also be installed in the machine. It will be added as part of this procedure if not already installed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Power OFF the machine and disconnect the power plug. Remove the IIT Rear Cover and the IOT Rear Cover. (PL 11.3) Remove the IOT Control PWB Assy Cover. (PL 9.2) Disconnect the Flat Cable (FPC-IOT). (PL 9.2) Remove the (3) screws and lower the IOT Control PWBA Assy. Remove the (2) screws securing the Ground Strips. (Figure 1)
Figure 2 Connect the Connectors 8. Loosen the screws (4) securing the Extension Plate to allow assembly of the Edit Pad Harness Connector. Ensure that the connector orientation is correct. Secure the connector with the (2) screws removed in step (7). (Figure 2) Tighten the screws securing the Extension Plate.
9.
10. Connect the connector from the Edit Pad Harness P594 (4 pin) to J594 on the machine harness. P594 is located in the harness bundle that is clamped to the right rear vertical frame rail. (Figure 2) 11. Remove the Right Upper Cover. Route the Edit Pad Harness (yellow wires), with connector J491, under the Extension Plate and along the machine harness (yellow & blue wires) on the right side. (PL 11.2) (Figure 3) Figure 1 Remove the Screws 7. Remove (2) screws securing the port cover on the Extension Plate. (save the screws) (Figure 1)
1/05 9-3
Figure 3 Route the Edit Pad Harness 12. Remove the (2) screws securing the UI Assy and slide it forward to gain access to the harness below. REP 9.5.1. 13. Route the Edit Pad Harness up through the harness clamps behind the UI Assy. (Figure 4)
Figure 4 Route the Edit Pad Harness 14. If TAG P24 is marked off go to step 21. 15. Disconnect connectors P/J490, P/J492 and P/J493 from the UI Assy. 16. Remove the UI Assy Bottom Plate to gain access to the UI PWB. (PL 9.5) 17. Disconnect connectors P/J486, P/J484, P/J482A and J482B from the UI PWB. 18. Replace the UI PWB with the UI PWB supplied in kit 600K83650. (PL 9.5) 19. Reconnect connectors P/J486, P/J484, P/J482A and J482B to the UI PWB. 20. Reinstall the UI Assy Bottom Plate. 21. Connect Connectors P/J490, P/J492 and P/J493. 22. Connect Connector J491 on the Edit Pad Harness to P491 on the UI PWB. 23. Reinstall the UI Assy and secure with (2) screws. REP 9.5.1 24. Disconnect the Video Cable and the Black Cable. Remove the CCD Cable Cover (2 screws) and disconnect the CCD Cable. (Figure 5)
1/05 9-4
Figure 5 Disconnect the Cables 25. Remove the (6) screws securing the IPS Drawer. (Figure 6)
Figure 6 Remove Screws and Disconnect the Connectors 26. Disconnect (5) connectors. (2) red and (3) white (Figure 6) 27. Slide open the IPS PWB Drawer to gain access to the PWBs. (Figure 7)
1/05 9-5
Figure 7 Open the IPS PWB Drawer 28. Remove the (3) screws securing the Post IPS PWB. (save the screw) Install the (3) mounting stand-offs, supplied in the kit, in the screw holes. (Figure 8)
Figure 8 Install the Stand-offs 29. Install the IPS-EDIT PWB, supplied in the kit, on the mounting stand-offs and secure with the screws removed in step 28. (Figure 9)
1/05 9-6
Figure 9 Install the IPS-EDIT PWB 30. Close the IPS PWB drawer and secure with (6) screws. 31. Reconnect the (5) connectors. (2) red and (3) white 32. Reconnect the Video Cable, Black Cable and the CCD Cable. Install the CCD Cable Cover. 33. Secure the Edit Pad Harness in the harness clamps. Use additional cable ties as required. (Figure 10)
Figure 10 Secure the Edit Pad Harness 34. Install the IOT Control PWB Assy into its upright position and secure with (3) screws. 35. Reconnect the Flat Cable (FPC-IOT). 36. Secure the Ground Strips to the Extension Plate. 37. Install the IOT Control PWB Assy Cover and secure with (7) screws. 38. Install the IIT Rear Cover, IOT Rear Cover and the Right Upper Cover. 39. Reconnect the Power Cord and power up the machine. 40. Enter dc131 and set location 752-012 to 1, to enable Edit Pad (can also be enabled via dc371). 41. Adjust the Touch Panel Starting Point (ADJ 9.1.18). 42. Verify that the machine and the Edit Pad work correctly. 43. Mark off TAG P24 on the IOT Change Tag Matrix if not already marked off.
1/05 9-7
1/05 9-8
Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit Installation

These instructions provide the installation procedure for the optional Edit Pad-to-IOT Mounting Kit, 98S4450.
Remove Foot Pads (4)
Kit Contents
Table 1 Kit Contents Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 8 1 Description Actuator Hinges Stopper Magnet Epoxy Adhesive Blind Covers Platen Cushion M3 X 12 Screws Screws (for actuator) Screws (for hinges) Kit Instructions Part Number 120K91660 3E48130 3K85090 121E90620 43P73 48E66220 4E8250 158W28255 26E14060 153W16055 602E74330
Procedure
1. 2. Place the Edit Pad on a work surface with the bottom side facing up to allow for part removal and installation. Gently pry the Foot Pads loose from the Edit Pad (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Remove Foot Pads NOTE: The Cover has a post and the Actuator has a hole for proper orientation for installation. 3. Install the Actuator (Figure 2).
1/05 9-9
M3 x 10 mm screws (2)
M4 x10 mm screws (4 each side)
Figure 2 Install the Actuator 4. Install the Hinges (Figure 3). 5.
Figure 3 Install the Hinges Install the Stopper (Figure 4).
1/05 9-10
Stopper
Magnet
Remove the peel-off adhesive backing. Orientation Mark
Figure 4 Install the Stopper 6. Install the Magnet (Figure 5). a. b. Slide the Magnet, with proper orientation - white marking, into the slot in the Cover. Place a small amount of Epoxy Adhesive along the post of the Cover. Allow the adhesive to set. 7. 8. 9.
Figure 5 Install the Magnet Disconnect the DADF Wire Harness (PL 12.3) from the IOT. Remove the two Knob Screws. (PL 12.3). Lift the DADF off the IOT and set aside.
10. Install two Blind Covers (PL 11.1). 11. Install the Edit Pad onto the IOT. Leave the assembly in the up (open) position. 12. Insure that the Edit Pad Harness is connected to the IOT. 13. Install the Platen Cushion (refer to REP 11.1.1) a. b. c. Place the Platen Cushion against the registration edges on the Platen Glass with the adhesive side of the Cushion facing UP. Remove the peel-off adhesive backing from the Cushion. Position the Edit Pad to the down (closed) position and press on the Edit Pad Cover to insure adhesion of the Cushion to the bottom of the Edit Pad Cover.
14. Reconnect the power cord and switch on the power. NOTE: MAX Set Up is not required. DO NOT adjust NVM location 715-125.
1/05 9-11
1/05 9-12
High Capacity Feeder (HCF) Installation

Procedure
1. Cut the bands and remove the outer box (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Plastic Bag 3. Figure 1 Remove the Outer Box 2. Remove the corrugated sleeve. Remove the plastic bag. (Figure 2). Break the perforated corners on the corrugated tray (Figure 3).
1/05 9-13
Figure 3 Break the Perforated Corners 4. Roll the HCF off of the corrugated tray (Figure 4). 5.
Figure 4 Roll the HCF Remove the paper from the HCF Exit Baffle (Figure 5).
1/05 9-14
Figure 5 Remove the Paper 6. 1. Open the HCF drawer (Figure 6). 2. Remove the packaged paper size guide. 3. Remove the HCF mounting bracket and thumbscrews from the drawer. 4. Close the HCF drawer. 7.
Figure 6 Open the HCF Drawer Put the packaged paper size guide to one side (Figure 7).
1/05 9-15
Figure 7 Move the Guide 8. 1. Unpack the HCF mounting bracket (Figure 8). 2. Remove the bag containing the thumbscrews 9.
Figure 8 Unpack the HCF Mounting Bracket Open the processor left side door (Figure 9).
1/05 9-16
Figure 9 Open the Left Side Door 10. 1. Insert the bracket up and over the processor (Figure 10). 2. Slide the bracket toward the front of the machine until the front tab engages the slot in the processor. 3. Lift the left side of the bracket until it engages the other slot in the processor.
Figure 10 Insert the Bracket 11. 1. Secure the bracket to the underside of the processor with the thumbscrew attached to the left side of the bracket (Figure 11). 2. Close the processor left side door.
1/05 9-17
Figure 11 Secure the Bracket NOTE: The paper size guide is found inside the HCF drawer. It is held in place by a magnet under the top edge, as well as top and bottom tabs. 12. Unpack the paper size guide (Figure 12).
Figure 12 Unpack the Paper Size Guide NOTE: The paper size guide can be set for either 8.5 x 11 or A4. 13. 1. Align the bottom guide tabs with the appropriate slots on the HCF (Figure 13). 2. Align the top guide tabs with the appropriate indicator slots on the HCF.
1/05 9-18
Figure 13 Align the Bottom Guide Tabs NOTE: The HCF is shipped with the rails in the locked position. 14. Unlock the rails on the HCF (Figure 14): 1. Locate the locking pin. 2. Lift the pin and rotate it 1/2 turn CCW to unlock the rail.
Figure 14 Unlock the Rails CAUTION Do not pull the rails all the way out. If fully extended, the HCF will tip. 15. 1. Close the HCF drawer (Figure 15). 2. Pull out the rails enough to allow the rail to mate with the mounting bracket.
1/05 9-19
Figure 15 Close the HCF Drawer 16. 1. Ensure that the processor casters are locked (Figure 16). 2. Align the notches on the rails with the slots in the bracket.
Figure 16 Lock the Casters 17. Attach the rails to the bracket with the two thumbscrews (Figure 17).
1/05 9-20
Figure 17 Attach the Rails NOTE: If the gap between the processor and HCF is uniform, go to step 22. If the gap is not uniform, complete steps 19 through 21. 18. 1. Push the HCF against the processor (Figure 18). 2. Visually inspect the gap between the HCF and processor.
Figure 18 Inspect the Gap 19. 1. Push the HCF away from the processor (Figure 19). 2. Remove the caster wrench from the HCF rails.
1/05 9-21
Figure 19 Remove the Caster Wrench
Figure 20 Adjust the Casters 21. 1. Place the HCF wrench back onto the rails (Figure 21). 2. Push the HCF against the processor.
WARNING
The underside of the HCF has very sharp edges! Use caution when adjusting. NOTE: To adjust the casters, raise the HCF by turning the caster nut CCW. Turn the caster nut CW to lower the HCF. For best results, alternate between casters. The two INSIDE casters (near the processor) are off the floor when installed, and do not require adjustment. 20. If the gap is not wide enough or is not uniform, adjust the two outside casters (Figure 20).
1/05 9-22
Figure 21 Store the Wrench 22. Remove the lower knockout on the processor (to the rear of the bypass tray) (Figure 22).
Figure 22 Remove the Knockout 23. Connect the HCF harness to the processor (Figure 23).
1/05 9-23
Figure 23 Connect the HCF Harness 24. Close the HCF drawer (Figure 24).
Figure 24 Close the HCF Drawer
1/05 9-24
Convenience Stapler Installation

Procedure
NOTE: The wing with convenience stapler may come pre assembled. 1. Unpack the wing with convenience stapler and hardware (Figure 1).
Figure 2 Remove the Screws 3. 1. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (Figure 3). 2. Remove the mounting bracket from the Convenience Stapler.
Figure 1 Unpack 2. 1. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (Figure 2). 2. Remove the upper left side panel.
1/05 9-25
Figure 3 Remove the Screws 4. Remove the corner support bracket attached to the wing with convenience stapler (Figure 4). 5.
Figure 4 Remove the Corner Support Bracket 1. Slip the corner support bracket into the opening at the left rear (Figure 5). 2. Insert the tab on the bracket through the hole in the frame.
1/05 9-26
Figure 5 Position the Bracket CAUTION There is very little room to install the M4 screw. Be careful not to drop the screw into the machine. 6. Insert an M4 screw into the bottom of the bracket (Figure 6). 7.
Figure 6 Install the Bracket 1. Orient the bracket so that the threaded hole is parallel to the frame of the copier (Figure 7). 2. Use a 5.5 mm wrench to tighten the screw.
1/05 9-27
Figure 7 Align the Bracket 8. 1. Slip the mounting bracket up and behind the platen surround (Figure 8). 2. Ensure that the holes on the bracket align with the holes on the left side of the processor. 9.
Figure 8 Install the Bracket Secure the bracket using seven 5.5 mm M3 screws (Figure 9).
1/05 9-28
Figure 9 Secure the Bracket 10. 1. Turn the wing with convenience stapler upside down (Figure 10). 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the stabilizer bracket from the bottom of the tray. Set the bracket aside.
Figure 10 Prepare the Wing 11. Hang the wing with convenience stapler onto the mounting bracket (Figure 11).
1/05 9-29
Figure 11 Install the Wing NOTE: Be sure to attach the wing with convenience stapler through the mounting bracket and into the corner support bracket. 12. Install two 5.5 mm M4 screws to secure the wing with convenience stapler to the mounting bracket (Figure 12).
Figure 12 Secure the Wing 13. Install the stabilizer bracket and secure using two 5.5 mm screws (Figure 13).
1/05 9-30
Figure 13 Attach the Stabilizer Bracket 14. Attach the stabilizer bracket to the wing with convenience stapler using two 5.5 mm screws (Figure 14).
Figure 14 Install the Stabilizer Bracket 15. Attach the convenience stapler ground strap to the processor (Figure 15).
1/05 9-31
Figure 15 Attach the Ground Strap 16. 1. Remove the screw (Figure 16). 2. Remove the cutout.
Figure 16 Prepare the Cutout 17. Connect the stapler power cord to the processor (Figure 17).
1/05 9-32
Figure 17 Connect the Power Cord 18. Install the two cable anchors on the rear of the processor (Figure 18).
Figure 18 Install the Cable Anchors 19. Secure the stapler power cord in the cable anchors (Figure 19).
1/05 9-33
Figure 19 Secure the Power Cord
1/05 9-34

NOTE: Ensure that the third party device is available before starting this procedure. Table 1 Accessory Types Interface Type Adder Type (Auditron) Subtraction Type (Prepaid) Coin Vend NVM Value 1 2
WARNING
Power-OFF the machine and disconnect the Power Plug.
Procedure
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DCCS50: Remove the Digital Front End (IDFE), by performing steps 1 - 9 of REP 19.1 Removing the IDFE. Remove the IOT Rear Cover. (PL 11.3) Remove the Tray Module Rear Cover. (PL 11.3) Remove the ESS Left Cover. (PL 11.3) Install the Foreign Interface Chassis Assembly. (Figure 1) Place the F/I Chassis Assembly pivot pin into the hole on the machine frame use the shoulder screw to secure the upper end of the chassis to the machine. Remove the Blind Cover. (PL 11.3) Break away the cable access tab on the Blind Cover. If the Foreign Device being used is a Coin Op. device, complete steps 9-11. If not, go to step 12. Remove the screw that secures the Foreign Interface Module to the mounting bracket and remove the module.
Removal Procedures
1. 2. 3. Reverse the Installation procedures sequence. Enter Diagnostics. Enter dC131 [752-002] and change the NVM value to 0. NOTE: If Fault Code 3-333 displays, repeat steps 2 and 3.
6. 7. 8. 9.
10. Remove the four screws that secure the module cover and remove the cover. 11. Exchange the ROM in position U2 with the ROM supplied in the kit. Install the module cover and reinstall the module to the mounting bracket. 12. Connect J905 of the F/I Chassis Assembly to P905. 13. Replace the Blind Cover. 14. Connect the Foreign Device Cable (external auditron) to J940 on the F/I Chassis Assembly. Route the Cable through the two cable clamps on the F/I Chassis Assembly to the outside of the machine. 15. Secure the F/I Chassis Assembly with the 3 screws from the kit. 16. Replace the IOT Rear Cover and the Tray Module Rear Cover. 17. DCCS50: Replace the Digital Front End (IDFE). 18. Connect the machine Power Plug. 19. Power-ON the machine and allow the machine to warm up. 20. Make the following NVM changes, using either UI Diagnostics (steps 21-23) or the PWS step 24. 21. Enter Diagnostics from the Machine UI. Refer to NVM Read / Write (dC131 NVM UI Diagnostics). 22. Enter dC131 [759-015], set the NVM value for the Foreign Interface type being used (Table 1). 23. Enter [752-002], set to 1 - Accessory Connection. 24. Use the PWS to enter dC371 Configuration Page and set the Accessory Connection to match the accessory being used (Table 1).
1/05 9-35
Shoulder Screw
J940
Pivot Pin
Figure 1 Foreign Interface Chassis Assembly
1/05 9-36
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Enablement Kit Installation

Purpose
The purpose of this kit is to enable installation of EPC (Electronic Pre-Collation) on machines without TAG P38. If TAG P38 is already installed Place the Shipping Label on this Kit and Return it.
4.
If the Convenience Stapler is not installed: Go to, step 11 and continue with the Scan Cable installation. If the Convenience Stapler is installed: Continue with these instructions at step 5. Locate and disconnect the stapler power cord. Remove the stapler power cord from the cable anchors (2) on the rear of the machine. Locate and remove the 5.5mm screw securing the green ground wire to the left side of the machine. Remove the two 5.5mm screws that secure the stabilizer bracket to the bottom of the Stapler Mounting Cover. Remove the 2 stabilizer bracket screws M4x5.5mm.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Prerequisites
The machine must have the following Tags installed: NOTE: The affected machines that require Tag P8 fall within the serial number ranges: FU2: 040051 to 040198 FU3: 310512016x to 310512122x
10. Remove the Stapler Mounting Cover (PL 16.1) from the mounting bracket. 11. Open the IIT (REP 3.1.2) CAUTION The VSEL PWB is susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage. 12. Access the VSEL PWB (Figure 1):
TAG P8 TAG P39 (Check that NVM location 752-017 is set to 1).
Kit Contents
The EPC Enablement Kit consists of the following items: EPC Scan Cable - qty. 1 EPC Mounting Plate - qty. 1 Thumb Nuts- qty. 4 Connector Bracket - qty. 1 Harness Assembly - qty. 1 Connector Cover - qty. 1 (not used) Locking Clamp - qty. 1
1
Procedure
Installing the Scan Cable 1. For DCCS50: Switch off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Remove the IDFE (REP 19.1). Obtain permission from the network administrator and perform the proper shut down procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the DocuColor 12 interface cables (print and scan) from the IOT. Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord. Obtain permission from the network administrator and perform the proper shut down procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the Copier Interface Cables (print and scan) from the interface ports on the copier. Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord.
For DC12 with attached Splash DFE:
2
Remove the Cover
For DC12 with attached Fiery DFE:
2. 3.
Figure 1 Accessing the VSEL PWB
Undock the Finisher or Mailbox/Sorter, if present. Remove the following: Exit Tray (PL 12.11) IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3) IOT Rear Cover (PL 11.3) Wing Tray (PL 11.1), If Present Installation Instructions
1/05 9-37
CAUTION it is possible that there is a shorting condition between the EPC Scan Cable and the FPC-ROS Flat Cable connector (P/J 398). Foam on top of the connector is intended to insulate the pins from contact. However, the foam can be compressed by the EPC Scan Cable and the pins may stick through and short against the Scan Cable connector housing. Using a sheet of transparency or shim stock, cut a strip 45mm X 12mm and adhere to the top of the foam on the FPC-ROS Cable connector (P/J 398). This strip will function as an insulator. NOTE: The 80 to 68 pin EPC Scan Cable is longer in length than the 80 to 80 pin Print Cable. Connect the Scan Cable (Figure 2):
2
Connect the Scan Cable to TSJ1
Figure 3 Routing the Scan Cable 14. NOTE: Do not reinstall the Right Upper Cover after closing the IIT. The Right Upper Cover will be reinstalled, later in these instructions.
1
Disconnect the flat cable (P/J389)
3
Reconnect the flat cable. Ensure that the cable is routed under the frame
Close the IIT (REP 3.1.2) 15. If the EPC Kit is being installed at the same time as the enablement kit: Perform Print Cable Installation step 2 in the EPC Kit installation instructions, then resume this procedure at Step 17. 16. Route the Scan Cable (and Print Cable if present) as shown in Figure 4:
Figure 2 Connecting the Scan Cable 13. Reinstall the Half Tone PWB Cover. Route the Scan Cable as shown in Figure 3.
1/05 9-38
1 2
Route the Scan cable, with the ferrite in front of the Print cable, towards the rear of the machine Remove the screw (1)
2
Slide bracket left then down, to remove
1
Route the Print cable towards the rear of the machine Figure 4 Routing the Scan Cable and Print Cable 17. If the EPC Kit is being installed at the same time as the enablement kit: Perform Print Cable Installation (steps 4 and 5) of the EPC Kit installation instructions, then resume this procedure at Step 19. 18. Reinstall the following: Exit Tray (PL 12.11) Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2) IIT Rear Cover (PL 11.3) Wing Tray (PL 11.1), If Present Convenience Stapler, If present. 4. 3.
3
Detach P/J 899
Figure 5 Removing the Connector Bracket Install the EPC Harness Assembly: a. b. c. d. e. f. Disconnect P/J22 from the IOT LVPS. Connect J22A (new harness) to P22 on the IOT LVPS. Connect J22 (existing harness) to P22A (new harness). Disconnect P/J21 from the IOT LVPS. Connect J21A (new harness) to P21 on the IOT LVPS. Connect J21 (existing harness) to P21A (new harness).
Install the new Connector Bracket (Figure 6):
Installing the Harness Assembly 1. 2. Remove the Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3). Remove the existing Connector Bracket (Figure 5):
1/05 9-39
1
Insert P899 and P657 (new)from rear
1 2
Install Connector Bracket at same location as the old bracket, using existing screw Install the Clamp
2
Gather the harness and lock the clamp Figure 6 Installing the new Connector Bracket 6. 5. Install the Locking Clamp (Figure 7). Figure 7 Installing the Locking Clamp Reinstall the Tray Module Rear Cover (PL 11.3). CAUTION Use caution when aligning the Mounting Plate with the IOT Rear Cover. It may be extremely difficult to separate the Mounting Plate from the IOT Rear Cover, after they have been pressed together. 7. Place the IOT Rear Cover face up on a flat surface. Remove the protective backing from the five adhesive strips of tape located on the back of the Mounting Plate. Align the Mounting Plate over the IOT Rear Cover, align the 4 holes, and Press down to fasten (adhere) the Mounting Plate to the IOT Rear Cover. (see Figure 8) Install the EPC Mounting Plate and the IOT Rear Cover (Figure 8):
8.
1/05 9-40
1
Line up the 4 holes
2
Install the IOT Rear Cover and the EPC Mounting Plate at the same time. Use the same screws (4) Figure 8 Installing the Mounting Plate 9. For DCCS50: Reinstall the IDFE (REP 19.1). Continue with this installation at step 10. For DC 12: 10. Mark off Tag 38 on the IOT Tag Matrix. 11. If the EPC Kit is being installed at the same time as the enablement kit: Go to the EPC Assembly Installation instructions in the EPC Kit installation instructions and complete the installation. If the EPC Kit is not being installed at this time: Continue with these instructions. 12. Dock the Finisher. 13. For DC 12 with attached Splash DFE: Reconnect the DocuColor 12 interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to the IOT. Switch On the Server power. Reconnect the Copier Interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to the interface ports on the copier. Switch On the Server power.
For DC 12 with attached Fiery DFE:
14. Reconnect the machine power cord; switch On the power.
1/05 9-41
Electronic Pre-Collation (EPC) Kit Installation

Purpose
The purpose of this kit is to install the EPC (Electronic Pre-Collation) option on machines manufactured with TAG P38.
1
Disconnect the Scan cable
Prerequisites
The machine must have the following Tags installed: TAG P38 TAG P39 (Ensure that NVM location 752-017 is set to 1).
Kit Contents
The EPC Kit consists of the following items: 1. EPC Print Cable - qty. 1 EPC Assembly - qty. 1 P-Clamp (6N) - qty. 1 P-Clamp (7N) - qty. 1 Screw M3 - qty. 2 Screw M4x6mm - qty. 4 For DCCS50: Switch off the power. Wait 30 seconds, then unplug the power cord. Remove the IDFE DDI Cables. Obtain permission from the network administrator and perform the proper shut down procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the DocuColor 12 interface cables (print and scan) from the IOT. Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord. Obtain permission from the network administrator and perform the proper shut down procedure. Switch off the Server power. Disconnect the Copier Interface Cables (print and scan) from the interface ports on the copier. Switch off the machine power. Unplug the power cord. Switch off the power and disconnect the power cord. 2. Figure 1 Disconnecting the Scan Cable From the Terminator If the EPC Enablement Kit is being installed at the same time as the EPC kit: Connect the Print cable as shown in Figure 2, then return to Installing the Scan Cable Step 17 of the EPC Enablement Kit installation instructions. If the EPC Enablement Kit is not being installed at the same time: Connect the Print cable as shown in Figure 2, then continue with these instructions.
Procedure
For DC12 with attached Splash DFE:
For DC12 with attached Fiery DFE:
2. 3.
For DC12 without an attached DFE: Undock the Finisher or Mailbox/Sorter, if present. Remove the Right Upper Cover (PL 11.2).
Print Cable Installation 1. Disconnect the Scan Cable (Figure 1):
1/05 9-42
2
Route the Scan cable, in front of the Print cable, towards the rear of the machine
1 1
Connect the Print cable (TPJ1) Route the Print Cable towards the rear of the machine
Figure 2 Installing the Print Cable 3. Route the Scan and Print cables (Figure 3): 4.
Figure 3 Routing the Scan and Print Cables Provide a cable exit on the Right Upper Cover (Figure 4):
1/05 9-43
EPC Assembly Installation
1
Right Upper Cover with break-away tab
1.
NOTE: If you are installing the EPC Enablement Kit at the same time as the EPC Kit locate the 4 thumb nuts provided with the enablement kit, they will be used in place of the 4 (M4x6mm) screws for Steps (1 and 2) Install and temporarily tighten the 2 upper screws on the IOT Rear Cover (Figure 5):
2
Right Upper Cover with break-away Tab removed
1
M4x6mm screws (2)
Figure 5 Preparing to install EPC Assembly 2. Install the EPC Assembly (Figure 6):
Figure 4 Right Upper Cover Cable Exit 5. If the EPC Enablement Kit is being installed at the same time as the EPC Kit: Return to step 19 of Installing the Scan Cable in the EPC Enablement Kit installation instructions. If the EPC Enablement Kit is not being installed at the same time: Continue with these instructions. 6. Reinstall the Right Upper Cover.
1/05 9-44
2
Secure the upper screws (2)
1
Install the EPC Assembly
1 3
Install the remaining lower screws (2) Figure 6 Installing the EPC Assembly Figure 7 Connecting EPC DC Power 4. 5. Connect the EPC DC Power connector (Figure 7): Connect the Scan Cable (Figure 8): Connect the EPC DC Power Connector
3.
Remove the Connector Cover, if present (PL 11.3 Item 12).
1/05 9-45
3
Secure the P-Clamp (1) M3 screw
3
Secure the P-Clamp (1) M3 screw
1
Connect the Scan Cable
1
Connect the Print Cable
2
Install the P-Clamp (6N)
2
Install the P-Clamp (7N)
Figure 8 Connecting the Scan cable 6. Connect the Print Cable (Figure 9):
Figure 9 Connecting the Print Cable DC 12 / DCCS 50 Machine Checkout 1. For DC 12 with attached Splash DFE: Reconnect the DocuColor 12 interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to the IOT. Switch On the Server power. 2. For DC 12 with attached Fiery DFE: Reconnect the Copier Interface Cables (left side print and right side scan) to the interface ports on the copier. Switch On the Server power. 3. 4. 5. 6. For DCCS 50: Reconnect the DDI Cables to the IOT. Dock the Finisher. Reconnect the machine power cord; switch On the power. For DC 12 / DCCS 50 machines with a finisher installed: From the User Interface, Touch the Job Assembly tab. Ensure Additional Originals and Output Delivery buttons are displayed. Place 5 colored pages on the DADF, from the Basic Copying tab select Stapling & More...., select Collated (Staple Options), select the desired stapling option. Touch Save to return to the Copy Output screen. Touch Save again to return to the Basic Copying tab, Place 5 colored pages on the DADF, select 3 copies and press Start. 7. For DC 12 / DCCS 50 machines without a finisher installed: From the User Interface, Touch the Job Assembly tab. Ensure Additional Originals and Output Delivery buttons are displayed. Place 5 colored pages on the DADF, from the Basic Copying tab select the Auto Output collated feature, select 3 copies and press Start.
1/05 9-46
10 Principles of Operation
0. Machine Overview
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... Product Configurations.................................................................................................... Principles of Operation Overview.................................................................................... 10-3 10-3 10-5 10-11 10-11 10-12 10-14 10-16 10-16 10-17 10-23 10-27 10-28 10-30 10-32 10-32 10-35 10-37 10-37 10-38 10-39 10-40 10-41 10-43 10-44 10-45 10-49 10-49 10-51 10-51 10-52 10-55 10-56 10-57 10-59 10-63
6. Imaging
Overview ......................................................................................................................... Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Configuration) ...................................... IIT/IPS Cooling ................................................................................................................ Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Configurations)................................ Image Source Selection .................................................................................................. Image Processing (All Configurations) ............................................................................ Photoreceptor Exposure.................................................................................................. 10-67 10-70 10-80 10-80 10-85 10-86 10-88 10-91 10-92 10-95 10-96 10-97 10-97 10-99 10-102 10-104 10-104 10-106 10-107 10-107 10-109 10-110 10-112 10-114 10-122 10-123 10-126 10-126 10-129 10-131 10-135 10-135 10-136 10-143 10-145 10-146 10-148 10-149
1. Standby Power
Overview ......................................................................................................................... Voltage Dependent Assemblies ...................................................................................... Unswitched AC Power .................................................................................................... Power Switching Control Circuitry ................................................................................... Unswitched DC Power .................................................................................................... Switched AC Power ........................................................................................................ Switched DC Power ........................................................................................................ Electrical Interlocks .........................................................................................................
7. Paper Supply
Overview ......................................................................................................................... Paper Tray Specifications ............................................................................................... Paper Size Sensing......................................................................................................... Tray Level Lift and Sensing............................................................................................. No Paper Sensing ........................................................................................................... Tray 5 ..............................................................................................................................
2. User Interface
Overview ......................................................................................................................... User Interface Base PWBA............................................................................................. LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA ........................................................... LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA.............................................................. Key/LED PWBA .............................................................................................................. Analog Touch Panel........................................................................................................
8. Paper Transportation
Overview ......................................................................................................................... Paper Feeders................................................................................................................. Vertical Transport ............................................................................................................ Tray 5 .............................................................................................................................. Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport .................................................................. Inverter and Duplex Paper Path ...................................................................................... Print Exit ..........................................................................................................................
3. Machine Run Control

Overview ......................................................................................................................... Control Architecture ........................................................................................................ Non-Volatile Memory....................................................................................................... Machine Usage Modes ................................................................................................... Self-test ........................................................................................................................... PWBA LEDs.................................................................................................................... PWBA Test Points........................................................................................................... Copier Timing.................................................................................................................. Job Control...................................................................................................................... Digital Front End ............................................................................................................. Foreign Interface .............................................................................................................
9. Xerographics
Overview ......................................................................................................................... Photoreceptor Drum ........................................................................................................ Charging.......................................................................................................................... Development ................................................................................................................... Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT)...................................................................................... IBT Assembly .................................................................................................................. Motors ............................................................................................................................. Cleaning Systems ........................................................................................................... Air Flow ........................................................................................................................... Process Controls .............................................................................................................
4. Start Power
Overview ......................................................................................................................... Main Motor ...................................................................................................................... Drum Motor .....................................................................................................................
10. Fusing
Overview ......................................................................................................................... The Fusing Process ........................................................................................................ Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies ............................................................. Copy Exit .........................................................................................................................
5. Document Transportation
Overview ......................................................................................................................... Electrical Power .............................................................................................................. DADF System Control..................................................................................................... DADF Document Transport............................................................................................. DADF Operation..............................................................................................................
11. Sorter / Mailbox

Overview ......................................................................................................................... Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections............................................................................. Offset Catch Tray Electrical Connections........................................................................ Mailbox/Sorter Interlocks................................................................................................. 1/05 10-1
Principles of Operation
Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs.................................................................................................... Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter ..................................................................... Offset Catch Tray (OCT) ................................................................................................. Mailbox/Sorter Operation. ...............................................................................................
10-150 10-150 10-153 10-153 10-155 10-155 10-156 10-157 10-159 10-160 10-160 10-161 10-161 10-162 10-164 10-168 10-171 10-174 10-174 10-175 10-175 10-178 10-179 10-180 10-182 10-183 10-187 10-187 10-188 10-188 10-188 10-189 10-190 10-190 10-191 10-191 10-192
12. Finisher
Finisher Power ................................................................................................................ Finisher Interlocks ........................................................................................................... Finisher Power Components .......................................................................................... Finisher Control............................................................................................................... The Finisher Paper Path ................................................................................................. The Decurler ................................................................................................................... The Finisher Gate ........................................................................................................... The Mailbox Gate............................................................................................................ Finisher Path for Stacking without Stapling..................................................................... Finisher Paper Path for Stapling and Stacking ............................................................... Compiler/Tamper Functional Description........................................................................ Stapler Functional Description ........................................................................................ Eject/Offset Functional Description ................................................................................. Stacker Functional Description ....................................................................................... Mechanical Drive............................................................................................................. Finisher Transport Motor................................................................................................. Eject Motor ...................................................................................................................... End Wall Motor................................................................................................................ Tamper Motor.................................................................................................................. Eject Paddle Motor .......................................................................................................... Eject Clamp/Offset Motor ................................................................................................ Stacker Tray Motor and Sensors ....................................................................................
19. Digital Front End

Overview ......................................................................................................................... Electrical and Mechanical Operation of the IDFE ........................................................... Power Distribution - Solid State Relay ............................................................................ Power Distribution - Printer Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)..................................... Power Distribution - IDFE................................................................................................ Digital Signal Distribution from the IDFE to the IOT ........................................................ IDFE Enclosure ............................................................................................................... Network Interface ............................................................................................................ Image Processing ........................................................................................................... Print Interface.................................................................................................................. Scan Interface ................................................................................................................
1/05 10-2
Introduction
This machine is a multipurpose device: It is available as a Printer (Figure 1) Copier or Copier/Printer/Scanner (Figure 2 and Figure 3) It can operate in black and white monochrome and 4-color modes It can produce 50 copies per minute monochrome or 12.5 copies per minute color
Product Configurations
The machine is available in the following configurations: As a color and monochrome Printer connected to a local area network As a stand-alone color and monochrome Copier As a combined color and monochrome Printer, document Scanner and Copier, also connected to a local area network
This chapter introduces the following areas: Product Configurations Principles of Operation Overview Standby Power Local User Interface Remote User Interface Machine Run Control Start Power Document Transportation Imaging Paper Supply Duplex Automatic Document Feeder Paper Transportation Xerographics Fuser Assembly Mailbox/Sorter and Offset Copy Tray Digital Front End (Integrated/External)
This machine is available with the following optional accessories: High Capacity Paper Feeder (HCF) for input paper Edit Pad Billing accessories for the Foreign Interface Mailbox/Sorter for output material 500 Sheet Offset Catch Tray (OCT) Envelope Tray Intergrated or external Digital Front End (DFE) Stapler
1/05 10-3
Figure 1 Basic Printer Configuration
Figure 2 Basic Copier and Printer/Copier Configuration (With DADF)
1/05 10-4
Principles of Operation Overview

The Principles of Operation manual is written on a Block Schematic Diagram (BSD) chain-bychain basis. This is done because the BSDs form a good outline for describing copier operation. The numbers of the chapters in this manual are the BSD chain numbers found in Section 7 of the Service Manual. Figure 1 shows the interaction between the chains.
Figure 3 Printer/Copier with Mailbox/Sorter/OCT Options
1/05 10-5
Product Configurations, Principles of Operation
Figure 1 Interaction between BSD Chains
Standby Power
Standby Power includes the AC power distribution, DC power distribution, and the electrical Principles of Operation
interlock system. Standby Power filters the AC power input, generates various DC voltages, and distributes the AC and DC voltages to the subsystems.
1/05 10-6
Local User Interface

The local User Interface, shown in Figure 2, includes the Control Panel, the optional Edit Pad Assembly and the electronics associated with these assemblies. The User Interface sends operator commands to Machine Run Control, and displays messages and graphics in response to commands from Machine Run Control. The displayed messages and their language can be changed by downloading software from a Portable Workstation (PWS) connected at the rear of the machine.
It provides cycle-up and cycle-down commands to all other subsystems.
Start Power
Start Power refers to the motors and drives which are activated when the START button is pressed on the User Interface, or downloads a print file from a remote user workstation. Start Power is comprised of the Main Motor and the Photoreceptor Motor and their associated drivetrains. However, these two motors do not provide all of the mechanical drive in the machine. Motors powering other machine subsystems are described in the chapters associated with these subsystems.
Document Transportation
In a machine configured as a Copier or Copier/Printer/Scanner, the document is placed on the Platen Glass. This can either be done manually by the user or automatically by the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (Figure 4). In both cases, the machine can automatically determine the size of the original document. A machine configured as a Copier/Printer/Scanner can also scan documents, and the resulting images are routed to a user client workstation by the DFE.
Imaging
Imaging is the acquisition and processing the document image, up to being written to the Photoreceptor Drum. As shown in Table 1, the source and destination of the image depends on the machine configuration. LCD TOUCHSCREEN TOUCH PAD and LEDS Table 1 Image Sources and Destinations Configuration Printer Copier Copier/Printer/ Scanner Figure 2 User Interface Image Sources User workstation via LAN and DFE IIT IIT or User workstation via LAN and DFE Image Destinations Photoreceptor Drum Photoreceptor Drum Photoreceptor Drum or User workstation via DFE and LAN
Remote User Interface

When the machine is configured as a printer or Copier/Printer/Scanner, its Digital Front End (DFE) appears as an Internet or Intranet server. Users can send their print jobs to the machine, and retrieve images, which have been scanned from the Platen Glass. Scan and copy images are created at the IIT when the Xenon lamp illuminates the original document on the Platen Glass, and the Charge Coupled Device (CCD) samples the document at 400 dots per inch (DPI). The image is then manipulated by the Image Input Terminal (IIT) and the Image Processing System (IPS): 1. 2. 3. 4. It analyzes and implements operator inputs from the User Interface and sends display messages for the operator to the User Interface. It receives status inputs from machine sensors and provides timing and sequencing instructions to machine motors and clutches. It identifies machine faults, initiates appropriate recovery operations and notifies the operator. 1/05 10-7 Principles of Operation They determine if the original document is color or monochrome They digitize the analog data from the CCD They separate the image into its component colors They perform any other processing, such as image enlargement or reduction, that the user has specified
Machine Run Control

Machine Run Control is the hardware and software that controls machine printing and copying operations. It accepts status information from all machine subsystems and controls their operation. Specifically, Machine Run Control performs the following functions:
When copying, the image is routed to additional processing circuitry in the Image Output Terminal (IOT). The IOT circuitry drives the laser diode in the Raster Output Scanner (ROS). This diode writes the latent image onto the Photoreceptor Drum.
When scanning, the image is sent to the remote user workstation via the Digital Front End (DFE). Print images come from the user workstation via the LAN and DFE. These images are also routed through the IOT processing circuitry to the ROS, which writes them onto the Photoreceptor Drum.
Paper Supply
The Paper Supply provides the paper and other blank copy material for the machine. There are six possible sources: four paper trays (Trays 1-4), a manual side feeding tray (Tray 5) and the optional High Capacity Feeder (HCF, Tray 6) (Figure 3). The media which these sources can hold are different: Paper Tray 1 and the HCF can hold only for A4 or 8-1/2 x 11 lightweight papers. Paper Tray 2, 3 and 4 can hold light and medium weight papers up to 11 X 17, and can be set to accept and detect 12x18 paper. The Tray 5 can pass any type of paper, cover stock or transparency material which the machine can process.
The Tray 5 is covered in the Paper Transportation section, and the HCF (Tray 6) is covered in the Paper Supply and Paper Transportations sections.
Figure 3 High Capacity Feeder
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder

The Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) (Figure 4) permits stacks of original documents to be automatically fed to the Platen Glass where they can be scanned or copied. The originals can be one-sided or two-sided. Duplex documents are automatically turned over within the DADF so that both sides can be scanned. The user selects between these choices at the machines local User Interface.
1/05 10-8
4. DADF INPUT TRAY 5.
All of the components of the developed image are transferred from the IBT Belt to blank copy media. After the image is transferred to the blank media, the image charge and residual toner are removed from the IBT Belt, preparing the IBT Belt for the next charging cycle. The unfused copy is moved from the IBT to the Vacuum Transport, so that it can be moved to the Fuser Assembly.
Fuser Assembly
The Fuser Assembly (Figure 5) receives the unfused copy, fuses the image to the copy material and moves the copy to the output device or inverter. The Fuser Assembly uses heat and pressure between two rollers to bond toner on to the copy media. The Heat Roll is both internally and externally heated, while the Pressure Roll is internally heated.
DADF OUTPUT TRAY
Figure 4 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
Paper Transportation
Paper transportation retrieves sheets of blank copy media from the selected source, registers them, and moves them to the IBT. In addition, Paper Transportation automatically detects the size of media from the Tray 5 and automatically detects transparencies.
Xerographics
The Xerographics Module develops the latent image written onto the Photoreceptor Drum by the ROS, transfers the developed image onto the Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) and transfers the image(s) to the paper. This process comprises the following steps: 1. The ROS writes the image onto the charged Photoreceptor Drum, creating a latent electrostatic image. This is done once for monochrome images and once per color or four times total for color images. The latent image is developed by depositing toner of the proper color onto the Photoreceptor Drum. This is also done once for monochrome images and four times for color images. The toner comprising the developed image is transferred from the Photoreceptor Drum onto the Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) Belt. The residual toner and image charge are then removed from the Drum. This is the last step which is done a different number of times for monochrome and color images.
Figure 5 Fuser Assembly
2.
Mailbox/Sorter and Offset Copy Tray

The combination of the Mailbox/Sorter and/or OCT can stack completed copies in a variety of ways, depending on the mode selected by the operator. Collated sets Uncollated sets Sorted by user
3.
1/05 10-9
The Offset Copy Tray (OCT) is a standard accessory for Printer configurations. and an optional accessory for Copier and Copier/Printer configurations. The Mailbox/Sorter (Figure 6) is an optional accessory. The OCT can be mounted on either the basic machine or the Mailbox/ Sorter. However, the OCT can offset only for print jobs received over the network via the DFE.
10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet 4 or 16 Mbps Token Ring TCP/IP, SMB, NetWare or AppleTalk protocol Banyan VINES or NetBEUI/NetBIOS protocol via an external adaptor
The DFE is included for machine Printer configuration and is an option for Copier/Printer configurations. With the DFE attached, users on the LAN can download Postscript, Adobe PDL, Hewlett-Packard PCL or ASCII files from their workstations through the LAN, and the machine will print them. In addition, when the machine is configured as a Copier/Printer/Scanner, images scanned at the IIT can be sent via the DFE to the remote user workstation.
Figure 6 Mailbox/Sorter
Digital Front End (Integrated/External)

The DFE is designed to appear as an internet or intranet server when connected to a local area network (LAN). Several different LAN interfaces are possible:
1/05 10-10
Overview
This chapter describes the control, distribution and processing of electrical power, the safety interlock function, and the power saving function. The machine generates a several DC voltages from its AC power input. Certain machine circuits are powered regardless of whether the main power switch is off or on. There are four types of Standby Power: AC power which is present when the machines main power switch is off (Unswitched AC Power) DC power which is also present when the Main Power Switch is off (Unswitched DC Power) AC power which is only present when the Main Power Switch is on (Switched AC Powerr) DC power which also is present only when the Main Power Switch is on (Switched DC Power)
Voltage Dependent Assemblies

Since this machine is used worldwide, the voltage of the Prime AC Power Input can vary. Several machine assemblies have different part numbers depending on the voltage of the Prime AC Power input. The Prime AC Power is: 115 VAC at 16 amperes in the digital copier configuration and 12 amperes in the printer configuration for Xerox Corporation (XC) markets 220/230/240 VAC at 10 amperes for the Xerox Europe (XE) markets
The modules which are changed depending on the Prime AC Power Input are: The IDFE Low Voltage Power Supply (IDFE LVPS) The Image Output Terminal Low Voltage Power Supply (IOT LVPS) The Image Input Terminal/Image Processing System Low Voltage Power Supply (IIT/IPS LVPS) The 18 VAC Transformer The Fuser Solid State Relay (SSR) The IDFE LVPS SSR The Oil Pump The External Heat Roll Lamp The Pressure Roll Lamp The Heat Roll Lamp
This chapter also describes Electrical Interlocks.
1/05 10-11
Overview, Voltage Dependent Assemblies
Unswitched AC Power
As shown in Figure 1, unswitched Prime AC Power enters the machine and is immediately routed through the GFI Circuit Breaker and the Noise Filter. The Noise Filter prevents unwanted signals from entering the machine on the power line. The Noise Filter Output is provided to the 18 VAC Transformer and to the Choke Coil. The Choke Coil is another type of noise filter and supplies the IDFE LVPS. The output of the 18 VAC Transformer goes back to the AC Driver PWBA. Figure 2 shows the locations of the assemblies used for Unswitched AC Power.
Figure 1 Unswitched AC Power Routing
Unswitched AC Power
1/05 10-12
NOISE FILTER
GFI CIRCUIT BREAKER
18 VAC TRANSFORMER (BEHIND IOT LVPS)
AC DRIVER PWBA
Figure 2 Locations of Assemblies Using Unswitched AC Power
1/05 10-13
Unswitched AC Power
Power Switching Control Circuitry

As shown in Figure 1, power switching control uses circuitry on the AC Driver PWBA with inputs from other assemblies. Machine power can only be switched on by toggling the Main Power Switch. When pressed, this switch energizes the Set Coil of Power Relay 1, which energizes Power Relay 2 and causes Switched AC Power to be supplied by the AC Driver PWBA. AC power can be switched off by any of three events: The operator toggles the Main Power Switch. The IOT CPU PWBA asserts the Main Power Off line. This only occurs due to abnormal execution of CPU firmware. When the operator again toggles the Main Power Switch, the entire machine, including the IOT CPU, is rebooted. The IOT CPU PWBA asserts the Power Off line. This places the machine in to Sleep Mode and is done as a power saving technique.
Each of these inputs activates the Reset Coil of Power Relay 1, deenergizing the relay and releasing Power Relay 2. This removes Switched AC Power from the machine. The machine saves power in two stages. The first transition is from Ready Mode to Low Power Mode. This occurs 15 minutes (default time) after the machine operation initiated by the user. This delay period is stored in IOT NVM and can be adjusted over a range of 1 to 240 minutes. When in Low Power Mode, the fuser heaters are off. The second transition is to Sleep Mode. The default delay is 60 minutes after the transition to Low Power Mode. The delay value is also stored in IOT NVM and can be adjusted over a range of 15 to 240 minutes.
1/05 10-14
Figure 1 Power Switching Control Circuitry Block Diagram Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Principles of Operation
1/05 10-15
Unswitched DC Power
All unswitched DC power originates from the AC Driver PWBA.
Switched AC Power
Switched AC Power from Power Relay 2 on AC Driver PWBA goes to the following assemblies: IOT LVPS Oil Pump IIT/IPS LVPS Fuser Solid State Relay (SSR)
AC Driver PWBA
The AC Driver PWBA generates +5 VDC and +12 VDC. Both DC voltages are derived from the output of the 18 VAC Transformer. The +12 VDC output goes to the Fuser Fan, while the +5VDC is supplied as EVER +5V to several assemblies: The IOT Drive PWBA Vsel PWBA Halftone PWBA EPSV The IOT CPU PWBA, via the IOT Drive PWBA The Main Power Switch
AC Power from the Fuser SSR goes to the following assemblies: External Heat Roll Lamp Pressure Roll Lamp Heat Roll Lamp
The AC Driver PWBA contains Prime AC Power switching relays, but control of these relays is distributed among several assemblies. The topic is covered in detail in the Power Switching Control Circuitry section.
Unswitched DC Power, Switched AC Power
1/05 10-16
Switched DC Power
Switched DC Power comprises the outputs of the IDFE LVPS, IOT LVPS and the IIT/IPS LVPS.
The IDFE LVPS has two outputs: +5.1 VDC at 11 amps +12 VDC at 2 amp
IDFE Low Voltage Power Supply (IDFE LVPS)

As shown in Figure 1, the AC input power to the IDFE LVPS is supplied by Unswitched AC Power through a Choke Coil and an SSR. The SSR is controlled by the IDFE LV SEQ from the AC Driver PWBA; IDFE LV SEQ is controlled by the Main Power Switch. When switching off machine power, an RC network on the AC Driver PWBA delays the change of state of IDFE LV SEQ by approximately 22 seconds. This permits the IDFE to perform an orderly shutdown.
Figure 2 shows the location of the IDFE LVPS.
Figure 1 IDFE LVPS AC Power Switching and DC Power Distribution
1/05 10-17
Switched DC Power
IDFE LVPS (Behind AC Driver PWBA)
Figure 2 IDFE LVPS Location
IOT Low Voltage Power Supply (IOT LVPS)

The IOT LPVS has four outputs: +5 VDC at 11 amps +12 VDC at 1.8 amps -12 VDC at 1.0 amps +24.5 VDC at 17 amps
Figure 3 and Figure 4 show the assemblies supplied by the IOT LVPS. Figure 5 shows the location of the IOT LVPS, Distribution PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA.
Switched DC Power
1/05 10-18
Figure 3 IOT LVPS +24 VDC Power Distribution
1/05 10-19
Switched DC Power
Figure 4 IOT LVPS +5 VDC and +/- 12 VDC Power Distribution
Switched DC Power
1/05 10-20
DISTRIBUTION PWBA
IOT DRIVE PWBA (BEHIND IOT CPU PWBA AND IOT NVM PWBA)
IOT LVPS (BEHIND COVER)
Figure 5 IOT LVPS, Distribution PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA Locations
IIT/IPS Low Voltage Power Supply

The IIT/IPS LVPS has 4 outputs: +3.5 VDC at 10 amps +5.1 VDC at 6 amps +13.3 VDC at 1.1 amps +24.5 VDC at 4.5 amps
Figure 6 shows the assemblies supplied by the IIT/IPS LVPS, and Figure 7 shows the location of the IIT/IPS LVPS.
1/05 10-21
Switched DC Power
Figure 6 IIT/IPS LVPS DC Power Distribution
Switched DC Power
1/05 10-22
Electrical Interlocks
Equipment interlocks are devices which disconnect power to machine circuitry when a particular condition occurs. In this machine, they disconnect power when a machine outer door is opened and when internal assemblies are moved into their service position. This machine uses the following interlocks: Front Door Interlock Switch (shown in Figure 1) Inverter Cover Interlock Switch (R/H) (shown in Figure 2) Drawer/IBT Interlock Switch Paper Takeaway Cover (L/H) Interlock Switch
IIT/IPS LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
Figure 7 IIT/IPS LVPS Location
FRONT PANEL INTERLOCK SWITCH
Figure 1 Front Door Interlock Switch Location
1/05 10-23
Switched DC Power, Electrical Interlocks
+5 VDC is interlocked by the machine paper path Drawer and front door. Figure 3 shows the associated signal routing. +5 VDC is interlocked by the machine Inverter Cover +24 VDC is interlocked by the machine front door Figure 4 shows the associated signal routing. +24 VDC is also interlocked by the machine left hand door. Figure 5 shows the associated signal routing.
Figure 2 Inverter Cover (L/H Door) Interlock Switch Location Whenever an interlocked assembly is opened, the associated interlock switch disconnects power from the supplied circuitry.
Figure 3 Front Door +5 VDC Power Interlock Signal Flow
1/05 10-24
Figure 4 Front Door & Drawer +24 VDC Power Interlock Signal Flow
1/05 10-25
Figure 5 Paper Takeaway Cover (L/H) +24 VDC Power Signal Flow
1/05 10-26
Overview
As shown in Figure 1, the User Interface (UI) consists of: 1. 2. User Interface Base PWBA LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA
3. 4. 5. 6.
Key/LED PWBA Analog Touch Panel LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA Edit Pad
The locations of these assemblies are shown in Figure 2.
Figure 1 User Interface Simplified Block Diagram
1/05 10-27
Overview
User Interface Base PWBA

The UI Base PWBA contains the logic to control the remaining assemblies in the UI. As shown in Figure 1, this PWBA includes three microcontrollers: a PWBA Microcontroller an LCD Display Microcontroller a Control Panel/Touch Panel Microcontroller
CONTRAST CONTROL PWBA
LCD BACKLIGHT POWER SUPPLY PWBA ANALOG TOUCH PANEL (TOP); LCD PWBA/DISPLAY; LCD BACKLIGHT LAMP; UI BASE PWBA (BOTTOM)
KEYPAD /LED PWBA
Figure 2 User Interface Assemblies Locations
Overview, User Interface Base PWBA
1/05 10-28
Figure 1 User Interface Base PWBA Block Diagram The PWBA Microcontroller and Display Microcontroller share DRAM and ROM. (Both microcontrollers also include on board RAM and ROM.) The PWBA Microcontroller disables the LCD Display Microcontroller whenever it must access that memory. The PWBA Microcontroller also multiplexes the communications links with the IOT CPU PWBA and Edit Pad LED Control between itself and the LCD Display PWBA. It also provides separate communications interfaces with the Edit Pad and the Portable Workstation (PWS). The PWS is used to download software into the UI Base PWBA. The LCD Display Microcontroller uses the data in the Frame Buffer RAM to drive the display on the LCD Display PWBA. The LCD Display Microcontroller also outputs drive signals to the buzzer located on the Push-button/LED PWBA. These outputs are routed through individual attenuators, each of which has a different value of attenuation. This permits the buzzer to have three different volume levels and an almost infinite number of tones. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 10-29 Principles of Operation The Control Panel/Touch Panel Microcontroller detects changes in the status of the push-button using seven row lines and four column lines. It also drives the LEDs on the Key/LED PWBA, and connects with the Left, Right, Up and Down analog input/outputs from the Analog Touch Panel.
User Interface Base PWBA
LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA

The LCD PWBA, shown in Figure 1, contains the 640 by 240 pixel LCD display as well as its drive circuitry. All data and timing signals to the LCD are generated by the LCD Display Microcontroller on the UI Base PWBA and routed through the Contrast Control PWBA. Two DC voltages, V-EE (+28 VDC) and V-LCD (0 to +5 VDC adjustable), control the brightness and contrast of the LCD display. V-LCD can be adjusted by a variable resistor located on the Contrast Control PWBA and accessible to user.
1/05 10-30
Figure 1 LCD Display PWBA and Contrast Control PWBA
1/05 10-31
LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA

The LCD Backlight Power Supply PWBA (Figure 1) accepts +24 VDC from the UI Base PWBA and a Backlight Enable control signal from the UI Base PWBA. When enabled, the LCD Backlight Power Supply PWBA outputs 585 VAC to the LCD Backlight Lamp. The level of LCD illumination isnt adjustable.
Key/LED PWBA
The Key/LED PWBA contains 25 push-button switches, a buzzer and 10 LEDs. The push-button are shown in Figure 1, and the LEDs and buzzer are shown in Figure 2. Twenty four of the switches are electrically arranged in a row-column matrix. The LED/Push-button Processor on the UI Base PWBA individually and sequentially asserts the matrix rows while accepting inputs from all of the matrix columns simultaneously. A column line will be asserted only when a pushbutton is pressed and that push-buttons row line is asserted. The Power Saver push-button also connects between row and column when pressed, but the connection is made through an IC analog switch. A separate section of the same switch routes the V-DD input to the Power Saver LEDs on this PWBA. Eight of the ten LEDs are controlled by discrete lines from the LED/Push-button Interface Processor on the UI Base PWBA. The remaining two LEDs are controlled by a signal from IOT CPU PWBA. The Buzzer is driven by outputs from the LCD Display Microcontroller on the UI Base PWBA.
LCD Backlight Lamp and Power Supply PWBA, Key/
1/05 10-32
Figure 1 Push-button/LED PWBA Input Device Control and Connections
1/05 10-33
Key/LED PWBA
Figure 2 Push-button/LED PWBA Output Device Control and Connection
Key/LED PWBA
1/05 10-34
Analog Touch Panel

The Analog Touch Panel is mounted over the LCD Display PWBA. As shown in Figure 1, the touch panel is connected to the UI Base PWBA via the Key/LED PWBA by four analog input/ output lines. The LCD Display Microcontroller on the UI Base PWBA alternately samples the touchscreens X dimension and its Y dimension. These samples alternate rapidly enough that when the user presses the touchscreen, at least one X dimension measurement and at least one Y dimension measurement are taken.
The LCD Display Microcontroller takes a Y dimension measurement by driving the Y dimension lines (Up and Down) as outputs and accepting the Right X dimension line as an input. When used as an output, the Up output is grounded and a Down output is at about +5 VDC. When the panel is touched, two internal conductive layers make contact. The voltage at the Right input is proportional to the Y position where the touch occurred. The X dimension input is taken in a similar fashion. The LCD Display Microcontroller drives the X dimension lines and samples the Up line as an input. When driven, Right is at ground and Left is at about +5 VDC.
Figure 1 Analog Touchscreen Interconnect Block Diagram
1/05 10-35
Analog Touch Panel
Analog Touch Panel
1/05 10-36
Overview
This machine uses distributed computer technology and data communications to control its operation. Overall machine control is provided by the Image Output Terminal (IOT) CPU Printed Wiring Board Assembly (PWBA). However, additional intelligent PWBAs control subsystem functions. These PWBAs talk with each other using serial communications paths. There is no local network bus. Run-time monitoring and self-tests allow the control system to detect faults. This chapter will discuss the following subjects: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Control Architecture Non-Volatile Memory Machine Usage Modes Self-test Copier Timing Job Control Digital Front End Foreign Interface
Control Architecture
As shown in Figure 1, the center of the control architecture is the IOT CPU PWBA. This assembly uses 2-wire and 4-wire serial communications links to pass command and status messages with several other standard and optional assemblies. The Post-IPS (Image Processing System) PWBA The Pre-IPS PWBA via the Post-IPS PWBA The Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) via the Post-IPS PWBA and Pre-IPS PWBA The User Interface (UI) Base PWBA The Portable Workstation (PWS) The Tray 6 (High Capacity Feeder - HCF) The Sorter/Mailbox/Offset Copy Tray (OCT) The Foreign Interface The Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE)
In addition, the address and data buses from the IOT CPU are connected to the following: The IOT Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) PWBA The IOT Drive PWBA The Halftone PWBA.
Three of these PWBAs deserve special mention. First, the IOT Drive PWBA contains the decoders and drive circuitry which connect the IOT CPU with discrete line outputs and discrete line inputs. These discrete lines are connected with motors, clutches, solenoids and sensors throughout the machine. Second, the IOT CPU PWBA provides all of the connections between the User Interface and the rest of the machine. All status data from other PWBAs must be processed by the IOT CPU PWBA, which then provides the appropriate messages to the UI Base PWBA. When something is entered at the UI, the UI Base PWBA typically sends messages to the IOT CPU PWBA. As a result of these messages and its own processing, the IOT CPU PWBA sends commands to the rest of the machine. Third, the control and status communications path between the IOT CPU PWBA and the DADF is routed via both the Post-IPS PWBA and Pre-IPS PWBA. The nature of the routing differs between the two PWBAs. The signal path through the Post-IPS PWBA is direct, and no active circuitry on that PWBA is involved. However, all messages between the IOT CPU PWBA and DADF are handled by the control processor on the Pre-IPS PWBA. Therefore, the Pre-IPS PWBA control processor shares control of the DADF with the IOT CPU.
1/05 10-37
Overview, Control Architecture
Figure 1 Communications Architecture Block Diagram
Non-Volatile Memory
Control Architecture, Non-Volatile Memory
1/05 10-38
Three PWBAs include Non-Volatile Memory (NVM). These are shown in Table 1. This memory holds setup parameters which are specific to the particular machine. The NVM for the IOT CPU PWBA is located on the IOT NVM PWBA. This PWBA includes a 3 volt lithium battery. This battery supplies RAM power when the PWBA is disconnected from the IOT CPU PWBA or when prime AC power is removed from the machine. When the IOT CPU PWBA is replaced, the IOT NVM PWBA must be disconnected from the old PWBA and reinstalled onto the new PWBA. Table 1 NVM Locations and Contents Location Pre-IPS PWBA Post-IPS PWBA Memory Type Flash ROM Flash ROM Values For IIT and DADF IPS IOT and UI
Machine Usage Modes

The machine has both local and remote usage modes. The remote usage mode is accessible from a client workstation connected to the network. This is described in the Chapter 12, Integrated Digital Front End. The local mode is accessible only from the machine local User Interface and is described below. The local usage mode has five submodes: User Mode System Administrator Tools Mode Auditron Administrator Tools Mode User Interface Diagnostic Mode
IOT NVM PWBA (for IOT CPU PWBA) Battery-Backed RAM
Copier User Mode

The User Mode provides all copier functions not reserved for System Administrator Tools Mode, Auditron Administrator Tools Mode and User Interface Diagnostic Mode.
Copier System Administrator Tools Mode

The System Administrator can select the following parameters: Paper tray defaults Copy density and color defaults Copy position and shift Document orientation defaults Simplex/Duplex default N-up default System Administrator password Reduction/enlargement default User registered colors Photo/text separation levels Audio tone Copy quantity limit Timer values Tone reproduction parameter values
Copier Auditron Administrator Tools Mode

The following parameters can be selected in this mode: Auditron Administrator password Auditron mode on/off Password, copy limit and copy counter by user number
Copier User Interface Diagnostic Mode

The following parameters can be selected in this mode: Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 10-39 Remote Maintenance Mode NVM Reset NVM Read/Write Principles of Operation
Non-Volatile Memory, Machine Usage Modes
NVM Initialize Password
Self-test
All machine subsystems which contain microcontrollers and microprocessors perform PowerOn Self-Test (POST) when DC power is first applied to them. If all POST procedures are passed, the machine goes to normal operation. If a circuit fails a POST procedure, the machine will attempt to notify the user. However, some failures may be due to a catastrophic hardware failure which causes the machine to completely suspend operations. The following are the PWBAs that are connected together or that communicate the machine status and operation. The IOT CPU PWBA (Image Output Terminal) checks communications for the following: UI PWBA Post IPS PWBA Mail Box Control PWBA Serial Port for the PWS Checks communications through the Post IPS PWBA and MEM. SYS PWBA Controls the IOT through a direct connection with the IOT Drive PWBA Checks DADF Control PWBA communications Control Panel Switches, LCD and the Touch Panel Self-test for RAM and Control Panel Post IPW PWBA and the MEM SYS PWBA are connected together and assist communications between the Pre IPS PWBA and the IOT CPU PWBA.
Pre IPS PWBA (Image Process System):
UI PWBA (User Interface) Controls:
Post IPS PWBA implements image processing.
MEM SYS PWBA stores the Image Data sent from the Pre IPS PWBA IOT Drive PWBA controls the IOT by signals sent from the IOT CPU PWBA DADF Control PWBA controls the DADF and runs self-test of the RAM Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA controls the Mailbox/Sorter
Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) Self-Test

Table 1 lists the POST routines performed by the IDFE. Table 1 IDFE Power-On Self-Test Test Performed DC Power Test Power Switch ON BIOS Level Test Software Bootup Sequence Test Whats Tested Pass Indication Fail Indication Power LED is off Failure LED remains on at end of test Software load attempts fail; Heartbeat LED remains on constantly DC Power to IDFE Power LED stays on Motherboard IDFE Motherboard Failure LED goes off at components end of test Application software integrity Heartbeat LED blinks continuously
Printer Interface UART (internal DDI Comms Test 1 loopback)
Client level command to Failure LED blinks patIOT tern 2, but software boot continues
Machine Usage Modes, Self-test
1/05 10-40
Table 1 IDFE Power-On Self-Test Test Performed Whats Tested Pass Indication Fail Indication Failure LED blinks pattern 2, but software boot continues Printer Interface End-to-End Failure LED doesnt DDI Comms Test 2 Comms test to IOT blink pattern CPU PWBA Scan Out Interface UART (internal DDI Comms Test 1 loopback)
PWBA LEDs
Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table 4, Table 5, Table 6, Table 7, and Table 8 list the diagnostic LEDs on various machine PWBAs. These can be used to determine the status of both onboard and off-board circuitry. Table 1 IOT CPU PWBA LEDs LED CR5 CR6 CR7 CR8 CR9 CR10 CR14 CR16 CR17 CR18 Color Red Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Signal CPU Reset PWS Rx Data Tray 6 (HCF) ESPV Rx Data Decurler Rx Data +5 VDC UI PWBA Tx Data Comment Lit indicates that reset line to CPU is being asserted Flickering indicates data transitions Flickering indicates data transitions Flickering indicates data transitions Flickering indicates data transitions Lit indicates presence of PWBA power Flickering indicates data transitions
Client level command to Failure LED blinks patIOT tern 3, but printer operates normally Failure LED blinks pattern 4, but printer operates normally Link LED isnt lit
Scan Out Interface End-to-End Failure LED doesnt DDI Comms Test 2 Comms test to IOT blink pattern CPU PWBA Network/connectivity Hardware, part 1 Network/connectivity Hardware, part 2 Network/connectivity Hardware, part 3 Network/connectivity Hardware, part 4 Network link hard- Link LED stays lit ware
Network visibility to Activity LED flashes pat- Activity LED does not IDFE tern mimicking network flash traffic flow Ethernet speed detection circuitry Configuration report, web client and XCMI setting contain correct speed connection Configuration report, web client and XCMI setting contain incorrect speed connection
UI PWBA Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions IIT PWBA Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions IPS PWBA Rx Data Flickering indicates data transitions
Token Ring speed detection circuitry
LED or other media dis- LED or other media indiplays sensed or set cates wrong speed conspeed connection nection. Desired speed can be set manually At least 1 ICMP echo response is received and message is printed on configuration report A GetNearestServer response is received and message is printed on configuration report A Zone response is received and message is printed on configuration report No response is received; message printed on configuration report No response is received; message printed on configuration report No response is received; message printed on configuration report
Table 2 Pre-IPS PWBA LEDs LED CR5 CR6 CR7 CR8 CR9 CR10 Color Green Green Green Green Red Red Signal T1 IIT_CMD, SYS ADF_SYS, ADF LED_MEM_RDY, MRDY RST_LED, RST CPU_HG, MRST Comment Firmware check Flickering indicates command being received from IOT Flickering indicates status information being received from DADF Lit indicates that MEM_RDY signal is active Lit indicates that reset line from IOT is active Not lit when CPU firmware operating correctly
Network/connecTCP/IP connectivtivity Software, part ity and SMB test 1 using Ping functionality Network/connecNetware connectivity Software, part tivity using Get2 NearestServer functionality Network/connecAppletalk connectivity Software, part tivity using Get3 MyZone functionality
Table 3 Memory System PWBA LEDs LED CR1 CR2 CR3 CR3 Color Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Signal POWER IPSPSI/IPS-PS CPE_PS/CMMPS(B) CMMPSG/CMMPS(G) Comment Indicates +3.3 VDC is present on the PWBA Page Sync signal from POST to MEMORY, lit when signal is active Output Page Sync signal from CMM1 (blue), Lit when signal is active. Output Page Sync signal from CMM2 (green), Lit when signal is active.
1/05 10-41
Self-test, PWBA LEDs
Table 3 Memory System PWBA LEDs LED CR4 CR5 CR6 CR7 Color Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Signal CMMPSR/CMMPS(R) IIT-PS/IITPSI nMEMRDYd/ nMEMRDY DRRE Comment Output Page Sync signal from CMM3 (red), Lit when signal is active Page Sync signal from Pre-IPS to memory. Lit when signal is active. Lit indicates that memory can be written to. Lit indicates that memory can be red from LED Color LED Color
Table 6 IDFE Print Server LEDs Signal Link Activity Comment Indicates integrity of Ethernet connection Indicates activity on the Ethernet connection
Table 7 IDFE BNC Transceiver LEDs Signal Link Activity Comment Indicates integrity of Ethernet connection Indicates activity on the Ethernet connection
Table 4 Post-IPS PWBA LEDs LED CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 CR6 CR7 CR8 CR9 CR10 CR11 CR12 CR13 CR14 Color Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Signal /IPSRST /LIPS-STAT /IPS-CON /LIOTEPS1 /LIOT\PS0 LSFMSP0 LED0, TIOCA3 LED1, TIOCB3 LED2, TIOCC3 LED3, TIOCD3, LED4, TIOCA4 LED5, TIOCB4 LED6, TIOCA5 LED7, TIOCB5 Comment IPS Reset from IOT CPU PWBA From Post-IPS PWBA CPU; Status output to IOT CPU PWBA Control input from IOT CPU PWBA; after buffer Page Sync from IOT CPU PWB to Post-IPS PWBA. Lit when signal is active. Page Sync from Post-IPS PWBA to IOT CPU PWBA Output Page Sync signal from SFM1 ASIC. Lit when signal is active. From Post-IPS PWBA CPU From Post-IPS PWBA CPU From Post-IPS PWBA CPU From Post-IPS PWBA CPU From Post-IPS PWBA CPU From Post-IPS PWBA CPU From Post-IPS PWBA CPU From Post-IPS PWBA CPU LED CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 Color Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Signal
Table 8 Edit PWBA LEDs Comment Indicates presence of +3.3 VDC to PWBA Indicates presence of +5 VDC to PWBA Page Sync signal from Post-IPS PWBA to Edit PWBA Page Sync signal from Edit PWBA to PostIPS PWBA +3.3 VDC +5 VDC CPE_PS PS0
Table 5 IDFE Motherboard LEDs LED Color Signal Power Link Activity Failure Comment Indicates DC power available to Motherboard Indicates integrity of Ethernet connection Indicates activity on the Ethernet connection Software controlled with various patterns; indicates fault detection Drente software boot-up sequence test Software controlled with stable pattern; indicates proper operation of software <To Be Green Supplied> <To Be Green Supplied> Yellow Red
Yellow
Heartbeat
PWBA LEDs
1/05 10-42
PWBA Test Points

As shown in Table 1 and Table 2, some of the PWBAs contain test points which can be monitored. Table 1 IOT CPU PWBA Test Points Test Point TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP15 TP16 TP17 TP18 TP19 TP20 TP21 TP22 TP23 TP24 TP25 TP26 Level TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL +5V DC TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL TTL 0V +5V DC ---TTL TTL 0V Comment Send data to PWS Receive data from PWS Send data to IIT Send to EPSV (FX only) Send to Tray 6 (HCF) Send to Decurler Receive from IIT Receive from IPS Receive from UI Receive from EMB Scan Power Input Receive from EMB Print Receive from Dual Device Interface (DDI) Scan Receive from DDI Print Send to DDI Print Send to DDI Scan Send to EMB Print Send to EMB Scan Ground Power Input Not Used Send to UI Send to IPS Ground Test Point TP11 TP12 TP13 TP14 TP15 TP16 TP17 TP18 TP19 TP20 TP21 TP22 TP23 TP24 TP26 TP27 TP28
Table 2 IOT Drive PWBA Test Points Level +5VDC Ground Ground +5VDC 0 to +5VDC 0 to +5VDC +12VDC +24VDC 0 to +5VDC 0 to +5VDC 0 to +5VDC TTL 0 to +5 VDC 0 to +15 VDC 0 to +5VDC 0 to +5VDC +24VDC Comment IC Supply Voltage IC Supply Ground IC Supply Ground IC Supply Voltage HR_Cont_Sys From Fuser E_HR_Cont_Sys Supply Input Interlocked Supply Input PR_Cont_Sys ADC_SNR_VP ADC_SNR_V_DIF ADC_LED_ON DTS_DC_V_MONI 2BTR_V_MONI Pre Reg1 Snr Reg1 Snr Supply Input
Table 2 IOT Drive PWBA Test Points Test Point TP1 TP2 TP3 TP5 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Level +5VDC TTL TTL 0 to +5VDC 0 to +5VDC 0 to +5VDC 0 to +5VDC Ground -12VDC Comment VAREF /Fuser On PCC_AC_PWH PR_DH_Sys, From Fuser Sys_Ext_H/R_Cont From Fuser Temp_Air_Therm1 HR_On_Sys From Fuser 12V Return Supply Input Principles of Operation
1/05 10-43
PWBA Test Points
Copier Timing
The main machine timing signal is the Transfer Roll Zero (TR0) Signal. This signal is used to synchronize the various steps of the process to correctly position the image on the output media. TR0 is produced when the leading edge of a timing strip across the Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) Belt passes over the TR0 sensor. The IBT has two timing patches which are separated by one-half of the IBT circumference. Since the IBT has a circumference of the IBT is 527.81 mm, this means that the two timing patches are 263.905 mm apart. Therefore, an 8-1/2 x 11 or A4 sheet (or smaller) will fit LEF on the IBT between the timing patches and two sheets will fit on the entire IBT. An 11 x 17, 12x18 or A3 sheet will fit SEF on the entire IBT, across one of the patches. In addition, the Drum Motor includes an encoder which outputs one pulse per revolution to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. This is used for motor speed control rather than as a paper transport timing reference. The Interval between TR0 pulses and the frequency of the Drum Motor output pulses depends on the process speed. The process speed depends, in turn, on the type of media being used for the copies. The following Table shows the correlation between these three factors. Table 1 Copy Input Media, Process Speed and TR0 Interval Input Media Extra Heavy Weight 164-250 gsm paper 90-140 lb index 90 lb cover Transparencies Heavy Weight 106-163 gsm paper 28-90 lb index Normal less than 105 gsm paper less than 28 lb index Process Speed 59.82 mm/sec Motor Clock Pulse Frequency 544.0 Hz TR0 Interval 4.412 sec
129.68 mm/sec
1179.4 Hz
2.035 sec
219.47 mm/sec
1996.0 Hz
1.202 sec
Transparency material must be inserted in Tray 5 and can be detected automatically. For other media, the user must manually enter its weight at the start of a job. Therefore, the machine knows the paper copy weight of the start of a job and adjusts the process speed accordingly. The default value is paper less than 105 gsm or 28 lb. Therefore, the default process speed is 220 mm/sec.
Copier Timing
1/05 10-44
Job Control
The User Interface (UI) PWBA provides overall job control through communications with the IOT CPU PWBA. The TR0 signal controls the timing of the job control sequence.
Job Control Sequence

This machine is capable of a large variety of job control sequences, depending on how it is being used: Is the task a print job from the DFE or a copy job from the Platen? Is the output sheet size larger than 8.5 X 11 and A4? Is the output simplex or duplex? Does the output include color? Does the unit include a DADF? Is its automatic feed function being used? Does the unit include an output Mailbox/Sorter option? Does the unit include an OCT option?
These factors can be mixed in any combination. Figure 1 shows the job control sequence when using the machine as a Printer accessed from the DFE. This figure shows decisions for: Small prints (8.5 x 11/A4 and smaller) vs. larger sheets Color vs. black and white images. Note that this decision is made on a sheet by sheet basis, not for the entire print job Simplex vs. duplex operation
This figure ignores Mailbox/Sorter and OCT operation. Figure 2 shows the job control sequence shows decisions for print size and color/B&W operation. This figure ignores the simplex/duplex output decision, Mailbox/Sorter operation and OCT operation. Figure 3 shows the job control sequence with originals placed in the DADF. Like Figure 2, this figure shows the job control sequence making decisions for print size and color/B&W operation. However, it ignores the simplex/duplex output decision, Mailbox/Sorter operation and OCT operation.
1/05 10-45
Job Control
Figure 1 Machine as a Printer: Print Simplified Job Control Sequence
Job Control
1/05 10-46
Figure 2 Machine as a Copier: Copy Simplified Job Control Sequence - Original on Platen
1/05 10-47
Job Control
Figure 3 Machine as a Copier with DADF: Copy Simplified Job Control Sequence - Originals in DADF
Job Control
1/05 10-48
Digital Front End

The DFE includes the hardware and software which permits the machine to function as an Internet server. In this capacity, the machine can be used as a 400 dpi color scanner or 600 dpi color printer using a variety of software. Refer to Chapter 12, which describes the IDFE in detail.
Foreign Interface
The following Figure 1 shows the Foreign Interface permits connection of external accessories. These accessories include a Copylyzer, Coin Operation Unit, Xerox Card unit, Foot Switch and/or a Key Switch.
Figure 1 Foreign Interface Simplified Block Diagram
1/05 10-49
Digital Front End, Foreign Interface
Digital Front End, Foreign Interface
1/05 10-50
Overview
The Start Power Chain comprises the Main Motor and Drum Motor, their control circuitry and their mechanical drive systems. The Start Power Chain is activated when the user presses the Start button on the User Interface with the machine powered.
Main Motor
The Main Motor is a multispeed motor whose speed is controlled by a clock signal from the IOT CPU PWBA. As shown in Figure 1, the Main Motor drives the following machine elements: The Mag Roller, the Auger, and the Pickoff Roll (BPO) in the Developer Subsystem The Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) Cleaner Cam and the IBT Cleaner Auger The IBT Second Bias Transfer Roller (BTR) The Waste Toner Auger, the Waste Toner Bottle Entrance Auger and the Toner Bottle The Photoreceptor (PR) Drum Brush, the PR Drum Cleaner Auger Rear and the PR Drum Cleaner Auger Front MAIN MOTOR
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE BELT (1 OF 2)
Figure 1 Main Motor Location and Mechanical Drive System The Main Motor operates at three speeds, depending on the type of blank media being processed. Motor speed is controlled by the IOT CPUIOT CPU PWBA which uses its address and data buses to write control data to decoder circuitry on the IOT Drive PWBA. Motor speed is controlled by the IOT CPU PWBA which uses its address and data buses to write control data to decoder circuitry on the IOT Drive PWBA. As shown in Figure 2, the individual outputs from the decoders are sent through drivers to the motor. Table 2 shows the Main Motor operating states resulting from various combinations of control lines.
1/05 10-51
Overview, Main Motor
Figure 2 Main Motor Control Circuit Table 1 Main Motor Control Lines and Condition On 0 1 1 1 1 Sel 1 X 0 0 1 1 Sel 2 X 0 1 0 1 CLK N/A 545.37 Hz N/A 1182.31 Hz 2000.8 Hz Main Motor Operating Condition Motor Off 59.82 mm/sec process speed Not used 130 mm/sec process speed 219.47 mm/sec process speed
Drum Motor
The Drum Motor is a clock-controlled multispeed device which can operate at three different speeds, as shown in Table 2. Also like the Main Motor, the Photoreceptor Motor is controlled by the IOT CPU PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA. The Photoreceptor Motor includes two additional connections: BRAKE ON and ENC A. Figure 1 shows the control and power lines going to the Drum Motor, and Figure 2 shows the motors location.
Main Motor, Drum Motor
1/05 10-52
Figure 1 Photoreceptor Motor Control Circuit Table 1 Photoreceptor Motor Control Lines and Condition On Gain 1 Gain 2 CLK 0 1 1 1 1 X 0 0 1 1 X 0 1 0 1 N/A 544.0 Hz N/A 1179.4 Hz 1996.0 Hz Brake X 1 1 1 1 0 1179.4 1996.0 0 Hz ENC A 0 Hz 544.0 Main Motor Operating Condition Motor Off 59.82 mm/sec process speed Not used 129.68 mm/sec process speed 219.47 mm/sec process speed Locked
The Photoreceptor Motor drives the Photoreceptor Drum and the IBT Drive Roll.
1/05 10-53
Drum Motor
PHOTORECEPTOR DRUM DRIVESHAFT END
PHOTORECEPTOR DRUM MOTOR
Figure 2 Photoreceptor Motor Location and Mechanical Drive System
Drum Motor
1/05 10-54
Overview
This chapter describes the electrical and mechanical components of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). The DADF performs these primary functions: Automatically feeds a document or a stack of documents, one at a time, from an Input Tray onto the Platen Glass of the machine for copying. Deskews the document before copying. Aligns the document onto the Platen Glass for proper copier registration. Automatically inverts (turns over) a two-sided document, deskews, and registers it onto the Platen Glass for copying the second side of the document. Automatically stacks the documents that have been copied onto an Output Tray. A user selected option allows two-sided documents to be re-inverted (turned over again) for proper stacking onto the DADF Output Tray.
The original documents are placed face up onto the Input Tray. The documents are fed from the top of the stack into the DADF. A Nudger Roll supplies the top sheet to the nip of the Feed and Retard Roll. The Feed Roll transports the document sheet to the Registration Roll. The DADF temporarily stalls the Registration Roll to deskew the document before sending it to the Platen Belt. The Platen Belt, driven by a Belt Motor, positions the document on the Platen Glass. For one-sided documents, the Platen Belt moves each document to the Output Tray when scanning is complete. For two-sided documents, each document is routed through an invert path, then scanned again. Depending on a user selection, the document can be again routed through the invert path to preserve original order stacking after scanning. Regardless of what has proceeded, the document is ultimately routed to the Output Tray by the Platen Belt and Exit rolls. Refer to DADF Document Transport and Inverting Documentation for additional information. The DADF can automatically sense the document size. This is done by: Two Size Sensors in the DADF read front to back dimensions (feed width) A pulse count of the Belt Motor while the Registration sensor is blocked and reads the (run) length dimension
This chapter will cover the following: Overview Electrical Power DADF System Control DADF Document Transport DADF Operation
The DADF has two operator selectable modes: Same Size Mode is used when all documents are of the same size. This mode provides the highest productivity, since the copier does not slow down to detect the size of each document. Mixed Size Mode is used when documents of different sizes are placed in the DADF. The copier automatically detects the size of each document as it is fed onto the Platen Glass.
Figure 1 shows the DADF. DADF INPUT TRAY
When either of these modes are selected, they will be applied to all the documents in the stack. Refer to DADF Document Size Sensing for more information on this function.
DADF OUTPUT TRAY
Figure 1 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
1/05 10-55
Overview
Electrical Power
All electrical components in the DADF operate on +5 VDC or +24 VDC power supplied by the IIT/IPS LVPS. Figure 1 shows the location of the power supply. The +24 VDC power for the Exit and Belt Motors is routed through individual fuses on the DADF Control PWBA.
IIT/IPS LVPS
Figure 1 IIT/IPS LVPS
Electrical Power
1/05 10-56
DADF System Control

The DADF Control PWB monitors the status and controls the operation of the DADF. The DADF Control PWBA also accepts commands from the Pre-IPS PWBA and provides it with status information, such as DADF Belt Motor status and a Document Ready signal. However, the Pre-IPS is itself partially controlled by the IOT CPU PWBA (via the Post-IPS PWBA). Therefore, DADF control is ultimately a shared function of these three PWBAs. Command and status communication with the DADF uses a bidirectional serial communications port. Refer to Figure 1 for a DADF simplified block diagram and Figure 2 for the communication links between the DADF and the machine.
1/05 10-57
DADF System Control
Figure 1 DADF Control Simplified Block Diagram
DADF System Control
1/05 10-58
DADF Document Transport

The DADF feeds the documents in the Input Tray Assembly from the top of the stack. For single-sided document copying, the following process is used: 1. 2. 3. The document is transported from the Input Tray onto the Platen Glass. The downward facing side of the document is scanned. The document is transported to the Output Tray
For two-sided copying, additional steps are required. 1. 2. 3. Figure 2 DADF Simplified Control Communications Path The DADF Control PWBA includes several LEDs to rapidly determine the status of selected signals. Table 1 lists these LEDs. Table 1 DADF Control PWBA LEDs LED CR2 CR3 CR4 CR5 Color Green Signal RXD /Reset +5 VDC +24 VDC Comment Flickering indicated serial data from Pre-IPS PWBA Lit when DADF Control PWBA CPU is being reset Lit when +5 VDC present Lit when +24 VDC present 50 sheets of 38-100 gsm (10-24 lb.) 40 sheet of 101-128 gsm (24-30 lb.) 4. 5. 6. The document is transported from the Input Tray onto the Platen Glass. Side one is scanned The document is transported through an inverter paper path within the DADF and back to the Platen Glass for copying the second side. Side two is scanned When selected by the user, the document may again be sent through the inverter and again placed on the Platen Glass. This preserves the original order of the documents. The document is transported to the Output Tray.
To load the Input Tray, the user positions the document by placing its left side against the raised Entrance Gate. The back edge of the document is placed against the Back Guide of the Input Tray. The DADF can automatically feed up to 40 copies/minute (A4 or 8.5x11 LEF) onto the Platen Glass for copying. The Input Tray capacity is:
DADF and IIT Interaction

The DADF detects the size of each original document while the document is fed from the input tray onto the platen glass. The Fast Scan or Y dimension is determined by two size sensors just before the Registration Roll in the paper feed path. The Slow Scan or X dimension is determined by measuring the length of time that Registration Sensor is blocked for a known transport speed. These dimensions are passed from the DADF Control PWBA to the Pre-IPS PWBA using their serial communications link. The Pre-IPS PWBA compares these values with the contents of a lookup table in its NVM. This measurement technique reduces the delay between the documents arrival on the platen glass and the start of document scanning.
The document weight range for duplex copying from the DADF is 50 - 110 gsm (13-28 lb.). This is because the DADF has a sharp turn in the inverter paper path.
Document Feeding Components

Figure 1 shows the document transport components of the DADF. Figure 2 shows the locations of the sensors.
1/05 10-59
DADF System Control, DADF Document Transport
Drive Motors Upper Duplex Roll Feed Roll Retard Roll Nudger Roll Exit Roll Motor Feed Motor + 24 VDC Belt Motor +24 VDC Stepper Bi-directional Table 1 DADF Motor Driven Rolls Rolls Nudger Roll (cw) Feed Roll (cw) Registration Rolls Belt Drive Rolls Lower Duplex Roll Transport Speed (Forward - ccw) 223.9 mm/sec 268.7 mm/sec 810.6 mm/sec 806.0 mm/sec 873.7 mm/sec 671.7 mm/sec 873.7 mm/sec when re-inverting for exit stacking only 671.7 mm/sec 873.7 mm/sec when re-inverting for exit stacking only 840.2 mm/sec Transport Speed (Reverse - cw)
Belt Idler Roll Belt Drive Roll Registration Roll Registration Pinch Roll Lower Duplex Roll Figure 1 DADF Drive Component Locations Feed Motor SIZE SENSORS (F and R) TOP COVER INTERLOCK SWITCHES (F and R) Exit Motor +24 VDC Stepper Exit Rolls Pinch Rolls Upper Duplex Rolls
The Feed Motor is controlled by the DADF Control PWBA and turns the Nudger and Feed Rolls. The Nudger Rolls feeds the top sheet into the nip of the Feed and Retard Roll. The Feed Roll turns against the Retard Roll, which drags against sheets below the top and prevents prevent multiple sheet feeds. The Feed Motor is energized 200 msec. after the user presses the Start Button. The Feed Roll takes the top document in the stack and transports it into the nip of the stationary Registration Rolls. The Feed Motor deenergizes 50 msec.after the trailing edge of the document passes the Registration Sensor. The DADF Control PWBA does not energize the DADF Feed Motor unless the following safety interlock switches are closed: The Platen Interlock is closed by lowering the DADF onto the Platen Glass. Two Top Cover Interlocks are closed by closing the top cover on the left side of the DADF.
DUPLEX SENSOR
DOCUMENT SENSOR
REGISTRATION SENSOR
DADF OPENSWITCH (R)
EXIT SENSOR
Belt Motor Drive Figure 2 DADF Sensor Locations The DADF Belt Motor is a +24 VDC, bidirectional stepper motor. This motor drives these rollers: Principles of Operation Registration Roll Belt Roll Lower Duplex Roll Upper Duplex Roll Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 10-60
Table 1 shows the speed and direction of the rollers driven by the DADF Belt Motor drive. The DADF Belt Motor operates in the forward direction when moving documents from the Input Tray Assembly to the Platen Glass, and when moving documents from the Platen Glass to the Output Tray. The Belt Motor moves in the reverse direction to turn over the document for copying the second side, and for re-inverting the document for correct order stacking in the Output Tray. Refer to Inverting Documentation for more information on this function.
A description of these sensors follows: Document Set Sensor - When a document is loaded into the Input Tray, it pushes a lever causing a flag to block this sensor. This signal is sent to the DADF Control PWB. Size Sensors (2) - These are reflective Optical Sensors that sense the document length of the leading edge. See DADF Document Size Sensing for more information on this function. Registration Sensor - This is a reflective Optical Sensor that is before the Registration Roll. It is used to sense misfeeds from the Input Tray and to start the time sequence for deenergizing the Feed Motor and energizing the Belt Motor. This sensor also is used to determine the documents transport run length. This is calculated by multiplying the length of time that the sensor is blocked by the transport speed of the DADF. Duplex Sensor - This is a reflective Optical Sensor in the inverter paper path the senses paper jams. Exit Sensor - This is a reflective Optical Sensor that is used to verify documents exit to the Output Tray, indicate paper jams, signal the DADF PWB to deenergize the Exit Motor and to energize the Set Gate Solenoid to raise the Set Gate.
Refer to Figure 2 for more information on the use of sensors for DADF control.
Document Feeding Control

The document is fed from the top of the stack. The feed edge of the document is placed against the Entrance Gate in the Input Tray Assembly. The Entrance Gate is in the raised position when no documents are covering the Document Set Sensor, and the front and rear Top Cover Interlocks are both closed. When the Document Sensor senses a document in the DADF Input Tray Assembly and after the user presses the machines Start button, the Entrance Gate Solenoid drops the Entrance Gate so that the document can be fed into the DADF.
DADF Document Size Sensing

The document length (transport dimension) is measured by the DADF Control PWBA counting the number of Belt Motor pulses while the document passes the Registration Sensor. The width of the document is determined by the Front and Rear DADF Size Sensors. The Rear (#1) DADF Size Sensor is positioned 226 mm from the rear guide of the Input Tray Assembly. The Front (#2) DADF Size Sensor is positioned 287 mm from the rear guide of the Input Tray Assembly. Table 2 lists the states of these two sensors for the different sizes of documents. Table 2 DADF Document Size Sensing Document Size (in) A4 SEF B5 SEF A5 SEF A5 LEF 8.5x14 SEF (Regal) Length of DADF Rear (#1) DADF Front (#2) detected Original Length of (mm) Sensor Sensor Original (mm) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 240.14 200.14 153.14 91.14 298.74 297 257 210 148 355.6
Figure 3 Belt Motor Drive Rotation Exit Motor The Exit Motor is a +24 VDC stepper motor that drives the Exit Roll. The Exit Motor is energized when each document has been scanned and the document is not being routed through the invert path. Its run duration depends on the document run length dimension. The DADF Control PWBA provides drive to the Exit Motor in intermittent pulses. This technique is used to help conserve energy consumption in the machine. An Exit Senor senses the document trailing edge and this signal is sent to the DADF Control PWB. This signal deenergizes the Exit Motor. Refer to Figure 1 for more information on the timing of the DADF motors. DADF Sensors The DADF uses six sensors for detecting document transport and document size. Refer to Figure 2 for more information on the DADF sensor timing. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 10-61
Table 2 DADF Document Size Sensing Document Size (in) 8.5x11 SEF (letter) 8 x10.5 SEF 8x10 SEF 8.5x13 SEF 8.5x12.4 SEF 5.5X8.5 11X17 SEF 11X14.9 SEF B4 SEF 8.5X11 LEF (letter) 8.5X11 LEF 8X10.5 LEF 8X10 LEF B5 LEF A3 SEF A4 LEF Length of DADF Rear (#1) DADF Front (#2) detected Original Length of Sensor Sensor (mm) Original (mm) OFF OFF 197.14~222.54 254~279.4
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
258.1~273.34 82.84 321.6~374.94 307.14 159.04 146.34~159.04
314.96~330.2 139.7 378.46~431.8 364 215.9 203.2~215.9
ON ON ON
OFF 0N ON
125.14 363.14 153.14
182 420 210
There are two possible document path faults that can be determined by the size sensing system. The following message is displayed by the IOT. The Document Feeder has a failure. This message is displayed when: The Front and Rear Size Sensors detect a document and the DADF is not in use. The Front and Rear Size Sensor detects a document, but the Registration Sensor does not detect a document.
1/05 10-62
DADF Operation
Document Loading
The operator loads the original documents face up into the Input Tray Assembly. The operator aligns one edge against the Rear Paper Guide and moves the documents to the left until the documents stop against the Entrance Gate. Entrance Gate and Entrance Gate Solenoid The Entrance Gate is raised and lowered by a Entrance Gate Solenoid. The Entrance Gate is in the raised position for any of the following conditions: There are no documents covering the Document Set Sensor and the trailing edge of the last document passes the DADF Exit Sensor from this or a previous job. The copier machine runs through the Start Power procedure.
The DADF Document Set Sensor senses when documents are loaded into the Input Tray Assembly. A green arrow appears in the LED window at the top back cover of the DADF to indicate proper document loading of the DADF. When the Entrance Gate is in the raised (up) position, it also holds up the Nudger Roll so that documents can be loaded into the Tray. When the Start Button is pressed on the machine, the Entrance Gate Solenoid energizes downward for 300 ms, and the solenoid magnetically latches in that position. In this position, the solenoid holds the Entrance Gate down, allowing documents to be fed past the Gate. This Gate remains down for the entire copy job. After the last document has passed the DADF Exit Sensor, the DADF Control PWBA energizes the Entrance Gate Solenoid in the up direction, causing it to release the Entrance Gate. The solenoid latches in the up position. Refer to Figure 1 for more information on DADF operation timing.
1/05 10-63
DADF Operation
Figure 1 DADF Timing Sequence Principles of Operation Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
DADF Operation
1/05 10-64
Prefeed and Feed operation

The document Prefeed and Feed operation is activated when the Start Button is pressed. This energizes the Feed Motor, which drives both the Nudger Roll and Feed Roll. The Nudger Roll feeds the top document into the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. The Feed Roll transports the document, one sheet at a time, into the DADF. The Feed Rolls work against friction Retard Rolls to assure single feed operation. Two-sided documents are routed through the DADF differently than single sided documents: For single sided documents, the new document sheet is not fed from the Input Tray Assembly until the current document sheet passes and clears the DADF Registration Sensor. For two-sided documents, the new document sheet is not fed from the Input Tray Assembly until the current document sheet has been inverted through the DADF inverter path and clears the DADF Registration Sensor a second time. For two-sided documents to be re-inverted, the new document sheet is not fed from the Input Tray Assembly until the current document sheet has been sent through the DADF inverter path a second time, and it passes and clears the Registration Sensor for a third time.
#2 Duplex Roll (one-way clutch)
The Belt Motor operates in one direction during document feed, registration, transport to the Platen Glass and document exit. The Belt Motor reverses direction when inverting the document. There are two steps used in the DADF to register the document: The document is first de-skewed at the Registration Rollers. The document is registered on the Platen Glass by the Platen Belt.
Registration Roll and Registration Pinch Roll The Belt Motor drives the Registration Roll through a belt. The Registration Roll uses a oneway clutch and rotates forward only when the Belt Motor is rotating in the forward direction. The Registration Roll creates a nip with the Registration Pinch Roll. The Belt Motor is deenergized and the Registration Roll is stationary when the lead edge of the document enters the registration nip. The Feed Motor continues to drive the document for 50 msec to de-skew the lead edge of the documentation against the Registration Roller nip. Then, the Belt Motor turns the Registration Roll and transports the document to the Platen Belt. Platen Belt and Belt Roll The Belt Motor drives the Belt Roll through a belt. The Belt Roll moves the Platen Belt, transporting the document onto and across the Platen Glass. The Belt Motor pulses for 51 counts after the trailing edge of the document passes the Registration Sensor. This positions the document onto the Platen Glass for copying. For single sided documents: Immediately after the document has been scanned by the copier, the Belt Motor energizes in the forward direction. This moves the copied document off the Platen Glass and feeds the next document to be copied from the Registration Roll onto the Platen Glass. Again, the Belt Motor pulses for 51 counts to register the second document to be copied onto the Platen Glass. For two sided documents: See Inverting Documentation
Nudger Roll When the Entrance Gate is in the up position, it holds the Nudger Roll up so that documents can be loaded into the Input Tray. When the Start Button is pushed on the copier machine, the Entrance Gate drops. This allows the Nudger Roll to drop onto the top copy of the documentation and feed a sheet into the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. The Feed Motor drives the Nudger Roll through a belt drive, and operate in one direction using internal one-way clutches. Feed Roll The Feed Motor drives the Feed Rolls through a belt. The Feed Rolls rotate in only one direction, using a one-way internal clutch. The Feed Roll transports the document from the Input Tray Assembly, past the Registration Sensor and into the nip of stationary Registration Rolls. The Feed Motor deenergizes 50 msec after the Registration Senor senses the lead edge of the document. The document being fed by the Feed Roll into the stationary Registration Rolls deskews the document. Retard Roll The Retard Roll is not motor driven. This roll uses internal one-way clutches to provide the needed friction resistance for single sheet feed operation. A spring lever rests against surface of the Retard Roll inside the mounting assembly. The lever rotates the Retard Roll a small amount each time the Retard Roll is pushed down and released by a passing document. This movement prevents uneven wear around the Retard Rolls. (verify!)
Inverting Documentation
The DADF can automatically turn over two sided documents to copy both sides. Belt Motor Reversing The DADF uses a bi-directional stepper Belt Motor to invert the documents. For two-sided document handling, the Belt Motor first energizes in the forward direction (ccw when viewed from the machine front) to feed the top, or side one, of the document onto the Platen Glass for copying. After side one has been copied, the Belt Motor reverses direction. This causes the Platen Belt to run in reverse direction, transporting this original document from the Platen Glass into the inverter path. See Figure 3 concerning the assemblies driven by the Belt Motor in forward and reverse directions. The Lower and Upper Duplex Rollers are driven through one-way clutches. They activate only when the Belt Motor is energized in the reverse (cw) direction. The Lower and Upper Duplex Rolls turn over the document so that side two will face the Platen Glass for copying.
Registration System
The DADF Belt Motor drives the registration system. This bi-directional stepper motor uses a belt drive to power the following rollers: Registration Roll (one-way clutch) Belt Roll (bi-directional) #1 Duplex Roll (one-way clutch)
1/05 10-65
DADF Operation
As the document comes out of the inverter path, the lead edge passes the Registration Sensor and enters the nip of the stationary Registration Roller for deskewing. 50 msec after the lead edge passes the Registration Sensor, the Belt Motor deenergizes for 200 msec. The Belt Motor then energizes in the forward (ccw) direction. This activates the Registration Roll in the forward direction which transports the inverted document to the forward running Platen Belt. Side two of the document is then registered onto the Platen Glass for copying. The user has the option to re-invert the duplex document, so that side one is stacked face down on the Output Tray. This is initiated after the second side has been copied. The Belt Motor reverses direction again to transport the document back through the inverter path. Coming out of the inverter path, the document delays at the Registration Roll, primarily so the Belt Motor can change back to the forward direction. The document is then transported through the Registration Roll, across the Platen Glass and to the Exit Rolls. The speed through the inverter path and across the Platen Glass is increased for this inversion process. Registration Gate Solenoid The Registration Gate on the copier by the Platen Glass must be lowered at the start of the inversion cycle, so the document can enter the inverter path as the Platen Belt reverses for duplex copying. This is accomplished by activating a Registration Solenoid in the DADF. This solenoid presses down on the gate any time the Platen Belt is in reverse. When the Belt Motor changes to a forward direction, the Solenoid deenergizes. This permits springs to raise the Registration Edge. Inverter Drive Rollers The DADF Lower and Upper Duplex Roll transport the document as it travels through the DADF Inverter Paper Path. Because of their one-way clutches, the rolls are driven only when the Belt Motor energized in the reverse (cw) direction. A belt connects the motor to the rolls.
Exit System
Documents are moved to the Output Tray by a the Exit Roll. This is a +24 VDC stepper motor, which is pulsed conserve energy. The Exit Motor is controlled by the DADF Control PWBA, when it is informed by the Pre-IPS PWBA that the page has been scanned. When the Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the document, the DADF Control PWBA begins counting Exit Motor pulses. The Exit Motor continues running until an adequate number of pulses has been counted. The exact number depends on the run dimension of the document, as determined while the document was being fed onto the Platen. After the document has been removed from the Platen, the Exit Motor is deenergized.
DADF Operation
1/05 10-66
Overview
This machine performs three possible functions: scanning, printing and copying. As shown in Figure 1, the sources of the image and its processing paths are different, although several assemblies are used by more than one function. Figure 2, Figure 3 and Figure 1 show the locations of some of the assemblies related to image processing. As shown in Figure 1, imaging includes the following subsystems: 1. 2. 3. The Image Input Terminal (IIT) senses the image, converts it to a digital format and compensates for differences in original document attributes. The Image Processing System (IPS) converts between color spaces, provides for image editing and converts the signal from 400 dpi to 600 dpi. The Image Source Selector (ISS) permits a Digital Front End (DFE) to provide a print image to the following subsystems or the preceding subsystems to provide a scanned image to the DFE. The IOT Image Processing subsystem selects between inputs from the DFE and the preliminary IPS, converts the image from digital form to analog form and provides the analog signal to the Laser Diode Driver (LDD). The Image Output subsystem accepts the analog drive signal and uses it to modulate the Raster Output Scanner (ROS).
4.
5.
The machine can have two possible configurations: Digital Copier (DC) or Copier Printer (CP). These correlate to functions and assemblies as shown in Table 1. The DC configuration cannot perform either scanning or printing because it lacks a DFE.
1/05 10-67
Overview
Figure 1 Imaging Simplified Signal Flow Diagram
Overview
1/05 10-68
A separate IIT/IPS Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) supplies all of the preliminary IPS assemblies, the Pre-IPS PWBA in the IIT and most of the image scanning assemblies and circuitry. However, the Xenon Lamp which illuminates original document is powered by a dedicated power supply.
LASER DIODE DRIVE PWBA
POST-IPS PWBA
IIT/IPS LVPS
VSEL EXTENSION PWBA RASTER OUTPUT SCANNER (ROS) VIDEO SELECT (VSEL) PWBA (TOP LAYER) HALFTONE PWBA (BOTTOM LAYER)
PRE-IPS PWBA (TOP LAYER) MEMORY PWBAS (MIDDLE LAYER) MEMORY SYSTEM PWBA (BOTTOM LAYER) BR PWBA (TOP LAYER)
Figure 3 IPS Major Assemblies Locations (Below IIT/IPS Tray) Table 1 Machine Configuration vs. Included Imaging Functions and Assemblies Configuration Digital Copier Included Imaging Functions Copying Included Imaging Assemblies Scanning Assemblies and Circuits, PreIPS PWBA, Memory PWBA, Post-IPS PWBA, VSEL PWBA, Halftone PWBA, LDD PWBA, ROS
Figure 2 IIT and IPS Major Assemblies Locations (IIT/IPS Tray)
Copier/Printer
Scanning, Printing and Copy- Same as Copier Only ing
1/05 10-69
Overview
Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Configuration)

The image sensing components are shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3.
XENON LAMP HALR-RATE CARRIAGE
FULL-RATE CARRIAGE CARRIAGE MOTOR
MOTOR/ LAMP/FAN DRIVE PWBA
CCD LENS CCD ARRAY
Figure 1 Scanning Optical System Mechanical Components Locations
Figure 2 Motor/Lamp/Fan Drive PWBA Location
Xenon Lamp and Drive Circuitry

A Xenon Lamp (Figure 1) is used in this machine as a means of reducing heat. Unlike incandescent Lamps, including quartz Lamps, the illumination of Xenon Lamp is not continuous It varies directly with the instantaneous voltage of the driving signal. This is similar to fluorescent bulbs and means that if the driving signal is AC (Alternating Current), the bulb emits no light when the instantaneous voltage is zero. If the bulb drive frequency is 60 Hz or higher, the human eye sees this as a constant level of illumination. However, the CCDs on the CCD PWBA are fast enough to see the change in illumination caused by the AC drive signal used for the Xenon Lamp. Therefore, the CCD must capture its image when the Xenon Lamp outputs are known to be non-zero. Two techniques are used to compensate for this:
Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Con-
1/05 10-70
The Pre-IPS PWBA adjusts the effective sensitivity of the CCD so that it is the inverse of the Xenon Lamp AC drive signal.
The drive signal to the Xenon Lamp is intermittently interrupted as shown in Figure 4.
Figure 3 IIT Lamp, Motor and Fan Simplified Block Diagram
1/05 10-71
Image Sensing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer
Figure 4 Xenon Lamp Interrupted Drive Waveform
Carriage Motor and Drive

The Carriage Motor is a high-torque five-phase stepping motor driven by five magnetic control lines: A through E. These lines are +24 VDC outputs of the Motor/Fan/Lamp Driver PWBA which is under the control of the CPU on the Pre-IPS PWBA. +24 VDC is applied to all lines when the motor is locked in one position. The motor uses rubber dampers to isolate vibrations from the rest of the IIT. It also uses magnetic damping to maintain a constant speed. The motor emits a pulse ever 0.72 degrees of rotation. This is equivalent to 500 pulses per one complete motor revolution. These pulses are routed back to the Motor/Fan/Lamp Driver PWBA. This assembly uses the interval between the pulses to determine if the carriage speed is correct and the cumulative number of pulses to determine the current location of the carriage.
B is the minimum distance between the Full-Rate Carriage mirror and the top mirror on the Half-Rate Carriage. This occurs when the two carriages are at the start of their travel. During carriage travel, this distance increases to a maximum of B + 2T - T=B + T. C is the distance between the mirrors on the Half-Rate Carriage, and is constant D is the maximum distance between the bottom Half-Rate Carriage mirror and the stationary mirror in front of the CCD PWBA. This occurs when the two carriages are at the start of their travels. During carriage travel, this distance decreases to a minimum of D - T.
At the start of carriage travel, the conjugate is A + B + C + D. At the end of carriage travel, the distance is A + (B + 2T - T) + C + (D - T) = A + B + C + D.
Full and Half-Rate Carriages

The Xenon Lamp is mounted in the Full-Rate Carriage (Figure 1). Reflected light from the original document is passed via mirrors through a stationary lens to a CCD PWBA. To maintain a constant image size, the distance between the original document and CCD (known as the conjugate) must remain constant. Therefore, an additional Half-Rate Carriage, traveling at half the speed of the Full-Rate Carriage, is used. Figure 5 shows the carriages and their relative motion. T is the distance which the Half-Rate Carriage Moves 2T is the distance which the Full-Rate Carriage moves A is the distance from the original document to the mirror on the Full-Rate Carriage. This distance is constant
1/05 10-72
Figure 5 Constant Optical Path Length
CCD Color Image Sensor

The CCD Array is 3 sets of 2 rows of 500 pixels (Figure 6). Each set of pixel rows is filtered to detect a different color: red, green and blue. The two rows within each set are offset by.0025 inches (0.0635 mm), permitting the array to gather two lines of data at once. The sensor can scan a document 12.5 inches wide.
Refer to Figure 7. Each row of the array acquires its image from the original document in a parallel fashion. However, the image is retrieved serially at a 9.97 MHz rate. and passed to the Pre-IPS PWB. While an image is being shifted out, the CCD array cannot acquire another image. In addition, image acquisition takes time, reducing slightly the image line acquisition rate. However, having two CCD rows per color doubles the image line acquisition rate. Furthermore, the image acquisition line rate must be the same as the rate at which the Full-Rate Carriage sweeps the document original (225 mm/sec. [8.858 inches/second] at 100% magnification) X the desired pixel rate (400 pixels/inch or 15.748 pixels/mm). The end result is that the CCD acquires image lines, in all three colors, at a rate of 3543.3 per second.
1/05 10-73
Figure 6 CCD Color Image Sensor
Figure 7 CCD Image Data Clocking
Initialization
Initialization includes several measurements and calculations to calibrate the image scanning and processing circuits to images of known color and color purity. These include: 1. 2. Automatic Gain Control Automatic Output Control
3. 4. 5.
Shading Control White Variation Correction Automatic Density Control
1/05 10-74
Automatic Gain Control Automatic Gain Control (AGC) compensates for variations in the sensitivity of pixels in the CCD array, while the array looking at an brightly-illuminated pure-white image. During this calibration, the Full Rate Carriage is placed under the White Reference Strip, the Xenon Lamp is lit and readings are taken from all pixels in the CCD array. The most extreme (highest) value from any pixel is taken to be the correct value. A multiplier is then calculated for each remaining pixel to make its measured white value equal to this reference. During document scanning, all readings from each pixel which are above a threshold value are adjusted by this multiplier to create a corrected value. Automatic Output Control Automatic Output Control (AOC) compensates for variations in the readings between pixels in the CCD array, when looking at a black image. Immediately after the AGC readings, with the Full Rate Carriage still under the White Reference Strip, the Xenon Lamp is shut off and readings are taken from all pixels in the CCD array. The most extreme (lowest) value from any pixel is taken to be the correct value. A multiplier is calculated for each remaining pixel to make its measured black value equal to this reference. During document scanning, all readings from each pixel which are below a threshold value are adjusted by this multiplier to create a corrected value Shading Control Shading Correction compensates for the fact that the Xenon Lamp does not provide consistent illumination across its length. The ends of the Lamp are dimmer than the center. Because of this, a multiplier is calculated which is then applied to the pixels on the end. One distinct difference between Shading Correction and AGC is that readings for Shading Correction are taken in two places on the White Reference Strip. White Variation Correction White Variation Correction compensates for the fact that the White Reference Strip isnt white everywhere. In this test, a lighted reading is taken from two separate locations on the White Reference Strip. The more extreme (higher) value is taken to be correct and is used in future calculations. Automatic Density Control Automatic Density Control (ADC) is a joint function of the Imaging circuitry and the Xerographics module. It ensures that the density of the image on the copy doesnt change over time with a constant image input density
Document Size Detection NOTE: APS means Automatic Paper Sensing. SEF means Short Edge Feed. LEF means Long Edge Feed This machine determines document size by one of two methods: Through the DADF (See DADF Document size sensing) From the Platen Glass
When reading the document size from the Platen Glass, the machine does this by detecting the number of Pixels of Image Data read by the CCD Color Image Sensor (for Feed Side, FS) and the reading by the document edge (Sub-Scanning) with the Automatic Paper Sensor (APS) Sensor. Two switches are used to sense the position of the Platen Cover. A Platen Open Switch and a Platen Angle Sensor (a switch). The Platen Open Switch is in a LOW state when the Platen Cover is up off the Platen Glass and goes to a HIGH state when the Platen Cover is closed against the Platen Glass (or on the document). The Platen Angle Sensor, located by the Cover Hinge, detects the angle of the Platen Cover. As the Platen Cover is closed, (approximately <40degree angle off the Platen) the Angle Sensor energizes the Xenon Lamp. The detection of the Sub-Scanning dimension of the document is done by taking two readings with the APS Sensor. The first reading is done with the Lamp energized and the Platen Cover in an angled position (See Figure 8, Case B, not closed against the Platen Glass). The APS Sensor detects the document edge by sensing the dark background around the document. This value is stored as X1 by the Pre IPS PWBA. The second reading by the APS Sensor is done when the Platen Cover is down and the Platen Open Switch is in the HIGH state (Case C in Figure 8). The APS Sensor performs this second edge detection reading of the document and against the reflective Platen Cover. This value is stored as X2 in the Pre IPS PWBA. A comparison of the values for X1 and X2 will determine the edge for the Sub-Scanning dimension of the document. (See Figure 9.) The Feed Side dimension of the document is done by the CCD Color Imaging Sensor. This is accomplished by detecting the number of Pixels for that dimension.
Determining the Attributes of the Document Original

Certain attributes of the document originals must be determined so that machine circuits can be configured. These include: 1. 2. Document Size Detection Color Document Detection
Unlike most machines, this unit typically doesnt require a prescan to determine these attributes. They are calculated during normal machine operation
1/05 10-75
Scanning the Document

Carriage Positions Refer to Figure 10 and Figure 11. The True Registration Position is where the Full-Rate Carriage begins to scan the document original. It occurs where the REG1 Sensor detects a particular left edge on the Full-Rate Carriage. All other carriage positions are calculated relative to True Registration Position. The White Reference Position is where the CCD Array is directly under the middle 100 pixels of the White Reference Strip. For machines without a DADF, this is 20 mm to the left of the True Reference Position. For machines with a DADF, it is 62 mm to the left of the True Reference Position. The Home Position is where the Full-Rate Carriage rests after initialization and between jobs. In all machines (with and without a DADF installed), this is 30 mm to the right of True Registration Position. This location places the CCD array under the document original. Therefore, the CCD array is used to detect the Fast-Scan dimension of the original document. Figure 8 Document Size Detection with Platen Cover The Start Position is where the Full-Rate Carriage begins moving when scanning. In the interval between the Start Position and the True Registration Position, the carriage accelerates to the appropriate speed for the selected image reproduction ratio. All possible start positions are given in Table 1, and an example is shown in Figure 10 and Figure 11. Since the Full-Rate Carriage moves faster at lower magnifications, a longer acceleration distance is required and the Start Position is further from the True Registration Position. NOTE: The Scanning speed of the Full Rate Carriage/Half Rate Carriage is determined by the following formula: Scanning Speed = 225 X 100 / magnification (mm/s) for 50 - 400% magnification Scanning Speed = 225 X 100 / (Magnification X 2) (mm/s) for 2 to 49% magnification Table 1 Full-Rate Carriage Start Positions Configuration: Without DADF Without DADF With DADF With DADF Reproduction Ratio 25% to 97.1% 97.2% to 400% 25% to 97.1% 97.2% to 400% Start Position (Relative to True Registration Position) 40 mm Left 20 mm Left 35 mm Left 15 mm Left
Figure 9 Cluster Dot Screen Patterns Color Document Detection Color is detected during original scanning by examining the a* parameter for a non-zero value. is examined.
The End Position is the furthest that the Full-Rate Carriage travels when finishing a scan. The maximum possible distance between the End Position and the True Reference Position is approximately 432 mm or 17 inches. However, the Slow-Scan dimension of the document original may be less than this. (The size of the original can be detected automatically or entered manually, see Document Size Detection.) The carriages will travel no further than necessary for the originals Slow-Scan dimension.
1/05 10-76
Figure 10 Home and Start Positions of Full Range Carriage - Without DADF
Figure 11 Home and Start Positions of Full Range Carriage - With DADF
1/05 10-77
Carriage Speed Control The Carriage Motor is driven at different speeds depending on the task being performed. In addition, while scanning, the Carriage Motor speed depends on the selected magnification setting. Both the Full-Rate Carriage and the Half-Rate Carriage must be driven at faster speeds as the magnification ratios are reduced. Selected values are shown in Table 2. The forward scanning speed equals 225 mm/sec. divided by the magnification expressed in decimal form. Table 2 Full-Rate Carriage Speeds Mode of Operation Initialization Full-Rate Carriage Speed 112.5 mm/sec or 225 mm/sec
Post-Initialization AGC/AOC/Shading Operations and Carriage Motions (No DADF)

If the machine includes a Platen Cover and no DADF, the following events occur during initial calibrations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. The FRC moves from the Home Position to the White Reference Position, which is 20 mm to the left of Registration Position. The Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds. AGC readings are taken. The Xenon Lamp is shut off. AOC readings are taken. The Lamp is lit for 2 seconds The first of two readings for Shading Correction is taken. The FRC moves rightward 2 mm and takes the second Shading Correcting reading. The FRC moves leftward 2 mm and takes a White Variation Correction reading. This value is stored in the NVM.
Scanning Forward, 400% magnification 56.25 mm/sec Scanning Forward, 100% magnification 225 mm/sec Scanning Forward, 25% magnification Scanning Return, all magnifications Scan Length Control The Carriage Motor emits a pulse every 0.72 degrees of rotation (500 pulses per one complete revolution). This corresponds to 0.0761565 mm of linear travel by the Full-Rate Carriage. These pulses are routed to the Pre-IPS PWBA. Carriage position is determined by keeping track of the total number of pulses which have occurred in each direction since the last transition of the REG1 Sensor. Carriage Overrun Unlike some machine designs, this machine includes no over-limit sensors in either the forward or reverse directions. Instead, the current position of the carriages is calculated based on the REG1 Sensor transitions and Carriage Motor pulses. 900 mm/sec 675 mm/sec or 927 mm/sec
10. The Xenon Lamp is shut off and the FRC goes back to the Home Position.
Post-Initialization AGC/AOC/Shading Operations and Carriage Motions (With DADF)

If the machine includes a DADF, the following events occur during initial calibrations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. The FRC moves from the Home Position to the White Reference Position., which is 62 mm to the left of the Registration Position. The Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds. AGC readings are taken. The Xenon Lamp is shut off. AOC readings are taken. The Lamp is lit for 2 seconds The first of two readings for Shading Correction is taken. The FRC moves rightward 2 mm and takes the second Shading Correction reading. The FRC moves rightward 5 mm and a second White Variation Correction reading is taken.
Initialization Carriage Motions

Upon equipment power up or when returning from low power state, the Full-Rate Carriage (FRC) moves to its Home Position. This is 30 mm to the right of the Registration Position. The sequence of motions to get there depends entirely on where the FRC was initially. The initial position can be accurately determined by the state of the REG1 Sensor. An On state indicates the FRC is left of the Registration Position, and an Off state indicates that the FRC is right of the Registration Position. If the FRC started left of the Registration Position, it does the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. It moves rightward to a position 20 mm right of the Registration Position It waits 30 msec It moves leftward to a position 20 mm left of the Registration Position It waits 30 msec It moves rightward to the Home Position.
10. The FRC moves rightward 40 mm to a location 20 mm to the left of the True Registration Position. The first White Variation Correction reading is taken. 11. The Xenon Lamp is shut off and the FRC goes back to the Home Position.
Document Scanning Carriage Motions (Manual Document Positioning)

These events are performed whenever the user places a document on the platen manually. They occur regardless of whether a DADF is installed. However, the physical locations of the White Reference Positions and Start Scan Positions differ between units with or without a DADF. These are shown in Figure 8 and Figure 9. In both cases, however, the events are as follows: 1. The user opens the platen cover and places a document original on the platen. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
If the FRC started to the right of the Registration Position, it does the following: 1. 2. 3. It moves leftward to a position 20 mm left of the Registration Position. It waits 30 msec. It moves rightward to the Home Position.
1/05 10-78
2.
While the user lowers the platen cover, the Xenon Lamp is lit and the CCD array detects the Fast-Scan (Y or Front-Back) dimension of the original. Simultaneously, the Slow-Scan size sensors determine the left-right (or Y) dimension of the document original. The Xenon Lamp is shut off and the document original size is calculated. If the size is unrecognizable, the user is prompted to enter its size manually. The user presses the Start key on the User Interface. The FRC moves to the White Reference Position and performs additional readings calculations necessary for White Reference Correction. For magnifications between 97.2% and 400%, the FRC doesnt move; it is already at the appropriate Start Position. However, if the magnification is between 25% and 97.1%, the FRC moves leftward to a different Start Position. This permits the carriages more distance in which to accelerate. The Lamp is lit and the FRC scans at a rate determined by the magnification for a distance determined by the document originals Slow-Scan dimension. While scanning, the document original is examined for color content. The Lamp is shut off and the FRC returns to the White Reference Position. If another scan is required, then either step 6 through 9 are repeated. Additional scans may be delayed by image processing PWBAs until they are ready to receive scan data. If the time interval since the last AGC/AOC/Shading readings is less than a threshold value stored in the NVM, then the FRC moves rightward to the Home Position. If the time interval since the last AGC/AOC/Shading reading exceeds the threshold, then the Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds, and the Post-initialization Operations and Carriage Motions are repeated. At the end of these operations, the FRC goes to its Home Position.
8. 9.
The Full-Rate Carriage returns to the high magnification Start Position, 15 mm to the left of the True Reference Position. The DADF removes the current document from the platen. If there are no more documents in the DADF and the time interval since the most recent AGC/AOC/Shading readings are less than a threshold value stored in the NVM, the FRC moves to the Home Position. If there are no more documents in the DADF, but the time interval since the most recent AGC/AOC/Shading readings is greater than the threshold value, then the Xenon Lamp is lit for 2 seconds, and the Post-initialization AGC/AOC/Shading Operations and Carriage Motions are repeated. At the end of these operations, the FRC goes to its Home Position If there are more documents in the DADF, then the DADF places the new document on the platen. When a image processing PWBAs indicate that they are ready to receive scan data, the Xenon Lamp is lit and White Variation Correction is performed. Depending on the magnification rate, the FRC may remain stationary or move to the low magnification Start Position. In either case, it then scans at the rate dictated by the magnification rate.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
8. 9.
Steps 7. through 9 are repeated until the DADF Input Tray is empty.
10. The next steps depends on how long the job has taken to run.
Document Scanning Carriage Motion (DADF Document Positioning)

The events described in this subsection apply only if the document original is placed on the platen by the DADF. These events are as follows: 1. 2. The user places the originals in the DADF, and presses the Start key on the User Interface. The DADF places the first document original on the platen. While moving the document, the DADF determines the documents Slow-Scan (X or Left-Right) and Fast-Scan (Y or Front-Back) dimensions. The Xenon Lamp is lit and the FRC moves to the Start Position associated with higher magnification values. This is 15 mm to the left of True Reference Position. White Variation Correction is performed. For magnifications between 97.2% and 400%, the Full-Rate Carriage doesnt move; it is already at the appropriate Start Position. However, if the magnification is between 25% and 97.1%, the Full-Rate Carriage moves leftward 20 mm to a different Start Position. This permits the carriages more distance in which to accelerate. The Full-Rate Carriage scans at a rate determined by the magnification for a distance determined by the document originals Slow-Scan dimension. While scanning, the document original is examined for color content. The Xenon Lamp is shut off.
3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
1/05 10-79
IIT/IPS Cooling
The IIT drawer (including the carriages, lamp, lens and CCD array) includes no fan, since the Xenon Lamp is much cooler than a quartz halogen Lamp. As shown in Figure 1, the IPS drawer includes a small fan to remove heat from the PWBAs located there. The circuitry for fan power and control is shown in Figure 3.
Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer Configurations)

Image Processing for copiers and copier/printers is divided into two groups of PWBAs. The Pre-IPS PWBA, Memory System PWBA, Memory PWBAs and Post-IPS PWBA are only included in these configurations and perform all image processing associated with image sensing and scanning. The remaining PWBAs in the image processing path are common to all machine configuration. Of these, only the Halftone PWBA performs significant image processing. All image processing PWBAs in all configurations are shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3.
IPS FAN
MOTOR/LAMP/FAN DRIVE PWBA
Pre-IPS PWBA
The Pre-IPS PWBA accepts six line of analog color data from the CCD PWBA. These are in the form of two sets of three color lines: Red, Green and Blue. The Pre-IPS PWBA contains the Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs) listed in Table 1, which also contains their functions. Figure 1 shows the signal flow through the PWBA. Table 1 Pre-IPS PWBA ASICs and Their Functions ASIC Name Analog Interface Functions 1. 2. 3. Analog-to-Digital Converter IIC Amplifies the analog signal Offsets DC offset for varying analog AC signal Multiplexes between two analog inputs for each color
Converts analog input to digital value between 0 and 1023 (10 bit resolution) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Converts W-Reference Corrects W-Level Corrects shading using 7.5 kilobytes of RAM for each color Corrects gap using a 7.5 kilobyte FIFO (First In First Out) chain for each color 1 X 5 Filter Generates the CCD PWBA 9.97 MHz sample and shift clock. Senses original document size Senses background color (ENL [Equivalent Neutral Lightness]) Senses original color (ACS [Automatic Color Sensing]) Corrects color (ACC [Automatic Color Correction]) Enlarges/reduces image in one direction, when enlargement/ reduction is requested by user Rotates/repeats image, when requested by user Creates mirror image, when requested by user
SID
1. 2. 3. 4.
TRE
1. 2. 3.
Figure 1 IPS Fan Location
In addition, the Central Processing Unit (CPU) on the Pre-IPS PWBA accepts inputs from the following sensors: Platen Sensor, indicating the presence of paper on the platen
IIT/IPS Cooling, Image Processing (Digital Copier &
1/05 10-80
Angle Sensor, indicating that the cover is angled approximately less than <40 degrees from horizontal Reg1 Sensor, indicating when the Full Rate Sensor passes through the True Registration Position
One Automatic Paper Sensor (APS), indicating how far the document original extends from the True Reference Position
Figure 1 Pre-IPS PWBA Simplified Block Diagram
BR PWBA
The BR PWBA contains the currency detection functionality. Because disabling this functionality would enable counterfeiting, no information is being given of this PWBA.
1/05 10-81
Image Processing (Digital Copier & Copier/Printer
Memory System PWBA and Memory PWBAs

Each scanned image is stored in a memory subsystem comprising a Memory System PWBA and three Memory PWBAs. As partially shown in Figure 2, the image is accepted by the Memory System PWBA from the Pre-IPS PWBA and is provided to the Post-IPS PWBA. Each image pixel is defined by eight bits for each of three colors: red, green and blue. The images are actually stored in three Memory PWBAs, one per color. Each Memory PWBA has a standard capacity of 32 MBytes or an optional capacity of 64 MBytes of Random Access Memory (RAM). The standard 96 MB total RAM capacity is large enough to store a single 11 by 17 image or two 8-1/2 by 11 images. The optional RAM capacity of all three Memory PWBAs provides storage for 11 by 17 images.
Each Memory PWBA is controlled by a unique CMM, located on the Memory System PWBA. The three CMMs are themselves controlled by common address and data buses from the PostIPS PWBA.
Figure 2 Red Memory Simplified Block Diagram
Post-IPS
The Post-IPS PWBA (Figure 3) processes 8-bit RGB image pixels retrieved from the Memory PWBA and provides them in YMCK (yellow, magenta, cyan, black) format to the Video Select PWBA. The Post-IPS PWBA first converts the RGB data to a L*a*b* format. This intermediate data can be passed to and from the optional Edit PWBA. All of the boards functionality is contained in the ASICs listed in Table 2, which also describes the functions included in the devices. Table 2 Post-IPS PWBA ASICs and Their Functions ASIC Name CST MAX (3 total) Functions Converts image from RGB format to L*a*b* format Differentiates between text and image areas of document original ASIC Name TRE TBC CPI
Table 2 Post-IPS PWBA ASICs and Their Functions Functions Enlarges/Reduces in one dimension; Creates mirror image; Shifts Image Converts 400 DPI to 600 DPI; generates timing signals Generates chip selects; Contains priority interrupt controller; Generates delay signals
The Post IPS PWBA retrieves the RGB information from the Memory PWBA four times on a pixel by pixel basis. This is because all three input values are required to construct all four output values. The images pixel color information is provided to the VSEL PWBA circuitry four times, once per output color, in the following order:
1/05 10-82
1. 2. 3. 4.
All yellow (Y) information All magenta (M) information All cyan (C) information All black (K) information
2.
R2, G2, B2 simultaneously
However, the images are extracted from the Memory PWBA in a different order:, 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct Y1 and L1*a1*b1* R2, G2, B1 simultaneously to construct Y2 or L2*a2*b2* R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct M1 R2, G2, B2 simultaneously to construct M2 R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct C1 R2, G2, B2 simultaneously to construct Y2 R1, G1, B1 simultaneously to construct K1 R2, G2, B2 simultaneously to construct Y2
This ensures that toner will be placed onto the paper in the order: black (bottom), cyan, magenta, yellow (top). Likewise, all of a pixels RGB data must be extracted from memory before it can be translated to L*a*b* format and provided to the Edit PWBA. This process is modified if the document originals are 8-1/2 X 11/A4 or smaller. In this case, the two images are loaded sequentially into the Memory PWBA in the following order: 1. R1, G1, B1 simultaneously
This enables the Post-IPS PWB to present the color information in the following order: Y1, Y2, M1, M2, C1, C2, K1, K2, enabling the Xerographic subsystem to simultaneously process two 81/2 X 11/A4 sheets.
Figure 3 Post IPS PWBA Simplified Block Diagram
Edit PWBA
The optional Edit PWBA permits portions of the scanned image to be removed. As shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3, the Edit PWBA is a daughterboard of the Post-IPS PWBA. The image is accepted from the Post-IPS PWBA format in L*a*b* format and processed in two ASICs.
1/05 10-83
Figure 4 Edit PWBA Simplified Block Diagram
1/05 10-84
Image Source Selection

As shown in Figure 1, the VSEL PWBA controls the routing of the image. The possible sources are the scanned image from the Post-IPS PWBA and the print image from the Digital Front End (DFE). The selected image is always routed to the Halftone PWBA. In addition, the selected image can be routed to the DFE. Therefore, the machine can be used as a scanner, with the resulting images being sent to client workstations.
The Halftone PWBA controls the selection of input and output. In addition, it can load a test image into the VSEL PWBA, permitting an end-to-end test of the all succeeding assemblies.
Figure 1 VSEL PWBA Simplified Block Diagram
1/05 10-85
Image Source Selection
Image Processing (All Configurations)
All machine configurations include a Halftone PWBA. This board accepts the image from the VSEL PWBA four times, once per color: yellow, magenta, cyan and black. For each color, each pixel has a value from 0 to 255 (8 bits/pixel). This value controls the amount of time that the ROS drive pulse is active. A value of 0 shuts off the pulse completely, while a value of 255 provides the maximum pulse width. Most the functionality in this PWBA is located in six ASICs.
Figure 1 LDD PWBA and ROS Simplified Schematic Diagram The Halftone PWBA uses its 600 DPI image data input to create pixels of various sizes and at various pitches when printing text and graphics. As shown in Table 1, these include the following combinations of types and resolutions: 600 vertical and horizontal lines per inch (600L) 300 vertical and horizontal lines per inch (300L) 200 rotated lines per inch (200R) 200 pixel clusters per inch (200C) 150 pixel clusters per inch (150C) (Only available for files received from the DFE).
The positioning of the rotated lines depends on the color of the line. Magenta is placed at 45 clockwise of horizontal, yellow and black are vertical and cyan is placed at 45 clockwise from vertical. These are shown in Figure 2.
1/05 10-86
Figure 2 Line Screen Rotation Table 1 Print Screen for Modes Photo Type Mode Color Color 4 Color Original Type Text/ Photo Text Photo Map 3 Color Text/ Photo Text Photo Map Single Color Black, Text/ Yellow, Photo Magenta, Text Cyan Photo Map Text 600L/ 200R 600L/ 200R N/A N/A 600L/ 200R 600L/ 200R N/A N/A 600L/ 200R 600L/ 200R N/A N/A Halftone Original 600L/ 200R N/A 200R N/A 600L/ 200R N/A 200R N/A 600L/ 200R N/A 200R N/A 600L/ 200C N/A 200C N/A 600L/ 200C N/A 200C N/A 600L/ 200C N/A 200C N/A Copied Original 600L/ 200R N/A 200R N/A 600L/ 200R N/A 200R N/A 600L/ 200R N/A 200R N/A Map Mode N/A N/A N/A 300L N/A N/A N/A 300L N/A N/A N/A 300L
In cluster mode, the ROS laser beam is modulated to create fewer but larger pixels on the photoreceptor drum. The size of these pixels by can be changed by changing the total amount of energy which the lasers transmit to the photoreceptor drum. The pixels are arranged in groups or clusters with one pixel per color, with each pixel being effectively rotated. The arrangement of pixels is shown in Figure 3.
1/05 10-87
Photoreceptor Exposure
Photoreceptor exposure is the function of the Laser Diode Driver (LDD) PWBA and the Raster Output Scanner (ROS).
Figure 3 Cluster Dot Screen Patterns
Image Processing (All Configurations), Photorecep-
1/05 10-88
Figure 1 LDD PWBA and ROS Simplified Schematic Diagram
LDD PWBA
The LDD PWBA provides the interface between the Halftone PWBA and the ROS. The LDD PWBA switches on the ROS laser diodes while the pulse from the Halftone PWBA is active. See Figure 1.
The output wavelength is 780 nm which is in the infrared range of the electromagnetic spectrum. Therefore, the laser diode outputs are invisible to the human eye. By precisely timing when the LED is lit, the LED output can be reflected from a mirror face anywhere along a line extending across the width of the photoreceptor drum. The light striking the photoreceptor drum causes a latent image on the drum. Since the rotational velocity of the mirror must be both very accurate and stable, the mirror is mounted on air bearing. Control signals for the ROS are provided by the IOT Drive PWBA, under the control of the IOT CPU. The IOT LVPS provides +24 VDC via the IOT Drive PWBA.
ROS
The ROS, shown in Figure 2, includes two solid-state diode lasers whose output is directed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Slit Expander Lens Two Mirrors Rotating 12-sided Polygonal Mirror Scan Ray Mirror Mirror Cylinder Photoreceptor Drum
1/05 10-89
MIRROR CYLINDER LENS SOS PICKUP LENS
LDD PWBA SLIT DUAL SPOT LD
MIRROR START-OF- SCAN PWBA MOTOR POLYGON ASSY MIRROR CYLINDER HOUSING
LENSES
Figure 2 ROS Components Locations
1/05 10-90
Overview
The paper supplies for the DocuColor 12 and the DocuCentre Color Series 50 machines are the same. They consist of four (4) Paper Trays and a bypass tray (Tray 5) for single feeding or special weights of copy material. Refer to Figure 1 This Paper Supply chapter will describe up to the point where the paper or copy material is ready to feed into the paper path. Chapter 7 includes: Paper Tray Specifications Paper Size Sensing Tray Level Lift and Sensing No Paper Sensing Tray 5
Refer to Chapter 8 for paper transportation issues.
Paper Size Guides Tray 5
Paper Trays 1-4
Tray 2
Figure 1 Paper Supply Trays
1/05 10-91
Overview
Paper Tray Specifications

The Paper Trays are numbered 1-4, with Tray 1 at the top. Tray 1 is different in size and paper holding capacity from the other trays. Trays 2, 3 and 4 are identical and can be interchanged within the machine. The trays slide in and out on a side rail assembly from of the front of the machine. When the trays are inserted all the way into the machine, a switch is activated to indicate on the User Interface that a tray is present. Each tray has Paper Guides that can be adjusted by the user to accommodate different paper sizes. The Paper Guides in each tray automatically indicate to the machine the paper size in that tray. This information is provided on the User Interface for the operator. Tray 5 is located on the side of the machine. This is used for feeding 1 to 100 sheets of paper (28lb-30lb), heavier weight papers and transparency material. It also holds the optional envelope feeder. Refer to Table 1 for the tray specifications. Figure 1 shows the electrical interface for Tray 1, and Figure 2 shows the electrical interface for Tray 2. The electrical interfaces for Trays 3 and 4 are the same as Tray 2. Table 1 Paper Tray Specifications Trays Tray 1 Capacity 500 sheets Paper Sizes 8.5x11.0 8x10 A4 B5 11x17 8.5x14 8.5x13 8.5x11 8x10 B4 A3 B5 A4 less than 250 gsm, less than 140 lb index; less than90 lb cover Paper Weights Notes No envelopes, transparencies, or heavy weight paper No envelopes, transparencies, or heavy weight paper
Trays 2, 3, 4
550 sheets
Tray 5
100 sheets Any (20 lb, or less sheets for heavier weights)
Optional envelope feeder; usable for transparencies, heavy weight and hole punched/ drilled papers
1/05 10-92
Figure 1 Tray 1 Interface Block Diagram
1/05 10-93
Figure 2 Trays 2 - 4 Interface Block Diagram (Tray 2 Shown)
1/05 10-94
Paper Size Sensing

The user must manually enter the paper size in Tray 1, and the value is stored in the IOT CPU NVM. Trays 2 through 4 have a paper Size Sensor Assembly which automatically reads the paper size loaded in that Tray. These switches are located in the back of the machine where the trays are slid. Paper Guides in the trays slide for selecting various papers sizes. As the Paper Guides slide, camming levelers on the bottom of the tray move a Size Sensor Actuator on the back of the tray. This Size Sensor Actuator pushes the switches on the Size Sensor Assembly to indicate what paper is loaded in that tray. The paper tray needs to be inserted all the way into the machine for the Actuator to engage the Size Sensor switches, activating this paper size sensing feature. Refer to Figure 1 for Sensor locations.
The tray Size Sensor Assembly reads the paper size in the tray. This assembly uses four switches that read high and low conditions, The Size Sensor Actuator pushes different combinations of high/low switch settings which correspond to specific paper sizes and configurations. Refer to Table 1. Table 1 Paper Size Switch Settings, Trays 2-4 Paper Size & Orientation 1 No Tray Present 11.0x17.0 SEF 8.5x14.0 SEF B4 SEF A3 SEF (TFX Special) SEF 8.5x13.0 SEF low low low low low low low low hi hi hi hi hi hi hi hi low low low low hi hi hi hi low low low low hi hi hi hi Tray Size Switch 2 low low hi hi low low hi hi low low hi hi low low hi hi 3 low hi low hi low hi low hi low hi low hi low hi low hi 4
Paper Size Sensors Paper Tray Sensor
B5 SEF A4 SEF (TFX Special) LEF 8.5x11.0 SEF (Letter) B5 LEF A4 LEF 8.5x11.0 LEF (Letter) A5 SEF 8.0x10.0 LEF
Size Sensor Actuator Paper Size Guides
Nudger Solenoid
Paper Feed Motor Paper Out Sensor Prefeed Sensor
Figure 1 Paper Size Sensors (Shown Inside the Machine)
1/05 10-95
Paper Size Sensing
Tray Level Lift and Sensing

The paper level within the trays must be maintained within a certain height range for proper paper feeding into the machine. This is achieved by the Tray Level Left mechanism and the Stack Height Sensor within each Paper Tray. Figure 1 shows the relationship between motor rotation and the resulting action. As paper is fed from the tray, the following process keeps the paper at the correct height to feed into the machine: 1. 2. Paper level in the tray drops as paper is fed into the machine. As the paper level drops, the Nudger Roll also drops further into the tray to reach the top sheet of paper. The Nudger Roll Solenoid activates, allowing a spring to push the Nudger Roller onto the paper stack When the Nudger Roll drops into the tray to a certain level, a flag on the Nudger Roll mechanism blocks the Stack Height Sensor. When the Stack Height Sensor is blocked, its output line to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs changes its level. The IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs activate the Feed Motor for that tray, causing it run in the clockwise direction. The Feed Motor running in a clockwise direction results in: 7. 8. 9. The Nudger Roll stops rotating, because of its one-way clutch. The Feed Roll stops rotating, again due to a one-way clutch. The Lift Shaft starts turning, raising the paper level in the tray.
3. 4. 5. 6.
As the paper level rises, it raises the Nudger until the Stack Height Sensor is no longer blocked. When the Stack Height Sensor is no longer blocked, its output line to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs changes back to its original level. The IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs activate the trays Feed Motor in the counter-clockwise direction. The Paper Tray Level Lift stops rising. The Nudger Roll starts rotating. The Feed Roll starts rotating. Figure 1 Tray Motor Rotation
10. The Feed Motor running in the counter-clockwise direction results in:
11. The paper is at the proper height and is fed into the machine. When opening or removing the Paper Trays from the machine, the trays Paper Level Lift Mechanism automatically drops the paper level. Inserting or closing the Paper Trays automatically raises the paper level by the Paper Feed Motor.
Tray Level Lift and Sensing
1/05 10-96
No Paper Sensing
A No-Paper Sensor detects when the Paper Tray is empty. When the last sheet is fed from the tray, the No-Paper Sensor actuator drops into a hole within the Tray Level Lift. The actuator blocks the sensor and the sensors output switches to high. This level is sent to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs, which deactivates the trays Feed Motor. In addition, these PWBAs cause a message to appear on the User Interface display. send a status message to the User Interface Base PWBA. Figure 1 shows the circuitry relating to the No Paper Sensor. This circuitry is the same for Trays 1 through 4.
Tray 5
Tray 5 is used mainly to feed transparencies, thick paper, and envelopes. It can also be used to feed small quantities of paper not in Paper Trays 1 through 4. Tray 5 has a maximum capacity of 1-100 copies. When material is placed in Tray 5, it pushes against an actuator finger of the Tray 5 Paper Sensor, causing it to change level. The switch output is routed to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. Refer to Figure 1 for the Tray 5 components.
1/05 10-97
No Paper Sensing, Tray 5
Figure 1 Tray 5 Electrical Block Diagram. Paper feeding and paper size sensing is described in Section 8, Paper Transport.
Tray 5
1/05 10-98
Overview
Paper Transportation includes: Paper Path Description Paper Feeders Tray 5 Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport Inverter and Duplex Paper Path Print Exit
Paper Path Description

The paper feeding process is the same for all four paper trays. The following is a brief description of the copy paper path through the entire machine. For a more detailed explanation, refer to each subassembly listed above. The Tray Lift raises the paper in the Paper Trays to the Feeder Assembly. A solenoid activated Nudger Roll feeds paper into the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. These two rolls advance the paper into the vertical transport area which have a series of magnetically clutched Take Away Rollers (TAR). The Take Away Rollers advance the paper to the Preregistration Rollers. As the paper advances through the Preregistration Roller, the lead edge of the paper passes a reflective sensor. The signal from this sensor is compared to the TR0 signal from the IBT by the machine run control. The machine run control will have the Preregistration Roller run slower or faster so that the paper will synchronize for proper image transfer at the IBT. The Registration Rollers are not energized and their movement is momentarily delayed as the lead edge of the paper enters the nip. The Registration Sensor sees the lead edge of the paper and starts a timing delay for energizing the Registration Rollers. While these rollers are not moving, the paper is still being advanced by the Preregistration Rollers. This forces the lead edge of the paper onto the non-moving Registration Rolls, and aligns or de-skews the paper square to the Registration Rollers. After de-skewing, the Registration Rolls are energized and advance the paper to the xerographic marking area of the machine. The IBT allows all 4 color layers of toner to be transferred to the paper in one pass. The paper goes between the IBT Belt and the second Bias Transfer Roll. There, a combination of pressure and electrostatic charge transfers the toner from the belt to the paper. Exiting the IBT area, the paper is transported to the Fuser by a Vacuum Belt. A metal guide directs the lead edge into the nip of the Fuser. The Fuser has a Heat Roll and Pressure Roll which cam together to create a Contact Arc or pressure point in the roller nip. The Heat Roll and Pressure Roll apply heat and pressure which fuses the toner into the paper. The paper leaves the Fuser, passing into the nip of the Fuser Exit Rollers. If the paper is exiting the machine, it is guided by Exit Inverter Rolls to the Paper Shelf or the Mailbox/Sorter. For duplex copying, or for paper that is to be stacked in reverse order, the paper is diverted by a solenoid activated Invert Gate before reaching the Exit Inverter Rolls. The Invert Gate directs the paper into the duplex paper path. Two pairs of Inverter Rolls drive the paper down into the duplex path. Copy that is to be reversed stacked is stopped before the trailing edge reaches the second set of Inverter Rolls. At this position, the paper has passed a strip of Mylar which acts as a gate. The paper reverses its direction of travel and moves up into the Mylar gate, which guides the paper to the Exit Invert Roll to leave the machine for reverse stacking.
Figure 1 Motor Drives of the Paper Path
1/05 10-99
Overview
For Duplex printing, the paper travels further into the duplex path to a dup point. At this position, the paper has passed a second Mylar gate. The copy reverses direction, driven by the Duplex Inverter Roll, and the Mylar gate guides the paper to the Dup Path. Two sets of prealignment rolls (Duplex In Roll and Duplex Path Roll) drive the copy, while three sets of crossed rolls (Alignment Rolls 1, 2 and 3) push the copy into the Side Guide Rail for alignment prior to copying on the second side. Duplex Out Rolls transport the copy to the Preregistration Rolls. From there, the copy is again de-skewed and sent for copying on the second side by passing through the IBT, Fuser and then exiting the machine as a finished duplex copy. Refer to Table 1 for information on the different drive motors used to transport the paper through the machine. Table 1 Paper Transport Motors Motor Trays 1-4 Feed/Lift Motors 24 VDC Bidirectional Stepper Motor 300 mm/sec (feed operation) Take Away Clutch Take Away Rollers 2-4 Function (drives the following:) Feed Roller (ccw) Nudger Roller (ccw) Paper Level Lift (cw)
Table 1 Paper Transport Motors Motor Duplex Out Motor 24 VDC Exit Motor +/- 24 VDC Function (drives the following:) Align Roll 1 Align Roll 2 Align Roll 3 Dup Out Roll Machine Exit Inverter Roll Pressure Roller Cam
Take Away Motor 24 VDC 450 mm/sec. Tray 5 Motor 24 VDC 220 mm/sec. 130 mm/sec. 60 mm/sec.
Tray 5 Feed Clutch Nudger Roll Feed Roll
Tray 5 Take Away Roll Take Away Feed Clutch #1 Take Away Roll Pre-Registration Roll Tray 5 Lifter-Up Tray 5 Lifter-Down Registration Roll
Tray 5 Lifter Motor 24 VDC Stepper Motor Regi Motor 24 VDC Stepper Motor 220 mm/sec. 130 mm/sec. 60 mm/sec.
Invert Motor 24 VDC Reversing Stepper Motor 350 mm/sec. 450 mm/sec.
Invert Roll 1 Invert Roll 2 Dup Invert Roll Dup In Roll Dup Path Roll Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Overview
1/05 10-100
Figure 2 Paper Path
1/05 10-101
Overview
Paper Feeders
Paper Path Component Description and Locator (See Figure 2) Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Description Tray 1 Sensor Tray 1 Level Sensor Tray 1 No Paper Sensor Tray 1 Prefeed Sensor Tray 1 Feed/Lift Motor Tray 1 Nudger Solenoid Tray 1 Feed Out Sensor Tray 2 Paper Size Sensor Tray 2 Level Sensor Tray 2 No Paper Sensor Tray 2 Prefeed Sensor Tray 2 Feed/Lift Motor Tray 2 Nudger Solenoid Tray 2 Feed Out Sensor Tray 3 Paper Size Sensor Tray 3 Level Sensor Tray 3 No Paper Sensor Tray 3 Prefeed Sensor Tray 3 Feed/Lift Motor Tray 3 Nudger Solenoid Tray 3 Feed Out Sensor Tray 4 Paper Size Sensor Tray 4 Level Sensor Tray 4 No Paper Sensor Tray 4 Prefeed Sensor Tray 4 Feed/Lift Motor Tray 4 Nudger Solenoid Nudger Roll Solenoid Item 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Description Tray 4 Feed Out Sensor Take Away Motor Tray 1 Take Away Feed Clutch Tray 2 Take Away Feed Clutch Tray 3 Take Away Feed Clutch Tray 4 Take Away Feed Clutch Take Away Sensor Pre Registration Sensor Tray 5 Motor Regi Sensor Transparency Sensor (OHP) Regi Motor Pre IBT Sensor Pre Fuser Sensor Fuser Exit Sensor Invert Gate Invert Gate Solenoid Exit Path Sensor M/C Exit Sensor Invert Motor Release Solenoid Inverter Path Sensor Duplex In Sensor Duplex Path Sensor Duplex Out Sensor Duplex Out Motor Nudger Roll Sensor Nudger Roll Paper Out Sensor Feed/Lifter Motor Retard Roll Friction Clutch Feed Roll The purpose of the Paper Feeders is to: Extract the copy material, a single sheet at a time, from the Paper Trays and feed this copy material into the vertical transport area of the machine Maintain the correct height levels in the Paper Trays for proper feeding Indicate when there is a jam or double feed from the Paper Feeder mechanism Sense when the Paper Tray is empty
Each of the four Paper Trays have their own motor driven Paper Feeder Assembly. The four Feeder Assemblies are located above each Paper Tray, in the lower left side of the machine.
NOTE: Bottom View
Figure 1 Paper Feeder Assembly
Feed Motors
Each Tray Assembly has a +/- 24 VDC, bidirectional stepper Feed Motor:
Overview, Paper Feeders
1/05 10-102
When rotating clockwise, it raises the Tray Lifter in the Paper Tray. When rotating counterclockwise, it rotates the Nudger and Feed Rolls for the tray.
The Feed Motors are controlled by the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs. The circuit is the same for all four Paper Trays and their Feeder Assemblies. See Figure 2 for the electrical schematic. The paper feed process starts either when: The machine functioning as a printer, receives a print job from the network connection. The machine functioning as a copier, the user enters a print job on the User Interface correctly, provides the document in the Document Feeder or on the Platen Glass and presses the Start Button, and there is the correct copy material in one of the paper supply sources.
Paper Feed
The IOT Control PWBA manages paper feed timing using the TR0 signal from the IBT Belt as a reference. In the selected tray, the Feed Motor is energized, rotating the Nudger Roll, and the Feed Roll. The Retard Roll rotates by being cammed against the Feed Roll. For each sheet of paper to be fed, the Nudger Roll solenoid momentarily activates, allowing a spring to push the Nudger Roll down to the top sheet of paper in the tray. The Nudger Roll feeds the paper into the nip of the Feed/Retard Roll. The paper is fed at a rate of 300 mm/sec. to the Take Away Rollers. If the lead edge of the paper is not sensed by the Pre-Feed Sensor within the correct time duration, then a Feed Sensor jam is declared. (See Tray Level Lift and Sensing for maintaining the paper level in the Paper Trays)
Retard Roller Operation

The Retard Roll prevents more than one sheet of paper from being fed into the paper path at the same time. The Retard Roll in each Paper Tray is classified as a semi-active type. The Retard Roll is mechanically cammed against the motor-driven Feed Roll when the Paper Tray is inserted into the machine. The rotation of the Retard Roll comes from this contact with the Feed Roll. A friction clutch on the shaft of the Retard Roll provides rotation resistance. When there is no copy, or a single sheet of copy in the nip of the Retard/Feed Roll, the resistance from the friction clutch is not enough to prevent the Retard Roll from rotating with the motor-driven Feed Roll. This allows the rotating Retard and Feed Rolls to feed a single sheet of copy. If more than one sheet of copy is fed into the Retard/Feed Roll nip, then the resistance from the Friction Clutch is greater than the resistance between the multiple sheets of copy. This resistance prevents the Retard Roll from rotating, which holds the extra sheets of copy back in the tray while only the top copy is advanced by the motor-driven Feed Roll. Figure 2 Partial electrical schematic for paper feed control in Trays 1-4
Paper Feed Control

Figure 2 is a partial electrical schematic of the paper feed control.
1/05 10-103
Paper Feeders
Vertical Transport
The purpose of the Vertical Transport module is to provide copy transportation from the Paper Trays to the registration system. The vertical Transport also provides access to the paper jams in the Paper Feeders and Take Away Rolls (TAR). As paper is feed from the Paper Trays, it enters the Vertical Transport module. The Take Away Rolls 2 through 4 are individually clutched magnetically and are driven by the Take Away Motor. Paper transport speed is at 450 mm/sec. Each TAR clutch can engage or disengage from the TAR Motor as the paper enters and leaves the nip. This function reduces the energy used by the TAR Motor and also releases the paper as required when the paper enters the variable speed Preregistration Rolls. The Take Away Roll 1 is clutch driven by Tray 5 Motor at 450 mm/sec. These rolls are also electromagnetically clutched to disengage from the Tray 5 Motor. These rolls disengage when the paper enters the nip of the Preregistration Rolls. An optical Feed Out Sensor at each TAR reads the lead and trail edge of the paper to energize the clutched rolls and to detect paper jams at each of Paper Trays.
Tray 5
Tray 5 is used to feed copy material that cannot be reliably fed from one of the four Paper Trays, or for a copy size that is not available in any of the Paper Trays. Copy material that is to be fed from Tray 5 includes: Transparency material Heavy weight paper (105 gsm - 190 gsm) Extra heavy weight paper (191 gsm - 250 gsm) Manual duplex copy needs Multi-hole drill/punched paper
Tray 5 feed operation

Tray 5 has a switch that is activated when the top of the tray is dropped down. This sends a signal to the machine run control, which energizes the Tray 5 sensor circuitry and indicates on the User Interface screen that the Tray 5 is open. When copy material is placed in Tray 5 with the lead edge of the material against the Tray 5 Gate, a Paper Set Sensor is actuated. This sensor signals machine run control that copy is present in this tray. A paper Size Guide is manually adjusted to accommodate the lead edge dimension of the copy. The Size Guide uses a variable resistor sensor for providing the lead edge dimension to the machine run control. Two optical sensors are used to monitor the copy stack height that is placed in Tray 5 for proper feeding into the machine: Tray 5 Level Up Sensor - This sensor performs the same way as the Stack Height Sensor in Paper Trays 1-4. When the Nudger Roll has to drop too far down to reach the top sheet of paper, the Tray 5 Level Up Sensor is unblocked and the Tray 5 Lifter motor is energized counterclock wise to raise the Paper Lifter, bring the paper level up to the Nudger Roll for proper feeding. Tray 5 Level Down Sensor - This sensor indicates when the Paper Lifter is down. The Tray 5 Lifter Motor is energized clockwise to lower the paper.
A delayed time interval from the TR0 signal starts the Tray 5 Motor. The Nudger Roll Solenoid momentarily energizes to lower the Nudger Roll to the top copy. This feeds the top copy into the nip of the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll. The Retard Roll has a friction clutch which provides resistance to prevent multiple copy feedings (See Retard Roller Operation for more details of this roller function.) The copy travels from Tray 5 Feed/Nudger Rolls to the Tray 5 Take Away Rolls. The Tray 5 Feed Sensor detects the lead and trail edge. If the lead edge is not sensed within the designated time, then a paper jam error is generated. The Tray 5 feed mechanism is similar to that used in Paper Trays 1-4 (See Paper Feeders for more information on paper feeding). Tray 5 Nudger Roll feeds the paper to the nip of the Feed and Retard Roll. The Retard Roll is a semi-active type. From there, the single sheet of paper is fed to the Tray 5 Take Away Rolls.
Vertical Transport, Tray 5
1/05 10-104
As the paper advances through Tray 5 Take Away Rolls, the lead edge of the paper passes a reflective sensor. The signal from this sensor is compared to the TR0 signal from the IBT by the machine run control. The machine run control signals Tray 5 Motor to run the Take Away Rolls faster or slower so that the paper will synchronize with the IBT for proper image transfer. The same alignment procedure occurs when the paper comes from the Vertical Transport and Paper Tray direction. In this case, a Preregistration Sensor signals the machine run control which has the Tray 5 Motor vary the speed of the Preregistration Rolls. Refer to Figure 1 for Tray 5 Motor speed adjustments of these rollers. From either Tray 5 Take Away Rolls or the Preregistration Rolls, the copy is advanced to the Registration Rolls for deskewing. (See Paper Registration and Paper Transport to the IBT Belt.)
PAPER LEVEL SENSOR NUDGER ROLL SOLENOID
FEED ROLL PAPER OUT SENSOR
SIZE GUIDE PAPER TRAY LIFT RETARD ROLL FEED OUT SENSOR
Figure 2 Tray 5 components
Tray 5 Copy Size Sensing

When paper is placed in Tray 5, a paper Size Guide is manually adjusted to accommodate the lead edge dimension of the copy. The Size Guide uses a variable resistor sensor (0-5 VDC) for providing the lead edge dimension to the machine run control. The length of the paper (run dimension) is determined by the activation time of the Pre Fuser Sensor.
Tray 5 Motor
Nudger Roll Tray 5 Take Away Roll
Figure 1 Motor Speed Adjustments for Paper and Image Alignment
Tray 5 Mechanical Drives

Tray 5 uses two motors: Tray 5 Motor drives Tray 5 Nudger roll, Tray 5 Feed Roll, Tray 5 Take Away Rolls, PreRegistration Rolls and Take Away Rolls #1. Tray 5 Lifter Motor raises or lowers the Paper Lifter to control the paper level for correct feed height in Tray 5. - Clockwise raises the Paper Lifter - Counter clockwise lowers the Paper Lifter Paper Size Sensor
Figure 3 Tray 5 Drive and Size Sensor
1/05 10-105
Tray 5
Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport

The components and assemblies involved in paper registration accept a sheet of blank copy material and ensure that its edges are absolutely parallel or perpendicular to the sheets direction of travel. This is done immediately before feeding the sheet to the IBT Belt.
Differentiating between paper and transparencies

Transparencies can only be fed from Tray 5. When transparency material is detected, the transport speed for IBT, the Vacuum Transport, Fuser and Fuser Exit Rolls drops to its slowest speed of approximately 60 mm/sec. When copy material is fed from Tray 5, two OHP Sensors examine the edges of the material to determine if the material is opaque on that edge through its whole length. The outputs of these sensors are routed to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs for processing. The OHP Senors are a LED transmitted-light-detection type. Since paper is opaque, it blocks light from the sensors LEDs to their photoreceptors. This isnt the case with transparency material, except for a short interval when either or both sensors encounter the opaque white strip on some transparency material. When the Registration Sensor detects the lead edge of the copy material, the signal from both OHP Senors is also read. If the material is paper, then these sensors are blocked. If the transparency material is fed with the white strip (5 mm in width) first, then the OHP Sensors are also blocked. Readings from the OHP Sensors are taken at 0.1 second intervals. If the LED of the sensors are detected, this indicates the material is a transparency that is being transported.
Paper Registration and Paper Transport to the IBT Belt

The paper registration system uses a stalled-roll technique. As the blank copy material is being transported by the Preregistration Rollers (from trays 1 through 4) or by the Tray 5 Take Away Rollers, the lead edge of the media reaches the nip of the Registration Rollers. At that instant, the Registration Rollers are not rotating. This forces the lead edge of copy into the nip, causing the copy to buckle and making the lead edge parallel with the nip. After a 100 to 140 ms delay, the Registration Motor begins turning the Registration Rollers, moving the blank copy material to the nip between the IBT Belt and the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll. The start of the developed image on the IBT Belt and the leading edge of the copy material must be synchronized so that they meet. Therefore, the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs can vary the speed of the Preregistration Rollers and the Dup Out Rollers from 360 mm/sec. to 540 mm/sec. This results from comparing the timing of the Preregistration Sensor signal caused by the blank copy materials leading edge with the timing signal from the TR0 Sensor on the IBT. Any timing difference causes the speed of the Tray 5 Motor and Duplex Out Motor to be adjusted. After the copy material has been set to synchronize with the IBT and has been deskewed at the Registration Rollers, it enters the nip of the Second Bias Transfer Roll (BTR) with the IBT Belt. Refer to Xerographics for more information on the Xerographics process.
Paper Transport from the IBT Belt

A Vacuum Transport Belt carries the unfused print to the Fuser Subassembly. To maintain consistent print transport speed during the Fusing process, the Fuser Motor transports the print into, through and out of the Fuser Assembly. (See Table 1 for Drive Motor information). The vacuum that is used to hold the print to the belt comes from the Exhaust Blower Assembly through the Xerographic and Vacuum Transport duct system. This means that the belt vacuum may be diminished if the machines service doors are open. The Fuser Entrance Sensor detects the lead edge for paper jams on the Vacuum Transport Belt or from the IBT. Refer to the Fuser Section for more information on this subassembly. As the fused print exits the Fuser, the lead edge enters the Fuser Exit Roller nip. A Fuser Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the print as it leaves the Fuser Exit Rollers. If the lead edge is more then 20 ms late, the Fuser will stop and a jam error code will be indicated.
Paper Registration and Pre-Fuser Transport
1/05 10-106
Inverter and Duplex Paper Path

After fusing, a print would enter the Inverter Path, instead of exiting the machine, for one of two reasons: To be stacked in the Exit Tray or Stacker/Mailbox/Sorter in the same order that they were printed or copied. As the first step in duplex printing or copying
Print Exit
Print exit moves the finished print out of the machine. Depending upon machine options, exiting prints can go to a Sorter, a Mailbox or a Tray Stacker. Prints can reach the exit port from either the Inverter Paper Path or the Fuser Path. When the print is coming from the Inverter Path, the critical condition is the state of the solenoid controlling the Inverter Gate. When the print is to exit the machine, the solenoid is not activated. This allow the print to be transported directly to the Exit Invert Rolls instead of being routed into the Inverter Paper Path. When the print is coming from the Inverter Path, the critical condition is how far down the Inverter Path the print is driven by Invert Rolls 1 and 2 and Duplex Invert Roll. If the trailing edge of the print goes down past the Mylar Duplex Gate, it will be directed along the Duplex Paper Path when it reverses direction and moves upward. If the Mylar Duplex Gate isnt passed, the upwardly moving print will be routed to the Exit Inverter Rolls when it reaches the Mylar Inverter Gate. The Exit Sensor detects paper jams by monitoring the leading and trailing edges of the print. The Exit Motor drives only the Exit Invert Rolls. This allows the print material to exit the machine at a transport speed of 350 mm/sec.
The print is diverted into this paper path by a solenoid activated Inverter Gate. This solenoid and gate is activated by the IOT Control and Drive PWBA.
Duplex Path
The Duplex Path transports the print back to a location before IBT image transfer so that its reverse side can be marked. When duplex printing is required, the Invert Solenoid activates the Inverter Gate. This Inverter Gate directs the lead edge of print down the Invert/Duplex paper path to Inverter Rolls 1 and 2, and the Duplex Inverter Roll. These rolls transport the print down past a Duplex Gate to a Duplex Invert Point. At this Duplex Invert Point, the Invert Motor stops and reverses direction to move the print up in the paper path. The Mylar Duplex Gate directs the print into the duplex paper path. The print enters the Duplex Paper Path, and the prints leading edge passes the Duplex In Sensor. This sensor detects paper jams, and initiates a timing sequence which eventually results in the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs energizing the Duplex Out Motor. The Invert Motor drives Duplex In Roll and the Duplex Path Roll. These rolls transport the print to the duplex alignment area. When the Duplex Path Sensor detects the leading edge of the print, the Invert Motor deenergizes and the Duplex Out Motor energizes. The Duplex Out Motor drives three sets of Align Rolls which are rotating at an angle to the transportation direction of the print. This angled drive pushes the print edge into a Side Guide Rail and aligns the running side dimension to the side dimension of the IBT for the second marking process. After the print is aligned, it is sent to the Preregistration Rolls to be again deskewed against the Registration Rolls. A Duplex Out Sensor detects the leading and trailing edge of the print, to detect paper jams as the print leaves the Duplex Paper Path.
1/05 10-107
Inverter and Duplex Paper Path, Print Exit
Inverter and Duplex Paper Path, Print Exit
1/05 10-108
Overview
This module describes the electrical and mechanical components of the Xerographics process. Xerographics includes these primary functions: Providing a charge to the Photoreceptor Drum which can then be exposed with a laser for the image data. This creates a latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. Develop the latent electrostatic image on the Photoreceptor Drum by depositing toner onto the image areas. Transfer the developed image from the Photoreceptor Drum to the Intermediate Transfer Belt (IBT). The IBT receives all required toner colors before the image is transferred to the paper. Transfer the complete toner image from the IBT to the paper. Clean both the IBT and the Photoreceptor Drum of developer residue. Suppling developer to the Developer Rotary Assembly Photoreceptor Drum
The major sections in this module are: Photoreceptor Drum Charging Development Toner Supply Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) Motors Cleaning Systems Air Flow Process Controls Figure 1 Two Step Image Transfer Process The advantage of the IBT is that it provides a more stable and consistent base than paper for receiving the toner from the Photoreceptor Drum. When transferring four different toner layers onto a substrate, factors such as: registration, surface charge, consistent transport speed, moisture content, and surface texture all are critical variables that impact quality of that toner transfer process. The wide variety of copy materials (different paper/plastic surfaces and weights) make it difficult to control these variables, which impacts the color toner layering process. By using the IBT, the variables of surface charge, speed, registration, moisture content and surface texture are either eliminated or reduced. This allows for more consistency in building the toner layers. Once all the required image layers have been accumulated onto the IBT, this final image is then passed onto the paper at the 2nd Bias Transfer Roll (BTR) through a controlled, electrically charged, roller nip. By using one pass to transfer the complete image onto the paper, an increase in image quality, image consistency and color copy rate is achieved. Because of this two step transfer process, the image on the IBT is an upside-down, mirror imaged and reversed colored layered of the image that ends up on the copy material. Refer to Figure 1 for more information on this two step image transfer process. IBT Belt
The Xerographics processes in this machine use a number of design improvements which helps it achieve the full color copy rate of 12.5 copies per minute. Unlike other color copier technology that has the developed image on the Photoreceptor Drum layering one color at a time directly onto the paper, this machine makes use of a subassembly called the Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT). The IBT receives and accumulates all four color toner layers from the Photoreceptor Drum, and then passes this completed image onto the paper in one pass. Using this process there are actually two steps for image transfer. These are: 1. The charged and developed image on the Photoreceptor Drum is transferred to the Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT). The IBT accepts the image from the Photoreceptor Drum, one color at a time, until all four colors are layered on top of each other on the IBT. Layering sequence: YMCK, where Y is the first color put onto the Photoreceptor Drum and transferred onto the IBT. 2. The complete colored image on the IBT is transferred to the final copy material in one pass. Layered sequence: KCMY, where K is the bottom color layer that is on the copy material and Y is the top color layer.
1/05 10-109
Overview
Photoreceptor Drum
This machine uses the black writing or Discharge Area Development (DAD) system for exposing and charging the Photoreceptor Drum. With black writing, a high negative charge is placed uniformly on the drum and forms the image background. The Photoreceptor drum is discharged in those areas written by the ROS. The developer is also highly charged negatively and is only attracted to the more discharged areas. Therefore, if there is an image writing failure, such as a ROS failure, the result will be blank prints.
Photoreceptor Drum
This machine uses a STX Organic Photoreceptor Drum. The multiple layered, organic coated aluminum drum is 84 mm in diameter. The layers on the Photoreceptor Drum are: The bottom layer is called a Blocking Layer and forms the interface to the grounding aluminum layer. The middle layer is called the Charge Generation Layer and has the capability of generating charges in the presence of light. The top layer is called the Charge Transport Layer and it transports charges from the surface.
NOTE: The top STX organic layer is more sensitive to light than some other Photoreceptor Drums. When removing from the machine, cover the Drum with the black plastic bag, which is located in the closed compartment of Tray 1. Do not leave the Drum exposed to direct ambient light for more than one minute at 1000 lux. If this time limit is exceeded, the drum becomes desensitized and unusable. Unlike other Photoreceptor Drums, this unit cannot be refreshed by placing it in a dark environment. It must be replaced. For information on cleaning the Photoreceptor Drum, refer to Cleaning Systems
Photoreceptor grounding
The Photoreceptor Drum must be electrically grounded in order to function properly. The aluminum substrate of the Photoreceptor Drum is electrically common with the Drum Shaft. The Drum Shaft is grounded through the Photoreceptor CRU, which is itself grounded to the machine through a connector pin.
Drum Drive
The Photoreceptor Drum is driven by a 24 VDC brushless DC motor. This motor also drives the IBT. In this manner, synchronization between the Drum and IBT Belt is easier to maintain for the image transfer process. A 9.38 pound (3.5 kilogram) flywheel is installed on the IBT Drive Roll Shaft to prevent fluctuations in speed that would impact image quality.
Figure 1 Black Writing Xerographics Process The black writing steps used on this rotating Photoreceptor Drum are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Charging the Drum (see: Charge Corotron) Exposing the image onto the Drum with the Laser (see: Imaging section) Developing the image on the Drum (see: Development) Transferring the image to the IBT (see: Toner Transfer Overview) Cleaning the Drum and IBT Belt (see: Cleaning Systems) Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Photoreceptor Drum
1/05 10-110
The IOT CPU PWBA and IOT Drive PWBA control the Drum Motor. This PWBA contains the electronics that drive the Drum Motor and converts the encoder pulses into the Machine Clock. Motor Control is described in detail in the Start Power section.
Drum Data
The Photoreceptor Drum has a PWBA that contains Drum data and that provides information that is used by various machine control functions. The data that is stored on the Drum PWBA is: PHOTORECEPTOR DRUM Drum Type Drum serial number Drum usable cycles number Drum Initial installation date Drum final installation date Drum installation frequency Dispense Motor usable time Charge Corotron discharge time Preclean Charge Corotron discharge time B/W and Color copy counters
When a new Photoreceptor Drum (a CRU) is inserted into the machine, the new Drum serial number is read and compared to the serial number stored in the NVM of the machine. When the machine senses a different serial number, it interprets that a new Photoreceptor Drum has been installed. The following occurs when a new Drum is installed: The Drum Initial installation date is stored when the machine detects the Drum Installation Frequency is read as 0 The Drum Installation Frequency, Serial Number, Final Installation Date and other Drum data is read and then stored on NVM of the machine. The previous Drum data in NVM is stored as back-up data. Detection of the Drum Replacement Time is implemented after the Drum data is stored and determined usable. When this is done, then any fail status related to the Drum CRU is cancelled.
Figure 2 Photoreceptor Drum CRU The Drum Motor assembly includes an encoder that provides pulses at the rate of once per revolution. The IOT CPU PWBA uses these pulses to accurately time many of the copier functions. The Drum Motor rpm speed varies, depending upon what type of copy job is being processed. Table 1 show the relationship between paper transport speed and Drum Motor speed. Table 1 Photoreceptor Speeds Transport Speed (mm/sec) Normal Copy Heavy weight Super Heavy Wt. + Transparencies 219.47 129.68 59.82 Motor Speed (rpm) 1996.0 1179.4 544.0
The various Drum run times and cycles from the Drum PWBA are stored and counted. Drum replacement time is detected by the value of Drum Usable Cycles Number and Dispense Motor Usable Time. The following error codes are related to the Drum CRU: 09-410: Drum CRU Change Soon - when the values of the above cycle numbers and time reach a fixed value. 09-378: Drum CRU Change - when the values of the above cycle numbers and time are zero (0). 09-372: Drum Not In Position - when the machine can not detect the Photoreceptor Drum. 09-311: Drum Type Mismatch - when the machine detects the incorrect type of Photoreceptor Drum.
1/05 10-111
Photoreceptor Drum
Charging
The surface of the rotating Photoreceptor Drum receives negative charge VH from the Charge Corotron in preparation to the image exposure from the Laser. The level of this negative charge on the Drum is measured by the Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV) and is shown in Table 1. Note that the charge voltage varies with the temperature and humidity as measured by the machines Environmental Sensor (ENV). The charge voltage will also decrease after the first 50,000 cycles of the Photoreceptor Drum at a ratio of -1 V per 10,000 cycles. Table 1 Photoreceptor Drum Voltages Zone A B Temperature Humidity 28 C 22 C 85% 55% VH 623 VL 300 VBias 510 560
700 300 (for 0-50K cycles, then decreases by -1 V/10K cycles) 710 300
10 C
20%
656
The laser beam from the ROS writes an image onto the negatively charged Photoreceptor Drum. When the laser writes the image data to the Photoreceptor Drum, the voltage on the part of the Drum containing the image is discharged from VH to VL, also shown in Table 2. (The background or non-image areas remain at VH.) This black writing technique creates the latent image that the negatively charged developer will be attracted to, developing this image area. Note that the level of Vh varies with ambient temperature and humidity. Temperature and humidity are measured by a dedicated sensor which is connected to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. The IOT CPU PWBA uses these parameters as one input in adjusting the output voltage and current of the Charge Corotron Grid/Preclean Corotron High Voltage Power Supply (CC/PCC-HVPS) (PSHV-L2).
Figure 1 Charging Circuit
Charge Corotron
The Charge Corotron is replaced every time the customer replaces the Photoreceptor Drum (a CRU). The Charge Corotron can also be replaced by the service engineer (an Engineer Replaceable Unit, ERU) This unit consists of a single 30 micron diameter wire and a metal screen grid positioned between the Corotron Wire and the Drum. The Charge Corotron provides a constant current for charging the surface of the Photoreceptor Drum with a uniform negative potential. This bias voltage on the Corotron Grid determines the potential to which the drum is charged. As shown in Figure 2, this bias voltage and current is supplied by the CC/PCC-HVPS (PSHV-L2). The power supply output voltage can vary between -300 VDC and -1000 VDC. The output current is a constant 700 microamperes. The IOT Drive provides the +24 VDC power source to the power supply. It also controls and monitors the output voltage. Figure 2 shows the location of the CC/PCC-HVPS (PSHV-L2) The Corotron Grid is coated with a neutralizing agent (catalyst) so that it cannot give off any substance that would be detrimental to the life of the Photoreceptor.
Charging
1/05 10-112
Figure 3 ESV circuit Charge Corotron HVPS DEVELOPER BIAS HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (PSHV-L1) CC/PCC HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (PSHV-L2) The CC/PCC-HVPS (HVPS-L2) provides a regulated constant current to the Charge Corotron. This is typically in the range of 630 to 770 microamperes. To accomplish this, the power supply charges the Charge Corotron to -300 to -1000 VDC. The output current and voltage are controlled by Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) control signals from the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. Interlocked +24 VDC from the IOT Drive PWBA is the power input from which the high voltage output is generated.
Figure 2 Charge Corotron Grid/Preclean Corotron High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L2) and Developer Bias High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L1) Location (09-095) Charge Corotron Cleaning The Charge Corotron is not cleaned. It is part of the Photoreceptor Drum CRU, or can be changed by a service engineer (ERU). ESV The Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV) consists of an ESV Sensor and an ESV PWBA. The ESV Sensor produces an output which is proportional to the drum surface potential. The ESV PWBA processes this output and provides a signal to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. This output is a scaled representation of the drum surface potential and has a range of 0 - 4.9 VDC.
1/05 10-113
Charging
Development
NOTE: In common practice, the terms toner and developer are often used interchangeably, which can result in confusion. For the purpose of this discussion, the following definitions apply. Developer consists of a mixture of toner particles and carrier beads and exists before developing the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. Toner particles are used to develop the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum and then transfers as the final image onto the copy material. This machine starts with developer (a toner and carrier bead mixture) within the Toner Cartridges and the Developer Housings. For that reason, this documentation will use the term developer throughout the Toner Supply processes, and the term toner for the developed image on the Photoreceptor Drum, the IBT and on the copy material. The Development subsystem consists of four color Developer Housings mounted on a Developer Rotary Assembly. This Rotary Assembly rotates the four individual color Developer Housings, one at a time, into position in order to transfer the developer to the electrostatic latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. (See Developer Rotary Assembly) The development method in this machine is called Semi-Conductive Magnetic Brush (S-CMB) development. It is a compromise between Insulative Magnetic Brush (IMB) and Conductive Magnetic Brush (CMB). The advantages of IMB and CMB are retained with S-CMB. The disadvantages of rough graininess and the CMB disadvantages of brush marks and a non-linear tone reproduction curve are minimized. The high negative charge (VH) on the Photoreceptor Drum represents the background, or nonimage area. This will repel the developer, which is charged at -500 to -565 VDC (VBias). This VBias varies, depending upon humidity and Photoreceptor Drum cycles. NOTE: Vdev (=VL-VBias) and Vclean (=VH-VBias) are always constant. VBias is changed by the VH value. When the Laser beam exposes the image area onto the Drum, it reduces the negative potential charge in the Image area of the drum to approximately -300 VDC (VL). This image area will attract the negatively charged toner from the Developer Roll, creating a developed image for that particular color. The developed image on the Photoreceptor Drum rotates down to the IBT. The developed image will then transfer from the Drum to the IBT at the First Bias Transfer Roll (1st BTR). If there is more than one color in the copy job, these colors will follow the same development and transfer process as just explained, with the different color layers accumulating on top of each other onto the IBT. When all colors have been transferred to the IBT, then the final image will be transferred to the paper in one pass. This is done at the Second Bias Transfer Roll (2nd BTR) which cams up to the IBT, with the copy material passing through this nip. The developer is delivered from the four Toner Cartridges to the Developer Housings by a system of augers. These augers deliver the different toner colors to a Toner Dispenser which funnels the toner into the appropriate Developer Housings. (See Toner Supply.)
Developer Rotary Assembly

The Developer Rotary Assembly contains all four color Developer Housings (YMCK). These are separated by 90 angles in the Rotary Assembly. A 24 V, 4 Phase Stepper Rotary Motor drives the assembly. The Rotary Motor is controlled by 3 signals: Rotary Motor HIGH Rotary Motor ON Rotary Motor CLOCK
The Rotary Motor Clock is a pulse output signal coming from the Rotary Stepper Motor. It is used to determine the Rotary Housing position. The Rotary Assembly rotates once every 2,400 steps. Braking of the Rotary Assembly is performed by directly controlling the stepping-type Rotary Motor. In B&W operation, the Rotary Assembly is mechanically locked via a Rotary Latch Solenoid and gear.
Rotary Assembly
Development Point
Developer Roll Developer Housing Assemblies (4)
Figure 1 Developer Rotor Assembly
Development
1/05 10-114
Developer Rotary Position The Developer Rotary Assembly has a home position that it always returns to at the start of any print job. The home position for the Rotary Assembly places the development point with the Photoreceptor Drum between the Black and Cyan Developer Housing Assemblies. (Black is 45 before the development point and Cyan is 45 past the development point). This allows the Machine Run Control to have a consistent reference point to move the correct color into a development point for each image pass on the Photoreceptor Drum. A flag mounted on the outside of the Rotary Assembly end frame is detected by the Rotary Home Position Sensor. The Rotary Assembly rotates only in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front of the machine. The Rotary Assembly moves a color Developer Housing Assembly into the development point with the clockwise rotating Photoreceptor Drum. When in the development point, the Developer Roll begins to rotate counter clockwise and receives the bias charge. This bias charge causes the toner leave the rotating Developer Roll, developing the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. The carrier beads are mostly held onto by the magnetic polarity of the Developer Roll. One color at a time is transferred to the Photoreceptor Drum and then to the IBT before the next color is used to develop the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. The order that the color moves into the development point with the Photoreceptor Drum is: 1. 2. 3. 4. Yellow (Y) Magenta (M) Cyan (C) Black (K) 2. 3.
53 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Developer Clutch is deenergized and the Main Motor drives the Developer Roll in the Developer Housing.
4.
Rotary Stepper Motor electronically locks the Developer Housing at the Development Point. The latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum is then developed. If any color is not used in the image, the ROS does not write to the Photoreceptor Drum and no Development Bias is applied to the Developer Roll in the Developer Housing for that particular color.
5. 6. 7.
When the Yellow development is completed, the Development Clutch is energized and the Rotary Motor is electronically released. The Rotary Motor rotates the Developer Rotary Assembly clockwise 90 to the Magenta Developer Housing. Steps 3 - 5 is implemented for Magenta, Cyan and Black colors. When Black Developing is completed, the Developer Rotary Assembly resets to Home Position.
The steps for the Rotary Developer Assembly for B/W Copying are as follows: 1. When the Copy process is started, the Developer Rotary Assembly rotates and resets to Home Position. (Home Position = Development Point between Black and Cyan Developer Housings.) The Rotary Motor is switched off and the electric lock of the Developer Rotor is released. Developer Rotary Assembly rotates clockwise 45 (300 steps) to bring the Black Developer Housing to the Development Point. 99 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Development Bias is energized. 53 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Developer Clutch is deenergized and the Main Motor drives the MAG Roll in the Developer Housing.
Black will always be the last color to be transferred to the Photoreceptor Drum (and also laid onto the IBT) for a copy job. This order is required so that Black will be the first layer placed onto the final copy material when transferred from the IBT to the copy material. When a certain color is not used for a color copying job, the Developer Housing for that color is still moved into the development point with the Photoreceptor Drum. No development occurs because the Laser does not mark a latent image on the Drum and no charge is applied to the Developer Roll in the Developer Housing. The exception to this Rotary Assembly rotation sequences is for black only copies. For this type of job, The Rotary Assembly does not stop at any of the other colors (Y, M, C). See Table 1 for the Developer Rotary sequences and refer to Developer Bias and Power Supply for more information on the charging the Development Roll. The steps for the Rotary Developer Assembly for Color Copying are as follows: 1. When the Copy process is started, the Developer Rotary Assembly rotates and resets to Home Position. (Home Position = Development Point between Black and Cyan Developer Housings.) The Rotary Motor is switched off and the electric lock of the Rotary Developer Assembly is released. Developer Rotary Assembly rotates clockwise 135 (900 steps) to bring the Yellow Developer Housing to the Development Point. 99 steps before the Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Development Bias is energized.
4.
When the Black Developer Housing reaches the Development Point, the Rotary Latch (self-holding) Solenoid is energized to lock the Rotary Assembly in place and the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum is developed. When the Black development is completed, the Rotary Latch (self-holding) Solenoid is energized to unlock the Rotary Assembly. The Developer Rotary Assembly resets to Home Position.
5. 6.
2. 3.
1/05 10-115
Development
NOTE: * Rotary Sequence Key for the previous Table: represents the Developer Rotary rotating to the next color Developer Housing Assembly / represents the repeated development by one color, with the Developer Housing Assembly remaining stationary
Developer Housing Assembly Each Developer Housing Assembly is made up of the following components: Toner Entrance Port - accepts replenishment developer from the Rotary Dispenser and Toner Cartridge. Admix Auger - distributes the developer from the Toner Entrance Port to the full length of the Developer Housing Assembly. Supply Auger - distributes the developer to the Developer Roll and remixes the recycled carrier beads from the Photoreceptor Drum with new developer. Developer Roll - collects the developer within the assembly by internal magnets and transfers it to the Photoreceptor Drum for developing the latent image. Trim Bar - scrapes of excess developer from the Developer Roll, leaving a metered amount of developer on the Developer Roll. Trickle Shutter - a small gate that opens to allow waste carrier beads to be dispensed into the Trickle Auger, which empties into the Waste Developer Bottle.
Each Developer Housing Assembly has a unique registration pin to prevent it from being placed in the wrong color location. Figure 2 Developer Rotor Home Positioning Components The user has the option of selecting the type of copying/printing required. These user selected parameters include: B/W and color copying, single or multiple copies, duplex or simplex, different paper sizes, and LEF or SEF. These variables can impact the rotation sequence for the Developer Rotary. Table 3 represents the development sequence for the Developer Assemblies for different types of print jobs. Table 1 Developer Assembly sequence Type of Print/Copy Job Black only copy, single sheet (1 image on IBT) Black only copies, multiple sheets (2 images on IBT) Any or all Colors, single sheet (1 image on IBT) Any or all Colors, multi-sheet 81/2x11 LEF or smaller (2 images on IBT) Rotary Sequence for laying colors * Home Black Home Home Black / Black Home Home Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Home Home Yellow / Yellow Magenta / Magenta Cyan / Cyan Black / Black Home Each Developer Housing Assembly holds approximately 420 grams of developer. Two augers mix the toner and carrier which make up the developer, This helps evenly distribute the developer throughout the length of the assembly. The augers also transport the old developer to the discharge gate as part of the trickle development system. A new type of developer is used for this machine. The color toners are smaller 6.5 micron diameter courser cut particles. The courser cut allows more pigment to be carried, compensating for their smaller size. The black toner particles are 8.5 microns in diameter. The average carrier bead size for all toners is 35 microns. The Developer Roll is hollow Aluminum with five magnet poles inside. The magnet polarity is designed to draw the metal carrier beads, covered with toner, onto the Developer Roll and hold the beads on this roll as it passes the development point. The magnetic draw on the beads is minimized after passing the development point, allowing the used beads to drop off the Developer Roll into the Developer Housing Assembly. A Trim Bar in the Developer Housing Assembly scrapes off the excess developer and is set for a trim gap of 0.7 mm for all colors. There is a gap of 0.5 mm in the Photoreceptor Drum to Developer Roll spacing (DRS). This is factory set and will be field adjustable, if required. The Developer Roll rotates at 1.75 times the speed of the Photoreceptor Drum. In addition, the Developer Roll rotates counter clockwise while the Photoreceptor Drum rotates clockwise.
Development
1/05 10-116
Developer Bias and Power Supply The Developer Bias High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L1) provides a DC voltage with an AC signal superimposed on it. This composite voltage is provided to the developer before it is presented to the Photoreceptor Drum to form the image. These voltages are derived from interlocked +24 VDC provided by the IOT Drive PWBA. The power supplys DC output level is typically in the range of -510 VDC to -560 VDC, but can be set over the range of -205 VDC and -800 VDC. The AC component is 1.0 KV peak-to-peak with a frequency of 9 kHz. As shown in Figure 4, signals from the IOT Drive PWBA control the voltage of the DC component, the voltage of the AC component and the frequency of the AC component. Figure 3 shows the location of the Developer Bias High Voltage Power Supply (PSHV-L1).
Toner Supply
The developer composition (toner and carrier beads) and how the carrier beads are reused in this machine is different from other color machines. The developer that is supplied in the Toner Cartridges consist of both toner and carrier beads mixed together. As the toner is used to develop the electrostatic image, the carrier beads are recycled back into the developer to be remix with new toner and carrier beads. New developer is added to the system as determined by Process Controls using ADC (Automatic Density Control) readings. As new developer is being added to the toner supply system and as the carrier beads are recycled, excess waste carrier beads can accumulate which needs to be siphoned off. The excess waste carrier beads are disposed of to the Waste Carrier Bottle. This Trickle System for developer supply (referred to here as toner supply) is unique to this color machine. Because the Develop Rotor has four Developer Assemblies that are not stationary, the system suppling the developer to the Developer Assemblies is complex. The four colors of developer are stored in individual Toner Cartridges. For each of the four colors, the developer is moved from the Toner Cartridges to the Toner Cartridge Housing, through the Conveyor Auger, to the Rotary Dispenser, out through the Rotary Auger and into the Developer Housing Assembly. The following will explain this process in detail, starting with the Toner Cartridge Unit. Toner Cartridge Unit The Toner Cartridge Unit contains 4 Toner Cartridges and their motors. This unit can be removed from the machine as one complete assembly. This Toner Cartridge Unit contains the following components: (Refer to Figure 4.) 4 Toner Cartridges (one each for yellow, magenta, cyan and black) 4 Cartridge Motors 4 Toner Dispenser Motors 4 Toner Cartridge Housings 3 Conveyor Augers (Yellow does not use this auger) 4 Toner Sensors Associated drive gears
Figure 3 Developer Bias Block Diagram As the AC component of the Developer Bias swings through its high negative values, toner is driven from the Developer Roll to the image areas on the Photoreceptor. As the Bias swings lower negative, excess toner is retrieved from the Photoreceptor. A wire carries the Developer Bias voltage from the Developer Bias PWBA to a Bias Plate at the front of the Developer Rotary Assembly. The center shaft of the Developer Roll makes direct contact with the Bias Plate when the Developer Housing Assembly is in the development point. This direct contact transfers the bias charge to the Developer Roll. Developer Clutch The Developer Clutch is a reversal-type clutch. When the clutch is de-energized, the Main Motor through a gear meshing drives both the magnetic Developer Roll and the internal augers in the Developer Housing. The internal augers mix the toner and carrier beads while the magnetic Developer Roll moves the developer (toner plus carrier) to the Photoreceptor Drum for developing the latent image. The drive from the Developer Clutch to the Developer Roll and augers occurs only when two conditions are met: (1) the roll is in the development point, and (2) there is a latent electrostatic image on the Photoreceptor Drum to be developed.
1/05 10-117
Development
Table 2 Developer Mixture in Toner Cartridges Y Developer Toner by weight Carrier Beads by weight 284 g 37.9 g M/K/C Developer 284 g 66.3 g 350.3 g
Total Developer in new 321.9 g Toner Cartridge
Toner Cartridge Housings (4) (Magenta) C M Y K Dispense Motors (4) (Cyan)
The Cartridge Motors is powered by 24 VDC derived from Interlocked +24 VDC and controlled by enable signals from the IOT Drive PWBA. When the Low Toner Sensor in the Toner Cartridge Housing is activated, the Cartridge Motor runs for: 10 second intervals when the machine is actively making prints. 20 second intervals when the Low Toner Sensor senses low toner levels and when machine power is on and the front Door Interlock is closed.
Toner Cartridge Housing The Toner Cartridge Housing contains: Agitator Auger Paddle Low Toner Sensor (Piezo type, located outside the Toner Cartridge Housing unit)
The agitator and paddle help prevent the developer from becoming compacted. The auger moves the developer to the outlet where the developer falls into the conveyor. These components are driven by a Toner Dispense Motor, one motor for each of the four colors. This motor also drives a Conveyor Auger for transporting the developer out of the Toner Cartridge Housing.
Cartridge Motors (4) (Yellow)
Figure 4 Toner Cartridge Assembly (Back View)
Toner Cartridge Each Toner Cartridge has an Agitator driven by a unique Cartridge Motor. The Agitator serves two functions; it prevents the developer from becoming compacted, and it moves the developer to the outlet port where it falls through to the Toner Cartridge Housing. This Cartridge port shutter closes when the Toner Cartridge is rotated for removal from the machine. Each Toner Cartridge holds a mixture of toner and carrier beads. Table 2 show the composition by weight for each developer that are within the new Toner Cartridges. Principles of Operation 1/05 10-118 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Development
CARTRIDGE MOTOR
AGITATOR
The Conveyor Augers are driven by the Dispense Motors. The Dispense Motors are energized when the IOT CPU PWBA senses low reflective readings from the ADC Sensor for the patch on the IBT.
DISPENSE MOTOR TONER CARTRIDGE
LOW TONER SENSOR
CONVEYOR AUGER
CARTRIDGE HOUSING (LOWER)
Figure 5 Toner Cartridge and Cartridge Housing A piezo electric Low Toner Sensor located under the shutter opening monitors the level of toner in the Toner Cartridge Housing. The IOT CPU PWBA samples the Low Toner Sensor status every 0.1 second while the machine is making and moving the Developer out of the Toner Cartridge Housing into the conveyor. When a low developer level is detected 5 times in succession, the Toner Cartridge Motor is energized for 10 seconds. This moves additional developer from the Toner Cartridge to the Toner Cartridge Housing. When a low developer level is detected 20 times in succession or for longer than 25 seconds, a low toner message is displayed. If the Toner Cartridge is replaced, the low toner message is removed as soon as a low toner level is no longer detected by the sensor 10 times in succession. If 100 seconds of low toner is sensed while the Toner Dispense Motor is running, then the controls will not allow another copy job to be stated. At the end of the current job, a do not copy message is displayed and the copier will not start another job. Conveyer Auger The 4 toner Cartridge Housings are different distances from the Rotary Dispenser. For that reason, there are different lengths of Conveyor Augers and one Cartridge Housing (Y) does not use a Conveyor Auger. Refer to Figure 6. Rotary Dispenser The Rotary Dispenser accepts the four different developers and deposits them into their appropriate Developer Housing Assembly within the Developer Rotary. Figure 7 shows the Rotary Assembly for one color system. As toner is deposited into the Rotary Dispenser by the Conveyor Auger, it is transported out to the Developer Housing Assembly by a Rotary Auger. The Rotary Augers have a Axel shaft that goes to the back side of the Developer Housing Assembly. This shaft has a gear that is driven whenever the Developer Clutch is energized and is powered by the Main Drive. The Rotary Auger rotates at 345 rpm to move the toner quickly from the Rotary Dispenser to the Developer Housing Assembly.
Figure 6 Developer Distribution Path
1/05 10-119
Development
DEVELOPER ROTARY ASSEMBLY DEVELOPER INLET
The carrier beads are brought back into the Developer Housing and remixed with the existing developer. New developer is added to the Developer Housing (see Toner Supply) at a rate determined by readings taken from the ADC patch on the Photoreceptor Drum. Excess waste carrier beads for each Developer Housing are trickled out automatically through a shutter gate into a center Waste Auger when the Developer Housing is at 90 above the development point. When performing black only copying, the black Developer Housing needs to rotate up to the 90 location to remove the depleted waste carrier beads into the center Waste Auger. This is done when: The copy job is completed The Toner Dispense Motor runs continuously for 17 seconds.
AXEL SHAFT
Waste Carrier Bottle The Waste Carrier Bottle receives the waste developer from all four Developer Housings. A magnetic sensor is used to detect a full Waste Carrier Bottle. The sensor is monitored once every second. When the waste carrier full status is detected by the sensor five times in succession, then a caution notice (09-423) for the status of this bottle is sent to the User Interface screen. The machine monitors both the sensor status and the rotating time of the Toner Dispense Motor from this caution status. When a specific accumulated NVM value for the Toner Dispense Motor is reached, then a Waste Carrier Bottle fail signal (09-379) is sent to the User Interface. Toner Supply Control
ROTARY AUGER ROTARY DISPENSER
Figure 7 Rotary Dispenser and Developer Housing Assembly (Example) Trickle System This machine uses a Trickle System for replenishing the developer. This system increases the usable life of the Developer Assemblies. It includes the following: New developer (toner plus carrier beads) is supplied to the Developer Housings by the Toner Supply system. Used carrier beads from the Developer Roll are remixed back in with the new developer at the Developer Housing. Any excess waste carrier beads that accumulates in the Developer Housing is discharged into a central Waste Auger and transported to the Waste Carrier Bottle. This Waste Auger and Waste Carrier Bottle accepts the excess developer from all four colors.
Toner supply is controlled by the IOT CPU PWBA, through the IOT Drive and Dispense PWBAs. The Low Toner Sensor output is routed to an input port on the IOT Drive PWBA, where it can be read by the CPU on the IOT CPU PWBA. Likewise, the CPU controls a port output from the IOT Drive PWBA for both the Cartridge and Dispense Motor control lines. These control lines enable Dispense PWBA circuitry which converts Interlock +24 VDC to 24 VAC, 60 Hz power for the motors. Note that in Figure 9, only the black control and status lines are shown. The yellow, magenta and cyan circuitry is exactly the same.
This system starts with the Toner Cartridges which carry a mixture of both toner and carrier beads. The different colors of developer are transported to the appropriate Developer Housing within the Developer Rotary Assembly. When the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum is developed, the toner is electrostatically attracted to the drum and the metal carrier beads remain on the magnetic Developer Roll.
Development
1/05 10-120
Figure 8 Toner Supply Control Simplified Block Diagram (Black)
ADC (Automatic Density Control)

The ADC Sensor is a Polarized Color Densitometer (PcDM) consisting of a Light Emitting Diode (LED), a phototransistor and a polarizing filter. The ADC Sensor is located in the IBT Assembly. This sensor reads the reflected light from a toner patch placed on the IBT Belt. This reflective reading is used by Process Controls to determine the density level of the image which will then determine the required running times for toner dispensing. The current through the phototransistor is proportional to the amount of light reflected from the developed patch. The current is converted to a voltage level on the ADC Sensor PWB and that voltage signal is sent as two analog signals through IOT Drive PWB to the IOT CPU PWBA where it is used for process control functionality. The ADC Sensor and ADC Sensor PWB are part of the ADC Sensor Assembly. Refer to Figure 10 for a block diagram of the ADC Sensor control. TR0 SENSOR
ADC SENSOR
STEERING ROLL (INSIDE BELT)
IBT BELT DRIVE ROLL (INSIDE BELT)
Figure 9 IBT and Selected Subassemblies Locations ADC patches are made and read: Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 1/05 10-121 Principles of Operation
Development
During Max Setups (in Diagnostics) During Mini Setups During run mode after every 26th copy for A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 inch copies During run mode after every 13th copy for A3 or 11 x 17 inch copies
The readings are used by Process Controls to determine the developer dispensing run time. Refer to Process Controls for more information on this function.
The dynamic range of the ADC Sensor is from 0% to about 80% area coverage. The ADC patches are made at area coverage of 60% (for black toner) or 65% (for yellow, magenta and cyan toner). In addition, for a given coverage, the black patch reflects less light than the remaining colors. These two factors result in differences in sensor outputs: Vpatch, and affects the ratio Vpatch / Vclean. Later circuitry compensates for these differences. The physical positioning of the ADC Sensor is critical. The distance between the ADC Sensor and the IBT Belt must be 8mm, 0.5 mm The sensor angle with the IBT Belt must be less than 2 in the process direction and less than 1 across the belt.
Figure 10 ADC Sensor Simplified Block Diagram
Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT)

Toner Transfer Overview
Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT) is new technology for this type of machine. This technology permits increased color print speed and higher image quality. Using an IBT results in two image transfer points. 1. 2. The first image transfer point is from the Photoreceptor Drum to the IBT (the colors transfer one at a time from the Drum to the IBT.) The second image transfer is the complete image for the IBT to the copy material. (All color layer transfer in one pass.)
After each image is developed on the Photoreceptor Drum, the Drum rotates clockwise to make contact with the IBT Belt, which is rotating counter clockwise. This contact occurs at the First Bias Transfer Roll (1st BTR) position on the Belt. The 1st BTR and Photoreceptor Drum create a nip, through which the IBT Belt passes. The 1st BTR roll always remains in contact with the back side of the IBT Belt, and the IBT Belt is always in contact with the Photoreceptor Drum. (The 1st BTR Roll is cammed away from the Photoreceptor Drum by the IBT lever on the IBT Drawer. This is done when sliding this drawer open or closed.) The 1st BTR inside the IBT Assembly is charged to +32 microamps at +1200 VDC by the 1st BTR HVPS. This causes the negatively charged toner on the PR Drum to be attracted to the surface of the IBT Belt at this 1st BTR point. The charge to the 1st BTR remains on from the start to the end of a job. When all four color image components have been transferred to the IBT, this image is transferred to the final copy material using one pass. This second image transfer takes place where the IBT Belt contacts the Second Bias Transfer Roll (2nd BTR). The 2nd BTR is part of a separate assembly, below the IBT Assembly. This 2nd BTR Assembly includes: Inlet Plate Pre IBT Sensor (for the paper path)
When making color images, one color at a time is developed on the Photoreceptor Drum and then transferred to the IBT before the next color is used to develop the latent image on the Photoreceptor Drum. The IBT Belt accumulates all four separate color images from the Photoreceptor (PR) Drum. During a four color image copy job, the IBT Belt cycles four times to accept the individual colors from the Photoreceptor Drum. Because the toner transfer process occurs in two steps (PR Drum to IBT Belt, then IBT Belt to copy material), the image and the layers of toner on the IBT are reversed from what the finished copy is.
Development, Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT)
1/05 10-122
Cleaning Blade Assembly Second BTR Roll Camshaft Assembly and Cam Sensor Detack (DTS) Comb Lubricating Brush Pre Fuser Sensor (for the paper path) Exit Chute
IBT Assembly
CAUTION The IBT Belt is fragile. It can be damaged by handling with bare hands or having items (i.e. screws, tools or even excess dust/dirt) dropped on it. The IBT Assembly has its own tray with slide tracks which allow this assembly to be pulled out for access and servicing. Figure 2 shows some of the components in the IBT Assembly. Detailed descriptions of the components follow.
IBT Belt
The 2nd BTR Roll cams up to make contact with the IBT Belt. The Main Motor drives both the 2nd BTR Roll and the 2nd BTR Retract Clutch and Shaft. The Shaft with cams rotates, raising and lowering the 2nd BTR Roll when energized by the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs. A Flag on the Shaft passes through a 2nd BTR Retract Home Position Sensor. The status of the Sensor is as follows: Sensor blocked - 2nd BTR Roll is down (retracted from the IBT) Sensor transmits - 2nd BTR Roll is up (contacting the IBT) The IBT uses a carbon-impregnated polyamid belt that carries the image toner from the Photoreceptor (PR) Drum to the paper. This belt holds a residual charge from the First Bias Transfer Roll (BTR), which attracts the toner particles and holds them until that part of the belt reaches the nip between the Second BTR and the Back Up Roll. At that point, the voltage from the Back Up Roll causes the toner particles to be expelled from the Belt to the blank copy material. The Belt has a circumference of 527.91 mm, which is twice the circumference of the PR Drum. At a process speed of 220 mm/sec., the belt takes 2.399 sec. to complete one complete revolution. The belt has two TR0 strips, separated by one-half the belt circumference and located on the back edge of the belt. As shown in Figure 2, there are eight rolls inside the belt: Steering Roll keeps the IBT on track and centered on the rolls. Tension Roll keeps the belt taut. First Idler Roll is passive and directs the belt towards the Photoreceptor Drum. It is located between the Tension Roll and the First BTR Roll. First BTR Roll holds the charge which attracts the toner from the Photoreceptor Drum to the belt Drive Roll is driven by the PR Drum Motor, which causes the IBT Belt to turn. It also helps keep the belt on track. Contact Roll receives the charge from the 2nd BTR HVPS and transfers this charge to the Back Up Roll. Back Up Roll provides a charge for toner transfer from the IBT Belt to the copy material. It also creates a nip with the Second BTR Roll, through which both the IBT Belt and the copy material passes through. Second Idler Roll is passive and positions the belt between the Steering Roll and the Backup Roll/Second BTR nip.
The 2nd BTR HVPS (PSHV-L3) is located in the back of the machine and supplies a charge of approximately -2.2 kVDC to the Contract Roll inside the IBT Assembly (NOT the 2nd BTR Roll). The Contact Roll transfers this charge to the Back Up Roll by contact. The Back Up Roll inside the IBT Assembly remains in contact with the inside of IBT Belt at all times. It is this Back Up Roll that repels the toner image off the IBT Belt onto the copy material. The 2nd BTR cams up to the IBT Belt to create a nip with the IBT Belt and the Back Up Roll behind the Belt. The copy material has the image transferred to it at this 2nd BTR and IBT nip. The copy material holds the toner by a residual static charge. A Detack Comb (DTS) is located on the 2nd BTR Assembly. The purpose of this Detack Comb is to neutralize the copy material and assure the copy material does not tack to the IBT Belt. A DTS HVPS within the Registration Roll Assembly provides a negative charge to the Detack Comb. Most of the machine timing and image quality controls are generated from readings taken of the IBT. The belt has two TR0 marks which pass under a TR0 sensor to provide a timing reference pulse. Also, toner patches are laid down onto the PR Drum, are passed to the IBT Belt, then measured for density by the ADC (Automatic Density Control) Sensor. This allows the machine to maintain a consistent toner level for the same input color.
1/05 10-123
Intermediate Belt Transfer (IBT), IBT Assembly
Figure 1 IBT Belt Rolls and Assemblies Figure 2 HVPS for IBT Assembly
Drive Roll
The Drive Roll is driven by the Drum Motor. As such, Its speed changes to conform to nominal process speeds of as the 220 mm/sec., 130 mm/sec. and 60 mm/sec. depending upon to the copy material in use.
Tension Roll
The Tension Roll is constantly being forced upward, against the IBT Belt, by an arm-and-spring arrangement. This is done to keep the belt tight.
IBT Cleaning Assemblies

After the toner has been passed from the IBT Belt to the blank copy media, the residual toner is removed from the belt by a plastic blade in the IBT Cleaner Assembly. This blade is retracted by the Main Motor when the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs engage the Cleaner Retract Clutch. For color images, the blade touches the belt only one belt rotation in four. The toner falls into the IBT Waste Toner Auger, part of the Waste Toner Auger Junction. (See Cleaning Systems.)
IBT Assembly
1/05 10-124
TR0 Sensor
As shown in Figure 10 and Figure 3, the TR0 Sensor is mounted on the back left side of the IBT Frame Assembly. This sensor monitors two TR0 patches on the IBT to monitor cycle speed. As shown in Figure 4, the sensor output goes to the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. There, it forms the basis for synchronizing all paper transport activities.
Figure 3 TR0 Circuit Block Diagram
IBT/Media Transport Sensors

There are two sensors to detect IBT paper jams. The Pre-IBT Sensor monitors for paper jams between the Registration Roll and the 2nd BTR. Located on the 2nd BTR Inlet Chute. The Pre-Fuser Sensor detects the print as it reaches the Vacuum Transport. An abnormal indication is that the leading edge of the print is not detected by this sensor within approximately 400 msec (at 220 mm/sec. process speed) after the 2nd IBT Sensor detects the same edge. Located in the 2nd BTR Exit Chute.
Figure 4 IBT/Media Transport Sensor Locations
Figure 5 Partial electrical schematic for IBT Sensors In addition to the paper jam sensors for the IBT, there is the ADC (Automatic Density Control) Sensor and the TR0 Sensor. Refer to these sections for more information on these two sensors.
1/05 10-125
IBT Assembly
Motors
Xerographics Motors
Table 1 lists the motors associated with the Xerographic function. Table 1 Xerographics Drive Motors Motor Function Activated By Low Toner Sensor is activated. Low Density ADC patches on IBT Belt, Mini Set-up or normal toner supply Deactivated By Ten seconds after being activated Acceptable ADC patches on IBT Belt. Cartridge Motors (4) Each motor drives a Toner Cartridge Agitator Toner Dispense Motors (4) Drives the following in the Toner Cartridge Housing: Cartridge Agitator Main Motor Paddle Cartridge Auger Conveyor Auger Start of Job End of Job
Cleaning Systems
Residual toner is removed from the Photoreceptor Drum by using a Preclean Corotron, a Cleaning Blade and a Brush. The IBT uses a camming Cleaning Blade. A Waste Toner Auger system is used to transport the waste toner to a Waste Toner Bottle. In addition, there is a Developer Waste Bottle which accumulates overflow developer from the Developer Assemblies. This is a part of the Trickle System. Refer to that section for more information on that function. The carrier beads that come back off each Developer Roll during the development process are recycled into the corresponding Developer Housing Assembly and are remixed with the other developer for reuse.
Photoreceptor Cleaning
The components of the cleaning system for the Photoreceptor Drum includes: (See Figure 1.) Bead Pickup Roll (BPO) Preclean Corotron (PCC) Photoreceptor Clean Brush Flicker Bar Blade Auger Duct Erase Lamp (Located in the machine, not mounted on Photoreceptor Drum)
Drives the following within the Developer system: Trickle Auger IBT Cleaner Retract IBT Cleaner Auger (Front) IBT 2nd BTR IBT 2nd BTR Retract Waste Toner Auger Bottle Entrance Auger Bottle Inner Auger IBT Cleaner Auger Rear Drum Cleaner Auger Rear IBT Oil Roll Retract
After the Drum has transferred the image to the IBT, the Drum turns past a Preclean Corotron. This single wire Corotron neutralizes any charge on the Drum so that the Clean Brush and scraper Blade can clean the Drum more easily. The rotating Brush cleans off the Drum and carries toner residue away that the Blade scrapes off. A Flicker Bar cleans the toner particles off the Brush and an auger moves this waste toner out of the Xerography module to the Waste Toner Auger unit for transport to the Waste Toner Bottle.
Rotary Motor
Drives the following: Developer Rotary Assembly Drives the following: Photoreceptor Drum IBT Start of Job End of Job
Drum Motor
Motors, Cleaning Systems
1/05 10-126
Cleaner Assembly PHOTORECEPTOR CLEANING BRUSH After the Photoreceptor Drum rotates past the PCC, the residual toner is brushed and scrapped off the Drum surface by the Photoreceptor Cleaning Brush and a plastic Cleaning Blade. The Cleaning Brush picks up the loose toner from the Drum and the Clean Blade. This brush is 19mm in diameter. It is driven by the Main Motor and rotates counterclockwise at approximately 249 RPM. It forms a nip measurement with the Photoreceptor Drum of 6 to 9 mm. After the brush contacts the drum, it rotates past the Flicker Plate, which dislodges the toner from the Brush. This toner residue falls onto the Drum Auger, part of the Waste Toner Auger Junction. After contacting the brush, drum is cleaned by a plastic blade. The Cleaning Blade is 22 mm thick polyrethane and makes a 20 to 24 angle with the Photoreceptor surface. The blade is always against the drum and does not retract. This blade angle was selected to provide effective cleaning without filming. AUGER BPO ROLL Erase Lamp The Erase Lamp is mounted in the machine and is not a part of the Photoreceptor Drum CRU. The Lamp is an LED array and is used to irradiate the Drum, which erases the remaining electrical charge. Photoreceptor Drum Cleaning Electrical Control PRECLEAN COROTRON All of the mechanisms to clean the Photoreceptor Drum are either passive or are constantly driven by the Main Motor. This motor is activated by the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs whenever a job is started.
CLEANING BLADE PHOTORECEPTOR DRUM
IBT Cleaning
After the IBT has transferred the image to the copy material, it rotates counter clockwise past a IBT Clean Blade. Refer to the IBT Cleaning Assemblies section for more information.
Waste Toner System

Figure 1 Photoreceptor Cleaning Components and Location Bead Pick Off Roll (BPO) The first cleaning function on the Photoreceptor Drum takes place after the latent image has been developed with toner and before the image transfers to the IBT. A metal Bead Pick Off Roll is used to pick off the toner agglomerates. This is an 8 mm diameter Stainless Steel roll the rotates counter clockwise at 44 rpm, against the direction of the Photoreceptor Drum. This roll is driven by the Main Motor during the print job. The drum-to-roll space is 0.5 mm 0.1 mm. Preclean Corotron After the Drum has transferred the image to the IBT, the Drum turns past a Preclean Corotron. The Preclean Corotron (PCC) is a single wire corotron which neutralizes any charge on the Photoreceptor prior to the cleaning zone so that the Photoreceptor can be more easily cleaned of residual toner. Preclean Corotron power comes from the CC/PCC-HVPS (HVPS-L2 - see Figure 3) that supplies the Charge Corotron. Energy to the PCC is supplied as a constant current type DC bias. Machine Run Control regulates the DC current based on the humidity level. In actual operation, the DC current is controlled within the average operation at -300 microamps constant currant. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 The Waste Toner System consist of the following: Waste Toner Bottle with internal Coil Auger Waste Bottle Sensor (photo sensor) Waste Bottle Full Sensor (photo sensor) Waster Toner Auger Junction Assembly components Jointed Slanting Auger Jointed auger from the Photoreceptor Jointed auger from the IBT Bottle Auger Drive gears and timing belt Auger Sensor (photo sensor) Photoreceptor Cleaning Brush Principles of Operation This machine uses a cleaning system to dispose of waste toner from both the Photoreceptor Drum and the IBT. The residue cleaned from both of these components is transported by one common system and disposed of into one common waste bottle.
Photoreceptor Drum cleaning components -
1/05 10-127
Cleaning Systems
Photoreceptor Scraping Blade Flicker Bar Bead Pick-off Roll (BPO) Pre-Clean Corotron Photoreceptor Waste Auger IBT Scraping Blade (cammed) IBT Waste Auger Film Blade (thin Mylar seal)
Figure 3 shows part of the Waste Toner Auger Junction Assembly which is located in the back of the machine. This system uses separate jointed augers to acquire waste toner from the Photoreceptor Drum and the IBT. These augers transport the waste toner the Slanting Auger, which transports the toner to the Bottle Auger. The Bottle Auger transports the waste toner into Waste Toner Bottle. The Waste Toner Bottle is a CRU with the capacity to hold 2600cc of toner residue with full volume at 80% (expected bottle life to full at 40Kpv). As shown in Figure 1, two augers are used to fill the bottle: Bottle Auger - This feeds the waste toner into the bottle and is a part of the Auger Junction Assembly. Coil Auger - This is inside the bottle and is part of it. It helps distribute and pack the waste toner within the bottle.
IBT cleaning components -
The Toner Recovery Auger rotation is monitored by an Auger Sensor. A semi-circle flag attached to the end of the Auger rotates through the Sensor as the Auger rotates. The Sensor is sampled 10 times (0.1 sec. cycle) every 2 seconds while the Drum Motor rotates. An Auger caution (09-424) is indicated at the User Interface when the Sensor does not detect movement (high/low status of rotating flag) 4 times continuously. An Auger Broken fail status (09-358) is indicated when the number of copies reaches a specified value after the caution status is activated and remains.
The Main Motor drives the jointed augers, the Slanting Auger the Bottle Auger and the Coil Auger. This motor is energized at the start of a copying or printing job. The Waste Toner Sensor is a photoelectric sensor that checks for the presence of the Waste Toner Bottle. This is done when the machine is powered on and the Front Interlock Switch is closed. A No Waste Bottle failure (09-374) is indicated when the sensor does not see the Bottle. The Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor is monitored 3 times a second while the Drum Motor rotates. When the sensor detects a full status continuously for 3 seconds, then a near full caution (09-420) is indicated at the User Interface. After the caution status, the machine counter monitors and compares to an NVM value the following cycles to determine a Waste Bottle Full statusfail (09-376): Toner Dispense Motor run time Number of copies
The near full and full status for the Waste Toner Bottle is reset by using the same bottle sampling method, and the bottle is sensed empty 2 or more times per second.
Figure 2 Junction Assembly for Waste Toner Disposal
Cleaning Systems
1/05 10-128
Air Flow
The air flow system used in this machine performs the following functions: WASTE TONER BOTTLE AUGER Eliminates the toner and dust particles that float around inside the machine Discharges the ozone generated by the Corotrons Provides machine cooling Provides suction for paper transport
COIL AUGER
There are a total of five fans used to vent or cool various parts of the machine. In addition to the fans, this system consists of ducts to channel the air flow, filters to collect particle contaminants and safety interlock switches. In general, the air is drawn into the machine from the front and it exits the back. The five fans in this machine are: Charge Corotron Intake Fan Fuser Intake Fan Fuser Exhaust Fan Suction Blow IIT Fan (See Imaging)
WASTE TONER BOTTLE
Charge Corotron Intake Fan

The located on the inside of the front door, closest to the door hinge. It draws the room air into the machine, directing it through a filter that is attached to the Waste Toner Bottle and into the Charge Corotron Duct system. This Duct system for the Photoreceptor Drum draws the ozone away from both the Charge Corotron and the Preclean Corotron. A duct is also around the Seal Roll to extract any stray toner residue prior to the Drum transferring the developed image to the IBT.
Fuser Intake and Exhaust Fans

Two fans remove heat generated by the three heated rollers of the Fuser Assembly. The Fuser Intake Fan is located on the inside of the front door, furthest away from the hinge. It draws room air into the Fuser Duct system. The Fuser Exhaust Fan is located by the top right side of the machine, at the exit side of the Fuser Duct System. The Fuser Duct sits above the Fuser Assembly drawing the radiant heat generated by the Fuser away from the other components within the machine.
Figure 3 Waste Toner Bottle and Associated Augers
Suction Blower
The Suction Blower is located on the bottom, right side of the back of machine. It is a 24 VDC fan that draws the air out of the machine, taking the air from the ducts for the Photoreceptor Drum and the Vacuum Transport. The duct before this fan contains a three part ozone and dust filter.
Air System Electrical Control

As shown in Figure 1, the Fuser Fan is powered by unswitched +12 VDC directly from the AC Driver PWBA. Therefore, anytime that the machine is plugged in and the machine circuit breaker is closed, the fan is running. The FAN HI/LO speed control originates from the IOT Drive PWBA and is routed to through the AC Driver PWBA.
1/05 10-129
Cleaning Systems, Air Flow
The Suction Blower, Rotary Fan, Fuser Intake Fan and Charge Corotron Fan are all controlled by the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs. +12 VDC, +24 VDC and +5 VDC power originates at the IOT Low Voltage Power Supply, but is routed through the IOT Drive PWBA. Fan power is not interlocked. Therefore, when machine doors are open, the fans still run.
Figure 1 IOT Fans Simplified Block Diagram
Air Flow
1/05 10-130
Process Controls
Overview
The purpose of Process Controls is to maintain consistent image density and color balance. Control of the image density is more critical for color images then it is for black copies. Slight variations in any color density (C, M, Y) can result in a significant hue shift in the final color image. Process Controls has two primary monitoring and control functions: Electrostatic and ROS LED Quantity Control - The surface electrical potential of Photoreceptor Drum monitored by the ESV sensor. And setting the intensity of the ROS LED so that the Electrostatic patch on the Drum is within the target value for the exposed background charge (Vm). Developability Control - The supply of developer and the control of toner density and gradation on the IBT as monitored by the ADC Sensor.
The Set Up procedures are as follows: 1. Setting Target Values: Accounting to the number of Photoreceptor Drum cycles and the humidity as sensed by the EVN Sensor, the machine sets target values for Drum Surface electrical potential (Vh and Vm), Development Bias for each color, ASG Bias, and density of the ADC Patch. Setting Grid Voltage: The Grid voltage of the Charge Corotron is calculated so that the Drum surface electrical potential meets the target values as established in step 1. Setting ROS LED Quantity: An electric potential background voltage (Vh) Patch is created on the Photoreceptor Drum and read by the ESV Sensor in step 2. The light quantity of the ROS LED is calculated so that the exposed image voltage (Vm) of that Patch meets the target values as established in step 1. Correction of ASG Bias: The ASG Bias target values for each color established in step one is corrected by the actual readout value of the Patch on the Drum. Setting the Target Value for the ADC Density Patch: The target electrical potential of the ADC Density Patch, as read by the ADC Sensor on the IBT Assembly is done.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Electrostatic and ROS LED Quantity Control The basic purpose of Electrostatic Control is to maintain the Photoreceptor Drum unexposed background voltage (Vh) and the exposed image voltage (Vm) constant over time. This function monitors and controls the electrostatic charge level on the Photoreceptor Drum and the level of exposure to create the latent electrostatic image. This drum charge level is read by the Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV). The drum charge is applied by the Charge Corotron, with the Corotron Wire suppling a constant voltage and the Corotron Grid Bias adjusting the voltage to various levels in order to maintain a constant background voltage on the drum. A background charge (Vh) is to be maintained by Electrostatic Control at the Photoreceptor Drum. This is done by adjusting the Charge Corotron Grid Bias (Vg). During setups, Electrostatic Control adjusts the Charge Corotron Grid Bias (Vg) to various levels and reads the resulting Photoreceptor voltage using the Electrostatic Voltmeter (ESV). With a Developer Bias of -500 VDC, this results in a cleaning field (Vclean) of 150 volts. This cleaning field is the potential difference which causes toner particles to return to the Developer Roll from the background areas of the electrostatic latent image. The exposed image charge (Vm) is the electrostatic voltage level on the Drum image area with a 50% density. Electrostatic Control is always trying to maintain Vm by adjusting the Laser Diode power level after the Vh is set. During the machine Set Up Cycle, target values are established for Charge Corotron Grid voltages and the light quantity of the ROS LED, accounting to both temperature and humidity variables as sensed by the Environmental Sensor (EVN). Once these target values are established, then the following are set: Development Bias for each color ASG Bias Electrical potential of the ADC Density Patch
Developability Control This function monitors and controls the dispensing of developer in order to control the density of the developed image. The monitoring is done from two inputs: Automatic Density Control (ADC) - This measures the density of the developed reflective patch on the IBT by the ADC Sensor. The Gain of the ADC Sensor is adjusted during the Set Up cycle. Image Count Dispensing Control (ICDC) - This provides a pixel count for an image to help determine the demand for the various color developers. This is done during the copy cycle.
The supply of developer to the Xerographics process is controlled by Image Coverage Dispense Control (ICDC), and the reflective readings off the IBT Belt by the ADC Sensor. The following steps are performed for the Toner Supply Control: 1. ADC Sensor set up for the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 2. The ADC Sensor reads the reflective density of the clean IBT Belt (non-developed). This density reading is check in LUT to be in range or the high and low limit values. The gain of the ADC sensor is adjusted when the density readings are too high or low. When the ROS Laser exposes the Photoreceptor Drum, the number of pixels is calculated for each color. These pixel counts is converted to a rotation time of the Developer Dispense Motor for each color.
Image Coverage Dispense Control (ICDC) is implemented during the copying cycle.
3.
ADC Set Up Cycle is performed by reading the actual reflective density of the developed patch on the IBT Belt. This reading is used to calculate the demand for the Developer. An ADC Patch is formed on the IBT in a location between the copying images. All colors are laid down in the same patch and each is read by the ADC Sensor. The densities for the ADC Patch on the Belt is read and calculated against the reading in the non-developed part of the IBT (clean IBT). Principles of Operation
1/05 10-131
Process Controls
The calculated ADC Density from the IBT is converted to a rotation time of the Developer Dispense Motor for each color.
Refer to the following Figure 1 for an illustrative overview of how Electrostatic and Developability Controls function.
Figure 1 Process Controls overview
Process Controls
1/05 10-132
There are several different control routines which Process Controls runs in order to maintain consistent image density and color balance. The following Table lists the routines and shows when and what is performed. Table 1 Process Controls routines CONTROL ROUTINE Max Set Up WHEN PERFORMED Performed in Diagnostics by the Service Representative At machine install After changing the ADC Sensor, ENV Sensor, Developer Housings or developer materials WHAT IS PERFORMED Any or all the following subroutines can be performed: ESV Sensor check Environmental Sensor (ENV) check Vh/Vm Setup ADC Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Setup ADC Setup IOT Hi-light Setup Color Balance Setup
Table 1 Process Controls routines CONTROL ROUTINE Run Mode Control WHEN PERFORMED Runs automatically during all jobs WHAT IS PERFORMED The following items are controlled: Vm patch is made and laser diode (LD) power is adjusted about every 12 IBT cycles and at the end of every job, depending upon paper size. Toner dispensing is controlled by pixel count (ICDC) and periodic ADC readings (approx. every 13 copies, depending upon paper size) Using the same patch readings a in previous reading, set TRC Cont2
Mini Setup
During repair or cleaning of the xerographics During any service call as a precaution measure Adjust color density
Runs automatically at the start of the first job after: Power up, if the Fuser temperature has dropped below 120C Rest (Stand-by Mode) of more than 4 hours
Two subroutines run in the order listed: Vh/Vm Setup Two patches are made for each color and read by the ADC to determine the amount of toner to dispense Using the same patch readings as in previous routine, set TRC Cont 1
Setup Mode
Most of the Process Controls routines run as setup routines. There are other routines that run during Run Mode or during Standby Mode. The Setup Mode will be split into two groups: Setup routines in Diagnostics - These are procedures that are performed by the Service Representative while running Diagnostics routines. Setup routines that run automatically - These are procedures which Process Controls will run automatically and are a subgroup of Diagnostics.
When Fuser temp is less than 120C
Checkup
Runs automatically at the start One Subroutine runs: Vh/Vm Setup of the first job after: Power up, if the Fuser temperature is above ____C A paper jam 30 minutes of elapsed time since the last Checkup end of a job run
Setup routines in Diagnostics The Service Representative enters Max Set Up from the Diagnostics menu to perform the balance of the Setup routines. The Max Set Up menu includes nine (9) routines: Table 2 Max Setup Routines Diagnostic Code dC945 dC934 Description IIT Calibration ADC/AGC Setup Contents IIT and CCD Calibration, and White Reference Adjustment Adjusts ADC Sensor gain to get a constant Vclean
1/05 10-133
Process Controls
Table 2 Max Setup Routines Diagnostic Code dC933 Description VH/VM Setup Contents Adjusts VG/LD/BIAS to achieve the target VH, VM Changes VH/VM target to extend Development and Photoreceptor life. Changes ADC target by Environmental Sensor (humidity) Changes ASG Bias to keep V10% constant Adjusts Highlight legible and in/out balance by ASG Bias Print PCON pattern (w/o LUT) and shows ADC patch values. Makes a TRC LUT based on 2 ADC patches on the IBT Belt. If ADC is >D60% (0.3) Tone Up/Tone Down is required (w/o paper) Adjusts density by TRC LUT offset manually Print PCON pattern with LUT for TRC adjustment Adjusts a center value of user color balance mode (for Digital Copier only)
Checkup There is only one routine in the automatic Checkup routine. This routine is Vh/Vm Setup described previously. This runs because the electrostatics need to be checked more often than developability. There are three separate conditions which will cause a Checkup to run: 1. When power is switched on to the machine and the Fuser temperature is above 120C, a Checkup will run automatically. This condition occurs when the power has been off for a short time and the Fuser has not had the time to cool down. A full Mini Setup is not required for this condition. A Checkup will run after a paper jam has occurred. Whenever 30 minutes has elapsed since the last Checkup.
dC918 dC923 dC922
IOT Highlight Setup ProCon PG TRC CONT
2. 3.
Run Mode There are 3 routines which run while copies are being made. Process Controls uses these routines to monitor and adjust the electrostatics and developability parameters in order to maintain copy quality. These routines are: LD CONT, Toner Dispense Control and TRC Control. Standby Mode When the machine is resting in Standby, there are no setup routines running and none of the electrostatic or developability parameters need to be controlled. The only function Process Controls is doing during Standby is keeping track of elapsed time. This is done to track the time between jobs to determine if a Checkup or Mini Setup is required.
dC924 dC939 dC919
TRC Adjust TRC Check PG Color Balance
Setup routines that run automatically Process Controls must automatically perform setup operations at frequent intervals in order to maintain image quality. The setup routines which run automatically are one of two types, depending on the conditions: Mini Setup or a Checkup. Mini Setup The Mini Setup consist of three subroutines: 1. Vh/Vm Setup This electrostatic routine is the same as DC933. This routine may result in new set values for the Charge Corotron Grid Voltage (Vg) and Laser Diode power (LD) to maintain a Vh equal to -650 volts and a Vm approximately equal to -350 volts (voltage varies with humidity and Photoreceptor Drum cycles). 2. ADC Patch readings This developability routine causes ADC patches to be made for each color. The patches are measure by the ADC and if the values are different than the target values, the Run time dispensing algorithm is adjusted. See Run time toner dispensing for more information. 3. TRC CONT 1
Process Controls
1/05 10-134
Overview
The Fuser bonds the toner to the copy material (paper or transparency) by applying heat and pressure to the toner and copy material.
The Fusing Process

The copy with the unfused toner is transported from the Intermediate Belt Transport (IBT) by the Vacuum Transport. The Vacuum Transport moves the copy to the Inlet Chute where the lead edge of the copy is guided into the nip of the Fuser. The Pressure Roll is cammed up into the Heat Roll to create a nip or a Contact Arc between the two rollers. This Contact Arc serves two functions: Creates a relatively large roller contact area (about 10.3 mm) in which to apply heat and pressure to the copy for the fusing process. Directs the lead edge of the copy down to assist in releasing it from the Heat Roll.
Functions of the Fuser Subassembly

This Fuser chapter will describe the following functions: The Fusing Process Mechanical Drives Copy Transport and Sensors Temperature Control and Power Usage Camming of Rollers Fuser Release Agent Web Cleaning of the Heat Roll Copy Exit
Both the Heat Roll and Pressure Roll apply heat and pressure to the copy. This action fuses the toner into the paper. The Heat Roll and Pressure Roll are heated from the inside by their own Quartz Lamp. There is also a metal External Heat Roll that is heated internally by a Quartz Lamp. The External Heat Roll cams into contact with the top of the Heat Roll to help maintain a consistent surface temperature on the Heat Roll. This machine can handle a wide variety of paper weights and material types. The different materials and weights often require different dwell times in the Fuser Contact Arc to correctly fuse the toner to the various materials. To achieve these different dwell times, three different transport speeds are used in the Fuser. The three Fuser transports speeds are: 220 mm per second (nominal) - Normal Paper Mode providing normal fusing speed for copy weights up to 105 gsm (28 lb bond). B/W, B/W Transparencies and all Color. Note, this speed equals approximately 1 revolution per second of the Heat and Pressure Rolls. 130 mm per second (nominal) - Heavy Weight Paper Mode providing slower fusing speed for copy weights of 106 - 163 gsm (28 lb - 90 lb index), plus other special materials. Both B/W and Color. Note, this speed equals approximately 1 revolution per 2 seconds of the Heat and Pressure Rolls. 60 mm per second (nominal) - Extra Heavy Weight Paper Mode providing the slowest fusing speed for copy weights of 164 - 250 gsm (>90 lb - 140 lb index or 90 lb cover), Both B/W and Color, plus Color Transparency. Note: this speed equals approximately 1 revolution per 3 seconds of the Heat and Pressure Rolls.
Contact Arc
The Pressure Roll is raised into the Heat Roll to form the Contact Arc. The outer core of both rolls are covered with silicon rubber. Because the Heat Roll rubber layer is thicker (3 mm) than the Pressure Roll (2 mm), the Pressure Roll sinks into the Heat Roll. This forms a Contact Arc (a Heat Roll indentation) that curves away from the Heat Roll. When the copy leaves the Fuser nip, the copy curls towards the Pressure Roll because the Contact Arc is curved in that direction. This paper curl towards the Pressure Roll helps strip the fused copy from the Heat Roll. The size of the Contact Arc (nip widths of 9.8 mm at the center and 10.3 mm at the ends) provides a relatively large surface area for fusing. This increased surface area enables for a faster copy transport speed. The width of the Contact Arc is critical for proper fusing. When the Contact Arc is too narrow, there is not enough heat and pressure applied to the copy for fusing to occur, and there is a tendency for the copies to wrap around the Heat Roller. A Contact Arc that is too wide results in excessive fusing and a tendency for the copy to wrap around the Pressure Roll, creating a paper jam.
Figure 1 Fuser Cross Section View
1/05 10-135
Overview, The Fusing Process
The Contact Arc adjustment is done by raising or lowering the end support brackets on the Pressure Roll with two adjustment screws. This bracket and the Pressure Roll cam up into the Heat Roll. See the Contact Arc adjustment procedures in the Service Manual. The Heat Roll has a light coating of oil applied to its outer surface. The oil helps prevent the toner and paper from sticking to the Heat Roll. The metering of the oil is important in preventing toner contamination on the rollers, copy jams and an excessive coating of oil on the copy. Refer to Fuser Release Agent section for more information.
Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies

Mechanical Drives
There are four motors that operate the Fuser functions. The motors, their functions and what activates/deactivates the motors are listed in Table 1 Table 1 Fuser Drives Motor Fuser Motor Function Drives the following: Heat Roll Exit Motor Pressure Roll Vacuum Transport Oil Pick-up Roll Fuser Exit Rolls Activated By Deactivated By TR0 signal for first Trail edge of last color sheet passing the Fuser Exit Sensor or the Heat Roll warming up to Ready Temperature for the next color job. Print Start Button Drum Motor off signal
Drives the following: Inverter 1 Roll Pressure Roll Camming Machine Exit Roll
Retract Motor
External Heat Roller Cam
TR0 signal for first Trail edge of last color sheet passing the Fuser Exit Sensor or the Heat Roll warming up to Ready Temperature for the next color job. Fuser Exit Sensor ON ON time ended by S/W timer
Web Motor
Web Take-Up Roller
The Fuser Motor is controlled by the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs. Motor operation is synchronized with the TR0 signal from the IBT Belt. Through gearing, the Fuser Motor drives the Heat Roller, Pressure Roller, Vacuum Transport, Fuser Exit Rollers and Oil Pick-up Roll. Therefore, the Fuser Motor drives all of the copy transport mechanisms entering, within and exiting the Fuser Assembly. This means that the three different copy transport speeds will always be synchronized in the Fuser area. The Exit Motor drives the Pressure Roller Cam and the Exit Rollers for the machine. Through gearing and a clutch, the Exit Motor rotates a shaft with eccentric cams at each end. These cams lift the Pressure Roll up into the Heat Roll forming the Fuser Nip. Brackets and adjustment screws at each end of the Pressure Roll Assembly allows for Fuser Nip adjustment without having to remove an of the Fuser Assembly from the machine. Refer to the Contact Arc adjustment in your service manual for this procedure.
The Fusing Process, Functional Description of Fuser
1/05 10-136
The Pressure Roller Cam is a clutch-driven shaft with cams on each end. When rotated, it raises and lowers the Pressure Roller. Attached to the shaft is a flag that passes through an optical sensor. The sensor is blocked by the flag and indicates the Pressure Roller is cammed up and in contact with the Heat Roller. The normal position of the Pressure Roll is away from the Heat Roll when the fusing process is not required. For the 220 mm/sec. transport speed), the Pressure Roll remains in contact with the Heat Roll during the print run. For the 130 mm/ sec and 60 mm/sec transport speeds, the Pressure Roll cams away from the Heat Roll between copies within a print run. The Retract Motor rotates an eccentric cam shaft that is used to raise and lower the External Heat Roll against the Heat Roll. A flag on the end of this shaft actuates an optical sensor to signal that the External Heat Roll is in the correct position. See Camming of Rollers section for more details. The Web Motor drives the Take-up Roll on the Web Assembly. This motor pulls the Web material across the Heat Roll and Cleaning Roll. Refer to the Web Cleaning of the Heat Roll for more information on the Web subassembly.
Figure 1 Fuser Motors Electrical Block Diagram Table 2 Fuser Motor Control Lines and Condition On 0 1 1 1 1 Sel 1 X 0 0 1 1 Sel 2 X 0 1 0 1 CLK N/A 545.37 Hz N/A 1182.31 Hz 2000.8 Hz Fuser Motor Operating Condition Motor Off 59.82 mm/sec process speed Not used 130 mm/sec process speed 219.47 mm/sec process speed
1/05 10-137
Copy Transport and Sensors

The unfused print is transported from the IBT Belt to the Fuser by the Vacuum Belt. A Fuser Entrance Sensor just before the Vacuum Transport Assembly is used to detect paper jams from the IBT by sensing the lead edge and trail edge of the copy. The lead edge of the copy is guided into the Contact Arc of the Fuser by the Inlet Chute. Stripper Fingers on the Pressure Roller and Heat Roller help prevent the copy from wrapping around these Rollers. As the copy leaves the Fuser nip, the lead edge enters the nip of the Fuser Exit Rollers. A Fuser Exit Sensor detects the lead edge of the copy as it leaves the Fuser Exit Rollers. This sensor looks for the lead edge of the copy as it exits the Fuser. If the lead edge is more than 20 ms late to this sensor, the Fuser will stop, the Fuser nip will open and a jam error code will be generated. The quick stopping of the Fuser helps prevent the copy from getting wrapped around the Heat or Pressure Rolls. Copy jams of this type can always be cleared from the Fuser entrance area. Refer to Standby Power, Section 1 for information on machine safety interlocks. 50 100 130 160 180
Table 3 Fuser Thermistor Resistance Values Thermistor Temperature (C) Thermistor Resistance (kOhms) 10 - 40 5.7 - 6.9 2.46 - 2.95 1.22 - 1.35 0.78 - 0.87 The Heat Roll (HR) is 65mm in diameter, with a 4.5mm aluminum thick wall and 3mm Silicon Rubber base coating and a layer of Viton on the outside. The Heat Roll has priority over the other two rolls for power required for the heat lamp. The Heat Roll has its own drive motor for copy transport. The Pressure Roll (PR) is 65mm in diameter, with a 4.5mm aluminum thick wall and a 2mm Silicon Rubber base coating and a layer of Viton on the outside. The Pressure Roll is mounted on brackets, which cam up to the bottom of the Heat Roll to create the Fuser Contact Arc. The Pressure Roll is gear driven by the Fuser Motor. The External Heat Roll (EHR) is a 23mm diameter stainless steel roll with a 2.5mm thick wall. Its purpose is to help regulate the surface temperature of the Heat Roll by applying additional heat directly to the surface of the Heat Roll. This reduces variations in temperature of the Heat Roll surface. The External Heat Roll rotation comes from direct contact with the motor driven Heat Roll.
Temperature Control and Power Usage

The Fuser Assembly includes three heated rollers. Each of these rollers have Tungsten Halogen Quartz Lamps in their centers, and the heat generated by the lamp migrates to the surface of the roller for the fusing process. Fuser temperature control is complicated and as shown in Figure 3. there are four classes of required components: 1. 2. 3. 4. Thermistors to measure the temperature of each Fuser roll. Lamps to heat the rolls Control hardware and software to read the temperature and switch the lamps on and off. Thermostats to prevent the Fuser from catastrophically overheating due to a component failure.
To monitor and regulate the Fuser heating cycles, each roll has two thermistors (Table 3) and a thermostat on or near the external surfaces of the rolls. The functions of each are as follows: Control Thermistors - These determine the nominal set and run temperatures of the associated roll. The current through these devices is monitored by the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. These are in direct contact with each roll. Overheat Thermistors - These are also monitored by the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs. When the current through one of these devices reaches a particular value, the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs attempt to completely shut off the heater for the associated roll. This occurs when the thermistors sense a temperature of 230 C or more. These Thermistors are in direct contact with each roll. Overheat Thermostats - These are Fail-Safe switches. When a Thermostat senses an overheat condition (>230 C), it opens and disconnects power from the associated heat lamp. the Thermostats are spaced approximately 3 mm from the surface of each Roll. These thermostats cannot be reset. Table 3 Fuser Thermistor Resistance Values Thermistor Temperature (C) 20 Principles of Operation Thermistor Resistance (kOhms) 102 - 150 1/05 10-138 Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Fuser Not Ready - At least one of the HR, PR and/or EHR is below its Not Ready Temperature. (See Table 4.)
The Fuser Ready state can be divided into two substates: Standby - The Fuser Motor isnt running. Run - The Fuser Motor is running.
The Fuser Not Ready state can be divided into three substates: Preheat - The Fuser lamps are heating the rolls to their Preheat Temperatures. (See Table 4.) These temperatures are below the Ready Temperatures. This is done as a means of reducing First Copy Out time. Warm-up - The Fuser lamps are heating the rolls to their Ready Temperatures. Stop - All Fuser lamps are shut off due to a paper jam, a machine failure has occurred or a machine interlock is open. Heat Roll Empty Rotation - When printing small copy media sizes, heat will be transferred to the media from isolated parts of the Heat Roll. Over time, this may cause the temperature of the HR surface to become uneven. Therefore, under certain conditions, the Fuser will perform a Empty Rotation Operation for approximately 40 seconds. This allows the EHR to make the HR surface temperature more uniform. This only occurs if the HR temperature is above the HR Empty Rotation Operation Floor Temperature. Primary and Secondary Control Temperatures - Control temperatures are the temperatures that the IOT Control PWBA attempts to maintain during Fuser Run. Each of the rolls has both Primary and Secondary Control Temperatures. Primary temperatures are the starting target temperatures. Secondary Control Temperatures are calculated values which depend on the NVM values shown in Table 4 and the difference between maximum and minimum temperatures measured in ten consecutive samples (Table 5). If the temperature difference is small enough, then the heat lamp can be switched on less often than normal, and the Secondary Control Temperatures can be used. This reduces the likelihood of the roll temperature will overshoot its maximum temperature after a job because its heating lamp is unnecessarily switched on immediately before the end of the job. Table 4 IOT Control NVM Fuser Roller Temperature Entries Temp No. Min 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 2 Fuser Heaters and Heater Control Block Diagram All aspects of Fuser operation, including its temperature, are controlled by the IOT Control and Drive PWBAs. At the highest level, the Fuser has two operating states: Fuser Ready - The HR, PR and EHR have all reached their Ready Temperatures. (See Table 4.) 8 9 10 11 12 100 100 80 100 100 150 150 130 100 120 140 155 180 150 150 150 160 170 100 115 180 130 70 160 Nominal Max 160 120 190 200 180 220 Description HR Primary Control Temperature PR Primary Control Temperature EHR Control Temperature (Primary) PR Not Ready Temperature; Formula-based PR Secondary Control Temperature HR Not Ready Temperature; Formula-based EHR Not Ready Ceiling Temperature HR Preheat Temperature PR Preheat Temperature EHR Preheat Temperature HR Empty Rotation Operation Floor Temperature HR Ready Floor Temperature Principles of Operation
1/05 10-139
Table 4 IOT Control NVM Fuser Roller Temperature Entries Temp No. Min 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 110 180 140 100 150 160 160 160 160 Nominal Max 115 185 155 115 170 195 210 210 190 150 200 170 130 190 220 220 220 220 Description PR Ready Floor Temperature EHR Ready Floor Temperature HR Nip Width Adjustment Floor Temperature PR Nip Width Adjustment Floor Temperature EHR Nip Width Adjustment Allowed Temperature EHR Secondary Control Temperature when using normal paper for 4-color EHR Secondary Control Temperature when using normal paper for B&W EHR Secondary Control Temperature when using OHP material for B&W EHR Secondary Control Temperature when using OHP material or heavyweight or very heavyweight paper for 4-color EHR Secondary Control Temperature when using heavyweight or very heavyweight paper for B & W EHR temperature Control Determination Temperature PR Post-Job Temperature Difference Fuser Motor
Table 5 Fuser Warm up Sequence Step 1: Power On off Step 2: Initialize off Step3: Fuser Step 4: Drive Fuser Ready on on
The user is given a ready indication when the Heat Roll reaches 160 and the Process Control Setup routines are complete. Fuser Cooling System The Fuser has an air circulation system to prevent excess heat build up in the machine. This system consists of: Fuser Intake Fan Fuser Duct Fuser Exhaust Fan
22
160
190
220
The Fuser Intake Fan is mounted on the front door of the machine. This fan draws room air into the Fuser Duct, which is attached to the top of the Fuser Assembly. The Fuser Duct has metal panel on its bottom which absorbs the radiant heat generated by the Fuser. The circulating air in the duct passes over this metal panel and draws this heat out of the machine as the air exits through the Fuser Exhaust Fan on the right side of the machine.
24 22
155 10
165 20
170 30
Camming of Rollers
There are two rolls in the Fuser that use camming action: Pressure Roll - Cams up to contact the Heat Roll to create the Fuser nip (Contact Arc) for the copy fusing process. External Heat Roll - Cams down to contact the Heat Roll to provide supplemental heating to the surface of the Heat Roll.
The IOT Control and Drive PWBAs manage power to the three heated rolls to reduce maximum energy usage within the machine. The energizing cycles vary, depending upon the machines operating status (warm-up, stand-by or running) and the type of copy job running through the machine (standard weight, heavy weight, or larger quantities of copies to run). At no time during the copy run cycle are the Heat Roll and Pressure Roll energized for heat at the same time. Each rolls temperature is read by the IOT Drive and Control PWBAs every 500ms. Power to the rolls is changed only after ten consecutive readings. Fuser Warm Up Sequence Warm up time for the Digital Copier is about 7.5 minutes. Warm up time for the Copier/Printer is about 8 minutes, and for the Printer, about 9.5 minutes. The temperature control and sequence for Fuser warm up is a four stage process. Refer to Table 5 for this sequence. Table 5 Fuser Warm up Sequence Step 1: Power On H/R Lamp P/R Lamp Ext H/R Lamp 630W 350W 62W Step 2: Initialize 630W 350W 218W Step3: Fuser Step 4: Drive Fuser Ready 481W 350W 340W 379W 350W 340W
When the External Heat Roll and the Pressure Roll are cammed away from the Heat Roll, there is a 3 mm gap between the Heat Roll and the other two rollers. PR/HR Nip (Pressure Roll Camming) The IOT Control PWBA creates a PR/HR nip by engaging the Fuser Nip Clutch and the Exit Motor. This combination rotates a shaft with an eccentric cam attached that forces the Pressure Roll up into the Heat Roll. Two factors combine to determine when this nip is created. The first factor is the TR0 pulse which starts movement of blank print media from a tray. The second factor is delay interval stored in the IOT NVM. This is shown as B in Figure 4 and Figure 5. There are actually 7 intervals stored in the IOT NVM. Which one is used depends on three factors: The type of blank media being used. The thickness of the blank media being used Whether the job is color or B & W Whether the Fixing Surface is on the top or bottom.
Default values of interval B range from 01 seconds for B & W jobs on normal paper and transparency material to 10 seconds for color jobs on extremely heavyweight paper.
1/05 10-140
EHR/HR Fuser Nip (External Heat Roll Camming) The IOT Control PWBA creates a nip between the External Heat Roll and the Heat Roll by energizing the Retract Motor. This motor rotates a eccentric shaft that is above the External Heat Roll. This rotating shaft cams the External Heat Roll into or away from the Heat Roll. As with the PR/HR nip, two factors combine to determine when the External Heat Roll is moved into contact with the Heat Roll. The first factor is the TR0 event which starts the movement of the copy material from the Trays. The second is 1 of 5 delay intervals stored in the IOT NVM. This delay interval is shown as D in Figure 4. As shown in Figure 5, for B & W jobs on normal paper, there is no delay. However, for color jobs on extremely heavyweight paper and transparency material, the default delay is 10 seconds. The status of this nip is monitored by the External Heat Roll Retract Sensor. This is an optical sensor which is blocked with the two rolls in contact, and unblocked in the retracted position (approximately 3 mm away from the Heat Roll). To correctly read this sensor, the External Heat Roll Retract Motor must be stopped for 100 msec after a change is sensor state is detected. Rotation of the External Heat Roll is done by contact with the motor driven Heat Roll.
Figure 3 Fuser Nip Timing Diagram (Color, 11 X 17)
Fuser Release Agent

The Heat Roll is lubricated with fuser oil which acts as a release agent to prevent the toner and copy from sticking to the roll. (See Figure 1.) Amino Silicone oil is used as the fuser oil. Figure 4 Fuser Nip Timing Diagram (B & W, 8-1/2 X 11) A PR/HR nip is removed: For simplex jobs in color - when the trailing edge of the print passes the Fuser Exit Sensor For duplex jobs in color - when the trailing edge of the each even numbered print passes the Fuser Exit Sensor For B & W jobs - never during the job run. The oil moves by capillary action through the Oil Wick to the Pick-up Roll. A Metering Blade regulates the thickness of the oil coating on the Pick-up Roll. Any excess oil from the Metering Blade or Oil Wick is caught by the Oil Pan. The oil pan contains a replaceable oil filter to collect contaminants that get into the oil. A Return Tube takes this oil back to the Oil Tank for reuse. The Pick-up Roll transfers the oil to the Donor Roller. The Donor Roller then delivers the final thin coating of oil to the surface of the Heat Roller. The system dispenses a constant volume (microliters) of oil per letter size copy. The Fuser Motor drives the Pick-up Roll through a geared connection. The Donor Roller is freewheeling and is rotated by its contact with the Pick-up Roll and the Heat Roller. A customer replaceable (CRU) Oil Cartridge is used to supply a permanent Oil Tank that is in the bottom of the Fuser Assembly. A new Oil Cartridge contains approximately 350 ml of oil. The Oil Tank capacity is 150 ml. An Oil Sensor is located within the Oil Tank to sense when the oil level becomes low. The IOT Control PWBA checks the status of this sensor every 500 msec. When the Photo Coupler type of sensor detects the absence of oil on its surface, the sensor triggers a Replace Fuser Oil Cartridge Soon message on the User Interface. The Fuser Oil Pump is turned ON whenever the Fuser Drive Motor is on. There is no way to adjust the oil pump ON time. The pump takes the oil from the Oil Tank to the Drip Pipe. The oil drips onto the Oil Wick from eleven (11) evenly spaced holes in the Drip Pipe. The holes in the drip pipe increases in size from front to rear to ensure uniform oil flow at the rear end.
For all Black only jobs, the Pressure Roll remains in contact with the Heat Roll during the entire print run. For all Color jobs, the Pressure Roll cams away form the Heat Roll between each sheet in 1 pitch mode (i.e. 11x17), and cams away between each pair of sheets in 2 pitch mode (i.e. 8.5x11). These modes of operation apply for both paper and transparencies. Brackets with adjustment screws on each end of the Pressure Roll allows for Fuser nip adjustment without having to remove any of the Fuser Assembly from the machine. Refer to Contact Arc adjustment in your service manual for this procedure. The status of this nip is monitored by the Nip Sensor. This is an optical sensor that is blocked when the two rolls are in contact, and unblocked when the rolls are in the retracted position. However, the design of the sensor is such in order to accurately detect its state, the IOT Control PWBA must disengage the Fuser Nip Clutch for approximately 100 msec after detecting a change in sensor state. When fusing is not required, the normal position of the Pressure Roll is approximately 3 mm away from the Heat Roll.
1/05 10-141
The low oil signal from the sensor also starts a software timer in the machine. The timer will allow approximately 2000 additional copies to be run during this warning period before the machine will shut down. During this warning period, if the front door interlock is opened, the Replace Fuser Oil Cartridge Soon message will disappear from the UI for 10 minutes. If after the 10 minutes, the Oil Sensor still detects a low oil condition, the message will be displayed again on the UI. When the software timer expires (approximately 2000 copies), a Replace Fuser Oil Cartridge message is displayed on the UI. When this condition occurs, the machine shuts down. Installing a new Oil Cartridge will enable the machine to run jobs again. Oil usage rates vary, depending upon the types of images and media being run. Under normal conditions, an Oil Cartridge should last approximately 25-40K copies/prints. Oil rates can be much higher when the oil metering system is in need of service.
Web Cleaning of the Heat Roll

The Web Assembly is a Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU). The Web material is a low fiber, paper-like material that removes toner and paper particles which may adhere to the Heat Roll during the fusing process. A metal Cleaning Roller is also used to remove toner residue from the Heat Roll. The Cleaning Roller is driven by direct contact with the Heat Roll. The Web material is held in constant contact with both the Heat Roll and the Cleaning Roll. Furthermore, the Cleaning Roll is held in constant contact with the Heat Roller by two foamcovered Web Pressure Rollers. The Web Pressure Roller holding Web against the Heat Roller is spring loaded. The Web Pressure Roller holding the Web against the Cleaning Roll and the Cleaning Roller against the Heat Roll is held by gravity. The Web material moves in the opposite direction as the surface of the Heat Roller as it travels from a Supply Roll to a Take-up Roll. The IOT Control and Status PWBAs can approximately determine how much of the Web Material has been used. Through a hard stop circuit, the machine is shut down when the Web material runs out. There are three physical stages to metering the Web usage; New, In Use, and Empty. There is also a non-physical stage where the machine software determines a Web Low warning state on the UI. These stages are detailed below. First, as shown in Figure 5, the Web Assembly has an electrical circuit that contains a fuse. When a new Web Assembly is installed, the fuse is immediately opened. This transition indicates to the Control Logic that a new Web Assembly has been installed. The IOT Control PWBA resets to 0 a variable indicating how many copies have occurred for this Web Assembly. As copies are made, this variable is incriminated.
Figure 5 Web Assembly circuit The IOT Control and Drive PWBAs advances the Web Material by activating a dedicated Web Motor. This causes Web Material to pass from the Web Supply Roll to the Web Take-up Roll. The interval that the motor is activated can vary between one and four seconds. How long the motor is activated depends on two factors. The motor is on for twice as long for color jobs than B & W jobs. The period that the motor is on decrease with the amount of Web Material that has been used in the current Web Assembly
As more material is used, the effective diameter of the Take-up Roll core increases. Therefore, the Web Material is transferred between rolls more rapidly. The IOT Control PWBA uses a copy count variable to estimate the amount of Web material that has been used. This determines the amount of Web Motor activation time for each copy, based upon a rough estimate of the Takeup Roll core diameter. Once the total Web Motor ON time reaches 1458 minutes (approximately 40,000 copies), a Replace Cleaning Web Soon message is displayed on the UI. This message will remain displayed for approximately 3,000 - 5,000 copies until the Web Assembly circuit detects the Web Supply Roll is empty. When empty, two metal contacts touch the metal Supply Roll core and completes a circuit. When this occurs, the machine becomes disabled and a Replace Cleaning Web message is displayed on the UI. This condition ends when a new Cleaning Web Assembly is installed.
1/05 10-142
In addition to the general Web advancement described above, the Web will also advance for two minutes after any jams that occurred in the Fuser Assembly. This is done to clean any excess toner that might be left from the jam.
Copy Exit
As the fused print leaves the nip (Contact Arc) between the Heat and Pressure Rolls, Stripper Fingers on both rolls keep the copy from wrapping around these two rollers. A Fuser Exit Sensor looks for the leading edge of the copy material and stops the Fuser Motor if the lead edge is not detected within a designated time. This feature prevents sheets from wrapping around the Fuser Rolls and enables all Fuser jams to be cleared from the entrance side of the Fuser Assembly. The copy material then proceeds through Fuser Exit Rolls and past a Exit Path Sensor to either the paper duplex/inverter path or out of the machine to the Exit Tray or the Mailbox/Sorter. If a jam is detected by any of the paper path sensors in the Exit or Inverter areas, the Fuser will immediately stop to prevent accordion jams from damaging the Fuser.
1/05 10-143
Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies,
Functional Description of Fuser Subassemblies,
1/05 10-144
Overview
This chapter describes the electrical and mechanical components of the Mailbox/Sorter and Offset Catch Tray optional accessories. The Mailbox/Sorter is a single set of hardware whose functionality is determined by the configuration of the machine to which it is connected. The Mailbox/Sorter performs these primary functions: Decurls finished copies for easier paper stacking and handling When attached to the DocuColor 12/Document Centre Color Series 50 (DC) it: Collates finished copies by stacking them into bins Collates finished copies by sorting into bins Stacks into one pile or into an offset pile finished copies onto an Offset Catch Tray (OCT) Mailbox/Sorter Bins (1-10)
When attached to the Digital Networked Copier/Printer (DC/P) or the Digital Networked Printer (PR), the Mailbox/Sorter can function as: A printer, stacking finished copies into bins (mailboxes) assigned by a user A copier/printer, stacking finished copies onto the Offset Catch Tray (OCT) in one pile or in offset piles
The Mailbox/Sorter, shown in Figure 1, always includes a Decurler Assembly and a Mailbox/ Sorter Assembly. The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) is another optional accessory that can be used with a machine alone or combined with the Mailbox/Sorter. This Chapter will cover the following: Overview Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter Offset Catch Tray (OCT) Mailbox/Sorter Operation. Figure 1 Mailbox/Sorter attached to the machine This same hardware accessory can function either as a Sorter or as a Mailbox. The function of this accessory is determined by the type of machine and the software configuration installed. Table 1 shows the different types of machine configurations, which then determines the type of function for the Mailbox/Sorter accessory. Table 1 Machine Configurations for Mailbox/Sorter Machine Type Digital Copier (DC) Digital Network Printer (PR) Digital Copier (DC) and Digital Network Printer (PR) Machine Configuration Image Input Terminal (IIT) Digital Front End (DFE) Image Input Terminal (IIT) and Digital Front End (DFE) Sorter / Mailbox Function Sorter Mailbox Mailbox Mailbox/Sorter Assembly
Decurler Offset Catch Tray (OCT)
The Mailbox/Sorter is an optional accessory to the DC, CP and LP machines. It connects to the right (output) side of the machine using a sliding rail which attaches to the lower front frame of the machine. This rail provides a sliding track that allows for 300 mm of separation between the Mailbox/Sorter and the machine for clearing of paper jams.
1/05 10-145
Overview
Sorter
When the Mailbox/Sorter is being used as a Sorter, it receives finished copies from the copier and collates them into different bins. This collation process can be done in either Sort Mode or Stack Mode. The Sorter has ten (10) bins for this collating function. Each bin can hold 100 sheets (1,000 sheet total capacity for the bins). When a bin contains approximately 100 sheets, a switch is activated which causes a Bin Full message on the machine UI screen. Any additional copies for that bin are directed to the Catch Tray until the prints are removed from the bin. Both Catch Trays can accept up to 500 prints in a single stack, and each contains a sensor to indicate when it is full. The OCT provides offsetting capability of finished copies for all sizes except 12x18 and 12.6x18 papers. The Sorter function is available only when the machine is configured as Digital Copier. When the machine is configured as a Copier/Printer, the hardware can only function as a Mailbox. Refer to Sorter Operation Overview for more information.
Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections

A single connector provides all electrical connections between the basic machine and the Mailbox/Sorter. The connections include power, serial communications links, and discrete control and status lines. The Mailbox/Sorter operates entirely on either +24 VDC or +5 VDC power, which originates in the IOT PWBA LVPS in the basic machine. Figure 1 shows power lines, discrete command and status lines, and serial communication links between the Machine IOT and both the Mailbox/Sorter and OCT. Figure 2 shows the block diagram of the Mailbox/Sorter. Figure 3 shows the block diagram of the Decurler. Both the IOT CPU PWBA and the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA include microcontrollers. Therefore, much of the command and status information passed between these assemblies uses their shared command and status serial data link. The IOT CPU PWBA becomes aware of the Mailbox/Sorter by detecting the proper level on the Output Detect line. It also passes a discrete line (Sys Reset) indicating that the Mailbox/Sorter processor should reset itself to a start-up condition.
Mailbox
When the Mailbox/Sorter is being used as a Mailbox, the bins can be assigned independently for individual users or groups of users. These bin assignments are programmed into the IOT CPU NVM (Non-Volatile Memory) by the printer network system administrator. The capacity for each bin is the same as the Sorter: 100 sheets/bin. A Bin Full indication is sent to the sender of the document, and any extra copies designated for that bin go to the Catch Tray. When the copier/printer machine is used as a walk-up copier, all finished copies go to the Catch Tray. When attached to either the Printer (PR) or the Copier/Printer (CP), the Mailbox does not provide sorting capabilities. Refer to Mailbox Operation Overview for more information on the operation of this accessory.
Offset Catch Tray

The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) accepts finished copies in a single stack, providing an offsetting function for most size papers. The OCT is an optional accessory for a machine with or without a Mailbox/Sorter installed.
Decurler
The Mailbox/Sorter includes a dual Decurler Assembly. The Decurler Assembly removes the upward or downward paper curl that typically results from the toner fusing process. Because a print can exit from the machine either face-up or face-down, the assembly has separate upward and downward decurling mechanisms. Prints are decurled by creating a nip between a pair of Decurler Rolls. One roll has a soft surface and the other roll has a hard surface. If the paper requires decurling in a downward direction, a Cam moves the Lower Decurler Roll toward the Decurler Entrance Roll, increasing the nip. To decurl paper in a downward direction, the Cam moves the Upper Decurler Roll toward the Decurler Exit Roll. At the same time, the nip in the opposite pair of rolls becomes neutral. The size of the nip and the transport speed are adjustable, depending upon the type of material being processed. Refer to Decurler control for more information.
Overview, Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections
1/05 10-146
Figure 2 Mailbox/Sorter Subassembly Simplified Block Diagram Figure 1 Mailbox/Sorter Connections to IOT
1/05 10-147
Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections
Offset Catch Tray Electrical Connections

The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) does not have a control processor. Discrete lines from one of two assemblies provide direct control of the OCT. If a Mailbox/Sorter is not installed, the OCT is connected to the IOT Drive PWBA, as shown in Figure 1. If the OCT is installed with a Mailbox/ Sorter, the OCT is connected to the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA as shown in Figure 1. These PWBAs become aware of the OCT by detecting the level on the OCT Det line. The OCT Mot Fwd and OCT Mot Rev control lines directly control the OCT motor and cause it to move the tray toward the front or back of the machine. The OCT Full status line indicates that the OCT paper capacity has been reached. The OCT Home Sensor indicates when the OCT is in the front-most (Home) position, while the OCT Position Sensor indicates that the tray is in the rearmost position.
Figure 3 Decurler Simplified Block Diagram
Mailbox/Sorter Electrical Connections, Offset Catch
1/05 10-148
Mailbox/Sorter Interlocks
The Mailbox/Sorter has four (4) pairs of interlock switches: Two Docking Interlocks that detect when the Decurler is connected to the basic machine. Decurler Front Cover Interlock Mailbox/Sorter Front Cover Interlock
The Decurler Front Cover Interlock is actually two switches. When the cover is off, one pole of this switch disconnects +24 VDC supply voltage from the Decurler Stepper Motor. The other switch and all of the remaining interlock outputs are all normally at +5 VDC, but are grounded when opened. The microcontroller on the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA reads the voltage signals. An open interlock causes the microcontroller to send a message to the IOT CPU PWBA, informing it of the interlock condition. An appropriate message displays on the machine User Interface.
Sorter Front Cover Interlock
Decurler Front Cover Interlock
Docking Interlocks (2)
Figure 1 Interlock Switch locations for the Mailbox/Sorter
1/05 10-149
Mailbox/Sorter Interlocks
Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs
The Mailbox/Sorter has two PWBAs: The Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA, shown in Figure 2, monitors paper path sensors, interlock switches, bin full switches, OCT full switch and OCT present and home position status. The Decurler PWBA, shown in Figure 3, monitors the paper path through the Decurler and controls the decurling function and communicates with the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA.
Print Transport through the Mailbox/Sorter

The Mailbox/Sorter contains three (3) motors. Table 1 shows the Mailbox/Sorter motor functions. Table 1 Mailbox/Sorter Motors and Functions Motors Decurler Motor (+24 VDC Stepper) Drives: Decurler In Roll 1st Decurler Roll 2nd Decurler Roll Decurler Exit Roll Sorter Motor (+24 VDC Stepper) OCT Motor (+24 VDC Bi-directional) (optional with printer) Sorter Entrance Roll 1-10 Vertical Bin Rolls Sorter Exit Roll Offset Catch Tray Transport Speed 350, 220, 130, 60 mm/sec.
The Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA includes four (4) LEDs. The IOT CPU PWBA has LEDs that light to indicate active communication between the two PWBAs. Table 1 Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA LEDs LED CR1 CR2 CR3 CR4 Color Signal Vcc RxD Reset /Lock Comment Lit indicates that digital logic power is available Flickering indicates command data being received from IOT CPU PWBA Lit indicates that PWBA microcontroller is being reset by IOT CPU PWBA Lit indicates that Mailbox/Sorter Assembly Motor is locked.
Decurler control
The Decurler neurtralizes paper curl that results from the Xerographic process. The basic concept of decurling is to force a smaller diameter metal roll with a hard surface into the much softer foam surface of a larger diameter roll. This creates a valley in the larger roll, and the print is forced into this valley in the opposite direction of its natural curl. Prints curl toward the side having fused toner. Paper curl and the decurling process is dependent upon these variables: Paper weight and type Single or two sided copies Black-and-white or Color copies Pixel density Humidity
A self-test is performed on the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA during power on.
To address the different amount and directions of paper curl, the Decurler Motor operates at different speeds and one of the two Decurling Rollers cam up or down by different distances to decurl the paper. The Decurler Motor has the following adjustable parameters: The distance by which the harder roll is forced into the surface of the softer roll, called the Nip Shift The speed at which the paper travels through the decurler Which decurler (upper or lower) is active
Refer to Figure 1 and Table 2 for details of the components for this function.
Mailbox/Sorter PWBAs, Print Transport through the
1/05 10-150
OCT Gate Control

The OCT Gate is moved up or down by the OCT Solenoid. This gate diverts the copy material to either the bins or to the OCT. The status of the OCT Gate is determined by the IOT CPU PWBA, which sends an appropriate message to the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA. The Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA enables or disables the OCT Solenoid as required.
Mailbox/Sorter Control
The sorter and mailbox functions use the same hardware. The difference between them results from the configuration of the attached machine and the type of print or copy job being performed. These differences result in different control messages from the IOT CPU PWBA and different control signals from the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA. In particular, the machine configuration determines whether sorter or mailbox functionality is available. Table 3 shows the types of collating functions that are available for the different machine configurations. Table 3 Functions for different configurations Printer (PR) Only Output Functions Mailbox Sorts into bins (1,2,3...1,2,3...etc.) Stacks into bins (1,1,1...2,2,2...etc.) Sorts into bins by user (User A: 1,2,3...User B: 1,2,3...etc.) Offset Catch Tray (OCT) straight stack Offset Catch Tray (OCT) offset stacks X X X X X X X Sorter Copier X X X X X Printer Copier (DC) Only Copier/Printer (DC/PR) Mailbox functioning as a:
Figure 1 Paper Decurling components and function Therefore, prints exiting with image side down are forced through the Upper Decurling Nip with 2, 6 or 10 mm of shift and through the Lower Decurling Nip with no nip shift. The controls required for this function originate in the machine IOT CPU PWBA. This information is then sent through the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA to the Decurler Control PWBA. This last PWBA regulates the amount of Nip Shift and which nip is shifted. Table 2 shows the distance of the Nip Shift in the Decurling Roll for various paper types and copy modes. The Decurler transport speed is to match the transports speed of the copy job through the xerographics process. The speed of the Decurler Motor is determined by the IOT CPU PWBA. Table 2 Decurler Shift Requirements & Motor Speeds Decurler Roll Nip Shift Media Type Transparency Transparency Lightweight Plain Paper Lightweight Plain Paper Lightweight Plain Paper Heavyweight Plain Paper Heavyweight Plain Paper Heavyweight Plain Paper Image Type Black and White 4-Color Black + 1 Color 4-Color; Image Density < 50% 4-Color; Image Density > 50% Black + 1 color 4-Color; Image Density < 50% 4-Color; Image Density > 50% Transport Speed 160 mm/sec 60 mm/sec 160 mm/sec 160 mm/sec 160 mm/sec 60 mm/sec 60 mm/sec 60 mm/sec X X X 2 mm X X X X X 6 mm 10 mm
Sorter Functions
NOTE: Sorter operation is possible only when the Mailbox/Sorter is attached to the Digital Copier machine (DC). When a Sorter is connected to the Digital Copier, four (4) different finishing outputs are available. See Table 3 for these outputs. When the Mailbox/Sorter is configured as a Sorter, the user can select from the User Interface screen either Sort Mode or Stack Mode for outputs to the bins. Copies for bin output are diverted into the Vertical Transport area of the Sorter by the OCT Gate. At the appropriate bin level, a bin solenoid energizes to push a Bin Diverter Gate (one gate per output bin) into the paper path. This directs the copy into that bin. The selection of the Bin Diverter Gate is made by the Sorter Control PWBA in response to control messages from the IOT CPU PWBA. The appropriate Bin Solenoid is energized only as the copy enters the vertical transport area. When the trailing edge of the copy passes the Bin Sensor, the Bin Solenoid deenergizes to close the Bin Gate.
1/05 10-151
Refer to Offset Catch Tray (OCT) for the finishing functions of this component.
Mailbox Configuration
NOTE: When this device is attached to the Digital Network Copier/Printer or the Digital Network Printer, it operates as a Mailbox. The OCT is an optional accessory to the Mailbox. For Mailbox bin outputs when working with the Printer mode, the user sends a print job to the printer. The bin addresses are programmed by the printer system administrator and stored in the NVM associated with the IOT CPU PWBA. The copies for the Mailbox bin are diverted into the Vertical Transport area of the Mailbox by the OCT Gate. At the appropriate bin level, a Bin Solenoid energizes to push a Bin Diverter Gate (one gate per output bin) into the paper path. The selection of the Bin Diverter Gate is made by the Sorter Control PWBA in response to control messages from the IOT CPU PWBA. The appropriate Bin Solenoid is energized only as the copy enters the vertical transport area. When the trailing edge of the copy passes the Bin Sensor, the Bin Solenoid deenergizes to close the Bin Gate. Sorter Front Cover Interlock
Bin In Sensors (10)
Vertical Transport In Sensor Decurler Front Cover Interlock
Docking Interlocks (2)
Jam Sensing
The Mailbox/Sorter has thirteen (13) sensors for detecting the leading and trailing edges of copies: Decurler Exit Sensor Vertical Transport-In Sensor Ten (10) Bin-In Sensors (one for each bin) OCT Exit Sensor
Machine Exit Sensor
Figure 2 shows the sensor locations. The IOT Machine Exit Sensor is also used by the Decurler PWBA or the Sorter Control PWBA.
Decurler Exit Sensor
OCT Exit Sensor
Figure 2 Mailbox/Sorter and Decurler Sensor Locations
1/05 10-152
Offset Catch Tray (OCT)

The Offset Catch Tray (OCT) is an optional accessory. The OCT can be attached directly to the machine or to the Mailbox/Sorter. If connected to a Mailbox/Sorter, the OCT replaces the standard non-offsetting catch tray. The OCT is used to compile copy output into a single stack or to provide offsetting stacks onto a single tray. The OCT does not provide offsetting for paper sizes of 12x18 or larger. The OCT can attach to a machine or to the Mailbox/Sorter by two (2) Thumb Screws. A multipin plug connects the OCT to the machine or the Mailbox/Sorter for communications and DC power needs. A +24 VDC bi-directional motor shifts the OCT toward the front of the machine or toward the back of the machine when performing the offset stacking function. The OCT straight stack or home position is with the catch Tray toward the front of the machine. Two (2) sensors monitor the offset paper stacking function: The Offset Home Sensor indicates when the OCT is in the straight stack or home position. The Offset Position Sensor indicates when the OCT is in the offset position.
Mailbox/Sorter Operation.
This device can operate as either a Sorter or as a Mailbox, depending upon what type of machine it is attached to. Refer to Overview at the beginning of this Chapter for information on the Sorter and Mailbox functionality with the different machines.
Sorter Operation Overview

The Sorter can collate copy output in the following modes: Stack mode into bins (1,1,1... 2,2,2... 3,3,3...etc.) Sort mode into bins (1,2,3... 1,2,3... 1,2,3...etc.) Straight stack into the Catch Tray Offset stack into the optional OCT, if connected
The user selects the type of output on the UI touch pad of the copier. Depending upon the copy material used or selected, the control logic will determine if the user selection is valid (i.e. the selected paper weight is within the operational range of the Sorter).
Mailbox Operation Overview

The Mailbox can collate copy output in the following modes: Sort mode into bins assigned to users or group addresses (1,2,3... 1,2,3... 1,2,3...etc.) Straight stack into the Catch Tray when one or more mailbox bins are full. Offset stack into the optional OCT, if connected
An OCT Motor moves the tray between the two positions. The OCT Motor is controlled by discrete control lines from the IOT CPU and Drive PWBAs. Single stacks of copy are discharged within a paper alignment of approximately 20 mm of scatter. Offset stacks will have approximately 10 mm offset between sets of stacks. When copy output is to be stacked in offsetting piles, the first stack is always placed with the OCT in the Home Position. Additional stacks are placed with the tray alternating between the Home and Offset Positions. When a copy job is complete, the OCT always returns to the Home Position. The OCT can hold 500 sheets of standard weight paper. When the tray capacity is reached, the Full Stack Sensor is activated, and a status line is asserted to the IOT CPU PWBA.
The system administrator for the printer network assigns the addresses used for the Mailbox function. The address data are stored in the NVM associated with the IOT CPU PWBA. When the machine is used as a networked printer, the user sends a print job to the machine from a workstation terminal to the Digital Front End (DFE). The address is sent to the IOT CPU PWBA, which uses data stored in the NVM to correlate the address to a bin. The bin address is then sent to the Mailbox/Sorter Control PWBA, which activates the appropriate motors and solenoids to route the prints into the correct bin. When the machine is configured as a copier/printer and is being used as a copier, the local user can only send the job to the catch tray. If the OCT is attached, the user can choose to single stack or offset stack the job.
1/05 10-153
Offset Catch Tray (OCT), Mailbox/Sorter Operation.
Offset Catch Tray (OCT), Mailbox/Sorter Operation.
1/05 10-154
Finisher Power
The Finisher requires +5VDC and +24VDC for normal operation. The Finisher receives these voltages from the Distribution PWB in the IOT (Figure 1).
The Finisher PWB uses these voltages to run internal logic, sensors, solenoids, and the Finisher Motors. The Distribution PWB +24VDC output is controlled by the Decurler Door Interlock, the Stapler Door Interlock, the Compiler Cover Interlock, and the Mailbox Door Interlock switches. The +24VDC from the Distribution PWB is cut whenever any of these door interlocks are opened.
Figure 1 DC Power Circuits
Finisher Interlocks
The interlocks on the doors of the Finisher have two circuits, a +24VDC circuit and a +5VDC circuit. Generally speaking, the +24VDC side of the interlock is used to interrupt Finisher power when a door is opened, and the +5VDC side of the interlock controls interlock fault declaration. The door interlocks work by interrupting power to the finisher. When a door is opened, the +24VDC side of the switch is opened and the finisher functions that use +24VDC are shut down. The +5VDC side of the interlock is also opened, resulting in a fault declaration (Figure 1). The Docking Interlocks are located on the left side of the Finisher assembly. These are magnetic interlocks that are held open when the Finisher is docked. When the Finisher is undocked, the switches will close, completing a path to ground. The resulting drop in voltage is sensed on the Finisher PWB, and will result in an indication that the Finisher is undocked.
1/05 10-155
Finisher Power, Finisher Interlocks
Finisher Power Components

WARNING
In the undocked condition, +24VDC to the finisher is NOT interrupted. 1. 2. Distribution PWB Provides +24VDC and +5VDC to the Finisher PWB. Finisher PWB The Finisher PWB controls all Finisher functions, executes commands sent from the IOT CPU PWB, and sends information back to the Printer Engine Controller PWB. All Finisher components are connected to the Finisher PWB. Stapler Door Interlock Monitors the state of the Stapler door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the Stapler Door is open. Compiler Door Interlock Monitors the state of the Compiler door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the Compiler Door is open. Mailbox Door Interlock Monitors the state of the Mailbox door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the Mailbox Door is open. Decurler Door Interlock Monitors the state of the Decurler door and cuts +24VDC to the Finisher when the Decurler Door is open. Docking Interlock 1 and 2 Magnetic interlocks that indicate an undocked condition. These interlock switches are open in the docked position, and closed in the undocked position.
3.
4.
5. Figure 1 +5 VDC Interlock Circuit
6.
7.
Finisher Interlocks, Finisher Power Components
1/05 10-156
Finisher Control
Finisher Control is a term used to describe the resources that monitor and control the actions and operations of the Finisher -- from paper entrance to paper stacking. The Finisher PWB controls all Finisher functions, executes commands sent from the IOT CPU PWB, and sends information back to the IOT CPU PWB. All Finisher components are connected to the Finisher PWB. The IOT CPU PWB provides the logic and information processing that is necessary for the printer to function, and the Finisher PWB provides the logic and information processing that is necessary for the Finisher to function.
Every electrical component within the Finisher is connected to the Finisher PWB. Sensors in the Finisher send status information to the Finisher PWB. The Finisher PWB processes this information, shares it with the IOT CPU PWB, and compares it to timing tables stored in ROM. Acting on the results of the processing, the Finisher PWB sends commands to the various Finisher components; for example, switching on a motor or switching off a solenoid (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Finisher Control Paths Table 1 Input and Output Devices Input Devices SCT Full Sensor Decurler Door Interlock Switch Docking Interlock Switch Decurler Exit Sensor Stapler Door Interlock Switch Mailbox Door Interlock Switch SCT Exit Sensor Mailbox Entrance Sensor Compiler Entrance Sensor Output Devices Decurler Stepper Motor Finisher Transport Motor Mailbox Drive Motor Mailbox Gate Solenoid Mailbox Solenoid Finisher Gate Solenoid Finisher Gate Solenoid Compiler Tray Solenoid End Wall Motor
1/05 10-157
Finisher Control
Table 1 Input and Output Devices Input Devices Compiler Cover Safety Switch Compiler Cover Interlock Switches Unload While Run Switch Tamper Home Sensor Compiler Paper Sensor End Wall Open Sensor Stapler Position Sensors Eject Paddle Home Sensor Offset Home Sensor Eject Clamp Sensor Stack Height Sensor Stacker Upper Limit Sensor Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor Stacker Full Sensor Stacker Lower Limit Sensor Stacker Paper Sensor Output Devices Tamper Motor Stapler Position Motor Eject Motor Eject Paddle Motor Eject Clamp/Offset Motor Gate Solenoid Stacker Motor
Finisher Control
1/05 10-158
The Finisher Paper Path

The Finisher Paper Path is the physical route that paper takes through the Finisher, from leaving the IOT to arriving at the Finisher Bin, the Simple Catch Tray, or a bin in the Sorter/Mailbox (Figure 1).
There are two major diversion points for paper traveling through the subsystem. The first is the Finisher Gate. At this gate, the paper can be directed toward the Finisher, or the Sorter/Mailbox. The second gate is the Mailbox Gate, where paper that has been directed to the Sorter/ Mailbox can be sent either to the Simple Catch Tray, or to the Sorter/Mailbox bins.
Figure 1 Finisher Paper Path
1/05 10-159
The Finisher Paper Path
The Decurler
Paper exiting the fuser is fed first through the Decurler. The Decurler is capable of correcting curl up, or curl down. This is achieved through the use of two sets of rollers (Figure 1). The first set of rollers in the Decurler Assembly will correct for curl up. This is accomplished through the use of two rollers, one larger and made of a soft, foam material, and the other is a metal rod. The foam roll is positioned over the top of the paper path. The metal rod is located below the path. When the paper enters the decurler, and if it is to be processed for curl up, the two rolls will come together with the paper between them. Because the top roll is soft, the lower rod will slightly deform it, and the paper will pass through the nip created at this point. The shape of the nip will remove the curl from the paper as it passes through. To reduce curl down, the second set of rolls in the Decurler are used. In this set of rolls, the foam roll is on the bottom of the path and the metal rod is on the top. The rolls come in contact with each other and the paper is passed through the resulting nip. The decurled media is then passed into the Finisher.
The Finisher Gate

The Finisher Gate is the first point at which the paper in the path can be diverted to either the Finisher or the Sorter/Mailbox (Figure 1). The gate consists of a rod with fingers that is controlled by the Finisher Gate Solenoid. The Finisher Gate Solenoid is a latching solenoid. When a signal is received from the Finisher PWB, the solenoid will either lift the gate to send paper to the Finisher, or lower it to send paper to the Sorter/Mailbox.
Figure 1 Finisher Gate
Figure 1 Decurler Assembly and Paper Path
The Decurler, The Finisher Gate
1/05 10-160
The Mailbox Gate

The Mailbox Gate provides diversion to either the Sorter/Mailbox, or the Simple Catch Tray (SCT). Lie the Finisher Gate, the Mailbox Gate is a plastic rod with fingers that is positioned across the paper path (Figure 1). The gate is controlled by the Mailbox Gate Solenoid. The solenoid will latch the gate up to divert the paper to the Simple Catch Tray, or down to divert the paper to the Sorter/Mailbox.
Finisher Path for Stacking without Stapling

The Finisher options that are available depend upon whether a Print or Copy job has been sent. The table below indicates which options are available for each type of job. The explanation below assumes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. The job is a print job. No stapling was requested. The paper has been decurled. The paper has passed through the Finisher Gate and was directed to the Finisher.
The Transport Rolls within the Compiler continue driving the paper into the Compiler (Figure 1). The Compiler Transport Rolls drive the paper further into the Compiler where the leading edge of the paper actuates the Compiler Entrance Sensor. The Exit Rolls and Paddle Assembly drive the paper to the Eject Roll. The Eject Roll and Paddle Assembly drive the paper out into the Stacker Tray.
Figure 1 Mailbox Gate Figure 1 Compiler Paper Transport Exit/Eject Paper Path Components 1. 2. 3. Transport Rolls and Pinch Rolls Drives paper through the Compiler. Complier Entrance Sensor Monitors paper entering and leaving the Compiler entrance. Exit Roll and Paddle Assembly
1/05 10-161
The Mailbox Gate, Finisher Path for Stacking with-
Drives paper to the Eject Roll. 4. Eject Roll and Paddle Assembly Drives paper into a Finisher Bin Tray. The Eject Roll assembly is shifted from side-to-side so that each set entering the Finisher Bin Tray is offset slightly from the previous set. For additional information, see Eject Paddle Motor
Finisher Paper Path for Stapling and Stacking

The following explanation assumes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. The job is a print job. Stapling was requested. The paper has been decurled. The paper has passed through the Finisher Gate and was directed to the Finisher.
The Exit Chute uses rolls and rubber paddles to move the paper into the Eject area. If the paper is to be collected into sets and stapled, the Eject Rolls rotate in reverse and drive the paper back into the Compiler Bin (Figure 1). When the correct number of sheets has entered the Bin, the Tamper aligns the edges of the paper sheets to form a neat paper set. The Stapler then drives a staple through the set. As the Eject Rolls drive the paper set out of the Stapler, they offset each paper set slightly from the previous set as they are delivered into the Stacker Tray.
Finisher Path for Stacking without Stapling, Finisher
1/05 10-162
Figure 1 Paper Path Through Stapler
1/05 10-163
Finisher Paper Path for Stapling and Stacking
Compiler/Tamper Functional Description

The Compiler arranges paper into sets.
1. 2.
Tamper Motor Drives the paper stack Tamper. Tamper Home Sensor Monitors the position of the Tamper (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Tamper Assembly 3. Compiler Tray Solenoid Tilts the Compiler Bin when the paper stack reaches 25 sheets (Figure 2).
1/05 10-164
Figure 2 Compiler Tray End Wall 4. 5. 6. End Wall Motor Controls the opening and closing of the End Wall. End Wall Open Sensor Monitors the position of the End Wall. Compiler Entrance Sensor Monitors paper entering the Compiler. The signal from the Sensor is used by the Finisher logic to start and stop the Transport Motor and the Eject Motor. 7. 8. Compiler Paper Sensor Monitors paper on the Compiler Tray. Compiler Cover Interlock Switch Monitors the position of the Compiler Cover.
The Eject Roll reverses rotation and drives the sheet of paper back into the Compiler Tray. A motor raises the End Wall to block the end of the Compiler Tray. When a set of paper (maximum of 25 sheets) is transported to the Compiler Tray, the Tamper taps the side of the paper to square up the set (Figure 3).
1/05 10-165
Figure 3 Paper Being Compiled for Stapling The End Wall Motor lowers the End Wall and the Compiler Tray Solenoid tilts the Tray, causing the paper set to move into the Stapler (Figure 4). For additional information, see End Wall Motor and Tamper Motor.
1/05 10-166
Figure 4 Paper Set Positioned for Stapling Compiler /Tamper Paper Path Components 1. 2. 3. Eject Roll Drives paper into the Compiler Tray Compiler Tray Staging area used to collect sheets of paper into sets for stapling. End Wall Closes the end of the Compiler Tray so paper can be collected into sets. Is moved out of the way when the set is ready to be sent to the Stapler. 4. 5. End Wall Motor Tamper Taps the sides of every sheet to square up the edges before stapling. Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Principles of Operation 6. Compiler Tray Solenoid Tilts the Compiler Tray so the paper set slides into the Stapler.
1/05 10-167
Stapler Functional Description

The Stapler staples sets of paper. 1. 2. Stapler Front Corner Sensor Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling in the front corner of a paper set. Stapler Front Straight Sensor
Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the front edge of a paper set. 3. Stapler Rear Straight Sensor Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the rear edge of a paper set. 4. Stapler Position Motor Moves the Stapler Head into position (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Stapler Unit and Position Motor 5. 6. 7. 8. Stapler Position Motor Drives the Stapler Head while it is stapling a paper set. Eject Paddle Home Sensor Monitors whether or not the Eject Paddle is in the home position. Eject Paddle Motor Drives the Eject Paddles to clamp a paper set onto the Compiler Tray prior to stapling. Eject Paddle Drive Belt Drives the Eject Paddles to clamp a paper set onto the Compiler Tray prior to stapling. (Figure 2)
1/05 10-168
Figure 2 Eject Paddle Assembly For additional information, see Eject Paddle Motor. The Stapler Position Motor slides the Stapler Unit along a fixed rail. Set locations along the rail place the Stapler in position to perform one of four possible staple configurations; front corner, front straight, rear corner, and rear straight. Sensors along the rail monitor the position of the Stapler Unit. Once the stapler is in position, it drives a single staple at a selected area of the set (Figure 3).
1/05 10-169
Figure 3 Staple Position Options Principles of Operation Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
1/05 10-170
1. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Stapler Paper Path Components Stapler Front Corner Sensor Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling in the front corner of a paper set. Stapler Front Straight Sensor Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the front edge of a paper set. Stapler Rear Straight Sensor Monitors the position of the Stapler Head for stapling at the rear edge of a paper set. Stapler Assembly Contains the Stapler Head and Stapler Cartridge.
Eject/Offset Functional Description

The Eject and Offset transport and offset compiled sets of paper into the Stacker Bin. 1. 2. 3. 4. Eject Clamp/Offset Motor Raises and lowers the Eject Chute and Pinch Roll, and drives the Offset Actuator. Eject Clamp Sensor Monitors whether the Eject Roll is in the up or the down position. Offset Home Sensor Monitors whether or not the Eject Roll is in the home position. Eject Motor Drives the Eject Shaft Assembly. After the set is stapled, the Eject Roll rotates clockwise and drives the set out of the Compiler Tray and toward the Offset Rolls (Figure 1).
1/05 10-171
Stapler Functional Description, Eject/Offset Func-
Figure 1 Stapled Paper Set Eject A cam and gear set shift the Offset Pinch Rolls and Paddle Assembly back and forth across the Eject paper path, shifting the exiting sheet of paper so each sheet of paper entering the Finisher Tray is offset slightly from the previous sheet (Figure 2). For additional information, see Eject Clamp/Offset Motor. (Figure 2.)
1/05 10-172
Figure 2 Set Offest Mechanism Eject/Offset Paper Path Components 1. 2. Pinch Roll Assembly Shifts alternate paper sets back and forth so they are offset as they stack in the Stacker. Pinch Roll Assembly 1/05 10-173 Principles of Operation Helps drive paper out of the Compiler Tray and into the Stacker.
Stacker Functional Description

Provides the mechanism for sensing paper in the Stacker Tray. 1. 2. Stacker Full Sensor Monitors the Stacker Tray and detects when the stacker is full. Stacker Full (Mixed Set) Sensor Monitors the Stacker Tray and detects when the stacker is full if mixed sets are being sent to it.
Mechanical Drive
Mechanical Drive is the term used to describe the various motors, solenoids, gears, and belts that are used to generate, control, and transmit drive to the various paper path components within the Finisher.
Stacker Functional Description, Mechanical Drive
1/05 10-174
Finisher Transport Motor

The Finisher Transport Motor is located in the Compiler section of the Finisher. The Finisher PWB sends power to the Transport Motor, which uses gears and pulleys to drive the Stapler Entry/Exit, and the paper Exit functions (Figure 1). +5 VDC voltages from the Finisher PWB are used to switch the Transport Motor on, and to control its speed. The Transport Motor is powered by +24 VDC.
Figure 1 Finisher Transport Assembly Finisher Transport Mechanical Drive Components 1. 2. 3. Finisher Transport Motor A +24 VDC stepper motor. Provides drive for the Transport. Transport Gears Transmits Motor drive to Pulley. Compiler Transport Drive Belt Transmits Finisher Transport Motor drive to the Eject Shaft, Exit Shaft, and the Paddle Shaft.
Eject Motor
The Finisher PWB switches the Eject Motor clockwise to Eject paper into the Stacker. The Finisher PWB switches the Eject Motor counter clockwise to drive the paper back into the Compiler Tray. The Eject Motor Drive Belt transmits drive from the Motor to Eject Gear B. Gear B drives Eject Shaft 2. Eject Shaft 1 is driven by the Eject Paddle Motor, while the Eject Rolls on Eject Shaft 1 are independently driven by gearing from Eject Shaft 2 (Figure 1, Figure 2).
1/05 10-175
Finisher Transport Motor, Eject Motor
Figure 1 Eject Motor and Its Associated Components
Eject Motor
1/05 10-176
Figure 2 Eject Paddle Motor and Its Associated Components
1/05 10-177
Eject Motor
End Wall Motor
The End Wall Motor raises and lowers the Compiler Tray End Wall (Figure 1). When paper is sent to the Compiler Bin, the Finisher PWB switches on the End Wall Motor. The End Wall Motor raises the End Wall of the Compiler Tray. When a set of paper is collected in the Compiler Bin and the set is ready to be sent to the Stapler, the End Wall Motor lowers the End Wall to allow the paper set to move to the Stapler.
Figure 1 Compiler End Wall and Its Associated Components End Wall Mechanical Drive Components 1. 2. End Wall Motor A +24 VDC stepper motor. Raises and lowers the End Wall. End Wall Raised to close off the end of the Compiler Tray. Lowered to open the end of the Compiler Tray and allow the paper set to move to the Stapler.
End Wall Motor
1/05 10-178
Tamper Motor
The Finisher PWB switches on the Tamper Motor when a paper set in the Compiler Tray is ready to be sent to the Stapler. The Tamper is attached to the Tamper Drive Belt (Figure 1). When the Tamper Motor is switched on, it pulses, which in turn taps the Tamper against the side of the paper set. The Tamper Home Sensor monitors the position of the Tamper.
Figure 1 Compiler Tamper and Its Associated Components Tamper Mechanical Drive Components 1. 2. 3. Tamper Motor A +24 VDC stepper motor. Drives the Tamper Drive Belt. Tamper Drive Belt Drives the Tamper. Tamper Attached to the Drive Belt. The side of the Tamper taps the edge of each sheet of paper to align the set before stapling. 4. Tamper Home Sensor Monitors the position of the Tamper when it is not activated.
1/05 10-179
Tamper Motor
Eject Paddle Motor

The Finisher PWB switches on the Eject Paddle Motor (Figure 1). The Eject Paddle Drive Belt transmits drive to the Paddle Shaft Assembly. Paddles on the Assembly drive a stapled set of paper into the Finisher Tray. The Eject Paddle Home Sensor monitors the home position of the Paddle Shaft Assembly (Figure 2).
Figure 1 Eject Paddle Motor and Its Associated Components Eject Paddle Mechanical Drive Components 1. 2. 3. Eject Paddle Motor A +24 VDC motor. Provides drive for the Paddle Shaft Assembly. Eject Paddle Motor Drive Belt Transmits Set Clamp Motor drive to the Paddle Shaft Assembly. Eject Paddle Home Position Monitors the home position of the Paddle Assembly.
Eject Paddle Motor
1/05 10-180
Figure 2 Eject Paddle Motor and Its Associated Components
1/05 10-181
Eject Paddle Motor
Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
The Eject Clamp/Offset Motor drives the Offset Cam. As the Cam rotates, the high and low points of the Cam drive the Eject Clamp Rolls back and forth across the paper path. The Eject Clamp/Offset Motor also drives the Eject Clamp Cam. As the Cam rotates, the high and low points of the Cam drive the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls up and down (Figure 1).
Figure 1 Eject/Offest Mechanical Details 1
Eject Clamp/Offset Motor
1/05 10-182
Offset Mechanical Drive Components 1. 2. Eject Clamp/Offset Motor A +24 VDC motor. Provides drive for both the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls and the Eject Rolls. Offset Cam Driven by the Eject Clamp Offset Motor. As the cam rotates, the high and low points slide the Offset Rolls across the paper path.
3.
Eject Clamp Cam Driven by the Eject Clamp Offset Motor. As the cam rotates, the high and low points move the Eject Clamp Pinch Rolls up and down.
4.
Eject Clamp Sensor Monitors the position of the Eject Clamp Cam. (See Figure 2.)
Figure 2 Eject/Offset Mechanical Details 2
Stacker Tray Motor and Sensors

The Stacker Tray has a separate Motor that raises or lowers the Tray to accommodate the amount of paper sent to it. The Stacker Tray is moved by Stacker Tray Drive Belts that are driven by the Stacker Motor. As the Belts rotate, the Tray raises or lowers depending on the direction of Belt rotation. Sensors monitor the presence of paper and the position of the Tray. (See Figure 1.)
1/05 10-183
Eject Clamp/Offset Motor, Stacker Tray Motor and
Figure 1 Stacker Tray Details Stacker Tray Mechanical Drive Components 1. 2. Stacker Motor: A +24 VDC stepper motor. Provides forward and reverse drive for the Eject Roll. Pulleys, Belt, Worm Wheel, and Shaft: Transmits Motor drive to the Stacker Tray Drive Belts. The Shaft drives the belts and pulleys on the opposite side of the Stacker from the motor. Stacker Tray Drive Belts: Raise and lower the Stacker Tray. 4. 5. Stacker Tray Sensors 1. 2. 3. Stacker Upper Limit Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker Tray has reached the highest point that it can safely travel. Stacker Full (Mixed Size) Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker tray has received all the sets of mixed sizes that it can hold. Stacker Full Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker tray has received all the sets of uniform size that it can hold. Stacker Lower Limit Sensor: Monitors when the Stacker Tray has reached the lowest point that it can safely travel. Stacker Paper Sensor: Monitors the presence of paper on the Stacker Tray.
3.
1/05 10-184
1/05 10-185
1/05 10-186
Overview
The Splash Integrated Digital Front End (IDFE) is a color server option that provides an integrated link between the DC CS50 (IOT) and the Local Area Network (LAN) of the customer. The server transforms the DC CS50 into a network-based printer and scanner, capable of working with a variety of high-end graphics and color printing applications. The IDFE uses a process called Raster Image Processing (RIP) to translate PostScript print files into raster images specifically formatted for the DC CS50. The IDFE then sends images to the IOT for printing. Customers can generate and submit jobs to the IDFE for printing. The IDFE supports print drivers for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Mac OS v7.x and the MAC OS v8.x operating systems. In addition, a web browser such as Netscape Communicator or Microsoft Internet Explorer allows customers to access the IDFE Web client. NOTE: The job files are PostScript ready files only. The web client allows customers to submit jobs to the IDFE for printing, to view the current status of the IDFE, to view the current status of the DC CS50, to set-up scanning jobs, to perform job and device management, and to perform color calibration. The web client also allows the system administrator to configure the IDFE network settings.
Electrical and Mechanical Operation of the IDFE

This section describes the electrical distribution and mechanical operation of the IDFE. For more information describing AC and DC Power distribution to the DC CS50, refer to Stand-By Power, Chapter 1 in the Principles of Operation for the DocuColor 12.
1/05 10-187
Overview, Electrical and Mechanical Operation of
Power Distribution - Solid State Relay

The AC Driver PWB supplies +5 VDC to the Coil of the Main Switch (BSD 1.1). When the Main Switch is pressed, the Coil for the Switch is energized, providing +5 VDC to Connector J83 Pin 1 of the Printer Solid State Relay (SSR) (BSD 16.1). To complete the DC circuit, Connector J84 Pin 1 provides the return path to ground from the SSR to the AC Driver PWBA at Connector J20 Pin 2. From Connector J2 (BSD 16.1), the AC Driver PWBA (PL 9.3) provides 120 VAC @ 16 amperes (220/240 VAC @ 10 Amperes) to Connector J81 Pin 1 of the Printer SSR (PL9.3). When this DC circuit is energized, the SSR will switch on, allowing high voltage AC from the AC Driver PWBA to pass through the Printer SSR to Connector J82 Pin 1 and onto Connector J4 Pin 4 of the Printer Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS).
NOTE: When an operator removes power from the IOT by switching off the main switch, an RC network located on the AC Driver PWBA delays release of the Coil for the Main Switch for 18-22 seconds. This delay is used to allow the IDFE Hard Disk Drive to safely shut down (Figure 1).
Power Distribution - Printer Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)

When energized, the Printer SSR provides 120 VAC @ 16 Amperes (220/240 VAC @ 10 Amperes) to the Printer LVPS at Connector J4 Pin 4 (BSD 16.1). The Printer LVPS converts this AC power into a regulated +5.1 VDC @ 11 Amperes Power Supply, and a regulated +12 VDC @ 1.6 Amperes Power Supply within the LVPS (BSD 16.1).
Figure 1 IDFE Power Interface Block Diagram NOTE: There is a ground wire attached to the Chassis Frame at P/J 899 Pin 12. This is not shown on BSD 16.1. NOTE: The Printer and IOT LVPS are separate. The Printer LVPS is located behind the AC Driver PWBA. The return path to Frame Ground for the Printer LVPS is provided through Connector J4 Pin 1 (BSD 16.1).
Power Distribution - IDFE

The IDFE (PL 19.1) is an enclosed color server mounted on the back of the DocuColor 12, which converts the IOT into a network printer. The IDFE uses +5 VDC power, supplied from the Printer LVPS to power the following parts inside the IDFE (PL 19.1): IDFE Motherboard Diagnostic LEDs CD-ROM Drive Token Ring PWBA Hard Disk Drive
The DC returns for the IDFE Motherboard, CD-ROM Drive, Token Ring PWBA and the Hard Disk Drive are provided through the Connector P/J 899 Pins 5, 6, 7,and 8 (BSD 16.1) to Connector J508 Pins 3 and 4 on the Printer LVPS.
Power Distribution - Solid State Relay, Power Distri-
1/05 10-188
The IDFE also uses +12 VDC power, supplied from the Printer LVPS to transfer power to the IDFE Wiring Harness at P/J 899 Pin 9. This +12 VDC circuit is used to provide additional power to the CD-ROM Drive, the Fan and the AUI Transceiver for the IDFE. The DC return for the CDROM Drive, the Hard Disk Drive, the Fan and the AUI TRansceiver is provided by Connector P/ J 899 Pin 11 through Connector J509 Pin 4 (BSD 16.1).
Digital Signal Distribution from the IDFE to the IOT

Two 80 pin cables provide Digital to Digital Interface (DDI) connections at Connector DPJ2 for the Printer and Connector DSJ2 for the Scanner. These two cables provide the DDI link between the VSEL EXT PWBA on the DC CS50 and the IDFE Interface Card contained within the IDFE. (BSD 16.1) The Print and Scan DDI Cables for the IOT and the IDFE are identical. The Print and Scan DDI Cables must not be crossed. CAUTION To assure that the Print and Scan Cables are installed correctly and are not crossed in manufacturing or service repair, a pair of ICONS (Paper > Scanner, Printer > Paper) will be printed onto the IOT and IDFE covers.
1/05 10-189
Power Distribution - IDFE, Digital Signal Distribu-
IDFE Enclosure
The IDFE Enclosure is formed from a single piece of 22 gauge galvanized steel to provide EMI and EME suppression for the noise sensitive components in the IDFE and the IOT. A Cover Plate is added for the CD-ROM Drive to help suppress additional EME emissions from the CDROM Drive. The IDFE uses an internal Fan to provide air flow through the IDFE in a right to left direction. The Internal Fan is powered by +12 VDC from the Printer LVPS. The fully assembled IDFE weighs 13.5 lbs. (6.1 kg).
Network Interface
The IDFE can interface with local area networks by use of several different protocols: TCP/IP Netware IPX (NDS and Bindery only) AppleTalk LPD network protocol stack Banyan VINES (requires additional hardware through an external print server using a parallel port or controller) NetBEUI Netbios
The IDFE supports the following physical interfaces: Parallel printer interface (For external print server to support Banyan VINES) Ethernet (10 or 100 Mbps) Token Ring (4 or 16 Mbps) NOTE: Installation of the Token Ring PWBA requires optional hardware.
IDFE Enclosure, Network Interface
1/05 10-190
Image Processing
Refer to Chapter 6 - Imaging, in the Principles of Operation for the DocuColor 12 and BSD 16.1 for more information on how the following PWBAs perform signal flow and Image Processing: Half Tone PWBA Post IPS PWBA VSEL Base PWBA VSEL Extension PWBA
Print Interface
Figure 1 IDFE Print Interface Block Diagram The print interface between the DC CS50 and the IDFE is shown in Figure 1. The signals are as follows: VIDEO DATA ODD and VIDEO DATA EVEN - Each is a set of eight parallel lines which provide the print data to the IOT. TAG ODD and TAG EVEN - Each is a set of four parallel lines which provides auxiliary data for images sent using YMCK color space. nPAGE REQ - The IDFE must provide an entire print page of data to the IOT during the active (negative) period of this signal. nLINE REQ - The IDFE must provide a pair of data lines during the active (negative) period of this signal. VCLK - The IOT uses this signal to sample the video data and tag information. nVALID - This indicates that the data on the video data and tag lines is valid and may be sampled.
The odd and even data and tag buses are used simultaneously to pass 600 dpi images. Either the even or odd busses can be used individually to pass a 400 dpi image.
1/05 10-191
Image Processing, Print Interface
Scan Interface
Figure 1 IDFE Scan Interface Block Diagram The scan interface is very similar to the print interface, except that image data flows in the opposite direction. The interface is shown in Figure 1. The signals are: SVDATA ODD and SVDATA EVEN - Each is a set of eight parallel lines which provide the scan data from the IOT. STAG ODD and STAG EVEN - Each is a set of four parallel lines which provides auxiliary data for images sent using YMCK color space. nSEPAGE REQ - The IOT must provide an entire print page of data to the IOT during the active (negative) period of this signal. nSLINE REQ - The IOT must provide a pair of data lines during the active (negative) period of this signal. SVCLK - The controller uses this signal to sample the video data and tag information. nSVALID - This indicates that the data on the video data and tag lines is valid and may be sampled.
As with the print interface, the odd and even data and tag buses are used simultaneously to pass 600 dpi images. In addition, either the even or odd buses can be used individually to pass a 400 dpi image.
Scan Interface
1/05 10-192
11 Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms and Contractions............................................................................... 11-3
1/05 11-1
Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms
1/05 11-2
Glossary of Terms and Contractions

Purpose
This section provides a list of acronyms and new words used in conjunction with this machine. Table 1 contains the terms and acronyms that are used throughout the Service Documentation. Table 1 Glossary of Terms Term A/E or AE A3 A4 A4 Cover A5 ACH AC ACL ACN ADC AGC AOC APS ASCII ASIC ATS Auditron B4 B5 BBS BCO BCR BIOS Bit BSD BTR BUS C CB CCD CCITT Description Auto Exposure Paper size 11.69 x 16.54 inches (297 x 420mm) Paper size 8.27 x 11.69 inches (210 x 297mm) Paper size 8.78 x 11.69 inches (223 x 297mm) Paper size 5.8 x 8.27 inches (148 x 210mm) AC High Alternating Current AC Line AC Neutral Auto Density Control Automatic Gain Control Automatic Offset Control Auto Paper Sensor (American Standard Code for Informational Interchange) A 7-bit code providing 128 possible character combinations. (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) A chip that is designed for a specific purpose within a highly vertical application. Auto Tray Selection Electronic counters for tracking customer usage of the machine. Paper size 10.12 x 14.33 inches (247 x 364mm) Paper size 7.17 x 10.12 inches (182 x 257mm) Bulletin Board System, Electronic Bulletins can be downloaded to the PWS via this system. Bead Carryout Bias Charge Roll Basic Input/Output System Binary digit (1 or 0), representing an electrical state. Block Schematic Diagram Bias Transfer Roll An electrical connection that allows data flow in two directions at the same time. Cyan Chute Bias Charge Coupled Device International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee CRUM-COD-ID CSDNO CSE CSI CTC CVT CW DAD DADF DATAMAN DC dC DC COM DFE DMM Dog Ear DOS DPI DPM DRAM DSS DTS ECM EDOC EEPROMS CRU CRUM Term CCW CD CDIC CD-ROM CGROM CMP CPM CPU CQ
Table 1 Glossary of Terms Description Counterclockwise (left-hand rotation) Circuit Diagram Compression Decompression Interface Controller Compact Disc Read only Memory Character Generator Read Only Memory Call Maintenance Practices Copies per Minute Central Processing Unit Copy Quality, refers to characteristics that are xerographic and\or cosmetic related Customer Replaceable Unit Customer Replaceable Unit Monitor, individual CRU usage monitor (internal to each CRU) Crum Code Identification Circuit Switched Digital Network Customer Service Engineer Called Subscriber Identification Continue to Correct Constant Velocity Transport Clockwise (right-hand rotation) Discharge Area Development Duplex Automatic Document Feeder Data Management Application Direct Current Diagnostic Routine Direct Current, Common Digital Front End Digital Multi-meter A condition when the corner or corners of the paper are curled or folded Disk Operating System) A generic term for operating system. Dots Per Inch Duplex Copies per Minute Dynamic Random Access Memory Disk Stacker Stapler Detack Saw Error Correction Mode Electronic Documentation (Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) A memory chip that holds its content without power.
1/05 11-3
Glossary of Terms
Table 1 Glossary of Terms Term ELOG EME EPC EPROM EQM ES ESD Description Electronic Service-Log, an electronic tool used to track machine service history. Electromagnetic Emissions Electronic Page Collation Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. A ROM that can be erased and then programmed again with new software. Eye Quality Monitor Expert System Electrostatic Discharge. A transfer of charge between bodies at different electrostatic potential. Could be damaging to sensitive devices. Electro Static Voltage Paper size 7.25 x 10.5 inches (184 x 267mm) Facsimile Product, the conversion of paper media to electronic impulses that are transmitted over the phone lines and then recompiled at the receive end Federal Communications Commission Fault Isolation Procedure Field Replaceable Unit Fuji Xerox Prints Per Minute Group 4 Module Ground Fault Interrupter Ground Grams per Square Meter High High Capacity Feeder Hard Disk Drive Hard Disk Interface High Frequency Service Items (parts in a machine that have an anticipated known life) High Voltage Power Supply Hertz, cycles per second Interface Inputs and Outputs Inboard; the side of the paper path closer to the rear of the machine; toward the inside of the machine. Intermediate Belt Transfer Integrated Digital Front End Image Enhancement Integrated Input Terminal, or Image Input Terminal Integrated Input Terminal/Image Processing System MPSX MR MRC M MB Mbps MBX MBX P(s) MMB PWBA ID MMR MN Moire Term IOT IPS IQ IQ defects ISDN ISDN1 ISDN-CSDN1 ISDNO IVCM K KO L LAN Laser SOS LCD LD LDD LE LED Ledger LEF Legal Letter Letter Cover LP LVPS M/C
Table 1 Glossary of Terms Description Image Output Terminal Image Processing System Image Quality Image Quality defects (see CQ) Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Channel 1 Circuit Switched Digital Network ISDN Channel 0 Integrated Video and Control Module Black Key Operator Low Local Area Network Laser Start of Scan Liquid Crystal Display Laser Diode Driver Laser Diode Driver Lead Edge Light Emitting Diode Paper size 11 x 17 inches (297 x 420mm) Long Edge Feed; Portrait orientation Paper size 8.5 x 14 inches (216 x 356mm) Paper size 8.5 x 11 inches (216 x 279mm) Paper size 9 x 11 inches (229 x 279mm) Laser Printer Low Voltage Power Supply Machine Clock or Mean Copies or Machine (Depending on context) Magenta Megabyte Mega bits per second Mailbox Mailbox Passwords Main Mailbox Modified Read Multi-National Patterns on the image areas of the output copy or print that have the appearance of a screen or grid overlaying the image. MPS Xerox Signal Modified Read Machine Run Control Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
ESV Executive FAX
FCC FIP FRU FX PPM G4M GFI GND GSM H HCF HDD HDIF HFSI HVPS HZ I/F I/O IB IBT IDFE IE IIT IIT/IPS Glossary of Terms
1/05 11-4
Table 1 Glossary of Terms Term MRD Description Machine Resident Diskette, 3.5-inch floppy diskette stored on the bottom rear cover of the machine. Used to store NVM (backup) and ELOG files. milliseconds Multi-Sheet Inserter North American Solutions Group Non-Standard Facilities Non-Volatile Memory. Random Access Memory device (RAM) Outboard; the side of the paper path closer to the front of the machine; toward the outside of the machine. Offset Catch Tray a unit of measurement of electrical resistance Organic Photo Conductor Personal Computer Printer Control Language Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Picture data (pixel) Parts List Preventive Maintenance Call Power Off/Power On the machine. Power On Self Test Pixels per Inch Prints per Minute Pages per Minute Programmable Read Only Memory PostScript Public Switched Telephone Network Printed Wiring Board Assembly Portable Workstation Random Access Density Control Reduction/Enlargement Random Access Memory. A digital memory circuit from which information can be accessed or where software information can be stored. Repair Analysis Procedure Right Hand Reduction, Enlargement Registration Red Green Blue Read Only Memory. A digital memory circuit that is designed to contain permanent software information. Raster Output Scanner (name given to a laser unit) 1/05 11-5 Term RTC RTN RTP RX SA SCSI SEF SIMM Skew SOS SPI SR SSR SW T/A TAG TMB TP TRC TRC RADC TRN TTL TTM UART UI USCO VAC VCE VDC Xero VRAM XE XVDC XPC ASIC Y
Table 1 Glossary of Terms Description Return to Control Retrain Negative Retrain Positive Rank Xerox (obsolete term, see XL) System Administrator Small Computer Systems Interface Short Edge Feed; Landscape orientation Single Inline Memory Module Angular error between the xerographic image and the copy paper, measured at the lead edge. Start of Scan Spots per Inch Service Representative Solid State Relay Switch or Software Takeaway Hardware upgrade information Tower Mailbox Test Point Toner Reference Control Toner Reference Control Random Access Density Control Train Transistor Logic: A digital circuit with transistor input and transistor output. Tray Turn Module Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter User interface United States Customer Operations Voltage Alternating Current Video Compression and Expansion Voltage Direct Current Xerographics Volatile Random Access Memory Xerox Europe (formerly RX, or Rank Xerox) Generic Voltage DC X direction pixel count application specific integrated circuit Yellow
msec. MSI NASG NSF NVM OB OCT Ohms OPC PC PCL5 PCMCIA PIX PL PMC PO/PO POST PPI PPM PPM PROM PS PSTN PWB(A) PWS RADC R/E RAM
RAP R/H RE Regi. RGB ROM ROS Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50
Glossary of Terms

Docucolor 12/Dccs50 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Docucolor 12/Dccs50 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DocuColor 12/DCCS50 Service Manual

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Photoreceptor Drum Light Shock

Electrostatic Discharge Damage

Toner, Developer and Drum

Disconnecting and Reconnecting Electrical Connectors.

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

About This Documentation

Section 1. Service Call Procedures

Section 2. Status Indicator Repair Analysis Procedures (RAPs)

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Section 3. Image Quality Repair Analysis Procedures (IQ RAPs)

Section 4. Repairs and Adjustments

Section 5. Parts List

Section 6. General Procedures

Section 7. Wiring Data

Section 8. Accessories / Options

Section 9. Installation and Removal

Section 10. Principles of Operations

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Figure 1 General Information

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Figure 2 General Information

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Figure 3 General Information

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

AC and DC Voltage Nomenclature

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Publication Information WARNING

3 Image Quality RAPs

4 Repairs and Adjustments

REP 2.6.1 Feed Lift Motor

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

REP 3.3.1 Carriage Cables

5. XEROGRAPHICS REP 5.1.1 Erase Lamp

REP 6.1.4 Bias Brush

REP 8.3.4 Pressure Roll Heater Rod

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.

REP 11.1.1 Platen Cushion

REP 12.4.3 Feed Roll

REP 12.9.1 Exit Motor

Turn power off and disconnect the power plug.

ADJ 6.6.1 ROTARY DEVELOPMENT HOUSING POSITION

ADJ 12.3.3 DADF HEIGHT

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

dbrancher le cordon d'alimentation. REP 2.8.41 HCF Feed Clutch

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

REP 15.2.2 Stacker Tray Assembly

the machine power and disconnect the machine Power Cord.

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

REP 15.3.3 Stapler Cover Assembly

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

1 Service Call Procedures

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Service Call Procedures

Service Call Procedures

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Service Call Procedures

Reissue DocuColor 12/DCCS50

Service Call Procedures